Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
+NRXIXHN=NODIJUN
!
>N0
1$7,21$/%8,/',1*&2'(
2),1',$
92/80(!
HNXGL)NL]Q
N=G
+NNMUKHNXG&ZMNV
1,
1Ê"Ê Ê-/ ,-
Hkkjr dh jk"Vªh;
Hkou fuekZ.k lafgrk 2016
[k.M 1
PRICE `
Volume 2
IMPORTANT EXPLANATORY NOTE FOR USERS OF THE C ODE ... (iv)
INFORMATION FOR THE USERS ABOUT AVAILABILITY OF THE CODE IN GROUPS ... (v)
Total Pages
PART 7 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT, PRACTICES AND SAFETY ... 76
PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES
Section 1 Lighting and Natural Ventilation ... 56
Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations ... 172
Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation ... 86
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control ... 46
Section 5 Installation of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
5A Lifts ... 96
5B Escalators and Moving Walks ... 44
Section 6 Information and Communication Enabled Installations ... 28
PART 9 P LUMBING SERVICES (I NCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT)
Section 1 Water Supply ... 44
Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation ... 82
Section 3 Solid Waste Management ... 16
Section 4 Gas Supply ... 18
PART 10 L ANDSCAPE DEVELOPMENT , SIGNS AND O UTDOOR D ISPLAY S TRUCTURES
Section 1 Landscape Planning, Design and Development ... 34
Section 2 Signs and Outdoor Display Structures ... 24
PART 11 APPROACH TO SUSTAINABILITY ... 98
PART 12 ASSET AND FACILITY MANAGEMENT ... 98
(iii)
FOREWORD
Construction programmes are interwoven in a large measure in all sectors of development, be it housing, transport,
industry, irrigation, power, agriculture, education or health. Construction, both public and private, accounts for
about fifty percent of the total outlay of the planned expenditure in the country. Half of the total money spent on
construction activities is spent on buildings for residential, industrial, commercial, administrative, educational,
medical, municipal and entertainment uses. It is estimated that about half of the total outlay on buildings is on
housing. It is imperative that for such a large national investment, optimum returns are assured and wastage in
construction is avoided.
Soon after the Third Five Year Plan, the Planning Commission decided that the whole gamut of operations involved
in construction, such as administrative, organizational, financial and technical aspects, be studied in depth. For
this study, a Panel of Experts was appointed in 1965 by the Planning Commission and its recommendations are
found in the Report on Economies in Construction Costs, published in 1968.
One of the facets of building construction, namely, controlling and regulating buildings through municipal byelaws
and departmental handbooks, received the attention of the Panel and a study of these regulatory practices revealed
that some of the prevailing methods of construction were outmoded; some designs were overburdened with safety
factors and there were other design criteria which, in the light of newer techniques and methodologies, could be
rationalized; and building byelaws and regulations of municipal bodies which largely regulate the building activity
in the country, wherever they exist, were outdated. They did not cater to the use of new building materials and the
latest developments in building designs and construction techniques. It also became clear that these codes and
byelaws lacked uniformity and they were more often than not specification oriented and not performance oriented.
These studies resulted in a recommendation that a National Building Code be prepared to unify the building
regulations throughout the country for use by government departments, municipal bodies and other construction
agencies. The then Indian Standards Institution (now Bureau of Indian Standards) was entrusted by the Planning
Commission with the preparation of the National Building Code. For fulfilling this task, a Guiding Committee for
the preparation of the Code was set up by the Civil Engineering Division Council of the Indian Standards Institution
in 1967. This Committee, in turn, set up 18 specialist panels to prepare the various parts of the Code. The Guiding
Committee and its panels were constituted with architects, planners, materials experts, structural, construction,
electrical, illumination, air conditioning, acoustics and public health engineers and town planners. These experts
were drawn from the Central and State Governments, local bodies, professional institutions and private agencies.
The first version of the Code was published in 1970.
After the National Building Code of India was published in 1970, a vigorous implementation drive was launched
by the Indian Standards Institution to propagate the contents and use of the Code among all concerned in the field
of planning, designing and construction activities. For this, state-wise implementation conferences were organized
with the participation of leading engineers, architects, town planners, administrators, building material
manufacturers, building and plumbing services installation agencies, contractors, etc.
These conferences were useful in getting across the contents of the Code to the interests concerned. These
conferences had also helped in the establishment of Action Committees to look into the actual implementation
work carried out by the construction departments, local bodies and other agencies in different states. The main
actions taken by the Action Committees were to revise and modernize their existing regulatory media, such as
specifications, handbooks, manuals, etc, as well as building byelaws of local bodies like municipalities at city and
town levels, Zilla Parishads, Panchayats and development authorities, so as to bring them in line with the provisions
contained in the National Building Code of India. In this process, the Indian Standards Institution rendered
considerable support in redrafting process.
The National Building Code of India is a single document in which, like a network, the information contained in
various Indian Standards is woven into a pattern of continuity and cogency with the interdependent requirements
of Parts/Sections carefully analyzed and fitted in to make the whole document a cogent continuous volume. A
continuous thread of preplanning is woven which, in itself, contributes considerably to the economies in
construction particularly in building and plumbing services.
(v)
The Code contains regulations which can be immediately adopted or enacted for use by various departments,
municipal administrations and public bodies. It lays down a set of minimum provisions designed to protect the
safety of the public with regard to structural sufficiency, fire hazards and health aspects of buildings; so long as
these basic requirements are met, the choice of materials and methods of design and construction are left to the
ingenuity of the building professionals. The Code also covers aspects of administrative provisions, development
control rules and general building requirements; fire safety requirements; stipulations regarding materials and
structural design; rules for design of electrical installations, lighting, air conditioning and heating, installation of
lifts; provisions for ventilation, acoustics and plumbing services, such as water supply, drainage, sanitation and
gas supply; measures to ensure safety of workers and public during construction; and rules for erection of signs
and outdoor display structures. The Code today also covers provisions relating to structural use of glass; escalators
and moving walks; information and communications enabled installations; solid waste management; landscape
planning and design; and asset and facility management.
Some other important points covered by the Code include industrialized systems of building and architectural
control. The increase in population in the years to come will have a serious impact on the housing problem. It has
been estimated that the urban population of India will continue to increase with such pace as to maintain the
pressure on demand of accommodation for them. Speed of construction is thus of utmost importance and special
consideration has to be given to industrialized systems of building. With increased building activity, it is also
essential that there should be some architectural control in the development of our cities and towns, if creation of
ugliness and slum-like conditions in our urban areas is to be avoided.
Over a period of time, the importance of providing an environment which is conducive to younger and elder
persons and the persons with disabilities, alike, has been well highlighted. The Code covers provisions on
accessibility to facilitate implementation of this important aspect in all public buildings. Similarly, all building
construction and built environment should take into consideration the aspects of sustainable development, which
have since been duly provided in a separate chapter in the Code which should be read along with other chapters.
The objective is that the building activity should be in complete harmony with the environment be it planning,
design, construction or operation and maintenance. With the passage of time, more and more complex buildings
including very tall buildings are being built requiring inputs and involvement of professionals from different
disciplines, who should work together in harmony following an integrated multi-disciplinary approach since covered
in the Code.
Above comprehensive coverage under the Code is the result of its implementation and review from time to time.
Since the publication of 1970 version of the National Building Code of India, a large number of comments and
useful suggestions for modifications and additions to different parts and sections of the Code were received as a
result of use of the Code by all concerned, and revision work of building byelaws of some States. Based on the
comments and suggestions received, the National Building Code of India 1970 was first revised in 1983 and then
in 2005.
Some of the important changes in 1983 version included: addition of development control rules, requirements for
greenbelts and landscaping including norms for plantation of shrubs and trees, special requirements for low
income housing; fire safety regulations for high rise buildings; revision of structural design sections based on new
and revised codes, such as Concrete Codes (plain and reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete), Earthquake
Code, Masonry Code; addition of outside design conditions for important cities in the country, requirements
relating to noise and vibration, air filter, automatic control, energy conservation for air conditioning; and guidance
on the design of water supply system for multi-storeyed buildings.
Since the publication of 1983 version of National Building Code of India, the construction industry had gone
through major technological advancement. In next two decades, substantial expertise had been gained in the areas
of building planning, designing and construction. Also, lot of developments had taken place in the techno-legal
regime and techno-financial regime, apart from the enormous experience gained in dealing with natural calamities
like super cyclones and earthquakes faced by the country. Further, since the revision in 1983, based on the changes
effected in the Steel Code, Masonry Code and Loading Code, as also in order to update the fire protection
requirements, three amendments were brought out to the 1983 version of the Code. Considering these, it was
decided to take up a comprehensive second revision of the National Building Code of India.
The major changes incorporated in the second revision of the Code in 2005 were: incorporation of a new Part 0
Integrated approachPrerequisite for applying provisions of the Code emphasizing on multi-disciplinary team
approach for successfully accomplishing building/development project; addition of new chapters on significant
(vi)
areas like structural design using bamboo, mixed/composite construction, and landscape planning and design;
incorporation/modification of number of provisions relating to reform in administrative aspects, also detailing
therein provisions to ensure structural sufficiency of buildings to facilitate implementation of the related
requirements to help safely face the challenges during natural disasters like earthquake; incorporation of planning
norms and requirements for hilly areas and rural habitat planning, apart from incorporation of detailed planning
norms for large number of amenities; categorization of fire safety aspects distinctly into fire prevention, life safety
and fire protection giving detailed treatment to each based on current information, developments and latest practices
followed in the country; assigning due importance to the aspects like energy conservation and sustainable
development in various parts and sections through appropriate design, usage and practices with regard to building
materials, construction technologies and building and plumbing services giving due consideration to renewable
resources like bamboo and practices like rain water harvesting; incorporation of the revised Earthquake Code,
IS 1893 (Part 1) : 2002 Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures: Part 1 General provisions and
buildings (fifth revision) for due implementation of the provisions thereof in applicable seismic zones of the
country, by the Authorities.
Two amendments were thereafter issued to the Code in 2015; first to include a new chapter relating to sustainability
namely, Part 11 Approach to Sustainability, and the second to modify/include certain provisions in Part 4 Fire
and Life Safety.
Due to large scale changes in the building construction activities, such as change in nature of occupancies with
prevalence of high rises and mixed occupancies, greater dependence and complicated nature of building services,
development of new/innovative construction materials and technologies, greater need for preservation of
environment and recognition of need for planned management of existing buildings and built environment, there
has been a paradigm shift in building construction scenario. A comprehensive revision has therefore been brought
out to address all these aspects and also reflect the changes incorporated in various standards which are considerably
utilized in the Code. The major changes incorporated in this third revision of the Code are as follows:
a) Provisions for association of need based professionals and agencies have been updated to ensure proper
discharge of responsibilities for accomplishment of building project.
b) With a view to ensuring ease of doing business in built environment sector, a detailed provision for
streamlining the approval process in respect of different agencies has been incorporated in the form of an
integrated approval process through single window approach for enabling expeditious approval process,
avoiding separate clearances from various authorities.
c) Further, with a view to meeting the above objective, the provision on computerization of approval process
has been detailed, enabling online submission of plans, drawings and other details, and sanction thereof,
aiding in speedier approval process.
d) The mechanism of ensuring certification of structural safety of buildings by the competent professional
and peer review of design of buildings, have been further strengthened.
e) Requirements for accessibility in buildings and built environment for persons with disabilities and the
elderly have been thoroughly revised and updated.
f) Provisions on fire and life safety have been thoroughly revised to meet the challenges of modern complex
building types including the high rises.
g) Latest structural loading and design and construction codes including those relating to wind load,
earthquake resistant design of buildings, steel design and foundations have been incorporated with a
view to ensuring structural safety of buildings including against a disaster.
h) Provisions relating to all building and plumbing services have been updated keeping also in view the
latest international practices as related to the country.
j) Provisions have been updated to ensure utilization of number of new/alternative building materials and
technologies to provide for innovation in the field of building construction.
k) Construction management guidelines have been incorporated to aid in timely completion of building
projects with desired quality in a safe manner within the budgeted cost.
m) Guidance has been provided for making buildings and built environment energy efficient and
environmentally compatible, through the newly introduced and updated chapter on sustainability, namely
Part 11 Approach to Sustainability.
n) New chapters have been added on structural use of glass; escalators and moving walks; information and
communication enabled installations; solid waste management; and asset and facility management. The
new Part on Approach to Sustainability has also been duly incorporated in the Code.
(vii)
The specific major changes incorporated in each Part/Section of the Code have been enlisted in the Foreword of
the respective Part/Section.
The Code now published is the third revision or fourth version representing the present state of knowledge on
various aspects of building construction. The process of preparation of the 2016 version of the Code has thrown
up a number of problems; some of them were answered fully and some partially. Therefore, a continuous programme
will go on by which additional knowledge that is gained through technological evolution, users views over a
period of time pinpointing areas of clarification and coverage, and results of research in the field, would be
incorporated in to the Code from time-to-time to make it a living document. It is, therefore, proposed to bring out
changes to the Code periodically.
The provisions of this Code are intended to serve as a model for adoption by local bodies, Public Works Departments
and other government construction departments, and other construction agencies. Existing PWD codes, municipal
byelaws and other regulatory media could either be replaced by the National Building Code of India or suitably
modified to cater to local requirements in accordance with the provisions of the Code. Any difficulties encountered
in adoption of the Code could be brought to the notice of the National Building Code Sectional Committee for
corrective action.
(viii)
COMMITTEE COMPOSITION
National Building Code Sectional Committee, CED 46
Chairman
DR H. C. VISVESVARAYA
Chandrika, at 15th Cross, 63-64 East Park Road,
Malleswaram, Bengaluru 560003
Vice-Chairman
SHRI V. SURESH
Isa Vasyam TC-18/1023, B-8/2-Lakshmi Nagar,
Kesavadasapuram, Thiruvananthapuram 695004
(ix)
Organization Representative(s)
Housing & Urban Development Corporation Limited, New Delhi CHAIRMAN AND MANAGING DIRECTOR
SHRIMATI USHA PRASAD MAHAVIR (Alternate)
Indian Association of Structural Engineers, New Delhi SHRI MAHESH TANDON
SHRI MAHENDRA RAJ (Alternate)
Indian Buildings Congress, New Delhi SHRI K. B. RAJORIA
SHRI DEEPAK NARAYAN (Alternate)
Indian Geotechnical Society, New Delhi PROF A. S REERAMA RAO
DR ABHAY GUPTA (Alternate)
Indian Green Building Council, Hyderabad SHRI S. SRINIVAS
SHRI PRAVEEN KUMAR SOMA (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Chennai DR BENNY RAPHAEL
DR AMLAN K. SENGUPTA (Alternate)
Indian Roads Congress, New Delhi SECRETARY GENERAL
DIRECTOR (Alternate)
Institute of Town Planners, India, New Delhi DR S. K. KULSHRESTHA
Institution of Fire Engineers (India), New Delhi SHRI U. S. CHHILLAR
SHRI M. S. PATYAL (Alternate)
Larsen & Toubro Limited, Chennai SHRI K. SENTHILNATHAN
SHRI STHALADIPTI SAHA (Alternate)
Madhya Pradesh Housing & Infrastructure Development Board, SHRI PRAKASH S ANGAMNERKAR
Bhopal
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chief’s Branch, BRIG GIRISH JOSHI
Army HQ, New Delhi LT COL GAURAV KAUSHIK (Alternate)
Ministry of Home Affairs (Directorate General of Fire Services, SHRI D. K. SHAMI
Civil Defence & Home Guards), New Delhi
Ministry of Home Affairs (Disaster Management Division), JOINT SECRETARY (DM)
New Delhi
Ministry of New and Renewable Energy, New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
Ministry of Urban Development, New Delhi JOINT SECRETARY (URBAN D EVELOPMENT)
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, Mumbai DIRECTOR
CITY ENGINEER (Alternate)
NBCC (India) Limited, New Delhi SHRI HEM RAJ
MS ANNU GARG (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI V. V. ARORA
SHRI SATISH SHARMA (Alternate)
National Design & Research Forum, The Institution of Engineers DIRECTOR
(India), Bengaluru
National Disaster Management Authority, New Delhi SHRI ANIL KUMAR S ANGHI
SHRI SACHIDANAND SINGH (Alternate)
National Institute of Disaster Management, New Delhi DR CHANDAN GHOSH
New Okhla Industrial Development Authority, Noida SHRI S. C. GAUR
SHRI A. K. GOEL (Alternate)
North Eastern Council, Shillong ADVISER (T&C)
Punjab Urban Planning & Development Authority, Mohali SHRI RAJIV MOUDGIL
SHRI SUNIL KANSAL (Alternate)
RITES Ltd, Gurugram SHRIMATI ANITA DHAR KAUL
SHRI RAJEEV NANDA (Alternate)
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi DIRECTOR
DR V. K. PAUL (Alternate)
Suri and Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers, Noida SHRI GAUTAM SURI
Sustainable Urbanism International, Bengaluru DR JYOTI HOSAGRAHAR
The Energy and Resources Institute, New Delhi SHRI PRADEEP KUMAR
MS SONIA RANI (Alternate)
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI BALBIR VERMA
SHRI ABHIJIT RAY (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI O. P. G OEL
SHRI K. B. RAJORIA (Alternate)
(!)
Organization Representative(s)
The Institution of Surveyors, New Delhi SHRI D. L. V OHRA
D R S. N. BANSAL (Alternate)
Town and Country Planning Organization, Ministry of Urban CHIEF P LANNER
Development, New Delhi SHRI R. SRINIVAS (Alternate)
Unitech Limited, Gurugram SHRI ANIL KUMAR CHOPRA
SHRI S ANJAY TYAGI (Alternate)
In personal capacity (D-29, Defence Colony, New Delhi 110024) DR J. R. BHALLA
BIS Directorate General SHRI B. K. SINHA, Scientist E and former Head (Civil Engg)
[Representing Director General (Ex-officio)]
Member Secretary
SHRI SANJAY P ANT
Scientist E and Head (Civil Engg), BIS
Joint Member Secretaries
SHRI S. ARUN KUMAR
Scientist D (Civil Engg), BIS
SHRIMATI MADHURIMA MADHAV
Scientist C (Civil Engg), BIS
(xi)
Organization Representative(s)
CSIR-Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee DIRECTOR
DR ACHAL KUMAR MITTAL (Alternate)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi SHRI D. P. SINGH
SHRI UMESH KUMAR (Alternate)
Engineering Council of India, New Delhi SHRI MAHESH TANDON
DR S. CHATTERJEE (Alternate)
Ghaziabad Development Authority, Ghaziabad CHIEF T OWN PLANNER
SHRI V. K. GOYAL (Alternate)
Housing & Urban Development Corporation Limited, New Delhi SHRI AKHILESH K UMAR
SHRI V. K. JOSHI (Alternate)
Indian Association of Structural Engineers, New Delhi SHRI MAHENDRA RAJ
SHRI MANOJ MITTAL (Alternate)
Institute of Town Planners, India, New Delhi DR S. K. KULSHRESTHA
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, Mumbai CHIEF ENGINEER (DEV PLAN )
DEPUTY CHIEF ENGINEER (DEV PLAN)-I (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI V. V. ARORA
SHRI SATISH SHARMA (Alternate)
National Real Estate Development Council, New Delhi BRIG R. R. SINGH
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi PROF M ANDEEP S INGH
PROF P. S. N. RAO (Alternate)
South Delhi Municipal Corporation, New Delhi SHRI SUDHIR MEHTA
SHRI BRAJESH KUMAR (Alternate)
Svayam, New Delhi SHRI SUBHASH CHANDRA VASHISHTH
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI BALBIR VERMA
SHRI ABHIJIT RAY (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI ASHOK KUMAR BASA
SHRI P. S URYA PRAKASH (Alternate)
Town and Country Planning Organization, Ministry of Urban SHRI K. K. J OADDER
Development, New Delhi SHRI R. SRINIVAS (Alternate)
West Bengal Housing Infrastructure Development Corporation CHIEF P LANNER
Limited, Kolkata ADDITIONAL CHIEF PLANNER (Alternate)
In personal capacity [Shop No. 15, Natraj Building, Shiv Srishti SHRI SHASHIKANT L. JADHAV
Complex, Mulund (W), Mumbai 400080]
(xii)
Organization Representative(s)
FM Engineering International (India) Pvt Ltd, Bengaluru SHRI SUMIT K HANNA
SHRI MANIKANDAN KRISHNAMURTHY (Alternate)
FYRPROTEK (Fire Engineers & Consultants), New Delhi SHRI GULSHAN K HURANA
Glazing Society of India, New Delhi SHRI R. SUBRAMANIAN
SHRI G. N. GOHUL DEEPAK (Alternate)
Indian Plumbing Association, New Delhi SHRI M. K. GUPTA
SHRI S. K. DUGGAL (Alternate)
Institution of Fire Engineers (India), New Delhi SHRI U. S. CHHILLAR
SHRI M. S. PATYAL (Alternate)
Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority, Hyderabad SHRI RANDIP SINGH JAGPAL
SHRI T. S. NAIK (Alternate)
Kaleidoscope, Noida SHRI AMOR KOOL
Kone Elevator India Pvt Ltd, Chennai SHRI J. SIVARAMAN
SHRI P. M. TIPNIS (Alternate)
Lloyd Insulations (India) Ltd, New Delhi SHRI SANJEEV A NGRA
SHRI K. K. MITRA (Alternate)
Maple Engineering-Design Services (India) Pvt Ltd, Bengaluru SHRI B. S. ASWATHNARAYAN (B. S. A. NARAYAN)
SHRI H. R. R ANGANATH (Alternate)
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, SHRI S. K. ARORA
Army HQ, New Delhi COL NARESH SHARMA (Alternate)
Ministry of Home Affairs (Directorate General of Fire Services, SHRI D. K. SHAMI
Civil Defence & Home Guards), New Delhi
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai (Mumbai Fire CHIEF FIRE OFFICER
Brigade), Mumbai DEPUTY CHIEF FIRE OFFICER (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI V. V. ARORA
National Fire Service College, Nagpur SHRI SHAMIM
Oil Industry Safety Directorate, New Delhi SHRI A. K. ARORA
Proion Consultants, New Delhi SHRI SANDEEP GOEL
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi DR V. K. PAUL
Tamil Nadu Fire and Rescue Services Department, Chennai SHRI S. VIJAYASEKAR
Telangana State Disaster Response and Fire Services Department, SHRI P. V ENKATESHWAR
Hyderabad SHRI K. JAIRAM NAIK (Alternate)
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI KAPIL MEHTA
SHRI AJAY PURI (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata DR M. P. CHOWDIAH
SHRI K. B. RAJORIA (Alternate)
UL India Pvt Ltd, Bengaluru SHRI V. JAGDISH
SHRI G. KARTHIKEYAN (Alternate)
Uttar Pradesh Fire Service, Lucknow SHRI P. K. RAO
SHRI AMAN SHARMA (Alternate)
West Bengal Fire & Emergency Services, Kolkata SHRI D. P. BISWAS
SHRI GOPAL K. BHATTACHARYA (Alternate)
In personal capacity (SJR Verity, VIVA-305, Amrita College SHRI T. R. A. KRISHNAN
Road, Kasavanahalli, Bengaluru 560035)
In personal capacity (A-347, Defence colony, New Delhi 110024) SHRI R. C. SHARMA
In personal capacity (Isa Vasyam TC-18/1023, B-8/2-Lakshmi SHRI V. SURESH
Nagar, Kesavadasapuram, Thiruvananthapuram 695004)
(xiii)
Organization Representative(s)
CSIR-Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee DR A. K. M INOCHA
D R S. R. KARADE (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi CHIEF ENGINEER (CSQ)
SHRI MATHURA P RASAD (Alternate)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
Directorate General Border Roads, New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
DLF Limited, Gurugram REPRESENTATIVE
Housing & Urban Development Corporation Limited, New Delhi CHAIRMAN AND MANAGING DIRECTOR
SHRI AKHILESH KUMAR (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology Guwahati, Guwahati REPRESENTATIVE
Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Chennai DR AMLAN K. SENGUPTA
DR MANU SANTHANAM (Alternate)
Indian Buildings Congress, New Delhi SHRI DEEPAK NARAYAN
Indian Plywood Industries Research & Training Institute, Bengaluru SHRI K. SHYAMA S UNDAR
SHRI M. P AVAN K UMAR (Alternate)
Inter-University Accelerator Centre, New Delhi SHRI M. K. G UPTA
Larsen & Toubro Limited, Chennai REPRESENTATIVE
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army BRIG GIRISH JOSHI
HQ, New Delhi LT COL GAURAV KAUSHIK (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh DIRECTOR GENERAL
SHRI V. V. ARORA (Alternate)
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI ANURAG ROY
SHRI ATUL GUPTA (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI ANIL GATTANI
SHRI A. V. PATIL (Alternate)
In personal capacity (220, Sector 21-A, Faridabad 121001) SHRI M. M. GOYAL
(xiv)
Organization Representative(s)
Mehro Consultants, New Delhi SHRI S. C. MEHROTRA
SHRI DEEPAK THAKUR (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI V. V. A RORA
SHRI B. S. RAO (Alternate)
National Institute of Disaster Management, New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI U. P. WAGHE
SHRI ANIL GATTANI (Alternate)
In personal capacity (L-802, Design Arch, e-Homes, Sector-5, DR A. S. ARYA
Vaishali, Ghaziabad 201010)
In personal capacity (B-03-3, Raheja Atlantis, NH 8, DR PREM KRISHNA
Sector 31-32A, Gurugram 122001)
In personal capacity (Isa Vasyam TC-18/1023, B-8/2-Lakshmi SHRI V. SURESH
Nagar, Kesavadasapuram, Thiruvananthapuram 695004)
(xv)
Organization Representative(s)
Bamboo Society of India, Bengaluru DR K SUNDAR NAIK
SHRI K. S. ANAND (Alternate)
Building Materials & Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi DR SHAILESH KUMAR AGRAWAL
SHRI C. N. JHA (Alternate)
CSIR-Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee DR B. SINGH
DR B. S. RAWAT (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi CHIEF E NGINEER (CSQ)
SHRI MATHURA PRASAD (Alternate)
Creative Design Consultants & Engineers Pvt Ltd, Ghaziabad SHRI AMAN D EEP
Forest Research Institute (ICFRE), Dehra Dun SHRI RAJESH B HANDARI
SHRI R. S. TOPWAL (Alternate)
Forum of Scientists, Engineers and Technologists, Kolkata SHRI RABI MUKHOPADHYAY
SHRI PARTHASARATHI MUKHOPADHYAY (Alternate)
Housing & Urban Development Corporation Limited, New Delhi CHAIRMAN AND M ANAGING DIRECTOR
SHRI A KHILESH K UMAR (Alternate)
Indian Association of Structural Engineers, New Delhi DR DULAL G OLDAR
SHRI HARI OM GUPTA (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi DR SURESH BHALLA
Indian Plywood Industries Research and Training Institute, SHRI ANAND NANDANWAR
Bengaluru SHRI NARASIMHAMURTHY (Alternate)
Iyer and Mahesh Architects, Thiruvanthapuram SHRI N. MAHESH
SHRI K. GANGADHARAN (Alternate)
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army SHRIMATI UPINDER KAUR
HQ, New Delhi SHRIMATI RACHNA (Alternate)
North East Centre for Technology Application and Reach, Shillong SHRI AJAY KUMAR
SHRI KRISHNA KUMAR (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI KRISHNA KUMAR
Wonder Grass Initiative Pvt Ltd, Nagpur SHRI VAIBHAV KALEY
In personal capacity (103/II, Vasant Vihar, P.O. New Forest, SHRI S. S. RAJPUT
Dehra Dun 248006)
(xvi)
Organization Representative(s)
Indian Institute of Technology Delhi, New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
Indian Institute of Technology Kanpur, Kanpur DR DURGESH C. RAI
Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Chennai DR ARUN MENON
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army BRIG R AJIV S AHANI
HQ, New Delhi SHRI JAI P RAKASH (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI SATISH SHARMA
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI P. T. T AWASE
SHRI AZAD J AIN (Alternate)
(xvii)
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (E-1, 402, White House Apartments, SHRI S. A. REDDI
15th Cross, 6th Main, R.T. Nagar, Bengaluru 560032)
In personal capacity (7046, Sector B, Pocket 10, Vasant Kunj, SHRI T. VISWANATHAN
New Delhi 110070)
In personal capacity (EA-92, Maya Enclave, Hari Nagar, SHRI R. C. WASON
New Delhi 110064)
(xviii)
Organization Representative(s)
Building Materials & Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi SHRI J. K. P RASAD
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi CHIEF ENGINEER (CSQ)
SHRI MATHURA PRASAD (Alternate)
Creative Design Consultants & Engineers Pvt Ltd, Ghaziabad SHRI AMAN D EEP
CSIR-Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee DR AJAY C HOURASIA
SHRI NARENDER KUMAR (Alternate)
CSIR-Structural Engineering Research Centre, Chennai DR J. PRABAKAR
DR JOLLY ANNIE PETER (Alternate)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi CHIEF E NGINEER (DESIGN)
SHRI VIJAY SHANKER (Alternate)
Hindustan Prefab Limited, New Delhi SHRI RAJESH GOEL
SHRI SATISH K UMAR JAIN (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Chennai REPRESENTATIVE
Indian Association of Structural Engineers, New Delhi SHRI MAHESH TANDON
SHRI N. JAIN (Alternate)
Indian Concrete Institute, Chennai SHRI RAJKUMAR PILLAI
Institute for Steel Development and Growth, Kolkata SHRI ARIJIT GUHA
Kirby Building Systems India Ltd, Hyderabad REPRESENTATIVE
Larsen & Toubro Limited, Chennai SHRI S. V EERAMANI
SHRI C. K. SOMARAJU (Alternate)
Lloyd Insulations (India) Ltd, New Delhi SHRI AJAY SINGH
SHRI JITENDRA KUMAR JAIN (Alternate)
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army BRIG GIRISH J OSHI
HQ, New Delhi LT COL GAURAV KAUSHIK (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI V. V. ARORA
SHRI B. S. RAO (Alternate)
PEB Manufacturers Association, Navi Mumbai SHRI GAUTAM SURI
Pranav Construction Systems Pvt Ltd, Navi Mumbai REPRESENTATIVE
Shirish Patel and Associates Consultants Pvt Ltd, Mumbai SHRI SHIRISH B. PATEL
SHRI P. H. SRINIVASACHAR (Alternate)
Systems Building Technologists, New Delhi SHRI G. B. SINGH
Tata Bluescope Steel Ltd, Pune SHRI KRISHNAKANT RANE
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI S. R. S IKKA
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata DR R. K. B HANDARI
SHRI HEMANT S. VADALKAR (Alternate)
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (102, Shraddha Temple Tree, Rustam Bagh, SHRI P. K RISHNAN (Convener)
Bengaluru 560017)
Adlakha Associates Pvt Ltd, Delhi SHRI P. K. ADLAKHA
Builders Association of India, Mumbai SHRI S. SENTHIL KUMAR
SHRI NEERAV PARMAR (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi CHIEF E NGINEER (CSQ)
SHRI MATHURA PRASAD (Alternate)
Construction Industries Development Council, New Delhi SHRI P. R. SWARUP
SHRI SUNIL MAHAJAN (Alternate)
CSIR-Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee SHRI S. K. NEGI
SHRI S. K. SINGH (Alternate)
Director General of Factory Advice Service and Labour Institute, SHRI S. N. B ORKAR
Mumbai SHRI B. N. JHA (Alternate)
Engineers India Ltd, New Delhi SHRI A. K. MISHRA
SHRI D. JANA (Alternate)
(xix)
Organization Representative(s)
(xx)
Organization Representative(s)
(xxi)
Organization Representative(s)
(xxii)
Organization Representative(s)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI PRADEEP CHATURVEDI
UL India Pvt Ltd, Bengaluru SHRI V. MANJUNATH
Voltas Limited, New Delhi SHRI ASHWANI SHARMA
SHRI PANKAJ GOEL (Alternate)
In personal capacity (C-9, 9511, Vasant Kunj, New Delhi 110070) DR R. S. AGARWAL
In personal capacity (262, Solanipuram, Roorkee 247667) DR P. K. BHARGAVA
In personal capacity (435/6, New Adarsh Nagar, Roorkee 247667) DR ISHWAR CHAND
In personal capacity, (E 203, Belaire, Golf Course Road, SHRI PRABHAT GOEL
Gurugram 122022)
Panel for Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control, CED 46:P15
Organization Representative(s)
Suri and Suri Consulting Acoustical Engineers, Noida SHRI GAUTAM SURI (Convener)
All India Radio, New Delhi SHRI ANIMESH CHAKRABORTY
SHRI JITENDER PRUTHI (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI RAJESH KUMAR DHIMAN
SHRI ARUN K UMAR TYAGI (Alternate)
CSIR-Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee DR S. K. PANIGRAHI
DR B. M. SUMAN (Alternate)
CSIR-National Physical Laboratory, New Delhi DR MAHAVIR S INGH
DR NAVEEN GARG (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Science, Bengaluru PROF M. L. MUNJAL
Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur, Kharagpur DR A. R. MOHANTY
Indian Institute of Technology Madras, Chennai PROF S. N ARAYANAN
PROF P. CHANDRAMOULI (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Technology Roorkee, Roorkee DR E. R AJASEKAR
Lloyd Insulations (India) Ltd, New Delhi SHRI N. SRINIVAS
SHRI UMESH KHANNA (Alternate)
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army SHRI A. K. ARORA
HQ, New Delhi SHRIMATI U PINDER KAUR (Alternate)
P. S. Subramanian Associates, Chennai DR S. K ANDASWAMY
DR P. SENTHIL KUMAR (Alternate)
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi DR SHUVOJIT S ARKAR
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI INDRA NATH BASU
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI K. V. CHAUBAL
SHRI P. K. ADLAKHA (Alternate)
In personal capacity (608/L-1, Solani Enclave, New Adarsh Nagar, SHRI R. K. SRIVASTAVA
Roorkee 247667)
(xxiii)
Organization Representative(s)
Directorate of Maharashtra Fire Services, Mumbai SHRI M. V. DESHMUKH
SHRI SANTOSH W ARICK (Alternate)
ECE Industries Limited, Ghaziabad SHRI M. BALASUBRAMANIAN
SHRI K. M OHAN (Alternate)
Fujitec India Pvt Ltd, Chennai SHRI S. P. RAO
SHRI R. RAJESH (Alternate)
Inspectorate of Lifts, Directorate of Electricity, Kolkata REPRESENTATIVE
Johnson Lifts Pvt Ltd, Chennai SHRI T. SUBRAMANIAN
SHRI V. KARTHIKEYAN (Alternate)
Kone Elevator India Pvt Ltd, Chennai SHRI P. M. TIPNIS
SHRI P. GURUMOORTHY (Alternate)
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army SHRI D. K. T YAGI
HQ, New Delhi SHRI SUNIL AGARWAL (Alternate)
Otis Elevator Company (India) Limited, New Delhi SHRI ABHIJIT DANDEKAR
SHRI H. N. PRASHANTH (Alternate)
Public Works Department, Govt of Maharashtra, Mumbai SHRI SANDEEP A. PATIL
SHRI SANJAY BHASME (Alternate)
Schindler India Pvt Limited, Mumbai SHRI NIMISH DESHPANDE
SHRI RONNIE DANTE (Alternate)
TAK Consulting Pvt Ltd, Mumbai MS ANANDI KHANDEKAR
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI J. B. KARAMCHANDANI
SHRI VIJAY GARG (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineer (India), Kolkata DR R. K. DAVE
In personal capacity (K-33A, First Floor, Green Park, SHRI S. K. DHERI
New Delhi 110016)
In personal capacity [4, Vidharbha Samrat Co-op. Housing Society, SHRI A. S. HERWADKAR
93 C, V. P. Road, Vile Parle (W) Mumbai 400056]
(xxiv)
Organization Representative(s)
Indraprastha Gas Limited, New Delhi SHRI PANKAJ SHARMA
SHRI AVIJIT NARAYAN (Alternate)
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army SHRI D. K. T YAGI
HQ, New Delhi SHRI JAYA PRAKASH (Alternate)
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, Mumbai DEPUTY HYDRAULIC E NGINEER (PLANNING & CONTROL)
EXECUTIVE ENGINEER (PLANNING & RESEARCH ) (Alternate)
Nous Hospital Consultants Pvt Ltd, New Delhi DR K. B. SOOD
Proion Consultants, New Delhi SHRI SANDEEP GOEL
Tata Consulting Engineers Limited, Mumbai SHRI DHEERAJ KAUSHIK
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI UDAY PANDE
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI P. C. TYAGI
In personal capacity (B/58A, Gangotri Enclave, Alaknanda, SHRI J. DCRUZ
New Delhi 110019)
In personal capacity (610, Technology Apartments, 24 Patparganj, SHRI SUBIR PAUL
New Delhi 110092)
Panel for Landscaping, Signs and Outdoor Display Structures, CED 46:P18
Organization Representative(s)
In personal capacity (167/8, Sarai Julena, Okhla Road, PROF M. S HAHEER (Former Convener)
New Delhi 110025)
Integral Designs International Studio Pvt Ltd, New Delhi SHRI SAMIR MATHUR (Convener)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI RAJESH KUMAR DHIMAN
SHRI ARUN K UMAR TYAGI (Alternate)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
Delhi Urban Arts Commission, New Delhi SHRI SAMIR MATHUR
SHRIMATI SONALI BHAGWATI (Alternate)
Housing & Urban Development Corporation Limited, New Delhi SHRIMATI U SHA PRASAD MAHAVIR
SHRIMATI VARSHA PUNHANI (Alternate)
Indian Society of Landscape Architects, Ahmedabad SHRI SACHIN JAIN
MS SAVITA PUNDE (Alternate)
Institute of Town Planners, India, New Delhi DR S. K. KULSHRESTHA
M. S. Y. K. Design, New Delhi SHRI YOGESH K APOOR
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai, Mumbai SHRIMATI MINAKSHI M ANE
SHRIMATI ASHLESHA MODAK (Alternate)
National Institute of Design, Ahmedabad SHRI ANIL SINHA
SHRI IMMANUEL SURESH (Alternate)
New Delhi Municipal Council, New Delhi SHRI RAKESH GOEL
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi PROF ROMMEL MEHTA
South Delhi Municipal Corporation, New Delhi REPRESENTATIVE
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI MAHESH PALIWAL
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata PROF JITENDRA S INGH
The Maharaja Sayajirao University of Baroda, Vadodara PROF S. R. RAVAL
Town and Country Planning Organization, Ministry of Urban SHRIMATI JASMIN BIMRA MALLIK
Development, New Delhi
In personal capacity (D-198, Defence Colony, New Delhi 110024) SHRI RAVINDRA BHAN
In personal capacity (874/4, Near Pundalik Temple, Alto Porvorim, SHRIMATI VINITA VIJAYAN PUGAL
Goa 403521)
(xxv)
Organization Representative(s)
Building Materials & Technology Promotion Council, New Delhi DR SHAILESH KUMAR AGRAWAL
SHRI J. K. PRASAD (Alternate)
Bureau of Energy Efficiency, New Delhi SHRI SANJAY SETH
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI MATHURA PRASAD
SHRI RAJESH KHARE (Alternate)
CEPT University, Ahmedabad SHRI RAJAN RAWAL
Confederation of Real Estate Developers Association of India, SHRI G. YOGANAND
New Delhi SHRI HEMANT DATTAJI NAIKNAVARE (Alternate)
CSIR-Central Building Research Institute, Roorkee SHRI YADVENDRA PANDEY
DR ASHOK KUMAR (Alternate)
Delhi Development Authority, New Delhi ENGINEER M EMBER
SHRI ASHOK GHODESHWAR (Alternate)
Design and Development, New Delhi SHRIMATI SHEETAL R AKHEJA
Indian Association of Structural Engineers, New Delhi DR RAVANDE KISHORE
SHRI MANOJ MITTAL (Alternate)
Indian Buildings Congress, New Delhi SHRI P. KRISHNAN
SHRI P. S. CHADHA (Alternate)
Indian Green Building Council, Hyderabad SHRI M. A NAND
SHRI PUNIT AGARWAL (Alternate)
Indian Institute of Science (Center for Sustainable Technologies), DR MONTO MANI
Bengaluru
Institute of Town Planners, India, New Delhi DR S. K. KULSHRESTHA
International Institute of Information Technology, Hyderabad DR VISHAL GARG
DR PRADEEP KUMAR RAMANCHARLA (Alternate)
Kaleidoscope, Noida SHRI AMOR KOOL
Karan Grover and Associates, Vadodara SHRI KARAN GROVER
Kone Elevator India Pvt Ltd, Chennai SHRI P. M. TIPNIS
SHRI J. SIVARAMAN (Alternate)
Larsen & Toubro Limited, ECC Division, Chennai SHRI RAJAN V ENKATESWARAN
SHRI STHALADIPTI SAHA (Alternate)
Malaviya National Institute of Technology, Jaipur DR JYOTIRMAY MATHUR
DR SANJAY MATHUR (Alternate)
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army SHRIMATI UPINDER KAUR
HQ, New Delhi SHRI MAHESH ARJUN RUPEREE (Alternate)
Ministry of New and Renewable Energy, New Delhi DR A. K. TRIPATHI
Panika, Ahmedabad SHRI NIMISH PATEL
SHRIMATI PARUL ZAVERI (Alternate)
Proion Consultants, New Delhi SHRI SANDEEP GOEL
School of Planning and Architecture, New Delhi DR V. K. PAUL
Surat Municipal Corporation, Surat SHRI J. M. PATEL
SHRI J. S. SHAH (Alternate)
Sustainable Urbanism International, Bengaluru DR JYOTI HOSAGRAHAR
The Energy and Resources Institute, New Delhi MS M ILI MAJUMDAR
The Indian Institute of Architects, Mumbai SHRI PRAFULLA KARKHANIS
SHRI ABHIJIT RAY (Alternate)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI G. PRABHAKAR
SHRI B. ANANTARAMLOO (Alternate)
Town and Country Planning Organization, Ministry of Urban SHRI PARESH DURIA
Development, New Delhi DR PAWAN KUMAR (Alternate)
(xxvi)
Organization Representative(s)
(xxvii)
Organization Representative(s)
The Institution of Engineers (India), Kolkata SHRI P. K. A DLAKHA
Winwall Technology India Pvt Ltd, Chennai SHRI P. JOTHI RAMALINGAM
In personal capacity (K-33A, First Floor, Green Park, SHRI S. K. D HERI
New Delhi 110016)
(xxviii)
Organization Representative(s)
C. B. Richard Ellis, Gurugram SHRI ANEESH KADYAN
Central Industrial Security Force, New Delhi DR K. C. WADHWA
SHRIMATI H ARPREET KAUR (Alternate)
Central Public Works Department, New Delhi SHRI PRABHAKAR S INGH
SHRI PRAMOD KUMAR SINGH (Alternate)
Climaveneta Climate Technologies (P) Ltd, Bengaluru SHRI ANIL DEV
SHRI NITIN JOSHI (Alternate)
Cushman and Wakefield India Pvt Ltd, Gurugram SHRI DINESH WADEHRA
SHRI SAJIT SANKAR (Alternate)
DLF Home Developers Limited, Gurugram SHRI GAUTAM D EY
Honeywell International India Pvt Ltd, Gurugram SHRI VARUN JAIN
Indian Buildings Congress, New Delhi SHRI DEEPAK NARAYAN
Jones Lang Lasalle Meghraj Building Operations Pvt Ltd, Gurugram SHRI SUMIT RAKSHIT
Medanta Medicity, Gurugram SHRI SANJAY BATRA
Military Engineer Services, Engineer-in-Chiefs Branch, Army SHRI D. K. T YAGI
HQ, New Delhi LT COL GAURAV KAUSHIK (Alternate)
National Council for Cement and Building Materials, Ballabgarh SHRI V. V. ARORA
SHRI BRIJESH SINGH (Alternate)
Realty Automation and Security Systems Pvt Ltd, Pune SHRI NITIN J OSHI
Security and Intelligence Services (India) Ltd, New Delhi SHRI RITU RAJ SINHA
BRIG (RETD ) U. K. DHAR (Alternate)
In personal capacity (H-43, Sector 39, Noida 201301) SHRI ANIL KUMAR ARORA
In personal capacity (K-33A, First Floor, Green Park, SHRI S. K. DHERI
New Delhi 110016)
In personal capacity (C-2/2324, Vasant Kunj, New Delhi 110070) SHRI CHANDRA PAL
In personal capacity (B-31, Manas Apartments, Mayur Vihar, SHRI V. K. SHARMA
Phase 1, Delhi 110091)
In personal capacity (D-39, Saket, New Delhi 110017) SHRI Y. TANEJA
(xxix)
Important Explanatory Note for Users of the Code
In any Part/Section of this Code, where reference is made to good practice in
relation to design, constructional procedures or other related information, and where
reference is made to accepted standard in relation to material specification,
testing, or other related information, the Indian Standards listed at the end of the
Part/Section shall be used as a guide to the interpretation.
At the time of publication, the editions indicated in the standards were valid. All
standards are subject to revision and parties to agreements based on any Part/
Section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent
editions of the standards.
In the list of standards given at the end of a Part/Section, the number appearing
within parentheses in the first column indicates the number of the reference of the
standard in the Part/Section. For example:
a) Good practice [3(2)] refers to the Indian Standard given at serial number (2)
of the list of standards given at the end of Part 3, that is, IS 4878:1986
Byelaws for construction of cinema buildings (first revision).
b) Good practice [4(6)] refers to the Indian Standard given at serial number (6)
of the list of standards given at the end of Part 4, that is, IS 1646:2015 Code
of practice for fire safety of buildings (General):Electrical installations (third
revision).
c) Good practice [6-1(5)] refers to the Indian Standard given at serial number
(5) of the list of standards given at the end of Section 1 of Part 6, that is,
IS 15498:2004 Guidelines for improving the cyclonic resistance of low rise
houses and other buildings/structures.
d) Accepted standard [6-2(6)] refers to the Indian Standard given at serial
number (6) of the list of standards given at the end of Section 2 of Part 6,
that is, IS 1498:1970 Classification and identification of soils for general
engineering purposes (first revision).
e) Accepted standards [6-5A(18)] refers to the Indian Standards given at serial
number (18) of the list of standards given at the end of Subsection 5A of
Part 6, that is, IS 516:1959 Method of test for strength of concrete and
IS 5816:1999 Method of test for splitting tensile strength of concrete
(first revision).
f) Accepted standard [6-5B(20)] refers to the Indian Standard given at serial
number (20) of the list of standards given at the end of Subsection 5B of
Part 6, that is, IS 9103:1999 Specification for admixtures for concrete
(first revision).
(xxx)
INFORMATION FOR THE USERS ABOUT AVAILABILITY OF
THE CODE IN GROUPS
For the convenience of the users, the National Building Code of India 2016 is available as a comprehensive
volume as well as in the following five groups, each incorporating the related Parts/Sections dealing with particular
area of building activity:
Group 1 For Development/ Part 0 Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying Provisions of the Code
Building Planning Part 1 Definitions
and Related Part 2 Administration
Aspects Part 3 Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements
Part 4 Fire and Life Safety
Part 5 Building Materials
Part 10 Landscape Development, Signs And Outdoor Display Structures
Section 1 Landscape Planning, Design and Development
Section 2 Signs and Outdoor Display Structures
Part 11 Approach to Sustainability
Group 2 For Structural Part 0 Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying Provisions of the Code
Design and Related Part 6 Structural Design
Aspects Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects
Section 2 Soils and Foundations
Section 3 Timber and Bamboo
3A Timber
3B Bamboo
Section 4 Masonry
Section 5 Concrete
5A Plain and Reinforced Concrete
5B Prestressed Concrete
Section 6 Steel
Section 7 Prefabrication, Systems Building and Mixed/ Composite
Construction
7A Prefabricated Concrete
7B Systems Building and Mixed/ Composite Construction
Section 8 Glass and Glazing
Part 11 Approach to Sustainability
Group 3 For Aspects Part 0 Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying Provisions of the Code
Relating to Part 7 Construction Management, Practices and Safety
Construction, and Part 11 Approach to Sustainability
Asset/ Facility Part 12 Asset and Facility Management
Management
Group 4 For Aspects Part 0 Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying Provisions of the Code
Relating to Building Part 8 Building Services
Services Section 1 Lighting and Natural Ventilation
Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations
Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation
Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and Noise Control
Section 5 Installation of Lifts, Escalators and Moving Walks
5A Lifts
5B Escalators and Moving Walks
Section 6 Information and Communication Enabled Installations
Part 11 Approach to Sustainability
Group 5 For Aspects Part 0 Integrated Approach Prerequisite for Applying Provisions of the Code
Relating to Part 9 Plumbing Services (including Solid Waste Management)
Plumbing Services Section 1 Water Supply
and Solid Waste Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
Management Section 3 Solid Waste Management
Section 4 Gas Supply
Part 11 Approach to Sustainability
The information contained in different groups will serve the concerned professionals dealing with the respective
areas. However, it is advisable that professionals essentially dealing with any of the above groups should also
refer the other groups.
(xxxi)
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 0 INTEGRATED APPROACH PREREQUISITE FOR
APPLYING PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE
5
2 TERMINOLOGY
5
3 GENERAL
5
4 TEAM APPROACH
5
5 PLANNING, DESIGNING AND DEVELOPMENT
6
6 CONSTRUCTION/EXECUTION (ACTUALIZATION)
8
7 OPERATION, MAINTENANCE, DECOMMISSIONING AND
DECONSTRUCTION
8
ANNEX A BRIEF DETAILS OF THE COVERAGE OF VARIOUS PROVISIONS
UNDER DIFFERENT PARTS/SECTIONS OF THE CODE
9
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 0) covers guidelines to be followed for judicious implementation of the provisions of various
Parts/Sections of the National Building Code of India following an integrated approach.
In order to provide safe, healthy and sustainable habitat, careful consideration needs to be paid to the building
construction activity. Building planning, designing and construction activities have developed over the centuries.
Large number of ancient monuments and historical buildings all over the world bear testimony to the growth of
civilization from the prehistoric era with the extensive use of manual labour and simple systems as appropriate to
those ages to the present day mechanized and electronically controlled operations for designing and constructing
buildings and for operating and maintaining systems and services. In those days, buildings were conceptualized
and built by master builders with high levels of artisan skills. Technological and socio-economic developments in
recent times have led to remarkable increase in demand for more and more sophistication in buildings resulting in
ever increasing complexities. These perforce demand high levels of inputs from professionals of different disciplines
such as architecture, civil engineering, structural engineering, functional and life safety services including special
aspects relating to utilities, landscaping, etc, in conceptualization, spatial planning, design and construction of
buildings of various material and technology streams, various services including operation, maintenance, repairs
and rehabilitation aspects throughout the service life of the building.
This Code, besides prescribing various provisions, also allows freedom of action to adopt appropriate practices
and provides for building planning, designing and construction for absorbing traditional practices as well as latest
developments in knowledge in the various disciplines as relevant to a building including computer aided and/or
other modern sensors aided activities in the various stages of conceptualization, planning, designing, constructing,
maintaining and repairing the buildings. India being a large country with substantial variations from region to
region, this Code has endeavoured to meet the requirements of different regions of the country, both urban and
rural, by taking into consideration factors such as climatic and environmental conditions, geographical terrain,
vulnerability to natural disasters, ecologically appropriate practices, use of eco-friendly materials, use of appropriate
conventional and alternative technologies, reduction of pollution, protection and improvement of local environment
and also socio-economic considerations, towards the creation of sustainable human settlements.
This Part of the Code dealing with integrated approach gives an overall direction for practical applications of the
provisions of different specialized aspects of spatial planning, designing and construction of buildings, creation
of services, and proposes an integrated approach for utilizing appropriate knowledge and experience of qualified
professionals, right from the conceptualization through construction and completion stages of a building project
and indeed during the entire life cycle. The integrated approach should not only take care of functional, aesthetic
and safety aspects, but also the operational and maintenance requirements. Also, cost optimization has to be
achieved through proper selection of materials, techniques, equipment installations, etc. Further, value engineering
and appropriate management techniques should be applied to achieve the aim set forth for the purpose of construction
of a building fully meeting the specified and implied needs of spatial functions, user requirements, safety and
durability aspects, life and health safety, comfort, services, etc, in the building. Integration among various
professionals/services may be facilitated by use of appropriate software, systems, tools, simulations, etc.
The aim of the integrated approach is to get the maximum benefit from the building and its services in terms of
objectives such as quality, timeliness and cost-effectiveness. In the team approach which is an essential pre-
requisite for integrated approach, the aim clearly is to maximize the efficiency of the total system through appropriate
optimization of each of its sub-systems, and ensuring coordination among various disciplines and agencies that
are involved during planning, design, construction, operation and maintenance of buildings and the associated
infrastructure. In other words, in the team, the timely inputs from each of the professional disciplines have to be
so optimized that the total systems efficiency becomes the maximum. It may be emphasized that maximizing the
efficiencies of each sub-system may not necessarily assure the maximization of the efficiency of the total system.
It needs hardly to be stated that specified or implied safety will always get precedence over functional efficiency
ANNEX A
(Clause 3.2)
BRIEF DETAILS OF THE COVERAGE OF VARIOUS PROVISIONS UNDER DIFFERENT
PARTS/SECTIONS OF THE CODE
A-8 PART 8 BUILDING SERVICES It also gives information that should be exchanged
among the architect/engineer, the consulting engineer
This Part through its six elaborate Sections on utilities and the escalator/moving walk manufacturer from the
provides detailed guidance to concerned professionals/ stage of planning to installation including maintenance.
utility engineers for meeting necessary functional
requirements in buildings. A-8.6 Section 6 Information and Communication
Enabled Installations
A-8.1 Section 1 Lighting and Natural Ventilation
It covers the essential requirements for information and
It covers requirements and methods for lighting and communication enabled installations, technology
natural ventilation of buildings. systems and related cabling installations in a building.
It also covers the basic design and integration
A-8.2 Section 2 Electrical and Allied Installations
requirements for telecommunication spaces within the
It covers the essential requirements for electrical building/buildings along with their cabling
installations in buildings to ensure efficient use of infrastructure, their pathway components and passive
electricity including safety from fire and shock. It also connectivity hardware.
includes general requirements relating to lightning
It also includes general requirements relating to
protection of buildings and brief provisions on certain
installation of different communication equipment,
allied installations.
cable terminations, power connections and general
A-8.3 Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating and guidelines required for planning and providing
Mechanical Ventilation information and communication technology (ICT)
services in the building at the planning and execution
It covers the planning, design considerations, stages. The provisions given herein are basic
installation, testing, commissioning and handing over requirements applicable to all residential and other
and also operation and maintenance of air conditioning, buildings.
heating and mechanical ventilation systems for
buildings. It also covers refrigeration for cold storages. A-9 PART 9 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUD-
ING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT)
A-8.4 Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and
Noise Control This Part through its four Sections gives detailed
guidance to concerned professionals/plumbing
It covers requirements and guidelines regarding engineers with regard to plumbing and other related
planning against noise, acceptable noise levels and the requirements in buildings including solid waste
requirements for sound insulation in buildings with management.
different occupancies.
A-9.1 Section 1 Water Supply
A-8.5 Section 5 Installation of Lifts, Escalators and
Moving Walks It covers the basic requirements of water supply for
residential, business and other types of buildings,
A-8.5.1 Section 5A Lifts including traffic terminal stations. It also deals with
general requirements of plumbing connected to public
It covers the requirements for planning, design,
water supply and design of water supply systems along
installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of
with general guidelines about expansion in piping
lifts (passenger lifts, goods lifts, hospital lifts, service
systems, and swimming pools.
lifts and dumb waiter) so as to ensure safe movement
of people with satisfactory performance. A-9.2 Section 2 Drainage and Sanitation
It also gives information that should be exchanged It covers the design, layout, construction and
among the architect/engineer, the consulting engineer maintenance of drains for foul water, surface water,
and the lift manufacturer from the stage of planning to subsoil water and sewage; together with all ancillary
installation including maintenance. works, such as connections, manholes and inspection
A-8.5.2 Section 5B Escalators and Moving Walks chambers used within the building and from building
to the connection to a public sewer, private sewer,
It covers the essential requirements for planning, individual sewage-disposal system, cesspool, soakaway
installation, operation, maintenance and inspection of or to other approved point of disposal/ treatment work.
FOREWORD
Each Part or Section of the National Building Code of India gives the definitions of the special terms used in it.
These definitions may be found in the clause Terminology normally placed immediately after the Scope in
each Part/Section. However, users may find this Part very convenient for reference as it gives the alphabetically
arranged list of terms defined in all the Parts/Sections, along with the location of the definition. It may also be
noted that in some cases like in Part 3 Development Control Rules and General Building Requirements and
Part 7 Construction Management, Practices and Safety of the Code, these have been placed in other appropriate
clauses rather than after Scope considering the suitability and convenience afforded therefrom.
In this revision, this Part has been updated to cover the various terms actually covered in different Parts/Sections
in this revision of the Code.
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 3
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 1 DEFINITIONS
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 5
Asset Part 12 Back to Back Cluster Part 3
Asset Life Part 12 Back Up Part 9/Section 2
Asset Register Part 12 Back-up Protection Part 8/Section 2
Asset Type Part 12 Back Water Valve Part 9/Section 2
Asset/Facility Management Part 12 Backflow Part 9/Section 1
Assisted Evacuation Part 3, Part 4 Backflow Prevention Device Part 9/Section 1
Assistive Product/Device Part 3 Background noise Part 8/Section 4
Atmospheric Pressure Part 8/Section 3 Background Noise Correction Part 8/Section 5B
Atrium Part 4 Balcony Part 3
Attenuation Part 8/Section 6 Balustrade Part 6/Section 8, Part 8/Section 5B
Audible Frequency Range Part 8/Section 4 Balustrade Decking Part 8/Section 5B
Authorities Concerned Part 4 Bamboo Part 6/Section 3B
Bamboo Clump Part 6/Section 3B
An organization, office, or individual responsible for Bamboo Culm Part 6/Section 3B
enforcing the requirements of a code or standard, or
Bamboo Mat Board Part 6/Section 3B
for approving or accepting equipment, materials, an
installation, or a procedure. Bamboo Mat Corrugated Sheet Part 6/Section 3B
Bamboo Mat Veneer Composite Part 6/Section 3B
Authority Having Jurisdiction Part 0, Part 2, Band Part 6/Section 4
Part 3, Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B, Banner Part 10/Section 2
Part 7, Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 4, Banner Sign Part 10/Section 2
Part 10/Section 2, Part 11 Barrel Part 9/Section 1
Barrier Part 8/Section 2
The authority which has been created by a statute and Base Part 9/Section 1
which, for the purpose of administering the Code/Part,
Basement or Cellar Part 3
may authorize a committee or an official or an agency
to act on its behalf; hereinafter called the Authority. Basic Protection Part 8/Section 2
Basic Module Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B
Authorization Part 9/Section 3 Bath Room Group Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
Automatic Door Part 3 Bather Load Part 9/Section 1
Automatic Fire Detection and Alarm System Part 4 Batter Pile (Raker Pile) Part 6/Section 2
Automatic Operation Part 8/Section 5A Battery of Fixtures Part 9/Section 2
Automatic Rescue Device Part 8/Section 5A Beads or Glazing Beads Part 6/Section 8
Automatic Sprinkler System Part 4 Beam Part 6/Section 3B, Part 6/Section 6
Automatic Water Spray Systems Part 4 Beam, Built-Up-Laminated Part 6/Section 3A
Auxiliary Brake Part 8/Section 5B Beam, Glued-Laminated Part 6/Section 3A
Available Head Part 9/Section 1 Bearing Capacity, Safe Part 6/Section 2
Avenue Part 10/Section 1 Bearing Capacity, Ultimate Part 6/Section 2
A-Weighted Sound Pressure Part 8/Section 4 Bearing Pressure, Allowable (Gross or Net) Part 6/
A-Weighted Sound Pressure Level Part 8/Section 4 Section 2
Axial Flow Fan Part 8/Section 1 Bearing Type Connection Part 6/Section 6
Axis of Measurement Part 8/Section 5A Bed Block Part 6/Section 4
Azimuth Part 8/Section 1 Bed Pan Washer Part 9/Section 2
Bedding Part 9/Section 1
B
Benching Part 9/Section 2
Backbone Part 8/Section 6 Benchmarking Part 12
Backbone Cabling Media Distribution and Building Biodegradable Waste Part 12
Pathway Part 8/Section 6
Biodiversity Part 11
Back Fill Part 6/Section 2
Bite Part 6/Section 8
Back Pressure Backflow Part 9/Section 1
Biodegradable Substance Part 9/Section 3
Back Siphonage Part 9/Section 1
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 7
C Chair Part 9/Section 1
Cabin Part 3 Chair Rail Part 6/Section 8
Cable Part 6/Section 5B, Part 8/Section 2 Channel Part 9/Section 1
Cable, Circuit Integrity Part 8/Section 2 Characteristic Load Part 6/Section 3B, Part 6/
Cable, Flame Retardant (FR) Part 8/Section 2 Section 5B, Part 6/Section 6
Cable, Flame Retardant Low Smoke Halogen Free Characteristic Strength Part 6/Section 3B, Part 6/
(FR-LSH) Part 8/Section 2 Section 5B
Cable, Flexible Part 8/Section 2 Characteristic Yield/Ultimate Stress Part 6/Section 6
Cable, Metal-Sheathed Part 8/Section 2 Check Part 6/Section 3A
Cable, PVC Sheathed-Insulated Part 8/Section 2 Chhajja Part 3
Cable, Weatherproof Part 8/Section 2 Chimney Part 3
Cable, XLPE Part 8/Section 2 Chowk or Courtyard Part 3
Cable Armoured Part 8/Section 2 Chowk, Inner Part 3
Cable Bracket Part 8/Section 2 Chowk, Outer Part 3
Cable Channel Part 8/Section 2 Circuit Part 8/Section 2
Cable Cleat Part 8/Section 2 Circuit, Final Sub Part 8/Section 2
Cable Coupler Part 8/Section 2 Circuit Breaker Part 8/Section 2
Cable Ducting Part 8/Section 2 Circuit Breaker, Linked Part 8/Section 2
Cable Ladder Part 8/Section 2 Circuit Integrity Cable Support and Fixing
Materials Part 8/Section 2
Cable Raceways Part 8/Section 2
Circulation Path Part 3
Cable Tray Part 8/Section 2
Circulation Space Part 3
Cable Trunking Part 8/Section 2
Clay Part 6/Section 2
Cable Tunnel Part 8/Section 2
Clay, Firm Part 6/Section 2
Call Indicator Part 8/Section 5A
Clay, Soft Part 6/Section 2
Camber Part 6/Section 6
Clay, Stiff Part 6/Section 2
Candela (cd) Part 8/Section 1
Cleaning Part 12
Canopy Part 3
Cleaning Eye Part 9/Section 2
Canopy/Tree Canopy Part 10/Section 1
Cleaning Services Part 12
Canopy Sign Part 10/Section 2
Clear Part 3
Car Bodywork Part 8/Section 5A
Clear Design Sky Part 8/Section 1
Car Door Electric Contact Part 8/Section 5A
Clear Glass Part 6/Section 8
Car Frame Part 8/Section 5A
Clear Waste Water Part 9/Section 2
Car Platform Part 8/Section 5A
Clearance Part 8/Section 5A
Car Switch Operation Part 8/Section 5A
Cleat Part 8/Section 2
Carbon Emissions Part 12
Cleavability Part 6/Section 3B
Carbon Footprint Part 12
Climber (Creeper/Vine) Part 10/Section 1
Cartridge Fuse Link Part 8/Section 2
Closed Clusters Part 3
Carpet Area Part 3
Closed Sign Part 10/Section 2
Ceiling Rose Part 8/Section 2
Closely-Spaced Modules Part 6/Section 1
Cell Part 6/Section 3B
Cluster Part 3
Cellular Concrete Part 6/Section 7A,
Part 6/Section 7B Cluster Court Town House Part 3
Cellulose Part 6/Section 3B Cluster Plot Part 3
Central Field Part 8/Section 1 Coaxial Cable Part 8/Section 6
Centre Internode Part 6/Section 3B Coincidence Factor Part 8/Section 2
Centre of Rigidity Part 6/Section 4 Collapse Part 6/Section 3B
Centrifugal Fan Part 8/Section 1 Collection Part 9/Section 3
Cesspool Part 9/Section 2 Collection Chamber Part 9/Section 2
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 9
fountain, bench, Chabutara with open top and Damping Part 6/Section 1
unenclosed on sides by walls and the like; Danger Part 8/Section 2
b) Drainage culvert, conduit, catchpit, gully pit, Daylight Area Part 8/Section 1
chamber, gutter and the like; Daylight Factor Part 8/Section 1
c) Compound wall, gate, unstoreyed porch and Daylight Penetration Part 8/Section 1
portico, slide, swing, uncovered staircases, Deconstruction Part 12
ramp areas covered by Chhajja and the like; De-Structured Bamboo Part 6/Section 3B
and Dead Part 8/Section 2
d) Watchmans booth, pumphouse, garbage shaft, Dead Knot Part 6/Section 3A
electric cabin or sub-stations, and such other Dead Loads Part 6/Section 6
utility structures meant for the services of the Decay or Rot Part 6/Section 3A
building under consideration. Decayed Knot Part 6/Section 3A
NOTE For the purpose of this part, covered area equals the Decibel Part 8/Section 4
plot area minus the area due for open spaces in the plot.
Deciduous Tree Part 10/Section 1
Coupled Glazing (Secondary Glazing) Part 6/ Dedicated Outdoor Air System (DOAS) Part 8/
Section 8 Section 3
Crane Load Part 6/Section 6 Deep Area Part 9/Section 1
Creep Part 6/Section 5B Deep Manhole Part 9/Section 2
Creep Coefficient Part 6/Section 5B Deflection Part 6/Section 6
Crime Prevention through Environmental Design Deflector Sheave Part 8/Section 5A
(CPTED) Part 12 Delamination Part 6/Section 3B
Critical Activities Part 12 Deliverable Part 12
Critical Asset Part 12 Demand Based Ventilation Part 8/Section 3
Critical Damping Part 6/Section 1 Density Part 3
Crookedness Part 6/Section 3B Depth Part 6/Section 1
Cross Wall Part 6/Section 3B Depth of Manhole Part 9/Section 2
Cross-Connect Part 8/Section 6 Design Acceleration Part 8/Section 5A
Cross-Connection Part 9/Section 1 Design Acceleration Spectrum Part 6/Section 1
Cross-Sectional Area of Masonry Unit Part 6/ Design Current (of a Circuit) Part 8/Section 2
Section 4
Design Development Part 12
Cross-Talk Part 8/Section 4
Design Horizontal Seismic Coefficient Part 6/
Crown of Trap Part 9/Section 2 Section 4
Crumple Section Part 6/Section 4 *Design Life Part 6/Section 6, Part 12
Crush Train Load Part 4 Design Load/Factored Load Part 6/Section 6
Cul-de-Sac Cluster Part 3 Design Pressure Difference Part 8/Section 3
Cumulative Figure Part 6/Section 6 Design Spectrum Part 6/Section 6
Current Carrying Capacity of a Conductor Part 8/ Design Horizontal Acceleration Coefficient Part 6/
Section 2 Section 1
Current Using Equipment Part 8/Section 2 Design Horizontal Force Part 6/Section 1
Curtain Wall Part 6/Section 4, Part 6/Section 8 Detached Building Part 3
Curvature Part 6/Section 3B Detail Category Part 6/Section 6
Customers/Consumer s Connection Part 9/ Developed Height Part 6/Section 1
Section 4
Developed Length Part 9/Section 2
Cut-Out Part 8/Section 2
Development Part 2, Part 3
Cut-Off Level Part 6/Section 2
Cut-Off Limit Part 6/Section 6 Development with grammatical variations means the
D carrying out of building, engineering, mining or other
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 11
Earth Leakage Current Part 8/Section 2 Emergency Brake Part 8/Section 5B
Earthing Part 8/Section 2 Emergency Lighting Part 4
Earthing Conductor Part 8/Section 2 Emergency Lighting System Part 4
Earthing Lead Part 8/Section 2 Emergency Stop Switch Part 8/Section 5B
Earthing Resistance, Total Part 8/Section 2 Emergency Switching Part 8/Section 2
Earthquake Loads Part 6/Section 6 Emission Sound Pressure Level (LpA ) Part 8/
Ecological Footprint Part 11 Section 5B
Ecosystem Part 11 Emissivity (E) Part 11
Economizer, Air Part 8/Section 3 Emulative Detailing System Part 6/Section 7A
Economizer, Water Part 8/Section 3 Enclosed Station Part 4
*Edge Distance Part 6/Section 3A, Part 6/Section 6 Enclosed Distribution Board Part 8/Section 2
Edge Deterioration Part 6/Section 8 Enclosure Part 8/Section 2
Edge Faults Part 6/Section 8 End Distance Part 6/Section 3A, Part 6/Section 3B,
Edge Polished Part 6/Section 8 Part 6/Section 6
Edging Part 6/Section 8
End Splitting Part 6/Section 3B
Educational Buildings Part 6/Section 1
End-User Part 12
Effective Frontal Area Part 6/Section 1
Endemic Plant Part 10/Section 1
Effective Height Part 6/Section 4
Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) Part 8/Section 3
Effective Lateral Restraint Part 6/Section 6
Energy Recovery Unit Part 8/Section 3
*Effective Length Part 6/Section 4, Part 6/Section 6
Entraining Load Part 4
Effective Opening Part 9/Section 1
Environmental Impact Part 11
Effective Perceived Noise Level in Decibel (EPN dB)
Part 8/Section 4 Environmental Indicator (K2A) Part 8/Section 5B
*Effective Temperature (ET) Part 8/Section 1, Epicenter Part 6/Section 1
Part 8/Section 3 Equipotential Bonding Part 8/Section 2
Effective Thickness Part 6/Section 4 Equivalent Continuous A-Weighted Sound
Efficiency of a Pile Group Part 6/Section 2 Pressure Level, LAeq.T Part 8/Section 4
Egress Part 10/Section 1 Equivalent Sound Absorption Area of a Room, A
Elastic Cladding Part 6/Section 6 Part 8/Section 4
Elastic Critical Moment Part 6/Section 6 Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (LAeq) Part 8/
Elastic Design Part 6/Section 6 Section 5A, Part 8/Section 5B
Elastic Limit Part 6/Section 6 Erection Loads Part 6/Section 6
Electric Shock Part 8/Section 2 Erection Tolerance Part 6/Section 6
Electric Sign Part 10/Section 2 Erosion Part 10/Section 1
Electrical and Mechanical Interlock Part 8/ Escalator Part 3, Part 8/Section 5B
Section 5A Escape Lighting Part 4
Electrical Equipment (abb: Equipment) Part 8/ Estimated Service Life (ESL) Part 12
Section 2
Evacuation Lift Part 4
Electrically Independent Earth Electrode Part 8/
Evaporative Cooling Part 8/Section 3
Section 2
Electrical Supply System for Life and Safety Evergreen Tree Part 10/Section 1
Services Part 8/Section 2 Exhaust of Air Part 8/Section 1
Electro-Mechanical Lock Part 8/Section 5A Exit Part 3, Part 4
Electronic Devices Part 8/Section 5A Exit Access Part 4
Element of Surface Area Part 6/Section 1 Exit Access Corridor Part 4
Elevation Part 10/Section 1 Exit Discharge Part 4
Embodied Energy Part 11 Exotic Part 10/Section 1
Exposed Conductive Part Part 8/Section 2
* Definitions are different.
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 13
Floor Hole Part 7 Geogrid Part 10/Section 1
Floor Opening Part 7 Geo-textile Part 10/Section 1
Floor Response Spectrum Part 6/Section 1 Geothermal Heat Pump Part 8/Section 3
Floor Selector Part 8/Section 5A Geyser Part 9/Section 1
Floor Stopping Switch Part 8/Section 5A Girth of Tree Part 10/Section 1
Flush Over Panel Part 6/Section 8 Glare Part 8/Section 1
Flushing Cistern Part 9/Section 1 Glass Part 6/Section 8
Flushometer Tank Part 9/Section 1 Glazing-Bite Part 6/Section 8
Foam Protection System Part 4 Global Warming Potential (GWP) Part 8/Section 3
Foliage Part 10/Section 1 Globe Temperature Part 8/Section 1
Footing Part 6/Section 2 Glue Part 6/Section 3A
Force Coefficient Part 6/Section 1 Glued Laminated (Glulam) Part 6/Section 3A
Formation Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2 Glued Laminated, horizontally Part 6/Section 3A
Foundation Part 6/Section 2 Glued Laminated, vertically Part 6/Section 3A
Foundation, Raft Part 6/Section 2 Goods Lift Part 8/Section 5A
Frame Part 6/Section 8 Grab Bars Part 3
Frameless Glazing Part 6/Section 8 Grade Part 10/Section 1
Free-Field Level Part 8/Section 4 Gradient Height Part 6/Section 1
Freestanding Sign Part 10/Section 2 Gradient Part 10/Section 1
French Drain or Rubble Drain Part 9/Section 2 Grading Part 10/Section 1
*Frequency Part 8/Section 4, Part 8/Section 6 Grass Paver Part 10/Section 1
Fresh Air or Outside Air Part 8/Section 1 Grasses Part 10/Section 1
Friction Type Connection Part 6/Section 6 Gravel Part 6/Section 2
Front Putty Part 6/Section 8 Gravity Load Part 6/Section 6
Frost Line Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2 Grease Interceptor (or Grease Trap) Part 9/
Full Culm Part 6/Section 3B Section 2
Fully Framed Glazing Part 6/Section 8 Green Roof Part 10/Section 1
Functional Earthing Part 8/Section 2 Green Roof System Part 11
Fundamental or Ultimate Stress Part 6/Section 3A, Green Walls Part 10/Section 1
Part 6/Section 3B Ground Improvement Part 6/Section 2
Fuse Part 8/Section 2 Ground Roughness Part 6/Section 1
Fuse Carrier Part 8/Section 2 Ground Sign Part 10/Section 2
Fuse Element Part 8/Section 2 Ground-Borne Noise Part 8/Section 4
Fuse Link Part 8/Section 2 Groundcover Part 10/Section 1
Group Automatic Operation Part 8/Section 5A
G
Group Housing Part 3
Gallery Part 3 Group Open Space Part 3
Gap Part 6/Section 8 Grout Part 6/Section 4
Garage, Private Part 3 Grouted Cavity Reinforced Masonry Part 6/Section 4
Garage, Public Part 3 Grouted Hollow-Unit Masonry Part 6/Section 4
Gas Fitter Part 9/Section 4 Grouted Masonry Part 6/Section 4
Gauge Part 6/Section 6 Grouted Multi-Wythe Masonry Part 6/Section 4
Geared Machine Part 8/Section 5A Guard Railing Part 7
Gearless Machine Part 8/Section 5A Guard Rail Part 6/Section 8
General Ventilation Part 8/Section 1 Guide Rails Part 8/Section 5A
General Washing Place Part 9/Section 1 Guide Rails Fixing Part 8/Section 5A
Generator of Wastes Part 9/Section 3 Guide Shoe Part 8/Section 5A
Gully Chamber Part 9/Section 2
* Definitions are different.
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 15
Inside Location Part 6/Section 3A, Part 6/Section 3B Junction Box Part 8/Section 2
Inside Plant (ISP) Part 8/Section 6 Junction Pipe Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
Inspection Chamber Part 9/Section 2
K
Inspection Door Part 8/Section 5B
Instability Part 6/Section 6 * Kerb Part 3, Part 10/Section 1
*Installation Part 8/Section 5A, Part 9/Section 4 Kerb Ramp Part 3
Installation (Electrical) Part 8/Section 2 Knot Part 6/Section 3A
Installer Part 8/Section 5A Knot Hole Part 6/Section 3A
Institutional Buildings Part 6/Section 1 Knurled Surface Part 3
Insulated Part 8/Section 2
Insulating Glass Unit (IGU) Part 6/Section 8 L
Insulation Part 8/Section 2 Lagging Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
Insulation, Basic Part 8/Section 2 Lamella Roof Part 6/Section 3A
Insulation, Double Part 8/Section 2 Laminated Safety Glass Part 6/Section 8
Insulation, Reinforced Part 8/Section 2 Laminated Veneer Lumber Part 6/Section 3A
Insulation, Supplementary Part 8/Section 2
Laminations Part 6/Section 3A
Intensity of Earthquake Part 6/Section 1
Landfilling Part 9/Section 3
Interceptor Part 9/Section 2
Landing Part 3
Interceptor Manhole or Interceptor Chamber
Landing Call Push Part 8/Section 5A
Part 9/Section 2
Landing Door Part 8/Section 5A
Interior Panel Part 8/Section 5B
Interlayer Part 6/Section 8 Landing Zone Part 8/Section 5A
Interlocking Cluster Part 3 Large Lobby Part 8
Intermediate Cross-Connect Part 8/Section 6 Latent Heat Part 8/Section 3
Internal Faces of Cluster Part 3 Latent Heat Load Part 8/Section 3
Internal Lightning Protection System Part 8/ Lateral Restraint for a Beam Part 6/Section 6
Section 2 Lateral Support Part 6/Section 4
Internal Partition Part 6/Section 8 Latewood Part 6/Section 3A
Internal Reflected Component (IRC) Part 8/ Leachate Part 9/Section 3
Section 1 Leading Imposed Load Part 6/Section 6
International Symbol of Accessibility Part 3, Part 10/ Leaf Part 6/Section 4
Section 2
Leakage Current Part 8/Section 2
Interval Part 8/Section 5A
Ledge or Tand Part 3
Intrusion Detection Systems Part 12
Length of Internode Part 6/Section 3B
Invasive Plant Part 10/Section 1
Levelling Device, Lift Car Part 8/Section 5A
Invert Part 9/Section 2, Part 10/Section 1
Levelling Device, One Way Automatic Part 8/
Internet of Things Part 8/Section 6
Section 5A
Irrigation Part 10/Section 1
Levelling Device, Two-Way Automatic Maintaining
Isolation Part 8/Section 2
Part 8/Section 5A
Isolator Part 8/Section 2
Levelling Devices Part 8/Section 5A
Isoptera Part 6/Section 3A
Levelling Zone Part 8/Section 5A
J LEMP Protection Measures (SPM) Part 8/Section 2
Jerk Part 8/Section 5A Licensed (or Registered) Plumber Part 9/Section 1,
Joint Part 6/Section 3B, Part 6/Section 4 Part 9/Section 2
Joist Part 6/Section 3B Life Cycle Part 12
Jointed Detailing System Part 6/Section 7A Life Cycle Assessment (LCA) Part 11
Joint Reinforcement Part 6/Section 4 Lift Part 3, Part 8/Section 5A
* Definitions are different. * Definitions are different.
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 17
Mantrap Part 12 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) Part 8/
Marquee Sign Part 10/Section 2 Section 2
Masonry Part 6/Section 4 Mound Part 10/Section 1
Masonry Unit Part 6/Section 4 Moving Walk Part 8/Section 5B
Mass Rapid Transit Part 4 Mulching Part 10/Section 1
Master Plan Part 3 Mullion Part 6/Section 8
Mat Part 6/Section 3B Multichannel Multipoint Distribution System
Material Handling Hoists Part 7 (MMDS) Part 8/Section 6
Maximum Thickness Part 6/Section 8 Multimodule Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B
Mean Ground Level Part 6/Section 1 Multiple Earthed Neutral System Part 8/Section 2
Mean Outer Diameter Part 6/Section 3B Multiple Occupancy Part 4
Mean Radiant Temperature Part 8/Section 3 Multi-User Telecommunications Outlet Assembly
Mean Wall Thickness Part 6/Section 3B (MUTOA) Part 8/Section 6
Means of Egress Part 4 Municipal Authority Part 9/Section 3
Means of Escape Part 4 Municipal Solid Waste Part 9/Section 3
Measured Speed Part 8/Section 5B N
Mechanical Ventilation Part 8/Section 1 Native Plant Part 10/Section 1
Mechanically Laminated Part 6/Section 3A Natural Period in Mode of Oscillation Part 6/
Mercantile Buildings Part 6/Section 1 Section 1
Meridian Part 8/Section 1 Natural Ventilation Part 8/Section 1
Meshed Bonding Network (MESH-BN) Part 8/ Naturalised Plant Part 10/Section 1
Section 2 Naturally Conditioned Building Part 8/Section 3
Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) Part 8/Section 6 Negative Skin Friction Part 6/Section 2
Mezzanine Floor Part 3 Net Section Part 6/Section 3B
Metro-station Part 4 Neutral Conductor Part 8/Section 2
Microclimate Part 10/Section 1 Newel Part 8/Section 5B
Mill Tolerance Part 6/Section 6 Node Part 6/Section 3B
Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) Part 8/Section 2 Noise Part 8/Section 4
Minimum Thickness Part 6/Section 8 Noise Exposure Forecast (NEF) Part 8/Section 4
Mixed Mode Building Part 8/Section 3 Noise Criteria Part 8/Section 4
Mixed Occupancy Part 4 Noise Rating (NR) Part 8/Section 4
Mobile Equipment Part 8/Section 2 Noise Reduction Co-efficient (NRC) Part 8/Section 4
Modal Mass in Mode of a Structure Part 6/Section 1 Nominal/Rated Speed Part 8/Section 5B
Modal Participation Factor Part 6/Section 1 Nominal Thickness Part 6/Section 8
Modes of Oscillation Part 6/Section 1 Nominal Travel Time Part 8/Section 5A
Modular Co-ordination Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/ Non-Combustible Material Part 6/Section 8
Section 7B
Non-Renewable Resource Part 11
Modular Grid Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B
Non-Selective Collective Automatic Operation
Module Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B Part 8/Section 5A
Modulus of Elasticity (Youngs Modulus) Part 6/ Non-transit Occupancy Part 4
Section 8
Normal Mode of Oscillation Part 6/Section 1
Moment Resistant Frame Part 6/Section 4
Normal Operation Part 8/Section 5A
Moment Resistant Frame with Shear Walls Part 6/
Normal Stress Part 6/Section 6
Section 4
Normalized Impact Sound Pressure Level Part 8/
Monitoring Part 8/Section 2
Section 4
Monolithic Glass Part 6/Section 8
North and South Points Part 8/Section 1
Mortise and Tenon Part 6/Section 3B
Mould Part 6/Section 3A O
Occupancy or Use Group Part 2, Part 3, Part 4
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 19
Persons with Disabilities Part 3 Positive Ventilation Part 8/Section 1, Part 8/
PEN Conductor Part 8/Section 2 Section 3
Phase Conductor Part 8/Section 2 Post-Tensioning Part 6/Section 5B
Physical Asset Part 12 Potable Water Part 9/Section 1
Pier Part 6/Section 4 Pre-tensioning Part 6/Section 5B
Pile Foundation Part 6/Section 2 Precast Concrete Piles in Prebored Holes Part 6/
Pile Rig Part 7 Section 2
Pile Spacing Part 6/Section 2 Precast Driven Pile Part 6/Section 2
Pilot Part 9/Section 4 Predictive Action Part 12
Pink Noise Part 8/Section 4 Predicted Service Life Part 12
Pipe System Part 9/Section 2 Prefabricate Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B
Pipe Work Part 9/Section 1 Prefabricated Building Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/
Section 7B
Pit Part 8/Section 5B
Preloading Part 6/Section 2
Pitch Part 6/Section 6
Premises Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
Pitch Pocket Part 6/Section 3A
Pressure Coefficient Part 6/Section 1
Place of Comparative Safety Part 4
Pressure Balancing Valve Part 9/Section 1
Planned Preventive Maintenance Part 12
Pressure Regulator Part 9/Section 4
Platform Part 7
Pressurization Part 4
Plastic Collapse Part 6/Section 6
Pressurization Level Part 4
Plastic Design Part 6/Section 6
Prestressed Concrete Part 6/Section 5B
Plastic Hinge Part 6/Section 6
Preventive Action Part 12
Plastic Moment Part 6/Section 6
Preventive Maintenance Part 12
Plastic Section Part 6/Section 6
Primary Collection Part 12
Plenum Part 8/Section 3
Principal Rafter Part 6/Section 3B
Plinth Part 3
Prism Part 6/Section 4
The portion of a structure between the surface of the Processing Part 9/Section 3
surrounding ground and surface of the floor, Projecting Sign Part 10/Section 2
immediately above the ground. Proof Stress Part 6/Section 6
Proof Testing Part 6/Section 6
Plinth Area Part 3
Propagation Delay Part 8/Section 6
The built up covered area measured at the floor level Propeller Fan Part 8/Section 1
of the basement or of any storey. Prospective Fault Current (Ipf) Part 8/Section 2
Protection, Ingress Part 8/Section 2
Plug Part 8/Section 2 Protection, Mechanical Impact Part 8/Section 2
Plumbing Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2 Protective Coating(s) Faults Part 6/Section 8
Plumbing System Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2 Protective Conductor Part 8/Section 2
Pocket Type Reinforced Masonry Part 6/Section 4 Protective Conductor Current Part 8/Section 2
Point of Safety Part 4 Protective Earthing Part 8/Section 2
Point (in Wiring) Part 8/Section 2 Protective Separation Part 8/Section 2
Poissons Ratio Part 6/Section 6 Prototype Testing Part 6/Section 6
Pool Part 9/Section 1 Prying Force Part 6/Section 6
Pool Depth Part 9/Section 1 Psychrometric Chart Part 8/Section 3
Porch Part 3 Public Mobile Network Part 8/Section 6
Portable Equipment Part 8/Section 2 Public Way Part 4
Portable Sign Part 10/Section 2 Puff Ventilation Part 9/Section 2
Position and/or Direction Indicator Part 8/ Pure Tone Part 8/Section 4
Section 5A Purge Part 9/Section 4
Purlins Part 6/Section 3B
20 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
Q Residual Head Part 9/Section 1
Qualified Installing Agency Part 9/Section 4 Residual Operating Current Part 8/Section 2
Quetta Bond Reinforced Masonry Part 6/Section 4 Residual Pressure Part 9/Section 1
Residual Protection Part 6/Section 8
R
Residual Waste Part 12
Radio Frequency Part 8/Section 6 Response Acceleration Coefficient of a Structure
Ramp Part 3, Part 4 Part 6/Section 1
RASCI Chart Part 12 Response Reduction Factor Part 6/Section 1
Rated Current Part 8/Section 2 Response Spectrum Part 6/Section 1
Rated Impulse Withstand Voltage Level Part 8/ Retiring Cam Part 8/Section 5A
Section 2
Return Period Part 6/Section 1
Rated Load (Lift) Part 8/Section 5A
Return Air Part 8/Section 3
Rated Load Part 8/Section 5B Reuse Part 11
Rated Speed (Lift) Part 8/Section 5A
Reveal Part 8/Section 1
Rating Level Part 8/Section 4
Reverberation Time Part 8/Section 4
Rebate Part 6/Section 8 Rheostatic Control Part 8/Section 5A
Recirculated Air Part 8/Section 3
Ride Quality Part 8/Section 5B
Recycling Part 9/Section 3, Part 11
Rise (Travel) Part 8/Section 5B
Reflected Glare Part 8/Section 1 Riser Part 9/Section 4
Reflection Factor (Reflectance) Part 8/Section 1
Road Part 2, Part 3
Reflective Coated Glass Part 6/Section 8
Road Line Part 2, Part 3
Reflective Silver Coating Faults Part 6/Section 8 Roof Battens Part 6/Section 3B
Refrigerant Part 8/Section 3
Roof Exits Part 4
Refuge Area Part 4
Roof Sign Part 10/Section 2
Registered Architect, Engineer, Structural Engineer, Roof Skeleton Part 6/Section 3B
Geotechnical Engineer, Supervisor, Town Planner,
Room Height Part 2, Part 3
Landscape Architect, Urban Designer Part 2
Regulatory Sign Part 10/Section 2 The vertical distance measured from the finished floor
Reinforced Brick Slab (RB Slab) Part 6/Section 4 surface to the finished ceiling surface. Where a finished
Reinforced Brick Concrete Slab (RBC Slab) Part 6/ ceiling is not provided, the underside of the joists or
Section 4 beams or tie beams shall determine the upper point of
measurement for determining the head room.
Reinforced Masonry Part 6/Section 4
Relative Humidity Part 8/Section 3
Room Index Part 8/Section 1
Relaxation Part 6/Section 5B
Root Cause Analysis Part 12
Reliability Centered Maintenance (RCM) Part 12 Roping Multiple Part 8/Section 5A
Renewable Resource Part 11
Rotation Part 6/Section 6
Repair, Renovate, Refurbish Part 12
Round Trip Time (RTT) Part 8/Section 5A
Retaining Device Part 8/Section 5A Routine Test Part 6/Section 2
Residential Buildings Part 6/Section 1
Row Housing/Row Type Building Part 3
Residual Current Part 8/Section 2
Residual Current Device Part 8/Section 2 S
Residual Current Operated Circuit Breaker Part 8/ S-N Curve Part 6/Section 6
Section 2 Saddle Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
Residual Current Operated Circuit Breaker with Safe Load Part 6/Section 2
Integral Overcurrent Protection (RCBO) Part 8/ Safety Circuit Part 8/Section 5B
Section 2 Safety Devices Part 8/Section 5B
Residual Current Operated Circuit Breaker without Safety Gear Part 8/Section 5A
Integral Overcurrent Protection (RCCB) Part 8/
Sanctioned Plan Part 2
Section 2
Sand Part 6/Section 2
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 21
Sand, Coarse Part 6/Section 2 Set-Back Line Part 2, Part 3
Sand, Fine Part 6/Section 2
Sand, Medium Part 6/Section 2 A line usually parallel to the plot boundaries and laid
down in each case by the Authority, beyond which
Sandwich Concrete Panels Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/
nothing can be constructed towards the site boundaries.
Section 7B
Sandwich, Structural Part 6/Section 3A Sewer Part 9/Section 2
Sanitary Appliances Part 9/Section 2 Shade Factor Part 8/Section 3
Sanitary Land Filling Part 12 Shading Coefficient Part 6/Section 8
Sanitary Waste Part 12 Shake Part 6/Section 3A
Sap Stain Part 6/Section 3A Shallow Area Part 9/Section 1
Sapwood Part 6/Section 3A Shallow Foundation Part 6/Section 2
Scaffold Part 7 Shear Connectors Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/
Scope Creep Part 12 Section 7B
Screen Part 10/Section 1 Shear Force Part 6/Section 6
Secondary Collection Part 12 Shear Lag Part 6/Section 6
Secondary Member Part 6/Section 6 Shear Stress Part 6/Section 6
Secondary Storage Part 12 Shear Wall Part 6/Section 4
Sediment Part 10/Section 1 Sheathing Part 6/Section 5B
Seismic Mass of Floor Part 6/Section 1 Sheave Part 8/Section 5A
Seismic Mass of Structure Part 6/Section 1 Sheet Glass Part 6/Section 8
Seismic Mode Part 8/Section 5A Shelterbelt Part 10/Section 1
Seismic Stand-by Mode Part 8/Section 5A Shielding Effect Part 8/Section 2
Seismic Trigger Level Part 8/Section 5A Shock Current Part 8/Section 2
Seismic Weight of Floor Part 6/Section 1. Short-Circuit Current Part 8/Section 2
Seismic Weight of Structure Part 6/Section 1 Short Column Part 6/Section 5B
Seismic Zone Factor Part 6/Section 1 Shrinkage Loss Part 6/Section 5B
Segregation Part 9/Section 3 Shrub Part 10/Section 1
Seismic Zone and Seismic Coefficient Part 6/ Shutdown/Outage Part 12
Section 4 Sick Building Syndrome (SBS) Part 8/Section 3
Selective Collective Automatic Operation Part 8/ Sign Part 10/Section 2
Section 5A
Sign Area Part 10/Section 2
Self-Compacting Concrete Part 6/Section 7A,
Sign Copy Part 10/Section 2
Part 6/Section 7B
Sign Face Part 10/Section 2
Semi-Compact Section Part 6/Section 6
Sign Structure Part 10/Section 2
Semi-Detached Building Part 3
Signal Operation Part 8/Section 5A
Separation Section Part 6/Section 4
Silt Part 6/Section 2
Sensible Cooling Part 8/Section 3
Silver Part 6/Section 3B
Sensible Heat Part 8/Section 3
Single Automatic Operation Part 8/Section 5A
Server Part 8/Section 6
Single Floor Flight Time Part 8/Section 5A
Service Part 8/Section 2
Single Floor Transit Time Part 8/Section 5A
Service Life Part 12
Single-Speed Alternating Current Control Part 8/
Service Lift Part 8/Section 5A
Section 5A
*Service Pipe Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 4
Site (Plot) Part 2, Part 3, Part 4
Service Road Part 2, Part 3
Service Shut-Off Valve (Isolation Valve) Part 9/ A parcel (piece) of land enclosed by definite
Section 4 boundaries.
Serviceability Limit State Part 6/Section 6
Site, Corner Part 3
* Definitions are different. Site, Depth of Part 3
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 23
Standardized Impact Sound Pressure Level Part 8/ Strength Part 6/Section 6
Section 4 Strength Limit State Part 6/Section 6
Standby Supply System Part 8/Section 2 Stress Part 6/Section 6
Standardized Level Difference Part 8/Section 4 Stress Analysis Part 6/Section 6
Static Pressure Part 8/Section 3, Part 9/Section 1 Stress at Transfer Part 6/Section 5B
Station Part 4 Stress Cycle Counting Part 6/Section 6
Stationary Equipment Part 8/Section 2 Stress Range Part 6/Section 6
Station Platform Part 4 Stress Spectrum Part 6/Section 6
Step Voltage Part 8/Section 2 Stressed Skin Part 6/Section 3A
Stickability Part 6/Section 6 Strip Foundation/Footing Part 6/Section 2
Stiffener Part 6/Section 6 Structural Adequacy for Fire Part 6/Section 6
Stock/Standard Sizes Part 6/Section 8 Structural Analysis Part 6/Section 6
Stop Tap Part 9/Section 1 Structural Element Part 6/Section 3A
Stop-Cock Part 9/Section 1 Structural Grades Part 6/Section 3A
Storage Part 9/Section 3 Structural Timber Part 6/Section 3A
Storage Buildings Part 6/Section 1 Structure Borne Noise Part 8/Section 4
Storage Tank Part 9/Section 1 Structure, Permanent Part 6/Section 3A
Storey Part 3 Structure, Temporary Part 6/Section 3A
Strut Part 6/Section 6
The portion of a building included between the surface
Stud Part 6/Section 3A
of any floor and the surface of the floor next above it,
or if there be no floor above it, then the space between Studio Apartment Part 9/Section 1
any floor and the ceiling next above it. Subsoil Water Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
Subsoil Water Drain Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/
Storey, Topmost Part 3 Section 2
Street Part 2, Part 3 Sub-zero Temperature Regions Part 9/Section 1
Suction Part 6/Section 1
Any means of access, namely, highway, street, lane, Sullage Part 9/Section 2
pathway, alley, stairway, passageway, carriageway,
Supply Air Part 8/Section 3
footway, square, place or bridge, whether a thoroughfare
or not, over which the public have a right of passage or Supply Pipe Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
access or have passed and had access uninterruptedly Supports Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
for a specified period, whether existing or proposed in Surface Coefficient Part 11
any scheme and includes all bunds, channels, ditches, Surface Cracking Part 6/Section 3B
storm-water drains, culverts, sidewalks, traffic islands, Surface Resistance Part 11
roadside trees and hedges, retaining walls, fences,
Surface Water Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2
barriers and railings within the street lines.
Surface Water Drain Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/
Street/Outdoor Furniture Part 10/Section 1 Section 2
Street Level or Grade Part 2, Part 3 Surge Part 8/Section 2
Surge Protective Devices Part 8/Section 2
The officially established elevation or grade of the Surveillance Part 12
centre line of the street upon which a plot fronts and if Surveillance Devices Part 12
there is no officially established grade, the existing Suspension Ropes Part 8/Section 5A
grade of the street at its mid-point.
Sustainability Part 11
Street Line Part 2, Part 3, Part 10/Section 2 Sustainable Buildings Part 11
Sustainable Development Part 11
The line defining the side limits of a street. Swale Part 10/Section 1
Sway Part 6/Section 6
Strain Part 6/Section 6 Sway Member Part 6/Section 6
Strain Hardening Part 6/Section 6 Swimming Pool User Load Part 9/Section 1
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 25
U Visual Light Transmittance (VLT) Part 11
Ultimate Load Capacity Part 6/Section 2 Visual Strobes/Flashing Part 4
Ultimate Limit State Part 6/Section 6 Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Part 11
Ultimate Stress Part 6/Section 6 Voltage, Extra Low (ELV) Part 8/Section 2
Underground Cable Vault (UCV) Part 8/Section 6 Voltage, Extra High (EHV) Part 8/Section 2
Under-Reamed Pile Part 6/Section 2 Voltage, High (HV) Part 8/Section 2
Unframed Glazing Part 6/Section 8 Voltage, Low (LV) Part 8/Section 2
Unisex Accessible Toilet Part 3 Voltage, Medium (MV) Part 8/Section 2
Unit Part 6/Section 7A, Part 6/Section 7B Voltage, Nominal (of an Installation) Part 8/
Universal Design Part 3 Section 2
Unloaded End Distance Part 6/Section 3B Volume to Plot Area Ratio (VPR) Part 3, Part 4
Unobstructed Width Part 3
The ratio of volume of building, measured in cubic
Unobstructed Width, Door Part 3 metre, to the area of the plot, measured in square metre,
Unsafe Building Part 2 and expressed in metre.
Usable Wall Space Part 8/Section 2
W
Utility Building Part 8/Section 2
Wading Pool Part 9/Section 1
Utilization Factor (Coefficient of Utilization)
Walks (Walkways) Part 3
Part 8/Section 1
Wall Hole Part 7
UV Transmittance Part 6/Section 8
Wall Opening Part 7
V Wall Sign Part 10/Section 2
V95 Part 8/Section 5A Wall Thickness Part 6/Section 3B
Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) Cooling Wall Tie Part 6/Section 4
System Part 8/Section 3 Wane Part 6/Section 3A
Variable Voltage Motor Control (Generator Field Warning Pipe Part 9/Section 1
Control) Part 8/Section 5A Warp Part 6/Section 3A
Velocity Part 8/Section 5A, Part 8/Section 5B Wash-Out Valve Part 9/Section 1
Velocity, Capture Part 8/Section 1 Waste Part 11
Velocity Pressure Part 8/Section 3 Waste Appliance Part 9/Section 2
Velocity Profile Part 6/Section 1 Waste Pipe Part 9/Section 2
Veneered Wall Part 6/Section 4 Waste-Water (Sullage) Part 9/Section 2
Vent Pipe Part 9/Section 4 Water Based Systems Part 4
Vent Stack/Vent Pipe Part 9/Section 2 Water Closet Part 3, Part 9/Section 2
Vent System Part 9/Section 2 Water Closet Compartment/Toilet Cubicle Part 3
Ventilation Part 4, Part 8/Section 1 Water Hammer Arrestor Part 9/Section 1
Venting Fire Part 4 Water Hardness Part 8/Section 3
Verandah Part 3 Water Level Part 9/Section 1
Verandah Sign Part 10/Section 2 Water Main (Street Main) Part 9/Section 1
Vermi-composting Part 9/Section 3 Water Mist Systems Part 4
Vertical Fenestration Part 6/Section 8 Water Outlet Part 9/Section 1
Vertical Load Carrying Frame Part 6/Section 4 Water Seal Part 9/Section 2
Vertical Pipe Part 9/Section 1, Part 9/Section 2 Water Supply System Part 9/Section 1
Vertical Solar Angle (VSA) Part 11 Water Treatment Part 8/Section 3
Very Small Aperture Terminal Part 8/Section 6 Waterworks Part 9/Section 1
Vibration Part 8/Section 5A, Part 8/Section 5B Wavelength Part 8/Section 4
Vibration Isolation Part 8/Section 4 Way Finding Part 3
Visual Contrast Part 3 Weatherproof Part 8/Section 2
Visual Field Part 8/Section 1
PART 1 DEFINITIONS 27
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION
SECTION 1 GENERAL
1 SCOPE
5
2 TERMINOLOGY
5
3 APPLICABILITY OF THE CODE
6
4 INTERPRETATION
7
5 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS, METHODS OF DESIGN AND
CONSTRUCTION, AND TESTS
7
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 2) covers the administrative aspects, such as applicability of the Code, organization of building
department for enforcement of the Code, procedure for obtaining development and building permits, and
responsibility of the owner and all related professionals.
A need for codifying and unifying administrative provisions in different development control rules and building
byelaws had been felt, particularly in regard to the applicability of such provisions, desirable qualifications for
the enforcing Authority and the representative of the owner and responsibilities and duties of the Authority and
the owner.
It is expected that the town and country planning department, department of local bodies, municipal administration,
urban development, etc, as the case may be will coordinate the administrative provisions of this Part and the same
given in the State Town and Country Planning Act, Municipalities Act/Municipal Corporation/Local Bodies Act,
Development Authorities Act, etc.
This Part recommends the setting up of a Board of Appeal. The Board of Appeal gives the owner/architect/
engineer an opportunity to defend the schemes which are based on conventional or new methods of design and
construction or using new materials, which have been otherwise rejected by the Authority.
This Part also emphasizes the need for setting up an Arts Commission for metropolitan areas to safeguard existing
aesthetics in the event of new schemes proposed for buildings of public importance or buildings coming up in an
important area near historic/monumental buildings. The Commission can assist the civic authorities in reviewing
plans for development from the stand point of assuring good taste and regard for often threatened natural beauties.
The Commission can serve as a means whereby the government and public bodies and individuals could get
advice on artistic questions in connection with building schemes.
The first version of this Part was brought out in 1970, which was subsequently revised in 1983 and 2005. As a
result of implementing 1970 version of this Part in rewriting building byelaws and development control rules of
some municipal corporations and municipalities, some useful suggestions were emerged. These were incorporated
in the first revision to the extent possible. The significant changes in 1983 version of this Part included the new
administrative provisions related to development control rules, additional information to be furnished/indicated
in the building plan for multistoreyed and special buildings and modified provisions regarding submission of
building plans by Government Departments to the Authority.
In the second revision, number of modifications were incorporated based on the experience gained over the years
then. The provisions of this Part were thoroughly reviewed in the context of the natural calamities faced by the
country then, such as the devastating earthquake in Gujarat in the year 2001, and provisions were modified
accordingly to further ensure structural adequacy of the buildings. Structural design of buildings in accordance
with the provisions of the Code and construction and supervision thereof by competent professionals to ensure
structural safety were given due importance in the revision. Other significant modifications incorporated in the
2005 revision were: inclusion of the concept of team of building officials; provision of single window approach
for permit for all services; provisions regarding computerization of approval process for building permit; provision
to certify safety of buildings against natural disaster by engineer/structural engineer and owner; provision of two
stage permit for high rise residential buildings and special buildings; provisions regarding inspection of completed
and occupied building by the Authority from safety point of view; provision empowering engineers/architects for
sanctioning plans of residential buildings up to 500 m2; and modifications in the provisions for architectural
control to effectively take care of the urban aesthetics, and inclusion of architectural engineer, landscape architect
and urban designer among the registered professionals for the concerned applicable works.
In this third revision, number of modifications have been incorporated based on the experience gained over the
years specially in the implementation of techno-administrative and techno-legal regime encountered and with a
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 3
view to strengthening the structural safety mechanism in building permit process. The significant modifications
made in this revision are as follows:
a) Geotechnical engineer has been included among the registered professionals for the concerned applicable
works;
b) With a view to ensuring ease of doing business in the built environment sector, a detailed provision for
streamlining the approval process in respect of different agencies has been incorporated in the form of an
integrated approval process through single window approach for enabling expeditious approval process,
avoiding separate clearances from various authorities;
c) Provision on computerization of approval process has been detailed enabling online submission of plans,
drawings and other details, and sanction thereof aiding in quicker approval process;
d) Provision has been made for getting the design, drawings and details of buildings peer reviewed/proof
checked in case of important projects and projects having high complexity and sensitivity, before approving
the same;
e) Responsibility of the owner seeking occupancy permit from the Authority has been detailed;
f) Provision of periodic audit of designated public buildings for accessibility for the elderly and persons
with disabilities, has been included;
g) Qualification and competence of builder/constructor has been added along with the form for their
engagement;
h) Form for certificate for subsurface investigation, wherever applicable, has been added;
j) Form for certificate for completed structural design work as per structural safety requirements has been
included;
k) Form for certificate for supervision of work has been rationalized;
m) Form for certificate for completed work by constructor, has been added; and
n) Form for completion certificate has been rationalized.
The Sectional Committee responsible for the revision of the Code had examined the use of the words surveyor/
building surveyor/supervisor, etc, under various building byelaws with varying qualifications in different states.
It was decided not to use the generic word surveyor or such other words. The Sectional Committee had, on the
other hand recommended association of various professionals for various job responsibilities depending upon
their qualifications/competence.
The Sectional Committee observed that this Part has been so formulated as to ensure quality and safety in the
whole gamut of activities primarily divided into planning, design, execution and supervision. This has been ensured
by obtaining certification from the registered professionals involved in planning, design and supervision. Apart
from these, various other persons are involved whose contribution may be duly taken into account depending on
the type, nature, magnitude and complexity of the project, such as fire protection engineer, security system specialist,
environment specialist/sustainability specialist, accessibility specialist, interior designer, project management
consultant, etc, in proper planning, design, erection, commissioning and operation of buildings and built
environment.
Also, it was noted that the words licencing/licensed, etc were in use by local bodies in different states. The
Sectional Committee, however, decided for use of words registration/registered, etc for the same, which may be
adopted uniformly. The registration requirements of professionals are given in Annex A.
2.5 Building Any structure for whatsoever purpose 2.12 Occupancy or Use Group The principal
and of whatsoever materials constructed and every part occupancy for which a building or a part of a building
thereof whether used as human habitation or not and is used or intended to be used; for the purposes of
includes foundation, plinth, walls, floors, roofs, classification of a building according to occupancy, an
chimneys, plumbing and building services, fixed occupancy shall be deemed to include the subsidiary
platforms, verandah, balcony, cornice or projection, occupancies which are contingent upon it.
part of a building or anything affixed thereto or any 2.13 Occupier It includes any person for the time
wall enclosing or intended to enclose any land or space being, paying or liable to pay rent or any portion of
and signs and outdoor display structures. Tents/ rent of the building in respect of which the ward is used,
Shamianahs, tarpaulin shelters, etc, erected for or compensation or premium on account of the
temporary and ceremonial occasions with the occupation of such building and also a rent-free tenant,
permission of the Authority shall not be considered as but does not include a lodger, and the words occupy
building. and occupation do not refer to the lodger.
2.6 Building, Height of The vertical distance An owner living in or otherwise using his own building
measured, in the case of flat roofs from the average shall be deemed to be the occupier thereof.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 5
2.14 Operational Construction/Installation A by definite boundaries.
construction/installation put up by Government
2.25 Street Any means of access, namely, highway,
Departments for operational purposes (see 12.1.2.1).
street, lane, pathway, alley, stairway, passageway,
2.15 Owner A person, a group of persons or a body carriageway, footway, square, place or bridge, whether
having a legal interest in land and/or building thereon. a thoroughfare or not, over which the public have a
This includes freeholders, leaseholders or those holding right of passage or access or have passed and had access
a sublease, who will have a legal right to occupation uninterruptedly for a specified period, whether existing
and have liabilities in respect of safety or building or proposed in any scheme and includes all bunds,
condition. channels, ditches, storm-water drains, culverts,
sidewalks, traffic islands, roadside trees and hedges,
In case of lease or sublease holders, as far as ownership
retaining walls, fences, barriers and railings within the
with respect to the structure is concerned, the structure
street lines.
of a flat or structure on a plot belongs to the allottee/
lessee till the allotment/lease subsists. 2.26 Street Level or Grade The officially
established elevation or grade of the centre line of the
2.16 Permit A permission or authorization in writing
street upon which a plot fronts and if there is no
by the Authority to carry out work regulated by the
officially established grade, the existing grade of the
Code.
street at its mid-point.
2.17 Registered Architect, Engineer, Structural
2.27 Street Line The line defining the side limits of
Engineer, Geotechnical Engineer, Supervisor, Town
a street.
Planner, Landscape Architect, Urban Designer
A qualified architect, engineer, structural engineer, 2.28 To Erect To erect a building means,
geotechnical engineer, supervisor, town planner,
a) to erect a new building on any site whether
landscape architect or urban designer who has been
previously built upon or not;
registered by the Authority or by the body governing
such profession and constituted under a statute, as may b) to re-erect any building of which portions
be applicable. The registration requirements of these above the plinth level have been pulled down,
professionals shall be as given in Annex A. burnt or destroyed.
2.22 Service Road A road/lane provided at the rear 3.4 Where the whole or any part of the building is
or side of a plot for service purposes. demolished the Code applies to any remaining part and
to the work involved in demolition.
2.23 Set-Back Line A line usually parallel to the
plot boundaries and laid down in each case by the 3.5 Where a building is altered (see 12.4 and 12.4.1),
Authority, beyond which nothing can be constructed the Code applies to the whole building whether existing
towards the site boundaries. or new except that the Code applies only to part, if that
part is completely self contained with respect to
2.24 Site (Plot) A parcel (piece) of land enclosed facilities and safety measures required by the Code.
6 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
3.6 Where the occupancy of a building is changed the 5.3.1 Test methods shall be specified by the Code for
Code applies to all parts of the building affected by the the materials or design or construction in question. If
change. there are no appropriate test methods specified in the
Code, the Authority shall determine the test procedure.
3.7 Where development of land is undertaken the Code
For methods of test for building materials, reference
applies to the entire development of land.
may be made to Part 5 Building Materials of the Code.
3.8 Existing Buildings/Development
5.3.2 Copies of the results of all such tests shall be
Nothing in the Code shall require the removal, alteration retained by the Authority for a period of not less than
or abandonment, nor prevent continuance of the use or two years after the acceptance of the alternative
occupancy of an existing building/development, unless material.
in the opinion of the Authority, such building/
development constitutes a hazard to the safety of the SECTION 2 ORGANIZATION AND
adjacent property or the occupants of the building itself. ENFORCEMENT
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 7
in any case be less than those prescribed in Annex A. to require the necessary safeguards during construction,
to require adequate exit facilities in existing buildings
6.5.1 In small local bodies having insufficient resources
and to ensure compliance with all the requirements of
to appoint such officials with the above qualifications,
safety, health and general welfare of the public as
two or three such bodies contiguously located could
included in the Code.
join together and share the services of one team of
building officials. 7.3 Right of Entry
6.6 Qualifications of Assistant Upon presentation of proper credentials and with
advance notice, the team of building officials or its duly
No person shall be appointed as assistant unless he has
authorized representative may enter at any reasonable
got the qualifications prescribed in Annex A for a
time any building or premises to perform any duty
registered supervisor.
imposed upon him by the Code.
6.7 Restriction on Employees
7.4 Inspection
No official or employee connected with the department
The team of building officials shall make all the
of buildings except one whose only connection is that
required inspections or it may accept reports of
of a member of the Board of Appeals, established
inspections of authoritative and recognized services or
under 8 shall be engaged directly or indirectly in a work
individuals; and all reports of inspections shall be in
connected with the furnishing of labour, materials or
writing and certified by a responsible officer of such
appliances for the construction, alteration or
authoritative service or by the responsible individual
maintenance of a building, or the preparation of plans
or engage any such expert opinion as he may deem
or of specifications thereof unless he is the owner of
necessary to report upon unusual technical issues that
building; nor shall such official or employee engage in
may arise, subject to the approval of the Authority.
any work which conflicts with his official duties or with
the interests of the department. 7.5 Construction Not According to Plan
6.8 Records Should the team of building officials determine at any
stage that the construction is not proceeding according
Proper records of all applications received, permits and
to the sanctioned plan or is in violation of any of the
orders issued, inspections made shall be kept and copies
provisions of the Code, or any other applicable Code
of all papers and documents connected with the
Regulation, Act or Byelaw, it shall notify the owner,
administration of its duties shall be retained and all
and all further construction shall be stayed until
such records shall be open to public inspection at all
correction has been effected and approved.
appropriate times.
7.5.1 Should the owner fail to comply with the
7 POWER AND DUTIES OF TEAM OF requirements at any stage of construction, the Authority
BUILDING OFFICIALS shall issue a notice to the owner asking explanation for
The team of building officials shall enforce all the non-compliance. If the owner fails to comply within
provisions of the Code and shall act on any question 14 days from the date of receiving the notice, the
relative to the mode or manner of construction and the Authority shall be empowered to cancel the building
materials to be used in the erection, addition, alteration, permit issued and shall cause notice of such cancellation
repair, removal, demolition, installation of service to be securely pasted upon the said construction, if the
equipment and the location, use, occupancy and owner is not traceable at his address given in the notice.
maintenance of all buildings except as may otherwise Pasting of such a notice shall be considered sufficient
be specifically provided. notification of cancellation to the owner thereof. No
further work shall be undertaken or permitted upon such
7.1 Application and Permits construction until a valid building permit thereafter has
been issued. If the owner, in violation of the notice for
The team of building officials shall receive all
cancellation, continues the construction, the Authority
applications and issue permits (see 12.10) for the
may take all necessary means to stop such work and
erection and alteration of buildings and examine the
further appropriate actions including demolitions. The
premises for which such permits have been issued and
owner shall, however, have right to appeal against
enforce compliance with the Code.
cancellation of permit, to the board of appeal, within a
7.2 Building Notices and Orders stipulated period, as may be decided by the Authority.
The team of building officials shall issue all necessary 7.6 Modification
notices or orders to remove illegal or unsafe conditions,
Wherever practical difficulties are involved in carrying
8 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
out any provision of the Code, the team of building expense of the owner. The buildings coming up in the
officials may vary or modify such provisions upon vicinity of an aerodrome in violation of the height
application of the owner or his representative provided restriction laid down by the Directorate General of Civil
the spirit and intent of the Code shall be observed and Aviation shall be accordingly demolished/brought
public welfare and safety be assured. The application within the limits prescribed by DGCA rules.
for modification and the final decision of the team of
9.1.3 The registered architect, engineer, structural
building officials shall be in writing and shall be
engineer, supervisor, town planner, landscape architect,
officially recorded with the application for the permit
urban designer and utility service engineer (see
in the permanent records of the Department of Building
Annex A) responsible for the services rendered for
Inspection.
supervision of the construction/development and for
7.7 Occupancy Violations the completion certificate; in the event of violation of
the provisions of the Code, shall be liable to penalties
Wherever any building is being used contrary to as prescribed by the Authority including cancellation
provisions of the Code, the team of building officials of registration done by it or make such recommendation
may order such use discontinued and the building or to the statutory body governing such profession.
portion thereof, vacated by the notice served on any
person, causing such use to be discontinued. Such 9.2 Further Obligation of Offender
person shall discontinue the use within 10 days after
The conviction of any person for an offence under the
receipt of such notice or make the building or portion
provision of 9.1 shall not relieve him from the duty of
thereof, comply with the requirements of the Code.
carrying out the requirements or obligations imposed
8 BOARD OF APPEALS on him by virtue of the provisions of the Code; and if
such requirements or obligations are not complied with
In order to determine the suitability of alternative in accordance with an order made under provisions
materials or methods of design or construction and to of 9.1, the Authority under the provisions of the Code
provide for reasonable interpretation of the provisions may, if necessary and advisable, enter upon the premises
of the Code or in the matter of dispute relating to an in respect of which a conviction has been made and
ongoing construction vis-a-vis the sanctioned plan, a carry out at the expense of the convicted person, the
Board of Appeals consisting of members who are requirements or obligations referred to in the said order
qualified by experience and training and to pass and the expense, if not paid on demand, may be
judgement upon matters pertaining to building recovered with cost in a court.
construction, shall be appointed by the Authority. A
representative of the team of building officials shall be 9.3 Conviction No Bar to Further Prosecution
an ex-officio member and shall act as secretary to the
The conviction of any person under the provisions of
Board. The Board shall adopt reasonable rules and
this part for failing to comply with any of the said
regulations for conducting its investigations and shall
requirements or obligations shall not operate as a bar
render all decisions and findings in writing to the team
to further prosecution under this part for any subsequent
of building officials with a duplicate copy to the
failure on the part of such person to comply.
appellant and may recommend such modifications as
are necessary. 10 POWER TO MAKE RULES
9 VIOLATIONS AND PENALTIES The Authority may make rules for carrying out the
provisions and intentions of the Code provided that any
9.1 Offences and Penalties
rule shall not be in direct/indirect conflict or nullify/
9.1.1 Any person who contravenes any of the provisions dilute any of the provisions of the Code.
of the Code or any requirements of obligations imposed
on him by virtue of the Code, or who interferes with or SECTION 3 PERMIT AND INSPECTION
obstructs any person in the discharge of his duties, shall
be guilty of an offence and the Authority shall levy 11 DEVELOPMENT/BUILDING PERMIT
suitable penalty or take other actions as per the Code
11.1 Permit Required
(see also 7.5 and 15).
NOTE The penalty may be in the form of collection of arrears
11.1.1 No person shall carry out any development, erect,
of tax. re-erect or make alterations or demolish any building
or cause the same to be done without first obtaining a
9.1.2 The buildings/developments violating any separate permit for each such development/building
applicable statutory rules shall be demolished/brought from the Authority. No permit shall, however, be
within the limits as prescribed in such rules at the required for works referred to in 12.1.2.1 and 12.4.1.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 9
11.1.2 The development/building permit shall take into information on categorization of monuments with
cognizance the provisions under the relevant Town concerned degree of restrictions, by National
Planning Act/Development Act/Municipal Act/any Monuments Authority; etc.
other applicable statutes for layout, building plans,
The above could be further facilitated, if such
water supply, sewerage, drainage, electrification, etc,
requirements in respect of clearances from all such
as provided in the said Act/statute. Also, if so directed
authorities be integrated in the Development Control
by the Authority, the permit shall take care of the need
Rules of the Master/Development Plan of the concerned
for landscape development plan in the layout and
city/town. The areas unaffected by any of the
building plans.
restrictions should be clearly marked out and mapped,
11.1.3 Specific approvals shall be obtained from preferably on a GIS platform. Area zones of differential
Airports Authority of India, Ministry of Environment, control regulations (within the city) by any of these
Forest and Climate Change, Fire Services Department, authorities may also be mapped accordingly so as to
Pollution Control Board, designated authorities under result in a composite map of the city/town with various
Factories Act/Cinema Regulation Act, Urban Arts control regulations by different authorities, clearly
Commission, designated Coastal Regulation Zone marked on the map. The sites which are located outside
Authority, Archaeological Survey of India, Heritage the restricted/regulated areas would not require availing
Committee and any such other authority as may be clearance from the respective authorities.
applicable. Approval of Fire Services Department shall
Such integrated approval by the Authority shall be
be required for buildings of height 15 m or above and
accorded within the time limit of 30 days
for such other buildings/special buildings referred to
(see also 12.10.2).
in Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of the Code.
11.1.5 The Authority shall permit a registered architect/
11.1.4 Integrated Approval Process
engineer to approve the building proposals including
11.1.4.1 In order to facilitate ease of doing business plans, and certify completion of building for issue of
and ensure efficient and expeditious clearance from related regulatory building permits and occupancy
above bodies with the concept of single window certificate for residential buildings designed by self or
clearance approach and thereby final approval by the otherwise, on plot size up to 500 m2. The responsibility
Authority within the stipulated time frame, the Authority of compliance with respect to provisions of Code shall
may constitute a Development/Building Permit rest with the registered architect/engineer. However,
Approval Committee consisting of representatives of the plans shall be required to be submitted to the
the team of building officials, representatives of all Authority for information and records.
bodies/organizations from whom clearance for NOTE Where the experience clearly shows that satisfactory
development/building permit clearance is required. building permit activities are being carried out through the
above empowerment of professionals, the Authority may extend
Recommendations from such Committee shall be such provision for larger areas and other building occupancies.
summarily utilized by the team of building officials in
sanctioning process. The Committee may meet once in 11.2 Pre-Code Development/Building Permit
15/30 days depending upon the work load. The first
If any development/building, permit for which had been
response/invalid notice/non-compliance intimation
issued before the commencement of the Code, is not
shall be issued by the Authority to the owner within
wholly completed within a period of three years from
30 days of submission of the plans to the Authority
the date of such permit, the said permission shall be
(see also 12.10.2).
deemed to have lapsed and fresh permit shall be
11.1.4.2 It would be more appropriate that all the above necessary to proceed further with the work in
authorities may make the information available in accordance with the provisions of the Code.
public domain delineating clearly the situations
requiring their clearance. This information being 12 APPLICATION FOR DEVELOPMENT/
available to the Authority as well, should be utilized BUILDING PERMIT
by the Authority in deciding on the required sanction 12.1 Application
or otherwise without the need to go to the above
multiple authorities. This can be achieved by providing, Every owner who intends to develop, erect, re-erect or
for necessary reference of the Authority, simplified make alterations in any place in a building shall give
environmental guidelines by the Ministry of an application in writing to the Authority of his said
Environment, Forest and Climate Change; colour coded intention in the prescribed form (see Annex B) and such
zoning maps for Airports depicting restrictions imposed notice shall be accompanied by plans and statements
near airports, by Airports Authority of India; in triplicate as required under 12.2 and 12.3 except for
special buildings (high rise, non-residential) where
12.1.2 Regarding submission of plans by Government 12.2.1.1 The size of drawing sheets shall be any of those
Departments, the procedure shall be as given in 12.1.2.1 specified in Table 1.
and 12.1.2.2.
Table 1 Drawing Sheet Sizes
12.1.2.1 The operational construction/installation of the (Clause 12.2.1.1)
Government, whether temporary or permanent, which
is essential for the operation, maintenance, development Sl Designation Trimmed Size
No. mm
or execution of any of the following services may be (1) (2) (3)
exempted from the point of view of the byelaws:
i) A0 841 × 1189
a) Railways; ii) A1 594 × 841
iii) A2 420 × 594
b) National highways; iv) A3 297 × 420
c) National waterways; v) A4 210 × 297
vi) A5 148 × 210
d) Major ports;
e) Airways and aerodromes;
12.2.1.2 The plans shall be coloured as specified in
f) Posts and telegraphs, telephones, wireless,
Table 2.
broadcasting, and other like forms of
communications; 12.2.2 Key Plan
g) Regional grid for electricity; A key plan drawn to a scale of not less than 1 : 10 000
h) Defence; and shall be submitted along with the application for a
j) Any other service which the Central/State development/building permit showing the boundary
Government may, if it is of opinion that the locations of the site with respect to neighbourhood
operation, maintenance, development of landmarks. The minimum dimension of the key plan
execution of such service is essential to the shall be not less than 75 mm.
life of the community, by notification, declare
12.2.3 Site Plan
to be a service for the purpose of this clause.
The site plan sent with an application for permit shall
In case of construction/installation where no approvals
be drawn to a scale of not less than 1 : 500 for a site up
are required, the concerned agencies which are
to one hectare and not less than 1 : 1 000 for a site
exempted from seeking approval shall submit the
more than one hectare and shall show,
drawings/plans/details for information and records of
the Authority before construction/installation. The a) the boundaries of the site and of any
provisions of the Code, as applicable, shall however contiguous land belonging to the owner
be followed for all such developments. thereof;
12.1.2.2 However, the following construction of the b) the position of the site in relation to
Government departments do not come under the neighbouring street;
purview of operational construction for the purpose of c) the name of the streets in which the building
exemption under 12.1.2.1: is proposed to be situated, if any;
d) all existing buildings standing on, over or
a) New residential building (other than gate
under the site including service lines;
lodges, quarters for limited essential
operational staff and the like), roads and drains e) the position of the building and of all other
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 11
Table 2 Colouring of Plans
(Clause 12.2.1.2)
Sl Item Site Plan Building Plan
No.
White Plan Blue Print Ammonia Print White Plan Blue Print Ammonia Print
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Plot lines Thick black Thick black Thick black Thick black Thick black Thick black
ii) Existing street Green Green Green
iii) Future street, if any Green dotted Green dotted Green dotted
iv) Permissible building Thick dotted Thick dotted Thick dotted
lines black black black
v) Open spaces No colour No colour No colour No colour No colour No colour
vi) Existing work Black White Blue Black White Blue
(outline)
vii) Work proposed to be Yellow Yellow Yellow hatched Yellow Yellow Yellow hatched
demolished hatched hatched hatched hatched
viii) Proposed work (see Red filled in Red Red Red Red Red
Note 1)
ix) Drainage and Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted Red dotted
sewerage work
x) Water supply work Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted Black dotted
thin thin thin thin thin thin
NOTES
1 For entirely new construction this need not be done; for extension of an existing work this shall apply.
2 For land development, subdivision, layout, suitable colouring notations shall be used which shall be indexed.
buildings (if any) which the applicant intends m) such other particulars as may be prescribed
to erect upon his contiguous land referred to by the Authority.
in (a) in relation to:
12.2.4 Subdivision/Layout Plan
1) the boundaries of the site and in case
where the site has been partitioned, the In the case of development work, the notice shall be
boundaries of the portion owned by the accompanied by the subdivision/layout plan which shall
applicant and also of the portions owned be drawn on a scale of not less than 1 : 500 containing
by others; the following:
2) all adjacent street, buildings (with number a) Scale used and north point;
of storeys and height) and premises within b) Location of all proposed and existing roads
a distance of 12 m of the site and of the with their existing/proposed/prescribed widths
contiguous land (if any) referred to in (a); within the land;
and c) Dimensions of plot along with building lines
3) if there is no street within a distance of showing the setbacks with dimensions within
12 m of the site, the nearest existing street; each plot;
f) the means of access from the street to the d) Location of drains, sewers, public facilities
building, and to all other buildings (if any) and services, and electrical lines, etc;
which the applicant intends to erect upon his e) Table indicating size, area and use of all the
contiguous land referred to in (a); plots in the subdivision/layout plan;
g) space to be left about the building to secure a f) A statement indicating the total area of the site,
free circulation of air, admission of light and area utilized under roads, open spaces for
parks, playgrounds, recreation spaces and
access for scavenging purposes;
development plan reservations, schools,
h) the width of the street (if any) in front and of shopping and other public places along with
the street (if any) at the side or near the their percentage with reference to the total area
buildings; of the site proposed to be subdivided; and
j) the direction of north point relative to the plan g) In case of plots which are subdivided in built-
of the buildings; up areas in addition to the above, the means
k) any physical features, such as wells, drains, of access to the subdivision from existing
etc; and streets.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 13
the permit for Stage 2 from the Authority. 12.4 Notice for Alteration Only
12.2.6 Services Plans When the notice is only for an alteration of the building
(see 3.5), only such plans and statements, as may be
The services plans shall include all details of building
necessary, shall accompany the notice.
and plumbing services, and also plans, elevations and
sections of private water supply, sewage disposal system 12.4.1 No notice and building permit is necessary for
and rainwater harvesting system, if any (see Part 8 the following alterations, and the like which do not
Building Services and Part 9 Plumbing Services of otherwise violate any provisions regarding general
the Code). building requirements, structural stability and fire and
health safety requirements of the Code:
12.2.7 Specifications
a) Opening and closing of a window or door or
Specifications, both general and detailed, giving type
ventilator;
and grade of materials to be used, duly signed by the
b) Providing intercommunication doors;
registered architect, engineer, structural engineer or
c) Providing partitions;
supervisor shall accompany the application
d) Providing false ceiling;
(see Annex B).
e) Gardening;
12.2.8 Structural Design Sufficiency Certificate f) White washing;
g) Painting;
The application shall be accompanied by structural
h) Re-tiling and re-roofing;
sufficiency certificate in the prescribed form (see
j) Plastering and patch work;
Annex C) signed by the engineer/structural engineer
k) Re-flooring; and
(see Annex A) and the owner jointly to the effect that
m) Construction of sunshades on ones own land.
the building is safe against various loads, forces and
effects including due to natural disasters such as 12.5 Fees
earthquakes, landslides, cyclones, floods, etc as per
National Building Code of India and its Part 6 No notice as referred to in 12.1 shall be deemed valid
Structural Design and other relevant Codes. The unless and until the person giving notice has paid the
engineer/structural engineer shall also have the details fees to the Authority and an attested copy of the receipt
to substantiate his design. of such payment is attached with the notice.
NOTE The fees may be charged as a consolidated fee. In the
12.2.9 Execution and Supervision
event of a building/development permit is not issued, the fees
The notice shall be further accompanied by a certificate so paid shall not be returned to the owner, but he shall be allowed
to re-submit it without any fees after complying with all the
in the prescribed form (see Annex D) by a builder/ objections raised by the Authority within a period of one year
constructor (see Annex A) undertaking the execution. from the date of rejection after which fresh fees shall have to
be paid.
The notice shall also be accompanied by a certificate
in the prescribed form (see Annex E) by the registered 12.6 Duration of Sanction
architect/engineer/structural engineer/supervisor/town
planner (see Annex A) undertaking the supervision The sanction once accorded shall remain valid up to
(see 9.1.3). three years. The permit shall be got revalidated before
the expiration of this period. Revalidation shall be
12.3 Preparation and Signing of Plans subject to the rules then in force.
The registered architect/engineer/supervisor/town 12.7 Deviations During Construction
planner/landscape architect/urban designer/utility
service engineer shall prepare and duly sign the plans If during the construction of a building any departure
as per their competence (see Annex A) and shall indicate (excepting for items as given in 12.4.1) from the
his/her name, address, qualification and registration sanctioned plan is intended to be made (see 7.5),
number as allotted by the Authority or the body sanction of the Authority shall be obtained before the
governing such profession. The structural plans and change is made. The revised plan showing the
details shall also be prepared and duly signed by the deviations shall be submitted and the procedure laid
competent professionals like registered engineer/ down for the original plan heretofore shall apply to all
structural engineer (see Annex A). The plans shall also such amended plans except that the time limit specified
be duly signed by the owner indicating his address. The under 12.10.2 shall be three weeks in such cases.
type and volume of buildings/development work to be
undertaken by the registered professionals may 12.8 Revocation of Permit
generally be as in Annex A. The Authority may revoke any permit issued under the
Architects, engineers, structural engineers, geotechnical 12.10.4 Once the plan has been scrutinized and
engineers, supervisors, town planners, landscape objections have been pointed out, the owner giving
architect, urban designer, utility service engineer and notice shall modify the plan to comply with the
builder/constructor wherever referred in the Code, shall objections raised and resubmit it. The Authority shall
be registered by the Authority or the body governing scrutinize the re-submitted plan and if there be further
such profession constituted under a statute, as objections, the plan shall be rejected.
competent to do the work for which they are employed.
13 RESPONSIBILITIES AND DUTIES OF THE
A guide for the equivalent technical qualifications and
OWNER
professional experience required for such registration
with the Authority is given in Annex A. In case of 13.1 Neither the granting of the permit nor the approval
building and plumbing services, qualifications for of the drawings and specifications, nor inspections
engineers for utility services shall be as given in A-2.9. made by the Authority during erection of the building
shall in any way relieve the owner of such building
12.9.1 In case the registered professional associated
from full responsibility for carrying out the work in
with the preparation and signing of plans or for
accordance with the requirements of the Code (see 9).
supervision, is being changed during any stage of
building/land development process, the professional 13.2 Every owner shall,
shall intimate the Authority in writing about the further
a) permit the Authority to enter the building or
non-association with the project.
premises for which the permit has been
12.10 Grant of Sanction or Refusal granted at any reasonable time for the purpose
of enforcing the Code;
The Authority may either sanction or refuse the plans b) submit a document of ownership of the site;
and specifications or may sanction them with such
c) obtain, where applicable, from the Authority,
modifications or directions as it may deem necessary
permits relating to building, zoning, grades,
and thereupon shall communicate its decision to the
sewers, water mains, plumbing, signs,
person giving the notice (see Annex F).
blasting, street occupancy, electricity,
12.10.1 The building plans for buildings identified highways, and all other permits required in
in 12.2.5.1 shall also be subject to the scrutiny of the connection with the proposed work;
Fire Authority and the sanction through building permit d) give notice to the Authority of the intention to
shall be given by the Authority after the clearance from start work on the building site (see Annex G);
the Fire Authority (see also 11.1.3). e) give written notice to the Authority intimating
12.10.2 If within 30 days of the receipt of the notice completion of work up to plinth level;
under 12.1 of the Code, the Authority fails to intimate f) submit the certificate of engagement of
in writing to the person, who has given the notice, of builder/constructor(s) for the buildings given
its refusal or sanction, the notice with its plans and in 12.2.5.1 (see Annex D), certificate for sub-
statements shall be deemed to have been sanctioned; surface investigation, where applicable (see
provided the fact is immediately brought to the notice Note 1) (see Annex H), certificate for
of the Authority in writing by the person who has given completed structural design work as per
notice and having not received any intimation from the structural safety requirements (see Annex J);
Authority within fifteen days of giving such written certificate for supervision and execution of
notice. Subject to the conditions mentioned in this work (see Annex K); certificate for completed
clause, nothing shall be construed to authorize any work by builder/constructor(s) (see Annex M)
(see Note); and give written notice to the
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 15
Authority regarding completion of work [see 13.2(f)] for the grant of occupancy certificate.
described in the permit (see Annex N);
14.2.1 The owner/concerned registered architect/
NOTE See 3.1 and 3.1.1 of Part 6 Structural Design,
engineer/structural engineer/town planner will serve a
Section 2 Soils and Foundations of the Code.
notice/completion certificate to the Authority that the
g) give written notice to the Authority in case of
building has been completed in all respects as per the
termination of services of a professional
approved plans. The deviations shall also be brought
engaged by him; and
to the notice of the Authority (with relevant documents).
h) obtain an occupancy permit (see Annex P)
The team of building officials or its duly authorized
from the Authority prior to any,
representative shall then visit the site and occupancy
1) occupancy of the building or part thereof certificate shall be given in one instance.
after construction or alteration of that
building or part, or 14.2.2 The occupancy certificate should clearly state
2) change in the class of occupancy of any the use/type of occupancy of the building. However,
building or part thereof. the applicant can apply for change of use/occupancy
13.2.1 Temporary Occupancy permitted within the purview of the Master Plan/Zonal
Plan/Building Bye laws, where so required.
Upon the request of the holder of the permit, the
Authority may issue a temporary certificate of 14.3 When inspection of any construction operation
occupancy for a building or part thereof, before the reveals that any lack of safety precautions exist, the
entire work covered by permit shall have been Authority shall have right to direct the owner to stop
completed, provided such portion or portions may be the work immediately until the necessary remedial
occupied safely prior to full completion of building measures to remove the violation of safety precautions
without endangering life or public welfare. are taken.
13.3 Documents at Site 14.4 Periodic Occupancy Renewal
13.3.1 Where tests of any materials are made to ensure 14.4.1 For buildings covered in 12.2.5.1, after
conformity with the requirements of the Code, records completion of the building and obtaining the occupancy
of the test data shall be kept available for inspection certificate, periodic inspections of building shall be
during the construction of the building and for such a made by the Fire Authority to ensure the fire safety of
period thereafter as required by the Authority.
the building and compliance with the provisions of fire
13.3.2 The person to whom a permit is issued shall and life safety requirements (see Part 4 Fire and Life
during construction keep pasted in a conspicuous place Safety of the Code). Periodic occupancy renewal
on the property in respect of which the permit was certificate shall be made available by the Authority/
issued, Fire Authority which shall also include safe keep of
a) a copy of the building permit; and firefighting installations and equipment for such
buildings.
b) a copy of the approved drawings and
specifications referred in 12. 14.4.2 All buildings covered under 12.2.5.1 shall be
subjected to periodic physical inspection by a team of
14 INSPECTION, OCCUPANCY PERMIT AND
multi-disciplinary professionals of local Authority. The
POST-OCCUPANCY INSPECTION
work by team of professionals may be outsourced by
14.1 Generally all construction or work for which a the authority to competent professionals as may be
permit is required shall be subject to inspection by the deemed necessary. The team shall ensure the
Authority and certain types of construction involving compliance of byelaws, natural lighting, ventilation, etc
unusual hazards or requiring constant inspection shall besides structural safety, electrical safety and
have continuous inspection by special inspectors accessibility (for designated public buildings and areas
appointed by the Authority. as per 13 of Part 3 Development Control Rules and
14.2 Inspection, where required, shall be made within General Building Requirements of the Code). After
7 days following the receipt of notification, after which checking, the team shall be required to give the
period the owner will be free to continue the certificate for above aspects. If any shortcoming/
construction according to the sanctioned plan. At the deficiencies or violations are noticed during inspection,
first inspection, the Authority shall determine to the the Authority shall ensure the compliance of these
best of its ability that the building has been located in within a specified time frame of six months. If not
accordance with the approved site plans. The final complied with, the building shall be declared unsafe/
inspection of the completion of the work shall be made unfit. The period of inspection shall usually be 3 to 5
within 21 days following the receipt of notification years but in any case not more than 5 years.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 17
the vicinity of other declared/historically important 18.3 The Commission may work in the following
structures, and the scrutiny shall be limited to the manner:
external architectural features only so as to ensure an a) The Commission may select only the
aesthetic continuance of the existing structures with the important buildings as in 18.1 and examine
new. The scrutiny shall not deal with the routine the same. The person responsible for the
building plan scrutiny from other requirements of Code schemes, say an architect or an engineer, may
from the point of view of structural safety and functional examine either alone or with the owner. A
requirements. study of the plans, elevations, models, etc,
should be made. The architect/engineer should
18.2 An Urban Arts Commission shall be established explain in general terms the purposes which
at the city/state level on issues related to urban the building is to serve and the main conditions
aesthetics, through a statute. This statutory authority/ which have influenced him in preparing the
commission established by an Act of State Legislative design.
Assembly, shall accord approval to all major buildings/ b) The Commission after full discussion, may
important development projects having bearing on the communicate their decision in writing to the
urban aesthetics, depending upon the importance of the parties concerned. The Commission may
area with respect to natural or built heritage or projects recommend a change in the whole scheme or
on plot areas above 1 ha and located in specifically suggest modifications in the existing scheme,
identified areas. The Urban Arts Commission shall act if so required.
as guardian of urban architecture; mainly with regard 18.4 The Urban Arts Commission should also be
to building form and envelope, the relationship between charged with advising the city government, on schemes
the building, and the ambient environment vis-a-vis which will beautify the city and add to its cultural
other dependents should be seen in depth. vitality.
ANNEX A
[Foreword and Clauses 2.17, 6.5, 6.6, 9.1.3, 12.2.5.1, 12.2.8,
12.2.9, 12.3 and 12.9]
GUIDE FOR THE QUALIFICATIONS AND COMPETENCE OF PROFESSIONALS
a) Preparation of all plans and information The registered geotechnical engineer shall be competent
connected with building permit. to carry out subsurface investigations and give report
thereof. These may inter-alia include performing
b) Structural details and calculations of buildings
various tests required to determine engineering
including subsurface investigation on plot up
properties of sub-strata and ground water and making
to 500 m2 and up to 5 storeys or 16 m in height.
recommendations about the type of foundation, soil
c) Issuing certificate of supervision and bearing capacity and the depth at which the foundations
completion for all buildings. shall be placed, considering the structural system and
d) Preparation of subdivision/layout plans and loads supplied by the engineer/structural engineer.
related information connected with
development permit of area up to 1 hectare A-2.5 Supervisor
for metro-cities, and 2 hectare for other places. The minimum qualifications for a supervisor shall be
e) Preparation of all service plans and related diploma in civil engineering or architectural
information connected with development assistantship, or the qualification in architecture or
permit. engineering equivalent to the minimum qualification
f) Issuing certificate of supervision for prescribed for recruitment to non-gazetted service by
development of land for all area. the Government of India plus 5 years experience in
building design, construction and supervision.
A-2.3 Structural Engineer
A-2.5.1 Competence
The minimum qualifications for a structural engineer
shall be graduate in civil engineering of recognized The registered supervisor shall be competent to carryout
Indian or foreign university, or Corporate Member of the work related to the building permit as given below:
Civil Engineering Division of Institution of Engineers a) All plans and related information connected
(India), and with minimum 3 years experience in with building permit for residential buildings
structural engineering practice with designing and field on plot up to 200 m2 and up to two storeys or
work. 7.5 m in height; and
NOTE The 3 years experience shall be relaxed to 2 years in b) Issuing certificate of supervision for buildings
the case of post graduate degree of recognized Indian or foreign as per (a).
university in the branch of structural engineering. In case of
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 19
A-2.6 Town Planner carryout the work related to the building permit for
urban design for land areas more than 5 hectare and
The minimum qualification for a town planner shall be
the Associate Membership of the Institute of Town campus area more than 2 hectare. He/she shall also be
Planners or graduate or post-graduate degree in town competent to carryout the work of urban renewal for
and country planning. all areas.
NOTE For smaller areas below the limits indicated above,
A-2.6.1 Competence
association of urban designer may be considered from the point
The registered town planner shall be competent to of view of desired urban design.
carryout the work related to the development permit as
A-2.9 Engineers for Utility Services
given below:
For buildings identified in 12.2.5.1, the work of building
a) Preparation of plans for land subdivision/
and plumbing services shall be executed under the
layout and related information connected with
development permit for all areas. planning, design and supervision of competent
personnel. The qualification for registered mechanical
b) Issuing of certificate of supervision for
engineer (including HVAC), electrical engineer and
development of land of all areas.
plumbing engineers for carrying out the work of Air
NOTE However, for land layouts for development permit conditioning, Heating and Mechanical Ventilation,
above 5 hectare in area, landscape architect shall also be
associated, and for land development infrastructural services Electrical Installations, Lifts and Escalators and Water
for roads, water supplies, sewerage/drainage, electrification, etc, Supply, Drainage, Sanitation and Gas Supply
the registered engineers for utility services shall be associated. installations respectively shall be as given in Part 8
Building Services and Part 9 Plumbing Services of
A-2.7 Landscape Architect
the Code or as decided by the Authority taking into
The minimum qualification for a landscape architect account practices of the national professional bodies
shall be the bachelor, masters degree in landscape dealing with the specialist engineering services.
architecture or equivalent from recognized Indian or
foreign university. Such an approach shall be followed for association of
other/multi-disciplinary professionals for taking inputs
A-2.7.1 Competence and associating with their areas of specialization.
The registered landscape architect shall be competent
A-2.10 BUILDER/CONSTRUCTOR
to carryout the work related to landscape design for
building/development permit for land areas 5 hectare The minimum qualification for the builder/constructor
and above. In case of metro-cities, this limit of land or his representative for execution of respective works
area shall be 2 hectare and above. shall be as given in A-2.1, A-2.2, A-2.3, A-2.4, A-2.5,
NOTE For smaller areas below the limits indicated above, A-2.6, A-2.7, A-2.8 and A-2.9 for the concerned
association of landscape architect may also be considered from professional.
the point of view of desired landscape development.
A-2.10.1 Competence
A-2.8 Urban Designer
The qualified builder/constructor or his representative
The minimum qualification for an urban designer shall
shall be competent to carry out execution of work,
be the masters degree in urban design or equivalent
which shall have the same extent as for supervision by
from recognized Indian or foreign university.
such professional as prescribed in A-2.1.1, A-2.2.1,
A-2.8.1 Competence A-2.3.1, A-2.4.1, A-2.5.1, A-2.6.1, A-2.7.1, A-2.8.1
The registered urban designer shall be competent to and A-2.9.
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable.
2)
A format may be prepared by the Authority for direct use.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 21
ANNEX C
(Clause 12.2.8)
FORM FOR CERTIFICATE FOR STRUCTURAL DESIGN SUFFICIENCY
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building
No. .................................... or to ........................................... on/in Plot No. ...................................... in Colony/
Street ........................................... Mohalla/Bazar/Road ...........................................City ...........................................,
we certify that the structural design of the building for which building plans are being submitted for approval shall
be done and submitted for approval, to satisfy the structural safety requirements for all situations including natural
disasters, as applicable, as stipulated in National Building Code of India and its Part 6 Structural Design and
other relevant Codes; and the information given therein is factually correct to the best of our knowledge and
understanding.
Signature of Signature of
owner with date the registered
engineer/structural
engineer1) with
date and registration No.
Name (in block letters): ........................................... ...........................................
Address : ........................................... ...........................................
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable. The entries shall be in respect of the professional who would do the structural design.
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building
No. ........................................ or to ........................................ on/in Plot No. ........................................ Colony/
Street ........................................ Mohalla/Bazar/Road ........................................City .........................................
I certify that the following builder/constructor is engaged by me towards carrying out/executing the construction:
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 23
ANNEX E
(Clause 12.2.9)
FORM FOR SUPERVISION
I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of building No. ........................
or the ........................ on/in Plot No. ........................ in Colony/Street ........................ Mohalla/Bazar/Road
........................ City ........................ shall be carried out under my supervision and I certify that all the materials
(type and grade) and the workmanship of the work shall be generally in accordance with the general and detailed
specifications submitted along with, and that the work shall be carried out according to the sanctioned plans.
................................................
................................................
................................................
................................................
Date ...................................
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable. The entries shall be in respect of the professional who would supervise the work.
................................................
................................................
................................................
................................................
Sir,
With reference to your application .................................... dated .................................... for grant of permit
for the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in the building No. .................................... or to
.................................... on/in Plot No...........................................in Colony/Street.................................... Mohalla/
Bazar/Road .................................... City..................................... I have to inform you that the sanction has been
granted/refused by the Authority on the following grounds:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
....................................
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 25
ANNEX G
[Clause 13.2 (d)]
FORM FOR NOTICE FOR COMMENCEMENT
I hereby certify that the development, erection, re-erection or material alteration in/of building
No. .................................... or the .................................... on/in Plot No.................................... in Colony/Street
.................................... Mohalla/Bazar/Road .................................... City .................................... will be
commenced on .................................... as per your permission, vide No.................................... dated
.................................... under the supervision of1) .................................... Registered Architect/Engineer/Structural
Engineer/Supervisor/Town Planner/Landscape Architect/Urban Designer2), Registration No.....................................
and in accordance with the plans sanctioned, vide No..................................... dated.................................... .
1)
Only professional who would supervise the work shall be named.
2)
Strike out whichever is not applicable.
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building
No.................................... or to .................................... on/in Plot No. .................................... in Colony/
Street .................................... Mohalla/Bazar/Road ....................................City ...................................., we certify
that we have carried out subsurface investigation at site and have performed various tests required to determine
engineering properties of soil substrata and ground water based on which we have given recommendations about
the type of foundation, soil bearing capacity and the depth at which the foundations shall be placed, considering
the structural system and loads supplied by the structural engineer to enable the engineer/structural engineer to
design the foundations and other structures below ground, as stipulated in National Building Code of India and its
Part 6 Structural Design, Section 2 Soils and Foundations and other relevant Codes.
I am enclosing a copy of the report of subsurface investigation carried out as above and submitted to the
Structural Engineer.
Signature of Signature of
owner with date the registered Engineer/
Structural Engineer/
Geotechnical Engineer1)
and registration No.
with date
Name (in block letters) : .................................... ....................................
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable. The professional who has done the subsurface investigation shall sign.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 27
ANNEX J
[Clause 13.2(f)]
FORM FOR CERTIFICATE FOR COMPLETED STRUCTURAL DESIGN WORK AS PER
STRUCTURAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building
No. .................................... or to .................................... on/in Plot No. .................................... in Colony/
Street .................................... Mohalla/Bazar/Road .................................... City ...................................., we certify
that the structural design, structural drawings and details of the building which has been done by us satisfy the
structural safety requirements for all situations including natural disasters, as applicable, as stipulated in National
Building Code of India and its Part 6 Structural Design and other relevant Codes considering the report of
subsurface investigation, where applicable.
Signature of Signature of
owner with date the registered engineer/
structural engineer1)/
and with date and
registration No.
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable. The professional who has done the structural design shall sign.
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable. The professional who has supervised the work shall sign.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 29
ANNEX M
[Clause 13.2(f)]
FORM FOR CERTIFICATE FOR COMPLETED WORK BY BUILDER/CONSTRUCTOR
With respect to the building work of erection, re-erection or for making alteration in the building
No................................................................. or to....................................on/in Plot No....................................in
Colony/Street ..........................................Mohalla/Bazar/Road ....................................City....................................,
we certify,
a) that the building has been constructed by us according to the sanctioned plans, structural drawings and
details issued to the site by the Engineer/Structural Engineer1); and
b) that the work has been completed with high level of workmanship observing due diligence and all the
materials have been used strictly in accordance with the general and detailed specifications.
1)
Substitute by details of relevant services and the concerned constructor in case of execution of services works.
....................................
Date ....................................
1)
Strike out whichever is not applicable.
PART 2 ADMINISTRATION 31
ANNEX P
[Clause 13.2(h)]
FORM FOR OCCUPANCY PERMIT
The work of erection, re-erection or alteration in/of building No. ...................................or the
...............................on/in Plot No....................................in Colony/Street................................. Mohalla/Bazar/Road
...............................City ...........................completed under the supervision of ................................ Architect/
Engineer/Structural Engineer/Supervisor, Registration No.........................has been inspected by me. The building
can be permitted/not permitted for occupation for.................................occupancy subjected to the following:
1.
2.
3.
One set of completion plans duly certified is returned herewith.
FOREWORD
3
1 SCOPE
9
2 TERMINOLOGY
9
3 LAND USE CLASSIFICATION AND USES PERMITTED
14
4 MEANS OF ACCESS
16
5 COMMUNITY OPEN SPACES AND AMENITIES
19
6 REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS
32
7 CLASSIFICATION OF BUILDINGS
34
8 OPEN SPACES (WITHIN A PLOT)
34
9 AREA AND HEIGHT LIMITATIONS
40
10 OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES
42
11 GREENBELTS, LANDSCAPING AND WATER CONSERVATION
43
12 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OF BUILDINGS
43
13 REQUIREMENTS FOR ACCESSIBILITY IN BUILT ENVIRONMENT FOR
49
ELDERS AND PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES
14 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OF LOW INCOME HOUSING IN URBAN AREAS
57
15 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLUSTER PLANNING FOR HOUSING
57
16 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HABITAT PLANNING IN
57
RURAL AREAS
17 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEVELOPMENT PLANNING IN HILLY
57
AREAS
18 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY
57
19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
57
20 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
57
21 ELECTRICAL AND ALLIED INSTALLATIONS (INCLUDING LIGHTNING
58
PROTECTION OF BUILDINGS AND SOLAR ENERGY UTILIZATION)
22 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND MECHANICAL VENTILATION
58
23 ACOUSTICS, SOUND INSULATION AND NOISE CONTROL
59
24 HEAT INSULATION
59
25 INSTALLATION OF LIFTS, ESCALATORS AND MOVING WALKS
59
26 INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION ENABLED INSTALLATIONS
59
27 PLUMBING SERVICES (INCLUDING SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT)
59
28 SUSTAINABILITY
59
29 ASSET AND FACILITY MANAGEMENT
59
ANNEX A OFF-STREET PARKING SPACES
60
ANNEX B ANTHROPOMETRICS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR
61
ACCESSIBILITY IN BUILT-ENVIRONMENT FOR ELDERS AND
PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES
ANNEX C SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HOUSING IN
136
URBAN AREAS
ANNEX D SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OF CLUSTER PLANNING FOR
140
HOUSING
ANNEX E SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HABITAT
141
PLANNING IN RURAL AREAS
ANNEX F SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DEVELOPMENT PLANNING IN
144
HILLY AREAS
LIST OF STANDARDS
149
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 3) covers development control rules, including such aspects as subdivision and layout rules, land
use classifications, open spaces, area and height limitations, means of access, and parking spaces. This Part also
covers the general building requirements, including those of various parts of buildings.
It is expected that for proper coordination and enforcement of the development control rules and general building
requirements, the departments concerned, namely, the town and country planning department, urban development
authority, urban local body and the building department, will coordinate the total development and building
activity at both organizational and technical levels.
Particular attention is invited to Table 5 on floor area ratio (FAR) limitations. It is emphasized that the floor area
of a single storey building is limited in absolute terms by the type of construction and occupancy class. Also, the
absolute floor areas for different types of construction and different occupancies have a definite ratio among
them. The ratios as recommended in the American Iron and Steel Institute Publication of 1961 Fire protection
through modern building codes have been generally adopted in this Part and Table 5 has been developed on this
basis. This, Table 5 is repeated in Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of the Code also, for convenience of reading.
Limitation of areas and heights of buildings are regulated by specifying floor area ratio (FAR) or floor space index
(FSI) and ground coverage. The significance of the contribution of different types of construction giving different
fire resistances has not been taken cognizance of in specifying FAR for different occupancies, in the present
development control rules and municipal byelaws of the country. Table 5, therefore, gives the comparative ratios
of FAR between types of buildings and occupancy classes and these have been specified mainly from the fire
protection aspect of buildings. To arrive at the actual FAR for different buildings coming up in different areas, the
Authority should further modify them, by taking into consideration other aspects like population density of any
area, parking facilities required, the traffic load (road width) and the services available. The heights of buildings
shall also be regulated, keeping in view the local fire fighting facilities.
In some state byelaws, the FAR (or FSI) has been expressed in the form of percentage. However, the Committee
responsible for the preparation of this Code is of the opinion that, it being a ratio should be expressed only in the
form of a ratio, as done in this Part.
It is particularly to be borne in mind by the Authority that the ratios are definitive and it may assess the particular
FAR for a type of construction and for an occupancy and establish a new table, but retaining the comparative
ratios as given in Table 5.
Keeping in view the enormous problems faced by the country with regard to the ever increasing squatter settlements/
pavement dwellers in urban areas (cities of all sizes), it is imperative that all the urban local bodies and urban
development authorities sooner or later evolve schemes for their rehabilitation. The resources are meagre and the
problems are enormous. There has been a tendency on the part of a number of urban development authorities/
urban local bodies to link space norms with affordability. Affordability is an important criterion but at the same
time a public agency may not ignore the basic minimum needs of the family to be housed (including the mental,
physical and social health of the marginalized groups, which is linked with shelter). The urban local bodies shall
have to evolve appropriate policies for their integration with the overall development process and generate/
allocate resources and more importantly adopt a planning process, which are people friendly and inclusive.
Therefore, keeping in view the needs of low income housing, to cater to Economically Weaker Sections of Society
(EWS) and Low Income Group (LIG), the requirements on planning, design of layout/shelter have been rationalized
and the same are provided in this Part. This information is based on the provisions of IS 8888 (Part 1):1993
Guide for requirements of low income housing: Part 1 Urban areas (first revision).
It is important that the fruits of development are equally shared by all cross-section of the society irrespective of their
age and abilities. This Code therefore covered provisions for buildings and built environment to ensure a barrier-free
Incidental open spaces are mainly open spaces required 2.41 Garage, Private A building or a portion thereof
to be left around and in between two buildings to designed and used for parking of private owned motor
provide lighting and ventilation. driven or other vehicles.
2.29 Detached Building A building detached on all 2.42 Garage, Public A building or portion thereof,
sides. other than a private garage, designed or used for
repairing, servicing, hiring, selling or storing or parking
2.30 Development Development with grammatical motor driven or other vehicles.
variations means the carrying out of building,
engineering, mining or other operations, in, or over, or 2.43 Group Housing Housing for more than one
under land or water, on the making of any material dwelling unit, where land is owned jointly (as in the
change, in any building or land, or in the use of any case of cooperative societies or the public agencies,
building, land, and includes redevelopment and layout such as local authorities or housing boards, etc) and
and subdivision of any land; and to develop shall be the construction is undertaken by one Agency.
construed accordingly. 2.44 Group Open Space Open space within a
2.31 Drain A conduit, channel or pipe for the cluster.
carriage of storm water, sewage, waste water or other Group open space is neither public open space nor
water borne wastes in a building drainage system. private open space. Each dwelling unit around the
2.32 Drainage The removal of any liquid by a cluster open space have a share and right of use in it.
system constructed for the purpose. The responsibility for maintenance of the same is to be
collectively shared by all the dwelling units around.
2.33 Dwelling Unit/Tenement An independent
housing unit with separate facilities for living, cooking 2.45 Habitable Room A room occupied or designed
and sanitary requirements. for occupancy by one or more persons for study, living,
sleeping, eating, kitchen if it is used as a living room,
2.34 Escalator A power driven, inclined, continuous but not including bathrooms, water-closet
moving stairway used for raising or lowering compartments, laundries, serving and store pantries,
passengers. corridors, cellars, attics, and spaces that are not used
2.35 Exit A passage, channel or means of egress frequently or during extended periods.
from any building, storey or floor area to a street or 2.46 Independent Cluster Clusters surrounded
other open space of safety. from all sides by vehicular access roads and/or
2.36 External Faces of Cluster Building edges pedestrian paths (see Fig. 5).
facing the cluster open spaces.
2.37 Fire Separation The distance in metres
measured from the external wall of the building
concerned to the external wall of any other building on
the site, or from other site, or from the opposite side of
a street or other public space for the purpose of
preventing the spread of fire.
2.38 Floor The lower surface in a storey on which
one normally walks in a building. The general term
floor unless specifically mentioned otherwise shall
not refer to a mezzanine floor.
F IG. 5 I NDEPENDENT CLUSTER
2.39 Floor Area Ratio (FAR) The quotient obtained
PART 3 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING REQUIRMENTS 11
2.47 Interlocking Cluster Clusters when joined at 2.56 Open Clusters Clusters where cluster open
back and on sides with at least one side of a cluster spaces are linked to form a continuous open space
common and having some dwelling units opening onto (see Fig. 7).
or having access from the adjacent clusters.
Dwelling units in such clusters should have at least two
sides open to external open space. Houses in an
interlocking cluster may have access, ventilation and
light from the adjacent cluster and should also cater
for future growth (see Fig. 6).
2.53 Mezzanine Floor An intermediate floor 2.62 Parapet A low wall or railing built along the
between two floors of any storey forming an integral edge of a roof or floor.
part of floor below. 2.63 Parking Space An area enclosed or
unenclosed, covered or open, sufficient in size to park
2.54 Occupancy or Use Group The principal
vehicles, together with a drive-way connecting the
occupancy for which a building or a part of a building
parking space with a street or alley and permitting
is used or intended to be used; for the purposes of
ingress and egress of the vehicles.
classification of a building according to occupancy; an
occupancy shall be deemed to include subsidiary 2.64 Partition An interior non-load bearing barrier,
occupancies which are contingent upon it. one storey or part-storey in height.
2.55 Occupancy, Mixed A multiple occupancy 2.65 Plinth The portion of a structure between the
where the occupancies are intermingled. surface of the surrounding ground and surface of the
floor, immediately above the ground.
FIG . 8 (Continued)
9B EXTENT OF PODIUM PROJECTION ALLOWED BEYOND BUILDING ON SIDE HAVING FIRE TNEDER ACCESS
(IF PODIUM IS NOT ACCESSIBLE BY FIRE TENDER)
FIG . 9 (Continued)
FIG . 9 (Continued)
be provided in one place or planned out for the use of than 24 m, the length thereof shall not exceed 2.5 times
the community in clusters or pockets. the average width. However, depending on the
5.1.1 The community open spaces shall be provided configuration of the site, commonly open spaces of
catering to the needs of area of layout, population for different shapes may be permitted by the Authority, as
which the layout is planned and the category of dwelling long as the open spaces provided serve the needs of the
units. The following minimum provision shall be made: immediate community contiguous to the open spaces.
a) 15 percent of the area of the layout, or 5.2.2 In such recreational spaces, a single storeyed
structure as pavilion or gymnasia up to 25 m2 in area
b) 0.3 to 0.4 ha/1 000 persons; for low income
may be permitted; such area may be excluded from FAR
housing, the open spaces shall be 0.3 ha/1 000
calculations.
persons.
5.3 Each recreational area and the structure on it shall
5.2 No recreational space shall generally be less
have an independent means of access. Independent
than 450 m2.
means of access may not be insisted upon if recreational
5.2.1 The minimum average dimension of such space is approachable directly from every building in
recreational space shall be not less than 7.5 m; if the the layout. Further, the building line shall be at least 3 m
average width of such recreational space is less away from the boundary of recreational open space.
2) University campus
Area: 10.00 ha to 60.00 ha
i) Residential (if included) area 25 percent of total land area
ii) Sports and cultural activities 15 percent of total land area
iii) Parks and landscape including green belt 15 percent of total land area
c) Technical education
1) Technical education centre (A) 1 for every 1 000 000 population to
include 1 industrial training institute (ITI) and 1 polytechnic
i) Strength of ITI 400 students
ii) Strength of polytechnic 500 students
iii) Area per technical education centre: 4.00 ha
a) Area for ITI 1.60 ha
b) Area for polytechnic 2.40 ha
d) Professional education
1) Engineering college 1 for every 1 000 000 population
i) Strength of the college 1 500 students
ii) Area per college 6.00 ha
2) Centre for support services for persons with disabilities 1 for every
1 000 000 population
Area 1 000 m2 Max,
subject to availability of land
1) Location
i) Shall not be located on the road having right of way less than 30 m.
ii) Shall be approved by the explosive/fire department.
iii) Special cases in old city areas may be considered based on the approval by
statutory authorities.
2) Area/Size
i) Only filling station 30 m × 17 m
ii) Filling cum service station 36 m × 30 m
iii) Filing cum service station cum workshop 45 m × 36 m
iv) Filling station only for two and three wheelers 18 m × 15 m
b) Compressed natural gas (CNG) filling centre Permitted in all use zones (except
in regional parks and developed district parks) and along the national highways,
state highways and villages identified as growth centres, freight complex and on
proposed major roads.
1) Location
i) Shall not be located on the road having right of way less than 30 m.
ii) Shall be approved by the explosive/fire department.
2) Area/Size for CNG mother station (including building component control 1 080 m2
rooms/office/dispensing room/store, pantry and W.C.) (36 m × 30 m)
e) Fruit and vegetable distribution booth 1 booth for every 5 000 population
Area 250 m2
5.5.5 Police, Civil Defence and Home Guards
5.6 Every layout or subdivision shall take into account 6.2 Damp Sites
the provisions of development plan and if the land is Wherever the dampness of a site or the nature of the
affected by any reservation for public purposes, the soil renders such precautions necessary, the ground
Authority may agree to adjust the location of such surface of the site between the walls of any building
reservations to suit the development. erected thereon shall be rendered damp-proof to the
satisfaction of the Authority.
6 REQUIREMENTS OF PLOTS
6.3 Surface Water Drains
6.1 No building shall be constructed on any site, on Any land passage or other area within the curtilage of
any part of which there is deposited refuse, excreta or a building shall be effectively drained by surface water
other offensive matter objectionable to the Authority, drains or other means.
until such refuse has been removed therefrom and the 6.3.1 The written approval of the Authority shall be
site has been prepared or left in a manner suitable for obtained for connecting any subsoil or surface water
building purposes to the satisfaction to the Authority. drain to a sewer.
7.1.1 Occupancy Classification The exterior open spaces for residential buildings up
to a height of 10 m shall be in accordance with 8.2.1.1
a) Residential; to 8.2.1.3.
b) Educational;
8.2.1.1 Front open space
c) Institutional;
d) Assembly; a) Every building fronting a street shall have a
e) Business; front space, forming an integral part of the site
NOTE ¯ In case a building abuts two or more 3) For row-type buildings, no side open is
streets, the value of open spaces is to be based on required.
the average width of streets, subject to a minimum b) In the case of semi-detached buildings, the
of 1.8 m for Sl No. (ii), (iii) and (iv).
open spaces provided on one side shall be as
b) For streets less than 7.5 m in width, the in 8.2.1.3 (a) (2) and all habitable rooms shall
distance of the building (building line) shall abut either on this side open space or front
be at least 5 m from the centre line of the street and rear open spaces or an interior open space
(see 4.3.5). (see 8.2.5).
NOTE This limiting distance has to be determined by the 8.2.2 The provisions of 8.2.1.2 and 8.2.1.3 are not
Authority for individual road/street widths taking into account
applicable to parking lock-up garages up to 3 m in
the traffic flow.
height located at a distance of 7.5 m from any street
8.2.1.2 Rear open space line or front boundary of the plot.
a) Every residential building shall have a rear 8.2.3 The exterior open spaces for residential buildings
open space, forming an integral part of the of height above 10 m shall be in accordance
site, of an average width of 3.0 m and at no with 8.2.3.1 and 8.2.3.2.
place measuring less than 1.8 m, except that
8.2.3.1 For buildings of height above 10 m, the open
in the case of a back-to-back sites, the width
spaces (side and rear) shall be as given in Table 4. The
of the rear open space shall be 3.0 m
throughout. Subject to the condition of free front open spaces for increasing heights of buildings
ventilation, the open space left up to half the shall be governed by 9.4.1(a).
width of the plot shall also be taken into 8.2.3.2 For tower-like structures, as an alternative
account for calculating the average width of to 8.2.3.1, open spaces shall be as given below:
the rear open space. For plots of depths less
a) Up to a height of 24 m, with one set-back, the
than 9 m, for buildings up to 7 m in height,
open spaces at the ground level, shall be not
the rear open space may be reduced to 1.5 m.
less than 6 m [see Fig. 10A];
b) Rear open space to extend the rear wall
b) For heights between 24 m and 37.5 m with one
The rear open space shall be co-extensive with
set-back, the open spaces at the ground level,
the entire face of the rear wall. If a building
abuts on two or more streets, such rear open shall be not less than 9 m [see Fig. 10B];
space shall be provided throughout the face c) For heights between37.5 m and 70 m with two
of the rear wall. Such rear wall shall be the set-backs, the open spaces at the ground level,
wall on the opposite side of the face of the shall be not less than 12 m [see Fig. 10C];
building abutting on the wider street unless d) For heights between 70 m and 120 m with two
the Authority directs otherwise. set-backs, the open spaces at the ground level,
c) In case of corner plots less than 300 m2 in area, shall be not less than 14 m [see Fig. 10D];
the rear open space should be 2.4 m minimum. e) For heights above 120 m and above with two
set-backs, the open spaces at the ground level,
8.2.1.3 Side open space
shall be not less than 16 m [see Fig. 10E]; and
a) Every semi-detached and detached building f) The deficiency in the open spaces shall be
shall have a permanently open air space, made good to satisfy 8.2.3.1 through the set-
forming an integral part of the site as given backs at the upper levels; these set-backs shall
below: not be accessible from individual rooms/flats
1) For detached buildings there shall be a at these levels.
10C FOR BUILDINGS HEIGHT (H) BETWEEN 37.5 m 10D FOR BUILDINGS HEIGHT (H) BETWEEN 70 m
AND 70 m AND 120 m
FIG . 10 (Continued)
NOTES
1 This table has been prepared, taking into account the combustible content in the different occupancies as well as the fire resistance
offered by the type of construction (see Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of the Code).
2 This table shall be modified by the Authority, taking into account the other aspects as given below (see 9.1):
a) Density in terms of dwelling units/hectare;
b) Traffic considerations;
c) Parking spaces;
d) Local fire fighting facilities; and
e) Water supply, drainage and sanitation requirements.
3 The FAR specified may be increased by 20 percent for the following:
a) A basement or cellar and space under a building constructed on stilts and used as a parking space, and air conditioning
plant room used as accessory to the principal use;
b) Electric cabin or substation watchmans booth of maximum size of 1.6 m2 with minimum width or diameter of 1.2 m,
pump house, garbage shaft, space required for location of fire hydrants, electric fittings and water tank;
c) Projections and accessory buildings as specifically exempted (see 8.4.1); and
d) Staircase room and lift rooms above the topmost storey, architectural features; and chimneys and elevated tanks of
dimensions as permissible under the Code; the area of the lift shaft shall be taken only on one floor.
4 In so far as single storey storage and hazardous occupancies are concerned, they would be further governed by volume to plot area
ratio (VPR), to be decided by the Authority.
higher than the height specified in the subject densities may be as given in Table 6 unless provided
notification shall be planted on any land within the otherwise in the Master Plan and local development
specified radius from the aerodrome reference point, control rules.
as given in the notification. 9.6.3 The minimum size of the site for group housing
9.5.1.2 In the case of buildings or structures to be multi-storeyed apartment shall be 3 000 m2.
erected in the vicinity of defence aerodromes, the 9.6.3.1 The number of dwelling units are calculated on
maximum height of such buildings shall be decided by the basis of the density pattern given in the
the Defence Authority. Development Plan taking into consideration a
9.5.2 The location of slaughter house/butcher house population of 4.5 persons per dwelling unit.
and other areas for activities like depositing of garbage
9.6.3.2 The basement may vary between 33.33
dumps which would attract high flying birds like eagles/
and 50 percent of the plot area and is to be used for
hawks, etc, shall not be permitted within a radius
parking, servicing and for essential household storage
of 10 km from aerodrome reference point.
without counting in FAR.
9.6 Group Housing 9.6.3.3 Parking space shall be provided in accordance
9.6.1 Group housing development may be in low rise with 10. Designated accessible parking spaces shall be
house clusters or high rise multi-storeyed apartments provided in accordance with B-3.
for high density development. 9.6.4 With a view to providing adequate parking for
9.6.2 No limit to floors and height shall be applicable, occupancies and the vehicular load, appropriate off-
but the coverage and floor area ratio for various street parking provisions have to be made in the
Greenbelts and landscaping including plantation of 11.6.3 The rain water run off shall be suitably directed
shrubs and trees help to certain extent in enhancing the to recharging wells in plots belonging to the local
environmental quality. authority and of appropriate design. The local authority
should encourage for collection of rain-water from
11.1.1 Planting of trees in streets and in open spaces roofs and terraces and direct the same either to a storage
should be done carefully to take advantage of both tank or to a recharging well. These shall be done in
shades and sunshine without obstructing the flow of accordance with Part 9 Plumbing Services (including
wind circulation and sight. Their advantage for abating Solid Waste Management), Section 2 Drainage and
glare and for providing cool and/or warm pockets in Sanitation of the Code.
developed areas should also be taken.
11.6.4 Buildings having central air conditioning plants
11.2 Norms for Planting of Shrubs and Trees requiring water for cooling purposes may not be
allowed to use fresh water for the purpose.
11.2.1 Suitable provisions may be made for greeneries
including plantation of shrubs and trees as a part of 11.6.5 Commercial or residential multi-storeyed
environmental protection in general. This aspect shall complexes may use recycled water for flushing of
be taken care of from the initial stage of town and toilets, horticulture and fire fighting purposes. Separate
country planning, zoning and planning of development storage tanks and separate distribution pipes shall be
of particular area and group housing. Finally, this aspect provided for the purpose.
shall also be taken into account in planning individual
building of different occupancies. 12 REQUIREMENTS OF PARTS OF BUILDINGS
11.2.2 The types of plants, the distance between trees/ The requirements for various parts of buildings shall
plants from the building and the distance between plants be in accordance with 12.1 to 12.9. The requirements
shall be carefully worked out keeping in view the as given in 13, for public buildings and sites as
accessible and barrier free for elders and persons with
structural safety and aesthetic requirements of
disabilities, shall also be complied with.
buildings.
11.3 Trees shall be numbered area-wise, plot-wise and 12.1 Plinth
road-wise by the concerned authority and they shall be 12.1.1Main Buildings
checked periodically.
The plinth or any part of a building or outhouse shall
11.4 Cutting and pruning of trees in public as well as
be so located with respect to the surrounding ground
private areas shall be suitably regulated. Trees shall be
level that adequate drainage of the site is assured. The
cut only after obtaining the permission of the Authority
height of the plinth shall be not less than 450 mm from
designated for this purpose.
the surrounding ground level.
11.5 The landscape planning and design shall be done in
accordance with Part 10 Landscape Development, Signs 12.1.2 Interior Courtyards and Covered Parking
and Outdoor Display Structures, Section 1 Landscape Every interior courtyard shall be raised at least 150 mm
Planning, Design and Development of the Code. above the determining ground level and shall be
satisfactorily drained.
11.6 Water Conservation and Augmentation
In view of critical shortage of water, conservation of 12.2 Habitable Rooms
water by rain water harvesting and by use of recycled 12.2.1 Height
water to the maximum extent possible is required. In
this regard the provisions given in 11.6.1 to 11.6.5 may The height of all rooms for human habitation shall
be adopted. not be less than 2.75 m measured from the surface of
F IG. 11 BASEMENT
b) be constructed to a height not less than 1 m above 12.15 Septic Tanks
the surrounding ground level, to form a parapet
Where a septic tank is used for sewage disposal, the
or kerb and to prevent surface water from flowing
into a well, and shall be surrounded with a paving location, design and construction of the septic tank shall
constructed of impervious material which shall conform to requirements of 12.15.1 and 12.15.2
extend for a distance of not less than 1.8 m in [see also Part 9 Plumbing Services (including Solid
every direction from the parapet from the kerb Waste Management), Section 2 Drainage and
forming the well head and the upper surface of Sanitation of the Code].
such a paving shall be sloped away from the well; 12.15.1 Location of the Septic Tanks and Subsurface
c) be of sound and permanent construction Absorption Systems
(Pucca) throughout. Temporary or exposed
(Kutcha) wells shall be permitted only in fields A subsoil dispersion system shall not be closer
or gardens for purposes of irrigation; and than 18 m from any source of drinking water, such as
d) have the interior surface of the lining or walls well, to mitigate the possibility of bacterial pollution
of the well be rendered impervious for a depth of water supply. It shall also be as far removed from
of not less than 1.8 m measured from the level the nearest habitable building as economically feasible
of the ground immediately adjoining the well- but not closer than 6 m, to avoid damage to the
head. structures.
NOTE The symbol is often provided where access has been 13.2.32 Tactile Ground Surface Indicators Indicators
improved, particularly for wheelchair users and other mobility profiled paving surface with visual contrast criteria to
impaired persons. The symbol denotes a barrier free enable a person with impaired sight using a long cane,
environment, to help older people, parents with prams and
travellers with luggage besides persons with disabilities. The underfoot or visual identification to detect a specific
wheelchair symbol is always facing to the right. route (guiding pattern) or the presence of a hazard
(attention pattern). These are also called tactile tiles or
13.2.21 Kerb A side barrier to a trafficable surface
tactile walking surface indicators.
or the edge where a raised sidewalk/footpath, road
median, or road shoulder meets an unraised street or NOTE These indicators which provide a distinctive surface
other roadway. pattern of strips and truncated domes or cones (small domes or
cones that have had their tops cut off, or truncated) are used to
13.2.22 Kerb Ramp A short ramp cutting through a guide/alert persons with vision impairments of their approach
kerb or built up to it. to facilities, streets and hazardous drop-offs. People who are
blind or visually impaired are alerted of impending danger from
13.2.23 Knurled Surface Roughened area, often in vehicle impact or a grade change.
a crisscross pattern; used on grab bars to improve grasp 13.2.33 Tactile Guiding Blocks Tiles of size
and to prevent slipping. 300 mm × 300 mm that incorporate flat topped
13.2.24 Landing A platform or part of a floor bars 5 mm (± 0.5 mm) high, 20 mm wide and
structure at the end of a flight of stairs or a ramp or at spaced 50 mm from the centre of one bar to the centre
the entrance to a lift car. of the next, and are easily detectable underfoot by persons
with visual impairments. They are used externally to
13.2.25 Light Reflectance Value (LRV) The total guide people with visual impairments along the
quantity of visible light reflected by a surface at all circulation path. They may also be used internally in
wavelengths and directions when illuminated by a light large busy areas such as railway stations and airports.
source.
13.2.34 Tactile Warning Blocks Tiles of
13.2.26 Manoeuvring Zone The minimum three size 300 mm × 300 mm that incorporate rows of 5 mm
dimensional space within which it is feasible to
(± 0.5 mm) high flat topped blister like domes that are
complete a manoeuvre needed to gain access to a
easily detectable underfoot by persons with visual
specific facility, component or fitting, in particular
impairments, recognized as a sign of approaching
while using a wheelchair or a walking aid.
hazards. These are placed along the approach path to
13.2.27 Ramp The construction, in the form of an unavoidable obstacles and hazards to warn persons with
inclined plane that is steeper than or equal to 1:20 visual impairments of the approaching danger or level
(5 percent) from the horizontal, together with any change.
intermediate landing, that makes it possible to pass from
13.2.35 Tactile Signs Tactile signage incorporates
one level to another (see B-6.2).
raised text or symbols to enable touch reading by people
13.2.28 Operable Parts A part of a piece of who are blind, and touch enhancement of visual
equipment or appliance used to insert or withdraw perception for people who are vision impaired.
objects, or to activate, deactivate, or adjust the
13.2.36 Unobstructed Width Free unobstructed
equipment or appliance (for example coin slot, push
space necessary for passage through a doorway, along
button, handle, etc).
a passageway, or other route element (for example
13.2.29 Persons with Disabilities A person with any stairway).
physical, mental, intellectual or sensory impairment
13.2.37 Unobstructed Width, Door Available width
which in interaction with various barriers may hinder
for passage through a door opening, clear of all
full and effective participation in society on an equal
obstructions, measured when the door is opened 90°,
basis with others.
or when a sliding or folding door is opened to its fullest
13.2.30 Space A definable area (for example toilet extent
room, hall, assembly area, entrance, storage, room
13.2.38 Unisex Accessible Toilet Accessible toilets
alcove, courtyard, or lobby).
that can be used by both sexes.
ii) Equitable entry via the same entrances, for example easy
to locate main entrances, no steps or obstacles, wide
openings, adequate manoeuvring space in front of the door,
low operating forces, good signage, good lighting and good
visual contrast
public use, such as, waiting areas, seating 17 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR
spaces, coffee shops, display areas, DEVELOPMENT PLANNING IN HILLY AREAS
merchandising departments, service areas,
Special requirements for development planning in hilly
ticket counters and refreshment stands shall
areas is given in Annex F. With the exception of
be accessible to all persons with disabilities.
requirements given in Annex F, requirements of
These shall also include facilities like, lobby
building shall be governed by the provision of this
toilets, lifts, saloons, bars, restaurants,
Code.
eateries, clubs, swimming pool, parking,
fitness centres/gymnasiums, religious 18 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY
facilities, sports facilities/parks and recreation
areas, etc, within an occupancy. For requirements regarding fire and life safety for
different occupancies, reference shall be made to
c) In all buildings, accessible toilet and sanitary
Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of the Code.
room(s) shall be provided in accordance
with B-9. Such facility shall be provided in 19 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
each toilet group in a building.
For requirements regarding structural design, reference
14 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS OF LOW shall be made to Part 6 Structural Design of the Code.
INCOME HOUSING IN URBAN AREAS For requirements regarding construction (including
Special requirements of low income housing shall be management and safety), reference shall be made to
as given in Annex C. For detailed information in this Part 7 Construction Management, Practices and
regard, reference may be made to the accepted standard Safety of the Code.
[3(3)].
20 LIGHTING AND VENTILATION
With the exception of requirements given in Annex C,
requirements of building shall be governed by the 20.1 For requirements regarding lighting and ventilation
provision of this Code. for different uses and occupancies, reference shall be
made to Part 8 Building Services, Section 1 Lighting
15 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CLUSTER and Natural Ventilation of the Code.
PLANNING FOR HOUSING 20.1.1 Lighting and Ventilation of Rooms
Special requirements for cluster planning for housing Rooms shall have, for the admission of light and air,
shall be as given in Annex D. With the exception of one or more openings, such as windows and ventilators,
requirements given in Annex D, requirements of building opening directly to the external air or into an open
shall be governed by the provision of this Code. Verandah.
16 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW 20.1.2 Notwithstanding the area of openings obtained
INCOME HABITAT PLANNING IN RURAL through 20.1, the minimum aggregate area (see Notes 1
AREAS to 3) of such openings, excluding doors inclusive of
Special requirements for low income habitat planning frames, shall be not less than,
in rural areas shall be as given in Annex E. With the a) one-tenth of the floor area for hot-dry climate;
exception of requirements given in Annex E,
requirements of building shall be governed by the b) one-sixth of the floor area for warm-humid
provision of this Code. climate;
21.2.2 Solar Water Heating System clearances and approvals. The Authority, considering
the availability of solar energy for harnessing, shall
The following building occupancy types shall install solar
decide the minimum capacity be installed subject to a
assisted water heating system for supplying hot water:
minimum of 25 litre per day hot water yield for each
a) Residential buildings (except hostels of bathroom and kitchen.
educational buildings and plotted houses) For solar water heating system and their installation
having plot area 4 000 m2 and above; reference shall be made to accepted standards and good
b) Plotted houses having plot area of 250 m2 and practice [3(4)].
above;
22 AIR CONDITIONING, HEATING AND
c) Hostels for schools, colleges and training
MECHANICAL VENTILATION
centres for more than 100 students;
d) Institutional buildings; and For requirements regarding design, construction and
e) Assembly buildings installation of air conditioning, heating and mechanical
ventilation systems, reference shall be made to Part 8
The Authority shall have required provisions in the Building Services, Section 3 Air Conditioning, Heating
building bye-laws and mechanism for required and Mechanical Ventilation of the Code.
B-2 SITE PLANNING AND DEVELOPMENT environment covered herein pertain to the immediate
outdoor environment of a building or of a building
B-2.1 General
complex. However, these may be considered by the
Site development is the most effective means to resolve Authorities and concerned parties for suitably applying
the problems created by topography, definitive the same at township/city level.
architectural designs or concepts, water table, existing
streets, and typical problems, singularly or collectively, B-2.2 Walkways and Pathways
so that ingress and egress to buildings by persons with B-2.2.1 General
disabilities can be facilitated while preserving the
Walkways and pathways (used here interchangeably)
desired design and effect of the architecture. Each
shall meet the following general requirements:
building and its site shall be planned and designed as
an integral unit from the very beginning of the design a) Walkways shall be smooth, hard and have
process. Equipment and materials causing allergic levelled surface suitable for walking and
reactions shall as far as possible be avoided in dwellings wheeling. Irregular surfaces as cobble stones,
and buildings. coarsely exposed aggregate concrete, bricks,
etc, often cause bumpy rides and shall be
The provisions of accessibility in outdoor built avoided.
side of a flight of steps consisting of two or more risers The top, bottom and landings of steps and ramps shall
and each riser shall be not more than 150 mm high. A be properly drained in order to avoid water flowing
handrail shall be provided on both sides of a channel down steps and ramps.
that can subdivide a flight of steps. For requirements A dished channel should not be constructed within the
of handrails, reference shall be made to B-5.5.2. boundaries of a path or ramp. Dished channels shall
have a maximum width of 150 mm and a maximum
B-2.2.5 Drainage of Path/Access Routes
drop into gulley of 5 mm.
The cross-fall of a level or sloped path, a stepped path, A drainage grating that is within the boundaries of a
a ramp, or a landing, that is provided to permit drainage path or a ramp shall be set flush with the surface
of surface water, shall be in accordance with B-2.2.1(e). (see B-2.4).
Key
1 Downward slope less than 30°
2 Level margin minimum 600 mm wide
3 Upstand where the difference in level is 600 mm or less
4 Upstand with a minimum difference in LRV of 30 points in relation to the path or ramp
5 Upstand with guarding where the difference in level is greater than 600 mm
approaching potential hazard or a change in direction Warning blocks shall be placed 300 mm from the
of the walkway, and serve as a warning of the beginning and end of the ramps and stairs, at landings
approaching danger to persons with visual and entrance to any door.
impairments, preparing them to tread cautiously and
B-2.5.3 Places to Install TGSI (see Fig. 32 and Fig. 33)
expect obstacles along the travel path, traffic
intersections, doorways, etc. They are used to screen TGSI shall be installed at following places:
off obstacles, drop-offs or other hazards, to discourage
a) In open space to orient persons with vision
movement in an incorrect direction, and to warn of a
impairment;
corner or junction. Two rows of tactile warning tiles
shall be installed across the entire width of the b) In front of an area where traffic is present;
designated accessible pathway, before intersections, c) In front of an entrance/exit to and from a ramp,
building entrances, level changes, obstacles such as staircase or multi-level crossing facility;
trees, and each time the walkway changes direction. d) Entrances/exits at public transport terminals
PART 3 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING REQUIRMENTS 71
32A ARRANGEMENT OF GUIDING BLOCKS FOR PERSONS WITH VISUAL IMPAIRMENT
Key
1 Tactile ground surface indicator as attention pattern for decision points or hazards
2 Tactile ground surface indicator as guiding pattern
Key
1 Base plinth detectable with cane if a projecting object is more than 100 mm above floor level
2 Winged protection between 300 mm and 1 000 mm above floor level, contrasting visually with the background and
detectable with a cane
3 Difference in light reflectance value to background minimum 30 points
Key
Key
1 Minimum unobstructed height for vans 2 600 mm
2 Symbol of accessibility
3 Kerb ramp
4 Signage, including symbol of accessibility
5 Firm ground
All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG . 38 ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES ACCESSIBLE PARKING SPACES WITH ONE SHARED TRANSFER AREA
Key
1 Minimum unobstructed height 2 600 mm
2 Signage, including symbol of accessibility
3 Kerb ramp
All dimensions in millimetres.
vary as some are fitted with ramps or hoists at requirements in B-2.3. Kerb ramps shall have a slip-
the side or at the rear. The minimum width of resistant surface. The accessible path to the kerb ramp
the accessible parking space for a van shall can be marked with hatching painted on the road surface
have at least the same dimensions as for car to prevent people from parking in this area (see Fig. 38).
parking spaces (see Fig. 37). Transfer areas
B-4 APPROACH TO THE BUILDING
between spaces may be shared.
The entry to the building shall be facilitated by the
For multi-purpose vehicles with hoists or lifts, more
following:
space is needed; at least an additional 2 400 mm area
beside the van and/or at the rear of the van may be a) Space should be provided for passenger drop-
required. The dedicated parking space in this case shall off points for taxis, public transport and also
be 4 800 mm wide and 9 000 mm long (see Fig. 38 and for large vehicles such as vans, etc, as near as
Fig. 40 for different types of designated parking spaces). possible to the main accessible entrance.
Vehicle drop-off areas should be a minimum
As an alternative, a parking space of 2 400 mm wide ×
of 9 000 mm in length, have a minimum width
9 000 mm in length along a footpath may be used,
of 3 600 mm and be served by a kerb ramp.
provided the footpath is at least 2 400 mm wide as
shown in Fig. 39. b) At least one accessible route leading to an
accessible entrance of the building shall be
B-3.6 Kerb Ramp from Parking Space to an provided from the alighting and boarding point
Adjacent Higher Pedestrian Path of taxi stands and car park lots (see B-3) for
The kerb ramp should be located in close proximity to people with disabilities.
the designated accessible parking area connecting the c) If there is a difference in level between the
accessible path of travel to the main entrance. The kerb carriageway and the footpath, a kerb ramp
ramp width should be a minimum of 1 000 mm. The conforming to B-2.3 shall be provided to
gradient of the kerb ramp should consider the facilitate the setting-down of people close to
B-5.2.3 Turning Space for 90° Turn of a Wheelchair at frequent intervals not exceeding 30 m complying
in Corridors with B-2.2.1 (g).
The manoeuvring zone required for a wheelchair to B-5.2.6 Protruding Object
make a 90° turn shall be designed according to Fig. 42. Obstacles, projections or other protrusions shall be
It shall have no gradient, and it shall not be less avoided in corridors, passageways or aisles. Long paths
than 1 500 mm wide and 1 500 mm long in the of travel shall be avoided and resting areas shall be
direction of travel. provided at frequent intervals not exceeding 30 m. For
B-5.2.4 Circulation Space for 180° Wheelchair Turn provision of unavoidable obstacles and protruding
objects and protection therefrom, requirements given
The space required for a wheelchair to make a 180°
in B-2.6 shall be followed.
turn shall be not less than 2 000 mm in the direction of
travel and not less than 1 800 mm wide. B-5.2.7 Floors in Corridors
For landing dimensions, see B-6.2.6. B-5.2.7.1 Floor surface shall be stable, firm, level and
slip-resistant, preferably of matt finish and shall not
B-5.2.5 Resting Benches/Seats
have any projections, drops, or unexpected variation
In long paths of travel resting areas shall be provided in level that may impede the easy access by persons
with disabilities. Following requirements shall also be
complied with:
a) Complex patterns shall be avoided.
b) Floor patterns that could be mistaken for steps,
for examples stripes, shall not be used for
floors in corridors.
c) Floors shall be levelled. If this is unavoidable,
the slope of floors shall be no greater
than 1:20. If greater slope is adopted, floor
shall be designed as ramp.
B-5.2.7.2 For people with low vision, lines of brightly
coloured fluorescent tape may be placed on the floor
surface to assist mobility in poor lighted areas.
B-5.2.7.3 Carpeting should be avoided in circulation
All dimensions in millimetres. areas/accessible routes. In case, Where, carpets are used
F IG. 42 S PACE REQUIRED FOR 90º TURN in circulations areas, they shall,
B-5.5.2.2 For stepped path, stairs and ramps, handrails the surface of a landing. A second handrail,
shall meet the following requirements (see Figs. 52, with a lower profile than the first one, shall
53 and 54): be provided. The height to the top of the
second handrail should be between 650 mm
a) They shall be provided on both the sides;
and 750 mm above the surface of a ramp, the
b) They shall be continuous, even at the landings; pitch line of a stair, and the surface of a
c) They shall extend at least 300 mm beyond the landing. There shall be sufficient distance
first and last nosing. A handrail shall not between the two handrails (say, 200 mm).
project into a transverse circulation path f) In case the handrail is enclosed in a recess,
unless it is continuous and intended to form the recess shall extend at least 450 mm above
part of the guidance along that path. The end the top of the rail.
of the horizontal extension should be turned
B-5.5.3 Grab Bars
towards the wall on the closed side of the ramp
or stairs, or be turned down and terminate at Grab bars shall,
the floor or ground level.
a) be securely fixed and rigid;
d) They shall have a minimum clear space
b) be slip-resistant with round ends;
of 50 mm from the walls; and
c) Preferably have knurled surfaces;
e) The height to the top of a handrail shall be
between 850 mm and 950 mm above the d) have a circular section of 38-45 mm in
surface of a ramp, the pitch line of a stair, and diameter;
F IG. 55 E XAMPLES OF RAMP WITH SLOPE 1:20 AND HORIZONTAL LANDINGS AT B EGINNING AND END
b) An internal ramp should have the lowest landing may be a part of the continuing path
practical gradient. In order to avoid trips and (see Fig. 56). The length of an end landing and an
falls during a fire evacuation, a gradient intermediate landing shall be not less than 1 500 mm.
of 1:15 should be the maximum permissible Where the ramp run changes direction, the minimum
gradient within a building. landing dimensions shall be 1 500 mm × 1 500 mm.
c) The minimum illumination at the top and The area of a landing shall be clear of any obstruction
bottom of the ramp should be 200 lux including the path of swing of a door or a gate.
and 150 lux in between the bottom and top. Landings shall also be provided at regular intervals of
B-6.2.6 Landings not more than 9 000 mm of every horizontal run. It shall
conform to other provisions of this annex if served by a
An end landing shall be provided at the bottom and the doorway. If the end landing follows or precedes a turn
top of a sloped path, a stepped path, or a ramp and also for a pathway or an entrance, the minimum dimension
where the run changes direction. The area of the end of the landing shall be minimum 1 500 mm × 1 500 mm.
Round or oval type door knobs are not suitable for Controls for powered door openers to hinged doors
people with mobility impairment, for people of small should be located so that the doors do not interfere
stature or less strength, and for children. with wheelchairs, canes, mobility aids, etc. Controls
for powered door openers to hinged doors should be
The use of photoluminiscent pictogram signs shall be located at a minimum of 1 000 mm from the swing of
provided, where appropriate. the arc of the door so that the door is clear of people in
wheelchairs, scooters or other assistive devices (see
B-7.2 Location, Heights and Distances
Fig. 65). The opening time shall be sufficient for a
Devices, controls (fuse boxes, switches, push-buttons, person using wheelchair or assisting devices to pass
intercoms, etc), etc, shall be installed at an accessible through the door safely before it closes.
height for reaching and operating, between 800 mm
and 1 100 mm above floor level and shall be located B-7.4 Operation
at a minimum of 600 mm with a preference of To help people with diverse abilities, the controls as
minimum 700 mm, from any internal corner. far as possible shall be operable by one hand and require
NOTE As an exception, electrical wall socket outlets, no tight grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist.
telephone points and TV sockets can be located at a minimum
height of 400 mm above floor level. For persons with reduced dexterity or impaired vision,
electrical switches should have large push plates.
Requirements and recommendations on lifts landing
controls and car controls shall be as per B-6.4.4, B-6.4.5 Grab bars and door or window handles should be at
and good practice [3(8)]. least 80 mm long. Lever handles should be
Key
1 Horizontal pull bar, toilet room door
2 Vertical handle
3 Lever type handle
Key
1 Door control, access control
between 19 mm and 25 mm in diameter; D-Lever fountains shall be operable with one hand with an
handles are preferred (see Fig. 66). A vertical bar for operative force of not more than 20 N.
sliding doors should be 30 mm to 50 mm in diameter.
The clearance between the bar and the wall should B-7.5 Identification
be 45 mm to 65 mm. The backset of a latch/lock should Buttons and devices should be identified by visual
be a minimum of 30 mm. Other door furniture should contrast. Information should be in raised tactile and
be 30 mm from the door edge. Suitable clearance Braille signage. All important controls should have an
should be provided between adjacent fixtures and integral Braille indication.
fittings to prevent accidental operation.
B-7.6 Usability
Operating force on control buttons and push plates
should be 2.5 N to 5.0 N. Control for drinking water Control devices for different functions should be
different. Control devices for similar functions should The international symbol of accessibility shall be
have a similar design and activation mechanism and displayed to identify the location of such telephones.
be the same for identical functions throughout the
If a public telephone is provided in an enclosed booth,
facility.
the opening of the booth shall have a clear width of at
B-7.7 Telephones least 900 mm. The enclosed space shall have clear
unobstructed dimensions of at least 900 mm ×
B-7.7.1 Telephones shall be on a clear accessible route 1 200 mm, which should not be restricted by fixed seats.
with approach from the front or the side (see Fig. 67).
All information should be provided in at least two of B-7.8 Mailbox/Dropbox
visual, oral and tactile forms. The telephone keypad
The mail/drop box slot should be located at the height
shall have a tactile point on the number five (see
of maximum 1 200 mm. It should have a clear floor
also B-7.9).
space of 900 mm × 1 200 mm.
B-7.7.2 Public Telephones
B-7.9 Vending Machine, Card Access, Dispensing
Public telephones shall be located beside the access Machines and Automatic Teller Machines (ATMs),
route and shall be easily detected by people with vision etc
impairments.
Machines for dispensing money, tickets or small goods
Where more than one public telephones are provided, should be accessible and should be located on an
at least one phone shall be accessible. accessible level. The approach to dispensers should be
A clear knee space of minimum 700 mm in height and clear and unobstructed, at least 900 mm wide. A knee
minimum 600 mm in depth and 900 mm in width shall space of minimum 700 mm in height and minimum
be provided underneath to accommodate wheelchair 600 mm in depth and 900 mm in width should be
users knee (see Fig. 68). provided to ease access for wheelchair users
(see Fig. 69). The clear area immediately in front of
Counter tops, where provided, shall be between the machine should be at least 1 500 mm × 1 500 mm,
750 mm and 800 mm from the floor. The depth of the to allow a wheelchair user to approach the controls
counter top shall be not less than 480 mm. sideways, and to turn around after use and to provide
Side protection shall be considered according some privacy.
to B-2.6.2. Touch screen ticket dispensers at train/bus stations, etc,
The height of all operable parts of the telephone shall should not be the only type of ticket dispenser, as they
be between 800 mm and 1 100 mm. The minimum are inaccessible to people with impaired vision. A
length of the telephone cord shall be 900 mm. numeric keypad should also be provided to make it
accessible for visually impaired users. b) include tactile graphic symbols on the
surrounding surface that,
Glare from sun, artificial lighting and street lighting
on the screen should be avoided. 1) represent the card, and
2) identify the orientation of the card/coin
The operation of the machine should be easy to insertion; and
understand.
c) have both audible (beep) and visual (light)
Where card access or coin slot is provided, they shall, signals to indicate that access has been
granted.
a) have a slot located at a height of between
800 mm and 1 000 mm above the floor, Where a keypad is provided, it shall,
preferably between 800 mm and 900 mm,
1) be located at a height between 800 mm
1) with its edge bevelled, and and 1 000 mm from the floor;
2) colour-contrasted with the surrounding 2) be colour-contrasted with the background;
surface;
3) have characters and symbols on key surfaces
that are colour-contrasted with the key surfaces; relevant rules and regulations laid down by the
d) where numeric, concerned authorities shall be followed.
1) the keys shall be arranged in a 12-key NOTE The requirements relating to card access and keypads
ascending or descending telephone shall be similar to those for ATMs as laid down by the concerned
authorities.
keypad layout,
2) the number five key shall be tactilely B-7.11 Drinking Water Facility
distinct from the other keys; the raised The drinking water facility (fountains, coolers, taps,
dot on number five shall be 0.7 ± 0.1 mm etc) shall comply with the following:
high and shall have a base 1.5 mm in
a) Wall/Post-mounted cantilevered units shall
diameter, and
have a clear floor space of at least 900 mm ×
3) function key surfaces shall have tactile
1 200 mm as shown in Fig. 70.
symbols as follows: enter or proceed key:
b) The front edge of the unit shall extend
raised circle [o]; clear or correct key:
430-480 mm from the wall. It shall have a clear
raised left arrow [ ]; cancel key: raised
knee space between the bottom of the apron/
letter × [x]; add value key: raised plus
equipment and floor or ground of at
[+] sign; decrease value key: raised minus
least 900 mm wide, 200 mm deep extending
[] sign; and
from the front edge of the equipment to back
e) have both audible (beep) and visual (light)
towards the wall, and 700 mm high. It shall
signals to indicate that access has been
have a toe space not less than 900 mm wide,
granted; and
300 mm high, extending from the back wall
f) have the keys readable from both a standing to a maximum of 150 mm (see Fig. 70).
and a seated position.
c) Freestanding or built-in-drinking water units not
NOTE For ATMs and similar facilities, other requirements
as laid down by the concerned authorities shall be followed.
having a clear space under them shall have a
clear floor space of at least 1 200 mm wide ×
B-7.10 Security Access Systems 900 mm in front of the unit as shown in Fig. 71.
Security access systems shall be designed so as to meet d) Spout heights should be between 800-900 mm,
the needs of everyone. This includes the requirements measured from the floor to the spout outlet.
for manoeuvring space and for controls which can be The maximum distance of the spout from the
reached comfortably. See B-7.9 for requirements front edge of the drinking water facility shall
relating to card access and keypads. Security access be 125 mm. There shall be water glass
systems should be usable by everyone. Biometric provision; a minimum 100 mm space below
systems (for example retinal or palm scanners) cannot the spout outlet shall be provided to allow for
accommodate all users. To negotiate the security access the insertion of a cup or glass.
systems placed at building entrances, such as, airports, e) Wall-mounted drinking water provision in an
railway stations, metro stations, and shopping malls, alcove is preferred, because it does not create
FIG. 70 CLEAR FLOOR SPACE AND KNEE SPACE REQUIREMENT FOR A WALL/POST-MOUNTED D RINKING WATER UNIT
a hazard for persons with visual impairments. buildings to provide people with a place to wait and
The provision of two drinking facilities at to rest. The location of seats (including reserved areas
different heights is very convenient for for wheelchairs) should not disturb the general
standing adults, people in wheelchairs and circulation.
children. Where only one is provided, it shall
be at a height of 700 mm above floor level Seating facilities shall have a clear and level floor space
of not less than 900 mm × 1 200 mm.
4) Controls shall be centrally positioned at the
front of the unit or, if at the side, on both sides, Seats should be designed with armrests to facilitate
not more than 180 mm from the front and shall sitting down and standing up. The seats should also
comply with B-7. Control shall be easily have back rests (see Fig. 72).
operable with one hand with an operative force
as given in B-7. B-8.2 Seating in Waiting Areas
A range of different types of seating should be provided
complying with the following (see Fig. 72):
a) Seat height 400 mm to 450 mm,
b) Back support height 750 mm to 790 mm,
c) Seat depth 400 mm to 450 mm,
d) Angle of seat to backrest 100° to 105°,
e) Armrest height 220 mm to 300 mm above
seat,
f) Armrest set back from front of seat < 75 mm,
and
g) A minimum 150 mm set back under the seat
for feet when standing up.
All dimensions in millimetres.
B-8.3 Seating at Desks, Tables, etc
FIG. 71 C LEAR FLOOR SPACE FOR FREESTANDING OR To allow a frontal approach with a wheelchair to a table,
B UILT-IN DRINKING WATER UNIT NOT H AVING CLEAR desk, counter, telephone, etc, an unobstructed space
S PACE UNDER THE UNIT shall be provided with a minimum free height
B-7.12 Dust Bins of 700 mm, minimum free depth of 600 mm (see Note)
and minimum width of 900 mm to accommodate knees
Dust bins should be fully accessible and easy to use
underneath. For footrests, a minimum height of 300 mm
for everybody.
is required (see Fig. 73).
B-8 SEATING SPACES NOTE This may overlap the clear floor space by a maximum
of 480 mm.
B-8.1 General
If tables with fixed seats are used, there shall be a place
Seating facilities should be provided in public for at least one person in a wheelchair at the table.
B-9 TOILET ROOMS AND SANITARY ROOMS The accessible toilet room shall be located as close as
B-9.1 General possible to the entrance/reception/waiting area of the
building and should be easy to find. It should not be so
Sanitary facilities shall be designed to accommodate a located that it compromises the privacy of users.
variety of users. Accessible toilets that can be used by
both sexes (unisex accessible toilets) allow the greatest If only one toilet is decided to be provided considering
flexibility for people who require assistance hence is the estimated requirement as per this Code, it shall be
the preferred option. Wheelchair accessible unisex Type A unisex accessible toilet (see B-9.2 for types of
toilets should always be provided in addition to toilets). Where, more than one accessible toilet is
wheelchair accessible separate sex toilets. Similarly, a provided, different options exist.
provision of an enlarged cubicle for ambulant disabled Where sanitary facilities are provided, the following
people in a separate sex toilet room can also benefit shall also apply:
parents with children and people who need an enlarged
space (for example those with luggage). a) At least one unisex wheelchair user accessible
toilet room of Type A, with central placement
Key
1 Minimum 900 mm
2 Foldable grab bars, both sides
3 Washbasin
4 Independent water supply
FIG. 74 EXAMPLE OF TYPE A TOILET ROOM LATERAL TRANSFER FROM BOTH SIDES
B-9.2.3 Type B Toilet Room with Lateral Transfer from than 900 mm wide next to the water-closet.
One Side Only d) It shall be equipped with a door complying
B-9.2.3.1 Type B toilet has the following characteristics with B-9.4.
(see Fig. 76 and Fig. 77): e) It shall have a water-closet complying with
B-9.5, grab bars complying with B-9.6 and
a) Lateral transfer only from one side;
washbasin complying with B-9.7.
b) Manoeuvring space reduced by washbasin;
f) It shall have essential washroom accessories
c) Independent water supply beside water-closet, complying with B-9.8.
with floor drain where necessary;
g) It shall have an alarm to seek emergency help,
d) Ability to reach small wash hand basin when complying with B-9.12.
seated on toilet;
h) It shall have the toilet roll dispenser and hand
e) Horizontal grab rail on wall beside the water- water faucet mounted below the grab bars and
closet; at not more than 300 mm from the front edge
f) Vertical grab rail on wall beside the water- of the seat and at a height between 50 mm
closet for getting up and sitting down (slanted and 200 mm from the top of the water-closet
grab bars are not preferred); seat.
g) Foldable grab rail; and j) Cloth hooks should be set at different heights,
h) Toilet paper dispenser fixed on the wall beside 900 mm to 1 100 mm, and additionally at least
the water-closet. one hook at 1 400 mm; and projecting not
B-9.2.3.2 Type B accessible toilet room shall meet the more than 40 mm from the wall.
following requirements (see Fig. 76): k) Where possible, be equipped with a shelf of
dimensions 400 mm × 200 mm fixed at a
a) It shall have minimum internal dimensions height of between 900 mm and 1 000 mm
of 1 700 mm × 2 200 mm. from the floor.
b) It shall have all fixtures and utilities arranged
in a manner to provide a clear space B-9.3 WC Compartments for Ambulant Disabled
of 900 mm × 1 350 mm for wheelchair users People
to access them. These compartments meet the needs of ambulant disabled
c) It shall have clear space of not less people who require support (see Fig. 78 and Fig. 79).
> 2200
Key
1 Minimum 900 mm
2 Foldable grab bar
3 Independent water supply
4 Grab bar on wall
5 Washbasin
F IG. 76 EXAMPLE OF T YPE B CORNER TOILET ROOM LATERAL TRANSFER FROM ONE SIDE ONLY
Key
1 Possible transfer positions
F IG. 77 T YPE B TOILET ROOM T RANSFER OPTIONS
caused by leaning against exposed valves or flush control shall not be located more
pipes. The distance from the seat to the than 1 000 mm from the floor.
backrest should range between 500 mm h) Toilets for children should have a distance
and 550 mm. from the centre line to the adjacent wall
f) The water-closet shall preferably be of wall- between 305 mm and 380 mm and the water-
hung or corbel type as it provides additional closet height shall be between 205 mm
space at the toe level. and 380 mm.
g) Where water cistern is used, the cover shall
B-9.6 Grab Bars
be securely attached and the flush control shall
either be lever type or automatic, and located Grab bars complying with B-5.5.3 shall be provided in
on the transfer side of the water-closet. The toilet or sanitary rooms in accordance with this clause.
Key
1 Drop down support grab bar at seat height plus 200 to 300 mm
2 Wall mounted horizontal grab bar at seat height plus 200 to 300 mm
3 Wall mounted vertical grab bar
4 Mirror, top height minimum 900 mm, bottom height maximum 900 mm above floor
5 Soap dispenser 800 to 1 000 mm above floor
6 Towels or dryer 800 to 1 100 mm above floor
7 Waste bin
8 Toilet paper dispenser 600 to 700 mm above floor
9 Independent water supply
10 Small finger rinse basin 350 mm maximum projection
Key
1 Paper towels, 800 to 1 100 above floor
2 Soap dispenser
B-9.8 Other Toilet Accessories and Fittings combination bidet and rear side pan/built-in bidet can
be installed.
All other fittings, for example the water tank, hand dryer,
towel, soap dispensers, waste bins, hand-held shower, B-9.10 Taps
etc, should be set at a height between 800 mm Taps should be mixer, lever or sensor operated to aid
and 1 100 mm from the floor (see Fig. 80). Coat hooks operation, complying with requirements given in B-7.
should be set at different heights, 900 mm to 1 100 mm, The tap controls should be set no more than 300 mm
and additionally at least one hook at 1 400 mm. from the front of the washbasin. It is recommended
Accessories shall be placed in close proximity to the that a thermostat be installed to limit the temperature
basin, to avoid a person with wet hands wheeling a chair. of the hot water to a maximum of 40°C in order to
Dispensers for toilet paper shall be reachable from the prevent scalding. Hot and cold water taps should be
water-closet, either under the grab bar or on the side- identifiable by both colour and tactile markings.
wall of a corner toilet at a height between 600 mm B-9.11 Urinals
and 700 mm from the floor (see Fig. 80). Wheelchair users may be able to pull themselves to a
Light switches should be fixed inside all accessible standing position to use a urinal, or they may be able
toilet cubicles or the lighting should automatically to use a urinal from their wheelchair. Ambulant persons
switch on when someone enters the room. Timed light with disabilities, for example crutch users, may need
switches should not be installed or used. support in front of urinals. Bowl urinals are preferable
to slab urinals for the benefit of visually impaired.
Needle boxes to safely dispose of needles (for example
from diabetes patients) should be provided. When wall hung urinals are fitted in the washroom, it
is recommended that at least one of these have its rim
If a sanitary bin is supplied, it should be reachable from set at a height of 380 mm for wheelchair users and at
the water-closet. Sanitary bins with non-touch opening least one have its rim set at a height of 500 mm for
devices are preferred. standing users/ambulant disabled. When installed, both
Non-touch soap dispensers are preferred. should be equipped with a vertical grab rail. Urinals
shall be minimum 360 mm deep measured from the
B-9.9 Water Supply outer face of the urinal rim to the back of the fixture.
An independent water supply (hand-held shower) shall The lower urinal position as shown in Fig. 83 is also
be provided next to the toilet. An alternative such as a beneficial to a person of lower stature. Where an
B-9.12 Alarm
An assistance alarm, which can be reached from
changing or shower seats, from the WC and by a person
lying on the floor, shall be provided in all accessible
toilets and accessible sanitary rooms. This alarm should
FIG . 83 URINAL FOR WHEELCHAIR USERS
NOTE Urinals shall be minimum 360 mm deep measured from the outer face of the urinal rim to the back of the fixture. Space
below the urinal set for wheelchair users should be kept free of pipework up to a height of 200 mm above floor and up to a depth of 360
mm from the outer face of the urinal rim.
B-9.14.4 Grab Bars Shower controls and folding seat shall be set according
to Fig. 88. Controls shall comply with B-7.
Grab bars in shower shall be set according to B-9.6
and Fig. 87. The shower area shall be fitted with at The shower room shall be equipped with a door
complying with B-9.4. Assistance alarm(s) shall be
least one vertical grab bar which may hold the flexible
provided in accordance with B-9.12.
shower head.
B-9.14.6 Individual Shower Room
B-9.14.5 Stationary, Fittings and Accessories
A clear floor space of at least 1 350 mm × 900 mm shall
The length of the flexible (adjustable and detachable) be provided on the clear side of the foldable seat, to
shower hose (telephone shower/ handheld shower), allow access from a wheelchair, in addition to the
shall be 1 500 mm minimum. The handheld shower manoeuvring space of 1 500 mm (see Fig. 85).
head should be provided between 1 000 mm The screening of a shower recess shall be either a
and 1 200 mm above the finished floor. The shower curtain or a door system that maintains the required
hose fitting should be a minimum 1 300 mm above floor circulation and manoeuvring space and does not
level. interfere with the level entry.
F IG. 88 EXAMPLE OF A SHOWER PLACE WITH GRAB RAILS, ADJUSTABLE SHOWER H EAD AND FOLDING S EAT
A shower head support grab bar shall be fixed on the soap holder, shall be situated in an accessible range
wall in the position shown in Fig. 88. between 900 mm and 1 100 mm.
A hand held detachable shower head shall be provided B-9.15 Public Toilets
with a flexible hose of minimum length 1 200 mm, and
it shall be able to reach within 100 mm of the shower Public toilets shall also comply with the overall
floor. requirements under B-9 with respect to the facilities
provided therein so as to ensure that the same are
An adjustable shower head holder shall be provided to accessible. In all public toilets, the following shall be
support the shower head, and shall, provided:
a) be installed on the shower head holder support a) Male section shall have one urinal with
grab bar as shown in Fig. 88; support grab bars for ambulant disabled and
b) allow the graspable portion of the shower head at least one urinal for children at a lower
to be positioned at various angles and heights; height;
and b) Both male and female section shall have one
c) allow the graspable portion of the shower head WC for ambulant disabled;
to be located at heights between 1 000 mm c) One Type A unisex accessible toilet room with
and 1 800 mm above the finished floor. independent entrance; and
The fastenings, materials and construction of the seat d) Depending on footfall, one Type B accessible
shall withstand a force of 1.1 kN applied at any position toilet in both male and female toilet groups.
and in any direction.
B-9.16 Contrast and Lighting
Grab bars shall be fixed on the walls in the positions
shown in Fig. 88. All other devices, for example taps, Fixtures and fittings in sanitary facilities should visually
FIG . 90 SIGNAGE INDICATING TRANSFER OPTIONS (RIGHT HAND OR LEFT HAND) IN UNISEX ACCESSIBLE TOILET
FIG . 91 HEIGHTS OF COUNTERS SUITABLE FOR WHEELCHAIR U SERS AND PEOPLE STANDING
At least 1 percent of seats shall be designated as seating A clear space of 1 500 mm × 1 500 mm shall be beside
areas (see B-8 for requirements of seating spaces) for the bench.
wheelchairs users, with a minimum of two. Coat hooks should be set at different heights, 900 mm
For total seats exceeding 51, it is recommended to to 1 100 mm, and additionally at least one hook
provide the designated seating areas in the following at 1 400 mm.
manner: Coat hooks, benches, locker handles and other
a) Total seats 51 to 100, minimum three furnishings should offer good colour and tonal contrast
designated seating areas for wheelchair users; to their backgrounds. Non-slip floor surfaces should
be used, and good lighting as well as matte finished
b) Total seats 101 to 200, minimum four
surfaces and furnishings should be provided.
designated seating areas for wheelchair users;
and An alarm/call bell/switch may be provided (see B-9.12).
c) One additional seating area should be Changing rooms shall have a minimum area of 4 m2.
provided for every two hundred additional
seats or part thereof. B-13 CONFERENCE ROOMS AND MEETING
ROOMS
These spaces should be integrated among other seats
and allow two wheelchair users to stay together. It is The requirements for sufficient acoustic provision shall
recommended that the armrest on the seats at the end be provided in conference rooms and meeting rooms.
of the row lift up to allow people to transfer from the Accessible toilet facilities, as per B-9 should be as near
wheelchair onto a seat. To accommodate groups of as possible to such rooms. A sound augmentation
wheelchair users, in an auditorium with fixed seats, a system should be provided. Reverberation time for
minimum of 15 seats shall be foldable or removable to speech, music, etc, should be as per Part 8 Building
increase the number of designated areas for wheelchair Services, Section 4 Acoustics, Sound Insulation and
users when necessary. Noise Control of the Code.
Some seats should be wider in order to allow larger All equipment in conference rooms shall be usable by
size people to sit properly. people chairing or participating in the meeting and shall
be at a height between 800 mm and 1 000 mm. See
B-12.4 Access to Stage and Backstage also B-7 for requirements of controls and operating
Access to the stage and to the backstage area shall be devices.
>
Key
1 Shower area
FIG . 94 EXAMPLE OF SPACE ALLOWANCES FOR ACCESSIBLE BEDROOM AND TOILET/SANITARY ROOM
B-20.2 Interior
B-20.2.1 Furniture Arrangement
Sufficient manoeuvring space should be made available
(at least 1 500 mm turning radius) for wheelchair user
or person ambulating with an assistive device such as
a walking frame or a white cane. Clear passage should
be allowed from one room to the other. Unrestricted
access should be provided to electrical outlets,
telephones and wall switches. All controls and operating
mechanisms shall comply with B-7 and a clear floor
All dimensions in millimetres.
space for the wheelchair, of at least 900 mm ×
1 200 mm should be provided in front of all the utilities FIG . 97 SPACE AROUND BED
and furniture.
B-20.3 Bedroom
The bedroom should be planned to provide a 1 500 mm
turning in space for wheelchair, at least near all the
doors. There should be a clear floor space of at
All dimensions in millimetres.
least 900 mm × 1 200 mm in front of all furniture.
FIG. 98 STORAGE SPACE
The minimum height of a bed shall be between 450 mm
PART 3 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING REQUIRMENTS 123
least 900 mm × 1 200 mm. It should have the clothes Information normally conveyed in visual form may not
bar at a height of 1 200 mm from the floor. The shelves be accessible to people who are blind or partially
should be installed at various levels between 300 mm sighted. This information should also be conveyed
and 1 100 mm from the floor surface (see Fig. 98). The audibly; the clarity (speech transmission index) of this
door handle should be conforming to B-7. information is affected by the acoustic environment.
allows the listener to receive the sound signal directly. artificial lighting to facilitate awareness of changes of
NOTE Hearing enhancement systems amplify audible
level or gradient. The positioning of lights should not
communication and can be helpful to people who have a hearing cause glare, reflection or shadows. Ramps, entrances,
impairment. They include a direct wire system, an inductive steps, signage, etc, to the building should be well lit
loop system, an infrared system, or a radio frequency system. artificially, with an illuminance of at least 100 lux.
All of these systems transmit a signal. Special purpose receivers
are required for infrared and radio frequency systems, while B-22.3 Natural Lighting
hearing aids equipped with a T-switch are capable of receiving
the signal from an induction loop system. Receivers can be It should be possible to shade windows from bright
equipped to be compatible with hearing aids.
light.
Hearing enhancement systems, for example induction
loops and infrared signal transmitting systems, shall B-22.4 Artificial Lighting
be provided in conference and meeting areas. All seats, Lighting should provide visual conditions consistent with
including the front scene, should be covered by hearing the visual task, orientation and safety. Key factors are,
enhancement systems like induction loops (see Fig. 99).
a) level of illumination of horizontal and vertical
Portable hearing enhancement systems may be an
surfaces;
alternative.
b) limitation of glare from a light source or
B-22 LIGHTING reflections;
B-22.1 General c) uniformity and luminance distribution;
d) direction of lighting and shading; and
The planning of artificial lighting should be co-
e) colour rendering.
ordinated with the planning of natural lighting, the
choice of surfaces and colours. Lighting can be used to NOTE Good artificial lighting where needed is crucial for
accentuate interior colour, tone and texture schemes, everyone, ensuring that vision impaired people are able to use
buildings safely and conveniently, and that people with hearing
and to facilitate orientation. The lighting should not impairments are able to lip read.
lead to glare or excessive contrast.
B-22.5 Lighting to Facilitate Wayfinding
B-22.2 External Lighting
Lighting should facilitate wayfinding. Building
The routes to and around a building shall have sufficient elements should be marked by increased illumination.
PART 3 DEVELOPMENT CONTROL RULES AND GENERAL BUILDING REQUIRMENTS 125
The lighting in critical locations such as entrances, individuals with some types of vision impairments (for example
cataracts, corneal edema, and vitreous opacities). Glare can
corridors, stairs, changes of level and workstations
cause discomfort and interfere with task performance by
should facilitate their identification. decreasing the perceived contrast in visual displays (that is
disability glare).
Time dependent switch devices shall have a progressive
switch off to reach the next switch. An automatic switch The provisions given in Part 8 Building services,
on detection system shall cover the complete surface Section 1 Lighting and Natural Ventilation of the Code
of ramps and stairs. Lighting shall provide sufficient in respect of glare shall also be complied with.
time necessary for users to travel safely along ramps.
B-23 EMERGENCY EVACUATION IN
Lighting which switches off when people are still on BUILDINGS
ramps or stairs should be avoided.
Means of egress, alarm panel, alerting systems,
NOTE Ramps and stairs are the most hazardous places for
evacuation plans, emergency evacuation routes,
falls.
provision of area of rescue assistance/refuge areas and
B-22.6 Controllable and Adjustable Lighting signages in such areas shall be in accordance with Part 4
Fire and Life Safety of the Code.
All lighting, including natural light, should be
controllable to avoid glare. Artificial lighting may be B-24 ORIENTATION AND INFORMATION,
adjustable to suit individual needs. SIGNAGE, GRAPHICAL SYMBOLS AND
VISUAL CONTRAST
B-22.7 Light Levels in Different Areas
B-24.1 Orientation and Information
Good light levels should be provided in hazardous areas
such as stairs or changes in levels along a route, around B-24.1.1 General
doors and at communication or information systems. A The built environment should be designed, constructed
minimum light level should be provided according to and managed to facilitate orientation. Orientation means
the visual task as given in different clauses of this annex. to find ones way, to avoid obstacles which could cause
B-22.8 Lighting in Auditoriums hazards, and to know when one has reached the
destination.
Lighting conditions that support lip reading and sign
language should be provided. The environment should Suitable provision shall be made at the entrance to the
be designed to avoid reflection and glare, and it should building and at decision points within the building to
be possible to adjust both natural and artificial light. describe the location and nature of the building. In very
complex buildings, visual, audible and tactile
B-22.9 Glare and Shadows information should be provided.
Lighting should not produce glare. Glare and shadows Means to achieving satisfactory orientation conditions
may be avoided by, are,
a) shielding or shading light sources; a) planning layouts;
b) use of indirect lighting; b) wayfinding and guided paths with TGSI (as
c) appropriate location of light source in relation given in this annex), other physical support
to the direction of vision and to the object that of information (see B-24.3);
is to be observed; c) signage and symbols (see B-24.2);
d) up lighters, with light sources at floor or low d) visual contrast (see B-24.3);
level, should not be used; e) choice of colours (see B-24.3.2);
e) avoidance of windows at the end of corridors; f) avoiding surfaces which might make
f) avoidance of light sources against dark orientation more difficult;
surfaces by choosing light colours for ceilings g) lighting (see B-22); and
or walls; and h) visual, audible and tactile information
g) avoidance of abrupt transitions from light to according to the two-sense principle
dark spaces. Indoor and outdoor lighting (see B-24.1.2).
around the doorway should be suitably
Orientation should be facilitated by differences in
adjusted to prevent dazzle when entering or
acoustics, material, light and colour. The design should
leaving the building.
indicate the use of the building elements.
NOTE Due to the increase of optical scatter in the eye, the
effects of glare are exacerbated for elderly people and for To facilitate people with vision impairments who have
F IG. 101 LOCATION OF DOOR S IGNS ON THE LATCH SIDE OF THE DOOR
F IG. 110 TOILETS ACCESSIBLE, M ALE FIG. 114 ACCESSIBILITY, ASSISTANCE DOG
NOTE Fig. 118 is a combination sign which combines a safety sign and one or more associated supplementary signs on the same
rectangular carrier. The signs used in the figure are the following:
a) Running man (centre of the combination sign) Emergency exit (right hand).
b) Arrow (right) Supplementary arrow sign used with the emergency exit sign to indicate its location in the right direction.
c) Supplementary sign (opposite to the arrow) Full accessibility or toilets accessible.
For door hardware (that is, the elements and Different storeys should be marked with clearly defined
components to facilitate opening and closing doors) a large numbers relating to the floor (that is, ‘2’ for the
difference in LRV between the product and its second floor, and so on) both in the stairwells to assist
background of at least 15 points and a minimum light those evacuating and at the lift and stair lobbies on
reflectance value of 30 points for one of the two each level.
surfaces is acceptable.
NOTE — Colour coding floors may not be practical from a
NOTE — Door hardware is normally positioned at the same long term maintenance perspective.
height on a door and is either on the left or right side. This
makes the location of door hardware easier than other features. In case of signage and graphical symbols, contrasting
In addition, the three-dimensional features of door hardware colours shall be used to differentiate the figures from
create shadows and bright spots, which further enhance their the background on the signboard. The colours of
location.
signboard shall also contrast with the surrounding
Floor patterns should have a visual contrast of less surface so as to be clearly distinguishable
than 20 points difference on the LRV scale. (see B-24.2.6). Information from signs may be
NOTE — Highly contrasted floor patterns can be perceived as
conveyed by the colour and brightness differentials
differences in floor level, which may confuse people with vision between the letter and the background. For graphical
impairments or cognition capacity. Highly contrasted floor symbols, it is preferable to use blue and white
patterns may trigger an attack of vertigo. colours. Colours same as safety signs shall be avoided
B-24.3.2 Choice of Colours and Patterns in other signs. Primarily red, yellow or green colour
is used for safety signs. The colour combinations red/
Different colours should be used for identification of green and yellow/blue should not be used in order to
doors, different storeys or departments in a building to avoid confusing persons who are colour blind. Use
aid persons with impaired cognitive ability. The colours of the shades of the same colour in the sign and also
used to facilitate orientation shall also provide use of more than 5 colours in a signage should be
minimum difference in LRV according to B-24.3.1. avoided.
Combinations of red tones and green tones should be
avoided. A preferred schedule of colour contrast for signs from
their background is given below:
ANNEX C
(Clause 14)
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LOW INCOME HOUSING IN URBAN AREAS
C-2.2.3 The layout should generally conform to the The minimum frontage of the plot shall be 3.6 m in
following land use: width.
C-2.4 Density
Sl Land Use Percentage of Land
No. Under Each Use C-2.4.1 The density norms for plotted development and
mixed development shall be as follows:
General Hill Area
(1) (2) (3) (4) Sl Type of Development Range of Densities
No. (Gross)
i) Saleable:
(1) (2) (3)
a) Residential 50, Min 35
b) Work places, 20, Max 15 i) Plotted development 65-120 plots per
schools hectare
institutions, ii) Mixed development :
shops, a) Small towns 75-100 dwelling
community units per hectare
places, etc b) Cities 100-125 dwelling
ii) Non-saleable: units per hectare
Roads, pedestrian 30, Max 50 c) Metropolitan cities 125-150 dwelling
paths, drains, public units per hectare
and semi-public
open spaces C-2.4.2 In case of developments with per dwelling unit
NOTES covered area of 15 m2, four storeyed walk ups without
1 Any neighbourhood development should have provision for future incremental growth with maximum densities
basic civic and community facilities, however, where such
facilities are available in proximity the same could be
of 500 dwelling units per hectare shall be permissible.
considered and, in that case, the area under residential use In case of four storeyed walk ups, having two roomed
could be increased correspondingly. dwelling unit where one room is for future expansion,
2 If land required under statutory provisions of master
maximum density of 400 dwelling units per hectare
plan/development plan is proportionately higher but serves
larger city needs, readjustment of the recommended land use shall be permissible.
pattern may be considered. Such provisions should, however,
be carefully reviewed by the planning authorities to keep them C-2.5 Height of Building
to the barest minimum levels.
The height of building shall not exceed 15 m.
NOTES
C-2.3 Plot Area
1 For buildings up to the height of 15 m, there is no need to
C-2.3.1 Plot Size provide lifts.
2 Housing for the low-income group shall preferably be up to a
The minimum plot size with ground coverage not maximum of two storeys.
exceeding 75 percent, shall not be less than 40 m2 in small 3 Buildings for housing beyond 15 m in height should be
and medium town and not less than 30 m2 in metropolitan resorted to in exceptional circumstances and it should be
cities. Plot sizes below 30 m2 but not less than 15 m2 may governed by provisions laid down in this Code.
be permitted in case of cluster planning, however, in such
C-2.6 Cluster Planning
cases the ground coverage and FAR shall be 100 percent
and 2, respectively (see also Annex D for special For size of open cluster and open space, set backs,
requirements for cluster planning for housing). vehicular access and pedestrian paths in cluster
Every dwelling unit to be provided should have at least The minimum width of individual balcony, where
two habitable rooms. Even if one room house is provided, shall be 0.9 m and shall not be more
provided initially it should be capable of adding a new than 1.2 m and it shall not project beyond the plot line
second room in future. However, in case single room and on roads or pathway.
tenements are required to be provided where future
C-3.4 Basement
additions are not possible, the carpet area of
multipurpose single room should be at least 12.5 m2. No basement floor shall be allowed.
Such one room dwelling units with 12.5 m2 carpet area
of habitable space is permitted only in case of on-site C-3.5 Minimum Height
rehabilitation of slum dwellers. In a house of two rooms, The minimum height of rooms/spaces shall be as
first room shall not be less than 9.0 m2 with minimum follows:
width of 2.5 m and second room shall not be less
than 6.5 m2 with a minimum width of 2.1 m provided a) Habitable room : 2.6 m
the total area of both the rooms is not less than 15.5 m2. b) Kitchen : 2.6 m
In incremental housing the bigger room shall always c) Bath/water-closet : 2.1 m
be the first room.
d) Corridor : 2.1 m
C-3.3.1.1 To facilitate incremental housing in case of
C-3.5.1 In the case of sloping roofs, the average height
flatted development or otherwise, habitable space at
of roof for habitable rooms shall be 2.6 m and the
mezzanine level may be permitted. The minimum size
of such a mezzanine floor should not be lesser minimum height at eaves shall be 2.0 m.
than 6.5 m2 and such a floor should occupy not more C-3.6 Lighting and Ventilation
than 50 percent of the room area of which it is a part.
Such a mezzanine floor should have appropriate The openings through windows, ventilators and other
openings to facilitate light and ventilation as per C-3.6. openings for lighting and ventilation shall be in
Minimum clear height below and above the mezzanine accordance with 20.1.2.
floor should be 2.4 m and 2.1 m, respectively. NOTE The windows and other openings shall abut onto open
As far as possible mezzanine floor should have direct spaces either through areas left open within the plot or the front,
side and rear spaces provided in the layouts which shall be
ventilation from the external face of the building. Where deemed to be sufficient for light and ventilation purposes.
this is not possible ventilation through main room may Wherever, ventilation/lighting is provided by means of Jali or
be allowed provided total area of openings in the main grill of any material, total area of openings shall be calculated
room is provided taking into consideration area of excluding solid portion of the Jali or grill.
mezzanine floor.
C-3.7 Stairs
Such mezzanine floor may be accessible through the
The following criteria shall be adopted for internal
main room by a ladder, whose minimum angle with
individual staircase:
vertical plane should be 22.5°. Height of the riser
should be less than 250 mm. a) Minimum clear width:
C-3.3.2 Water-Closet/Bath Room 1) 2 storeyed straight : 0.60 m
2) 2 storeyed winding : 0.75 m
a) The size of independent water-closet shall
NOTE The ecological area (non -developable area) given in the table above for hill towns is applicable for the hill town
jurisdiction developable area only. Hill town developable area shall be considered as area under hill town jurisdiction minus
natural ecological area. Where non -developable area is defined as earthquake/landslide prone, cliffs and environmentally
hazardous area, areas adjacent to faul t lines, areas with slope higher than 45°, flood plain and areas adjacent to major drainage
lines for general guidance and all environmentally sensitive areas. Land suitability analysis should be an important tool in first
principal approach for deciding o n land use proportions.
F-4.3 Hill Road Manual (IRC:SP:48-1998), a publication of the Indian Roads Congress shall be referred to for
detailed guidelines for planning roads in hilly areas.
iv) Services:
a) Fire station 50 000 0.30 to 0.80
b) General post office 50 000 10-15 0.20 to 0.40
c) Post office 10 000 5-7 0.10 to 0.15
d) Rural post office 2 000 2-4
e) Rural post office 1 000 1-2 0.025 to 0.050
f) Bank (tribal areas) 10 000 16-20 0.100 to 0.150
g) Telephone exchange 50 000 10-15 0.20 to 0.40
h) Electric sub-station (66 kV) 1.00
j) Electric sub-station (11 kV) 0.05
k) Police chowki 5 000 2-4 0.10
m) Police station 15 000 5-10 0.50
n) Disaster management centre 20 000 5-10 1.00
p) LPG godown As per requirement 0.15
F-6 OTHER ASPECTS FOR PLANNING FOR dip of bedding planes, drainage
THE HILLY AREAS conditions, shear planes, material
between the joints, tension cracks, type
F-6.1 Following aspects should also be considered while
of plantation, verticality of trunks of the
planning for land/building development in hilly areas:
trees, etc.
a) The hillside with less than 30° slope are in 2) Cliff sides and spur faces need to be
general stable. Therefore, building sites protected with appropriate technology
(temporary or permanent) should in general including wire netting and/or blowing of
be located on hillside with not more RCC along the walls.
than 30°45° slope. In areas where most of 3) Thickness of overburden, nature of soil
the land is above 30° slope, spatial regulations strata, details of soil matrix, etc.
should control construction activity on slopes
4) Estimation of shear parametres of the in situ
above 30°, provided that appropriate
soil mass, which will govern the failure.
technology is used.
5) Drainage pattern of the area and
b) The maximum height of the building shall be
permeability tests to observe the drainage
fixed.
conditions.
c) Flat land is normally not available in hilly
6) Specific slip zones in the area, if any.
regions. The houses are required to be
constructed on partially sloping land made f) Provisions for landslide hazard mitigation,
available by cut and fill. It shall be therefore seismic micro zonation and mitigation of
necessary to protect the houses by building liquefaction hazard should be integrated.
retaining walls/breast walls to avoid landslides F-6.2 Additional Aspects for New Hill Towns
occurring at time of earthquakes or heavy rains
In addition to considerations given in F-6.1, following
(see F-7.4).
aspects should also be considered while planning for
d) Cut slopes with height less than 5 m or two to
new hill towns:
three storey heights of residential buildings
are in general stable. For higher cut slopes, a) The basic principles of hill architecture should
special investigation should be carried out and be followed including use of local building
details of protection works should be worked materials, slanting roofs, seismic bands in
out and implemented. structures, etc, so that they merge in cultural
landscape of their regions.
e) Site development in hilly regions consumes
about 30 to 40 per cent of total cost of building b) Travelling time from nearest town to the new
complex, therefore the following township should be at least 1 h or distance
investigations shall be done to obtain the between the new township and the nearest
following geotechnical parametres depending town should be less than 20 km.
upon the size and complexity of the building c) The new town should be self sufficient in
project: infrastructure and its area should ideally not
1) Type of soil rock, weathered or intact, be less than 40 ha.
FOREWORD
3
1 SCOPE
7
2 TERMINOLOGY
7
3 FIRE PREVENTION
12
4 LIFE SAFETY
27
5 FIRE PROTECTION
52
6 ADDITIONAL OCCUPANCY WISE REQUIREMENTS
58
ANNEX A CALORIFIC VALUES OF COMMON MATERIALS
68
ANNEX B BROAD CLASSIFICATION OF INDUSTRIAL OCCUPANCIES
69
IN TO DIFFERENT DEGREE OF HAZARD
ANNEX C AVAILABLE DATA REGARDING FIRE RESISTANCE RATING
72
OF VARIOUS BUILDING COMPONENTS
ANNEX D GUIDELINES FOR FIRE DRILL AND EVACUATION
81
PROCEDURES FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
ANNEX E ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
87
ANNEX F ATRIUM
89
ANNEX G COMMERCIAL KITCHENS
91
ANNEX H CAR PARKING FACILITIES
94
ANNEX J FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR METRO STATIONS
96
ANNEX K FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR METRO
103
TRAINWAYS
ANNEX M FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS FOR VENTING IN
106
INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
LIST OF STANDARDS
112
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 4) deals with safety from fire. It specifies the demarcation of fire zones, restrictions on construction
of buildings in each fire zone, classification of buildings based on occupancy, types of building construction
according to fire resistance of the structural and non-structural components and other restrictions and requirements
necessary to minimise danger to life from fire, smoke, fumes or panic before the buildings can be evacuated. The
Code recognizes that safety of life is more than a matter of means of egress and accordingly deals with various
matters which are considered essential to the safety of life. The Code therefore covers provisions relating to
means of egress covering various components thereof namely exit access, exit and exit discharge. It also covers
provisions relating to fire protection of buildings through portable and fixed firefighting installations.
Fire protection techniques have to be based on the fire behaviour characteristics of different materials and structural
elements of buildings. The activities pursued by the occupants of buildings must also be taken into consideration
for assessing the extent of hazards, and method should then be devised by which the hazards could be minimised.
An indefinite combination of variables is involved in the phenomenon of fire, all of which cannot be quantified.
The requirements of this Code should, therefore, be taken as a guide and an engineering design approach should
be adopted for ensuring a fire safe design for buildings. Depending upon the type and complexities in a building,
qualified and trained fire protection engineers should be associated with the planning of buildings, so that adequate
fire and life safety measures could be incorporated in the building design right from the beginning.
Absolute safety from fire is not attainable in practice. The objective of this Part is to specify measures that will
provide that degree of safety from fire which can be reasonably achieved. The Code endeavours to avoid
requirements that might involve unreasonable hardships or unnecessary inconvenience or interference with normal
use and occupancy of buildings, but insists upon compliance with minimum standards of fire safety necessary for
building occupants and users. For ensuring compliance of fire protection equipment/installations to the laid down
quality requirements, it is desirable to use such equipment/installation duly certified under the BIS Certification
Marks Scheme.
While providing guidelines for minimizing chances of occurrence of fire through passive fire protection measures,
this Part does not intend to cover all aspects of general fire prevention including sources of ignition. Nor does it
cover the prevention of accidental personal injuries during the course of normal occupancy of buildings.
This Part while recognizing that panic in a building on fire may be uncontrollable, deals with the potential panic
hazard through measures designed to prevent the development of panic. Experience indicates that panic seldom
develops even in the presence of potential danger, so long as occupants of buildings are moving towards exits
which they can see within a reasonable distance and with no obstruction or undue congestion in the path of travel.
However, any uncertainty as to the location or adequacy of means of egress, the presence of smoke or fumes and
the stoppage of travel towards the exit, such as may occur when one person stumbles and falls on stairs, may be
conducive to panic. Danger from panic is greater when a large number of people are trapped in a confined area
particularly when people are not adequately guided towards egress and safety notifications are not implemented
or practiced. Consideration towards announcements and annunciations needs to be given to guide the occupants
to safe egress routes and to control panic during situation of distress.
Experience has shown that concealed spaces within a building, such as, space between ceiling and false ceiling,
horizontal and vertical ducts and shafts, etc, tend to act as flues/tunnels during a fire. Provision should, therefore,
be made to provide fire stopping within such spaces.
Nothing in this Part of the Code shall be construed to prohibit better types of building construction, more exits or
otherwise safer conditions than the minimum requirements specified in this Part.
Compliance with this Part shall not be construed as eliminating or reducing the necessity for other provisions for
safety of persons using a building or structure under normal occupancy conditions. Nor shall any provision of this
(LAYOUT TO BE PLANNED AS PER PROJECT BASIS MEETING ALL THE REQUIRED DETAILS)
NOTES
1 Where such lobbies and staircase in the firefighting shaft are naturally ventilated/cross-ventilated, the shaft may not be enclosed and
fire door need not be provided.
2 For all enclosed firefighting shaft, the shafts lobby should have floor plan duly displayed for the information of fire fighters.
FIG . 2 TYPICAL FIRE FIGHTING S HAFT
NOTES
1 The above fire resistance rating shall be required to achieve the respective type of construction unless otherwise specified in the
respective clauses for different applications/use.
2 In case of lift bank, the partition wall, if any, need not be of fire rating specified in this table.
3.4.2 Exceptions and Deviations 3.4.3.2 A high rise building during construction shall
Exceptions and deviations to the general provisions of be provided with the following fire protection measures,
requirements of individual occupancies are given as which shall be maintained in good working condition
applicable to each type of occupancy in 6.1 to 6.9. In at all the times:
case of practical difficulty or to avoid unnecessary a) Dry riser of minimum 100 mm diameter pipe
hardship, without sacrificing reasonable safety, local with hydrant outlets on the floors constructed
head, fire services may consider exemptions from the with a fire service inlet to boost the water in
Code. the dry riser and maintenance should be in
3.4.3 Occupation of Buildings under Construction accordance with good practice [4(5)].
3.4.3.1 A building or portion of the building may be b) Drums of 2 000 litre capacity filled with water
occupied during construction, repairs, alterations or with two fire buckets on each floor;
additions only if all means of exit and fire protection c) A water storage tank of minimum 20 000 litre
measures are in place and continuously maintained for capacity, which may be used for other
the occupied part of the building. construction purposes also.
shall be not less than 120 min. Further, medium and 3.4.5.6 Vertical opening
low voltage wiring running in shafts/ducts, shall either
Every vertical opening between the floors of a building
be armoured type or run through metal conduits.
shall be suitably enclosed or protected, as necessary,
The space between the electrical cables/conduits and to provide the following:
the walls/slabs shall be filled in by a fire stop material
a) Reasonable safety to the occupants while
having fire resistance rating of not less than 120 min.
using the means of egress by preventing spread
This shall exclude requirement of fire stop sealing for
of fire, smoke, or fumes through vertical
low voltage services shaft.
openings from floor to floor to allow
For plumbing shafts in the core of the building, with occupants to complete their use of the means
shaft door opening inside the building, the shafts shall of egress. Further it shall be ensured to provide
have inspection doors having fire resistance rating not a clear height of 2 100 mm in the exit access.
less than 30 min. b) Limitation of damage to the building and its
contents.
For plumbing shafts doors which open in wet areas or
in naturally ventilated areas or on external wall of the 3.4.6 Electrical Installation
building, the shafts may not require doors having any
3.4.6.1 For requirements regarding electrical
specified fire rating.
installations from the point of view of fire safety,
NOTE In the case of buildings where it is necessary to lower reference may be made to good practice [4(6)] and
or lift heavy machinery or goods from one floor to the other, it Part 8 Building Services, Section 2 Electrical and
may be necessary to provide larger openings in the floor. Such
openings shall be provided with removable covers which shall Allied Installations of the Code.
have the same strength and fire resistance as the floor. In general, it is desirable that the wiring and cabling
3.4.5.5 Refuse chutes are with flame retardant property. Medium and low
voltage wiring running in shafts, and within false ceiling
Refuse chutes, if any provided in a building, shall have shall run in metal conduit. Any 230 V wiring for lighting
opening at least 1 m above roof level for venting purpose or other services, above false ceiling, shall have 660 V
and they shall have an enclosure wall of non-combustible grade insulation.
material with fire resistance of not less than 120 min.
They shall not be located within the staircase enclosure The electric distribution cables/wiring shall be laid in
or service shafts, or air conditioning shafts. Refuse chutes a separate shaft. The shaft shall be sealed at every floor
inspection panel and doors shall be tight fitting with with fire stop materials having the same fire resistance
60 min fire resistance. Sprinkler protection system shall as that of the floor. High, medium and low voltage
be provided for the refuse chutes. Refuse chutes shall be wiring running in shaft and in false ceiling shall run in
at least 6 m away from exits. separate shaft/conduits.
a) At the fire separation wall, 3.4.10.2 Glass facade shall be in accordance with the
following:
b) Where ducts/passages enter the vertical shaft,
c) Where the ducts pass through floors, and a) For fully sprinklered buildings having fire
separation of 9 m or more, tempered glass in
d) At the inlet of supply air duct and the return
a non-combustible assembly, with ability to
air duct of each compartment on every floor.
hold the glass in place, shall be provided. It
3.4.8.4.2 Damper shall be of motorized type/fusible shall be ensured that sprinklers are located
link. Damper shall be so installed to provide complete within 600 mm of the glass facade providing
integrity of the compartment with all passive fire full coverage to the glass.
protection sealing. Damper should be accessible to
maintain, test and also replace, if so required. Damper NOTE In case of all other buildings, fire resistance
rating of glass facade shall be in accordance with
shall be integrated with Fire Alarm Panel and shall be Table 1.
sequenced to operate as per requirement and have
interlocking arrangement for fire safety of the building. b) All gaps between floor-slabs and facade
Manual operation facilities for damper operation shall assembly shall be sealed at all levels by approved
also be provided. fire resistant sealant material of equal fire rating
as that of floor slab to prevent fire and smoke
3.4.9 Heating propagation from one floor to another.
3.4.9.1 Installation of chimney and heating apparatus c) Openable panels shall be provided on each
shall be in accordance with good practice [4(10)]. floor and shall be spaced not more than 10 m
3.4.9.2 Boiler rooms apart measured along the external wall from
centre-to-centre of the access openings. Such
3.4.9.2.1 Provisions of boiler and boiler rooms shall openings shall be operable at a height between
conform to The Boilers Act, 1923. 1.2 m and 1.5 m from the floor, and shall be in
4.2 General Exit Requirements 4.2.11 Unless otherwise specified, all the exits and exit
passageways to exit discharge shall have a clear ceiling
4.2.1 An exit may be a fire exit doorway; an internal height of at least 2.4 m. However, the height of exit
staircase, exit passageway, external doorway, external door shall be at least 2.0 m (see Fig. 5).
staircase and these having access to the street or to a
Veranda or to a refuge area or to the terrace or roof of 4.2.12 Where changes in elevation of more than
a building. An exit may also include a horizontal exit 300 mm are encountered in the exits, ramps or sloped
leading to an adjoining building/fire compartment surfaces shall be used with handrails and floor finish
having its further access to unlocked/public exit at the materials that contrast with the adjacent finish materials.
same level. 4.2.13 The capacity of the means of egress required
4.2.2 Unless otherwise specified, lifts, escalators, from any storey of the building shall not be reduced
moving walks and revolving doors shall not be along the path of egress travel until arrival to the exit
considered as exits and shall not constitute any part of discharge.
the required exit.
4.2.14 The lifts, escalators, moving walks, turnstiles
4.2.3 Every exit, exit passageway and exit discharge and revolving doors shall not be considered in
shall be continuously maintained free of all obstructions determining the required capacity of means of egress
or impediments to full use in the case of fire or other for the individual floor(s) or the building.
emergency.
4.2.15 Turnstiles or similar devices that restrict travel
4.2.4 Every building having human occupancy shall to one direction or that are used to restrict unauthorized
be provided with exits sufficient to permit safe egress entry shall not be so placed as to obstruct any required
of occupants, in case of fire or other emergency. means of egress. Alternative door openings of required
4.2.5 In every building or structure, exits shall comply exit width shall be available within 3 m of such devices,
with the minimum requirements of this Part, except if installed.
those not accessible for general public use. 4.2.16 Suitable means shall be provided so that all
4.2.6 No building shall be so altered as to reduce the access controlled exit doors, turnstiles, boom barriers
number, width or protection of exits to less than that and other such exits shall automatically operate to open
required. mode during emergencies like fire, smoke, acts of
terrorism, etc, so that people can safely and quickly c) Slope perpendicular to the direction of travel
egress into safe areas outside. If required, a master shall not exceed 1 in 48.
controlling device may be installed at a strategic d) Walking surfaces shall be slip-resistant along
location to achieve this. the entire path of travel.
4.2.17 Penetrations into and openings through an exit 4.2.19 Basement
are prohibited except those necessary like for the fire
protection piping, ducts for pressurization and similar a) Basement exits shall be sufficient to provide
life safety services. Such openings as well as vertical for the capacity of the basement as determined
passage of shaft through floors shall be protected by in accordance with 4.4.2.1. In no case shall
passive systems. there be less than two independent basement
exits.
4.2.18 Walking surfaces in exit access shall comply b) Basements having incidental occupancies to
with the following requirements for smooth exit: main occupancy shall be planned with exit
a) Walking surfaces shall be nominally level. requirements of the basements for the actual
b) The slope of walking surface in the direction occupancy within the basement.
of travel shall not exceed 1 in 20 unless the c) Where basement is used for car parking and
ramp requirements are met (see 4.4.2.4.3.5). also there is direct approach from any
occupancy above to the basement, door persons within any floor area or the occupant load shall
openings leading to the basement shall need be based on the actual number of occupants declared,
to be protected with fire doors with 120 min but in no case less than that specified in Table 3. The
fire rating, except for exit discharge doors occupant load of a mezzanine floor discharging to a
from the basements. floor below shall be added to that floor occupancy and
the capacity of the exits shall be designed for the total
4.3 Occupant Load
occupancy load thus established.
For determining the exits required, the number of The occupant load of each story considered individually
NOTES
1 Gross area shall be the floor area as defined in 2.35. All factors expressed are in gross area unless marked net.
2 Occupant load in dormitory portions of homes for the aged, orphanages, insane asylums, etc, where sleeping accommodation is
provided, shall be calculated at not less than 7.5 m2 gross floor area/person.
3 These shall include gymnasium, table tennis room, billiard room and other gaming rooms, library, swimming pool and like.
4 In case of assembly occupancy having fixed seats, the occupant load shall be determined by multiplying the number of seats by 1.2.
5 Car parking areas under occupancy other than storage shall also be 30 m2 per person.
ii) Internal staircase with external wall Pressurized except for Naturally ventilated or Cross-ventilated or
residential buildings Pressurized Pressurized
(A-2 and A-4)
or
Naturally ventilated
NOTES
1 The natural ventilation requirement of the staircase shall be, achieved through opening at each landing, of an area 0.5 m2 in the
external wall. A cross ventilated staircase shall have 2 such openings in opposite/adjacent walls or the same shall be cross-
ventilated through the corridor.
2 Enclosed staircase leading to more than one basement shall be pressurized.
__________
1)
Lift lobby with fire doors (120 min) at all levels with pressurization of 25-30 Pa is required. However, if lift lobby cannot be provided
at any of the levels in air conditioned buildings or in internal spaces where funnel/flue effect may be created, lift hoistway shall be
pressurized at 50 Pa. For building greater than 30 m, multiple point injection air inlets to maintain desired pressurization level shall be
provided. If the lift lobby, lift and staircase are part of firefighting shaft, lift lobby necessarily has to be pressurized in such case, unless
naturally ventilated.
~
No. Occupancy (litre) (litre/min)
Fire First Wet Riser Down Yard Automatic Manually Automatic Under-ground Terrace Pump Near At the
~
Exting- Aid Comer Hydrant Sprinkler Operated Detection Static Water Tank Underground Terrace Tank
nisher Hose System Electronic and A1arm Storage Tank over Static Water Level with
Reel Fire Alarm System Combined Respective Storage Tank Minimum
~
Systems (see Note 2) Capacity for Tower (Fire Pump) Pressure of
(see Note 1) Wet Riser, Terrace with 3.5 kg/cm2
Yard Hydrant Minimum
and Sprinklers Pressure of
per Set of 3.5 kgIcm2 at
Pumps Remotest
Location
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS (A)
a) Lodging and
Rooming Houses
(A-1) (see Note 3)
i) Up to 15 R NR NR NR NR R NR NR NR 5000 NR NR
rooms (see Note 4) (see Note 5)
ii) More than 15 R R NR NR NR R NR NR NR 5000 NR 450
and up to 30 (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
rooms (see Note 6) (see Note 6)
iii) More than 30 R R NR NR NR R R NR NR 10000 NR 450
rooms (see Note 4) (see Note 7) (5000) (450)
(see Note 6) (see Note 6)
b) One or two NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR NR
Family Private
Dwellings
(A-2) (see Note 3)
c) Dormitories (A-3)
and Apartment
Houses (A-4)
1) Less than 15 min R R NR NR NR R NR NR NR 5000 NR 450
height (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
(see Note 6) (see Note 6)
..."'"
~ Table 7 - (Continued)
d) Hotels (A-S)
I) Less than 15 min
! height
i) Floor area not
exceeding
300 m 2 on any
R R NR NR NR R
(see Note 4)
R NR NR 5000
(5000)
(see Note 6)
NR 450
(450)
(see Note 6)
I~
of the floor
ii) Floor area R R R NR NR R R R 10 000 for 10000 (see Note 14 450
exceeding (see Note 7) (see Note 4) every 500 m 2 (5000) in case of (450)
300 m 2 but not floor area (see Note 6) provision of (see Note 6)
more l000m2 subject to wet riser)
on any of the minimum of
floor 50000
(see Note 7)
~ iii) Floor area R R R NR R R R R 100000 10000 (see Note 15 NR
~
exceeding (see Note 15) (see Note 1) (see Note 15) (see Note 4) and Note 14)
1 000 m 2 on
any of the
!;
:;: floor
Table 7 - (Continued)
~
....
SI
No.
Type of Building
Occupancy
Type of Installation Water Supply
Oitre)-
Pump Capacity
OiWmin)
~ Fire
Exting-
First
Aid
Wet Riser Down
Comer
Yard
Hydrant
Automatic
Sprinkler
Manually
Operated
Automatic
Detection
Under-ground
Static Water
Terrace
Tank
Pump Near
Underground
At the
Terrace Tank
~
uisher Hose System Electronic and Alarm Storage Tank over Static Water Level with
Reel Fire Alarm System Combined Respective Storage Tank Minimum
~
Systems (see Note 2) Capacity for Tower (Fire Pump) Pressure of
(see Note I) Wet Riser, Terrace with 3.5 kg/cm2
Yard Hydrant Minimum
~
and Sprinklers Pressure of
per Set of 3.5 kg/cm 2 at
Pumps Remotest
Location
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (II) (12) (13) (14)
2) 15 m and above R R R NR R R R R 150000 20000 (see Note 11) NR
but not exceeding
30m
3) Above 30 min R R R NR R R R R 200000 20000 (see Note 11) NR
height
e) Hotels (A-6) R R R NR R R R R 250000 20000 (see Note 12) NR
EDUCATIONAL BUILDINGS (B) (see Note 16)
I) Less than 15 m in
height
i) Ground plus one R R NR NR NR R NR NR NR 10000 NR 450
or more storeys (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
(see Note 6) (see Note 6)
2) 15 m and above R R NR R NR R R NR NR 25000 NR 900
but not exceeding (see Note 4)
24 min heil!:ht
3) Above 24 m but R R R NR R R R NR 50000 (5000) (see Note 14) NR
not exceeding (see Note 4) (see Note 6)
30 m in height
a) Hospitals,
Sanatoria and
Nursing Homes
(C-I)
1) Less than 15 m in
height with plot
area up to
lOOOm2
i) Up to ground R NR NR NR NR R R NR NR (5000) NR (450)
plus one (see Note 4) (see Note 6) (see Note 6)
storey, with no
ti beds
t Table 7 - (Continued)
! 3)
4)
15 m and above
but not exceeding
24 m in height
Above 24 m and
R
R
R
R
R
R
NR
NR
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
150000
200000
20000
20000
(see Note 10)
NR
I~
not exceeding
45 m in height
b) Custodial (C-2),
and Penal and
Mental (C-3)
I) Less than 10m in
height
i) Up to 300 R R NR NR NR R R NR NR 10000 NR 450
~ persons (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
~
(see Note 6) (see Note 6)
ii) More than 300 R R NR R NR R R NR NR 15000 NR 900
persons (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
!;
:;: (see Note 6) (see Note 6)
Table 7 - (Continued)
~
.... Sl Type of Building
Occupancy
Type of Installation Water Supply
(litre)
Pump Capacity
(Iitrelmin)
No.
~ Fire
Exting-
First
Aid
Wet Riser Down
Comer
Yard
Hydrant
Automatic
Sprinkler
Manually
Operated
Automatic
Detection
Under-ground
Static Water
Terrace
Tank
Pump Near
Underground
At the
Terrace Tank
~ uisher Hose
Reel
System Electronic
Fire Alarm
and Alarm
System
Storage Tank
Combined
over
Respective
Static Water
Storage Tank
Level with
Minimum
~
Systems (see Note 2) Capacity for Tower (Fire Pump) Pressure of
(see Note I) Wet Riser. Terrace with 3.5 kg/cm2
~
Yard Hydrant Minimum
and Sprinklers Pressure of
per Set of 3.5 kg/cm2 at
Pumps Remotest
Location
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
2) 10 m and above R R R NR R R R R 100 000 5000 (see Note 10) NR
but not exceeding (see Note 4) (5000)
15 m in height (see Note 6)
3) 15 m and above R R R NR R R R R 150000 10000 (see Note 11) NR
but not exceeding
24 m in height
4) 24 m and above R R R NR R R R R 200000 20000 (see Note 11) NR
but not exceeding
30 m in height
a) Buildings
(D-11oD-S)
I) Less than 10m in
height
i) Up to 300 R R NR R NR R R NR NR 20000 NR 450
persons (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
(see Note 6) (see Note 6)
ii) More than 300 R R NR R NR R R NR NR 25000 NR 900
persons (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
(see Note 6) (see Note 6)
2) Above 10 m but R R R NR NR R R R 100 000 5000 (see Note 10) 450
not exceeding (see Note 4) (see Note 1) (5000) (450)
15 m in height (see Note 6) (see Note 6)
3) Above 15 m but R R R NR R R R R 150000 10000 (see Note 10) NR
not exceeding
24 m in height
4) Above 24 m but R R R NR R R R R 200000 20000 (see Note 11) NR
not exceeding
30 m in height
!
5) Above 30 min R R R NR R R R R 200000 20000 (see Note 12) NR
height
I~ I)
(see Note 16)
Less than 15 m in
heil?;ht
i) Ground plus
one storey,
with total of all
R R NR NR NR R
(see Note 4)
NR NR NR 5000
(5 (00)
(see Note 6)
NR 450
(450)
(see Note 6)
floor area not
~ exceeding
~
500m2
!;
:;:
~
Table 7 - (Continued)
~
Exting- Aid Comer Hydrant Sprinkler Operated Detection Static Water Tank Underground Terrace Tank
uisher Hose System Electronic and Alarm Storage Tank over Static Water Level with
~
Reel Fire Alarm System Combined Respective Storage Tank Minimum
Systems (see Note 2) Capacity for Tower (Fire Pump) Pressure of
(see Note I) Wet Riser, Terrace with 3.5 kg/cm2
~
Yard Hydrant Minimum
and Sprinklers Pressure of
per Set of 3.5 kg/cm 2 at
Pumps Remotest
Location
r ill (~-- -_Q>- ~4) (~ (6~ (7) @) (9) (10) (II) (g) ill) (14~
ii) Ground plus R R NR R NR R R NR NR 20000 NR 900
one storey and (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
total of all (see Note 6) (see Note 6)
floor area
exceeding
500m2
iii) More than R R NR R NR R R NR NR 25000 NR 900
ground plus (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
one storey (see Note 6) (see Note 6)
2) Above 15 m but R R R NR R R R R 100000 10000 (see Note 10) NR
not exceeding
24 m in height
3) Above 24 m but R R R NR R R R R 200000 20000 (see Note II) NR
not exceeding
30 m in height
b) Underground R R R NR R R R R 150000 10000 (see Note II) NR
shopping complex
(F-3)
~
Table 7 - (Continued)
~
SI Type of Building Type of Installation Water Supply Pump Capacity
No. Occupancy (lltre)- (lllreJmin)
Fire First Wet Riser Down Yard Automatic Manually Automatic Under-ground Terrace Pump Near At the
Exting- Aid Comer Hydrant Sprinkler Operated Detection Static Water Tank Underground Terrace Tank
uisher Hose System Electronic and Alarm Storage Tank over Static Water Level with
Reel Fire Alarm System Combined Respective Storage Tank Minimum
Systems (see Note 2) Capacity for Tower (Fire Pump) Pressure of
(see Note l) Wet Riser, Terrace with 3.5 kg/cm2
Yard Hydrant Minimum
and Sprinlders Pressure of
per Set of 3.5 kg/cm2 at
Pumps Remotest
Location
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (II) (12) (13) (14)
iii) Covered area R R NR R NR R R NR NR 20000 NR 450
more than (see Note 4) (5000) (450)
500 m 2 (for (see Note 6) (see Note 6)
building height
up to 15 m)
iv) Covered area R R R NR R R R R 75000 5000 (see Note 14) NR
more than (see Note 4) (see Note 6)
500 m2 (for
building height
above 15 mf
b) Moderate Hazard
(G-2)
(see Note 18)
i) Covered area R R NR NR NR R NR NR NR 10000 NR 450
up to 100 m2
!
ii) Covered area R R NR NR NR R NR NR NR 20000 NR 900
more than
100 m 2 and up
to 500 m2
iii) Covered area R R NR R NR R R R NR 50000 NR 900
I~
more than
500m2 and up
to 1000 m2(for
height up to
15m)
iv) Covered area R R R NR R R R R 100 000 10000 (see Note 14) NR
more than
500 m2 and up
~ to 1000 m2 (for
~
height above
15m)
!; v) Covered area R R R NR R R R R 150 000 20000 (see Note 11) NR
:;: more than
lOOOm2
Table 7 - (Continued)
~
....
SI
No.
Type of Building
Occupancy
Type of InstaIlation Water Supply
(litre)
Pump Capacity
(Iitrelmin)
Fire First Wet Riser Down Yard Automatic Manually Automatic Under-ground Terrace Pump Near At the
~ Exting-
uisher
Aid
Hose
Comer Hydrant Sprinkler
System
Operated
Electronic
Detection
and Alarm
Static Water
Storage Tank
Tank
over
Underground
Static Water
Terrace Tank
Level with
~
(see Note I) Wet Riser, Terrace with 3.5 kg/em2
Yard Hydrant Minimum
~
and Sprinklers Pressure of
per Set of 3.5 kgIcm2 at
Pumps Remotest
Location
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
e) High Hazard
(G-3)
(see Note 19)
i) Covered area R R NR NR NR R NR NR NR 10000 NR 900
up to 50 m 2
ii) Covered area R R NR NR NR R R R NR 25000 NR 900
more than
50 m 2 and up
to 150 m 2
iii) Covered area R R R NR NR R R R 50000 10000 (see Note 14) NR
more than
150 m 2 and up
to 300 m 2
iv) Covered area R R R NR R R R R 100000 20000 (see Note 10) NR
more than
300m2 and up
to 500 m 2
v) Covered area R R R NR R R R R 150000 20000 (see Note 11) NR
more than
500m2
- -- - --
S1 Type of Building Type of Installation Water Supply Pump Capacity
No. Occupancy (Utre) (UtreJmln)
Fire First Wet Riser Down Yard Automatic Manually Automatic Under-ground Terrace Pump Near At the
Exting- Aid Comer Hydrant Sprinkler Operated Detection Static Water Tank Underground Terrace Tank
uisher Hose System Electronic and Alarm Storage Tank over Static Water Level with
Reel Fire Alarm System Combined Respective Storage Tank Minimum
Systems (see Note 2) Capacity for Tower (Fire Pump) Pressure of
(see Note I) Wet Riser, Terrace with 3.5 kg/cm2
Yard Hydrant Minimum
and Sprinklers Pressure of
per Set of 3.5 kg/cm2 at
Pumps Remotest
Location
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
iii) More than R R R NR R R R R 100000 10000 (see Note 10) 450
ground plus
one floor
3) Multi-Level Car R R R NR R R R NR 150000 10000 (see Note 11) 900
Parking (MLCP)
I) Uptol5min
~ht
r--- i) Single Storey R R R NR R R R R Minimum NR (see Note 21) NR
Building 240 min
firefighting
requirements
ii) More than one R R R R R R R R Minimum 50000 (see Note 21) 900
I floor building
but not
exceeding
15m
240 min
fuefighting
requirements
I
~
R-Required
NR - Not Required
NOTES
1 MOEFA System shall also include talk-back system and public address system for the occupancies given in the table for (d) (I) (iii) under A-5, (a) (I) (iv) and (a) (2) under C-I, and (a) (2) under D-I
to D-5, in all buildings 15 m and above in height, except for A-3 and A-4 occupancies where these shall be provided for buildings of height 24 m and above. These shall also be provided in car parking
areas more than 300 m2 and in multi-level car parking irrespective of their areas.
Sl 2 Automatic detection and alarm system is not required to be provided in car parking area. Such detection system shall however be required in other areas of car parking such as electrical rooms, cabins
~
and other areas.
3 Buildings above 15 m in height are not to be permitted for occupancies A-I and A-2.
4 Required to be installed in basement, if area of basement exceeds 200 m2.
...
~
~
S Required to be provided if basement area exceeds 200 m2.
Table 7 - (Concluded)
~
.... 6 Additional value given in parenthesis shall be added if basement area exceeds 200 m 2 •
~ 7 Required to be provided for blrildings with more than two storeys (Ground + One).
8 Required to be provided for blrildings with height above 15 m and above.
~ 9 Sprinklers shall be fed water from both underground static water storage tank and terrace tank.
10 Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of one electric and one diesel pump (stand by) of capacity 2 280 litre/min and one electric pump of capacity 180 litre/min (see Fig. 11)
~
also Notes 22 and 23).
12 Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of two electric and one diesel pump (stand by) of capacity 2 850 litre/min and two electric pump of capacity 180 litre/min (see Fig. 12) (see
also Notes 22 and 23).
13 Lower levels in high rise buildings 60 m or above in height are likely to experience high pressure and therefore, it is recommended to consider multi-stage, multi-outlet pumps (creating pressure
zones) or variable frequency drive pumps or any other equivalent arrangement.
14 Provide required number of sets of pumps each consisting of one electric and one diesel pump (stand by) of capacity 1 620 litre/min and one electric pump of capacity 180 litre/min (see Fig. 11) (see
also Notes 22 and 23).
15 Required to be provided for blrildings with more than one storey.
16 Buildings above 30 m in height not to be permitted for Group B, Group C, Group D and Group F occupancies.
17 The requirements given in this table for Group G Industrial Buildings are for small scale industry units. For other industries the requirements will have to be worked out on the basis of relevant Indian
Standards and also in consultation with the local fire authorities.
18 Buildings above 18 m in height not to be permitted for G-l and G-2 occupancies.
19 Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted for G-3 occupancies.
20 Buildings above 15 m in height not to be permitted for Group H and Group J occupancies. However, buildings above 45 m in height shall not be permitted for multi-level car parking (MLCP)
occupancy.
21 Pump capacity shall be based on the covered area of the building.
22 One set of pumps shall be provided for each 100 hydrants or part thereof, with a maximum of two sets. In case of more than one pump set installation, both pump sets shall be interconnected at their
delivery headers.
23 Alternative to provisions of additional set of pumps, the objective can be met by providing additional diesel pump of the same capacity and doubling the water tank capacity as required for one set of
pumps.
24 As per the requirement of local authority dry riser may be used in hilly areas, industrial areas or as required.
UJ
I-'
Guidelines for selection of various types of For guidelines for fire drills and evacuation procedures
fire detectors for different occupancies and for high rise buildings, see Annex D.
their installation and maintenance shall be in
accordance with good practice [4(16)] and the 5 FIRE PROTECTION
Part 12 Asset and Facility Management of 5.1 Fire Extinguishers/Fixed Firefighting
the Code. Installations
h) In buildings where automatic fire alarm system 5.1.1 All buildings depending upon the occupancy use
is provided, the following shall be monitored and height shall be protected by fire extinguishers, hose
from fire alarm panel: reels, wet riser, down-comer, yard hydrants, automatic
1) Water level in all tanks. sprinkler installation, deluge system, high/medium
velocity water spray, foam, water mist systems, gaseous
2) Hydrant and sprinkler pressures of
or dry powder system, manual/automatic fire alarm
respective zones as provided.
system, etc, in accordance with the provisions of various
3) Pump ON/OFF status.
clauses given below, as applicable:
4) All isolation valves, wherever provided
with supervisory switch (non-padlock a) These fire extinguishing equipment and their
valves). installation shall be in accordance with
accepted standards [4(17)]. The extinguishers
5) Other requirements to meet electro-
shall be mounted at a convenient height to
mechanical services interface.
enable its quick access and efficient use by
4.10 Fire Officer all in the event of a fire incidence. The
4.10.1 A qualified Fire Officer with experience of not requirements of fire extinguishers/yard
less than 3 years shall be appointed who will be hydrant systems/wet riser/down-comer
available on the premises, for large educational installation and capacity of water storage tanks
complexes, business buildings with height 30 m and and fire pumps, etc, shall be as specified in
above, residential building with height 60 m and above, Table 7. The requirements regarding size of
institutional buildings of 15 m and above, starred hotels mains/risers shall be as given in Table 8. The
and D-6 occupancy. typical arrangements of down-comer and wet
riser installations are shown in Fig. 13. The
4.10.2 The Fire Officer shall,
wet riser shall be designed for zonal
a) maintain the firefighting equipment in good distribution ensuring that unduly high
working condition at all times. pressures are not developed in risers and hose-
b) prepare fire orders and fire operational plans pipes.
and get them promulgated. b) First-aid firefighting appliances shall be
c) impart regular training to the occupants of the provided and installed in accordance with
buildings in the use of firefighting equipment good practice [4(18)]. The firefighting
provided on the premises and keep them equipment and accessories to be installed in
informed about the fire emergency evacuation buildings for use in firefighting shall also be
plan. in accordance with the accepted standard
d) keep proper liaison with the city fire brigade. [4(17)] and shall be maintained periodically
e) ensure that all fire precautionary measures are so as to ensure their perfect serviceability at
observed at the times. all times.
c) Valves in fixed firefighting installations shall
NOTE Competent authority having jurisdiction may insist
on compliance of the above rules in case of buildings having
have supervisory switch with its signalling
very large areas even if the height is less than 30 m. to fire alarm panel or to have chain(s), pad
lock(s), label and tamper-proof security
4.11 Fire Drills and Fire Orders tag(s) with serial number to prevent
Fire notices/orders shall be prepared to fulfil the tampering/unauthorized operation. These
requirements of firefighting and evacuation from the valves shall be kept in their intended open
buildings in the event of fire and other emergency. The position.
occupants shall be made thoroughly conversant with d) In addition to wet riser or down-comer, first-
their action in the event of emergency, by displaying aid hose reels shall be installed in buildings
fire notices at vantage points and also through regular (where required under Table 7) on all the
training. Such notices should be displayed prominently floors, in accordance with accepted standard
in bold lettering. [4(19)]. The first-aid hose reel shall be
PlywoodIWood Veneering
Factories
Printing Press Premises
NOTE - Any occupancy that is not covered in this annex shall be classified in the most appropriate class which resembles the
proposed occupancy.
SI Nature of Construction and Materials Minimum Thickness (rnm), Excluding any Finish for a Fire
No. Resistance (Min) of
.,- ---. -..
Load Bearing Non-load Bearing
r
A.
, r
.A.. ,
60 90 120 180 240 30 60 90 120 180 240
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (II) (12) (13)
i) Bricks of clay:
a) Without finish 170 170 170 200 200 75 75 90 100 170 170
b) With 13 mm lightweight aggregate gypsum 100 100 170 170 170 75 75 90 90 90 100
plaster
i) Plasterboard layers with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped and filled - 25
Total thickness for each face
ii) One layer of 12.7 mrn plasterboard with a finish of lightweight aggregate 13
gypsum plaster
ii) Lining with materials fIxed direct to suds, with plaster fmish:
a) Plasterboard of thickness:
I) With not less than 5 rnrn gypsum plaster finish Timber or steel 9.5
2) With not less than 13 mrn gypsum plaster finish Timber or steel 12.7
i) Timber studs at centres not exceeding 600 rnrn with internal linings
of:
Plasterboard layers with joints in outer layer taped and filled, total
thickness of plasterboard 31
Table 25 Timber Floors - Tongued and Grooved Boarding, or Sheets of Tongued and Grooved
Plywood or Wood Chipboard, of not Less than 15 mm Finished Thickness
(Clause C-l)
SI Nature oC Construction and Materials Minimum Thickness (nun) oC Protection
No. Cor a Fire Resistance of
.A.
r '\
30 min 60 min 120 min
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 37 nun (minimum) timber joists with a ceiling of:
a) Timber lathing and plaster, plaster of thickness 15
b) Metal lathing and plaster, thickness of plaster for:
I) Sanded gypsum plaster (metal lathing grade) 15
2) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13 13 25
c) One layer of plasterboard with taped and filled joints 12.7
d) Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped 22 31
and filled total thickness
e) One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finish with:
I) Gypsum plaster 5
2) Sanded gypsum plaster 15
3) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13
f) One layer of plasterboard not less than 12.7 nun thick, fmished with:
1) Gypsum plaster 5
2) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 10
g) One layer of asbestos insulating board, with any transverse joints backed by 9 12')
fillets of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
I) Finished on top with 25 mm minimum thick glass fibre or mineral wool laid between joints.
c) One layer of plasterboard with joints taped and filled and backed by timber 12.7
d) Two layers of plasterboard with joints staggered, joints in outer layer taped 25
and filled total thickness
e) Two layers of plasterboard, each not less than 9.5 mm thick, joints between 5
boards staggered and outer layer finished with gypsum plaster
f) One layer of plasterboard not less than 9.5 mm thick, finish with :
1) Sanded gypsum plaster 13
2) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 15
g) One layer of plasterboard not less than 12.7 mm thick, fmished with :
1) Sanded gypsum plaster 15
2) Lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 13
h) One layer of asbestos insulating board with any transverse joints backed by 12
fillets of asbestos insulating board not less than 9 mm thick, or by timber
Any person discovering fire, heat or smoke shall D-4.2 Floor Numbering Signs
immediately report such condition to the fire brigade,
A sign shall be posted and maintained within each stair
unless he has personal knowledge that such a report
enclosure on every floor, indicating the number of the
has been made. No person shall make, issue, post or
floor, in accordance with the requirements given below.
maintain any regulation or order, written or verbal, that
would require any person to take any unnecessary The numerals shall be of bold type and at least 75 mm
delaying action prior to reporting such condition to the high. The numerals and background shall be in
fire brigade. contrasting colours. The sign shall be securely attached
to the stair side of the door.
D-3 DRILLS
D-4.3 Stair and Lifts Identification Signs
D-3.1 Fire drills shall be conducted, in accordance
with the Fire Safety Plan, at least once every three Each stairway and each lift bank shall be identified by
months for buildings during the first two years. an alphabetical letter. A sign indicating the letter of
Thereafter, fire drills shall be conducted at least once identification shall be posted and maintained at each
every six months. lift landing and on the side of the stairway door from
which egress is to be made, in accordance with the
D-3.2 All occupants of the building shall participate
requirements given in 4.4.2.4.3.2(h)(9).
in the fire drill. However, occupants of the building,
other than building service employees, are not required D-4.4 Stair Re-entry Signs
to leave the floor or use the exits during the drill.
A sign shall be posted and maintained on each floor
D-3.3 A written record of such drills shall be kept on within each stairway and on the occupancy side of the
the premises for a three years period and shall be readily stairway where required, indicating whether re-entry
available for fire brigade inspection. is provided into the building and the floor where such
re-entry is provided, in accordance with the
D-4 SIGNS AND PLANS
requirements given below.
D-4.1 Signs at Lift Landings
The lettering and numerals of the signs shall be at least
A sign shall be posted and maintained in a conspicuous 12.5 mm high of bold type. The lettering and
place on every floor at or near the lift landing in background shall be of contrasting colours and the signs
accordance with the requirements, indicating that in shall be securely attached approximately 1.5 m above
case of fire, occupants shall use the stairs unless the floor level.
instructed otherwise. The sign shall contain a diagram
showing the location of the stairways except that such D-5 FIRE SAFETY PLAN
diagram may be omitted, provided signs containing D-5.1 A format for the Fire Safety Plan shall be as given
such diagram are posted in conspicuous places on the in D-9.10.
respective floor.
D-5.2 The applicable parts of the approved Fire Safety
A sign shall read IN CASE OF FIRE, USE STAIRS Plan shall be distributed to all tenants of the building
UNLESS INSTRUCTED OTHERWISE. The lettering by the building management when the Fire Safety Plan
shall be at least 12.5 mm block letters in red and white has been approved by the Fire Authority.
PART 4 FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY 81
D-5.3 The applicable parts of the approved Fire Safety f) Normal working hours
Plan shall then be distributed by the tenants to all their g) Duties of Fire Safety Director (see D-9.1)
employees and by the building management to all their
building employees. D-8.4 Deputy Fire Safety Director
D-5.4 In the event there are changes from conditions a) Name
existing at the time the Fire Safety Plan for the building b) Regularly assigned employment Title
was approved, and the changes are such so as to require c) Regularly assigned location
amending the Fire Safety Plan, within 30 days after
d) How is he notified when at regular location?
such changes, an amended Fire Safety Plan shall be
submitted to the fire brigade for approval. e) How is he notified when not at regular
location?
D-6 FIRE COMMAND CENTRE f) Normal working hours
A Fire Command Centre shall be established in the g) Duties of Deputy Fire Safety Director
building (see 3.4.12). (see D-9.2)
D-7 COMMUNICATIONS AND FIRE ALARM D-8.5 Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire Wardens
A means of communication and fire alarm for use during a) Are their names on organization charts for
fire emergencies shall be provided and maintained by each floor and/or tenancy?
the owner or person in charge of the building. b) Submit typical completed organization chart
for Fire Drill and Evacuation Assignment.
D-8 FIRE SAFETY PLAN FORMAT
c) Duties of Fire Wardens and Deputy Fire
D-8.1 Building Address Wardens (see D-9.3).
Street and Pin Code Number
D-8.6 Building Evacuation Supervisor
Telephone Number
..
a) Name
D-8.2 Purpose and Objective b) Regularly assigned employment Title
D-8.2.1 Purpose c) Regularly assigned location
To establish method of systematic, safe and orderly d) How is he notified when at regular location ?
evacuation of an area or building by and of its occupants e) How is he notified when not at regular
in case of fire or other emergency, in the least possible location?
time, to a safe area by the nearest safe means of egress; f) Normal working hours
also the use of such available fire appliances (including g) Duties of Building Evacuation Supervisor
sounding of alarms) as may have been provided for (see D-9.4).
controlling or extinguishing fire and safeguarding of
human life. D-8.7 Fire Party
D-8.2.2 Objective a) Submit a completed organization chart for Fire
Parties naming person in charge, and his title
To provide proper education as a part of continuing
in the building.
employee indoctrination and through a continuing
written programme for all occupants, to ensure prompt b) Indicate standards of selection from building
reporting of fire, the response of fire alarms as employees based on background and
designated, and the immediate initiation of fire safety availability.
procedures to safeguard life and contain fire until the c) How are they notified?
arrival of the fire brigade. d) How are they notified when they are not at
their regular locations?
D-8.3 Fire Safety Director
e) Means of responding
a) Name f) Duties of each member of Fire Party
b) Regularly assigned employment Title (see D-9.5).
c) Regularly assigned location
D-8.8 Occupants Instructions
d) How is he notified when at regular location?
e) How is he notified when not at regular Distribution of instructions of all tenants, tenants
location? employees and building employees (see D-9.6).
ANNEX E
(Clauses 5.1.4 and 6)
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH RISE BUILDINGS
ANNEX F
(Clause 6)
ATRIUM
F-1 ATRIUM REQUIREMENTS the atrium and also at the adjoining upper
spaces/floors of the atrium.
a) In order for an atrium to be permitted in
buildings, the following shall be complied: Sprinklers are required to be installed for
coverage of glass areas of retail, tenant and
1) Atrium shall be permitted in buildings of
other areas adjoining the exit access corridor
Type 1 and Type 2 construction only.
and atrium. Sprinklers shall be at a distance
2) The use of combustible furnishings and of 450 mm to 600 mm enabling cooling of
decorations on the floor of the atrium such glass and limiting the extent of fire and
shall be limited and sparsely smoke to the atrium (see Fig. 16). This
distributed. provision does not allow similar sprinkler
b) Smoke detectors shall be provided on the installation arrangement to offset fire
underside of each floor protruding into the compartmentation requirements, in which
atrium, at the atrium roof and adjacent to each case fire barrier is required as per relevant
return air intake from the atrium. Within provisions of this Part.
atrium space, beam type or aspirating type e) Atrium in business occupancy shall be planned
smoke detectors shall be used to ensure with 6 air changes per hour (ACPH) while
detection of smoke, considering factors such atrium in hotels and assembly occupancy shall
as stratification of smoke. be planned with 8 ACPH smoke extraction
c) Where the ceiling of the atrium is more than system.
17 m above the floor, water based protection Such air changes shall be planned in atrium
(automatic sprinklers) at the ceiling of atrium for a height of 15 m from the top.
is not required. f) Smoke exhaust fans shall be capable of
d) Hydrants shall be available at the floor of operating effectively at 250°C for 120 min.
g) Makeup air supply points shall be located into contact with the plume unless a higher
beneath the smoke layer and on the lower makeup air velocity is supported by
levels connected by the atrium. engineering analysis.
h) Makeup air shall be provided by fans, n) Atrium smoke management system fans shall
openings to outside to allow infiltration, or be provided with emergency power.
the combination thereof. p) If so required by the Authority, an engineering
j) It is recommended that makeup air be analysis should be performed which
designed at 85 percent to 95 percent of the demonstrates that the smoke system for the
exhaust flow rate, not including the leakage atrium is designed to keep the smoke layer
through these small paths. interface 1 800 mm above the highest
k) The makeup air shall not cause door-opening occupied floor level of exit access, open to
force to exceed allowable limits. the atrium, for a period equal to 1.5 times the
m) The makeup air velocity shall not exceed calculated egress time or 20 min, whichever
1.02 m/s where the makeup air could come is greater.
ANNEX H
[Clauses 6.4.2.2 and 6.8.1.5]
CAR PARKING FACILITIES
H-1 The provisions given in H-2 to H-5 shall apply to within, immediately above or below, attached
parking structures of the closed or open type, within to, or less than 3 m away from a building used
buildings above or below grade. for any other purpose shall be separated by
fire resistant walls and floors having fire
H-2 GENERAL resistance rating of not less than 120 min. This
a) Where both parking and repair operations are shall exclude those incidental spaces which
conducted in the same building, the entire are occupied by cashier, attendant booth or
building shall comply with the requirements those spaces used for toilets, with a total area
for Group G occupancies, unless the parking not exceeding 200 m2.
and repair sections are effectively separated d) Vehicle ramps shall not be considered as exits
by separation walls of 120 min. unless pedestrian facilities are provided.
b) Floor surfaces shall be non-combustible, e) Other occupancies like fuel dispensing, shall
sloping towards drains to remove not be allowed in the building. Car repair
accumulation of water. facilities, if provided, shall be separated by
c) Those parts of parking structures located 120 min fire resistant construction.
ANNEX J
(Clause 6.4.4)
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR METRO STATIONS
from any angle and against any latch fitted to b) For protection against intrusion of flammable
the door. and combustible liquids and flooding of
c) Any fire door fitted within an opening which underground transit systems, any structure
is provided as a means of escape shall be including emergency egress or access stairs
capable of being opened manually, not be held or vent or fan shaft structure utilized for
open by any means other than by an ventilation of underground system shall be
electromagnetic or electro-mechanical device permitted to be terminated at grade, provided
which can be activated by the presence of that the level at which it is terminated is at
smoke and/or the fire alarm system, provided least 450 mm above the surrounding ground
that this shall not apply in the case of fire doors level/footpath level.
opening into pressurised exit staircases. c) Emergency ventilation fans, their motors, and
all related components exposed to the exhaust
J-6.6 Smoke Compartmentation airflow shall be designed to operate in an
a) Smoke compartments shall be created to ambient atmosphere of 250°C for a minimum
ensure that in case of a fire scenario, the escape of 60 min.
routes are not full of smoke and a safe passage d) Operation of the emergency ventilation system
is provided to fire fighters to reach fire components shall be initiated from the central
location. supervising station.
b) Smoke barriers shall be provided within the e) All types of kiosks like ticketing booth,
ceiling at platform and concourse levels at information counter, commercial, if any, etc,
locations and spacing as determined by the shall be constructed with non-combustible
engineering analysis and shall be designed to materials.
withstand temperatures up to 250°C for 60 min. f) Enclosed stations shall be provided with back-
c) Smoke barriers shall also be provided around up power connected to lighting, protective
all openings containing staircases, escalators signalling systems, emergency communication
and lifts in public areas connecting platform system, and fire command centre.
to levels above or below them. g) Emergency lighting shall be provided
d) All smoke compartments created within the throughout the station as per 3.4.7.1.
station areas shall be designed with segregated h) Voice evacuation/public address system shall
smoke extraction systems. be provided throughout the station, and
ancillary buildings as per requirements.
J-7 OTHER SPECIFICS REGARDING SAFETY
j) Equipment rooms shall be protected by fire
REQUIREMENTS
suppression systems as per relevant standards.
a) Materials used as interior wall and ceiling and k) Emergency command centres and emergency
other decorative features in enclosed stations response procedures shall be in place.
shall be non-combustible.
ANNEX K
(Clause 6.4.4)
FIRE AND LIFE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR METRO TRAINWAYS
K-1 APPLICATION trainway shall take place only under the guidance and
control of authorized, trained system employee or other
Provisions of this annex shall apply to all portions of
authorized personnel as warranted under an emergency
underground, elevated and at-grade metro trainway
situation.
including tail buffer tracks and sidings not intended to
be occupied by the passengers. These provisions may K-2.3 Warning signs in accordance with K-4.4.1 shall
be amended, if required, as per the approval of the be posted at locations where unauthorized personnel
Competent Authority. might trespass.
K-3.1.5 Mid Tunnel Ventilation Shaft and Trainway K-4.1 Location of Egress Routes
Exit structures K-4.1.1 The system shall incorporate a walking surface
Mid tunnel ventilation shafts and trainway emergency or other approved means for passengers to evacuate a
egress or access stairs shall not be less than Type 1 train at any point along the trainway so that they can
construction. proceed to the nearest station or other point of safety.
K-4.4.2 System egress points shall be illuminated. K-5.3 Access gates shall be a minimum 1 200 mm wide
and shall be of the hinged or sliding type.
K-4.4.3 Points of exit from elevated and enclosed
trainways shall be marked with internally or externally K-5.4 Access gates shall be placed as close as
illuminated signs. practicable to the portals to permit easy access to
tunnels.
K-4.4.4 Identification
K-5.5 Information that clearly identifies the route and
Emergency exit facilities shall be identified and
location of each gate shall be provided on the gates or
maintained to allow for their intended use.
adjacent thereto.
K-4.4.5 Enclosed trainways greater in length than the
minimum length of one train shall be provided with K-5.6 Access to the elevated trainway shall be from
directional signs as appropriate for the emergency stations or by mobile ladder equipment from roadways
procedures developed for the metro system. adjacent to the track way.
K-4.4.6 Directional signs indicating station or portal K-5.7 If no adjacent or crossing roadways exist for the
directions shall be installed at maximum 25 m intervals elevated trainway, access roads at a maximum of 750 m
on either side of the enclosed trainways. intervals shall be required.
K-4.4.7 Directional signs shall be readily visible by K-5.8 Where the configuration of an open-cut trainway
passengers for emergency evacuation. prevents or impedes access for firefighting, provisions
shall be made to permit fire fighter access to that section
K-5 FIRE PROTECTION AND LIFE SAFETY of trainway at intervals not exceeding 750 m.
SYSTEMS
K-5.9 All the distances mentioned in K-5.7 and K-5.8
K-5.1 Emergency Access
above shall be permitted with a maximum variation of
K-5.1 Except as described herein, points of egress and +10
percent.
0
ANNEX M
(Clause 6.7.3)
FIRE PROTECTION CONSIDERATIONS FOR VENTING IN INDUSTRIAL BUILDINGS
FOREWORD
3
1 SCOPE
5
2 MATERIALS
5
3 SUSTAINABLE MATERIALS
5
4 NEW OR ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS
5
5 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION
6
6 USED MATERIALS
6
7 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
6
8 METHODS OF TEST
6
LIST OF STANDARDS
6
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 5) lists Indian Standard specifications for materials used in building construction. The Indian
Standards for methods of tests, to ensure the requirements demanded of the materials in the various situations, are
also included. This is with a view to ensuring the quality and effectiveness of building materials used in the
construction and of their storage, which are as important as other aspects of building activity like planning,
designing and constructing the building itself.
Historically, choice of building materials was determined by what was locally available, appropriateness to geo-
climatic conditions and affordability of users. In the recent past, different initiatives have been taken in the areas
of research and development, standardization, and development and promotion of innovative materials. A review
of the recent trends indicates that the growth in the area of building materials covers emerging trends and latest
developments in the use of wastes, mineral admixtures in cement and concrete, substitutes to conventional timber,
composite materials and recycling of wastes, at the same time ensuring desired response of materials in relation to
fire safety, long term performance and durability. In addition to these, nowadays, development of specific materials
is being researched which may be structured and designed to meet needs to specially developed construction
technologies in time to come, such as, for disaster prone areas or aggressive climatic and industrial situations.
To encourage use of appropriate materials, it may be desirable to have to the largest extent possible, performance
oriented approach for specifications rather than prescriptive approach. The approach has been already adopted in
some cases in development of standards, wherever found possible.
Indian Standards cover the requirements for most of the materials in use. However, there may be a gap between
development of new materials and techniques of application and formulation of standards. It, therefore, becomes
necessary for a Building Code to be flexible to recognize building materials other than those for which Indian
Standards are available. This Part of the Code, therefore, since its first version, duly takes care of this aspect and
explicitly provides for use of new or alternate building materials, provided it is proved by authentic tests that the
new or alternative material is effective and suitable for the purpose intended. However, it is worthwhile that more
and more emphasis is given to the satisfaction of performance requirements expected of a building material, so
that a wide range of such new or alternate materials can be evaluated and used, if found appropriate.
As already emphasized, quality of material is quite important for their appropriate usage, whether it is a material
for which an Indian Standard is available or a new or alternative material as defined in 4 of this Part of the Code.
While continuing to emphasize on conformity of building materials to available Indian Standards, this Part
recommends that the building regulating authority may also recognize the use of building materials conforming to
other specifications and test methods (see 4.2), in case Indian Standards are not available for particular materials.
Third party certification schemes available in the country for quality assurance of above materials can be used
with advantage to ensure the appropriateness of these materials.
It is well recognized that buildings during their construction and subsequently in their operation consume lot of
resources. The holistic approach for ensuring proper and sustainable developments is to take care of the concerned
aspects affecting sustainability during the conceptualization, planning, design, construction, and operation and
maintenance stages. The building material production, transportation and utilization assume a substantial component
of the embodied energy that goes into a building. It is therefore important that sustainability of building materials
is well understood and ensured in a building project. This Part of the Code recognizes this aspect and covers
appropriate provision therefore.
This Part of the Code was first published in 1970 and subsequently revised in 1983 and 2005 as Part 5 of NBC
2005. The first and second revision of this Part incorporated an updated version of the list of Indian Standards
given at the end of this Part of the Code. Also the list of building materials was completely revised to make it more
user-friendly. This second revision of this Part, while basically retaining the structure of 2005 version of the Code,
incorporates the following modifications:
702 : 1988 Specification for industrial bitumen 9381 : 1979 Methods for testing tar and
(second revision) bituminous materials: Determination
1201 to 1220 Methods for testing tar and of FRAASS breaking point of
bituminous materials (first revision) bitumen
1201 : 1978 Sampling (first revision) 9382 : 1979 Methods for testing tar and
1202 : 1978 Determination of specific gravity bituminous materials: Determination
(first revision) of effect of heat and air by thin film
oven test
1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration (first
revision) 10511 : 1983 Method for determination of
asphaltenes in bitumen by
1204 : 1978 Determination of residue of specified
precipitation with normal haptane
penetration (first revision)
1205 : 1978 Determination of softening point 10512 : 2003 Method for determination of wax
(first revision) content in bitumen (first revision)
1206 Determination of viscosity 13758 Coal tar pitch Methods of test
(Part 1) : 1978 Industrial viscosity (first revision) (Part 1) : 1993 Determination of matter insoluble in
quinoline
(Part 2) : 1978 Absolute viscosity (first revision)
(Part 3) : 1978 Kinematic viscosity (first revision) (Part 2) : 1993 Determination of coking value
1207 : 1978 Determination of equiviscous 15172 : 2002 Methods for testing tar and
temperature (EVT) (first revision) bituminous materials
Determination of curing index for
1208 : 1978 Determination of ductility (first
cutback bitumens
revision)
15173 : 2002 Methods for testing tar and
1209 : 1978 Determination of flash point and fire
bituminous materials
point (first revision)
Determination of breaking point for
1210 : 1978 Float test (first revision) cationic bitumen emulsion
1211 : 1978 Determination of water content
15174 : 2002 Methods for testing tar and
(Dean and Stark method) (first
bituminous material
revision)
Determination of breaking point for
1212 : 1978 Determination of loss on heating (first anionic bitumen emulsion
revision)
15462 : 2004 Specification for polymer and rubber
1213 : 1978 Distillation test (first revision) modified
1215 : 1978 Determination of matter insoluble in 15799 : 2008 Methods for testing tar and bituminous
toluene (first revision) materials Determination of
1216 : 1978 Determination of solubility in carbon durability of bitumen
disulphide or trichloroethylene (first
15808 : 2008 Specification for multigrade bitumen
revision)
for use in pavement construction
1217 : 1978 Determination of mineral matter
(ASH) (first revision) 3. BRICKS, BLOCKS AND OTHER MASONRY
1218 : 1978 Determination of phenols (first BUILDING UNITS
revision)
IS No. Title
1219 : 1978 Determination of naphthalene (first
revision) 1077 : 1992 Specification for common burnt clay
building bricks (fifth revision)
1220 : 1978 Determination of volatile matter
content (first revision) 1725 : 2013 Specification for stabilized soil
blocks used in general building
3117 : 2004 Specification for bitumen emulsion
construction (second revision)
for roads and allied applications
(anionic type) (first revision) 2180 : 1988 Specification for heavy duty burnt
clay building bricks (third revision)
8887 : 2004 Specification for bitumen emulsion
for roads (cationic type) (second 2185 Specification for concrete masonry
revision) units
(Part 1) : 2005 Hollow and solid concrete blocks 10360 : 1982 Specification for lime pozzolana
(third revision) concrete blocks for paving
(Part 2) : 1983 Hollow and solid lightweight 12440 : 1988 Specification for precast concrete
concrete blocks (first revision) stone masonry blocks
(Part 3) : 1984 Autoclaved cellular (aerated) 12894 : 2002 Specification for pulverized fuel ash
concrete blocks (first revision) lime bricks (first revision)
(Part 4) : 2008 Cellular concrete blocks using 13757 : 1993 Specification for burnt clay fly ash
preformed foam building bricks
2222 : 1991 Specification for burnt clay 15658 : 2006 Specification for precast concrete
perforated building bricks (third blocks for paving
revision)
2691 : 1988 Specification for burnt clay facing 4. BUILDERS HARDWARE
bricks (second revision) IS No. Title
2849 : 1983 Specification for non-load bearing 204 Specification for tower bolts
gypsum partition blocks (solid and
hollow types) (Part 1) : 1991 Ferrous metals (fifth revision)
(Part 2) : 1992 Non-ferrous metals (fifth revision)
3115 : 1992 Specification for lime based blocks
(second revision) 205 : 1992 Specification for non-ferrous metal
butt hinges (fourth revision)
3316 : 1974 Specification for structural granite
(first revision) 206 : 2010 Specification for tee and strap hinges
(fifth revision)
3495 (Parts 1 to Methods of test of burnt clay building
208 : 1996 Specification for door handles (fifth
to 4) : 1992 bricks (third revision)
revision)
Determination of compressive
281 : 2009 Specification for mild steel sliding
strength
door bolts for use with padlocks
Determination of water absorption (fourth revision)
Determination of efflorescence 362 : 1991 Specification for parliament hinges
Determination of warpage (fifth revision)
3583 : 1988 Specification for burnt clay paving 363 : 1993 Specification for hasps and staples
bricks (second revision) (fourth revision)
3620 : 1979 Specification for laterite stone block 364 : 1993 Specification for fanlight catch (third
for masonry (first revision) revision)
3952 : 2013 Specification for burnt clay hollow 452 : 1973 Specification for door springs, rat-tail
bricks and blocks for walls and type (second revision)
partitions (third revision) 453 : 1993 Specification for double-acting
4139 : 1989 Specification for calcium silicate spring hinges (third revision)
bricks (second revision) 729 : 1979 Specification for drawer locks,
4860 : 1968 Specification for acid resistant bricks cupboard locks and box locks (third
4885 : 1988 Specification for sewer bricks (first revision)
revision) 1019 : 1974 Specification for rim latches (second
5454 : 1978 Methods for sampling of clay revision)
building bricks (first revision) 1341 : 1992 Specification for steel butt hinges
5751 : 1984 Specification for precast concrete (sixth revision)
coping blocks (first revision) 1823 : 1980 Specification for floor door stoppers
5779 : 1986 Specification for burnt clay soling (third revision)
bricks (first revision) 1837 : 1966 Specification for fanlight pivots (first
6165 : 1992 Dimensions for special shapes of clay revision)
bricks (first revision) 2209 : 1976 Specification for mortice locks
9893 : 1981 Specification for precast concrete (vertical type) (third revision)
blocks for lintels and sills 2681 : 1993 Specification for nonferrous metal
sliding door bolts for use with 9899 : 1981 Specification for hat coat and
padlocks (third revision) wardrobe hooks
3564 : 1995 Specification for door closers 10019 : 1981 Specification for mild steel stays and
(hydraulically regulated) (second fasteners
revision) 10090 : 1982 Specification for numericals
3818 : 1992 Specification for continuous (piano) 10342 : 1982 Specification for curtain rail system
hinges (third revision) 12817 : 2013 Specification for stainless steel butt
3828 : 1966 Specification for ventilator chains hinges (second revision)
3843 : 1995 Specification for steel backflap 12867 : 1989 Specification for PVC hand rails
hinges (first revision) covers
3847 : 1992 Specification for mortice night 14912 : 2001 Specification for door closers
latches (second revision) concealed type (hydraulically
4621 : 1975 Specification for indicating bolts for regulated)
use in public baths and lavatories 15833 : 2009 Specification for stainless steel tower
(first revision) bolts
4948 : 2002 Specification for welded steel wire 15834 : 2008 Specification for stainless steel
fabric for general use (second sliding door bolts for use with
revision) padlocks
4992 : 1975 Specification for door handles for 16015 : 2013 Specification for mortice locks with
mortice locks (vertical type) (first lever mechanism (vertical type,
revision) sliding door locks and dead locks)
5187 : 1972 Specification for flush bolts (first 16016 : 2013 Specification for cylindrical locks
revision) with pin tumbler mechanism
5899 : 1970 Specification for bathroom latches 5. BUILDING CHEMICALS
5930 : 1970 Specification for mortice latch
a) Anti-termite Chemicals
(vertical type)
6315 : 1992 Specification for floor springs IS No. Title
(hydraulically regulated) for heavy 8944 : 2005 Specification for chlorpyrifos
doors (second revision) emulsifiable concentrates (first
6318 : 1971 Specification for plastic window revision)
stays and fasteners 16131 : 2015 Specification for imidacloprid
6343 : 1982 Specification for door closers suspension concentrate (sc)
(pneumatically regulated) for light
door weighing up to 40 kg (first b) Chemical Admixture/Water Proofing Compounds
revision) IS No. Title
6607 : 1972 Specification for rebated mortice 2645 : 2003 Specification for integral water-
locks (vertical type) proofing compounds for cement
7196 : 1974 Specification for hold fast mortar and concrete (second
7197 : 1974 Specification for double action floor revision)
springs (without oil check) for heavy 6925 : 1973 Methods of test for determination of
doors water soluble chlorides in concrete
7534 : 1985 Specification for sliding locking bolts admixtures
for use with padlocks (first revision) 9103 : 1999 Specification for concrete admixtures
8756 : 1978 Specification for ball catches for use (first revision)
in wooden almirah c) Sealants/Fillers
9106 : 1979 Specification for rising butt hinges IS No. Title
9131 : 1979 Specification for rim locks 1834 : 1984 Specification for hot applied sealing
9460 : 1980 Specification for flush drop handle compound for joint in concrete (first
for drawer revision)
10 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
IS No. Title IS No. Title
1838 Specification for preformed fillers for 15477 : 2004 Specification for adhesives for use
expansion joint in concrete with ceramic tiles and mosaics
pavements and structures (non-
extruding and resilient type) 6. BUILDING LIME AND PRODUCTS
(Part 1) : 1983 Bitumen impregnated fibre (first IS No. Title
revision)
712 : 1984 Specification for building limes (third
(Part 2) : 1984 CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut revision)
pith
1624 : 1986 Method of field testing of building
(Part 3) : 2011 Polymer based lime (second revision)
10566 : 1983 Methods of tests for preformed fillers 2686 : 1977 Specification for cinder as fine
for expansion joint in concrete paving aggregates for use in lime concrete
and structural construction (first revision)
11433 Specification for one grade 3068 : 1986 Specification for broken brick (burnt-
polysulphide based joint sealant clay) coarse aggregates for use in
(Part 1) : 1985 General requirements lime concrete (second revision)
(Part 2) : 1986 Methods of test 3115 : 1992 Specification for lime based blocks
(second revision)
12118 Specification for two parts
polysulphide based sealants 3182 : 1986 Specification for broken bricks (burnt
clay) fine aggregates for use in lime
(Part 1) : 1987 General requirements
mortar (second revision)
(Part 2) : 1987 Methods of test
4098 : 1983 Specification for lime-pozzolana
mixture (first revision)
d) Adhesives
4139 : 1989 Specification for calcium silicate
IS No. Title bricks (second revision)
848 : 2006 Specification for synthetic resin 6932 Method of tests for building limes
adhesives for plywood (phenolic and (Part 1) : 1973 Determination of insoluble residue,
aminoplastic) (second revision) loss on ignition, insoluble matter,
849 : 1994 Specification for cold setting case in silicon dioxide, ferric and aluminium
glue for wood (first revision) oxide, calcium oxide and magnesium
851 : 1978 Specification for synthetic resin oxide
adhesives for construction work (non- (Part 2) : 1973 Determination of carbon dioxide
structural) in wood (first revision) content
852 : 1994 Specification for animal glue for (Part 3) : 1973 Determination of residue on slaking
general wood-working purposes of quicklime
(second revision) (Part 4) : 1973 Determination of fineness of hydrated
1508 : 1972 Specification for extenders for use in lime
synthetic resin adhesives (urea- (Part 5) : 1973 Determination of unhydrated oxide
formaldehyde) for plywood (first
(Part 6) : 1973 Determination of volume yield of
revision)
quicklime
4835 : 1979 Specification for polyvinyl acetate (Part 7) : 1973 Determination of compressive and
dispersion-based adhesives for wood transverse strength
(first revision)
(Part 8) : 1973 Determination of workability
9188 : 1979 Performance requirements for
adhesive for structural laminated (Part 9) : 1973 Determination of soundness
wood products for use under exterior (Part 10) : 1973 Determination of popping and pitting
exposure condition of hydrated lime
12830 : 1989 Rubber based adhesives for fixing (Part 11) : 1984 Determination of setting time of
PVC tiles to cement hydrated lime
12994 : 1990 Epoxy adhesives, room temperature 10360 : 1982 Specification for lime pozzolana
curing general purpose concrete blocks for paving
10772 : 1983 Specification for quick setting lime 5779 : 1986 Specification for burnt clay soling
pozzolana mixture bricks (first revision)
12894 : 2002 Specification for pulverized fuel ash 6165 : 1992 Dimensions for special shapes of clay
lime bricks (first revision) bricks (first revision)
15648 : 2006 Specification for pulverized fuel ash 13757 : 1993 Specification for burnt clay fly ash
for lime-pozzolana mixture appli- building bricks
cations d) Jallies
2386 Methods of test for aggregates for 16415 : 2015 Specification for composite cement
concrete
c) Supplementary Cementitious Materials (Mineral
(Part 1) : 1963 Particle size and shape Admixtures including Pozzolanas)
(Part 2) : 1963 Estimation of deleterious materials IS No. Title
and organic impurities
1344 : 1981 Specification for calcined clay
(Part 3) : 1963 Specific gravity, density, voids, pozzolana (second revision)
absorption and bulking 1727 : 1967 Methods of test for pozzolanic
(Part 4) : 1963 Mechanical properties materials (first revision)
(Part 5) : 1963 Soundness 3812 Specification for pulverized fuel ash
(Part 6) : 1963 Measuring mortar making properties (Part 1) : 2013 For use as pozzolana in cement,
of fine aggregates cement mortar and concrete (third
revision)
(Part 7) : 1963 Alkali aggregate reactivity
(Part 2) : 2013 For use as admixture in cement
(Part 8) : 1963 Petrographic examination mortar and concrete (third revision)
2430 : 1986 Methods of sampling of aggregates 6491 : 1972 Method of sampling of flyash
of concrete (first revision) 12089 : 1987 Specification for granulated slag for
6579 : 1981 Specification for coarse aggregate for manufacture of Portland slag cement
water bound macadam (first revision) 12870 : 1989 Methods of sampling calcined clay
pozzolana
9142 : 1979 Specification for artificial light-weight
aggregates for concrete masonry units 15388 : 2003 Specification for silica fume
b) Cement 16354 : 2015 Specification for metakaolin for use
in cement, cement mortar and concrete
IS No. Title
d) Chemical Admixtures
269 : 2015 Specification for ordinary Portland
cement (sixth revision) IS No. Title
455 : 2015 Specification for Portland slag 6925 : 1973 Methods of test for determination of
cement (fifth revision) water soluble chlorides in concrete
1489 Specification for Portland pozzolana admixtures
cement 9103 : 1999 Specification for admixtures for
(Part 1) : 2015 Flyash based (fourth revision) concrete (first revision)
e) Concrete
(Part 2) : 2015 Calcined clay based (fourth revision)
3466 : 1988 Specification for masonry cement IS No. Title
(second revision) 456 : 2000 Code of Practice for plain and
6452 : 1989 Specification for high alumina cement reinforced concrete (fourth revision)
for structural use (first revision) 1343 : 2012 Code of Practice for prestressed
6909 : 1990 Specification for supersulphated concrete (second revision)
cement (first revision) 4926 : 2003 Code of Practice for ready-mixed
8041 : 1990 Specification for rapid hardening concrete (second revision)
Portland cement (second revision)
f) Cement and Concrete Sampling and Methods of Test
8042 : 2015 Specification for white Portland
cement (third revision) IS No. Title
8043 : 1991 Specification for hydrophobic 516 : 1959 Methods of test for strength of
Portland cement (second revision) concrete
12330 : 1988 Specification for sulphate resisting 1199 : 1959 Methods of sampling and analysis of
Portland cement concrete
12600 : 1989 Specification for low heat Portland 2770 Methods of testing bond in reinforced
cement (Part 1) : 1967 concrete: Pullout test
3085 : 1965 Methods of test for permeability of 9013 : 1978 Method of making, curing and
cement mortar and concrete determining compressive strength of
3535 : 1986 Methods of sampling hydraulic accelerated cured concrete test
cement (first revision) specimens
9284 : 1979 Method of test for abrasion resistance
4031 Methods of physical tests for
of concrete
hydraulic cement
12423 : 1988 Methods for colorimetric analysis of
(Part 1) : 1996 Determination of fineness by dry
hydraulic cement
sieving (second revision)
12803 : 1989 Methods of analysis of hydraulic
(Part 2) : 1999 Determination of fineness by specific cement by X-ray fluorescence
surface by Blaine air permeability spectrometer
method (second revision)
12813 : 1989 Method of analysis of hydraulic
(Part 3) : 1988 Determination of soundness (first cement by atomic absorption
revision) spectrophotometer
(Part 4) : 1988 Determination of consistency of 13311 Methods of non-destructive testing of
standard cement paste (first revision) concrete
(Part 5) : 1988 Determination of initial and final (Part 1) : 1992 Ultrasonic pulse velocity
setting times (first revision) (Part 2) : 1992 Rebound hammer
(Part 6) : 1988 Determination of compressive 14959 Method of test for determination of
strength of hydraulic cement (other water soluble and acid soluble
than masonry cement)(first revision) chlorides in mortar and concrete
(Part 7) : 1988 Determination of compressive (Part 1) : 2001 Fresh mortar
strength of masonry cement (first (Part 2) : 2001 Hardened mortar and concrete
revision)
g) Treatment of Concrete Joints
(Part 8) : 1988 Determination of transverse and
compressive strength of plastic IS No. Title
mortar using prism (first revision) 1834 : 1984 Specification for hot applied sealing
(Part 9) : 1988 Determination of heat of hydration compound for joint in concrete (first
(first revision) revision)
(Part 10) : 1988 Determination of drying shrinkage 1838 Specification for preformed fillers for
(first revision) expansion joint in concrete
pavements and structures (non
(Part 11) : 1988 Determination of density (first
extruding and resilient type)
revision)
(Part 1) : 1983 Bitumen impregnated fibre (first
(Part 12) : 1988 Determination of air content of revision)
hydraulic cement mortar (first
(Part 2) : 1984 CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut
revision)
pith
(Part 13) : 1988 Measurement of water retentivity of
(Part 3) : 2011 Polymer based
masonry cement (first revision)
10566 : 1983 Methods of test for preformed fillers
(Part 14) : 1989 Determination of false set for expansion joints in concrete
(Part 15) : 1991 Determination of fineness by wet paving and structural construction
sieving 11433 Specification for one grade
4032 : 1985 Methods of chemical analysis for polysulphide based joint sealant
hydraulic cement (first revision) (Part 1) : 1985 General requirements
5816 : 1999 Method of test for splitting tensile (Part 2) : 1986 Methods of test
strength of concrete (first revision) 12118 Specification for two parts
8142 : 1976 Methods of test for determining polysulphide based sealants
setting time of concrete by (Part 1) : 1987 General requirements
penetration resistance (Part 2) : 1987 Methods of test
9375 : 1979 Specification for precast reinforced pipes and fittings for sewerage and
concrete plant guards drainage (first revision)
9872 : 1981 Specification for precast concrete 7639 : 1975 Method of sampling asbestos cement
septic tanks products
9893 : 1981 Specification for precast concrete 9627 : 1980 Specification for asbestos cement
blocks for lintels and sills pressure pipes (light duty)
12440 : 1988 Specification for precast concrete 13000 : 1990 Specification for silica-asbestos-
stone masonry blocks cement flat sheets
12592 : 2002 Specification for precast concrete 13008 : 1990 Specification for shallow corrugated
manhole covers and frames (first asbestos cement sheets
revision) iii) Other Fibre Cement Products
13356 : 1992 Specification for precast ferrocement IS No. Title
water tanks (250 to 10 000 litres
14862 : 2000 Specification for fibre cement flat
capacity)
sheets
13990 : 1994 Specification for precast reinforced
14871 : 2000 Specification for products in fibre
concrete planks and joists for flooring
reinforced cement long corrugated or
and roofing
asymmetrical section sheets and
14143 : 1994 Specification for prefabricated brick fittings for roofing and cladding
panel and partially precast concrete
iv) Concrete Pipes and Pipes Lined/Coated with
joist for flooring and roofing
Concrete or Mortar
14201 : 1994 Specification for precast reinforced
concrete channel unit for construction IS No. Title
of floors and roofs 458 : 2003 Specification for precast concrete
14241 : 1995 Specification for precast L-Panel pipes (with and without
units for roofing reinforcement) (fourth revision)
784 : 2001 Specification for prestressed concrete
ii) Asbestos Fibre Cement Products
pipes (including specials) (second
IS No. Title revision)
459 : 1992 Specification for corrugated and 1916 : 1989 Specification for steel cylinder pipe
semi-corrugated asbestos cement with concrete lining and coating (first
sheets (third revision) revision)
1592 : 2003 Specification for asbestos cement 3597 : 1998 Methods of test for concrete pipes
pressure pipes and joints (fourth (second revision)
revision) 4350 : 1967 Specification for concrete porous
1626 Specification for asbestos cement pipes for under drainage
building pipes and pipe fittings, 7319 : 1974 Specification for perforated concrete
gutters and gutter fittings and roofing pipes
fittings 7322 : 1985 Specification for specials for steel
(Part 1) : 1994 Pipes and pipe fittings (second cylinder reinforced concrete pipes
revision) (first revision)
(Part 2) : 1994 Gutters and gutter fittings (second 15155 : 2002 Specification for bar/wire wrapped
revision) steel cylinder pipe with mortar lining
and coating
(Part 3) : 1994 Roofing fittings (second revision)
2096 : 1992 Specification for asbestos cement flat b) Resin Matrix Products
sheets (first revision) IS No. Title
2098 : 1997 Specification for asbestos cement 1998 : 1962 Methods of test for thermosetting
building boards (first revision) synthetic resin bonded laminated
5913 : 2003 Methods of test for asbestos cement sheets
products (second revision) 2036 : 1995 Specification for phenolic laminated
6908 : 1991 Specification for asbestos cement sheets (second revision)
16 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
IS No. Title IS No. Title
2046 : 1995 Specification for decorative (Part 2) : 2002 For working voltages from 3.3 kV up
thermosetting synthetic resin bonded to and including 33 kV (first revision)
laminated sheets (second revision) 10810 Methods of test for cables
10. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES (Part 0) : 1984 General
IS No. Title (Part 1) : 1984 Annealing test for wires used in
conductors
694 : 2010 Polyvinyl chloride insulated
unsheathed and sheathed cables/ (Part 2) : 1984 Tensile test for aluminium wires
cords with rigid and flexible (Part 3) : 1984 Wrapping test for aluminium wires
conductor for rated voltages up to (Part 4) : 1984 Persulphate test of conductor
and including 450/750 V (fourth
(Part 5) : 1984 Conductor resistance test
revision)
(Part 6) : 1984 Thickness of thermoplastic and
1554 Specification for PVC insulated
elastomeric insulation and sheath
(heavy duty) electric cables
(Part 7) : 1984 Tensile strength and elongation at
(Part 1) : 1988 For working voltages up to and
including 1 100 volts (third revision) break of thermoplastic and
elastomeric insulation and sheath
(Part 2) : 1988 For working voltages from 3.3 kV up
to and including 11 kV (second (Part 8) : 1984 Breaking strength and elongation at
revision) break for impregnated paper
insulation
3961 Recommended current rating for
cables (Part 9) : 1984 Tear resistance for paper insulation
(Part 1) : 1967 Paper-insulated lead-sheathed cables (Part 10) : 1984 Loss of mass test
(Part 2) : 1967 PVC-insulated and PVC-sheathed (Part 11) : 1984 Thermal ageing in air
heavy duty cables (Part 12) : 1984 Shrinkage test
(Part 3) : 1968 Rubber insulated cables (Part 13) : 1984 Ozone resistance test
(Part 5) : 1968 PVC insulated light duty cables (Part 14) : 1984 Heat shock test
4289 Specification for flexible cables for (Part 15) : 1984 Hot deformation test
lifts and other flexible connections (Part 16) : 1986 Accelerated ageing test by oxygen
(Part 1) : 1984 Elastomer insulated cables (first pressure method
revision)
(Part 17) : 1986 Tear resistance test for heavy duty
(Part 2) : 2000 PVC insulated circular cables sheath
7098 Specification for cross-linked (Part 19) : 1984 Bleeding and blooming test
polyethylene insulated sheathed
(Part 20) : 1984 Cold bend test
cables
(Part 21) : 1984 Cold impact test
(Part 1) : 1988 For working voltage up to and
including 1 100 V (first revision) (Part 22) : 1984 Vicat softening point
(Part 2) : 2011 For working voltages form 3.3 kV up (Part 23) : 1984 Melt-flow index
to and including 33 kV (second (Part 24) : 1984 Water soluble impurities test of
revision) insulating paper
(Part 3) : 1993 For working voltages from 66 kV (Part 25) : 1984 Conductivity of water extract test of
upto and including 220 kV insulating paper
8130 : 2013 Specification for conductors for (Part 26) : 1984 pH value of water extract test of
insulated electric cables and flexible insulating paper
cords (second revision)
(Part 27) : 1984 Ash content test of insulating paper
9968 Specification for elastomer-insulated
(Part 28) : 1984 Water absorption test (Electrical)
cables
(Part 29) : 1984 Environmental stress cracking test
(Part 1) : 1988 For working voltages up to and
including 1 100 V (first revision) (Part 30) : 1984 Hot set test
(Part 31) : 1984 Oil resistance test (Part 64) : 2003 Measurement of temperature index
(Part 32) : 1984 Carbon content test for polyethylene 12943 : 1990 Brass glands for PVC cables
(Part 33) : 1984 Water absorption test (Gravimetric)
(Part 34) : 1984 Measurement of thickness of metallic 11. DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS
sheath a) Wooden Doors, Windows and Ventilators
(Part 35) : 1984 Determination of tin in lead alloy for
IS No. Title
sheathing
1003 Specification for timber panelled and
(Part 36) : 1984 Dimensions of armouring material
glazed shutters
(Part 37) : 1984 Tensile strength and elongation at
break of armouring materials (Part 1) : 2003 Door shutters (fourth revision)
(Part 38) : 1984 Torsion test on galvanized steel wires (Part 2) : 1994 Window and ventilator shutters (third
for armouring revision)
(Part 39) : 1984 Winding test on galvanized steel 2191 Specification for wooden flush door
strips for armouring shutters (cellular and hollow core
(Part 40) : 1984 Uniformity of zinc coating on steel type)
armour (Part 1) : 1983 Plywood face panels (fourth revision)
(Part 41) : 1984 Mass of zinc coating on steel armour (Part 2) : 1983 Particle board face panels and
(Part 42) : 1984 Resistivity test of armour wires and hardboard face panels (third revision)
strips and conductance test of armour 2202 Specification for wooden flush door
(wires/strips) shutters (solid core type)
(Part 43) : 1984 Insulation resistance (Part 1) : 1999 Plywood face panels (sixth revision)
(Part 44) : 1984 Spark test (Part 2) : 1983 Particle board face panels and
(Part 45) : 1984 High voltage test hardboard face panels (third revision)
(Part 46) : 1984 Partial discharge test 4020 Method of tests for door shutters
(Part 47) : 1984 Impulse test (Part 1) : 1998 General (third revision)
(Part 48) : 1984 Dielectric power factor test (Part 2) : 1998 Measurement of dimensions and
(Part 49) : 1984 Heating cycle test squareness (third revision)
(Part 50) : 1984 Bending test (Part 3) : 1998 Measurement of general flatness
(Part 51) : 1984 Dripping test (third revision)
(Part 52) : 1984 Drainage test (Part 4) : 1998 Local planeness test (third revision)
(Part 53) : 1984 Flammability test (Part 5) : 1998 Impact indentation test (third
(Part 54) : 1984 Static flexibility test revision)
(Part 55) : 1986 Abrasion test (Part 6) : 1998 Flexure test (third revision)
(Part 56) : 1987 Accelerated ageing by the air- (Part 7) : 1998 Edge loading test (third revision)
pressure method (Part 8) : 1998 Shock resistance test (third revision)
(Part 57) : 1987 Flexing test (Part 9) : 1998 Buckling resistance test (third
(Part 58) : 1998 Oxygen index test revision)
(Part 59) : 1988 Determination of the amount of (Part 10) : 1998 Slamming test (third revision)
halogen acid gas evolved during (Part 11) : 1998 Misuse test (third revision)
combustion of polymeric materials
taken from cables (Part 12) : 1998 Varying humidity test (third revision)
(Part 60) : 1988 Thermal stability of PVC insulation (Part 13) : 1998 End immersion test (third revision)
and sheath (Part 14) : 1998 Knife test (third revision)
(Part 61) : 1988 Flame retardant test (Part 15) : 1998 Glue adhesion test (third revision)
(Part 62) : 1993 Fire resistance test for bunched (Part 16) : 1998 Screw withdrawal resistance test
cables (third revision)
(Part 63) : 1993 Smoke density of electric cables 4021 : 1995 Specification for timber door,
under fire conditions window and ventilator frames
2215 : 2006 Specification for starters for (Part 1) : 1980 General requirements
fluorescent lamps (third revision) (Part 2) : 1981 Rigid steel conduits
2412 : 1975 Specification for link clips for (Part 3) : 1983 Rigid plain conduits for insulating
electrical wiring (first revision) materials
2418 Specification for tubular fluorescent (Part 4) : 1983 Pliable self-recovering conduits for
lamps for general lighting services insulating materials
(Part 1) : 1977 Requirements and tests (first (Part 5) : 2000 Pliable conduits of insulating
revision) materials
(Part 2) : 1977 Standard lamp data sheets (first (Part 6) : 2000 Pliable conduits of metal or
revision) composite materials
(Part 3) : 1977 Dimensions of G-5 and G-13 bi-pin (Part 8) : 2003 Rigid non threadable conduits of
caps (first revision) aluminium alloy
(Part 4) : 1977 Go and no-go gauges for G-5 and G- 9926 : 1981 Specification for fuse wires used in
13 bi-pin caps (first revision) rewirable type electric fuses up to
2675 : 1983 Specification for enclosed 650 volts
distribution fuseboards and cutouts 10322 Specification for luminaires
for voltages not exceeding 1 000 V
(Part 1) : 2014 General requirements and tests (first
(second revision)
revision)
3323 : 1980 Specification for bi-pin lamp holders
(Part 2) : 1982 Constructional requirements
for tubular fluorescent lamps (first
revision) (Part 3) : 1984 Screw and screwless terminations
3324 : 1982 Specification for holders for starters (Part 4) : 1984 Methods of tests
for tubular fluorescent lamps (first (Part 5/Sec 1) : Particular requirements, Section 1
revision) 2012 General purpose luminaires (first
3419 : 1988 Specification for fittings for rigid revision)
non-metallic conduits (second (Part 5/Sec 2) : Particular requirements, Section 2
revision) 2012 Recessed luminaires (first revision)
3480 : 1966 Specification for flexible steel (Part 5/Sec 3) : Particular requirements, Section 3
conduits for electrical wiring 2012 Luminaires for road and street
3528 : 1966 Specification for waterproof electric lighting (first revision)
lighting fittings (Part 5/Sec 4) : Particular requirements, Section 4
3553 : 1966 Specification for watertight electric 1987 Portable general purpose luminaires
lighting fittings (Part 5/Sec 5) : Particular requirements, Section 5
3837 : 1976 Specification for accessories for rigid 2013 Flood light (first revision)
steel conduits for electrical wiring (Part 5/Sec 6) : Particular requirements, Section 6
(first revision) 2013 Hand lamps
3854 : 1997 Specification for switches for (Part 5/Sec 7) : Particular requirements, Section 7
domestic and similar purposes
2013 Lighting chains
(second revision)
(Part 5/Sec 8) : Particular requirements, Section 8
4160 : 2005 Specification for interlocking switch
socket outlets (first revision) 2013 Emergency lighting
4649 : 1968 Specification for adaptors for flexible 11037 : 1984 Electronic type fan regulators
steel conduits 12449 Starting devices (other than glow
5077 : 1969 Specification for decorative lighting starters)
outfits (Part 1) : 1988 General and safety requirements
8030 : 1976 Specification for luminaires for (Part 2) : 1988 Performance requirements
hospitals
12776 : 2002 Specification for galvanized strand
9537 Specification for conduits for for earthing (first revision)
electrical installations
13010 : 2002 AC watt-hour meters, Class 0.5, 1 and 16102 Self ballasted LED-lamps for general
2 (first revision) lighting services
13779 : 1999 AC static watthour meters (Class 1 (Part 1) : 2012 Safety requirements
and 2) (first revision) (Part 2) : 2012 Performance requirements
13947 (Part 5/ Specification for low-voltage 16103 LED modules for general lighting
Sec 2) : 2004 switchgear and controlgear: Part 5 (Part 1) : 2012 Safety specification
Control circuit devices and switching (Part 2) : 2012 Performance requirements
elements, Section 2 Proximity
16148 : 2014 Performance specification for metal
switches
halide lamps
14763 : 2000 Conduit for electrical purposes, 16246: 2015 Specification for elastomer insulated
outside diameters of conduits for cables with limited circuit integrity
electrical installations and threads for when affected by fire
conduits and fittings
IS/IEC 60079-1: Explosive atmospheres Part 1 :
14768 Conduit fittings for electrical
2007 Equipment protection by flameproof
installations
enclosures d
(Part 1) : 2000 General requirements IS/IEC 60898-1: Electrical accessories Circuit
(Part 2) : 2003 Metal conduit fittings 2002 breakers for overcurrent protection
14772 : 2000 Enclosures for accessories for for household and similar
household and similar fixed electrical installations Part 1: Circuit-
installations breakers for ac operation
14927 Cable trunking and ducting systems IS/IEC 60947-1 : Low voltage switchgear and
for electrical installations 2007 controlgear Part 1: General rules
(first revision)
(Part 1) : 2001 General requirements
IS/IEC 60947-2 : Low voltage switchgear and
(Part 2) : 2001 Cable trunking and ducting systems 2003 controlgear Part 2: Circuit
intended for mounting on walls or breakers
ceilings
IS/IEC 60947-3 : Low voltage switchgear and
14930 Conduit systems for electrical 1999 controlgear Part 3: Switches,
installations disconnectors, switch-disconnectors
(Part 1) : 2001 General requirements and fuse combination units
(Part 2) : 2001 Particular requirements for conduit IS/IEC 60794- Optical fibre cables Part 1:
system buried underground 1-1: 2001 Generic specification, Section 1
15111 Self ballasted lamps for general General
lighting services: IS/IEC 60794- Optical fibre cables Part 1:
1-2 : 2003 Generic specification, Section 2
(Part 1) : 2002 Safety requirements
Basic optical cable test procedures
(Part 2) : 2002 Performance requirements IS/IEC 60794-2: Optical fibre cables Part 2 Sectional
15368 : 2003 Cable reels for household and similar 2002 specification for indoor cables
purposes
13. FILLERS, STOPPERS AND PUTTIES
15518 (Part 1) : Safety requirements for incandescent
2004 lamps: Part 1 Tungsten filament IS No. Title
lamps for domestic and similar 110 : 1983 Specification for ready mixed paint,
general lighting purposes brushing, grey filler, for enamels, for
15787 : 2008 Switch-socket-outlets (non-interlock use over primers (second revision)
type) 419 : 1967 Specification for putty for use on
15968 : 2013 Ballasts for tubular fluorescent window frames (first revision)
lamps Performance requirements 423 : 1961 Specification for plastic wood, for
15974 : 2013 Auxiliaries for lamps Starting joiners filler (revised)
devices (other than glow starters) 3709 : 1966 Specification for mastic cement for
Performance requirements bedding of metal windows
4457 : 2007 Specification for ceramic unglazed 5437 : 1994 Specification for figured rolled and
vitreous acid resisting tile (second wired glass (first revision)
revision) 14900 : 2000 Specification for transparent float glass
4832 Specification for chemical resistant
mortars 16. GYPSUM BASED MATERIALS
(Part 1) : 1969 Silicate type IS No. Title
(Part 2) : 1969 Resin type 2095 Specification for gypsum plaster
(Part 3) : 1968 Sulphur type boards
4860 : 1968 Specification for acid resistant bricks (Part 1) : 2011 Plain gypsum plaster boards (third
14862 : 2000 Specification for fibre cement flat revision)
sheets (Part 2) : 2001 Coated/laminated gypsum plaster
boards (second revision)
14143 : 1994 Specification for prefabricated brick
panel and partially precast concrete (Part 3) : 1996 Reinforced gypsum plaster boards
joist for flooring and roofing (second revision)
14871 : 2000 Specification for products in fibre 2542 Methods of test for gypsum plaster,
reinforced cement Long corrugated concrete and products
or asymmetrical section sheets and (Part 1/Sec 1) : Plaster and concrete, Section 1
fittings for roofing and cladding 1978 Normal consistency of gypsum
plaster (first revision)
n) Wall Coverings/Finishing (Part 1/Sec 2) : Plaster and concrete, Section 2
IS No. Title 1978 Normal consistency of gypsum
concrete (first revision)
1542 : 1992 Specification for sand for plaster
(second revision) (Part 1/Sec 3) : Plaster and concrete, Section 3
3952 : 2013 Specification for burnt clay hollow 1978 Setting time of plaster and concrete
bricks and blocks for walls and (first revision)
partitions (third revision) (Part 1/Sec 4) : Plaster and concrete, Section 4
4456 Methods of test for chemical resistant 1978 Transverse strength of gypsum
mortars plaster (first revision)
(Part 1) : 1967 Silicate type and resin type (Part 1/Sec 5) : Plaster and concrete, Section 5
1978 Compressive strength and dry set
(Part 2) : 1967 Sulphur type
density of gypsum plaster (first
4832 Specification for chemical resistant revision)
mortars
(Part 1/Sec 6) : Plaster and concrete, Section 6
(Part 1) : 1969 Silicate type
1978 Soundness of gypsum plaster (first
(Part 2) : 1969 Resin type revision)
(Part 3) : 1968 Sulphur type (Part 1/Sec 7) : Plaster and concrete, Section 7
15418 : 2003 Specification for finished wall 1978 Mechanical resistance of gypsum
papers, wall vinyls and plastic wall plaster by dropping ball test
coverings in roll form (first revision)
(Part 1/Sec 8) : Plaster and concrete, Section 8
15. GLASS 1978 Freedom from coarse particles (first
IS No. Title revision)
2553 (Part 1) : Specification for safety glass: Part 1 (Part 1/Sec 9) : Plaster and concrete, Section 9
1990 General purpose (third revision) 1978 Expansion of plaster (first revision)
(Part 1/Sec 10) : Plaster and concrete, Section 10 Sand
2835 : 1987 Specification for flat transparent
sheet glass (third revision) 1978 in set plaster (first revision)
3438 : 1994 Specification for silvered glass (Part 1/Sec 11) : Plaster and concrete, Section 11
mirrors for general purposes (second 1978 Wood fibre content in gypsum plaster
revision) (first revision)
24 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
IS No. Title IS No. Title
(Part 1/Sec 12) : Plaster and concrete, Section 12 Dry 4098 : 1983 Specification for lime-pozzolana
1978 bulk density (first revision) mixture (first revision)
(Part 2/Sec 1) : Gypsum products, Section 1 4456 Methods of test for chemical resistant
mortars
1981 Measurement of dimensions (first
revision) (Part 1) : 1967 Silicate type and resin type
(Part 2/Sec 2) : Gypsum products, Section 2 (Part 2) : 1967 Sulphur type
1981 Determination of mass (first revision) 4832 Chemical resistant mortars
(Part 2/Sec 3) : Gypsum products, Section 3 (Part 1) : 1969 Silicate type
1981 Determination of mass and thickness (Part 2) : 1969 Resin type
of paper surfacing (first revision) (Part 3) : 1968 Sulphur type
(Part 2/Sec 4) : Gypsum products, Section 4 13077 : 1991 Guide for preparation and use of mud
1981 Transverse strength (first revision) mortar in masonry
(Part 2/Sec 5) : Gypsum products, Section 5 14959 Method of test determination of water
soluble and acid soluble chlorides in
1981 Compressive strength (first revision)
mortar and concrete
(Part 2/Sec 6) : Gypsum products, Section 6 Water
(Part 1) : 2001 Fresh mortar and concrete
1981 absorption (first revision)
(Part 2) : 2001 Hardened mortar and concrete
(Part 2/Sec 7) : Gypsum products, Section 7
1981 Moisture content (first revision) 18. PAINTS AND ALLIED PRODUCTS
(Part 2/Sec 8) : Gypsum products, Section 8 Nail a) Water Based Paints and Pigments
1981 retention of precast reinforced
IS No. Title
gypsum slabs (first revision)
427 : 2013 Specification for distemper, dry,
2547 Specification for gypsum building
colour as required (third revision)
plaster
428 : 2013 Specification for washable distemper
(Part 1) : 1976 Excluding premixed lightweight
(third revision)
plaster (first revision)
5410 : 2013 Specification for cement paint
(Part 2) : 1976 Premixed lightweight plaster (first
(second revision)
revision)
15489 : 2013 Specification for paint, plastic
2849 : 1983 Specification for non-load bearing
emulsion (first revision)
gypsum partition blocks (solid and
hollow types) (first revision)
b) Ready Mixed Paints, Enamels and Powder Coatings
8272 : 1984 Specification for gypsum plaster for
use in the manufacture of fibrous IS No. Title
plasterboards (first revision) 101 Methods of sampling and test for
9498 : 1980 Specification for inorganic paints, varnishes and related products
aggregates for use in gypsum plaster (Part 1/Sec 1) : Test on liquid paints (general and
12679 : 1989 Specification for by-product gypsum 1986 (general and physical), Section 1
for use in plaster, blocks and boards Sampling (third revision)
(Part 1/Sec 2) : Test on liquid paints (general and
17. MORTAR (INCLUDING SAND FOR
1987 physical), Section 2 Preliminary
MORTAR)
examination and preparation of
IS No. Title samples for testing (third revision)
2116 : 1980 Specification for sand for masonry (Part 1/Sec 3) : Test on liquid paints (general
mortars (first revision) 1986 and physical), Section 3 Preparation
2250 : 1981 Code of Practice for preparation and of panels (third revision)
use of masonry mortars (first revision) (Part 1/Sec 4) : Test on liquid paints (general and
3085 : 1965 Method of test for permeability of 1987 physical), Section 4 Brushing test
cement mortar and concrete (third revision)
PART 5 BUILDING MATERIALS 25
IS No. Title IS No. Title
(Part 1/Sec 5) : Test on liquid paints (general and condensation (third revision)
1989 physical), Section 5 Consistency (Part 6/Sec 2) : Durability tests, Section 2 Keeping
(third revision)
1989 properties (third revision)
(Part 1/Sec 6) : Test on liquid paints (general and
(Part 6/Sec 3) : Durability tests, Section 3 Moisture
1987 physical), Section 6 Flash point (third
1990 vapour permeability (third revision)
revision)
(Part 6/Sec 4) : Durability tests, Section 4
(Part 1/Sec 7) : Test on liquid paints (general and
1991 Degradation of coatings (pictorial
1987 physical), Section 7 Mass per 10
aids for evaluation) (third revision)
litres (third revision)
(Part 6/Sec 5) : Durability tests, Section 5
(Part 2/Sec 1) : Test on liquid paints (Chemical
1997 Accelerated weathering test
1988 examination), Section 1 Water
content (third revision) (Part 7/Sec 1) : Environmental tests on paint films,
(Part 2/Sec 2) : Test on liquid paints (Chemical 1989 Section 1 Resistance to water (third
revision)
1986 examination), Section 2 Volatile
matter (third revision) (Part 7/Sec 2) : Environmental tests on paint films,
(Part 3/Sec 1) : Tests on paint film formation, Section 1989 Section 2 Resistance to liquids (third
revision)
1986 1 Drying time (third revision)
(Part 7/Sec 3) : Environmental tests on paint films,
(Part 3/Sec 2) : Tests on paint film formation, Section
1990 Section 3 Resistance to heat (third
1989 2 Film thickness (third revision)
revision)
(Part 3/Sec 4) : Tests on paint film formation, Section
(Part 7/Sec 4) : Environmental tests on paint films,
1987 4 Finish (third revision)
1990 Section 4 Resistance to bleeding of
(Part 3/Sec 5) : Tests on paint film formation, Section pigments (third revision)
1987 5 Fineness of grind (third revision) (Part 8/Sec 1) : Tests for pigments and other solids,
(Part 4/Sec 1) : Optical test, Section 1 Opacity (third 1989 Section 1 Residue on sieve (third
1988 revision) revision)
(Part 4/Sec 2) : Optical test, Section 2 Colour (third (Part 8/Sec 2) : Tests for pigments and other solids,
1989 revision) 1990 Section 2 Pigments and non volatile
(Part 4/Sec 3) : Optical test, Section 3 Light fastness matter (third revision)
1988 test (third revision) (Part 8/Sec 3) : Tests for pigments and other solids,
(Part 4/Sec 4) : Optical test, Section 4 Gloss (third 1993 Section 3 Ash content (third revision)
1988 revision) (Part 8/Sec 4) : Tests for pigments and other solids,
(Part 5/Sec 1) : Mechanical test on paint films, 2015 Section 4 Phthalic anhydride (fourth
revision)
1988 Section 1 Hardness tests (third
revision) (Part 8/Sec 5) : Tests for pigments and other solids,
(Part 5/Sec 2) : Mechanical test on paint films, 1993 Section 5 Lead restriction test (third
revision)
1988 Section 2 Flexibility and adhesion
(third revision) (Part 8/Sec 6) : Tests for pigments and other solids,
(Part 5/Sec 3) : Mechanical test on paint films, 1993 Section 6 Volume solids
1999 Section 3 Impact resistance (fourth (Part 9/Sec 1) : Tests for lacquers and varnish,
revision) 1993 Section 1 Acid value (third revision)
(Part 5/Sec 4) : Mechanical test on paint films, (Part 9/Sec 2) : Tests for lacquers and varnish,
1988 Section 4 Print free test (third 1993 Section 2 Rosin test (third revision)
revision) 104 : 1979 Specification for ready mixed paint,
(Part 6/Sec 1) : Durability tests, Section 1 Resistance brushing, zinc chrome, priming
1988 to humidity under conditions of (second revision)
109 : 1968 Specification for ready mixed paint, 410, 442, 444, 628, 631, 632, 634,
brushing, priming, plaster to Indian 693, 697, white and black
Standard colours No. 361 and 631 3539 : 1966 Specification for ready mixed paint,
(first revision) undercoating, for use under oil
133 : 2004 Specification for enamel, interior (a) finishes, to Indian Standard colours,
undercoating, (b) finishing (fourth as required
revision) 3585 : 1966 Specification for ready mixed paint,
133 (Part 1) : Specification for enamel, interior aluminium, brushing, priming, water
2013 (a) undercoating, (b) finishing : Part 1 resistant, for wood work
For household and decorative 3678 : 1966 Specification for ready mixed paint,
purposes (fifth revision) thick white, for lettering
137 : 1965 Specification for ready mixed paint, 9862 : 1981 Specification for ready mixed paint,
brushing, matt or egg-shell flat, brushing, bituminous black lead free,
finishing, interior, to Indian Standard acid, alkali, water and chlorine
colour, as required (revised) resisting
158 : 2015 Specification for ready mixed paint, 11883 : 1986 Specification for ready mixed paint,
brushing, bituminous, black, lead- brushing, red oxide, priming for
free, acid, alkali, and heat resisting metals
(fourth revision) 12744 (Part 1) : Specification for ready mixed paint,
164 : 1981 Specification for ready mixed paint 2013 air drying, red oxide, zinc phosphate,
for road marking (second revision) priming: Part 1 for domestic and
168 : 1993 Specification for ready mixed paint, decorative applications (fourth
air-drying semi-glossy/matt, for revision)
general purposes (third revision) 13183 : 1991 Specification for aluminium paints,
341 : 1973 Specification for black Japan, Types heat resistant
A, B and C (first revision) 13213 : 1991 Specification for polyurethane full
2074 : 1992 Specification for ready mixed paint, gloss enamel (two pack)
air drying red oxide-zinc chrome, 13607 : 1992 Specification for ready mixed paint,
priming (second revision) finishing, general purposes, synthetic
2075 : 2000 Specification for ready mixed paint, 13871 : 1993 Specification for powder coatings
stoving, red oxide-zinc chrome,
14506 : 1998 Specification for epoxy redoxide zinc
priming (second revision)
phosphate weldable primer, two
2339 : 2013 Specification for aluminium paint for component
general purposes (first revision)
14589 : 1999 Specification for zinc priming paint,
2932 (Part 1) : Specification for enamel, synthetic, epoxy based, two pack
2013 exterior (a) undercoating, (b) finishing:
Part 1 For household and decorative c) Thinners and Solvents
applications (fourth revision) IS No. Title
2933 (Part 1) : Specification for enamel, exterior: 82 : 1973 Methods of sampling and test for
2013 (a) undercoating (b) finishing: Part 1 thinners and solvents for paints (first
for domesic and decorative applications revision)
3536 : 1999 Specification for ready mixed paint, 430 : 1972 Paint remover, solvent type, non-
brushing, wood primer (first revision) flammable (second revision)
3537 : 1966 Specification for ready mixed paint, 431 : 1972 Paint remover, solvent type,
finishing, interior for general flammable (second revision)
purposes, to Indian Standard colours 533 : 2007 Specification for gum spirit of
No. 101, 216, 217, 219, 275, 281, turpentine (oil of turpentine) (third
352, 353, 358 to 361, 363, 364, 388, revision)
5667 : 1970 Specification for thinner for cellulose (Part 2) : 1991 Determination of resistance to
nitrate based paints and lacquers exposure of ultra-violet light and
14314 : 1995 Specification for thinner general water (Xenon arc type apparatus)
purposes for synthetic paints and (Part 3) : 1992 Determination of thickness at
varnishes specified pressure
(Part 4) : 1992 Determination of puncture resistance
d) Varnishes and Lacquers
by falling cone method
IS No. Title (Part 5) : 1992 Determination of tensile properties
337 : 1975 Specification for varnish, finishing, using a wide width strip
interior (first revision) 13262 : 1992 Specification for pressure sensitive
344 : 1976 Specification for varnish, stoving adhesive tapes with plastic base
(first revision) 13325 : 1992 Method of test for the determination
347 : 1975 Specification for varnish, shellac, for to tensile properties of extruded
general purposes (first revision) polymer geogrids using the wide strip
348 : 1968 Specification for French polish (first 13326 (Part 1) : Method of test for the evaluation of
revision)
1992 interface friction between
524 : 1983 Specification for varnish, finishing, geosynthetics and soil: Part 1
exterior, synthetic (second revision) Modified direct shear technique
525 : 1968 Specification for varnish, finishing, 14182 : 1994 Specification for solvent cement for
exterior and general purposes (first use with unplasticized polyvinyl-
revision) chloride plastic pipe and fittings
642 : 1963 Specification for varnish medium for
14293 : 1995 Method of test for trapezoid
aluminium paint (revised)
tearing Geotextiles
10018 : 1981 Specification for lacquer, cellulose,
14294 : 1995 Method of determination of apparent
nitrate clear, finishing, glossy for wood
opening size by dry sieving
19. POLYMERS, PLASTICS AND technique Geotextiles
GEOSYNTHETICS/GEOTEXTILES 14324 : 1995 Method of test for determination of
water permeability-permittivity
IS No. Title Geotextiles
1998 : 1962 Methods of test for thermosetting 14443 : 1997 Specification for polycarbonate
synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets
sheets
14500 : 1998 Specification for linear low-density
2036 : 1995 Specification for phenolic laminated
polyethylene (LLDPE) films
sheets (second revision)
14643 : 1999 Specification for unsintered
2046 : 1995 Specification for decorative
polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tape
thermosetting synthetics resin bonded
for thread sealing applications
laminated sheets (second revision)
2076 : 1981 Specification for unsupported 14706 : 1999 Sampling and preparation of test
polyvinyl chloride sheeting (first specimen of geotextiles
revision) 14714 : 1999 Determination of abrasion resistance
2508 : 1984 Specification for low density of geotextiles
polyethylene films (second revision) 14715 : 2000 Specification for woven jute
6307 : 1985 Specification for rigid PVC sheets geotextiles
(first revision) 14716 : 1999 Determination of mass per unit area
10889 : 2004 Specification for high density of geotextiles
polyethylene films (first revision) 14739 : 1999 Methods for determination of creep
12830 : 1989 Specification for rubber based of geotextiles
adhesives for fixing PVC tiles to 14753 : 1999 Specification for poly(methyl)
cement methacrylate (PMMA) (Acrylic)
13162 Methods of test for geotextiles sheets
10292 : 1988 Dimensional requirements for rubber (Part 1) : 1987 General requirements (first revision)
sealing rings for C.I.D. Joints in (Part 2) : 1987 Specific requirements for 45° elbows
asbestos cement piping (first (first revision)
revision) (Part 3) : 1987 Specific requirements for 90° elbows
10299 : 1982 Cast iron saddle pieces for service (first revision)
connection from asbestos cement (Part 4) : 1987 Specific requirements for 90° tees
pressure pipes (first revision)
11606 : 1986 Methods of sampling cast iron pipes (Part 5) : 1987 Specific requirements for 45° tees
and fittings (first revision)
12820 : 2004 Dimensional requirements of rubber (Part 6) : 1987 Specific requirements for sockets
gaskets for mechanical joints and (first revision)
push-on joints for use with cast iron (Part 7) : 1987 Specific requirements for unions
pipes and fittings for carrying water, (first revision)
gas and sewage (first revision)
(Part 8) : 1987 Specific requirements for caps (first
12987 : 1991 Cast iron detachable joints for use revision)
with asbestos cement pressure pipes 8008 Specification for injection moulded
(light duty) high density polyethylene (HDPE)
12988 : 1991 Rubber sealing rings for CID joints fittings for potable water supplies
for light duty AC pipes (Part 1) : 2003 General requirements
Dimensional requirements
(Part 2) : 2003 Specific requirements for 90° bends
13382 : 2004 Specification for cast iron specials for (first revision)
mechanical and push-on flexible (Part 3) : 2003 Specific requirements for 90° tees
joints for pressure pipelines for water,
(Part 4) : 2003 Specific requirements for reducers
gas and sewage (first revision)
(Part 5) : 2003 Specific requirements for ferrule
15905 : 2011 Specification for hubless
reducers (first revision)
centrifugally cast (spun) iron pipes,
(Part 6) : 2003 Specific requirements for pipe ends
fittings and accessories Spigot
series (Part 7) : 2003 Specific requirements for sandwich
flanges
iii) Lead Pipes and Fittings
(Part 8) : 2003 Specific requirements for reducing
IS No. Title tests
404 (Part 1) : Specification for lead pipes: Part 1 (Part 9) : 2003 Specific requirements for end caps
1993 For other than chemical purpose (first revision)
(third revision) 8360 Specification for fabricated high
iv) Fibre Pipes and Fittings density polyethelene (HDPE) fittings
for potable water supplies
IS No. Title
(Part 1) : 1977 General requirements
11925 : 1986 Specification for pitch-impregnated (Part 2) : 1977 Specific requirements for 90° tees
fibre pipes and fittings for drainage
(Part 3) : 1977 Specific requirements for 90° bends
purposes
10124 Specification for fabricated PVC-U
v) Plastic Pipes and Fittings
fittings for potable water supplies
IS No. Title (Part 1) : 2009 General requirements (second
4984 : 1995 Specification for high density revision)
polyethylene pipes for water supply (Part 2) : 2009 Specific requirements for sockets
(fourth revision) (second revision)
4985 : 2000 Specification for unplasticized PVC (Part 3) : 2009 Specific requirements of straight
pipes for potable water supplies (third reducers (second revision)
revision) (Part 4) : 2009 Specific requirements for caps
7834 Specification for injection moulded (second revision)
PVC socket fittings with solvent (Part 5) : 2009 Specific requirements for equal tees
cement joints for water supplies (second revision)
30 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
IS No. Title IS No. Title
(Part 6) : 2009 Specific requirements for flanged tail elastomeric sealing ring type socket
piece with metallic flanges (second joints under negative internal
revision) pressure and with angular deflection
(Part 7) : 2009 Specific requirements for threaded (first revision)
adaptors (second revision) (Part 8/Sec 4) : Resistance to internal hydrostatic
(Part 8) : 2009 Specific requirements for 90° bends 2004 pressure, Section 4 Leak-tightness of
(second revision) elastomeric sealing ring type socket
joints under positive internal pressure
(Part 9) : 2009 Specific requirements for 60° bends
without angular deflection (first
(second revision)
revision)
(Part 10) : 2009 Specific requirements for 45° bends
(Part 9) : Resistance to external blows (impact
(second revision)
2004 resistance) at 0°C (Round-the-clock
(Part 11) : 2009 Specific requirements for 30° bends method)
(second revision)
(Part 10) : 2004 Determination of organotin as tin
(Part 12) : 2009 Specific requirements for 22½° bends aqueous solution (first revision)
(second revision)
(Part 11) : 2004 Resistance to dichloromethane at
(Part 13) : 2009 Specific requirements for 11¼° bends specified temperature (first revision)
(second revision)
(Part 12) : 2004 Determination of titanium dioxide
12235 Methods of test for unplasticised content
PVC pipes for potable water supplies
(Part 13) : 2004 Determination of tensile strength and
(Part 1) : 2004 Measurement of dimensions (first elongation
revision)
(Part 14) : 2004 Determination of density/relative
(Part 2) : 2004 Determination of Vicat softening density (specific gravity)
temperature (first revision)
(Part 15) : 2004 Determination of vinyl chloride
(Part 3) : 2004 Test for opacity (first revision) monomer content
(Part 4) : 2004 Determining the detrimental effect on (Part 16) : 2004 High temperature test
the composition of water (first
(Part 17) : 2004 Determination of ash content and
revision)
sulphated ash content
(Part 5/Sec 1) : Longitudinal reversion, Section 1
(Part 18) : 2004 Determination of ring stiffness
2004 Determination methods (first
(Part 19) : 2004 Flattening test
revision)
12709 : 1994 Specification for glass-fibre
(Part 5/Sec 2) : Reversion test, Section 2
reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes joints
2004 Determination parameters (first and fittings for use for potable water
revision) supply (first revision)
(Part 6) : 2004 Stress relief test (first revision) 12818 : 2010 Specification for unplasticized
(Part 7) : 2004 Resistance to sulphuric acid (first polyvinyl chloride(PVC-U) screen
revision) and casing pipes for bore/tubewells
(Part 8/Sec 1) : Resistance to internal hydrostatic (second revision)
2004 pressure, Section 1 Resistance to 13592 : 2013 Specification for unplasticized
internal hydrostatic pressure at polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes for
constant internal water pressure (first soil and waste discharge system for
revision) inside and outside buildings
(Part 8/Sec 2) : Resistance to internal hydrostatic including ventilation and rainwater
2004 pressure, Section 2 Leak-tightness of system (first revision)
elastomeric sealing ring type socket 14333 : 1996 Specification for high density
joints under positive internal pressure polyethylene pipes for sewerage
and with angular deflection (first 14402 : 1996 Specification for GRP pipes, joints
revision) and fittings for use for sewerage,
(Part 8/Sec 3) : Resistance to internal hydrostatic industrial waste and water (other than
2004 pressure, Section 3 Leak-tightness of potable)
14735 : 1999 Specification for unplasticized 5504 : 1997 Specification for spiral welded pipes
polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) injection (first revision)
moulded fittings for soil and waste 6286 : 1979 Seamless and welded steel pipe for
discharge system for inside and sub-zero temperature service
outside buildings including
6392 : 1971 Steel pipe flanges
ventilation and rain water system
vii) Stoneware Pipes and Fittings
14885 : 2001 Specification for polyethylene pipe
for supply of gaseous fuel IS No. Title
15328 : 2003 Specification for unplasticized non- 651 : 2007 Specification for glazed stoneware
pressure polyvinyl chloride (PVC-U) pipes and fittings (sixth revision)
pipes for use in underground drainage
3006 : 1979 Specification for chemically resistant
and sewerage system
glazed stoneware pipes and fittings
15450 : 2004 Specification for polyethylene/ (first revision)
aluminium/polyethylene composite
viii) Asbestos Cement Pipes
pressure pipes for hot and cold water
supplies [See 8 (a) (ii) under the category Composite Matrix
15778 : 2007 Specification for chlorinated Products]
polyvinyl chloride (CPVC) pipes for ix) Concrete Pipes and Pipes lined/coated with
potable hot and cold water Concrete or Mortar
distribution supplies
15801 : 2008 Specification for polypropylene- [See 8 (a) (iv) under the category Composite Matrix
random copolymer pipes for hot and Products]
cold water supplies
c) Kitchen and Sanitary Appliances
15927 Specification for polyethylene fittings
for use with polyethylene pipes for IS No. Title
the supply of gaseous fuels 771 Specification for glazed fire clay
(Part 1) : 2012 Fittings for sockets using heated tools sanitary appliances
(Part 2) : 2012 Spigot fittings for butt fusion jointing (Part 1) : 1979 General requirements (second revision)
or socket fusion using heated tools, (Part 2) : 1985 Specific requirements of kitchen and
spigot fittings for use with electro- laboratory sinks (third revision)
fusion fittings
(Part 3/Sec 1) : Specific requirements of urinals,
(Part 3) : 2011 Electro-fusion fittings
1979 Section 1 Slab urinals (second revision)
16098 Specification for structured - wall
(Part 3/Sec 2) : Specific requirements of urinals,
plastics piping systems for non-
1985 Section 2 Stall urinals (third revision)
pressure drainage and sewerage
(Part 1) : 2013 Pipes and fittings with smooth (Part 4) : 1979 Specific requirements of post mortom
external surface, Type A slabs (second revision)
(Part 2) : 2013 Pipes and fittings with non-smooth (Part 5) : 1979 Specific requirements of shower trays
external surface, Type B (second revision)
vi) Steel Tubes, Pipes and Fittings (Part 6) : 1979 Specific requirements of bed-pan
sinks (second revision)
IS No. Title
(Part 7) : 1981 Specific requirements of slop sinks
1239 Specification for steel tubes, tubular (second revision)
and other wrought steel fittings
772 : 1973 Specification for general
(Part 1) : 2004 Steel tubes (sixth revision) requirements of enamelled cast iron
(Part 2) : 2011 Steel pipe fittings (fifth revision) sanitary appliances (second revision)
774 : 2004 Specification for flushing cisterns for
3589 : 2001 Specification for steel pipes for water
water-closets and urinals (other than
and sewage (168.3 to 2 540 mm
plastic cisterns) (fifth revision)
outside diameter) (third revision)
2326 : 1987 Specification for automatic flushing
4270 : 2001 Specification for steel tubes used for
cisterns for urinals (second revision)
water wells (third revision)
32 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
IS No. Title d) Valves and Water Fittings (including Ferrules)
IS No. Title
2548 Specification for plastic seats and
covers for water-closets 778 : 1984 Specification for copper alloy gate,
globe, and check valves for water
(Part 1) : 1996 Thermoset seats and covers (fifth works purposes (fourth revision)
revision)
781 : 1984 Specification for cast copper alloy
(Part 2) : 1996 Thermoplastic seats and covers (fifth screw-down bib taps and stop valves
revision) for water services (third revision)
2556 Specification for vitreous sanitary 1701 : 1960 Specification for mixing valves for
appliances (vitreous china) ablutionary and domestic purposes
(Part 1) : 1994 General requirements (third revision) 1703 : 2000 Specification for water fittings
(Part 2) : 2004 Specific requirements of wash-down Copper alloy float valves (horizontal
water-closets (fifth revision) plunger type) (fourth revision)
1711 : 1984 Specification for self-closing taps for
(Part 3) : 2004 Specific requirements of squatting
water supply purposes (second
pans (fifth revision)
revision)
(Part 4) : 2004 Specific requirements of wash basins 1795 : 1982 Specification for pillar taps for water
(fourth revision) supply purposes (second revision)
(Part 5) : 1994 Specific requirements of laboratory 2692 : 1989 Specification for ferrules for water
sinks (third revision) services (second revision)
(Part 6) : 1995 Specific requirements of urinals and 3004 : 1979 Specification for plug cocks for water
partition plates (fourth revision) supply purposes (first revision)
(Part 7) : 1995 Specific requirements of accessories 3042 : 1965 Specification for single faced sluice
for sanitary appliances (third gates (200 to 1 200 mm size)
revision) 3950 : 1979 Specification for surface boxes for
(Part 8) : 2004 Specific requirements of pedestal sluice valves (first revision)
close coupled wash-down and 4038 : 1986 Specification for foot valves for water
syphonic water closets (fifth revision) works purposes (second revision)
(Part 9) : 2004 Specific requirements of pedestal 4346 : 1982 Specification for washers for use with
type bidets (fifth revision) fittings for water services (first
revision)
(Part 14): 1995 Specific requirements of integrated
squatting pans (first revision) 5312 Specification for swing check type
reflux (non-return) valves
(Part 15) : 2004 Specific requirements of universal
(Part 1) :2004 Single door pattern (second revision)
water closets (second revision)
(Part 2) :2013 Multi-door pattern (first revision)
(Part 16) : 2002 Specific requirements for wash down
wall mounted water closets 8931 : 1993 Specification for cast copper alloy
fancy single tap combination tap and
(Part 17) : 2001 Specific requirements for wall stop valves for water services (first
mounted bidets revision)
6411 : 1985 Specification for gel-coated glass 9338 : 2013 Specification for cast iron/S.G. iron,
fibre reinforced polyester resin bath cast steel screw-down stop valves for
tubs (first revision) water works purposes (second
7231 : 1994 Specification for plastic flushing revision)
cisterns for water-closets and urinals 9739 : 1981 Specification for pressure reducing
(second revision) valves for domestic water supply
11246 : 1992 Specification for glass fibre systems
reinforced polyester resins (GRP) 9758 : 1981 Specification for flush valves and
squatting pans (first revision) fittings for water-closets and urinals
13983 : 1994 Specification for stainless steel sinks 9762 : 1994 Specification for polyethylene floats
for domestic purposes (spherical) for float valves (first
revision)
9763 : 2000 Specification for plastic bib taps, of austenitic stainless steels
pillar taps, angle valves, hot and cold Method for determination
water services (second revision) (Part 1) : 1994 Corrosion test in nitric acid medium
12234 : 1988 Specification for plastic equilibrium by measurement of loss in mass
float valve for cold water services (Huey test) (first revision)
13049 : 1991 Specification for diaphragm type (Part 2) : 1994 Corrosion test in a sulphuric acid/
(plastic body) float operated valves copper sulphate medium in the
for cold water services presence of copper turnings
(Monypenny Strauss Test) (first
13114 : 1991 Specification for forged brass gate,
revision)
globe and check valves for water
works purposes b) Structural Steel
13349 : 1992 Specification for single faced cast IS No. Title
iron thimble mounted sluice gates
2062 : 2011 Specification for hot rolled medium
14845 : 2000 Specification for resilient seated cast and high tensile structural steel
iron air relief valves for water works (seventh revision)
purposes 2830 : 2012 Specification for carbon steel cast
14846 : 2000 Specification for sluice valves for billet ingots, billets, blooms and slabs
water works purposes (50-1 200 mm) for re-rolling into steel for general
structural purposes (third revision)
e) Water Meters
2831 : 2012 Specification for carbon steel cast
IS No. Title billets ingots, blooms and slabs for
779 : 1994 Specification for water meters re-rolling into structural steel
(domestic type) (sixth revision) (Ordinary quality) (fourth revision)
2373 : 1981 Specification for water meters (bulk 8052 : 2006 Specification for steel ingots, billets
type) (third revision) and blooms for the production of
6784 : 1996 Method for performance testing of springs, rivets and screws for general
water meters (domestic type) (second engineering applications (second
revision) revision)
8952 : 1995 Steel ingots, blooms and billets for
21. STEEL AND ITS ALLOYS (See 23 FOR production of mild steel wire rods for
STRUCTURAL SECTIONS) general engineering purposes (first
revision)
a) General
11587 : 1986 Specification for structural weather
IS No. Title resistant steels
1030 : 1998 Carbon steel castings for general 15103 : 2002 Fire resistant steel
engineering purposes (fifth revision) 15911 : 2010 Structural steel (Ordinary quality)
1136 : 2008 Preferred sizes for wrought metal 15962 : 2012 Structural steels for buildings and
products (third revision) structures with improved seismic
1762 (Part 1) : Code for designation of steels: Part 1 resistance
1974 Based on letter symbols (first revision) c) Sheet and Strip
2049 : 1978 Colour code for the identification of IS No. Title
wrought steel for general engineering
277 : 2003 Specification for galvanized steel
purposes (first revision)
sheets (plain and corrugated) (sixth
2644 : 1994 High tensile steel castings (fourth revision)
revision)
412 : 1975 Specification for expanded metal
2708 : 1993 Specification for 1.5 percent steel sheets for general purposes
manganese steel castings for general (second revision)
engineering purposes (third revision)
513 : 2008 Specification for cold reduced low
7598 : 1990 Classification of steels (first revision) carbon steel sheets and strips (fifth
10461 Resistance to inter-granular corrosion revision)
1079 : 2009 Specification for hot rolled carbon 7904 : 1995 Specification for high-carbon steel
steel sheet and strip (sixth revision) wire rods (first revision)
6911 : 1992 Stainless steel plate, sheet and strip 10631 : 1983 Stainless steel for welding electrode
(first revision) core wire
7226 : 1974 Specification for cold rolled medium, IS/ISO 16124 : Steel wire rod Dimensions and
high carbon and low alloy steel strip 2004 tolerances
for general engineering purposes
14246 : 2013 Specification for continuously pre- e) Plates and Studs
painted galvanized steel sheets and IS No. Title
coils (first revision)
1862 : 1975 Specification for studs (second
15961 : 2012 Hot-dip
revision)
15965 : 2012 Pre-painted aluminium zinc alloy
metallic coated steel strip and sheet 3502 : 2009 Specification for steel chequered
(plain) plates (third revision)
12313: 1988 Specification for hot-dip terne coated f) Tubes and Tubulars
carbon steel sheets
IS No. Title
d) Bars, Rods, Wire and Wire Rods 1161 : 2014 Specification for steel tubes for
structural purposes (fifth revision)
IS No. Title
4923 : 1997 Specification for hollow mild steel
280 : 2006 Specification for mild steel wire for
sections for structural use (second
general engineering purposes (fourth
revision) revision)
1148 : 2009 Steel rivet bars (medium and high g) Slotted Sections
tensile) for structural purposes
(fourth revision) IS No. Title
1673 : 1984 Specification for mild steel wire cold 8081 : 1976 Specification for slotted sections
heading quality (second revision)
22. STONES
1812 : 1982 Specification for carbon steel wire for
the manufacture of wood screw IS No. Title
(second revision) 1121 Methods of test for determination of
1835 : 1976 Specification for round steel wire for strength properties of natural
ropes (third revision) building stones
1875 : 1992 Carbon steel billets, blooms, slabs (Part 1) : 2013 Compressive strength (second revision)
and bars for forgings (fifth revision)
(Part 2) : 2013 Transverse strength (second revision)
1921 : 2005 Specification for resin cored solder
(Part 3) : 2012 Tensile strength (second revision)
wire (second revision)
2591 : 1982 Dimensions for hot rolled bars for (Part 4) : 2013 Shear strength (second revision)
threaded components (second 1122 : 1974 Method of test for determination of
revision) true specific gravity of natural
3150 : 1982 Specification for hexagonal wire building stones (first revision)
netting for general purposes 1123 : 1975 Method of identification of natural
4826 : 1979 Specification for hot-dipped building stones (first revision)
galvanized coatings on round steel 1124 : 1974 Method of test for determination of
wires (first revision) water absorption, apparent specific
6527 : 1995 Stainless steel wire rod (first revision) gravity and porosity of natural
6528 : 1995 Specification for stainless steel wire building stones (first revision)
(first revision) 1125 : 2013 Method of test for determination of
6603 : 2001 Specification for stainless steel bars weathering of natural building stones
and flats (first revision) (second revision)
7887 : 1992 Specification for mild steel wire rods 1126 : 2013 Method of test for determination of
for general engineering purposes durability of natural building stones
(first revision) (second revision)
1127 : 1970 Recommendations for dimensions (Part 2/ Sec 1) : Maharashtra state, Section 1
and workmanship of natural building 1979 Availability of stones
stones for masonry work (first
(Part 2/ Sec 2) : Maharashtra state, Section 2
revision)
1979 Engineering properties of building
1128 : 1974 Specification for limestone (slab and
stones
tiles) (first revision)
(Part 2/ Sec 3) : Maharashtra state, Section 3
1129 : 1972 Recommendation for dressing of
natural building stones (first revision) 1979 Engineering properties of stone
aggregates
1130 : 1969 Specification for marble (blocks,
slabs and tiles) (Part 3/ Sec 2) : Tamil Nadu state, Section 2
1706 : 1972 Method of determination of 1990 Engineering properties of building
resistance to wear by abrasion of stones
natural building stones (first revision) (Part 3/ Sec 3) : Tamil Nadu state, Section 3
3316 : 1974 Specification for structural granite 1980 Engineering properties of stone
(first revision) aggregates
3620 : 1979 Specification for laterite stone block (Part 4/Sec 1 to Karnataka state, Sections (1 to 3)
for masonry (first revision) 3) : 1996
3622 : 1977 Specification for sand stone (slabs (Part 5/ Sec 1) : Andhra Pradesh, Section 1
and tiles) (first revision)
1997 Availability of stones
4121 : 1967 Method of test for determination of
(Part 5/ Sec 2) : Andhra Pradesh, Section 2
water transmission rate by capillary
1997 Engineering properties of building
action through natural building stones
stones
4122 : 1967 Method of test for surface softening
(Part 5/ Sec 3) : Andhra Pradesh, Section 3
of natural building stones by
exposure to acidic atmospheres 1997 Engineering properties of stone
aggregates
4348 : 1973 Methods of test for determination of
permeability of natural building 9394 : 1979 Specification for stone lintels
stones (first revision) 14223 (Part 1) : Specification for polished building
5218 : 1969 Method of test for toughness of 1994 stones: Part 1 Granite
natural building stones
23. STRUCTURAL SECTIONS
5640 : 1970 Method of test for determining the
aggregate impact value of soft coarse a) Structural Shapes
aggregates
IS No. Title
6241 : 1971 Method of test for determination of
811 : 1987 Specification for cold formed light
stripping value of road aggregates
gauge structural steel sections
6250 : 1981 Specification for roofing slate tiles (revised)
(first revision)
1173 : 1978 Specification for hot rolled and slit
6579 : 1981 Specification for coarse aggregate for steel tee bars (second revision)
water bound macadam (first revision)
1863 : 1979 Specification for hot rolled steel bulb
7779 Schedule for properties and flats (first revision)
availability of stones for construction
2314 : 1986 Specification for steel sheet piling
purposes
sections (first revision)
(Part 1/ Sec 1) : Gujarat state, Section 1 Availability
3443 : 1980 Specification for crane rail sections
1975 of stones (first revision)
(Part 1/ Sec 2) : Gujarat state, Section 2 Engineering 3908 : 1986 Specification for aluminium equal leg
1975 properties of building stones angles (first revision)
(Part 1/Sec 3) : Gujarat state, Section 3 Engineering 3909 : 1986 Specification for aluminium unequal
1975 properties of stone aggregates leg angles (first revision)
3921 : 1985 Specification for aluminium channels and aluminium alloys, bar, rod and
(first revision) section (first revision)
3964 : 1980 Specification for light rails (first 6477 : 1983 Dimensions for wrought aluminium
revision) and aluminium alloys, extruded
5384 : 1985 Specification for aluminium I-beams hollow sections (first revision)
(first revision) IS/ISO 7452 : Hot-rolled structural steel plates
6445 : 1985 Specification for aluminium tee 2002 Tolerances on dimensions and shape
sections (first revision) 12778 : 2004 Hot rolled parallel flange steel
sections for beams, columns and
b) Dimensional Standards bearing piles Dimensions and
IS No. Title section properties (first revision)
808 : 1989 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam, 12779 : 1989 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot
column channel and angle sections rolled parallel flange beam and
(third revision) column sections
1730 : 1989 Dimensions for steel plates, sheets IS/ISO 16124 : Steel wire rod Dimensions and
strips and flats for general engineering 2004 tolerances
purposes (second revision) IS/ISO 16160 : Continuously hot rolled steel sheet
1732 : 1989 Dimensions for round and square 2012 products Dimensional and shape
steel bars for structural and general tolerances (first revision)
engineering purposes (second IS/ISO 16162 : Continuously cold-rolled steel sheet
revision) 2012 products Dimensional and shape
1852 : 1985 Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot tolerances (first revision)
rolled steel products (fourth revision) IS/ISO 16163 : Continuously hot dipped coated steel
2525 : 1982 Dimensions for wrought aluminium
2012 products Dimensional and shape
and aluminium alloy wire (first
tolerances (first revision)
revision)
2591 : 1982 Dimensions for hot rolled steel bars 24. THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS
for threaded components (second
revision) IS No. Title
2673 : 2002 Dimensions for wrought aluminium 3144 : 1992 Methods of test for mineral wool
and aluminium alloys, extruded thermal insulation material (second
round tube (second revision) revision)
2676 : 1981 Dimensions for wrought aluminium 3346 : 1980 Methods for the determination of
and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip thermal conductivity of thermal
(first revision) insulation materials (two slab,
guarded hot-plate method (first
2677 : 1979 Dimensions for wrought aluminium
revision)
and aluminium alloys, plates and hot
rolled sheets (first revision) 3677 : 1985 Specification for unbonded rock and
2678 : 1987 Dimensions and tolerances for slag wool for thermal insulation
wrought aluminium and aluminium (second revision)
alloy, drawn round tubes (second 4671 : 1984 Specification for expanded
revision) polystyrene for thermal insulation
3577 : 1992 Dimensions and tolerances for purposes (first revision)
wrought aluminium and aluminium 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-
alloys rivet, bolt and screw stock (first type and pipe-covering type thermal
revision) insulation (first revision)
3954 : 1991 Hot rolled steel channel sections for 5724 : 1970 Methods of test for thermal insulating
general engineering purposes cement
Dimensions (first revision) 6598 : 1972 Specification for cellular concrete for
3965 : 1981 Dimensions for wrought aluminium thermal insulation
7509 : 1993 Specification for thermal insulating (Part 13) : 1992 Determination of flammability by
cement (first revision) oxygen index
8154 : 1993 Specification for preformed calcium 11307 : 1985 Specification for cellular glass block
silicate insulation for temperature up and pipe thermal insulating
to 650°C (first revision) 11308 : 1985 Specification for thermal insulating
8183 : 1993 Specification for bonded mineral castables (hydraulic setting) for
wool (first revision) temperatures up to 1 250°C
9403 : 1980 Method of test for thermal 12436 : 1988 Specification for preformed rigid
conductance and transmittance of polyurethane (PUR) and
built up sections by means of guarded polyisocyanurate (PIR) foams for
hot box thermal insulation
9489 : 1980 Method of test for thermal 13204 : 1991 Specification for rigid phenolic
conductivity of materials by means foams for thermal insulation
of heat flow meter 13286 : 1992 Methods of test for surface spread of
flame for thermal insulation materials
9490 : 1980 Method of determination for thermal
conductivity of insulation materials 14656 : 1999 Ceramic fibre products Methods
(water calorimeter method) of test
9742 : 1993 Specification for sprayed mineral 25. THREADED FASTENERS, RIVETS AND
wool thermal insulation (first NAILS
revision)
IS No. Title
9743 : 1990 Specification for thermal insulation
finishing cements (first revision) 207 : 1964 Specification for gate and shutter
hooks and eyes (revised)
9842 : 1994 Specification for preformed fibrous
pipe insulation (first revision) 451 : 1999 Specification for technical supply
conditions for wood screws (third
11128 : 1994 Specification for spray applied
revision)
hydrated calcium silicate thermal
554 : 1999 Specification for pipe threads where
insulation
pressure-tide joints are made on the
11129 : 1984 Method of test for tumbling friability threads Dimensions, tolerances
of preformed block-type thermal and designation (fourth revision)
insulation
723 : 1972 Specification for steel countersunk
11239 Method of test for rigid cellular head wire nails (second revision)
thermal insulation materials
724 : 1964 Specification for mild steel and brass
(Part 1) : 2009 Dimensions (first revision) cup, ruler and square hooks and screw
(Part 2) : 2009 Apparent density (first revision) eyes (revised)
(Part 3) : 2009 Dimensional stability (first revision) 725 : 1961 Specification for copper wire nails
(revised)
(Part 4) : 1985 Water vapour transmission rate (first
revision) 730 : 1978 Specification for hook bolts for
corrugated sheet roofing (second
(Part 5) : 2009 Volume percent of open and closed
revision)
cells (first revision)
1120 : 1975 Specification for coach screws (first
(Part 6) : 1985 Heat distortion temperature
revision)
(Part 7) : 1985 Coefficient of linear thermal 1363 Specification for hexagon head bolts,
expansion at low temperatures screws and nuts of product grade C
(Part 8) : 1985 Flame height, time of burning and (Part 1) : 2002 Hexagon head bolts (Size range M5
loss of mass to M64) (fourth revision)
(Part 9) : 1988 Water absorption (Part 2) : 2002 Hexagon head screws (Size range M5
(Part 10) : 1985 Flexural strength to M64) (fourth revision)
(Part 11) : 1985 Compressive strength (Part 3) : 2002 Hexagon nuts (Size range M5 to
M64) (fourth revision)
(Part 12) : 1988 Horizontal burning characteristics
1364 Specification for hexagon head bolts,
38 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
IS No. Title IS No. Title
screws and nuts of product Grades A (Part 11) : 2002 Electroplated coatings (third
and B revision)
(Part 1) : 2002 Hexagon head bolts (Size range M1.6 (Part 12) : 1981 Phosphate coatings on threaded
to M64) (fourth revision) fasteners (second revision)
(Part 2) : 2002 Hexagon head screws (Size range (Part 13) : 1983 Hot dip galvanized coatings on
M1.6 to M64) (fourth revision) threaded fasteners (second revision)
(Part 3) : 2002 Hexagon nuts (Size range M1.6 to (Part 14/Sec 1) : Mechanical properties of corrosion
M64) (fourth revision) 2002 resistance stainless stainless steel
(Part 4) : 2003 Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (Size fasteners, Section 1 Bolts, screws and
range M1.6 to M64) (fourth revision) studs (third revision)
(Part 5) : 2002 Hexagon thin nuts (unchamfered) (Part 14/Sec 2) : Mechanical properties of corrosion
(Size range M1.6 to M10) (fourth 2002 resistance stainless stainless steel
revision) fasteners, Section 2 Nuts (third
revision)
(Part 6) : 2002 Hexagon nuts, style 2
(Part 14/Sec 3) : Mechanical properties of corrosion
1365 : 2005 Slotted countersunk flat head screws
2002 resistance stainless stainless steel
(Common head style) Product
fasteners, Section 3 Set screws and
Grade A (fourth revision)
similar fasteners not under tensile
1366 : 2002 Specification for slotted cheese head stress (third revision)
screws (third revision)
(Part 16) : 2002 Designation system and symbols
1367 Specification for technical supply (third revision)
conditions for threaded steel fasteners
(Part 17) : 2005 Inspections, sampling and acceptance
(Part 1) : 2014 Introduction and general information procedure (fourth revision)
(fourth revision)
(Part 18) : 1996 Packaging (third revision)
(Part 2) : 2002 Product grades and tolerances (third
(Part 19) : 1996 Axial fatigue testing of bolts, screws
revision)
and studs
(Part 3) : 2002 Mechanical properties and test
(Part 20) : 1996 Torsional test and minimum torques
methods for bolts, screws and studs
for bolts and screws with nominal
with full loadability (fourth revision)
diameters 1mm to 10 mm
(Part 5) : 2002 Mechanical properties and test
1929 : 1982 Specification for hot forged steel
methods for set screws and similar
rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm
threaded fasteners not under tensile
diameter) (first revision)
stresses (third revision)
2016 : 1967 Specification for plain washers (first
(Part 6) : 1994 Mechanical properties and test
revision)
methods for nuts with specified proof
loads (third revision) 2155 : 1982 Specification for cold forged solid
steel rivets for hot closing (6 to
(Part 7) : 1980 Mechanical properties and test
16 mm diameter) (first revision)
methods for nuts without specified
proof loads (second revision) 2269 : 2006 Hexagon socket head cap screws
(fifth revision)
(Part 8) : 2014 Mechanical and performance
properties for prevailing torque type 2585 : 2006 Specification for square head bolts,
steel hexagon nuts (fourth revision) screws and square nuts of product
grade C (second revision)
(Part 9/Sec 1) : Surface discontinuities, Section 1
2609 : 1972 Specification for coach bolts (first
1993 Bolts, screws and studs for general
revision)
applications (third revision)
2643 : 2005 Pipe threads where pressure-tight
(Part 9/Sec 2) : Surface discontinuities, Section 2
joints are not made on the threads
1993 Bolts, screws and studs for special
Dimensions, tolerances and
applications (third revision)
designation (third revision)
(Part 10) : 2002 Surface discontinuities on nuts (third
2687 : 1991 Specification for cap nuts (second
revision)
revision)
PART 5 BUILDING MATERIALS 39
IS No. Title IS No. Title
2769 : 1969 Sizes for squares and square holes for 6649 : 1985 Specification for hardened and
general engineering purposes (first tempered washers for high strength
revision) structural bolts and nuts (first
2907 : 1998 Specification for non-ferrous rivets revision)
(first revision) 6733 : 1972 Specification for wall and roofing
2998 : 1982 Specification for cold forged steel nails
rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm 6736 : 1972 Specification for slotted raised
diameter) (first revision) countersunk head wood screws
3063 : 1994 Specification for fasteners single coil 6739 : 1972 Specification for slotted round head
rectangular section spring lock wood screws
washers (second revision) 6760 : 1972 Specification for slotted countersunk
3121 : 1981 Specification for rigging screws and head wood screws
stretching screws (first revision) 8033 : 1976 Specification for washers with square
3468 : 1991 Specification for pipe nuts (second hole for wood fastenings
revision) 8412 : 1977 Specification for slotted countersunk
3640 : 1982 Specification for hexagon fit bolts head bolts for steel structures
(first revision) 8822 : 1978 Specification for slotted mushroom
3757 : 1985 Specification for high strength head roofing bolts
structural bolts (second revision) 8869 : 1978 Specification for washers for
4206 : 1987 Dimensions for nominal lengths, and corrugated sheet roofing
thread lengths for bolts, screws and 8911 : 2005 Countersunk slotted raised head
studs (first revision) screws (common head style)
4762 : 2002 Specification for worm drive hose Product Grade A (first revision)
clips for general purposes (second 10102 : 1982 Specification for technical supply
revision) conditions for rivets
5369 : 1975 General requirements for plain 10238 : 2001 Specification for step bolts for steel
washers and lock washers (first structures
revision) 12427 : 2001 Specification for threaded steel
5370 : 1969 Specification for plain washers with fasteners hexagon head
outside diameter 3 × inside diameter transmission tower bolts (first
revision)
5372 : 1975 Specification for taper washer for
channels (ISMC) (first revision)
26. TIMBER, BAMBOO AND OTHER
5373 : 1969 Specification for square washers for LIGNOCELLULOSIC BUILDING MATERIALS
wood fastenings
a) Timber and Bamboo
5374 : 1975 Specification for taper washers for
l-beam (ISMB) (first revision) i) Timber Classification
5624 : 1993 Specification for foundation bolts IS No. Title
(first revision)
287 : 1993 Permissible moisture content for
6113 : 1970 Specification for aluminium fasteners timber used for different purposes
for building purposes Recommendations (third revision)
6610 : 1972 Specification for heavy washers for 399 : 1963 Classification of commercial timbers
steel structures and their zonal distribution (revised)
6623 : 2004 Specification for high strength 1150 : 2000 Trade names and abbreviated
structural nuts (second revision) symbols for timber species (third
6639 : 2005 Specification for hexagon head bolts revision)
for general steel structures (first 4970 : 1973 Key for identification of commercial
revision) timber (first revision)
13621 : 1993 Method of test for determination of (Part 4) : 1983 Determination of glue shear strength
dielectric constant of wood under (second revision)
microwave frequencies (Part 5) : 1983 Test for adhesion of plies (second
iv) Structural Timber and Tests revision)
(Part 6) : 1983 Determination of water resistance
IS No. Title
(second revision)
3629 : 1986 Specification for structural timber in (Part 7) : 1983 Mycological test (second revision)
building (first revision)
(Part 8) : 1983 Determination of pH value (second
4891 : 1988 Specification for preferred cut sizes revision)
of structural timber (first revision)
(Part 9) : 1983 Determination of tensile strength
4924 Method of test for nail jointed timber (second revision)
trusses
(Part 10 : 1983 Determination of compressive
(Part 1) : 1968 Destructive test strength (second revision)
(Part 2) : 1968 Proof test (Part 11) : 1983 Determination of static bending
v) Logs strength (second revision)
(Part 12) : 1983 Determination of scarf joint strength
IS No. Title
(second revision)
3364 Method of measurement and
(Part 13) : 1983 Determination of panel shear strength
evaluation of defects in timber
(second revision)
(Part 1) : 1976 Logs (first revision)
(Part 14) : 1983 Determination of plate shear strength
(Part 2) : 1976 Converted timber (first revision) (second revision)
4895 : 1985 Specification for teak logs (first (Part 15) : 1983 Central loading of plate test (second
revision) revision)
5246 : 2000 Specification for coniferous logs (Part 16) : 1983 Vibration of plywood plate test
(first revision) (second revision)
7308 : 1999 Specification for non-coniferous logs (Part 17) : 1983 Long time loading test of plywood
(first revision) strips (second revision)
vi) Bamboo (Part 18) : 1983 Impact resistance test on the surface
of plywood (second revision)
IS No. Title
(Part 19) : 1983 Determination of nail and screw
6874 : 2008 Method of tests for bamboos (first holding power (second revision)
revision)
(Part 20) : 1983 Acidity and alkalinity resistance test
8242 : 1976 Methods of tests for split bamboos (second revision)
(b) Reconstituted Products 4990 : 2011 Specification for plywood for concrete
shuttering work (third revision)
i) Plywood 5509 : 2000 Specification for fire retardant
IS No. Title plywood (second revision)
303 : 1989 Specification for plywood for general 5539 : 1969 Specification for preservative treated
purposes (third revision) plywood
7316 : 1974 Specification for decorative plywood
710 : 2010 Specification for marine plywood
using plurality of veneers for
(second revision)
decorative faces
1328 : 1996 Specification for veneered decorative
10701 : 2012 Specification for structural plywood
plywood (third revision)
(first revision)
1734 Methods of test for plywood 13957 : 1994 Specification for metal faced plywood
(Part 1) : 1983 Determination of density and 15791 : 2007 Specification for museum plywood
moisture content (second revision)
(Part 2) : 1983 Determination of resistance of dry ii) Blockboards, Particle Boards and Fibre Boards
heat (second revision) IS No. Title
(Part 3) : 1983 Determination of fire resistance 1658 : 2006 Specification for fibre hardboards
(second revision) (third revision)
42 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
IS No. Title IS No. Title
1659 : 2004 Specification for block boards (fourth (Part 22) : 1981 Determination of surface glueability
revision) test
2380 Methods of test for wood particle (Part 23) : 1981 Vibration test for particle boards
boards and boards from other 3087 : 2005 Specification for particle boards of
lignocellulosic materials wood and other lignocellulosic
(Part 1) : 1977 Preparation and conditioning of test materials (medium density) for
specimens (first revision) general purposes (second revision)
(Part 2) : 1977 Accuracy of dimensions of boards 3097 : 2006 Specification for veneered particle
(first revision) boards (second revision)
(Part 3) : 1977 Determination of moisture content 3129 : 1985 Specification for low density particle
and density (first revision) boards (first revision)
3308 : 1981 Specification for wood wool building
(Part 4) : 1977 Determination of static bending
slabs (first revision)
strength (first revision)
3348 : 1965 Specification for fibre insulation
(Part 5) : 1977 Determination of tensile strength boards
perpendicular to surface (first
3478 : 1966 Specification for high density wood
revision)
particle boards
(Part 6) : 1977 Determination of tensile strength
12406 : 2003 Specification for medium density
parallel to surface (first revision)
fibreboards for general purposes (first
(Part 7) : 1977 Determination of compression- revision)
perpendicular to plane of the board 12823 : 2015 Specification for wood products
(first revision) Prelaminated particle boards (first
(Part 8) : 1977 Compression parallel to surface test revision)
(first revision) 13745 : 1993 Method for determination of
(Part 9) : 1977 Determination of resistance to shear formaldehyde content in particle
in plane of the board (first revision) board by extraction method called
(Part 10) : 1977 Falling hammer impact test (first perforator method
revision) 14276 : 1995 Specification for cement bonded
(Part 11) : 1977 Surface hardness (first revision) particle boards
14587 : 1998 Specification for prelaminated
(Part 12) : 1977 Central loading of plate test (first
medium density fibre board
revision)
15786 : 2008 Specification for prelaminated
(Part 13) : 1977 Long time loading bending test (first
cement bonded particle boards
revision)
iii) Wood-Based Laminates and Lumber
(Part 14) : 1977 Screw and nail withdrawal test (first
revision) IS No. Title
(Part 15) : 1977 Lateral nail resistance (first revision) 3513 (Part 3) : Specification for resin treated
(Part 16) : 1977 Determination of water absorption 1989 compressed wood laminates
(first revision) (compregs): Part 3 For general
purposes (first revision)
(Part 17) : 1977 Determination of swelling in water
3513 (Part 4) : Specification for high and medium
(first revision)
1966 density wood laminates (compregs):
(Part 18) : 1977 Determination of mass and
Part 4 Sampling and tests
dimensional changes caused by
moisture changes (first revision) 7638 : 1999 Methods of sampling for wood/
lignocellulosic based panel products
(Part 19) : 1977 Durability cyclic test for interior use (second revision)
(first revision)
9307 Methods of tests for wood-based
(Part 20) : 1977 Accelerated weathering cyclic test for structural sandwich construction
exterior use (first revision) (Part 1) : 1979 Flexure test
(Part 21) : 1977 Planeness test under uniform (Part 2) : 1979 Edgewise compression test
moisture content (first revision)
(Part 3) : 1979 Flatwise compression test
PART 5 BUILDING MATERIALS 43
IS No. Title 27. UNIT WEIGHTS OF BUILDING MATERIALS
IS No. Title
(Part 4) : 1979Shear test
(Part 5) : 1979Flatwise tension test 875 (Part 1) : Code of Practice for design loads
1987 (other than earthquake) for buildings
(Part 6) : 1979Flexure creep test
and structures : Part 1 Dead loads
(Part 7) : 1979Cantilever vibration test Unit weights of building material
(Part 8) : 1979Weathering test and stored materials (second
14315 : 1995 Specification for commercial veneers revision)
14616 : 1999 Specification for laminated veneer
lumber 28. WATERPROOFING AND DAMP-PROOFING
16171 : 2014 Specification for veneer laminated MATERIALS
lumber
IS No. Title
iv) Bamboo and Coir Board Products
1322 : 1993 Specification for bitumen felts for
IS No. Title waterproofing and damp-proofing
13958 : 1994 Specification for bamboo mat board (fourth revision)
for general purposes 1580 : 1991 Specification for bituminous
14588 : 1999 Specification for bamboo mat veneer compound for waterproofing and
composite for general purposes caulking purposes (second revision)
14842 : 2000 Specification for coir veneer board 3037 : 1986 Specification for bitumen mastic for
for general purposes use in waterproofing of roofs ( first
15476 : 2004 Specification for bamboo mat revision)
corrugated sheets
3384 : 1986 Specification for bitumen primer for
15491 : 2004 Specification for medium density coir use in waterproofing and damp-
boards for general purposes proofing (first revision)
15877 : 2010 Specification for coir faced block
5871 : 1987 Specification for bitumen mastic for
boards
tanking and damp-proofing (first
15878 : 2010 Specification for coir hardboard for revision)
general purposes
15972 : 2012 Specification for bamboo-jute 7193 : 2013 Specification for glass fibre base
corrugated and semi-corrugated sheets bitumen felts (second revision)
v) Adhesives 12027 : 1987 Specification for silicone-based
water repellents
IS No. Title
13435 Method of tests for acrylic based
848 : 2006 Specification for synthetic resin
polymer waterproofing materials
adhesives for plywood (phenolic and
aminoplastic) (second revision) (Part 1) : 1992 Determination of solid content
851 : 1978 Specification for synthetic resin (Part 2) : 1992 Determination of coarse particle
adhesives for construction work (non- (Part 3) : 1992 Determination of capillary water
structural) in wood (first revision) take-up
852 : 1994 Specification for animal glue for
(Part 4) : 1992 Determination of pH value
general wood-working purposes
(second revision) 13826 Method of test for bitumen based felts
1508 : 1972 Specification for extenders for use in (Part 1) : 1993 Breaking strength test
synthetic resin adhesives (urea- (Part 2) : 1993 Pliability test
formaldehyde) for plywood (first
revision) (Part 3) : 1993 Storage sticking test
4835 : 1979 Specification for polyvinyl acetate (Part 4) : 1993 Pressure head test
dispersion-based adhesives for wood (Part 5) : 1993 Heat resistance test
(first revision)
(Part 6) : 1993 Water absorption test
9188 : 1979 Performance requirements for
adhesive for structural laminated (Part 7) : 1993 Determination of binder content
wood products for use under exterior 14695 : 1999 Specification for glass fibre base coal
exposure condition tar pitch outer wrap
FOREWORD
3
1 SCOPE
7
2 DEAD LOAD
7
3 IMPOSED LOAD
7
4 WIND LOAD
18
5 SEISMIC FORCE
64
6 SNOW LOAD
92
7 SPECIAL LOADS
95
8 LOAD COMBINATIONS
101
9 MULTI-HAZARD RISK IN VARIOUS DISTRICTS OF INDIA
101
2.1 Assessment of Dead Load 3.2.1.4 Educational buildings These shall include
any building used for school, college or day-care
The dead load in a building shall comprise the weight purposes involving assembly for instruction, education
of all walls, partitions, floors and roofs, and shall or recreation and which is not covered by assembly
include the weights of all other permanent constructions buildings.
(including built-in partitions, finishes, cladding and
other similarly incorporated architectural and structural 3.2.1.5 Imposed load The load assumed to be
items, weight of fixed service equipment) in the produced by the intended use or occupancy of a
building and shall conform to good practice [6-1(1)]. building including the weight of movable partitions,
distributed and concentrated loads, loads due to impact
3 IMPOSED LOAD and vibration, and dust loads but excluding wind,
seismic, snow and other loads due to temperature
3.1 This clause covers imposed loads to be assumed in
changes, creep, shrinkage, differential settlement, etc.
the design of buildings. The imposed loads specified
herein are minimum loads which should be taken into 3.2.1.6 Industrial buildings These shall include any
consideration for the purpose of structural safety of building or a part of a building or structure, in which
buildings. products or materials of various kinds and properties
NOTE This Section does not cover detailed provisions for
are fabricated, assembled, manufactured or processed,
loads incidental to construction and special cases of vibration, for example, assembly plants, industrial laboratories,
such as moving machinery, heavy acceleration from cranes, dry cleaning plants, power plants, generating units,
hoists and the like. Such loads shall be dealt with individually pumping stations, fumigation chambers, laundries,
in each case.
buildings or structures in gas plants, refineries, dairies
3.2 Terminology and saw-mills, etc.
3.2.1 For the purpose of imposed loads specified herein, 3.2.1.7 Institutional buildings These shall include
the definitions given below shall apply. any building or a part thereof, which is used for
purposes such as medical or other treatment in case of
3.2.1.1 Assembly buildings These shall include any persons suffering from physical and mental illness,
building or part of a building where groups of people disease or infirmity; care of infants, convalescents or
congregate or gather for amusement, recreation, social, aged persons and for penal or correctional detention in
religious, patriotic, civil, travel and similar purposes; which the liberty of the inmates is restricted.
for example, theatres, motion picture houses, assembly Institutional buildings ordinarily provide sleeping
halls, city halls, marriage halls, town halls, auditoria, accommodation for the occupants. It includes hospitals,
exhibition halls, museums, skating rinks, gymnasiums, sanatoria, custodial institutions or penal institutions like
restaurants (also used as assembly halls), place of jails, prisons and reformatories.
worship, dance halls, club rooms, passenger stations
and terminals of air, surface and other public 3.2.1.8 Occupancy or use group The principal
transportation services, recreation piers and stadia, etc. occupancy for which a building or part of a building is
used or intended to be used; for the purpose of
3.2.1.2 Business buildings These shall include any classification of a building according to occupancy, an
building or part of a building, which is used for occupancy shall be deemed to include subsidiary
g) Corridors, passages, lobbies, staircases including fire escapes – as per 4.0 4.5
the floor serviced (without accounting for storage and projection
rooms) but not less than
h) Boiler rooms and plant rooms – to be calculated but not less than 5.0 4.5
j) Balconies Same as rooms to 1.5 per metre run
which they give concentrated at the outer
access but with a edge
minimum of 4.0
iv) Assembly Buildings
a) Assembly areas :
1) With fixed seats2) 4.0 –
2) Without fixed seats 5.0 3.6
b) Restaurants (subject to assembly), museums and art galleries and 4.0 4.5
gymnasia
c) Projection rooms 5.0 —
d) Stages 5.0 4.5
e) Office rooms, kitchens and laundries 3.0 4.5
f) Dressing rooms 2.0 1.8
g) Lounges and billiards rooms 2.0 2.7
h) Toilets and bathrooms 2.0 —
j) Corridors, passages and staircases including fire escapes 4.0 4.5
k) Balconies Same as rooms to 1.5 per metre run
which they give concentrated at the outer
access but with a edge
minimum of 4.0
m) Boiler rooms and plant rooms including weight of machinery 7.5 4.5
n) Corridors, passages, subject to loads greater than from crowds, such as 5.0 4.5
wheeled vehicles, trolleys and the like corridors, staircases and
passages in grandstands
v) Business and Office Buildings (see also 3.2.1)
a) Rooms for general use with separate storage 2.5 2.7
b) Rooms without separate storage 4.0 4.5
c) Banking halls 3.0 2.7
d) Business computing machine rooms (with fixed computers or similar 3.5 4.5
equipment)
e) Records/files store rooms and storage space 5.0 4.5
f) Vaults and strong rooms – to be calculated but not less than 5.0 4.5
g) Cafeterias and dining rooms 3.01) 2.7
h) Kitchens 3.0 2.7
j) Corridors, passages, lobbies, staircases including fire escapes – as per 4.0 4.5
the floor serviced (excluding stores) but not less than
k) Bath and toilets rooms 2.0 —
1)
Where unrestricted assembly of persons is anticipated, the value of UDL should be increased to 4.0 kN/m2.
2)
With fixed seats implies that the removal of the seating and the use of the space for other purposes is improbable. The maximum
likely load in this case is, therefore, closely controlled.
3)
The loading in industrial buildings (workshops and factories) varies considerably and so three loadings under the terms light,
medium and heavy are introduced in order to allow for more economical designs but the terms have no special meaning in
themselves other than the imposed load for which the relevant floor is designed. It is, however important particularly in the case of
heavy weight loads, to assess the actual loads to ensure that they are not in excess of 10 kN/m2; in case where they are in excess, the
design shall be based on the actual loadings.
4)
For various mechanical handling equipment which are used to transport goods, as in warehouses, workshops, store rooms, etc, the
actual load coming from the use of such equipment shall be ascertained and design should cater to such loads.
incidental to assembly purposes shall be designed for be considered separately and the more critical of the
the appropriate imposed floor loads given in Table 1 two shall be adopted in the design.
for the occupancy.
3.4.4 Dust Loads
3.4.2 Concentrated Load on Roof Coverings
In areas prone to settlement of dust on roofs
To provide for loads incidental to maintenance, unless (for example, steel plants, cement plants), provision
otherwise specified by the Engineer-in-Charge, all roof for dust load equivalent to probable thickness of
coverings (other than glass or transparent sheets made accumulation of dust may be made.
of fibre glass) shall be capable of carrying an incidental
load of 0.90 kN concentrated on an area of 1 250 mm2 3.4.5 Loads on Members Supporting Roof Coverings
so placed as to produce maximum stresses in the Every member of the supporting structure which is
covering. The intensity of the concentrated load may directly supporting the roof covering(s) shall be
be reduced with the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge, designed to carry the more severe of the following loads
where it is ensured that the roof coverings would not except as provided in 3.4.5.1:
be traversed without suitable aids. In any case, the roof
coverings shall be capable of carrying the loads in a) The load transmitted to the members from the
accordance with 3.4.1, 3.4.3 and 3.4.4 and wind load. roof covering(s) in accordance with 3.4.1,
3.4.3 and 3.4.4; and
3.4.3 Loads Due to Rain
b) An incidental concentrated load of 0.90 kN
On surfaces whose positioning, shape and drainage concentrated over a length of 125 mm placed
system are such as to make accumulation of rain water at the most critical positions on the member.
possible, loads due to such accumulation of water and NOTE Where it is ensured that the roofs would be traversed
the imposed loads for the roof as given in Table 2 shall only with the aid of planks and ladders capable of distributing
3.6.3 Impact Allowance for Crane Girders For all ladle cranes and charging cranes where there is
possibility of overloading from production
For crane gantry girders and supporting columns, the considerations, an overloading factor of 10 percent of
impact allowances (given below) shall be deemed to the maximum wheel loading shall be taken.
cover all forces set up by vibration, shock from slipping
of slings, kinetic action of acceleration, and retardation 3.6.4 Crane Load Combinations
and impact of wheel loads: In the absence of any specific indications, the load
combinations shall be as indicated below.
a) Vertical loads for electric overhead cranes 25 percent of maximum static loads for crane girders for
all class of cranes
25 percent for columns supporting Class III and Class IV
cranes
10 percent for columns supporting Class I and Class II
cranes
No additional load for design of foundations
b) Vertical loads for hand operated cranes 10 percent of maximum wheel loads for crane girders only
For design of columns and foundations, supporting Elevated helipad structures shall be designed as per
crane girders, the following crane combinations shall the latest guidelines of Directorate General of Civil
be considered: Aviation and International Civil Aviation Organizations
Heliport Manual.
a) For single bay frames Effect of one crane
in the bay giving the worst effect shall be 3.7.1 Structural Design
considered for calculation of surge force; Elevated helipads may be designed for a specific
and helicopter type though greater operational flexibility
b) For multi-bay frames Effect of two will be obtained from a classification system of design.
cranes working, one each in any of two bays The final approach and take-off area (FATO) should
in the cross-section to give the worst effect be designed for the largest or heaviest type of helicopter
shall be considered for calculation of surge that is anticipated to use the helipad, and account taken
force. of other types of loading such as personnel, freight,
snow, refueling equipment, etc. For the purpose of
3.6.4.3 Tractive force design, it is to be assumed that the helicopter will land
on two main wheels, irrespective of the actual number
3.6.4.3.1 Where one crane is in operation with no
of wheels in the undercarriage, or on two skids, if they
provision for future crane, tractive force from only one
are fitted. The loads imposed on the structure should
crane shall be taken.
be taken as point loads at the wheel centres as shown
3.6.4.3.2 Where more than one crane is in operation below:
Helicopter Maximum Take-off Mass Point Load for Under- Super- Super-
Category Each Wheel Carriage Wheel imposed imposed
Centres Load Load
SHa SHb
kg kN kN m kN/m2 kN/m2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
1 Up to 2 300 Up to 22.6 12.0 1.75 0.5 1.5
2 2 301-5 000 22.6-49.2 25.0 2.0 0.5 2.0
3 5 001-9 000 49.2-88.5 45.0 2.5 0.5 2.5
4 9 001-13 500 88.5-133.0 67.0 3.0 0.5 3.0
5 13 501-19 500 133.0-192.0 96.0 3.5 0.5 3.0
6 19 501-27 000 192.0-266.0 133.0 4.5 0.5 3.0
3.7.2 The FATO should be designed for the worse 3.7.3 Case A Helicopter on Landing
condition derived from consideration of the following
When designing a FATO on an elevated helipad, and
two cases.
in order to cover the bending and shear stresses that
result from a helicopter touching down, the following
i) Superimposed loads:
a) Helicopter 2.5 LH distributed as two point loads at the wheel centres for the helicopter category given
in the informal table under 3.7.1
Average value for R = 1.3.
b) Lateral load LH
1.6 applied horizontally in any direction
2
c) Over-all superimposed load Load at platform level together with the maximum wind loading. 1.4 SHa over the whole
area of the platform (SHa given in the informal table under 3.7.1)
iv) Punching shear check 2.5 LHR load over tyre skid contact area of 64.5 × 103 mm2
i) Superimposed loads:
a) Helicopter 1.6 LH distributed as two point loads at the wheel centres for the helicopter category
given in the informal table under 3.7.1
b) Over-all superimposed load 1.6 SHb over the whole area of the platform. SHb given in the informal table under 3.7.1
(Personnel, freight, etc)
ii) Shear check Check as appropriate
Symbol Meaning
LH Maximum take-off mass of helicopter
G Dead load of structure
W Wind loading
R Structural response factor
SHa Superimposed load Case A
SHb Superimposed load Case B
3.7.5 Normally, the upper load limit of the helicopter gravity loads and the same can be considered
category selected should be used for design purposes as accidental load with the partial load factor
except as follows: of 1.05.
In order to avoid over-design in the platform the upper d) Fire tender load need not be combined with
limit in any band may be exceeded by 10 percent should lateral loads.
be the maximum take-off mass of a helicopter fall just 4 WIND LOAD
into the next higher category.
4.1 General
3.8 Fire Tenders and Emergency Vehicles
4.1.1 This clause gives wind forces and their effects
Where a structure or portions of a structure are accessed (static and dynamic) that should be taken into account
and loaded by fire department access vehicles and other when designing buildings, structures and components
similar emergency vehicles, the structure shall be thereof.
designed for the greater of the following loads:
4.1.2 Wind speeds vary randomly both in time and space
a) The actual operational loads, including and hence assessment of wind loads and response
outrigger reactions and contact areas of the predictions are very important in the design of several
vehicles as stipulated and provided by the buildings and structures. A large majority of structures
building official. met with in practice do not however, suffer wind
b) The contact area of wheel dimensions to be induced oscillations and generally do not require to be
used considering 45° distribution at the examined for the dynamic effects of wind. For such
reinforcement of slab considering the bear normal, short and heavy structures, estimation of loads
coat on the slab and any soil filling. using static wind analysis has proved to be satisfactory.
or The details of this method involving important wind
In absence of any data the bare slab loading characteristics such as the basic wind speeds, terrain
may be considered as 15 to 20 kN/m2. categories, modification factors, wind pressure and
force coefficients, etc, are given in 4.4 and 4.5.
c) When the fire tender load is combined with
4.1.7 The wind speeds recorded at any locality are 4.3.1.1 Angle of attack An angle between the
extremely variable and in addition to steady wind at direction of wind and a reference axis of the structure.
any time, there are effects of gusts which may last for a 4.3.1.2 Breadth It means horizontal dimension of
few seconds. These gusts cause increase in air pressure the building measured normal to the direction of wind.
but their effect on stability of the building may not be
so important; often, gusts affect only part of the building 4.3.1.3 Depth It means the horizontal dimension of
and the increased local pressures may be more than the building measured in the direction of the wind.
balanced by a momentary reduction in the pressure NOTE Breadth and depth are dimensions measured in
elsewhere. Because of the inertia of the building, short relation to the direction of wind, whereas length and width are
dimensions related to the plan.
period gusts may not cause any appreciable increase in
stress in main components of the building although the 4.3.1.4 Developed height It is the height of
walls, roof sheeting and individual cladding units (glass upward penetration of the velocity profile in a new
NOTES
1 The occurrence of a tornado is possible in virtually any part of India. They are particularly more severe in the northern parts of India. The recorded number of these tornados is
too small to assign any frequency. The devastation caused by a tornado is due to exceptionally high winds about its periphery, and the sudden reduction in atmospheric pressure
($,1$),4*+$#*5,#*):D$1+0,1+,(+,*CKD")1;*,":$G(#>,K#*)):#*,"+,$%*,*D*A*+$),"E,$%*,)$#:4$:#*?,B%*,#*01"+(D,9()14,G1+>,)K**>),>",+"$,1+4D:>*,(+<,)K*41=4,(DD"G(+4*,E"#,$"#+(>")?,F$,1),+"$,
the usual practice to allow for the effect of tornados unless special requirements are called for as in the case of important structures such as, nuclear power reactors and satellite
communication towers.
2 The total number of cyclonic storms that have struck different sections of east and west coasts are included in Fig. 1, based on available records for the period from 1877 to 1982.
B%*,=0:#*),(9";*,$%*,D1+*),.9*$G**+,$%*,)$($1"+)3,1+>14($*,$%*,$"$(D,+:A9*#,"E,)*;*#*,4<4D"+14,)$"#A),G1$%,"#,G1$%":$,(,4"#*,"E,%:##14(+*,G1+>),.)K**>),(9";*,M8,NAH%3,(+>,$%*,
=0:#*),1+,$%*,9#(4N*$),9*D"G,$%*,D1+*),1+>14($*,$%*,$"$(D,+:A9*#,"E,4<4D"+14,)$"#A)?,,B%*1#,*EE*4$,"+,D(+>,1),(D#*(><,#*O*4$*>,1+,$%*,9()14,G1+>,)K**>),)K*41=*>,1+,P10?,6?,B%*)*,%(;*,
been included only as additional information.
Table 4 Risk Coefficients for Different Classes of Structures in Different Wind Speed Zones
(Clause 4.4.3.1)
Sl Class of Structure Mean Probable K1 Factor for Basic Wind Speed (in m/s) of
No. Design Life of
Structure in
Years
33 39 44 47 50 55
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
i) All general buildings and structures 50 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
ii) Temporary sheds, structures such as those used 5 0.82 0.76 0.73 0.71 0.70 0.67
during construction operations (for example form-
work and false work), structures during construction
stages and boundary walls
iii) Buildings and structures presenting a low degree of 25 0.94 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.89
hazard to life and property in the event of failure,
such as isolated towers in wooded areas, farm
buildings other than residential buildings
iv) Important buildings and structures, such as hospitals, 100 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.07 1.08 1.08
communication buildings/towers, and power plant
structures
NOTE The factor k1 is based on statistical concepts which take into account the degree of reliability required and period of
time in years during which there will be exposure to wind, that is, life of the structure. Whatever wind speed is adopted for
design purposes, there is always a probability (however small) that it may be exceeded in a storm of exceptional violence; more
the period of years over which there is exposure to the wind, more is the probability. Larger return periods ranging from 100 to
1 000 years (implying lower risk level) in association with larger periods of exposure may have to be selected for exceptionally
important structures, such as, nuclear power reactors and satellite communication towers. Equation given below may be used in
such cases to estimate k1 factors for different periods of exposure and chosen probability of exceedance (risk level). The
probability level of 0.63 is normally considered sufficient for design of buildings and structures against wind effects and the
values of k1 corresponding to this risk level are given above.
é ì 1 üù
A - B ê ln í- ln (1 - PN ) ýú
k1 =
X N,P
= ë î N þû
X 50,0.63 A + 4B
where
N = mean probable design life of structure in years;
PN = risk level in N consecutive years (probability that the design wind speed is exceeded at least once in N successive
years), nominal value = 0.63;
XN,P = extreme wind speed for given values of N and PN; and
X50,0.63 = extreme wind speed for N = 50 years and P N = 0.63
A and B have the following values for different basic wind speed zones:
Zone A* B*
m/s m/s m/s
33 23.1 (83.2) 2.6 (9.2)
39 23.3 (84.0) 3.9 (14.0)
44 24.4 (88.0) 5.0 (18.0)
47 24.4 (88.0) 5.7 (20.5)
50 24.7 (88.8) 6.3 (22.8)
55 25.2 (90.8) 7.6 (27.3)
* Values of A and B, in km/h are given within bracket
developed. It is likely that the, next higher 4.4.3.2.2 Variation of wind speed with height in
category than this will not exist in most design different terrains (k2)
situations and that selection of a more severe
Table 5 gives multiplying factors (k2) by which the basic
category will be deliberate.
wind speed given in Fig. 1 shall be multiplied to obtain
d) Category 4 Terrain with numerous large
the wind speed at different heights, in each terrain
high closely spaced obstructions. The
category.
equivalent aerodynamic roughness height,
(z0,4) for this terrain is 2.0 m. This category 4.4.3.2.3 Terrain categories in relation to the direction
represents large city centers, generally with of wind
obstructions above 25 m and well developed
The terrain category used in the design of a structure
industrial complexes.
NOTE h is the height to eaves or parapet, l is the greater horizontal dimension of a building and w is the lesser horizontal dimension
of a building.
NOTES
1 h is the height to eaves or parapet and w is the lesser horizontal dimension of a building.
2 Where no local coefficients are given, the overall coefficient apply.
3 For hipped roofs the local coefficient for the hip ridge may be conservatively taken as the appropriate ridge value.
4 w and l are dimensions between the walls excluding overhangs.
NOTES
1 h is the height of eaves at lower side, l is the greater horizontal dimensions of a building and w is the
lesser horizontal dimension of a building.
2 l and w are overall length and width including overhangs.
NOTES
1 For monopitch canopies the centre of pressure should be taken to act at 0.3w from the windward edge.
2 W and L are overall width and length including overhangs.
When wind angle θ = 90o , allow for frictional drag in accordance with 4.5.4.1.
NOTE Evidence on these buildings is fragmentary and any departure from the cases given should be investigated separately.
When wind angle θ = 90o , allow for frictional drag in accordance with 4.5.4.1.
NOTE Evidence on these buildings is fragmentary and any departure from the cases given should be investigated separately.
4.5.3.3.10 Roofs with skylight is reasonable to assume that the pressures or suctions
inside and outside the structure shall not be fully
The average external pressure coefficients for roofs
correlated. Therefore when taking the combined effect
with skylight are shown in Table 25.
of wind loads on the frame, a reduction factor
4.5.3.3.11 Grandstands of Kc = 0.90 may be used over the building envelope
when roof is subjected to pressure and internal pressure
The pressure coefficients on the roof (top and bottom)
is suction, or vice-versa.
and rear wall of a typical grandstand roof which is open
on three sides are given in Table 26. The pressure 4.5.4 Force Coefficients
coefficients are valid for a particular ratio of dimensions
The value of force coefficients (Cf) apply to a building
as specified in Table 24 but may be used for deviations
or structure as a whole, and when multiplied by the
up to 20 percent. In general, the maximum wind load
effective frontal area (Ae) of the building or structure
occurs when the wind is blowing into the open front of
and design wind pressure, pd gives the total wind load
the stand, causing positive pressure under the roof and
(F) on that particular building or structure, expressed
negative pressure on the roof.
as:
4.5.3.3.12 Spheres F = Cf Ae pd
The external pressure coefficients for spheres shall be where F is the force acting in a direction specified in
as given in Table 27. the respective tables and Cf is the force coefficient for
the building.
4.5.3.3.13 Frames
NOTES
When taking wind loads on frames of clad buildings it 1 The value of the force coefficient differs for the wind acting
on different faces of a building or structure. In order to determine reference may be made to specialist literature on the subject or
the critical load, the total wind load should be calculated for advice may be sought from specialist in the subject.
each wind direction.
4.5.4.1 Frictional drag
2 If surface design pressure varies with height, the surface area
of the building/structure may be sub-divided so that specified In certain buildings of special shape, a force due to
pressures are taken over appropriate areas. frictional drag shall be taken into account in addition
3 In tapered buildings/structures, the force coefficients shall to those loads specified in 4.5.3. For rectangular clad
be applied after sub-dividing the building/structure into suitable
number of strips and the load on each strip calculated buildings, this addition is necessary only where the ratio
individually, taking the area of each strip as Ae. d/h or d/b is more than 4. The frictional drag force, F,
4 For force coefficients for structures not covered herein, in the direction of the wind is given by the following
The first term in each case gives the drag on the roof 4.5.4.2.4 Solid circular shapes mounted on a surface
and the second on the walls. The Cf' has the following The force coefficients for solid circular shapes mounted
values: on a surface shall be as given in Table 30.
a) 0.01 for smooth surfaces without corrugations 4.5.4.3 Force coefficients for unclad buildings
or ribs across the wind direction,
4.5.4.3.1 This Section applies to permanently unclad
b) 0.02 for surfaces with corrugations across the buildings and to frameworks of buildings while
wind direction, and temporarily unclad. In the case of buildings whose
c) 0.04 for surfaces with ribs across the wind surfaces are well-rounded, such as those with elliptic,
direction. circular or oval cross-sections, the total force can be
For other buildings, the frictional drag has been more at a wind speed much less than maximum due to
transition in the nature of boundary layer on them.
indicated, where necessary, in the tables of pressure
Although this phenomenon is well known in the case
coefficients and force coefficients.
of circular cylinders, the same phenomenon exists in
4.5.4.2 Force coefficients for clad buildings the case of many other well-rounded structures, and
4.5.4.2.1 Clad buildings of uniform section this possibility shall be checked.
The overall force coefficients for rectangular clad 4.5.4.3.2 Individual members
buildings of uniform section with flat roofs in uniform a) The force coefficient given in Table 32 refers to
flow shall be as given in Fig. 4 and for other clad members of infinite length. For members of finite
buildings of uniform section (without projections, length, the coefficients should be multiplied by
except where otherwise shown) shall be as given in a factor K that depends on the ratio l/b where l is
Table 28. the length of the member and b is the width across
NOTE Structures that are in the supercritical flow regime, the direction of wind. Table 31 gives the required
because of their size and design wind velocity, may need further values of K. The following special cases shall
calculation to ensure that the greatest loads do not occur at be noted while estimating K:
some wind speed below the maximum, when the flow will be
sub-critical. 1) When any member abuts on to a plate or
The coefficients are for buildings without projections, except wall in such a way that free flow of air
where otherwise shown. around that end of the member is
In Table 28, V d b is used as an indication of the airflow regime. prevented, then the ratio of l/b shall be
doubled for the purpose of determining
4.5.4.2.2 Buildings of circular shapes
K; and
Force coefficients for buildings of circular cross-section 2) When both ends of a member are so
shapes shall be as given in Table 28. However, more obstructed, the ratio shall be taken as
precise estimation of force coefficients for circular shapes infinity for the purpose of determining K.
of infinite length can be obtained from Fig. 5 taking into b) Flat-sided members Force coefficients for
account the average height of surface roughness ε. When wind normal to the longitudinal axis of flat-
the length is finite the values obtained from Fig. 5 shall sided structural members shall be as given in
be reduced by the multiplication factor K (see also Table 32.
Table 31 and Annex F). The force coefficients are given for two
4.5.4.2.3 Free standing walls and hoardings mutually perpendicular directions relative to
a reference axis on the structural member.
Force coefficients for free standing walls and hoardings They are denoted by Cfn and Cft and give the
shall be as given in Table 29. forces normal and transverse, respectively to
To allow for oblique winds, the design shall also be the reference plane as shown in Table 32.
checked for net pressure normal to the surface varying Normal force, Fn = (Cfn pd K ) / b
linearly from a maximum of 1.7 Cf at the windward
edge to 0.44 Cf at the leeward edge. Transverse force, Ft = (Cft pd K ) / b
Cf
FIG . 5 VARIATION OF 2ε WITH Re > 3 × 104 FOR CIRCULAR SECTIONS
1+
D
[Clause 4.5.4.3.2(b)]
59
Table 33 Force Coefficients, Cf for Wires and Cables (l/D = 100)
[Clause 4.5.4.3.2(b)]
Sl Flow Regime Force Coefficient, Cf for
No.
Smooth Surface Moderately Smooth Fine Stranded Thick Stranded
Wire (Galvanized or Cables Cables
Painted)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3
DV d < 6 m2/s
ii) 0.5 0.7 0.9 1.1
DV d > 6 m2/s
Table 34 Force Coefficients for Single Frames Table 36 Overall Force Coefficients for Towers
(Clause 4.5.4.3.3) Composed of Flat Sided Members
[Clause 4.5.4.3.5(a)]
Sl Solidity Force Coefficient, Ct for
No. Ratio, Sl Solidity Ratio, Force Coefficient For
Ö Flat Circular Sections No.
Sided Ö
Members Square Towers Equilateral
Subcritical Super Critical
Triangular
Flow Flow Towers
( DV d < 6 ( DV d ³ 6
(1) (2) (3) (4)
m2 /s) m2 /s)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) < 0.1 3.8 3.1
ii) 0.2 3.3 2.7
i) 0.1 1.9 1.2 0.7 iii) 0.3 2.8 2.3
ii) 0.2 1.8 1.2 0.8 iv) 0.4 2.3 1.9
iii) 0.3 1.7 1.2 0.8 v) 0.5 2.1 1.5
iv) 0.4 1.7 1.1 0.8
v) 0.5 1.6 1.1 0.8
vi) 0.75 1.6 1.5 1.4
vii) 1.00 2.0 2.0 2.0 Table 37 Overall Force Coefficients for Square
NOTE Linear interpolation between the values is Towers Composed of Circular Members
permitted. [Clause 4.5.4.3.5 (d)]
Sl Solidity Force Coefficient For
No. Ratio of
Table 35 Shielding Factor, η for Multiple Frames Front Subcritical Flow Super Critical Flow
(Clause 4.5.4.3.4) Face
Ö ( DV d < 6 m2/s) ( DV d > 6 m 2/s)
Sl Effective Frame Spacing Ratio
No. Solidity Onto Onto Onto Onto
Ratio, < 0.5 1.0 2.0 4.0 > 8.0 Face Corner Face Corner
Öe (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) < 0.05 2.4 2.5 1.1 1.2
i) 0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 ii) 0.1 2.2 2.3 1.2 1.3
ii) 0.1 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 iii) 0.2 1.9 2.1 1.3 1.6
iii) 0.2 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.0 1.0 iv) 0.3 1.7 1.9 1.4 1.6
iv) 0.3 0.7 0.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 v) 0.4 1.6 1.9 1.4 1.6
v) 0.4 0.6 0.7 1.0 1.0 1.0 vi) 0.5 1.4 1.9 1.4 1.6
vi) 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.9 1.0 1.0
vii) 0.7 0.3 0.6 0.8 0.9 1.0
viii) 1.0 0.3 0.6 0.6 0.8 1.0
NOTE Linear interpolation between the values is permitted. Z4 as shown in Fig. 8:
FIG . 8 INTERFERENCE ZONES FOR TALL R ECTANGULAR BUILDINGS OF SAME OR GREATER HEIGHT
For a structure, the vortex shedding frequency, fs, shall 4.8.2 Along Wind Response
be determined by the following formula: For calculation of along-wind load effects at a level s
on a building/structure, the design hourly mean wind
S t Vz,H pressure at height z shall be multiplied by the Gust
fs =
b Factor (G). This factor is dependent on both the overall
where height h and the level s under consideration (see Fig. 9).
For calculation of base bending moment and deflection
St = Strouhal number,
where
bsh = average breadth of the building/structure
between heights s and h;
Lh = measure of effective turbulence length scale
at the height, h, in m;
FIG. 9 NOTATIONS FOR H EIGHTS h
0.25
Ma = ∑F z g v I h,i Bs
z
=
Fz = Cf,z Az p dG 2
Ih,i = turbulence intensity at height h in terrain
where
category i;
Fz = design peak along wind load on the building/
Hs = height factor for resonance response;
structure at any height z;
s
2
Az = effective frontal area of the building/
= 1+
structure at any height z, in m2; h
pd = design hourly mean wind pressure
S = size reduction factor given by:
corresponding to Vz,d and obtained 1
as 0.6Vz,d (N/m2);
= 1 + 3.5 fa h 1 + 4 fa b0h
V z,d = design hourly mean wind speed at height z, V h,d V h,d
in m/s (see 4.4.4); where
C f,z = drag force coefficient of the building/ b0h = average breadth of the building/structure
structure corresponding to the area Az; between 0 and h;
G = Gust Factor and is given by: E = spectrum of turbulence in the approaching
wind stream
H s g R2 SE πN
= 1 + r g v Bs (1 + φ) +
2 2
β
= (1 + 70.8 N 2 )5/ 6
where
where
N = effective reduced frequency
r = roughness factor which is twice the
f a Lh
longitudinal turbulence intensity, I h,i =
V h,d
(see 4.4.5);
fa = first mode natural frequency of the building/
gv = peak factor for upwind velocity fluctuation structure in along wind direction, in Hz;
= 3.0 for category 1 and 2 terrains; and V h,d = design hourly mean wind speed at height,
= 4.0 for category 3 and 4 terrains; h, in m/s (see 4.4.4);
Bs = background factor indicating the measure of β = damping coefficient of the building/structure
slowly varying component of fluctuating (see Table 39); and
wind load caused by the lower frequency gR = peak factor for resonant response.
wind speed variations = [2ln(3 600 fa )]
5.1 Terminology
For the purpose of this clause, definitions given below
shall apply to all structures, in general. For definition
of terms pertaining to soil mechanics and soil dynamics,
reference may be made to Part 6 Structural Design,
Section 2 Soils and Foundations of the Code; and for
definition of terms pertaining to Loads, 3.2 and 4.3
may be referred.
10A VALUES OF THE CROSS WIND FORCE SPECTRUM 5.1.1 Closely-Spaced Modes Closely-spaced modes
COEFFICIENT FOR SQUARE SECTION BUILDINGS of a structure are those of the natural modes of
oscillation of a structure, whose natural frequencies
differ from each other by 10 percent or less of the lower
frequency.
5.1.2 Critical Damping The damping beyond which
the free vibration motion will not be oscillatory.
5.1.3 Damping The effect of internal friction,
inelasticity of materials, slipping, sliding, etc, in
reducing the amplitude of oscillation; it is expressed
as a fraction of critical damping (see 5.1.2).
5.1.4 Design Acceleration Spectrum Design
acceleration spectrum refers to an average smoothened
graph of maximum acceleration as a function of natural
frequency or natural period of oscillation for a specified
damping ratio for the expected earthquake excitations
at the base of a single degree of freedom system.
5.1.5 Design Horizontal Acceleration Coefficient
10B VALUES OF THE CROSS WIND FORCE SPECTRUM
COEFFICIENT FOR 2:1 AND 1:2 RECTANGULAR
(Ah) It is a horizontal acceleration coefficient that
SECTION BUILDINGS shall be used for design of structures.
FIG . 10 WIND FORCE SPECTRUM C OEFFICIENT 5.1.6 Design Horizontal Force It is the horizontal
seismic force prescribed by this Section that shall be
used to design a structure.
appropriate earthquake effects as per this clause. Also,
temporary elements, such as scaffolding and temporary 5.1.7 Ductility It is the capacity of a structure (or its
excavations, need to be designed as per this clause. members) to undergo large inelastic deformations
This clause does not deal with construction features without significant loss of strength or stiffness.
relating to earthquake-resistant buildings and other
5.1.8 Epicentre It is the geographical point on the
5.2.14 Moment-Resisting Frame It is an assembly 5.2.18 P-∆ Effect It is the secondary effect on shear
of beams and columns that resist induced and externally forces and bending moments of lateral force resisting
applied forces primarily by flexure. elements generated under the action of the vertical
loads, interacting with the lateral displacement of
5.2.14.1 Ordinary moment-resisting frame (OMRF) building resulting from seismic effects.
It is a moment-resisting frame designed and detailed
as per relevant good practices [6-1(7)], but not meeting 5.2.19 RC Structural Wall It is a wall designed to
special detailing requirements for ductile behaviour as resist lateral forces acting in its own plane.
per good practices [6-1(8)] or [6-1(9)], as applicable.
5.2.19.1 Ordinary RC structural wall It is a
5.2.14.2 Special moment-resisting frame (SMRF) reinforced concrete (RC) structural wall designed and
It is a moment-resisting frame designed and detailed detailed as per good practice [6-1(10)], but not meeting
as per relevant good practices [6-1(7)], and meeting special detailing requirements for ductile behaviour as
special detailing requirements for ductile behaviour as per good practice [6-1(8)].
per good practices [6-1(8)] or [6-1(9)], as applicable.
5.2.19.2 Special RC structural wall It is a RC
5.2.15 Number of Storeys (n) It is the number of structural wall designed and detailed in accordance with
levels of a building above the base at which mass is and meeting special detailing requirements for ductile
present in substantive amounts. This, behaviour, as per good practice [6-1(8)].
a) excludes the basement storeys, where 5.2.20 Storey It is the space between two adjacent
basement walls are connected with the ground floors.
floor deck or fitted between the building
columns; and 5.2.20.1 Soft storey It is one in which the lateral
stiffness is less than that in the storey above. The storey
b) includes the basement storeys, when they are
lateral stiffness is the total stiffness of all seismic force
not so connected.
resisting elements resisting lateral earthquake shaking
5.2.16 Core Structural Walls, Perimeter Columns, effects in the considered direction.
Outriggers and Belt Truss System It is a structural
system comprising a core of structural walls and 5.2.20.2 Weak storey It is one in which the storey
perimeter columns, resisting the vertical and lateral lateral strength [cumulative design shear strength of
loads, with all structural members other than that of unreinforced
masonry (URM) infills] is less than that in the storey
a) the core structural walls connected to select above. The storey lateral strength is the total strength
perimeter column element(s) (often termed of all seismic force resisting elements sharing the lateral
outrigged columns) by deep beam elements, storey shear in the considered direction.
known as outriggers, at discrete locations
along the height of the building; and 5.2.21 Storey Drift It is the relative displacement
b) the outrigged columns connected by deep between the floors above and/or below the storey under
beam elements (often known as belt truss), consideration.
typically at the same level as the outrigger 5.2.22 Storey Shear (Vi) It is the sum of design lateral
elements. forces at all levels above the storey i under
A structure with this structural system has enhanced consideration.
lateral stiffness, wherein core structural walls and 5.2.23 Storey Lateral Shear Strength (Si) It is the
perimeter columns are mobilized to act with each other total lateral strength of all lateral force resisting
If soils of lower N values are encountered than those specified in the table above, then suitable ground improvement techniques shall be
adopted to achieve these values. Alternately, deep pile foundations should be used, which are anchored in stronger strata, underlying
the soil layers that do not meet the requirement.
5 Piles should be designed for lateral loads neglecting lateral resistance of those soil layers (if any), which are liable to liquefy.
6 Accepted standard [6-1(17)] may be referred for soil notation, and corrected N values shaII be determined by applying correction
factor CN for effective overburden pressure cr'vo using relation N=C~b where CN = ~p'/ cr'., :5 1.7, p. is the atmospheric pressure,
and N, is the uncorrected SPT value for soil.
7 While using this table, the value of N to be considered shall be determined as below:
a) Isola/ed footings - Weighted average of N of soil layers from depth offounding, to depth offounding plus twice the breadth
of footing;
b) Raftfoundalions - Weighted average of N of soil layers from deptb offounding, to depth offounding plus twice the breadth
of raft;
c) Pile foundation - Weighted average of N of soil layers from depth of bottom tip of pile, to depth of bottom tip of pile plus
twice the diameter of pile;
d) Group pilefoundation - Weighted average of N of soil layers fromdeptb of bottom tip of pile group, to depth of bottom tip
of pile group plus twice tbe width of pile group; and
e) Wellfoundation - Weighted average of N of soil layers from depth of bottom tip of well, to depth of bottom tip of well plus
twice the width of well.
Z Sa
2 g
Ah =
R
I
where
Z = seismic zone factor given in Table 42. Zone factor for some important towns are given at Annex K;
I = importance factor given in good practice [6-1(18)] for the corresponding structures; when not specified,
the minimum values of I shall be,
a) 1.5 for critical and lifeline structures;
b) 1.2 for business continuity structures; and
c) 1.0 for the rest.
R = response reduction factor given in good practice [6-1(18)] for the corresponding structures; and
Sa
g = design acceleration coefficient for different soil types, normalized with peak ground acceleration,
corresponding to natural period T of structure (considering soil-structure interaction, if required). It
shall be as given in good practice [6-1(18)] for the corresponding structures; when not specified, it
shall be taken as that corresponding to 5 percent damping, given by expressions below:
a) For use in equivalent static method (see Fig. 12A):
2.5 0 < T < 0.40 s
For rocky or hard soil sites 1
0.40 s < T < 4.00 s
T
0.25 T > 0.400 s
2.5 0 < T < 0.55 s
1.36
Sa
= For medium stiff soil sites 0.55 s < T < 4.00 s
g T
0.34 T > 0.400 s
2.5 0 < T < 0.67 s
1.67
For soft soil sites
0.67 s < T < 4.00 s
T
0.42 T > 0.400 s
b) For use in response spectrum method (see Fig. 12B):
1 + 15T T < 0.10s
2.5 0.10 s < T < 0.40 s
For rocky or hard soil sites 1
T 0.40 s < T < 4.00 s
0.25 T > 4.00S
1 + 15T T < 0.10 s
2.5 0.10 s < T < 0.55 s
Sa
= For medium stiff soil sites 1.36
g T 0.55 s < T < 4.00 s
0.34 T > 4.00s
2.5 0.10 s < T < 0.67 s
1.67
For soft soil sites
0.67 s < T < 4.00 s
T
Table 42 Seismic Zone Factor Z In turn, dynamic analysis can be performed in three
(Clause 5.3.4.2) ways, namely:
Seismic Zone II III IV V 1) Response spectrum method,
Factor 2) Modal time history method, and
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
3) Time history method.
Z 0.10 0.16 0.24 0.36
In this Section, equivalent static method, response
5.3.4.2.1 For determining the correct spectrum to be spectrum method and time history method are adopted.
used in the estimate of Sa/g, the type of soil on which Equivalent static method may be used for analysis of
the structure is placed shall be identified by the regular structures with approximate natural period Ta
classification given in Table 43, as: less than 0.4 s.
a) Soil type I Rock or hard soils; 5.3.4.3.1 For structural analysis, the moment of inertia
b) Soil type II Medium or stiff soils; and shall be taken as:
c) Soil type III Soft soils. a) In RC and masonry structures: 70 percent of
In Table 43, the value of N to be used shall be the weighted Igross of columns, and 35 percent of Igross of
average of N of soil layers from the existing ground level, beams; and
to 30 m below the existing ground level; here, the N values b) In steel structures: Igross of both beams and
of individual layers shall be the corrected values. columns.
5.3.4.3 Effects of design earthquake loads applied on 5.3.4.4 Where a number of modes are to be considered
structures can be considered in two ways, namely: in response spectrum method, Ah as defined in 5.3.4.2
a) Equivalent static method, and for each mode k shall be determined using natural
b) Dynamic analysis method. period Tk of oscillation of that mode.
A building is said to have a re-entrant corner in any plan A soft storey is a storey whose lateral stiffness is less than
direction, when its structural configuration in plan has a that of the storey above.
projection of size greater than 15 percent of its overall plan The structural plan density (SPD) shall be estimated when
dimension in that direction unreinforced masonry infills are used. When SPD of masonry
In buildings with re-entrant corners, three-dimensional infills exceeds 20 percent, the effect of URM infills shall be
dynamic analysis method shall be adopted considered by explicitly modelling the same in structural
analysis (as per 5.4.9). The design forces for RC members
iii) Floor Slabs having Excessive Cut-Outs or Openings
shall be larger of that obtained from analysis of:
Openings in slabs result in flexible diaphragm behaviour, and a) Bare frame, and
hence the lateral shear force is not shared by the frames and/ b) Frames with URM infills,
or vertical members in proportion to their lateral translational
stiffness. The problem is particularly accentuated when the using 3D modelling of the structure. In buildings designed
opening is close to the edge of the slab. A building is said to considering URM infills, the inter-storey drift shall be limited
have discontinuity in their in-plane stiffness, when floor slabs to 0.2 percent in the storey with stiffening and also in all
have cut-outs or openings of area more than 50 percent of the storeys below.
full area of the floor slab ii) Mass Irregularity
In buildings with discontinuity in their in-plane stiffness, if Mass irregularity shall be considered to exist, when the seismic
the area of the geometric cut-out is, weight (as per 5.4.7) of any floor is more than 150 percent of
a) less than or equal to 50 percent, the floor slab shall be that of the floors below.
taken as rigid or flexible depending on the location of
and size of openings; and In buildings with mass irregularity and located in Seismic
Zones III, IV and V, the earthquake effects shall be estimated
b) more than 50 percent, the floor slab shall be taken as
by Dynamic Analysis Method (as per 5.4.7).
flexible
iv) Out-of-Plane Offsets in Vertical Elements iii) Vertical Geometric Irregularity
Out-of-plane offsets in vertical elements resisting lateral loads Vertical geometric irregularity shall be considered to exist,
cause discontinuities and detours in the load path, which is when the horizontal dimension of the lateral force resisting
Table 49 Percentage of Imposed Load to be 5.4.3.4 Loads other than those given above (for example
Considered in Calculation of Seismic Weight snow and permanent equipment) shall be considered
(Clauses 5.4.3.1) appropriately.
where
Qi = design lateral force at floor i;
Wi = seismic weight of floor i;
hi = height of floor i measured from base;
and
n = number of storeys in building, that is, FIG. 16 DEFINITION OF FLEXIBLE FLOOR D IAPHRAGM
number of levels at which masses are
located.
b) In-plan distribution of design lateral force at height of the building, and to various lateral load
floor i to different lateral force resisting resisting elements) for all buildings, other than regular
elements The design storey shear in any buildings lower than 15 m in Seismic Zone II.
storey shall be calculated by summing the 5.4.7.2 The analytical model for dynamic analysis of
design lateral forces at all floor above that buildings with unusual configuration should be such
storey. In buildings whose floors are capable that it adequately represents irregularities present in
of providing rigid horizontal diaphragm action the building configuration.
in their own plane, the design storey shear shall
be distributed to the various vertical elements 5.4.7.3 Dynamic analysis may be performed by either
of lateral force resisting system in proportion the Time History Method or the Response Spectrum
to the lateral stiffness of these vertical Method. When either of the methods is used, the design
elements. base shear VB estimated shall not be less than the design
5.4.6.4 Diaphragm base shear V B calculated using a fundamental period
Ta, where Ta is as per 5.4.6.2.
In buildings whose floor diaphragms cannot provide
rigid horizontal diaphragm action in their own plane, When VB is less than V B , the force response quantities
design storey shear shall be distributed to the various (for example member stress resultants, storey shear
vertical elements of lateral force resisting system forces, and base reactions) shall be multiplied by
considering the in-plane flexibility of the
diaphragms. V B VB .
A floor diaphragm shall be considered to be flexible, if For earthquake shaking considered along,
it deforms such that the maximum lateral displacement a) the two mutually perpendicular plan directions
measured from the chord of the deformed shape at any X and Y, separate multiplying factors shall be
point of the diaphragm is more than 1.2 times the
average displacement of the entire diaphragm calculated, namely V BX VBX and V BY VBY ,
(see Fig. 16). respectively; and
b) the vertical Z direction, the multiplying factor
Usually, reinforced concrete monolithic slab-beam shall be taken as
floors or those consisting of prefabricated or precast
Max [V BX / VBX ;VBY /VBY ]
elements with reasonable reinforced screed concrete
(at least a minimum of 50 mm on floors and of 75 mm 5.4.7.4 Time history method
on roof, with at least a minimum reinforcement of 6 mm
Time history method shall be based on an appropriate
bars spaced at 150 mm centres) as topping, and of plan
ground motion (preferably compatible with the design
aspect ratio less than 3, can be considered to be
acceleration spectrum in the desired range of natural
providing rigid diaphragm action.
periods) and shall be performed using accepted
5.4.7 Dynamic Analysis Method principles of earthquake structural dynamics.
5.4.7.1 Linear dynamic analysis shall be performed to 5.4.7.5 Response spectrum method
obtain the design lateral force (design seismic base
shear, and its distribution to different levels along the Response spectrum method may be performed for any
building using the design acceleration spectrum
∑Wi φik
Nm = number of modes considered;
M k = n=
i 1
ζ = modal damping coefficient ratio which g ∑Wi ( φik )
2
1.5esi + 0.05bi
edi =
n
∑ W (φ ) i ik
2
whichever gives the more severe effect on lateral force
i =1 resisting elements;
1) For asymetrical simple pitched roofs, each side of the roof shall be treated as one half of corresponding symmetrical roofs.
7 SPECIAL LOADS
7.1 This clause gives guidance on loads and load effects
due to temperature changes, soil and hydrostatic
pressures, internally generating stresses (due to creep,
shrinkage, differential settlement, etc), accidental loads,
etc, to be considered in the design of buildings as
appropriate. This clause also includes guidance on load
combinations. The nature of loads to be considered for
a particular situation is to be based on engineering
judgment (see also 3.6)
7.3 Hydrostatic and Soil Pressure 7.3.3 Safe-guarding of structures and structural
members against overturning and horizontal sliding
7.3.1 In the design of structures or parts of structures shall be verified. Imposed loads having favourable
below ground level such as retaining walls and other effect shall be disregarded for the purpose. Due
walls in basement floors, the pressure exerted by the consideration shall be given to the possibility of soil
soil or water or both shall be duly accounted for on the being permanently or temporarily removed.
basis of established theories. Due allowance shall be
made for possible surcharge from stationary or moving 7.4 Fatigue
loads. When a portion or whole of the soil is below the 7.4.1 General
free water surface, the lateral earth pressure shall be
Fatigue cracks are usually initiated at points of high
evaluated for weight of soil diminished by buoyancy
stress concentration. These stress concentrations may
and the full hydrostatic pressure.
be caused by or associated with holes (such as bolt or
7.3.1.1 All foundation slabs and other footings rivet holes in steel structures), welds including stray or
subjected to water pressure shall be designed to resist fusions in steel structures, defects in materials, and local
a uniformly distributed uplift equal to the full and general changes in geometry of members. The
hydrostatic pressure. Checking of overturning of cracks usually propagate if the loading is cyclic and
foundation under submerged condition shall be done repetitive.
considering buoyant weight of foundation. Where there is such cyclic and repetitive loading,
sudden changes of shape of a member or part of a
7.3.2 While determining the lateral soil pressure on
member, especially in regions of tensile stress and/or
column like structural members such as pillars which
local secondary bending, shall be avoided. Suitable
rest in sloping soils, the width of the member shall be
steps shall be taken to avoid critical vibrations due to
taken as follows (see Fig. 18):
wind and other causes.
Actual Width of Member Ratio of Effective 7.4.2 Where necessary, permissible stresses shall be
Width to Actual reduced to allow for the effects of fatigue. Allowance
Width for fatigue shall be made for combinations of stresses
Less than 0.5 m 3.0 due to dead load and imposed load. Stresses due to
Beyond 0.5 m and up to 1 m 3.0 to 2.0 wind and earthquakes may be ignored, when fatigue is
Beyond 1 m 2.0 being considered, unless otherwise specified in relevant
Codes of practice.
A-1 The total imposed loads from different floor levels using 3.3.2.1. Floor loads do not exceed 5.0 kN/m2.
(including the roof) coming on the central column of a
A-1.1 Applying reduction coefficients in accordance
multi-storeyed building (with mixed occupancy) is shown
with 3.3.2.1, total reduced floor loads on the column at
in Fig. 21. Calculate the reduced imposed load for the
different levels is indicated along with Fig. 21.
design of column members at different floor levels
A = Surface area of a structure or part of a structure Hs = Height factor for resonant response
Ae = Effective frontal area H = Height above mean ground level on the
Az = Effective frontal area of the building at height z topography feature
b = Breadth of a structure or structural member I = Turbulence intensity
normal to the wind stream in the horizontal Ih,i = Turbulence intensity at height h in terrain
plane category i
Bs = Background factor Iz,i = Turbulence intensity at height z in terrain
Cd = Drag coefficient category i
Cf = Force coefficient IF = Interference factor
Cfn = Normal force coefficient k = Mode shape power exponent
Cft = Transverse force coefficient k1, k2, k3, k4 = Wind speed modification factors
Cf' = Frictional drag coefficient k 2,i = Hourly mean wind speed factor
Cp = Pressure coefficient K = Force coefficient multiplication factor for
Cpe = External pressure coefficient individual members of finite length
Cpi = Internal pressure coefficient Ka = Area averaging factor
Cfs = Cross-wind force spectrum coefficient Kc = Combination factor
Cf,z = Drag force coefficient of the building Kd = Wind directionality factor
corresponding to the area Az l = Length of the member or larger horizontal
C = Coefficient, which depends on qs, used in the dimension of a building
evaluation of k3 factor L = Actual length of upwind slope
d = Depth of a structure or structural member Le = Effective length of upwind slope
parallel to wind stream in the horizontal plane Lh = Integral turbulence length scale at the height, h
dw = Wake width m0 = Average mass per unit height of the structure
D = Diameter of cylinder or sphere Ma = Design peak along wind base bending moment
E = Wind energy factor Mc = Design peak across wind base bending moment
Fz = Along wind load on the building/structure at N = Effective reduced frequency
any height z pd = Design wind pressure
F = Force normal to the surface pz = Design wind pressure at height z
fa = First mode natural frequency of the building/ p d = Design hourly mean wind pressure
structure in along wind direction, in Hz corresponding to V z,d
fc = First mode natural frequency of the building/ pe = External pressure
structure in across wind direction, in Hz
pi = Internal pressure
fs = Vortex shedding frequency
r = Roughness factor which is twice the
Fn = Normal force longitudinal turbulence intensity at height h, Ih,i
Ft = Transverse force Re = Reynolds number
F = Frictional force s = Level on a building/structure for the evaluation
G = Gust factor of along wind load effects
gR = Peak factor for resonant response So = Factor, which depends on H and X, used for the
gv = Peak factor for upwind velocity fluctuations evaluation of k3 factor
h = Height of structure above mean ground level St = Strouhal number
hx = Height of development of a velocity profile at S = Size reduction factor
a distance x down wind from a change in terrain Vb = Regional basic wind speed
category Vz = Design wind speed at height z
104 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
V d = Design hourly mean wind speed z = Height or distance above the ground
V z,d = Design hourly mean wind speed at height z z0,i = Aerodynamic roughness height for ith terrain
V z,H = Hourly mean wind speed at height z Z = Effective height of the topography feature
w = Lesser horizontal dimension of a building, or a α = Inclination of the roof to the horizontal
structural member β = Damping coefficient of the building/structure
w = Bay width in multi-bay building η = Shielding factor
x̂
!! = Peak acceleration at the top of the building/ φ = Factor to account for the second order
structure in along wind direction, in m/s2; turbulence intensity
x = Distance down wind from a change in terrain Φ = Solidity ratio
category
Φe = Effective solidity ratio
X = Distance from the summit or crest of topography
ε = Average height of the surface roughness
feature relative to the effective length, Le
= Upwind slope of the topography feature in the
ŷ = Peak acceleration at the top of the building/
θs
wind direction
!!
structure in across wind direction
θ = Wind angle from a given axis
ANNEX C
(Clause 4.4.2)
BASIC WIND SPEED AT 10 m HEIGHT FOR SOME IMPORTANT CITIES/TOWNS
City/Town Basic Wind Speed m/s City/Town Basic Wind Speed m/s
Agra 47 Delhi 50
Ahmedabad 39 Durgapur 47
Ajmer 47 Gangtok 47
Almora 47 Guwahati 50
Amritsar 50 Gaya 39
Asansol 47 Gorakhpur 47
Aurangabad 39 Hyderabad 44
Bahraich 47 Imphal 47
Barauni 47 Jabalpur 47
Bareilly 47 Jaipur 47
Bengaluru 33 Jamshedpur 47
Bhatinda 47 Jhansi 47
Bhilai 39 Jodhpur 47
Bhopal 47 Kanpur 47
Bhubaneswar 50 Kohima 44
Bhuj 50 Kolkata 50
Bikaner 47 Kozhikode 39
Bokaro 47 Kurnool 39
Chandigarh 47 Lakshadweep 39
Chennai 50 Lucknow 50
Coimbatore 39 Ludhiana 47
Cuttack 50 Madurai 39
Darbhanga 55 Mandi 39
Darjeeling 47 Mangaluru 39
Dehra Dun 47 Moradabad 47
Mumbai 44 Rajkot 39
Mysuru 33 Ranchi 39
Nagpur 44 Roorkee 39
Nainital 47 Rourkela 39
Nashik 39 Shimla 39
Nellore 50 Srinagar 39
Panaji 39 Surat 44
Patiala 47 Tiruchirappalli 47
Patna 47 Thiruvananthpuram 39
Port Blair 44 Udaipur 47
Puducherry 50 Vadodara 44
Pune 39 Varanasi 47
Vijayawada 50
Raipur 44
Visakhapatnam 50
ANNEX D
[Clause 4.4.3.2.4 (2) (ii)]
CHANGES IN TERRAIN CATEGORIES
D-1 LOW TO HIGH TERRAIN CATEGORY a) Above height h x, the velocities shall be
NUMBER determined in accordance with the rougher
(more distant) terrain; and
In cases of transition from a low terrain category
number (corresponding to a low terrain roughness) to b) Below height hx, the velocity shall be taken
a higher terrain category number (corresponding to a as the lesser of the following:
rougher terrain), the velocity profile over the rougher 1) That determined in accordance with the
terrain shall be determined as follows: less rough terrain, and
a) Below height h x, the velocities shall be 2) The velocity at height hx as determined
determined in relation to the rougher terrain; in relation to the rougher terrain
and NOTE Examples of determination of velocity
b) Above height hx , the velocities shall be profiles in the vicinity of a change in terrain
category are shown in Fig. 22A and Fig. 22B.
determined in relation to the less rough (more
distant) terrain. D-3 MORE THAN ONE CATEGORY
D-2 HIGH TO LOW TERRAIN CATEGORY Terrain changes involving more than one category shall
NUMBER be treated in similar way to that described in D-1
and D-2.
In cases of transition from a more rough to a less rough
NOTE Examples involving three terrain categories are shown
terrain, the velocity profile shall be determined as in Fig. 22B.
follows:
ANNEX E
(Clause 4.4.3.3)
EFFECT OF A CLIFF OR ESCARPMENT ON EQUIVALENT HEIGHT ABOVE GROUND
(k3 FACTOR)
E-1 The influence of the topographic feature is Z = effective height of the topography feature,
considered to extend 1.5 L e upwind and 2.5 L e and
downwind of the summit of crest of the feature where θs = upwind slope in the wind direction.
Le is the effective horizontal length of the hill depending
In case, the zone in downwind side of the crest of the
on slope as indicated below (see Fig. 23):
feature is relatively flat (θ s < 3°) for a distance
Slope Le exceeding Le, then the feature should be treated as an
3° < θs < 17° L escarpment. Otherwise the feature should be treated as
θs > 17° Z / 0.3 a hill or ridge. Examples of typical features are given
in Fig. 23.
where
L = actual length of the upwind slope in the wind NOTES
direction, 1 No difference is made, in evaluating k 3 between a three
dimensional hill and two dimensional ridge.
G -1 The symbols and notations given below apply to Pk = Mode participation factor of mode k
the provisions of 5 of this Code: Qi = Lateral force at floor i
Ah = Design horizontal earthquake acceleration Qik = Design lateral force at floor i in mode k
coefficient R = Response reduction factor
Ak = Design horizontal earthquake acceleration Sa/g = Design / Response acceleration coefficient for
spectrum value for mode k of oscillation rock or soil sites as given by Fig. 12 and 5.3.4.2
bi = Plan dimension of floor i of the building, based on appropriate natural period
perpendicular to direction of earthquake Si = Lateral shear strength of storey i
shaking
T = Undamped natural period of oscillation of the
C = Index for the closely-spaced modes
structure (in second)
d = Base dimension (in metre) of the building in
Ta = Approximate fundamental period (in second)
the direction in which the earthquake shaking
is considered Tk = Undamped natural period of mode k of
DL = Response quantity due to dead load oscillation (in second)
edi = Design eccentricity to be used at floor i T1 = Fundamental natural period of oscillation (in
calculated as per 5.4.8.2 second)
esi = Static eccentricity at floor i defined as the VB = Design seismic base shear
distance between centre of mass and centre of VB = Design base shear calculated using the
resistance approximate fundamental period Ta
ELX = Response quantity due to earthquake load for Vi = Peak storey shear force in storey i due to all
horizontal shaking along X-direction modes considered
ELY = Response quantity due to earthquake load for Vik = Shear force in storey i in mode k
horizontal shaking along Y-direction
Vroof = Peak storey shear force in the top storey due
ELZ = Response quantity due to earthquake load for to all modes considered
horizontal shaking along Z-direction
W = Seismic weight of the building
Froof = Design lateral forces at the roof due to all
modes considered Wi = Seismic weight of floor i
Fi = Design lateral forces at the floor i due to all Z = Seismic zone factor
modes considered φik = Mode shape coefficient at floor i in mode k
g = Acceleration due to gravity λ = Peak response (for example, member forces,
h = Height (in metre) of structure displacements, storey forces, storey shears or
hi = Height measured from the base of the building base reactions) due to all modes considered
to floor i λk = Absolute value of maximum response in mode
I = Importance factor k
IL = Response quantity due to imposed load λc = Absolute value of maximum response in mode
Ki = Lateral translational stiffness of storey i c, where mode c is a closely-spaced mode
L = Dimension of a building in a considered λ* = Peak response due to the closely-spaced modes
direction only
Mk = Modal mass of mode k ρji = Coefficient used in complete quadratic
n = Number of storeys or floors combination (CQC) method while combining
N = Corrected SPT value for soil responses of modes i and j
Nm = Number of modes to be considered as ωi = Circular frequency (in rad/s) in mode i
per 5.4.7.5.2
ANNEX J
(Clauses 5.1.12 and 5.3.3.5.3)
SIMPLIFIED PROCEDURE FOR EVALUATION OF LIQUEFACTION POTENTIAL
J-1 Due to the difficulties in obtaining and testing 1 − 0.007 65 z 0 < z ≤ 9.15 m
undisturbed representative samples from potentially rd =
liquefiable sites, in-situ testing is the approach preferred 1.174 − 0.026 7 z 9.15 < z ≤ 23.0 m
widely for evaluating the liquefaction potential of a soil where z is the depth (in metre) below the ground surface.
deposit. Liquefaction potential assessment procedures
Step 4 Calculate cyclic stress ratio CSR induced by
involving both the SPT and CPT are widely used in
the earthquake using:
practice. The most common procedure used in
engineering practice for the assessment of liquefaction
a σ
potential of sands and silts is the simplified procedure. CSR = 0.65 max vo rd ,
The procedure may be used with either standard g σ ' vo
penetration test (SPT) blow count or cone penetration where
test (CPT) tip resistance or shear wave velocity Vs
measured within the deposit as described below: amax = peak ground acceleration (PGA) preferably
in terms of g,
Step 1 The subsurface data used to assess liquefaction
g = acceleration due to gravity, and
susceptibility should include the location of the water
table, either SPT blow count N or tip resistance qc of a rd = stress reduction factor.
CPT cone or shear wave velocity Vs, unit weight, and If value of PGA is not available, the ratio (amax/g) may
fines content of the soil (percent by weight passing the be taken equal to seismic zone factor Z (as per
IS Sieve No. 75µ). Table 42).
Step 2 Evaluate total vertical overburden stress σvo Step 5 Obtain cyclic resistance ratio CRR by
and effective vertical overburden stress σ 'vo at different correcting standard cyclic resistance ratio CRR7.5 for
depths for all potentially liquefiable layers within the earthquake magnitude, high overburden stress level and
deposit. high initial static shear stress using:
Step 3 Evaluate stress reduction factor rd using: CRR = CRR7.5 ( MSF ) K ó K á ,
α = e FC2
β = 0.99 +
and f is an exponent and its value depends on the relative 1 000 < FC < 35
density Dr. For Dr = 40 percent ~ 60 percent, f = 0.8 ~ percent
0.7 and for Dr = 60 percent ~ 80 percent, f = 0.7 ~ 0.6.
The correction for static shear stresses Kα is required α = 0.5 β = 1.2 for FC ≥ 35
only for sloping ground and is not required in routine percent
engineering practice. Therefore, in the scope of this
Again, Fig. 28 can be used to estimate CRR7.5, where
Section, value of Kα shall be assumed unity.
(N1)60,CS shall be used instead of (N1)60 and only SPT
For assessing liquefaction susceptibility using: clean sand based curve shall be used irrespective of
fines contents. The CRR7.5 can be estimated using
a) SPT, go to Step 6(a) or
following equation, instead of Fig. 28:
b) CPT, go to Step 6(b) or
c) Shear wave velocity, go to Step 6(c). 1 ( N1 )60CS
CRR7.5 = + +
34 − ( N 1 )60CS 135
Step 6 Obtain cyclic resistance ratio, CRR7.5
50 1
−
6(a) Using values of SPT 2
200
10 × ( N1 )60CS + 45
Evaluate the SPT (standard penetration test) blow count
6(b) Using values of CPT
N 60 , for a hammer efficiency of 60 percent.
Specifications for standardized equipment are given in The CPT procedure requires normalization of measured
Table 50. If equipment used is of non-standard type, cone tip resistance qc using atmospheric pressure Pa
N60 shall be obtained using measured value (N): and correction for overburden pressure CQ as follows:
N60 = NC60, q
q = CQ c
where Pa
C1N
where P
0.25
Vs1 = a Vs
kc = Correction factor to account for grain
σ′vo
characteristics
where (Vs1) is overburden stress corrected shear wave
1.0 (for I c ≤ 1.64) velocity. Using V s1 find the value of CRR7.5 using
= −0.403I c4 + 5.581I c3 − 21.63I c2 + Fig. 30. Alternatively, the CRR7.5 can be found using
following equation:
33.75I c − 17.88 (for I c > 1.64), and
V 1 1
2
Ic = (3.47 − log Q ) + (1.22 − log F )
2 2
CRR7.5 = a s1 + b * − *
n 100 Vs1 − Vs1 Vs1
q − σvo Pa
Q= c
Pa σ′vo where Vs1* is limiting upper value of Vs1 for liquefaction
occurrence; a and b are curve fitting parameters. The
fs
F = 100 percent, and values of a and b in Fig. 30 are 0.022 and 2.8,
qc − σvo respectively. Vs1* can be assumed to vary linearly from
where fs = measured sleeve friction. 200 m/s for soils with fine content of 35 percent, to 215
m/s for soils with fine contents of 5 percent or less.
Using (qC1N)CS find the value of CRR7.5 using Fig. 29.
Alternatively, the CRR7.5 can be found using following Step 7 Calculate the factor of safety FS against initial
equations: liquefaction using:
i) Sampler Standard split-spoon sampler with, Outside diameter, OD = 51 mm; and Inside
diameter,
ID = 35 mm (constant, that is, no room for liners in the barrel).
ii) Drill rods A or AW type for depths less than 15.2 m; N or NW type for greater depths
iii) Hammer Standard (safety) hammer with,
a) weight = 63.5 kg; and
b) drop height = 762 mm (delivers 60 percent of theoretical free fall energy)
iv) Rope Two wraps of rope around the pulley
v) Borehole 100-130 mm diameter rotary borehole with bentonite mud for borehole stability
(hollow stem augers where SPT is taken through the stem)
vi) Drill bit Upward deflection of drilling mud (tricone or baffled drag bit)
vii) Blow count rate 30 to 40 blows per minute
viii) Penetration resistant count Measured over range of 150 mm 450 mm of penetration into the ground
HW
ii) Non-standard hammer weight or height of fall C HW =
48 387
where
H = height of fall (mm), and
W = hammer weight (kg)
iii) Non-standard sampler setup (standard samples with room for
ì1.1 (for loose sand)
liners, but used without liners) CSS = í
î1.2 (for dense sand)
iv) Non-standard sampler setup (standard samples with room for
ì0.9 (for loose sand)
liners, but liners are used) CSS = í
î0.8 (for dense sand)
v) Short rod length C RL = 0.75 (for rod length 0-3 m)
C RL = 0.80 (for rod length 3-4 m)
C RL = 0.85 (for rod length 4-6 m)
C RL = 0.95 (for rod length 6-10 m)
C RL = 1.0 (for rod length 10-30 m)
vi) Non-standard borehole diameter
ì1.00 (for bore hole diameter of 65-115 mm)
ï
C BD = í1.05 (for bore hole diameter of 150 mm)
ï1.15 (for bore hole diameter of 200 mm)
î
NOTES
1 N= Uncorrected SPT blow count.
2 C 60 = C HT C HW C SSC RL C BD
3 N 60 = NC 60
4 C N = Correction factor for overburden pressure ( N 1 )60 = C N C 60 N .
ANNEX L
(Clause 6.4.3)
SHAPE COEFFICIENTS FOR MULTILEVEL ROOFS
Restriction:
kh
µw ≤
So
where
So is in kilopascals (kilonewtons per square metre).
k is in newtons per cubic metre.
l3 < 15 m
Values of m1(m2) for the higher (lower) root depend on
its profile and are taken as equal to:
0.5 for plane roofs with slopes β < 20° and vaulted
f 1
roofs with ≤
l 18
0.3 for plane roofs with slopes β > 20° and vaulted
f 1
roofs with >
l 18
ANNEX N
(Clause 7.8)
BLAST LOAD
808 1 + ( Z 4.5) C
2 α = 3.18Z −0.58
Pso
g) Compute the peak reflected pressure, P ro
=
pa 1 + ( Z 0.048) 1 + ( Z 0.32 ) 1 + ( Z 1.35 )2
2 2
acting on the structure from:
Pro = CrPso
where
α = wave form parameter;
ta = arrival time;
td = duration of positive phase;
W = weight of charge, in kg
t = 1.25W1/3;
Pmin = 0.35/Z (Z>1.6);
Pso = side-on over pressure in MPa;
d
Z = scaled distance, in m/kg1/3 , given by Z = 1 3
; and
W
d = actual/radial distance, in m, between the point of burst and point, where peak over pressure is calculated.
= 1 + 6 pso / 7 pa ;
FIG. 34B
a = velocity of sound in air;
ii) Rear Using the pressures
from actual explosion, S = least of H and B/2.
the average loading is tt = transit time
taken as shown in
Fig. 35. = L/U.
L L 4S L
+ + td
U U U U
FIG. 35
FIG. 36A
When pulse duration,
td is less than transit
time tt of the wave
from front to the sides
or roof, the pressure
may be considered as
a moving pulse as
shown in Fig. 36B.
F IG. 36B
1)
The blast pressure definitions given in this table are valid for a closed type structure with less than 5 percent opening.
2)
Front face is the vertical face of the structure on which the blast wave strikes.
P1 = PQS + P0
where
PQS = maximum value for the quasi-static
overpressure in the gas venting phase of the
loading.
t1 = 5ta + Tr
α Aa
c = 2.13 e s o
V
where
αe = effective vent area ratio,
As = internal surface area of the structure,
V = internal volume of the structure, and
ao = sound velocity of air.
Maximum gas overpressure, PQS, which depends on
the quantity of explosive charge, W and the internal
volume of confinement, V is obtained from Fig. 40.
The value of tmax can be obtained from:
F IG. 40 PEAK QUASI-STATIC PRESSURE FOR TNT
V E XPLOSION IN CHAMBER
tmax = τmax
α e As ao
Figure 41 provides the charts for calculation of internal
blast pressure for a given scaled distance.
where τmax is given by the expression:
N-8 For design of structures for blast effects of
τmax = 0.469 5 ln ( P1 ) explosions above ground, see also good practice
in which, P1 is equal to, [6-1(30)].
For safety of structures during underground blasting,
P1 =
(P
QS + P0 )
see also good practice [6-1(31)].
P0
E.Q. and Flood Cyclone and Flood E.Q., Cyclone and Flood E.Q. and Cyclone
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Andhra Pradesh Adilabad, Karim Krishna, Nellore, East Godavari, Guntur,
Nagar, Srikakulam, Prakasam, West Godavari
Khammam Visakhapatnam,
Vizianagram
Assam All 22 districts No cyclone, but
listed in Table 53 speed can be
could have 50 m/s in districts
M.S.K IX or of Table 53 causing
more with local damage
flooding except Dhubri
Bihar All 25 districts
listed in Table 53
Goa North and South
Goa
Gujarat Banaskantha, Ahmedabad, Bharuch, Amreli,
Danthe GS, Surat, Valsad Bhavnagar,
Gandhinagar, Jamnagar, Rajkot,
Kheda, Junagad, Kachcha
Mahesana,
Panchmahals,
Vadodara
Haryana All 8 districts
listed in Table 53
Kerala Idukki, Alappuzha, Ernakulum,
Kottayam, Kannur, Kasargod,
Palakkad, Kollam, Kozhikode,
Pathanamthitta Malappuram,
Thiruvanathapuram,
Thrissur
Maharashtra Mumbai, Rayagad,
Ratnagiri,
Sindhudurg,
Thane
Orissa Ganjam Baleshwar, Cuttack, Puri Dhenkanal
Haryana3)
1)
Districts liable to cyclonic storm but no storm surge
Ambala, Bhiwani, Faridabad, Gurgaon, Hisar, Jind, Kurukshetra,
2)
No cyclonic storm in Bihar
Rohtak
3)
No cyclonic storm in Haryana
4)
No cyclonic storm in Punjab
5)
No cyclonic storm in Uttar Pradesh and Uttarakhand
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards
gantry cranes other than steelwork
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The
cranes (second revision)
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time
(4) 14732 : 2000 Guidelines for the evaluation of
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may
the response of occupants of fixed
be used by the Authority for conformance with the
structures, especially buildings
requirements of the referred clauses in the Code.
and off-shore structures, to low-
In the following list, the number appearing in the first frequency horizontal motion
column within parentheses indicates the number of the (0.063 to 1 Hz)
reference in this Section: (5) 15498 : 2004 Guidelines for improving the
cyclone resistance of low rise
houses and other buildings/
IS No. Title
structures
(1) 875 (Part 1) : Code of practice for design loads
(6) 4326 : 2013 Code of practice for earthquake
1987 (other than Earthquake) for
resistant design and construction
buildings and structures: Part 1
of buildings (third revision)
Dead loads-unit weights of
13827 : 1993 Guidelines for improving
building material and stored
earthquake resistance of earthen
materials (second revision)
buildings
(2) 8888 (Part 1) : Guide for requirements of low
13828 : 1993 Guidelines for improving
1993 income housing: Part 1 Urban
earthquake resistance of low
area (first revision)
strength masonry buildings
(3) 807 : 2006 Code of practice for design,
13920 : 2016 Code of practice for ductile
erection and testing (structural
design and detailing of reinforced
portion) of cranes and hoists
concrete structures subjected to
(second revision)
seismic forces (first revision)
3177 : 1999 Code of practice for electric
13935 : 1993 Guidelines for repair and seismic
overhead traveling cranes and strengthening of buildings
(23) 1642 : 2013 Code of practice fire safety of (27) 14496 Guidelines for preparation of
buildings (general): Details of (Part 2) : 1998 landslideHazard zonation
construction (second revision) maps in mountainous terrains:
(24) 14458 Guidelines for retaining wall for Part 2 Macro-zonation
(Part 1) : 1998 hill area: Part 1 Selection of type (28) 14680 : 1999 Guidelines for landslide control
of wall (29) 2131 : 1981 Method of standard penetration
(25) 14458 Guidelines for retaining wall for test for soils (first revision)
(Part 2) : 1997 hill area: Part 2 Design of (30) 4991 : 1968 Criteria for blast resistant design
retaining/breast walls of structures for explosions above
(26) 14458 Guidelines for retaining wall for ground
(Part 3) : 1998 hill area: Part 3 Construction of (31) 6922 : 1973 Criteria for safety and design of
dry stone walls structures subject to underground
blasts
FOREWORD
3
1 SCOPE
5
2 TERMINOLOGY
5
3 SITE INVESTIGATION
7
4 CLASSIFICATION AND IDENTIFICATION OF SOILS
14
5 MATERIALS
14
6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FOUNDATIONS/SUBSTRUCTURES FOR
14
BUILDINGS
7 SHALLOW FOUNDATIONS
18
8 DRIVEN/BORED CAST IN-SITU CONCRETE PILES
25
9 DRIVEN PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
29
10 PRECAST CONCRETE PILES IN PREBORED HOLES
32
11 UNDER-REAMED PILES
32
12 TIMBER PILES
35
13 OTHER FOUNDATIONS, SUBSTRUCTURES AND FOUNDATIONS FOR SPECIAL
35
STRUCTURES
14 GROUND IMPROVEMENT
36
ANNEX A DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF ELASTICITY (Es) AND POISSONS
37
RATIO (µ)
ANNEX B DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF SUBGRADE REACTION
38
ANNEX C RIGIDITY OF SUPERSTRUCTURE AND FOUNDATION
39
ANNEX D CALCULATION OF PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION BY CONVENTIONAL
40
METHOD
ANNEX E CONTACT PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION AND MOMENTS BELOW
41
FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION
ANNEX F FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION GENERAL CONDITION
43
ANNEX G LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF PILES STATIC ANALYSIS
44
ANNEX H ANALYSIS OF LATERALLY LOADED PILES
48
ANNEX J LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF UNDER-REAMED PILES FROM SOIL
51
PROPERTIES
ANNEX K SOIL IMPROVEMENT METHODS
52
LIST OF STANDARDS 57
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 6/Section 2) deals with the structural design aspects of foundations and mainly covers the
design principles involved in different types of foundations.
This Section was published in 1970, and subsequently revised in 1983 and 2005. In the first revision, design
considerations in respect of shallow foundation were modified, provisions regarding pier foundation were added
and provisions regarding raft foundation and pile foundation were revised and elaborated. In the second revision,
design considerations in respect of shallow foundations were again modified, method for determining depth of
fixity, lateral deflection and maximum moment of laterally loaded piles were modified and reference was made to
ground improvement techniques.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 2005 version of the Code and feedback received as well as
revision of standards in the field of soils and foundations, a need to revise this Section was felt. This revision has
therefore been prepared to take into account these developments. The significant changes incorporated in this
revision include:
a) The scope of this Section has been extended to cover design of foundations on rock.
b) Definitions of various terms have been modified as per the prevailing engineering practice and new terms
have been added, particularly those relating to pile foundation and ground improvement.
c) The clause on site investigation has been completely reviewed and number of modifications have been
included, such as, new methods of soil investigation have been added; depth of exploration for pile
foundations has been added; new sub-clauses on vertical interval for field tests and site investigation
report have been added; etc.
d) Method for assessment of liquefaction potential of a site has been included through a cross-reference to
Part 6 Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code.
e) Permissible differential settlements and tilt (angular distortion) for shallow foundations in soils as given
in Table 3 has been modified.
f) Procedures for calculation of bearing capacity, structural capacity, factor of safety, lateral load capacity,
overloading, etc, in case of pile foundations have also been modified to bring them at par with the present
practices.
g) Design parameters with respect to adhesion factor, earth pressure coefficient, modulus of subgrade
reaction, etc, for design of pile foundations have also been revised to make them consistence with the
outcome of modern research and construction practices.
h) Provision has been made for use of any established dynamic pile driving formulae, instead of
recommending any specific formula, to control the pile driving at site, giving due consideration to
limitations of various formulae.
j) Other modifications have also been incorporated in provisions relating to pile foundations to bring them
in coherence with the revised Indian Standards on pile foundations.
k) A reference to spun piles, which are used in deep marshy soils where conventional pile installation
beyond 50 m is difficult, has been included. However, much detail is not available in the country for the
purpose of codal provisions which may be shared by the users of spun pipes in the country based on
their experience in use of these piles, for formulation of guidelines thereon.
m) The clause on ground improvement techniques has been elaborated and a table on summary of soil
improvement methods has been added.
For detailed information regarding structural analysis and soil mechanics aspects of individual foundations,
reference should be made to standard textbooks and available literature.
The net allowable bearing pressure is the gross 2.4.1 Allowable Load The load which may be
allowable bearing pressure minus the surcharge applied to a pile after taking into account its ultimate
intensity. load capacity, group effect, the allowable settlement,
negative skin friction and other relevant loading
NOTE The concept of gross and net used in defining
the allowable bearing pressure could also be extended to
conditions including reversal of loads, if any.
safe bearing capacity, safe bearing pressure and ultimate
2.4.2 Anchor Pile A pile meant for resisting pull or
bearing capacity.
uplift forces.
2.3.5 Factor of Safety (with Respect to Bearing
Capacity) A factor by which the ultimate bearing 2.4.3 Batter Pile (Raker Pile) The pile which is
capacity (net) shall be reduced to arrive at the value of installed at an angle to the vertical using temporary
safe bearing capacity (net). casing or permanent liner.
2.3.6 Footing A structure constructed in brick work, 2.4.4 Bored Cast in-situ Pile Piles formed by boring a
masonry or concrete under the base of a wall or column hole in the ground by percussive or rotary method with
for the purpose of distributing the load over a larger the use of temporary/permanent casing or drilling mud
area. and subsequently filling the hole with reinforced concrete.
2.3.7 Foundation, Raft A substructure supporting 2.4.5 Bored Compaction Pile A bored cast in-situ
an arrangement of columns or walls in a row or rows pile with or without bulb(s) in which the compaction of
transmitting the loads to the soil by means of a the surrounding ground and freshly filled concrete in
continuous slab, with or without depressions or pile bore is simultaneously achieved by a suitable
openings. method. If the pile is with bulb(s), it is known as under-
reamed bored compaction pile.
2.3.8 Made-Up Ground Refuse, excavated soil or
rock deposited for the purpose of filling a depression 2.4.6 Bored Pile A pile formed with or without casing
or raising a site above the natural surface level of the by excavating or boring a hole in the ground and
ground. subsequently filling it with plain or reinforced concrete.
deep exploration and pits for shallow exploration. explored by open trial pits of about 5 m × 5 m
In case of soft sensitive clayey soils, field vane but in no case less than 2 m × 2 m. The depth
shear test may be carried out with advantage. of excavation may be up to 6 m. For
In sandy soils, boring is easy but special determining strata characteristics, in-situ tests
equipment, such as, Bishop or Osterberg piston should be preferred. For shear characteristics
samplers should be used for taking undisturbed and allowable soil pressure, pressure meter
samples below the water table. Where necessary, tests, load tests on cast in-situ footing and
some form of ground water lowering is used. in-situ shear tests that is, boulder-boulder test
Standard penetration test, dynamic cone or concrete-boulder test are more appropriate.
penetration test and static cone penetration test For detailed information on these tests
are used to assess engineering properties. reference shall be made to good practice
b) Gravel-boulder deposits In the deposits [6-2(3)]. Depending on the structure, if
where gravel-boulder proportion is large required, the strata may be explored by drilling
(>30 percent), the subsoil strata should be borehole using suitable method.
dry periods may be partially replenished and a therefore, be directed to make the foundations and
subsurface zone or zones deficient in water may persist structures sufficiently rigid and strong to withstand
for many years. Leakage from water mains and the probable worst loading condition and probable
underground sewers may also result in large volume ground movements. Long continuous buildings should
changes. Therefore, special care shall be taken to be avoided in such areas and large building in such
prevent such leakages. area should be divided into independent sections of
suitable size, each with its own foundations. Expert
6.5 Effect of Mass Movements of Ground in Unstable advice from appropriate mining authority should be
Areas sought.
In certain areas mass movements of the ground are NOTE For prediction of subsidence in coal mines,
liable to occur from causes independent of the loads guidelines as given in the good practice [6-2(8)] may be
applied by the foundations of structures. These include referred.
mining subsidence, landslides on unstable slopes and 6.5.2 Landslide Prone Areas
creep on clay slopes.
The construction of structures on slopes which are
6.5.1 Mining Subsidence suspected of being unstable and are subject to landslip
In mining areas, subsidence of the ground beneath a shall be avoided.
building or any other structure is liable to occur. The On sloping ground on clay soils, there is always a
magnitude of the movement and its distribution over tendency for the upper layers of soil to move downhill,
the area are likely to be uncertain and attention shall, depending on type of soil, the angle of slope, climatic
Settlement
Maximum
Differential
Differential
Differential
Differential
Settlement
Settlement
Settlement
Settlement
Settlement
Settlement
Settlement
Maximum
Maximum
Maximum
Distortion
Distortion
Distortion
Distortion
Angular
Angular
Angular
Angular
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
i) For steel structure 50 .003 3L 1/300 50 .003 3L 1/300 75 .003 3L 1/300 100 .003 3L 1/300
ii) For reinforced 75 .001 5L 1/500 75 .002L 1/500 75 .003 3L 1/300 125 .003 3L 1/300
concrete structures
iii) For multistoreyed
buildings:
a) RC or steel framed 60 .002L 1/500 75 .003L 1/300 75 .002 5L 1/300 125 .003 3L 1/300
buildings with
panel walls
b) For load bearing
walls
1) L/H=21) 60 .000 2L 1/5 000 60 .000 2L 1/5 000 Not likely to be encountered
2) L/H=71) 60 .000 4L 1/2 500 60 .000 4L 1/2 500
iv) For water towers and 50 .001 5L 1/666 75 .001 5L 1/666 100 .002 5L 1/400 125 .002 5L 1/400
silos
1)
For intermediate ratios of L/H, the values can be interpolated.
NOTES
1 The values given in the table may be taken only as a guide and the permissible total settlement/different settlement and tilt
(angular distortion) in each case should be decided as per requirements of the designer.
2 L denotes the length of deflected part of wall/raft or centre-to-centre distance between columns.
3 H denotes the height of wall from foundation footing.
hollow sections may be filled with concrete after driving Design, Section 5 Concrete, Subsection 5A Plain and
in position. Reinforced Concrete of the Code. The calculations for
bending moment for different support conditions during
9.2.4 Wherever, final pile length is so large that a single
handling are given in Table 5.
length precast pile unit is either uneconomical or
impracticable for installation, the segmental precast RCC Table 5 Bending Moment for Different
piles with a number of segments using efficient Support Conditions
mechanical jointing could be adopted. (Clause 9.2.5)
Excessive whipping during handling precast pile may Sl Number of Location of Support Bending Moment
generally be avoided by limiting the length of pile to a No. Points of from End in Terms to be Allowed for
Pick Up of Length of Pile for Design
maximum of 50 times the least width. As an alternative, Minimum Moments kN.m
segmental precast piling technique could be used. (1) (2) (3) (4)
i) One 0.293 L 4.3 WL
The design of joints shall take care of corrosion by ii) Two 0.207 L 2.2 WL
providing additional sacrificial thickness for the joint, iii) Three 0.145 L, the middle 1.05 WL
wherever warranted. point will be at the
centre
9.2.5 Stresses induced by bending in the cross-section NOTE W = weight of pile, in kN.
of precast pile during lifting and handling may be L = length of pile, in m.
estimated as for any reinforced concrete section in
accordance with relevant provisions of Part 6 Structural 9.2.6 The driving stresses on a pile may be estimated
n=
( −
) minimum bond length into the pile shaft below its cut-
W+P W + P
off level and with adequate projection into the pile cap,
The following are the values of n in relation to e and to irrespective of design requirements.
the ratio of P/W: 9.3.3 Clear cover to all main reinforcement in pile
Sl Ratio e = 0.5 e = 0.4 e = 0.32 e = 0.25 e = 0 shaft shall be not less than 50 mm. The laterals of a
No. of P/W reinforcing cage may be in the form of links or spirals.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) The diameter and spacing of the same is chosen to
impart adequate rigidity of the reinforcing cage
i) ½ 0.75 0.72 0.70 0.69 0.67
during its handing and installations. The minimum
ii) 1 0.63 0.58 0.55 0.53 0.50
diameter of the links or spirals shall be 8 mm and the
iii) 1½ 0.55 0.50 0.47 0.44 0.40
iv) 2 0.50 0.44 0.40 0.37 0.33 spacing of the links or spirals shall be not less than
v) 2½ 0.45 0.40 0.36 0.33 0.28 150 mm. Stiffner rings preferably of 16 mm diameter
vi) 3 0.42 0.36 0.33 0.30 0.25 at every 1.5 m centre-to-centre to be provided along
vii) 3½ 0.39 0.33 0.30 0.27 0.22 the length of the cage for providing rigidity to
viii) 4 0.36 0.31 0.28 0.25 0.20 reinforcement cage. Minimum 6 numbers of vertical
ix) 5 0.31 0.27 0.24 0.21 0.16 bars shall be used for a circular pile and minimum
x) 6 0.27 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.14 diameter of vertical bar shall be 12 mm. The clear
xi) 7 0.24 0.21 0.19 0.17 0.12 horizontal spacing between the adjacent vertical bars
xii) 8 0.22 0.20 0.17 0.15 0.11 shall be four times the maximum aggregate size in
NOTES
concrete. If required, the bars may be bundled to
1 W = mass of the ram, in tonne and P = weight of the
maintain such spacing.
pile, anvil, helmet, and follower (if any), in tonne.
9.4 Additional provision for prestressed concrete piles
2 Where the pile finds refusal in rock, 0.5P should be
substituted for P in the above expressions for n. shall be as per good practice [6-2(25)].
3 e is the coefficient of restitution of the materials under 9.5 For detailed information regarding casting and
impact as tabulated below:
a) For steel ram of double-acting hammer striking on
curing, storing and handling, control of pile driving
steel anvil and driving reinforced concrete pile, e = 0.5. and recording of data, reference shall be made to good
b) For cast-iron ram of single-acting or drop hammer practice [6-2(25)].
striking on head of reinforced concrete pile, e = 0.4.
c) Single-acting or drop hammer striking a well- 9.6 Non-Destructive Testing
conditioned driving cap and helmet with hard wood
dolly in driving reinforced concrete piles or directly For quality assurance of concrete piles, non-destructive
on head of timber pile, e = 0.25. integrity test may be carried out prior to laying of beam/
d) For a deteriorated condition of the head of pile or of caps, in accordance with good practice [6-2(24)].
dolly, e = 0.
FIG . 7 TYPICAL DETAILS OF B ORED CAST IN-SITU UNDER-R EAMED PILE FOUNDATION
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 2 SOILS AND FOUNDATIONS 33
are not advisable without ensuring their feasibility in diameter, an average value of bulb diameter should be
strata needing stabilization of boreholes by drilling mud. taken for spacing.
The number of bulbs in the case of bored compaction
11.3.6 Group Efficiency
piles should also not exceed one in such strata.
11.3.1.7 Under-reamed batter piles without lining in For bored cast in-situ under-reamed piles at a usual
dry conditions, that is, strata with low water table can spacing of 2Du, the group efficiency will be equal to
be constructed with batter not exceeding 15°. the safe load of an individual pile multiplied by the number
of piles in the group. For piles at a spacing of 1.5Du, the
11.3.2 Safe Load safe load assigned per pile in a group should be reduced
Safe load on a pile can be determined, by 10 percent.
a) by calculating the ultimate load from soil In under-reamed compaction piles, at the usual spacing
properties and applying a suitable factor of of 1.5Du, the group capacity will be equal to the safe
safety as given in Annex J; load on an individual pile multiplied by the number of
b) by load test on pile as good practice [6-2(19)]; piles in the group.
and
11.3.7 Transient and Overloading
c) from safe load tables.
11.3.2.1 Load test Provisions of 8.3.9 and 8.3.10 shall generally apply.
Timber piles shall be designed in such a way that the 13 OTHER FOUNDATIONS, SUBSTRUCTURES AND
load from the structure can be transmitted to the FOUNDATIONS FOR SPECIAL STRUCTURES
subsurface with adequate factor of safety against shear
failure of subsurface and without causing such 13.1 Pier Foundations
settlement (differential or total), which may result in 13.1.1 Design Considerations
structural damage and/or functional distress under
13.1.1.1 General
permanent/transient loading. The pile shaft should have
adequate structural capacity to withstand all loads The design of concrete piers shall conform to the
A-1 DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF is almost the same as that for the smaller test plate. But in
ELASTICITY(Es) dense sandy soils the bearing capacity increases with the
size of the foundation. Thus tests with smaller size plate
The modulus of elasticity is a function of composition tend to give conservative values in dense sandy soils. It
may, therefore, be necessary to test with plates of at least
of the soil, its void ratio, stress history and loading three sizes and the bearing capacity results extrapolated
rate. In granular soils it is a function of the depth of for the size of the actual foundation (minimum dimensions
the strata, while in cohesive soil it is markedly in the case of rectangular footings).
influenced by the moisture content. Due to its great A-2.1.1 The average value of Es shall be based on a
sensitivity to sampling disturbance, accurate number of plate load tests carried out over the area, the
evaluation of the modulus in the laboratory is number and location of the tests, depending upon the
extremely difficult. For general cases, therefore, extent and importance of the structure.
determination of the modulus may be based on field
tests (see A-2). Where properly equipped laboratory A-2.1.2 Effect of Size
and sampling facility is available, Es may be determined In granular soils the value of Es corresponding to the
in the laboratory (see A-3). size of the raft shall be determined as follows:
A-2 FIELD DETERMINATION
B Bf + Bp
2
(1 − µ ) I
2 Where Bf, Bp represent sizes of foundation and plate
ES = qB and Ep is the modulus determined by the plate load
s
w
test.
where A-2.2 For stratified deposits or deposits with lenses of
q = intensity of contact pressure, different materials, results of plate load test will be
B = least lateral dimension of test plate, unreliable and static cone penetration tests may be
carried out to determine Es.
s = settlement,
µ = Poissons ratio, and A-2.2.1 Static cone penetration tests shall be carried
out in accordance with accepted standard [6-2(21)].
Iw = influence ratio
Several tests shall be carried out at regular depth
= 0.82 for a square plate, intervals up to a depth equal to the width of the raft
= 1.00 for a circular plate. and the results plotted to obtain an average value of
NOTE While this procedure may be adequate for light E s.
or less important structures under normal conditions,
relevant laboratory tests or field tests are essential in the A-2.2.2 The value of Es may be determined from the
case of unusual soil types and for all heavy and important following relationship:
structures. Plate load test, though useful in obtaining the
necessary information about the soil with particular Es = 2 Ckd
reference to design of foundation has some limitations. where
The test results reflect only the character of the soil located
within a depth of less than twice the width of the bearing Ckd = cone resistance, in kN/m2.
plate. Since the foundations are generally larger than the
test plates, the settlement and shear resistance will depend A-3 LABORATORY DETERMINATION OF ES
on the properties of a much thicker stratum. Moreover,
this method does not give the ultimate settlements A-3.1 The value of E s shall be determined by
particularly in case of cohesive soils. Thus the results of conducting triaxial test in the laboratory in accordance
the test are likely to be misleading, if the character of the with accepted standard [6-2(34)] on samples collected
soil changes at shallow depths, which is not uncommon. A
with least disturbances.
satisfactory load test should, therefore, include adequate
soil exploration {see good practice [6-2(2)]} with due A-3.2 In the first phase of the triaxial test, the specimen
attention being paid to any weaker stratum below the level
of the footing. Another limitation is the concerning of the
shall be allowed to consolidate fully under an all-round
effect of size of foundation. For clayey soils the bearing confining pressure equal to the vertical effective
capacity (from shear consideration) for a larger foundation overburden stress for the specimen in the field. In the
ANNEX B
(Clause 7.4.1.11)
DETERMINATION OF MODULUS OF SUBGRADE REACTION
E B4 Es 1 B-4 CALCULATIONS
k = 0.65 × 12 s ⋅ ⋅
EI 1 − ì B
( 2
) When the structure is rigid (see Annex C), the average
where modulus of subgrade reaction may also be determined
as follows:
E s = modulus of elasticity of soil (see Annex A),
E = Youngs modulus of foundation material, Average contact pressure
ks =
µ = Poissons ratio of soil, Average settlement of the raft
ANNEX C
(Clauses 7.4.4.1, 7.4.4.2 and B-4)
RIGIDITY OF SUPERSTRUCTURE AND FOUNDATION
k
I xy
ey′ = ey − ex
Iy Q 12ey y 12ex x
q= 1± 2 ± 2
where A b a
Ix, Iy= moment of inertia of the area of the raft
where
respectively about the x and y axes
through the centroid, a and b = dimensions of the raft in the x and
y directions, respectively.
I xy = ∫ xy ⋅ dA for the whole area about x and y NOTE If one or more of the values of (q) are negative
as calculated by the above formula, it indicates that the
axes through the centroid, and whole area of foundation is not subject to pressure and only
ex, ey = eccentricities in the x and y directions of a part of the area is in contact with the soil, and the above
formula will still hold good, provided the appropriate values
the load from the centroid.
of Ix, Iy, Ixy, ex and e y, are used with respect to the area in
For a rectangular raft, the equation simplifies to: contact with the soil instead of the whole area.
ANNEX E
(Clause 7.4.4.2)
CONTACT PRESSURE DISTRIBUTION AND MOMENTS BELOW FLEXIBLE FOUNDATION
Mi = moment under an interior columns loaded where Pe, pm, Me, l1, C are as shown in Fig. 9C.
at i.
E-1.5 If E-2.3(b) governs the moment under the exterior
E-1.3 The minimum contact pressure for the full width
columns, the contact pressures are determined as
of the strip at the middle of the adjacent spans can be
(see Fig. 9C):
determined as (see Fig. 9A and 9B):
4 Pe − pml1
l l pe = pc
pml = 2 Pi r − pi 4C + l1
l l l
l
E-2 BENDING MOMENT DIAGRAM
l
l l
pmr = 2Pi l − pi E-2.1 The bending moment under an interior column
lr
l l
r located at i (see Fig. 9A) can be determined as:
r
Z 3′
P r L
M r = − Z 4 − (1 − µ )
4 L r
L
r
Z 3′
P r L
M t = − µ Z 4 + (1 − µ )
4 L r
L
PL2 r
w= ⋅ Z3
4D l
where
P = column load,
r = distance of the point under investigation
from column load along radius, and
L = radius of effective stiffness
1
FIG . 10 F UNCTIONS FOR S HEAR, MOMENT AND
D 4 DEFLECTION
=
k
F-1.2 The radial and tangential moments can be
where converted to rectangular co-ordinates:
k = modulus of subgrade reaction for footing
of width B, M x = M r cos 2 φ + M t sin 2 φ
D = flexural rigidity of the foundation, M y = M r sin 2 φ + M t cos 2 φ
where
Et 2
P= , φ = angle with x-axis to the line joining origin
12 (1 − µ )
2
to the point under consideration.
T = raft thickness, F-1.3 The shear, Q per unit width of raft can be
E = modulus of elasticity of the foundation determined by:
material, P ' r
Q=− Z4
µ = Possions ratio of the foundation material, 4L L
and where
r r
Z3 , Z 4′ = function for shear (see Fig. 10).
L L
r F-1.4 When the edge of the raft is located within the
Z 3' , = functions of shear, moment and deflection
L radius of influence, the following corrections are to be
(see Fig. 10) applied. Calculate moments and shears perpendicular
r to the edge of the raft within the radius of influence,
Z4 assuming the raft to be infinitely large. Then apply
L
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 2 SOILS AND FOUNDATIONS 43
opposite and equal moments and shears on the edge F-1.5 Finally, all moments and shears calculated for
of the mat. The method for beams on elastic foundation each individual column and wall are superimposed to
may be used. obtain the total moment and shear values.
ANNEX G
(Clauses 8.3.3.1.1, 8.3.3.2 and 11.3.4)
LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF PILES STATIC ANALYSIS
G-1 PILES IN GRANULAR SOILS of construction. For bored piles in loose to dense sand with
φ varying between 30º and 40º, Ki values in the range of 1 to
The ultimate load capacity (Qu) of piles, in kN, in 2 may be used for driven piles and in case of bored piles, Ki
granular soils is given by the following formula: values in the range of 1 to 1.5 may be used.
4 δ, the angle of wall friction may be taken equal to the
n
Qu = Ap( ½ D γNγ + PDNq) + ∑ i =1
Ki PDi tan δiAsi
(1) friction angle of the soil around the pile shaft.
5 In working out pile capacity by static formula, the
The first term gives end bearing resistance and the maximum effective overburden at the pile tip should
second term gives skin friction resistance. correspond to the critical depth, which may be taken as 15
times the diameter of the pile shaft for φ < 30º and increasing
where to 20 times for φ > 40º.
A p = cross-sectional area of pile tip, in m2; 6 For piles passing through cohesive strata and terminating
in a granular stratum, a penetration of at least twice the
D = diameter of pile shaft, in m;
diameter of the pile shaft should be given into the granular
γ = effective unit weight of the soil at pile stratum.
tip, in kN/m3;
Nγ and Nq = bearing capacity factors depending G-2 PILES IN COHESIVE SOILS
upon the angle of internal friction, φ at The ultimate load capacity (Qu) of piles, in kN, in
pile tip;
cohesive soils is given by the following formula:
P D = effective overburden pressure at pile
tip, in kN/m2 (see Note 5); n
Qu = ApNccp + ∑ αiciAsi
(2)
n i =1
∑ = summation for layers 1 to n in which
i =1
pile is installed and which contribute The first term gives end bearing resistance and the
to positive skin friction; second term gives the skin friction resistance.
K i = coefficient of earth pressure
applicable for the ith layer (see Note 3); where
P Di = effective overburden pressure for the A p = cross-sectional area of pile tip, in m2;
ith layer, in kN/m2; N c = bearing capacity factor, may be taken as 9;
δi = angle of wall friction between pile and c p = average cohesion at pile tip, in kN/m2;
soil for the ith layer; and n =summation for layers 1 to n in which pile is
A si = surface area of pile shaft in the ith ∑ i =1 installed and which contribute to positive
layer, in m2. skin friction;
NOTES
αi = adhesion factor for the ith layer depending
1 Nγ factor can be taken for general shear failure according on the consistency of soil (see Note);
to good practice [6-2(11)].
c i = average cohesion for the ith layer, in kN/m2;
2 Nq factor will depend on the nature of soil, type of pile,
the L/B ratio and its method of construction. The values
and
applicable for driven and bored piles are given in Fig. 11A A si = surface area of pile shaft in the ith layer, in m2.
and Fig. 11B, respectively. NOTE The value of adhesion factor, α i
3 Ki, the earth pressure coefficient depends on the nature depends on the undrained shear strength of
of soil strata, type of pile, spacing of piles and its method the clay and may be obtained from Fig. 12.
G-3 USE OF STATIC CONE PENETRATION DATA G-3.2 Ultimate end bearing resistance (qu), in kN/m2,
G-3.1 When static cone penetration data are available may be obtained as:
for the entire depth, the following correlation may be qc0 + qc1
used as a guide for the determination of ultimate load + qc2
qu =
2
capacity of a pile. 2
NOTE Standard penetration test may not be practicable for N values greater than 200. In such cases, design may be done on
the basis of shear strength of rock.
J-1 ULTIMATE LOAD CAPACITY Aa = π/4 (Du2 D2) where Du is the under-
reamed bulb diameter, in m;
The ultimate load capacity of a pile can be calculated
from soil properties. The soil properties required are n = number of under-reamed bulbs;
strength parameters, cohesion, angle of internal friction γ = average unit weight of soil (submerged
and soil density. unit weight in strata below water table),
in kN/m3;
a) Clayey soils For clayey soils, the ultimate load
Nγ , Nq= bearing capacity factors, depending
carrying capacity of an under-reamed pile may
upon the angle of internal friction;
be worked out from the following expression:
d r = depth of the centre of different under-
Qu = Ap N cC p + Aa N cC a′ + C a′ As′ + αC a As reamed bulbs below ground level, in m;
df = total depth of pile below ground level,
where
in m;
Qu = ultimate bearing capacity of pile, in kN; K = earth pressure coefficient (usually
A p = cross-sectional area of the pile stem taken as 1.75 for sandy soils);
at the pile tip, in m2;
δ = angle of wall friction (may be taken as
N c = bearing capacity factor, usually taken equal to the angle of internal friction φ);
as 9;
d 1 = depth of the centre of the first under-
C p = cohesion of the soil around toe, in kN/m2; reamed bulb, in m; and
Aa = (π/4)(Du2 D2), where Du and D are the d n = depth of the centre of the last under-
under-reamed and stem diameter, reamed bulb, in m.
respectively, in m; NOTES
C a = average cohesion of the soil along the
1 For uplift bearing on pile tip, Ap will not occur.
pile stem, in kN/m2; 2 Nγ will be as specified in good practice [6-2(11)]
A s = surface area of the stem, in m2; and Nq will be taken from Fig. 11B.
A's = surface area of the cylinder c) Soil strata having both cohesion and
circumscribing the under-reamed friction In soil strata having both cohesion
bulbs, in m2; and friction or in layered strata having two
C'a = average cohesion of the soil around types of soil, the bearing capacity may be
the under-reamed bulbs; and estimated using both the formulae. However,
α = reduction factor (usually taken as 0.5 in such cases load test will be a better guide.
for clays). d) Compaction piles in sandy strata For
NOTES bored compaction piles in sandy strata, the
1 The above expression holds for the usual spacing formula in (b) shall be applied but with the
of under-reamed bulbs spaced at not more than one modified value of φ1 as given below:
and a half times their diameter.
2 If the pile is with one bulb only, the third term will φ1 = (φ + 40)/2
not occur. For calculating uplift load, the first term where
will not occur in the formula.
3 In case of expansive soil, top 2 m strata should be
φ = angle of internal friction of virgin soil.
neglected for computing skin friction. The values of N γ, N q and d are taken
b) Sandy soils corresponding to φ1. The value of the earth
pressure coefficient K will be 3.
1 1 e) Piles resting on rock For piles resting on
Qu = Ap D·γ· N ã + γd f N q + Aa Du n γN ã +
2 2 rock, the bearing component will be obtained
r =n 1 by multiplying the safe bearing capacity of
γN q ∑ d r + πD γK tan δ d1 + d f − d n
2 2 2
r =1 2
( ) rock with bearing area of the pile stem plus
the bearing provided by the bulb portion.
where
NOTE To obtain safe load in compression and
A p = π D2/4 , where D is stem diameter, in m; uplift from ultimate load capacity generally the
factors of safety will be 2.5 and 3, respectively.
(Clause 14.2)
SOIL IMPROVEMENT METHODS
Depth
Blasting Shock waves and Saturated, clean >30 m Explosives, Jetting or Can obtain Rapid, inexpensive, can Low
vibrations cause sands: partly backfill to drilling relative densities treat any size areas:
liquefaction and saturated sands plug drill machine to 70-80, may get variable properties, no
displacement with and silts (collapsi- holes, hole variable density improvement near
settlement to higher ble loess) after casings strength gain surface, dangerous
density flooding
Densification by Saturated or dry 20 m None Vibratory pile Can obtain Rapid, simple, good Moderate
Vibratory vibration; clean sand (Ineffective driver and 750 relative densities underwater, soft under
Probe liquefaction above mm dia open of up to 80. layers may damp
induced settlement 3-4m depth) steel pipe Ineffective in vibrations, difficult to
under overburden some sands penetrate, stiff over
layers, not good in
partly saturated soils
Vibro- Densification by Cohesionless soils 30 m Granular Vibroflot, Can obtain high Useful in saturated and Moderate
compaction vibration and with less than 20 backfill, water crane, pumps relative densities, partly saturated soils,
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
volume and by clayey soils, loess soil plus pile equipment uniformity compaction, easy to
vibration during cement check results, slow,
Cohesionless Soils
Method Principle Most Suitable Maximum Special Special Properties of Special Relative
Soil Conditions/ Effective Materials Equipment Treated Material Advantages and Cost
Types Treatment Required Required Limitation
Depth
Particulate Penetration Medium to coarse Unlimited Grout, water Mixers, tanks, Impervious, high Low cost grouts, Lowest of the
grouting grouting-fill soil sand and gravel pumps, hoses strength with high strength; grout systems
pores with soil, cement grout, limited to coarse-
cement, and/or clay eliminate grained soils, hard
liquefaction danger to evaluate
Chemical Solution of two or Medium silts and Unlimited Grout, water Mixers, tanks, Impervious, high Low viscosity High to very
grouting more chemicals coarser pumps, hoses strength with controllable gel high
react in soil pores to cement grout, time, good water
form a gel or a solid eliminate shut-off; high cost,
precipitate liquefaction danger hard to evaluate
Pressure Lime slurry injected Expansive clays Unlimited, Lime, water Slurry tanks, Lime in capsulated Only effective in Competitive
injected lime to shallow depths but 2-3 m surfactant agitators, zones formed by narrow range of with other
under high pressure usual pumps, hoses channels resulting soil conditions solutions to
Injection and Grouting
Method Principle Most Suitable Maximum Special Special Properties of Special Relative
Soil Conditions/ Effective Materials Equipment Treated Material Advantages and Cost
Types Treatment Required Required Limitation
Depth
Preloading Load is applied Normally Earth fill or Earth moving Reduced water Easy, theory well Low
with/without sufficiently in consolidated soft other material equipment, large content and void developed, (moderate, if
drain advance of clays, silts, for loading the water tanks or ratio, increased uniformity; vertical
construction so that organic deposits, site; sand or vacuum strength requires long time drains are
compression of soft completed gravel for drainage (vertical drains can required)
soils is completed sanitary landfills drainage systems be used to reduce
prior to blanket sometimes used; consolidation time)
development of the settlement
site markers, piezo-
meters
Surcharge fills Fill in excess of that Normally Earth fill or Earth moving Reduced water Faster than Moderate
required consolidated soft other material equipment; content, void ratio preloading without
Precompression
permanently is clays, silts, for loading the settlement and compressibility surcharge, theory
applied to achieve a organic deposits, site; sand or markers, increased strength well developed,
given amount of completed gravel for piezometers extra material
settlement in a sanitary landfills drainage handling; can use
shorter time; excess blanket vertical drains to
fill then removed reduce
consolidation time
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
Electro- d.c. current causes Normally Anodes d.c. power Reduced water No fill loading High
osmosis water flow from consolidated silts (usually rebars supply, wiring, content and required, can be
anode towards and silty clays or aluminium) metering compressibility, used in confined
cathode where it is cathodes (well systems increased strength, area, relatively
removed points or electrochemical fast; non-uniform
rebars) hardening properties between
electrodes; not
good in highly
conductive soils
ANNEX K (Continued)
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 2 SOILS AND FOUNDATIONS
Method Principle Most Suitable Maximum Special Special Properties of Special Relative
Soil Conditions/ Effective Materials Equipment Treated Material Advantages and Cost
Types Treatment Required Required Limitation
Depth
Remove and Foundation soil Inorganic soils 10 m Admixture Excavating, Increased strength Uniform, contro- High
replace excavated, stabilizers mixing and com- and stiffness, lled foundation soil
improved by drying paction equip- reduced when replaced;
or admixture, and ment, dewate- compressibility may require large
re-compacted ring system area dewatering
Structural fills Structural fill Use over soft Sand, gravel Mixing and Soft subgrade High strength, Low to high
distributes loads to clays or organic fly ash, compaction protected by good load
underlying soft soils soils, marsh bottom ash, equipment structural load- distribution to
Admixtures
Method Principle Most Suitable Maximum Special Special Properties of Special Relative
Soil Conditions/ Effective Materials Equipment Treated Material Advantages and Cost
Types Treatment Required Required Limitation
Depth
Vibro Hole jetted into soft, Soft clays and 20 m Gravel or Vibroflot, crane Increased bearing Faster than Moderate to
replacement fine-grained soil alluvial deposits crushed rock or vibrocat, capacity, reduced precompression, high
sand/stone and backfilled with backfill water settlement avoids dewatering
columns densely compacted required for
gravel or sand remove and
replace; limited
bearing capacity
Root piles, Inclusions used to All soils Reinforcing Drilling and Reinforced zone In-situ Moderate to
Reinforcement
soils nailing carry tension, shear, bars, cement grouting behaves as a reinforcement for high
compression grout equipment coherent mass soils that cant be
grouted or mixed
in-place with
admixtures
Strips and Horizontal tensile All soils Can Metal or Excavating, Self-supporting Economical, earth Low to
membranes strips, membranes construct plastic strips, earth handling, earth structures, structures coherent, moderate
buried in soil under earth geotextiles and compaction increased bearing can tolerate
embankments, structures to equipment capacity, reduced deformations;
gravel base courses heights of deformations increased
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
FOREWORD
3
1 SCOPE
5
2 TERMINOLOGY
5
3 SYMBOLS
7
4 MATERIALS
8
5 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES
19
6 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
20
7 DESIGN OF COMMON STEEL WIRE NAIL JOINTS
25
8 DESIGN OF NAIL LAMINATED TIMBER BEAMS
30
9 DESIGN OF BOLTED CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
32
10 DESIGN OF TIMBER CONNECTOR JOINTS
34
11 GLUED LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION
37
12 LAMINATED VENEER LUMBER
40
13 GLUED FINGER JOINTS
41
14 STRUCTURAL USE OF PLYWOOD
42
15 TRUSSED RAFTER
42
16 STRUCTURAL SANDWICHES
45
17 LAMELLA ROOFING
47
18 NAIL AND SCREW HOLDING POWER OF TIMBER
53
19 PROTECTION AGAINST TERMITE ATTACK IN BUILDINGS
53
LIST OF STANDARDS
56
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 6/Subsection 3A) deals with the structural design aspect of timber structures. In this Subsection,
the various species of Indian timber, classified into three groups depending on the structural properties influencing
the design most, are included.
This Section was first published in 1970 which was subsequently revised in 1983 and 2005. In the 1983 version
of the Code, timber was covered under Section 3 of Part 6 under the title Wood, which did not cover bamboo. In
the last version of 2005, the scope of Section 3 was enlarged as Section 3 Timber and Bamboo, which was
subdivided into Subsection 3A Timber and Subsection 3B Bamboo. This Subsection pertains to 3A Timber.
In the first revision of 1983, provisions of this Subsection were updated and design of nailed laminated timber
beams, were included and information on bolted construction joints was added. In the second revision of 2005, a
number of terminologies related to timber for structural purpose were added, strength data of additional species
of timber were included, requirements for structural timber and preferred cut sizes thereof were modified,
requirements for glued laminated construction and finger joints and also for laminated veneer lumber were
introduced. Brief details were included for structural sandwiches, glued laminated beams, lamella roofing, nail
and screw holding power of timber, structural use of plywood and trussed rafter. Further, guidelines for protection
against termite attack in buildings were also incorporated in the last revision of this Subsection. Also, keeping into
consideration the dwindling forest resources, brief details on use of plantation timbers including certain fast
growing species and suitable guidelines in terms of their seasoning, sawing, treatment, etc and also use of finger
jointing and glued laminated timber was introduced in the last revision so as to effect judicious use of timber.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 2005 version of this Code and feedback received as well as
formulation of new standards in the field and revision/ updation of some of the existing standards, a need to revise
this Subsection was felt. This revision has, therefore, been brought out to take care of these aspects.
The significant changes incorporated in this revision include the following:
a) Definitions of various terms have been modified as per the prevailing engineering practice and new
terminologies relating to timber for structural use have been added.
b) The permissible lateral strength (in double shear) of mild steel common wire for different new species of
timber have been added and also strength values for some of the existing species have been modified
based on latest research.
c) Guidance on increase in permissible lateral strength for mild steel nails clenched across the grains over
nails with points cut flush, has been included.
d) Design provisions for timber connector joints have been further updated.
e) Data on block shear test results of glued timber joints based on the indigenous work, has been included.
f) Data on strength properties of glued finger joints based on the indigenous work, has been included for
information and guidance in design.
g) A new figure has been added for possible orientation of planks in glue laminated beams (Glulam). Also,
design outline for horizontally laminated beams has been added.
h) Design provisions for trussed rafters have been further updated and also some design data on the lateral
load bearing strength of common wire nails in plywood-to-wood joints have been included for guidance
in design.
j) Design provisions for lamella roofing have been updated and detailed.
k) Composite nail and screw holding power of some Indian timbers has been provided for guidance in
design.
m) Reference to all the concerned Indian Standards have been updated.
2.1.27 Structure, Permanent Structural units in 2.2.5 Decayed Knot A knot softer than the
timber which are constructed for a long duration and surrounding wood and containing decay.
wherein adequate protection and design measures have 2.2.6 Diameter of Knot The maximum distance
initially been incorporated to render the structure between the two points farthest apart on the periphery
serviceable for the required life. of a round knot, on the face on which it becomes visible.
2.1.28 Structure, Temporary Structures which are In the case of a spike or a splay knot, the maximum
erected for a short period, such as hutments at project width of the knot visible on the face on which it appears
sites, for rehabilitation, temporary defence shall be taken as its diameter.
constructions, exhibition structures, etc. 2.2.7 Discolouration A change from the normal
2.1.29 Structural Element The component timber colour of the wood which does not impair the strength
members and joints which make up a resulting structural of the wood.
assembly. 2.2.8 Knot A branch base or limb embedded in the
2.1.30 Structural Grades Grades defining the tree or timber by natural growth.
maximum size of strength reducing natural 2.2.9 Knot Hole A hole left as a result of the removal
characteristics (knots, sloping grain, etc) deemed of a knot.
V = vertical end reaction or shear at a 4.3 The permissible lateral strength (in double shear)
section, N of mild steel common wire nail shall be as given in
W = total uniform load, N Table 2 and Table 3 for different species of timber.
x = distance from reaction to load, mm 4.4 Moisture Content in Timber
y = factor determining the value of form
The permissible moisture content of timber for various
factor K4
positions in buildings shall be as given in Table 4.
~
("'l
Species LocalIty Average Modulns of
from ....here Density at E1astldty
Permissible Stress for Grade I
N/roro 2
Preservative
Cbaracters
J)Refracteri-
ness to Air
r --'" "- ~
~
Tested 12 Percent (All Grades,.- -- ........ Seasoning
Botanical Name Trade Name Moisture and All Bending-Tension AJoog Shear all Compression Parallel Compression Uurabllity !J'~t-
Content Locations) Grain, Exlreme Fibre Locations to Grain Perpendicular to Grain Class ability
Kglm' x 10' SIreSS Grade
!
I
N/mm2 ~,....----A-..
.g
~
] .~
~
~
.~
~
.~
C; j j ] j ]
~
.~
~
-1l
J ~ ~
~
] ~ ~
o
;C
] ~ j ~
~ (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
I
~
GROUP A
Acacia caJectou
Acacia chandra
Albizia odorarissima
8ruguiera spp.
Kbair(KHA)
Red kutch
Kala siris (KSn
Bruguiera (BSV)
(Mangrove)
U.P.
M.P.
Chennai
Andmans
1009
1086
737
897
13.44
16.79
13.54
17.68
20.1
26.5
18.7
21.9
16.8
22.0
15.6
18.3
13.4
17.6
12.5
14.6
1.6
2.2
1.5
1.2
2.2
3.2
2.2
1.7
13.8
17.9
13.3
14.3
12.3
15.9
11.8
12.7
10.1
13.0
9.6
10.4
7.7
10.9
7.3
5.5
6.0
8.4
5.6
4.3
4.9
6.9
4.6
3.5
J
ill
e
A
A
B
~
Grewia tilii/olia Dhaman (DRA) Chcnnai 788 14.82 18.3 15.2 12.2 1.3 1.9 12.0 10.7 8.7 6.0 4.7 3.8 ill d B
Hopea utilis (8aJarw Karung Chenoai 987 16.91 25.1 20.9 16.7 1.5 2.2 16.4 14.6 11.9 9.3 7.3 5.9
carpus utilis)
s
~
Hopea giabra
Hopea parvij/ora
Manilota polyandra (Syn.
Hopea(HOP)
Hopea(HOP)
Ping (pIG)
Chenoai
Chennai
Assam
1081
923
903
14.79
13.03
13.20
21.3
18.6
19.1
17.8
15.5
15.9
14.2
12.4
12.7
1.5
1.3
1.3
2.2
1.8
1.8
14.5
13.2
1.2
12.9
11.8
10.4
10.6
9.6
8.5
9.9
9.2
5.7
7.7
7.3
4.4
6.3
6.0
3.6
1
J
ill
e
b
A
A
A
Cynomelra polyandra)
I Mesuaferrea
Mimusops littoralis
Pesciloneuron indicum
Pterocarpus Scantaii1UlS
Sageraea elliptica
Stereospermun celonoides
Mesua(MES)
BuUet-wood (BUL)
Ballagi (BAL)
Red sanders (MA)
Cbooi(COC)
Padri (pAD)
Assam
S.Andaman
Chennai
Chenoai
Andmans
Chenoai
965
1103
1139
1121
869
731
16.30
17.39
16.29
12.73
15.06
12.94
23.3
22.7
22.4
25.0
21.5
19.0
19.4
18.9
18.7
20.9
17.9
15.8
15.5
15.1
15.0
16.7
14.3
12.7
1.2
1.5
1.5
1.7
1.1
1.1
1.8
2.1
2.2
2.5
1.5
1.6
15.5
14.2
14.7
18.1
12.5
11.9
13.8
12.7
13.1
16.1
Il.l
10.6
11.3
10.4
10.7
13.2
9.1
8.7
5.9
11.3
8.7
H.8
5.3
4.0
4.6
8.8
6.8
9.2
4.1
3.1
3.7
7.2
5.5
7.5
3.4
2.6 ill
e
A
A
A
A
A
B
Vilex aitissima MiUa(MIL) Maharashtra 937 13.01 18.2 15.2 12.1 1.2 1.7 12.6 11.2 9.2 9.5 7.4 6.1 1 e A
GROUPB
Albizzia lebbeck Kokko (KOK) Andaman 642 1l.l7 13.4 11.2 9.0 1.1 1.5 9.0 8.0 6.5 4.4 3.4 2.8 e B
Anogeissus /atifolia Dhaura, Axle wood (AXL) U.P. 892 10.55 16.1 13.4 10.7 I.l 1.6 9.1 8.1 6.6 4.7 3.7 3.0 e A
(Baldi)
Artocarpus hirsulus Aini (Alli) Chennai 600 10.45 15.0 12.5 10.0 0.7 1.1 10.4 9.2 7.5 3.3 2.6 2.1 B
Acacia nilotica Babul (BAB) U.P. 797 12.9 10.3 1.4 2.1 8.9 7.9 6.4 5.2 4.0 3.3 b B
Acaciaferrugmea Safed khair Maharasbtra 993 12.28 23.0 19.2 15.3 1.7 2.4 13.9 12.4 10.1 9.9 7.7 6.3
Acrocarpus jraxmi/olius Mundani (MUN) Chennai 690 12.59 16.1 13.4 10.8 1.2 1.8 10.5 9.4 7.7 4.6 3.6 2.9 ill c B
Ag/aia odulis Aglaia (AGL) Assam 815 12.56 18.2 15.2 12.1 1.4 2.0 10.1 8.9 7.3 4.4 3.4 2.8 A
Anogeissus acuminota Yon Orissa 844 11.67 17.6 14.7 11.7 1.3 1.8 10.8 9.6 7.9 5.1 4.0 3.3 A
\C
...
co Table 1 - (Continued)
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Alalanlia monophyl/a Jungli-nimbu (JHI) Orissa 897 10.31 16.7 13.9 11.1 1.5 2.1 11.3 10.0 8.2 6.3 4.9 4.0
A/lingia excelsa Jutili (JUT) Assam 795 11.37 17.1 14.3 11.4 1.2 1.8 11.0 9.8 8.0 6.8 5.3 4.4 II e A
Amooraspp. Amari(AMA) W. Bengal 625 1.05 13.4 1.1 9.2 0.9 1.3 8.4 7.4 6.0 3.7 2.9 2.4 II d B
BuckJandia populnea (Syn Pipli (PIP) W.Bengal 672 9.89 12.8 10.7 8.6 1.1 1.5 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.5 2.7 2.2 ill e C
ExbuckJandia populnea)
Cassia fistula Amaltas (AMI) U.P. 865 11.80 19.2 16.0 12.8 1.4 2.0 12.3 10.9 8.9 7.2 5.6 4.6 A
Carallia lucida Maniawaga Assam 748 12.60 18.4 15.3 12.3 1.2 1.7 11.4 10.1 8.3 5.9 4.6 3.8
Conarium strictwn Dhup Chennai 655 11.86 13.3 11.1 8.9 0.9 1.2 8.1 7.2 5.9 2.8 2.2 1.8 ill C
Cassia sienea Kasod M.P. 820 10.50 15.4 12.8 10.9 1.0 1.4 10.8 9.6 7.9 5.5 4.3 3.5
Casuerina equisetifolia Casuarina (CAS) Orissa 769 11.44 14.6 12.2 9.8 1.3 1.8 8.2 7.3 5.9 4.0 3.1 2.5 ill e A
Celophyl/um temculosum Poon (POO) Maharashtra 657 9.77 13.4 11.2 9.0 0.8 1.1 8.6 7.7 6.3 2.8 2.2 1.8 II B
Chloroxylon swie/enia Satin wood (CFI) M.P. 865 11.69 18.2 15.1 12.1 1.4 2.0 10.9 9.7 8.0 6.3 4.9 4.0 ill A
Cul/enia resayoana (Syn C. Karani (KAP) Chennai 625 12.43 14.7 12.3 9.8 0.6 0.9 9.0 8.0 6.6 2.7 2.1 1.7 ill b C
execelsa)
Diploknema butyracea (Syn Hill mahua (HMA) S.Andarnan 780 10.64 15.3 12.8 10.2 1.0 1.5 9.9 8.8 7.2 6.6 5.2 4.2
Bassia butyrance)
Dyscxylum ma/ebaricum White ceda (WCE) Chennai 745 10.92 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.0 1.4 8.0 7.1 5.8 3.1 2.4 1.9 I B
Dipterocarpus grantiij/orus Gurjan (GUR) N.Andaman 758 11.71 12.5 10.5 8.4 0.8 1.1 7.9 7.1 5.8 2.7 2.1 1.7 I B
Dipterocarpus macrocarpus Hollong (HOL) Assam 726 13.34 14.5 12.0 9.6 0.8 1.1 8.8 7.9 6.4 3.5 2.7 2.2 ill a B
Dichopsis polyantha (Syn Tali (TAL) Assam 734 11.24 14.9 12.4 10.0 1.1 1.6 9.9 8.8 7.2 4.7 3.7 3.0 B
Palaquium polyanthum)
Dichopsis el/iptica (Syn Pali (PAL) Chennai 606 11.86 13.9 11.6 9.3 0.7 1.0 8.5 7.5 6.2 2.9 2.2 1.8 e B
Palaquium el/ipticum)
Diospyros micropylla Ebony(EBO) Maharashtra 776 12.15 14.2 11.9 9.5 0.9 1.3 8.3 7.3 6.0 3.3 2.6 2.1 A
Diospyros pyrrhocarpus EboDy(EBO) N.Andarnan 843 9.93 13.5 11.2 9.0 1.0 1.4 7.9 7.0 5.7 4.0 3.1 2.5 ill A
Dipterocarpus bourdilloni Gurjan (GUR) Kerala 699 12.71 13.6 11.3 9.0 0.7 1.0 7.8 6.9 5.7 2.5 1.9 1.6 B
Eucalyptus globulus Eucalyptus (Blue gum) Chennai 912 14.83 15.9 13.2 10.6 10.3 1.5 9.0 8.0 6.5 3.4 2.6 2.1 e A
(BLN)
Eucalyptus ougenioides Eucalyptus Chennai 853 11.47 16.4 13.6 10.9 1.2 1.7 11.3 10.0 8.2 7.6 5.9 4.8
Eugenia gardnery Jaman(JAM) Chennai 952 11.94 14.8 12.3 9.8 1.1 1.6 9.2 8.2 6.7 5.8 4.5 3.7 ill d
Eugenia jambolana Jaman(JAM) U.P. 778 10.94 16.0 13.3 10.6 1.2 1.7 9.7 8.6 7.1 4.7 3.7 3.0
~ Gluta travancorice G1uta(GLU) Chennai 726 12.73 13.5 11.3 9.0 0.9 1.3 9.0 8.0 6.6 4.0 3.1 2.5 I A
~ Grewia veslita Dhaman (ORA) W.Bengal 758 12.00 15.4 12.6 10.3 1.4 2.0 9.1 8.1 6.6 4.1 3.2 2.6 ill d B
0 Heritiera spp. Sundri (SUN) Assam 872 13.37 17.9 14.9 11.9 1.3 1.8 11.0 9.8 8.0 6.5 5.0 4.1 I A
~
Kingiodendron pinnatum (Syn Piney (PIN) Chennai 617 10.62 13.2 11.0 8.8 0.4 1.3 8.2 7.3 6.0 2.9 2.2 1.8 B
Hardwickia pinnala)
=
d
Kayea jIoribund
Lagerstromia laneeolata
Karal
Benteak(BEN)
Assam
Chennai
813
617
10.88
10.76
16.8
12.7
14.0
10.6
1.1
8.5
1.1
0.8
1.6
1.2
10.1
8.2
9.0
7.3
7.3
5.9
4.4
3.4
3.4
2.6
2.8
2.2
ill
I e B
~
Lagerstromia parviflora Lcndi(LEN) U.P. 734 10.97 14.3 11.9 9.5 1.1 1.6 8.7 7.7 6.3 3.7 2.9 2.4 I c A
Mimusops elengi Baku1(BKL) Chennai 885 12.39 17.3 14.4 11.5 1.3 1.8 11.0 9.8 8.0 5.6 4.3 3.6 I A
(Ol Machilus macrantha Machilus (MAC) W.Bengal 692 10.00 12.4 10.3 8.3 1.0 1.5 8.2 7.3 6.0 3.5 2.7 2.2 ill e B/C
("'l Miliuse tyomentosa (Syn Hoom(HOO) Maharasbtra 745 11.06 14.8 12.3 9.9 0.9 1.3 9.7 8.6 7.0 3.5 2.7 2.2 ill B
Saccopapetalum tomentosum)
~
0
Pommetia pinnata
Pterocarpus dolbergioides Padauk (PAD)
Andaman
N.Andarnan
788
721
12.90
11.24
14.3
17.1
11.9
14.3
9.5
11.4
1.1
1.0
1.6
1.5
9.1
12.0
8.0
10.7
6.6
8.7
4.0
5.5
3.1
4.3
2.5
3.5 I c B
"'l Mesua assamica Kayea Assam 842 12.83 17.4 14.5 11.6 1.0 1.4 11.7 10.4 8.5 5.3 4.1 3.3 II e
Pterocarpus marsupiwn Bijasal (BIJ) Maharasbtra 10.25 14.9 12.4 9.9 0.9 9.1 8.1 4.1 3.2 2.6 I e B
~
803 1.3 6.6
Fraxlnus macrantha Ash (ASH) U.P. 712 10.69 15.0 12.5 10.0 1.2 1.7 8.5 7.6 6.2 4.3 3.3 2.7 ill B
s: Fraxlnus execLsior
Planchonia valida (Syn P.
Ash (ASH)
Red bombwc (RBO)
Punjab
Andaman
719
913
10.41
13.10
14.8
16.1
12.3
13.4
9.8
10.7
1.2
1.0
1.7
1.4
8.1
10.8
7.2
9.6
5.8
7.9
3.3
4.9
2.6
3.8
2.1
3.1
ill
ill
B
...
~
~
andomanica)
~ Table 1 - (Continued)
~
~
rIl (I) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (l) (8) (9) (10) (II) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
~
n
Quercus lamellosa
Quercus griifithii
Oak
Oak
W.Bengal
Meghalaya
87
974
12.44
10.06
14.5
13.1
12.1
10.9
9.7
8.8
1.2
1.1
1.7
1.6
8.7
8.0
7.8
7.1
6.4
5.8
3.8
4.6
2.9
3.6
2.4
2.9
II A
A
Quercus incane Oak Punjab 1008 10.82 15.8 13.1 10.5 1.2 1.8 8.7 7.8 6.3 5.0 3.9 3.2 A
;::l Quercus lineate Oak W.Bengal 874 12.63 15.2 12.7 10.1 1.2 1.7 9.6 8.6 7.0 5.3 4.1 3.4 II A
~
t"'
Quercus semecarpifolin Punjab 834 11.58 15.8 13.1 10.5 1.3 1.8 8.3 7.3 6.0 3.8 2.9 2.4 A
Shorea robusta ") Sal (SAL) M.P. 805 12.67 16.9 14.0 11.2 0.9 1.3 10.6 9.4 7.7 4.6 3.5 2.9 e A
[;l Soymida fabrifuga Robini (ROR) Chennai 1116 12.22 21.5 17.9 14.4 1.6 2.3 15.0 13.3 10.9 12.9 10.0 8.2 A
...
rIl
~
Shorea lalura
Plerygota alata (Syn. Narike1 (NAR)
Mabarashtra
Assam
721
593
12.20
10.95
16.8
13.4
14.0
11.8
11.2
8.9
l.l
0.8
1.6
1.2
12.6
8.2
11.2
7.3
9.2
6.0
6.8
2.7
5.3
2.1
4.3
1.7 III C
Z Sterculia alata)
I Syzygium cumini Jaman(JAM) Assam 841 10.55 14.8 12.4 9.9 1.1 1.6 9.0 8.0 6.5 6.9 5.4 4.4 II e A
rIl Terminalia bellirica Babera (BAH) U.P. 729 10.19 13.6 11.3 9.0 1.0 1.4 8.4 .7.5 6.1 3.7 2.8 2.3 III b B
l"l Terminalia chebula Myrobalan (MYR) 918 12.37 17.1 14.2 11.4 1.1 1.6 1.2 10.4 8.5 6.7 5.2 4.3 II A
n
...00-3 Terminalia citrina
Terminalia manU Black---<:huglam (BCR)
Assam
S.Andaman
755
822
11.89
12.66
17.1
16.8
14.3
14.0
11.4
11.2
1.1
l.l
1.6
1.6
10.8
10.3
9.6
9.2
7.9
7.5
5.0
5.1
3.9
4.0
3.2
3.2 II a B
Z Tectona grandis Teak (TEA) U.P. 660 9.97 15.5 12.9 10.3 1.2 1.6 9.4 8.3 6.8 4.5 3.5 2.8 I e B
.... Terminalia paniculate Kindal (KIN) Mabarashtra 765 10.57 13.1 10.9 8.7 0.9 1.3 8.6 7.7 6.3 3.6 2.8 2.3 I c A
~
Alreminalia alala Laurel (LA U), Sain Chennai 906 10.54 15.1 12.5 10.0 1.1 1.6 9.4 8.4 6.8 6.2 4.8 4.0 I b A
Terminalia bilala White-chuglam (WCH) S.Andaman 690 12.38 15.5 13.0 10.4 0.9 1.2 9.8 8.7 7.1 3.6 2.8 2.3 III e B
Thespesin populnea Bheudi (BHE) Maharashtra 766 10.36 18.9 15.8 12.6 1.3 1.9 11.3 10.0 8.2 4.4 3.4 2.8 B
i:l Xylin xylocarpa Irul (IRU) Maharashtra 839 11.63 16.2 13.5 10.8 1.3 1.8 10.9 9.7 7.9 7.8 6.0 4.9 e A
~
Zanthoxylum budranga Mu1li1am(MUL) W.Bengal 587 10.65 14.7 12.2 9.8 0.9 1.2 9.5 8.4 6.9 3.4 2.6 2.1 B
Adina oligocephala Arunachal 715 11.17 15.2 12.7 10.1 1.2 1.7 10.3 9.2 7.5 4.0 3.1 2.4
=
>
Castanapsis indica
Eucalyptus citriodara
Chestnut
Eucalyptus
Mcghalaya
Nilgiri
688
831
12.54
12.12
14.8
17.3
12.3
14.4
9.9
11.5
1.0
1.4
1.4
2.0
9.8
11.0
8.7
9.8
7.1
8.0
3.4
4.2
2.7
3.3
2.2
2.7
B
~ Eucalyptus citriodata
Eucalytus tereticornis
Eucalyptus
Eucalyptus
Doty
Chennai
725
777
9.35
11.05
15.4
16.7
12.9
13.9
10.3
11.1
1.0
1.0
1.4
1.4
8.6
9.7
7.6
8.6
6.3
7.1
3.0
3.4
2.4
2.6
2.0
2.2 III e
0
9 GROUPC
.... Thizia procera White siris U.P. 643 9.02 13.4 11.2 8.9 1.0 1.4 8.5 7.6 6.2 4.3 3.3 2.7 B
> Anocarpus IaJwcha Lakooch (LAK) U.P. 647 6.14 10.0 8.3 6.7 1.0 1.4 5.3 4.7 3.8 2.8 2.2 1.8 B
0-3 Anocarpus hetarophyllus Jack, kathal (KAT) Chennai 617 9.46 13.9 11.6 9.2 1.0 1.5 9.3 8.3 6.8 4.5 3.5 2.9 d B
i (Syn. A. lntegrifolia)
Aphanami:.cis polystachya Pitraj (PIT) W. Bengal 668 8.98 12.3 10.2 8.2 1.1 1.5 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.0 3.1 2.6 B
i:l (Syn. Amoora rehituka)
Adina cordifolin ') Haldu (HAL) U.P. 663 8.54 13.3 11.1 8.9 1.0 1.4 8.7 7.7 6.3 4.4 3.4 2.8 III a B
Anthocephyalus chinetlSis Kadam(KAD) 485 1.88 9.7 8.1 5.4 0.7 1.0 5.9 5.3 4.3 1.9 1.5 1.2 III a
(Syn. A. Codamba)
Arlocarpus chap/asha Chaplasb (CHP) Assam 515 9.11 13.2 11.0 8.8 0.9 1.2 8.5 7.5 6.2 3.6 2.8 2.3 III d B
Acacia /eucophloea Hiwar(HIW) M.P. 737 7.85 13.4 11.2 9.0 1.0 1.5 7.5 6.7 5.4 4.5 3.5 2.8 A
Acacia melanoxylone Blackwood Chennai 630 9.45 13.0 10.8 8.7 1.1 1.5 7.6 6.8 5.5 3.2 2.5 2.0
Acacin mearnsii (Syn. A. Black wattle Chennai 669 6.10 10.4 8.6 6.9 0.8 1.2 6.0 5.4 4.4 2.3 1.8 1.5
""'lIissima)
Accerspp. Maple (MAP) Punjab, U.P. 551 7.35 9.9 8.2 6.5 0.9 1.3 5.5 4.9 4.0 2.1 1.7 1.4 III B
Aegla marmalos (Syn. lntsia Bae1(BEL) U.P. 890 8.81 13.5 11.2 9.0 1.4 2.0 8.8 7.8 6.4 6.8 5.3 4.3 III B
bijuga)
Aftelia bijuga Andaman 705 9.16 13.2 11.0 8.8 l.l 1.5 7.9 7.1 5.8 4.0 3.1 2.6
Ailanthus grandis Gokul(GOK) W. Bengal 404 7.94 8.3 6.9 5.5 0.6 0.8 5.3 4.7 3.9 1.1 0.9 0.7 III C
Anogeissus pendu/a Katdhai (KAH) U.P. 929 9.75 17.0 14.2 11.4 1.3 1.8 9.8 8.7 7.1 6.5 5.1 4.2 III A
Areca nut Kerala 833 9.48 15.2 12.7 10.2 1.2 1.6 10.8 9.6 7.8 7.3 5.7 4.7
Albizin Lucida Arunachal, 566 8.51 10.7 8.9 7.1 8.2 1.2 7.3 6.3 5.3 2.3 1.8 1.5
........ A.P .
~
Table 1 - (Continued)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
Azadirachla indica Neem(NEE) U.P. 836 8.52 14.6 12.1 9.7 1.3 1.8 10.0 8.9 7.3 5.0 3.9 3.2
Boswellia seriata Salai (SAA) Bihar 551 7.21 9.4 7.9 6.3 0.7 1.1 5.5 4.9 4.0 2.1 1.6 1.3 e C
Bridelia retusa Kassi(KAS) Bihar 584 9.42 11.6 9.7 7.7 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.1 4.0 3.1 2.6 e B
Betula lnoides Birch (BIR) W. Bengal 625 9.23 9.6 8.0 6.4 0.8 1.1 5.7 5.0 4.1 2.2 1.7 1.4 B
Bischofia javanica Uriam Bishopwood (URI) Chennai 769 8.84 9.6 8.2 6.5 0.8 1.1 5.9 5.3 4.3 3.6 2.8 2.3 III A
Burserra serrala (Syn. Muntenga (MUR) A.P. 756 1.17 15.5 13.3 10.5 0.9 1.3 10.1 9.0 7.4 5.3 4.1 3.4 n
Protium serratum)
Careya arbersa Kumbi(KUM) U.P. 889 8.37 13.1 10.9 8.8 1.0 1.5 7.7 6.8 5.6 5.3 4.1 3.4 I e A
Cedrus deodara Deodar (DEO) H.P. 557 9.48 10.2 8.7 7.2 0.7 1.0 7.8 6.9 5.7 2.7 2.1 1.7 I C
Cupressus tOMosa Cypress (CYP) U.P. 506 8.41 8.8 7.6 6.2 0.6 0.8 6.9 6.2 5.0 2.4 1.8 1.5 I e C
Castanopsis hystrix Indian chestnut (lCH) W. Bengal 624 9.85 10.6 8.8 7.0 0.8 1.2 6.4 5.7 4.6 2.7 2.1 1.7 n b B
Chukrasia vclutina (Syn. C. Chickrassy (CHI) W. Bengal 666 8.35 11.8 9.8 7.9 1.1 1.5 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.9 3.1 2.5 n B
Tabularis)
Calophyl/wn wightianum Poon(POO) Maharashtra 689 8.68 13.5 11.2 9.0 1.0 1.4 8.7 7.8 6.4 4.0 3.1 2.5 n B
Canarium strictum Wlrite dhup Assam 569 10.54 10.1 8.4 6.7 0.7 1.1 6.2 5.5 4.5 2.1 1.6 1.3 III C
Chlorophora exce/sa Cbennai 471 6.57 10.2 8.5 6.8 0.5 0.7 6.4 5.6 4.6 2.0 1.6 1.3
Cocosnucifera Coconut (CDC) Kerala 761 7.34 9.2 7.7 6.1 0.7 1.1 9.5 8.4 6.9 3.9 3.0 2.5
Dalbergia latifolia Rosewood (ROS) M.P. 884 8.39 12.9 10.8 8.6 1.1 1.6 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.2 3.3 2.7 I B
Dalbergia sissee Sisso (SIS) Punjab 799 7.14 12.8 10.7 8.5 1.3 1.8 8.2 7.3 6.0 4.2 3.3 2.7 I e B
Dillemia indica Dilicnia (DIL) W. Bengal 617 8.61 12.1 10.0 8.0 0.8 1.2 7.3 6.5 5.3 2.7 2.1 1.7 III a B
Dillenia pentagyne Dillenia (DIL) W.Bengal 622 7.56 11.8 9.9 7.9 0.9 1.3 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.5 2.7 2.2 III d B
Diospyres melanoxylon Ebony (EBO) Maharashtra 818 7.69 10.9 9.1 7.3 0.9 1.2 7.0 6.2 5.1 3.3 2.6 2.1 n A
Duabanga grandiflora (Syn. Lampati (LAP) W. Bengal 485 8.38 9.8 8.2 6.5 0.6 0.9 6.4 5.7 4.7 1.8 1.4 1.1 III C
D. Sonneratioides)
Elesocarpus tubuculatus Rudrak (RUD) Chennai 466 8.74 9.7 8.1 6.4 0.7 1.0 6.3 5.6 4.6 2.0 1.5 1.3 C
Eucalyptus hybrid Mysore gum (MGU) Cbennai 753 6.00 10.2 8.5 6.8 0.9 1.2 7.3 6.5 5.3 4.0 3.1 2.5 III e
Calitres rhomboidea (Syn. Chennai (fl] 6.48 9.2 7.7 6.1 0.7 1.0 6.9 6.1 5.0 4.0 3.1 2.6
Frenela rhomboidea)
Garuga pinnata Garuga (GAU) U.P. 571 7.58 11.7 9.7 7.8 1.0 1.5 7.2 6.4 5.3 3.4 2.6 2.1 e B
Gmelme aroorea Garnari (GAM) U.P. 501 7.ffl. 9.8 8.2 6.6 0.8 1.2 5.7 5.0 4.1 4.2 3.2 2.7 e B
Gardonia latifolia Gardenia (GAl) M.P. 705 7.13 14.1 11.7 9.4 1.2 1.7 8.4 7.4 6.1 4.6 3.6 3.0
Z Hardwickis binata Anjan(ANJ) M.P. 852 6.64 14.1 11.8 9.4 1.3 1.8 9.0 8.0 6.5 7.4 5.6 4.7 I e
> Heloptelea integrifolia Kanju (KAN) U.P. 592 7.46 12.0 10.0 8.0 0.9 1.3 6.7 6.0 4.9 2.8 2.2 1.8 III b B
~ Heterrophragma rexburghii Pa1ang (pAL) M.P. 616 8.69 12.3 10.2 8.2 0.7 1.0 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.4 2.6 2.1
0
~
Juglans spp. Walnut(WAL) U.P. 565 9.00 9.9 8.3 6.6 0.9 1.2 5.8 5.2 4.2 2.2 1.7 1.4 III B
t"'
Lagerstrosmia speciosa (Syn. Jaru1 (JAAR) N.Andarnan 622 8.53 12.1 10.1 8.1 0.8 1.8 7.7 6.8 5.6 3.4 2.6 2.2 n e B
=
~
L j/esregihaJ)
!Annea grandis (Syn.
Lcoromandelica)
Jhingan (lHI) U.P. 557 5.63 8.5 7.1 5.7 0.6 0.9 4.9 4.4 3.6 2.2 1.7 1.4 III e B
1:1 Leucanena leucocephala Subabul (SUB) U.P. 673 6.32 11.6 9.7 7.8 1.0 1.5 7.4 6.6 5.4 3.8 3.0 2.4
~
("'l
Lophopatalum wighlianum
Madhuca longifolia
Banati (BAN)
Mahua(MAU)
Chennai
M.P.
460
936
7.33
8.82
8.5
13.0
7.5
10.8
5.6
8.7
0.5
1.0
0.8
1.4
5.3
7.5
4.7
6.7
3.8
5.5
1.8
6.3
1.4
4.9
1.1
4.0
III
I e
C
A
varlatifolia (Syn. Bassia
0
1:1 latifolia)
to:! Mangifera indica Mango, Aarn (MAN) Orissa 661 9.12 12.2 10.2 8.2 1.0 1.4 7.3 6.5 5.3 3.1 2.4 2.0 III a C
0 Machilus macrantha Machilus (MAC) Cbennai 521 7.63 10.2 8.5 6.8 0.7 1.0 6.3 5.6 4.6 2.4 1.9 1.5 III e B
""l
Mallotus philippinensis Raini (RAl) U.P. 662 7.51 10.8 9.0 7.2 1.0 1.4 6.0 5.4 4.4 2.9 2.3 1.8 III B
~ Manglietia insignia
Michelia montana Champ (CHM)
Assam
W. Bengal
449
512
10.37
8.25
10.9
10.9
9.1
9.1
7.3
7.3
0.7
0.7
1.0
1.0
8.0
6.6
7.1
5.9
5.8
4.8
3.4
2.8
2.6
2.2
2.1
1.8 I B
~ Mitragyna pervifolia (Syn. Kaim(KAI) U.P. 651 7.82 12.6 10.5 8.4 1.0 1.5 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.7 2.9 2.4 III b B
....~ Stephagyne pervifolia)
'"
~ Table 1 - (Continued)
~
~
r;" (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
~
("'l
Michelia e:ccelsa
Miliusa velutnia
Champ (CHM)
Domsal (OOM)
W.Bengai
V.P.
513
747
10.12
7.92
9.8
11.7
8.2
9.7
6.5
7.8
0.7
1.1
1.0
1.6
6.1
7.0
5.5
6.3
4.5
5.1
1.6
3.7
1.3
2.9
1.0
2.4
II
ill
e B
Morusalba Mulberry (MUL) V.P. 743 8.20 1l.8 9.8 7.9 1.0 1.4 6.6 5.8 4.8 3.8 2.9 2.4 II B
;::l MaTUS se"ata Mulberry (MUL) H.P. 657 7.03 10.2 8.5 6.8 0.9 1.3 5.6 5.0 4.1 2.6 2.0 1.6 ill B
~
t"'
Morus /aevigala Bola (BOL) Andaman 588 8.61 12.3 10.2 8.2 1.0 1.5 7.2 6.4 5.3 3.3 2.5 2.1 B
Ougeinia eejeinensis (Syn. O. Sandan (SAD) M.P. 784 8.54 13.3 11.1 8.9 1.2 1.7 8.5 7.5 6.2 5.1 3.9 3.2 B
~...
delbergioides)
Phoebe hoinesiana Bonsum (BOH) Assam 566 9.50 13.2 1l.0 8.8 0.8 1.2 8.8 7.8 6.4 2.8 2.1 1.8 II c B
Pinus ro:cburghii (Syn. P. Cbir(CHR) V.P. 525 9.82 8.5 7.3 6.0 0.6 0.9 6.0 5.3 4.4 2.0 1.5 1.3 ill b C
~ Ion8ifolia)
I Pinus wallichiana Kail (!CAL) 515 6.80 6.6 5.6 5.0 0.6 0.8 5.2 4.6 3.8 1.7 1.3 1.0 II c C
Phoebe goalperansis Bonsum (BOH) Assam 511 7.65 9.7 8.1 6.5 0.7 1.0 6.6 5.9 4.8 2.2 1.7 1.4 II c B
~ Parretiopsis jacquementiena Rohu Parrotia H.P. 761 5.77 12.5 10.4 8.3 1.2 1.7 6.8 6.1 5.0 4.0 3.1 2.5 ill B
...
("'l
Pinus usia (Syn. Pinus
insuloris)
Khasi pine (KPI) NorthEast 513 7.38 8.9 7.4 5.9 0.6 0.7 5.8 5.2 4.3 1.5 1.2 1.0 ill a B
0
Z Pistacia integerrima Kikar singhi J&K 881 7.32 13.1 10.9 8.7 1.2 1.7 8.0 7.1 5.8 4.3 3.4 2.8
IN
Podocarpus nerrifolius Thitmin (fHT) S.Andaman 533 9.41 12.5 10.4 8.3 6.1 0.9 8.0 7.1 5.8 2.6 2.0 1.6 II
~
Polyalthia /ragrOJlCes Debdaru (DEB) (Nedunar) Maharasbtra 752 9.15 11.9 9.9 7.9 0.8 1.2 6.7 6.0 4.9 3.0 2.3 1.9 ill B
Polyalthia coreoides M.P. 700 9.29 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.0 1.4 7.1 6.3 5.2 3.2 2.5 2.0
Prunus napeulen.ds Arupati W.Bcngai 548 9.41 104.4 8.7 69.6 0.9 1.2 6.7 6.0 4.9 2.4 1.9 1.6
~ Pteresperrnum acerifolium Hattipaila (HAT) W.Bengai 607 9.55 13.5 11.3 9.0 0.9 1.2 8.7 7.7 6.3 3.2 2.5 2.0 ill c B
~
Quercus spp. Oak NorthEast 657 11.65 11.4 9.5 7.6 0.8 1.2 6.7 5.9 4.8 2.0 1.6 1.3 II c B
Raderomachera :cylocarpe Yedankonnai Chennai 696 8.52 13.2 11.0 8.8 1.1 1.5 9.0 8.0 6.6 4.3 3.3 2.7 II a
(Syn. Sterosperam
==
> :cylocarpum)
~ Schleichera oleosa (Syn. S.
trijuga)
Kusum(KUS) Bihar 1032 12.12 15.5 13.0 10.4 1.5 2.1 10.9 9.7 7.9 6.1 4.2 3.9 II a A
0
9 Schima wallichii
Shotea assamica
Chilauoi (CHL)
Makai(MAK)
W.Bengai
Assam
693
548
9.57
9.27
11.1
11.1
9.3
9.2
7.4
7.4
0.9
0.9
1.3
1.3
6.6
7.1
5.9
6.3
4.8
5.2
2.3
2.9
1.8
2.2
1.4
1.8
ill
ill
d
c
B
B
IN
>
... Sonneralia apetale
Stereospermum suaveolan.s
Keota (KEO)
Padri (PAD)
W.Bengai
V.P.
617
721
8.63
8.86
12.8
13.3
10.7
11.1
8.5
8.9
0.9
0.9
1.3
1.3
7.4
7.3
6.6
7.0
5.4
5.7
4.8
3.5
3.7
2.7
3.0
2.2
II
ill
B
B
~ Tactona grandis
Terminalia arjuna
Teak(fEA)
Arjun (ARl)
M.P.
Bihar
617
794
8.49
7.71
12.8
12.2
10.7
10.2
8.5
8.2
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.6
7.9
7.4
7.0
6.6
5.7
5.4
4.0
5.2
3.1
4.1
2.6
3.3
I
II
e
b
B
B
~ Terminalia myriocarpa Hallock (HOC) Assam 615 9.62 11.9 9.9 8.0 0.9 1.2 7.6 6.7 5.5 2.9 2.2 1.8 ill a B
Terminalia procera White bombwae (WBO) N.Andaman 626 8.99 1l.8 9.8 7.9 0.9 1.3 7.2 6.4 5.3 3.0 2.3 1.9 ill b B
Ta:cus buccata Yew (YEW) W.Bengai 705 7.79 14.3 11.9 9.5 1.2 1.7 8.7 7.8 6.4 4.7 3.7 3.0
Tamarindus indica Imli (IML) Chennai 913 5.63 11.4 9.5 7.6 1.2 1.7 7.0 6.2 5.1 5.3 4.1 3.4 B
Toena ciliata Toon(TOO) V.P. 487 6.40 8.7 7.3 5.8 0.7 1.0 5.4 4.8 3.9 2.4 1.8 1.5 II c B
Vateria indica YeUapine (VEL) Chennai 535 10.95 11.5 9.6 7.6 0.7 1.1 7.5 6.7 5.5 2.3 1.8 1.4 ill e C
AecuJas indica Horse chestnut (HCH) V.P. 484 7.55 8.5 7.1 5.7 0.8 1.1 4.8 4.2 3.5 1.8 1.4 1.1 B
Borassus f/abe/sfer Tad (pabnyra) (TAD) A.P. 838 8.79 10.5 8.8 7.0 0.7 1.0 10.0 8.8 7.2 4.7 3.6 2.7
Eucalyptus cemaldulensis Eucalyptus Katnataka 804 9.53 12.8 10.6 8.5 0.8 1.1 7.2 6.4 5.2 3.5 2.7 2.2 A
Eucalyptus camaldu/enis Eucalyptus V.P. 781 7.03 12.4 10.4 8.3 1.1 1.6 7.9 7.0 5.7 3.5 2.8 2.3 A
Eucalyptus pilularia Eucalyptus T.N. 713 9.22 14.8 12.3 11.1 1.0 1.4 8.5 7.6 6.2 2.8 2.2 1.8 A
Eucalyptus propingus Eucalyptus T.N. 584 7.93 12.8 10.7 8.5 0.8 1.2 8.0 5.4 4.4 2.5 1.9 1.6 A
Eucalyptus saligna Eucalyptus V.P. 819 8.24 11.5 9.6 7.6 1.5 2.1 8.2 7.3 6.0 6.2 4.8 4.0 A
-
IN
Table 1 — (Concluded)
Table 2 Permissible Lateral Strengths (in Double Shear) of Nails 3.55 mm Dia (9 SWG), 80 mm Long
(Clause 4.3)
4.6.2 The prohibited defects given in 4.6.2.1 and NOTE Wanes are permitted provided they are not combined
permissible defects given in 4.6.2.2 shall apply to with knots and the reduction in strength on account of the
wanes is not more than the reduction with maximum allowable
structural timber.
knots.
4.6.2.1 Prohibited defects
4.6.3 Location of Defects
Loose grains, splits, compression wood in coniferous
species, heartwood rot, sap rot, crookedness, worm The influence of defects in timber is different for
holes made by powder post beetles and pitch pockets different locations in the structural element. Therefore,
shall not be permitted in all the three grades. these should be placed during construction in such a
4.6.2.2 Permissible Defects way so that they do not have any adverse effect on the
Defects to the extent specified in Table 8 shall be members, in accordance with the accepted standard
permissible. [6-3A(5)].
fcp × fcn
f cθ =
fcp sin θ + f cn cos2 θ
2
FIG . 3 PURLIN
formula: 1
S
fc = qf cp 1 −
3 K d 2 + d 2
1 S 4 9 1 2
fc = f cp 1 − 6.6.2.4 For long columns, the permissible compressive
3 K8 d
stress shall be calculated by using the following
6.6.1.3 For long columns, the permissible compressive formula:
stress shall be calculated by using the following formula:
0.329 UE
fc =
0.329E 2
fc = 2
S
(S d )
d +d 2
1
2
2
6.6.1.4 In case of solid columns of timber, S/d ratio
shall not exceed 50. 6.6.2.5 The following values of U and q, depending
upon plank thickness (t) in 6.6.2.3 and 6.6.2.4, shall be
6.6.1.5 The permissible load on a column of circular used for width of plank not greater than 5 times the
cross section shall not exceed that permitted for a square plank thickness:
column of an equivalent cross sectional area, where
side of square is equal to 0.886 times the diameter t U q
6.6.1.6 For determining S/d ratio of a tapered column, mm
such as for wooden poles, its least dimension shall be 25 0.80 1.00
taken as the sum of the corresponding least dimensions 50 0.60 1.00
at the small end of the column and one-third of the
difference between this least dimension at the small end 6.6.3 Spaced Columns
and the corresponding least dimension at the large end,
6.6.3.1 The formulae for solid columns as specified
but in no case shall the least dimension for the column
in 6.6.1 are applicable to spaced columns with a
be taken as more than one and a half times the least
restraint factor of 2.5 or 3, depending upon distances
dimension at the small end. The induced stress at the
of end connectors in the column.
small end of the tapered column shall not exceed the
permissible compressive stress in the direction of grain. NOTE A restrained factor of 2.5 for location of centroid
group of fasteners at S/20 from end and 3 for location at S/10
6.6.2 Built-Up Columns to S/20 from end shall be taken.
*5n may be increased to 10n, if the designed width of chord member permits. Otherwise the end of the loaded web
member may be extended by 5n minimum.
FIG. 5 S PACING OF NAILS WHERE MEMBERS ARE AT RIGHT ANGLES TO ONE ANOTHER
FIG . 6 SPACING OF NAILS AT NODE JOINTS WHERE MEMBERS ARE INCLINED TO ONE ANOTHER
7.7.1 Where a number of nails are used in a joint, the The fabrication of nail-jointed timber construction shall
allowable load in lateral resistance shall be the sum of be done in accordance with good practice [6-3A(7)].
the allowable loads for the individual nails, provided 8 DESIGN OF NAIL LAMINATED TIMBER
that the centroid of the group of these nails lies on the BEAMS
axis of the member and the spacings conform to 7.5.
Where a large number of nails are to be provided at a 8.1 Method of Arrangement
joint, they should be so arranged that there are more of
8.1.1 The beam shall be made up of 20 mm to 30 mm
rows rather than more number of nails in a row.
thick planks placed vertically with joints staggered in
7.7.2 Nails shall, as far as practicable, be arranged so the adjoining planks with a minimum distance of
that the line of force in a member passes through the 300 mm. The planks are laminated with the help of wire
centroid of the group of nails. Where this is not nails at regular intervals to take up horizontal shear
practicable, allowance shall be made for any developed in the beam besides keeping the planks in
eccentricity in computing the maximum load on the position (see Fig. 7).
fixing nails as well as the loads and bending moment
8.1.2 The advantage in laminations lies in dimensional
in the member.
stability, possible dispersal of defects and better
7.7.3 Adjacent nails shall preferably be driven from structural performance.
opposite faces, that is, the nails are driven alternatively
from either face of joint. 8.2 Sizes of Planks and Beams
7.7.4 For a rigid joint, a minimum of 2 nails for nodal 8.2.1 The plank thickness for fabrication of nailed
joints and 4 nails for lengthening joint shall be driven. laminated beams recommended are 20, 25 and 30 mm.
7.7.5 Two nails in a horizontal row are better than using 8.2.2 In case of nailed laminated timber beam the
the same number of nails in a vertical row. maximum depth and length of planks shall be limited
to 250 mm and 2 000 mm, respectively.
7.7.6 The permissible lateral strength (in double shear)
of mild steel common wire for different species of 8.2.3 In order to obtain the overall width of the beam,
timber shall be as per 4.3. the number and thickness of planks to form vertical
nailed laminated beams, and also type and size of wire
7.8 Special Consideration in Nail-Jointed Truss nail shall be as mentioned in Table 15. The protruding
Construction portion of the nail shall be cut off or clenched across
the grains.
7.8.1 The initial upward camber provided at the centre
of the lower chord of nail-jointed timber trusses shall 8.3 Design Considerations
be not less than 1/200 of the effective span for timber
structures using seasoned wood and 1/100 for 8.3.1 Nail laminated beams shall be designed in
unseasoned or partially seasoned wood. accordance with 6 and provisions in the good practice
[6-3A(8)].
7.8.2 The total combined thickness of the gusset or
splice plates on either side of the joint in a mono-chord 8.3.1.1 The deflection in the case of nailed laminated
timber beams, joists, purlins, battens and other flexural
type construction shall not be less than one and a half
members supporting brittle materials like gypsum,
times the thickness of the main members subject to a
ceiling slates, tiles and asbestos sheets shall not exceed
minimum thickness of 25 mm of individual gusset plate.
1/480 of the span. The deflection in case of other
NOTES flexural members shall not exceed 1/360 of the span in
1 The allowable load or lateral strength values of nails shall be the case of beams and joists, and 1/225 of the freely
those as given in Table 2 and Table 3.
hanging length in case of cantilevers.
30 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
All dimensions in millimetres.
F IG. 7 PLAN AND ELEVATION OF A TYPICAL NAILED L AMINATED TIMBER BEAM
8.3.2 Permissible lateral strength of diamond pointed of the beam, with a minimum of 4 nails in a row at a
mild steel wire nails shall be as given in Table 2 and standard spacing as shown in Fig. 8.
Table 3 for Indian species of timber, which shall apply
8.3.3.3 If the depth of the beam is more, then the
to nails that have their points cut flush with the faces.
vertical intermediate spacing of nails may be increased
For nails clenched across the grains the strength may
proportionately.
be increased by 20 percent over the values for nails
with points cut flush. 8.3.3.4 If the nails required at a point are more than
that can be accommodated in a row, then these shall be
Table 15 Number and Size of Planks and Nails for provided lengthwise of the beam within the distance
Nailed Laminated Beams equal to the depth of the beam at standard lengthwise
(Clause 8.2.3) spacing.
8.3.3.5 For nailed laminated beam minimum depth of
Sl Overall No. of Thickness of Type and Size
No. Width of Planks Each Plank of Nail to be 100 mm for 3.55 mm and 4 mm diameter nails, and
Beam Used 125 mm for 5 mm diameter nails shall be provided.
mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
i) 50 2 25 80 long 3.55 dia
ii) 60 3 20 - do -
iii) 70 3 (2 x 25) - do -
(1 x 20)
iv) 80 4 20 100 long 4.0 dia
v) 90 3 30 - do -
vi) 100 4 25 125 long 5.0 dia
vii) 110 4 (3 x 30) - do -
(1 x 20)
viii) 120 4 30 - do -
ix) 150 5 30 150 long 5.0 dia
8A For 3.55 mm and 4 mm Diameter Nails
t'
No. and No. and Size of Side Member Central Member Load Direction End Inter- Load Per
Diameter of Bolt Used in a with respect to Distance mediate Pair of
Ring Used in Joint Grains of Wood Distance Connector
a Joint
No. Size No. Size Thickness Width Thickness Width
mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm kgf
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
2 63 1 12×125 31 92 38 92 Parallel 63 - 3 930
2 63 1 12×125 31 92 38 92 Parallel 75 - 4 185
2 63 1 12×150 38 92 63 92 Parallel 75 - 4 010
2 63 1 12×150 38 117 63 117 Parallel 75 - 4 450
2 63 1 12×125 31 138 38 92 Perpendicular 69 - 2 520
2 63 1 12×125 38 138 38 92 Perpendicular 69 - 3 515
2 100 1 19×175 38 138 66 138 Parallel 100 - 7 075
2 100 1 19×175 38 138 66 138 Parallel 125 - 7 370
2 100 1 19×175 41 138 75 138 Parallel 100 - 7 220
2 100 1 19×175 41 138 75 138 Parallel 125 - 7 645
4 100 2 19×200 38 138 66 138 Parallel 100 150 5 655
4 100 2 19×200 41 138 75 138 Parallel 100 150 5 925
4 100 2 19×200 41 138 75 138 Parallel 125 200 7 135
10.2.4.1 Rigid specifications regarding use of calculated load per dowel to 60 percent.
particular planks for fabrication of wooden disc-dowels,
10.2.4.2 Analysis of variance for safe load in case of
and the specific alignment of grains to be in line with
dowel joints made with MS bolt, timber bolt, bamboo
grains of members forming the joint, can be relaxed.
pin as joiners showed no significant difference. Thus
Application of appropriate factors in design of such
the concept of all-timber construction hold good for
joints whatever be the angle of load and members etc,
chemical industries where corrosion due to acid fumes
would eliminate risks involved by providing 60 percent
is a recurring problem.
more number of dowels at a joint. Thus, decrease the
πd 2 t
×S = d × ×c
4 2
where
d = mid diameter of the dowel,
t = thickness of dowel,
s = safe working stress in shear along grain, and
c = safe compressive stress along grain.
NOTE Symbols are exclusive to this figure.
11 GLUED LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION sized planks by the process of glulam. The term glued
laminated timber construction as applied to structural
11.1 Developments in the field of synthetic adhesive
members refers to various laminations glued together,
have brought gluing techniques within the range of
either in straight or curved form, having grain of all
engineering practice. Timber members of larger cross-
laminations essentially parallel to the length of the
sections and long lengths can be fabricated from small
member.
In absence of a systematic flow-line in a factory, 11.1.3 The information with regard to block shear test
provisions of intermediate technology shall be created results on glued timber joints is given in Table 18.
NOTE The information given in the above table is based on the block shear test results on glued timber joints conducted on the basis
of BS 4169:1970 Specification for manufacture of glued-laminated timber structural members (since revised and subsequently
superseded by BS EN 392:1995, BS EN 391:1995, BS EN 386:1995), and the failures observed with regard to glue line and the wood.
Ultimate shear stresses for 29 species were studied keeping design glue shear strength at least one-third of ultimate. Glue mixing,
spreading, pressing and curing was done as per the instructions of adhesive manufacturers under improvised techniques locally developed.
Sustainable period before delamination of glue bond (urea formaldehyde) in weathering tests was recorded for over a year. Limited
number of species survived with most of them failed within a period of six months
.
Table 19 Laminated Timber Beams Structural Bending Test Under Third Point Loading
(Clause 11.2.5)
Species Pinus wallichiana (Kail),
Effective span 2.3 m, Cross section: 100 × 240 mm, and
Adhesive Urea formaldehyde
Sl Strength Functions Nail Laminated Vertical Glue Laminated Solid (Control)
No. Laminates with Four Full Specimen
Size Planks Using 8 SWG, Vertical Laminates Horizontal Laminates
100 mm Long Nails Four Planks, Each Eight Planks, Each
25 mm Thick 30 mm Thick
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Sl Properties Requirement
No.
(1) (2) (3)
(Clause 13.1.3.1)
Maximum Fibre MOE Maximum Tensile MOE Edge-wise Flat-wise Edge-wise Flat-wise
Compre- Stress at (×103 Tensile Stress at (×103
ssive EL N/mm2) Stress EL N/mm2 ) Fibre MOR MOE Fibre MOR MOE Fibre MOR MOE Fibre MOR MOE
Stress (N/mm2 ) (N/mm2 ) (N/mm2 ) Stress at (N/mm2) (×103 Stress at (N/mm2) (×103 Stress at (N/mm2) (×103 Stress at (N/mm2) (×103
(N/mm ) 2
EL N/mm )2
EL N/mm )2
EL N/mm )2
EL N/mm2 )
(N/ mm2) (N/mm2 ) (N/mm2) (N/mm2 )
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20)
i) UL1 31.196 16.971 10.202 30.019 23.446 10.202 20.993 29.136 6.769 39.142 46.401 8.142 25.114 28.743 8.044 32.471 38.553 9.516
ii) UL2 37.474 17.462 11.282 30.607 23.642 10.301 20.209 31.686 6.671 35.120 46.205 7.161 23.446 42.085 7.652 41.202 51.306 9.712
iii) UL3 35.905 19.914 10.595 32.667 23.838 10.006 22.171 35.022 6.867 38.750 47.480 8.437 25.898 29.234 7.848 29.626 38.357 8.633
iv) PL1 28.743 21.484 9.908 20.895 17.560 10.497 20.699 23.446 8.142 22.955 27.076 9.123 18.443 21.876 7.848 25.506 27.174 8.927
v) PL2 28.743 19.424 10.006 18.149 17.069 9.614 16.285 18.639 5.984 24.133 26.095 8.731 16.579 17.854 7.259 26.389 28.547 8.535
vi) PL3 27.860 20.111 9.908 24.721 19.326 10.497 15.009 17.069 7.652 21.680 26.193 8.829 10.301 11.183 6.867 26.487 30.313 11.183
vii) C 35.512 27.959 10.301 31.490 23.152 10.104 25.506 45.518 7.063 36.788 57.192 7.063 31.883 44.537 7.946 38.161 52.582 9.221
DOUBLE TAPERED
HAUNCHED
and thickness of gusset plates for transfer of stress from 15.4 Plywood
one member to the other.
Boiling water proof (BWP) grade preservative treated
Trussed rafter shall be designed to sustain the dead and plywood shall be used in accordance with accepted
imposed loads specified in Part 6 Structural Design, standards [6-3A(13)]. Introduction of a plywood gusset
Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code and simplifies the jointing and in addition provides rigidity
the combinations expected to occur. Extra stresses/ to the joint. Preservation of plywood and other panel
deflections during handling, transportation and erection products shall be done in accordance with good practice
shall be taken care of. Structural analysis, use of load- [6-3A(15)].
slip and moment, rotation characteristics of the
individual joints may be used if feasible. Alternatively, 15.5 Some design data on the lateral load bearing
the maximum direct force in a member may be assessed strength of common wire nails in plywood-to-wood
to be given by an idealized pin-jointed frame-work, joints are presented for timber species, Sal and Chir in
fully loaded with maximum dead and imposed load in Table 22, for guidance in design.
the combination in which they may reasonably be
16 STRUCTURAL SANDWICHES
expected to occur.
NOTE Some trussed rafters with plywood gusseted joint, 16.1 General
span 6 m, designed in Pinus roxburghii (Chir) were tested in
prototypes at Forest Research Institute, Dehra Dun for structural Sandwich constructions are composites of different
adequacy as under, in accordance with accepted standards materials including wood based materials formed by
[6-3A(14)], bonding two thin facings of high strength material to a
a) destructive test (short-term); and light weight core which provides a combination of
b) proof test (long-term). desirable properties that are not attainable with the
Results demonstrated an apparent factor at safety of 4 and actual individual constituent materials (see Fig. 18). The thin
factor of safety of 3. Deflection was well within the allowable
deflection at design load. A pre-camber of 1/240 of span at the
facings are usually of strong dense material since that
bottom chord was recommended. are the principal load carrying members of the
construction. The core should be stiff enough to ensure
15.3 Timber the faces remain at the correct distance apart. The
The species of timber including plantation grown sandwiches used as structural elements in building
species which can be used for trussed rafter construction construction shall be adequately designed for their
and permissible stresses thereof shall be in accordance intended services and shall be fabricated only where
with Table 1. Moisture contents shall be as per zonal there are adequate facilities for gluing or otherwise
requirements in accordance with 4.4. bonding cores to facings to ensure a strong and durable
Thickness of Facing Veneer of Plywood Along the Loading Direction Across Loading
Members (Loading Direction in the Main Member of the Joint) Direction
mm (Loading Direction
in the Main Member
Main Side Parallel to Grain Perpendicular to Grain At 60° Inclination At 30° Inclination of the Joint) Loaded
Member Members to Grain to Grain Parallel to Grain
Timber Plywood
Permanent Temporary Permanent Temporary Permanent Temporary Permanent Temporary Permanent Temporary
Structures Structures Structures Structures Structures Structures Structures Structures Structures Structures
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
Species: Shorea robusta (Sal)
30 109 121 135 156 151 168 140 164
40 9 123 124 121 166 142 181 145 158 142 151
50 89 123 157 167 162 170 99 139
30 157 177 150 154 164 179 111 171
40 12 179 191 145 193 154 194 132 192 135 180
50 151 183 149 191 155 202 128 182
30 245 283 Larger thickness of plywood is generally not recommended to be used
40 19 259 264 in structures unless heavily stressed 150 209
50 231 316
Species: Pinus roxburghii (Chir)
30 102 127 112 141 60 125 92 124
40 9 103 148 100 153 98 142 101 141 107 148
50 87 133 119 150 50 168 50 114
30 133 163 116 111 80 132 127 150
40 12 114 173 112 136 64 157 137 174 118 174
50 99 194 117 138 90 170 119 161
30 219 309 Larger thickness of plywood generally not used in structures unless
40 19 238 306 heavily stressed. 158 249
50 236 333
NOTES
1 Plywood shall be of shuttering grade as per the accepted standard [6-3A(16)].
2 Subject to satisfying all the design requirements in structures,
a) For denser species, timber thickness of 30 mm may be used by means of a plywood of 9 mm thickness for all practical purposes.
For species like Chir, plywood thickness of 12 mm may be used with 30 mm or 40 mm timber thickness.
b) Regarding aligning the veneers of plywood plate; nail strength data may be used as design function irrespective of alignment of
face veneer to overcome practical difficulties.
c) While prebore is essential to drive nail in structural timber as per the good practice [6-3A(7)], plywood plates need not be
prebored for nailing.
g) Cantilever vibrations (dynamic property), and braced and stiffened members (see Fig. 19 and Fig. 20).
h) Weathering for dimensional stability. The design shall be based on the balanced or
unbalanced assumed load distribution used for roof
17 LAMELLA ROOFING
arches. Effect of deformation or slip of joints under
17.1 General load on the induced stresses shall be considered in
design. Thrust components in both transverse and
The lamella roofing offers an excellent architectural longitudinal directions of the building due to skewness
edifice in timber, amenable to prefabrication, light of the lamella arch shall be adequately resisted. Thrust
weight structure with high central clearance. It is at lamella joints shall be resisted by the moment of
essentially an arched structure formed by a system of inertia in the continuous lamella and roof sheathing
intersecting skewed arches built-up of relatively short (decking) of lamella roofing. The interaction of arches
timber planks of uniform length and cross-section. Roof in two directions adds to the strength and stability
is designed as a two hinged arch with a depth equal to against horizontal forces. For design calculations
the depth of an individual lamella and width equal to several assumption tested and observed derivations,
the span of the building. The curved lamellas (planks) long-duration loading factors, seasoning advantages
are bevelled and bored at the ends and bolted together and effects of defects are taken into account.
at an angle, forming a network (grid) pattern of mutually
Lengthwise spacing of lamellas depends upon the angle 17.2.1.6 Design of bolts for nodal joint
of skew lamellas and the length of the planks used for
lamellas (As a general guidance it may be stated that To avoid any possibility of hinge action with the use of
the angle enclosed between the intersecting skewed bolts, it is imperative to adopt two or more bolts of
arches should not exceed 45°. An angle between 38° smaller diameter and adequately spaced in accordance
and 40° is always preferred.) with the good practice [6-3A(9)].
17.2.1.5 Design of lamella sizes Assume diameter of bolt d in mm, and length of bolt
in one plank t mm, that is, thickness of middle lamella
Net section of each of lamellas is assumed in curved plank.
profile conforming to the curvature of the roof surface.
Area of contact of bolt with timber plank = d × t mm2
Maximum BM = Ms over 600 mm spacing of lamella
in the direction of skew angle, for example a) Check against crushing of timber at contact
point of bolt For the bolt to transmit load
0.6 M1 ×10 without crushing the timber fibres, the
= Nm following condition shall be satisfied:
cos 19°
where t × d × compressive stress perpendicular to
grain for the timber species > P
M1 = maximum bending moment per metre length
where
of structure in transverse direction.
P = total load to be transmitted through bolt,
And maximum thrust N (in Newton) on this strip of in N.
600 mm in skewed direction is:
b) Check against tension in bolt Arrangement
0.6T1 1 of bolts at the junction of lamellas result in
N= × pure tension in bolt as bolt line is at right angle
cos 19° 2
to the outer two lamellas.
(as the force T1 is shared by two lines of lamellas)
Therefore, Zt = N × cot 2φ
where where
N = maximum thrust on 600 mm strip in skewed Zt = tension in bolt, in N.
direction. N = normal thrust corresponding to
T1 = resultant thrust in transverse direction (in N) maximum moment Ms, in N
per metre length of structure.
T1 1
Now total compressive and flexural stresses should not = ×
cos φ 2
exceed the allowable safe stress of timber species used
for lamella plank. For fulfilling this condition the T1 = resultant thrust in transverse direction (in
following equation should be checked: N) per metre length of structure.
N A Ms Z Therefore,
+ ≤1 Area of bolt (A t) × tensile stress of steel
fcII ft
(Ft) ≥ Zt
where
Area of bolt required for safe design = Zt/Ft
N = maximum thrust in skewed direction on strip Select the diameter to engage at least two
of 600 mm (in N) corresponding to the bolts.
maximum bending moment; (Required area of bolt is the effective area after
Z = section modulus of lamella plank, in mm3; considering reduction of area at the threaded
A = cross-sectional area of lamella plank, in mm2; end, which is generally 17 percent of the actual
bolt diameter)
fcII = safe compression strength of timber fibre
parallel to grain, in N/mm2; 17.2.1.7 Design of steel washer at joints
ft = safe tensile strength of timber parallel to Area of steel plate = At mm2
grain, in N/mm2; and
Stress perpendicular to grain of wood at the point of
Ms = bending moment over 600 mm strip of arch
contact with steel plate washer = Zt/At N/mm2
in skewed direction, in Nmm;
are fungi and insects. The most important wood wood species provides durability of timber without
destroying insects belong to termites and beetles. Of special protection measure. It is a property of heartwood
about 250 species of wood destroying termites recorded while sapwood is normally always susceptible to attack
in India, not more than a dozen species attack building by organisms. Preservatives should be well applied with
causing about 90 percent of the damage to timber and sufficient penetration into timber. For engineers,
other cellulosic materials. Subterranean termites are the architects and builders, the following are prime
most destructive of the insects that infest wood in houses considerations for choice of preservatives:
justifying prevention measures to be incorporated in the
a) Inflammability of treated timber is not
design and construction of buildings.
increased and mechanical properties are not
19.1.1 Control measures consist in isolating or sealing decreased;
off the building from termites by chemical and non- b) Compatibility with the glue in laminated
chemical construction techniques. It is recognized that wood, plywood and board material;
95 percent damage is due to internal travel of the termites c) Water repellent effect is preferred;
from ground upwards rather than external entry through
d) Possible suitability for priming coat;
entrance thus calling upon for appropriate control
measures in accordance with good practices [6-3A(21)]. e) Possibility of painting and other finishes;
f) Non-corrosive nature in case of metal
19.2 Chemical Methods fasteners; and
Termites live in soil in large colonies and damage the g) Influence on plastics, rubber, tiles and
wooden structure in the buildings by eating up the wood concrete.
or building nests in the wood. Poisoning the soil under 19.4 Constructional Method
and around the building is a normal recommended
practice. Spraying of chemical solution in the trenches Protection against potential problem of termite attack
of foundations in and around walls, areas under floors can simply be carried out by ordinary good construction
before and after filling of earth, etc. In already which prevents a colony from gaining access by,
constructed building the treatment can be given by a) periodic visual observations on termite
digging trenches all around the building and then giving galleries to be broken off;
a liberal dose of chemicals and then closing the trenches. b) specially formed and properly installed metal
shield at plinth level; and
19.3 Wood Preservatives
c) continuous floor slabs, apron floors and
Natural resistance against organisms of quite a few termite grooves on periphery of buildings.
FOREWORD
3
1 SCOPE
5
2 TERMINOLOGY
5
3 SYMBOLS
7
4 MATERIALS
7
5 PERMISSIBLE STRESSES
10
6 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
11
7 DESIGN, TECHNIQUES OF JOINTS AND CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES
14
8 BAMBOO AS REINFORCEMENT IN CONCRETE
19
9 WALLING, FLOORING, ROOFING, AND IN-FILL PANELS FOR WALL, AND
21
COMMON ROOF COVERING/CLADDING
ANNEX A SOURCE AND LOCAL NAMES OF SOME OF THE SPECIES OF
26
BAMBOO
ANNEX B RECOMMENDATIONS FOR BAMBOO STRUCTURES IN HIGH
28
WIND/CYCLONE PRONE AREAS
LIST OF STANDARDS
29
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 6/Subsection 3B) covers the general principles involved in the design of structural bamboo in
buildings with regard to mechanical resistance and durability of structures. Design of both bamboo (round bamboo,
split bamboo, glued laminated bamboo) and bamboo-based panels joined together with adhesives or mechanical
fasteners are covered in this Subsection. It also covers minimum strength data, dimensional stability, grading
requirements and traditional bamboo joints for quality assurance. Constructional aspects using bamboo, such as,
work on site, fabrication of components off-site and their erection on site is also covered to the extent necessary
to indicate and ensure the quality of material and standard of workmanship to comply with the assumptions of the
design rules and the limitations.
Bamboo is a versatile resource possessing high strength-to-weight ratio and cost ratio and offers considerable
ease in working with simpler tools. It has a long and well established tradition as a building material. The application
of bamboo as a constructional material is largely based on established traditions and intuitions of forefathers
throughout the tropical and sub-tropical regions.
Resilience coupled with light weight makes bamboo an ideal material for housing in disaster prone/earthquake
prone areas. It has the capacity to withstand repetitive loadings and absorb more energy and show larger deflections
before collapse and as such is safer under earth tremors. As the design guidelines were inadequate, the application
of bamboo as an engineering material was largely based on practical and engineering experience. A need was
therefore felt to develop a Code for design and construction with bamboo so as to cater to a number of social and
trade advantages, engineering recognition and the improved status of bamboo as an engineering material. This
was achieved by adding a new chapter in the last revision of the Code, covering structural design with bamboo.
Forest Research Institute, Dehradun and some other organizations were engaged in bamboo research to establish
its silviculture, botanical, entomological and pathological aspects besides creating a utilization base. All these
works were utilized in the preparation of the last version of this Subsection of the Code.
Some of the suitable species grown in India and neighbouring countries are enlisted in Annex A along with their
local names and source, for general information.
The bamboo culm has a tubular structure consisting essentially of nodes and inter-nodes. In the inter-nodes the
cells are axially oriented while the nodes provide the transverse inter-connection. The disposition of the nodes
and the wall thickness are significant in imparting strength to bamboo against bending and crushing. In a circular
cross-section, bamboo is generally hollow and for structural purposes this form is quite effective and advantageous.
Each of the species of bamboo has widely different characteristics affecting its usefulness as constructional material.
The strength of bamboo culms, their straightness, lightness combined with hardness, range and size of hollowness
make them potentially suitable for a variety of applications both structural and non-structural. With good physical
and mechanical properties, low shrinkage and good average density, bamboo is well suited to replace wood in
several applications, especially in slats and panel form. Mass production of bamboo components, if required, may
be integrated with treatment facilities near to the site of plantation or site of construction, for speed and economy
in construction.
The Section on structural design with bamboo was first published in 2005 as Subsection 3B of Part 6. In the 1983
version of the Code, timber was covered under Section 3 of Part 6 Structural Design under the title Wood,
which did not cover bamboo. In the last version of 2005, the scope of Section 3 was enlarged as Section 3 Timber
and Bamboo, which was subdivided into Subsection 3A Timber and Subsection 3B Bamboo. This Subsection
pertains to Bamboo.
As a result of experience gained in implementation of 2005 version of this Code and further research work done
and feedback received as well as formulation of new standards in the field and revision/updation of some of the
existing standards, a need to revise this Subsection was felt. This revision has, therefore, been brought out to take
care of these aspects.
a) Limit state design and performance of 2.2.1 Bamboo Mat Board A board made of two or
structures; and more bamboo mats bonded with an adhesive.
b) Scientific designing of bamboo joints and their 2.2.2 Bamboo Mat Corrugated Sheet A sheet made
fastenings. up of adhesive soaked and coated mats assembled and
pressed under specified temperature and pressure to
2 TERMINOLOGY obtain sinusoidal or other suitable corrugations.
For the purpose of this Subsection, the following 2.2.3 Bamboo Mat Veneer Composite Panel
definitions shall apply. manufactured with a combination of bamboo mat and
veneer. Bamboo mat can be either as outer skins or as
2.1 Anatomical Purpose Definitions
core/cross-bands. However, the composite panel shall
2.1.1 Bamboo Tall perennial grasses found in be balanced construction on either side of central ply.
tropical and sub-tropical regions. They belong to the
2.2.4 Beam A structural member which supports
family Poaceae and sub-family Bambusoideae.
load primarily by its internal resistance to bending.
2.1.2 Bamboo Culm A single shoot of bamboo
2.2.5 Breaking Strength A term loosely applied to
usually hollow except at nodes which are often
a given structural member with respect to the ultimate
swollen.
load it can sustain under a given set of conditions.
2.1.3 Bamboo Clump A cluster of bamboo culms
2.2.6 Bundle-Column A column consisting of three
emanating from two or more rhizomes in the same
or more number of culms bound as integrated unit with
place.
wire or strap type of fastenings.
2.1.4 Cellulose A carbohydrate, forming the
NOTE During bunching of beams/columns, binders (5 mm
fundamental material of all plants and a main source tie bar/wire and 15 mm bamboo dowel pins) may be carefully
of the mechanical properties of biological materials. inserted after proper pre-drilling the holes throughout the
assembly as per the requirements of structural design.
2.2.41 Unloaded End Distance The end distance For the purpose of this Subsection, the following letter
opposite to the loaded end. symbols shall have the meaning indicated against each,
unless otherwise stated:
2.2.42 Wall Thickness Half the difference between
outer diameter and inner diameter of the piece at any A = cross-sectional area of bamboo
cross-section. (perpendicular to the direction of the
principal fibres and vessels), mm 2
2.2.42.1 Mean wall thickness The wall thickness
taken four times in the same points as the diameter has =
2
D − ( D − 2w ) ;
π 2
been measured. Thus resulting in mean of eight values 4
for the middle of culm. AB = area of reinforcement in bamboo reinforced
2.2.43 Wet Location Position in buildings in which cement concrete, mm2;
the bamboos are almost continuously damp, wet or in D = mean outer diameter of bamboo culm, mm;
contact with earth or water, such as piles and bamboo d = inner diameter, mm = (D 2w);
foundations. E = modulus of elasticity (MOE) in bending,
N/mm2;
2.3 Definitions Relating to Defects
fc = calculated stress in axial compression,
2.3.1 Bamboo Bore/Ghoon Hole The defect caused N/ m2;
by bamboo ghoon beetle (Dinoderus spp. fcp = permissible stress in compression along the
Bostrichidae), which attacks felled culms. fibres, N/mm2;
2.3.2 Crookedness A localized deviation from the I = moment of inertia (the second moment of
straightness in a piece of bamboo. area) of culm section, mm4
2.3.3 Discolouration A change from the normal π 4 4
= D − (D − 2w ) ;
colour of the bamboo which does not impair the strength 64
of bamboo or bamboo composite products. l = unsupported length of column, mm;
2.4 Definition Relating to Drying Degrades m = moisture content, percent;
r = radius of gyration, mm
2.4.1 Collapse The defect occurring on account of
excessive shrinkage, particularly in thick walled I
immature bamboo. When the bamboo wall shrinks, the = ;
A
outer layers containing a larger concentration of strong
fibro-vascular bundles set the weaker interior portion R = modulus of rupture (MOR), N/mm2;
embedded in parenchyma in tension, causing the latter w = mean of wall thickness of bamboo culm, mm;
to develop cracks. The interior crack develops into a Z = section modulus, mm3
wide split resulting in a depression on the outer surface.
4 4
This defect also reduces the structural strength of round π D − ( D − 2w )
bamboo. = ; and
32 D
2.4.2 End Splitting A split at the end of a bamboo.
= deflection or deformation, mm.
This is not so common a defect as drying occurs both
δ
from outer and interior wall surfaces of bamboo as well 4 MATERIALS
as the end at the open ends.
The requirements shall be met by the choice of suitable
2.4.3 Surface Cracking Fine surface cracks not materials, by appropriate design and detailing and by
detrimental to strength. However, the cracking which specifying control procedures for production,
occurs at the nodes reduces the structural strength. construction and use.
4.4.2.2 The minimum length of culms shall be preferably b) Cut longer bamboo components with less curvature out
of taller bamboo and use cambered ones for shorter
6 m for facilitating close fittings at joints, etc.
length components.
4.4.3 Taper
4.4.5 Wall Thickness
The taper shall not be more than 5.8 mm per metre Preferably minimum wall thickness of 8 mm shall be
length (or 0.58 percent) (1 in 170) of bamboo in any used for load bearing members unless calculations and
grade of bamboo. the availability dictate otherwise.
4.4.4 Curvature 4.5 Durability and Treatability
The maximum curvature should not be more than 4.5.1 Durability
75 mm in a length of 6 m of any grade of bamboo.
The natural durability of bamboo is low and varies
NOTE Due to the constraint of preferential selection of between 12 months and 36 months depending on the
straighter material out of a lot, more bent material may be
species and climatic conditions. In tropical countries
accommodated to avoid high cost. Following remedial options
may be helpful: the bio-deterioration is very severe. Bamboos are
generally destroyed in about one to two years time
a) Adopt component assembly method to take care of some
degree of curvature (bunching done after holding
when used in the open and in contact with ground; while
components straight). a service life of two to five years can be expected from
Table 1 Physical and Mechanical Properties of Indian Bamboos (in Round Form)
(Clause 4.1)
Sl Species Properties
No.
In Green Condition In Air Dry Conditions
Density Modulus Modulus of Maximum Density Modulus Modulus of Maximum
kg/m3 of Rupture Elasticity Compressive kg/m3 of Elasticity Compressive
N/mm2 × 103 N/mm2 Strength Rupture × 103 N/mm2 Strength
N/mm2 N/mm2 N/mm2
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
i) Bambusa auriculata 594 65.1 15.01 36.7 670 89.1 21.41 54.3
ii) B. balcooa 783 65.4 7.31 46.7 60.6
iii) B. bambos (Syn. B. 559 58.3 5.95 35.3 663 80.1 8.96 53.4
arundinacea)
iv) B. burmanica 570 59.7 11.01 39.9 672 105.0 17.81 65.2
v) B. glancescens (Syn. B. 691 82.8 14.77 53.9
nana)
vi) B. nutans 603 52.9 6.62 45.6 673 52.4 10.72 47.9
vii) B. pallida 731 55.2 12.90 54.0
viii) B. tulda 658 51.1 7.98 40.7 722 66.7 10.07 68.0
ix) B. ventricosa 626 34.1 3.38 36.1
x) B. vulgaris 626 41.5 2.87 38.6
xi) Cephalostachyum pergracile 601 52.6 11.16 36.7 640 71.3 19.22 49.4
xii) Dendrocalamus 711 33.1 5.51 42.1 684 47.8 6.06 61.1
longispathus
xiii) D. strictus 631 73.4 11.98 35.9 728 119.1 15.00 69.1
xiv) Melocanna baccifera 817 53.2 11.39 53.8 751 57.6 12.93 69.9
xv) Oxytenanthera abyssinicia 688 83.6 14.96 46.6
xvi) Thyrsostachys oliveri 733 61.9 9.72 46.9 758 90.0 12.15 58.0
NOTE The values of stress in N/mm2 have been obtained by converting the values in kgf/cm 2 by dividing the same by 10.
7.3 Construction Practices Bamboo in direct contact with ground, bamboo on rock
or preformed concrete footing, bamboo incorporated
7.3.1 Bamboo being a versatile resource characterized into concrete, may form the foundation structure
by high strength, low mass and ease of working with (see Fig. 8). Also, arrangements with use of metallic
simple tools, it is desirable to increasingly make strap, C-clamp and bunched bamboo columns
appropriate use of this material. Design of structures embedded in concrete may be used for foundation of
using bamboo shall be done in accordance with 6. It bamboo structures (see Fig. 9).
shall be ensured that the elements of structure satisfy
the appropriate fire resistance requirements as specified 7.3.6 Floors
in Part 4 Fire and Life Safety of the Code, and quality The floor of bamboo may be at ground level with
of building materials/components used shall be in covering of bamboo matting, etc. In elevated floors,
accordance with Part 5 Building Materials of the bamboo members become an integral part of
Code. For construction using bamboo, some of the structural framework of building. The floor will
important constructional provisions given in 7.3.2 comprise structural bamboo elements and bamboo
to 7.3.7 shall be followed. decking.
8.1 Due to its fibrous texture, bamboo possesses high Stress Mild Bamboo (Green) Mass
tensile strength. This can act as an alternate material Steel Concrete
for reinforcement in concrete within the limitations of (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
design and construction. The ultimate strength of some i) Modulus of 2.1× 10 6
175 750 to 196 640
of the species of bamboo in direct tension is nearly the elasticity (for all locations)
same as that of steel at its yield point. On an average it ii) Tensile stress 1 265.5 158, Bending-
varies from 1 400 to 2 000 kg/cm2. The principles to 1 400 tension
(all locations)
adopted for design of concrete structure with steel is
iii) Compressive 105 50
also applicable for the concrete member with bamboo. stress (D. strictus)
Strength characteristics of steel, concrete and bamboo iv) Bond stress 3.5 (green) to 5.6 4 - 10
are indicated in Table 4 and the design data for balanced (dry) reported
section in beams/slabs reinforcement is given in (likely to increase
up to 10)
Table 5.
v) Shear stress 115-180 5
1)
average of bottom, middle and top portions of culms.
2)
average of bottom and middle portions only.
composite, bamboo mat corrugated sheet, bamboo tiles, from destructured bamboo are given in Table 7. The
plastered bamboo reeds, thatch, corrugated galvanized reconstituted product from bamboo can be sawn, nailed,
iron sheeting, asphaltic sheets, plain clay tiles, etc. The moulded, bored, screwed, polished and painted. Thus
respective materials shall conform to the following: it offers a good substitute of solid wood for structural
uses.
a) Bamboo mat board These shall conform to
the accepted standard [6-3B(7)]. NOTE Reconstituted boards/wood from destructured
bamboo when tested for physical and mechanical properties in
b) Bamboo mat veneer composite These shall accordance with the accepted standards [6-3B(11)] and
conform to the accepted standard [6-3B(8)]. [6-3B(12)] yielded encouraging results. Gist of mechanical
c) Bamboo mat corrugated sheet and bamboo properties of these boards is excellent when compared with
Dendrocalamus strictus (bamboo), teak and sal.
mat ridge cap These shall conform to the
accepted standard [6-3B(9)]. 9.1.3 Other Panel Products/Infill Materials
d) Bamboo-jute composite corrugated and semi- Other panel products/infill materials shall be in
corrugated sheets These shall conform to accordance with relevant Indian standards. These shall
the accepted standard [6-3B(10)]. be such that they maintain their integrity and strength
9.1.2 Reconstituted Wood from Destructured Bamboo in the assigned service class throughout the expected
life of the structure.
After lopping, bamboos are cross-cut into small lengths
in the round and then split along the axis. The small 9.1.4 Adhesives
cross-section strips are then passed between the counter
Adhesive shall maintain their integrity in accordance
revolving rollers till the material is fully destructured.
with the accepted standard [6-3B(13)].
This is then air dried and resin treated and suitably
pressed without much disturbing the natural alignment 9.2 Structural Usage of Bamboo Based Products
of fibres thus retaining the directional properties of
bamboo. 9.2.1 General
Some typical strength properties of reconstituted wood Bamboo mat board (BMB) and bamboo mat veneer
Sl Board Material Density Modulus Tensile Compressive Izod Shear Modulus Screw
No. of Strength Strength Impact Strength of Holding
Rupture Parallel to Parallel to Elasticity Power
Set Resin Pressure Grain Grain
Contents × 103
Percent kgf/cm2 g/cm3 kgf/cm2 kgf/cm2 kgf/cm2 kgf/cm kgf/cm2 kgf/cm2 kgf
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
iii) Shorea robusta 0.749 1 249 — 685 124 110 152.8 369
(at 12 percent dry moisture
content)
iv) Tectona grandis 0.596 959 — 532 68 102 119.6 326
(at 12 percent dry moisture
content)
v) Dendrocalamus strictus 0.757 1 310 — 624 — — 180.3 —
ANNEX B
(Foreword)
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR BAMBOO STRUCTURES IN HIGH WIND/
CYCLONE PRONE AREAS
B-1 Given below are some recommendations for overhangs should be properly tied back to wall
bamboo structures in high wind/cyclone prone areas, frame-work.
which are based on Rapid Visual Screening (RVS) of e) Roof structure shall be properly secured with
the damages of past events: vertical load-bearing members (wooden or
a) Prefer a square plan of the building bamboo columns, brick piers or walling) for
symmetrical to the arrangement of partitions eliminating the chances of being blown away
and openings for balanced distribution of from the building. A continuous beam
forces within the structure. Window connecting all the columns would increase the
positioning be planned in such a way that wind framing action.
entering through window could pass through f) Roof cladding (G. I. sheets, clay tiles or thatch)
similar opening on opposite wall in order to be properly connected with holding down
reduce built-up pressure, and incorporate ridge U-bolts, or sturdy anchorages to ensure safety.
vents. Thatch roof be tied by nylon ropes in diagonal
b) A hip-shaped, pyramidal or a conical roofing pattern.
be preferred to gable end or mono-pitch ones g) Sufficient depth for anchorage be provided;
for least wind resistance. columns be embedded in pits within the
c) Wide mono-pitched Verandas abutting the foundation and secured by poured concrete.
entrance to residence should be structurally Wetting of column base be checked by raising
separated from the main building. it from the floor level.
d) Roof overhangs be limited to 450 mm as they h) Highest importance be given to strengthening
contribute to higher negative suction. Large the junctions between structural elements at
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (6) 4924 Method of test for nail-jointed
in the fulfillment of the requirements of this Code. The timber trusses
latest version of the standard shall be adopted at the (Part 1) : 1968 Destructive test
time of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed (Part 2) : 1968 Proof test
may be used by the Authority for conformance with (7) 13958 : 1994 Specification for bamboo mat
the requirements of the referred clauses in the Code. board for general purposes
(8) 14588 : 1999 Specification for bamboo mat
In the following list, the number appearing in the first
veneer composite for general
column within parantheses indicates the number of the
purposes
reference in this Subsection.
(9) 15476 : 2004 Specification for bamboo mat
IS No. Title corrugated sheets
(1) 9096 : 2006 Code of practice for preservation (10) 15972 : 2012 Specification for bamboo-jute
of bamboo for structural purposes composite corrugated and semi-
(first revision) corrugated sheets
(2) 6874 : 2008 Method of tests for bamboo (first (11) 1734 (Parts 1 Methods of test for plywood
revision) to 20) : 1983 (second revision)
(3) 1902 : 2006 Code of practice for preservation (12) 1708 (Parts 1 Methods of testing of small clear
of bamboo and cane for non- to 18) : 1986 specimens of timber (second
structural purposes (second revision)
revision) (13) 848 : 2006 Specification for synthetic resin
(4) 8242 : 1976 Method of tests for split bamboo adhesives for plywood (phenolic
(5) 2366 : 1983 Code of practice for nail-jointed and aminoplastic) (second
timber construction (first revision) revision)
FOREWORD
3
1 SCOPE
5
2 TERMINOLOGY
5
3 MATERIALS
7
4 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
9
5 STRUCTURAL DESIGN
18
6 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
22
7 REINFORCED BRICK AND REINFORCED BRICK CONCRETE FLOORS AND
23
ROOFS
8 SPECIAL CONSIDERATION FROM EARTHQUAKE POINT OF VIEW
23
9 GUIDELINES FOR IMPROVING EARTHQUAKE RESISTANCE OF LOW
48
STRENGTH MASONRY BUILDINGS
10 REINFORCED MASONRY
54
11 MASONRY WALLS USING RAT-TRAP BOND TECHNOLOGY
62
12 NOTATIONS AND SYMBOLS
62
ANNEX A SOME GUIDELINES FOR ASSESSMENT OF ECCENTRICITY OF
63
LOADING ON WALLS
ANNEX B CALCULATION OF BASIC COMPRESSIVE STRESS OF MASONRY
63
BY PRISM TEST
ANNEX C GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF MASONRY SUBJECTED TO
64
CONCENTRATED LOADS
ANNEX D GUIDELINES FOR APPROXIMATE DESIGN OF NON-LOAD
65
BEARING WALL
ANNEX E CONFINED MASONRY BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
66
ANNEX F TYPICAL ITERATIVE METHOD FOR WALLS SUBJECTED TO
72
FLEXURE AND AXIAL LOAD
ANNEX G DISTRIBUTION OF LATERAL FORCES IN THE PIERS OF A
75
MASONRY WALL
ANNEX H MASONRY WALLS USING RAT-TRAP BOND
78
ANNEX J NOTATIONS, SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
83
LIST OF STANDARDS
83
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 6/Section 4) covers the structural design of unreinforced and reinforced masonry elements in
buildings. Provisions on reinforced brick and reinforced brick concrete floors and roofs have also been dealt with.
This Section was first published in 1970 and subsequently revised in 1983. The first revision of this Section was
modified in 1987 through Amendment No. 2 to bring this Section in line with the latest revised masonry code. In
the amendment, certain provisions were updated following the revision of IS 1905 Code of practice for structural
use of unreinforced masonry on which the earlier version was based. In the amendment, requirements of masonry
element for stability were modified; in the design of free standing wall, provisions were made for taking advantage
of the tensile resistance in masonry under certain conditions; provision regarding effective height of masonry wall
between openings was modified; method of working out effective height of wall with a membrane type DPC was
modified; the criteria for working out effective length of wall having openings was modified; some general guidelines
for dealing with concentrated loads for design of walls were included; and provision of cutting and chases in walls
were amplified. The Section was thereafter revised in 2005.
In the second revision of this Section in 2005, the provisions of special considerations in earthquake zones were
aligned in line with the revised Indian Standard, IS 4326 : 1993 Code of practice for earthquake resistant design
and construction of buildings; a new clause covering guidelines for improving earthquake resistance of low
strength masonry buildings was added; and reference to design of reinforced brick and reinforced brick concrete
floors and roofs was included.
As a result of experience gained in the implementation of this Section and feedback received, as well as in view of
revision of IS 4326, a need to revise this Section was again felt. This Section has, therefore, been revised to
incorporate the following significant changes:
a) Detailed provisions relating to reinforced masonry have been included.
b) The provisions of special considerations in earthquake zones have been updated including by incorporation
of suitable provisions relating to Confined masonry building construction.
c) A separate table on compressive strength for different grades of mortar has been included for clarity.
d) Mix proportions and strength of mortars for masonry have been updated to be based on proportioning by
mass (instead of by volume) to reflect sound engineering practices; and 28 day strength values of cement-
sand mortar with cement having compressive strength of 43 MPa and above.
e) Provisions related to durability criteria for selection of masonry mortars have been included.
f) Use of one and a half brick thick wall up to ground level from foundation level has been suggested to
reduce the slenderness ratio of the wall above it for ground floor walls.
g) Stabilized soil blocks have been included as masonry unit.
h) Number of storeys of masonry construction has been limited to 4, in line with the seismic design standards.
j) Masonry wall construction using rat-trap bond has been included.
k) Reference to all the concerned Indian Standards has been updated.
Structural design requirements of this section are largely based on following Indian Standards:
a) IS 1905:1987 Code of practice for structural use of unreinforced masonry (third revision),
b) IS 4326:2013 Earthquake resistant design and construction of buildings Code of practice (third
revision)
c) IS 10440:1983 Code of practice for construction of RB and RBC floors and roofs, and
d) IS 13828:1993 Improving earthquake resistance of low strength masonry buildings Guidelines.
Until further research material is available on rat-trap bond masonry, its usage is proposed to be limited up to two
storeys.
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 4 MASONRY 3
A reference to SP 20 : 1991 Handbook on masonry design and construction (first revision), may be useful. In the
formulation of this Section, inputs were also derived from the IITK-GSDMAs publication, Guidelines for structural
use of reinforced masonry.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this section, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this section are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this Section is complied with, the final value,
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this Section.
1 1 ¼ C or B 0 0 3 10
2(a) 1 ¼ C or B 0 0 4 7.5
2(b) 1 ½ C or B 0 0 4½ 6
2(c) 1 0 0 0 4 6 7
3(a) 1 0 0 0 5 5 6
3(b) 1 1 C or B 0 0 6 3
3(c) 0 0 1(LP-40) 0 1½ 3
4(a) 1 0 0 0 6 3 4
4(b) 1 2B 0 0 9 2
4(c) 0 1A 0 0 2 2
4(d) 0 1B 0 1 1 2
4(e) 0 1 C or B 0 2 0 2
4(f) 0 0 1(LP-40) 0 1¾ 2
5(a) 1 0 0 0 7 2 3
5(b) 1 3B 0 0 12 1.5
5(c) 0 1A 0 0 3 1.5
5(d) 0 1B 0 2 1 1.5
5(e) 0 1 C or B 0 3 0 1.5
5(f) 0 0 1(LP-40) 0 2 1.5
6(a) 1 0 0 0 8 1 2
6(b) 0 1B 0 1 2 0.7
6(c) 0 1 C or B 0 2 1 0.7
6(d) 0 0 1(LP-40) 0 2¼ 0.7
6(e) 0 0 1(LP-20) 0 1½ 0.7
7(a) 0 1B 0 0 3 0.5
7(b) 0 1 C or B 0 1 2 0.5
7(c) 0 0 1(LP-7) 0 1½ 0.5
NOTES
1 Sand for making mortar should be well graded. In case sand is not well graded, its proportions shall be reduced in order to achieve the
minimum specified strength.
2 For mixes in Sl No. 1 and Sl No. 2, use of lime is not essential from consideration of strength as it does not result in increase in
strength. However, its use is highly recommended since if improves workability.
3 For mixes in Sl No. 3(a), 4(a), 5(a) and 6(a) either lime C or B to the extent of ¼ part of cement (by mass) or some plasticizer should
be added for improving workability.
4 For mixes in Sl No. 4(b) and 5(b), lime and sand should first be ground in mortar mill and then cement added to coarse stuff.
5 It is essential that mixes in Sl No. 4(c), 4(d), 5(d), 5(e), 6(b), 6(c), 7(a) and 7(b) are prepared by grinding in a mortar mill.
6 A, B and C denote eminently hydraulic lime, semi-hydraulic lime and fat lime respectively, as specified in appropriate standards
listed in Part 5 Building Materials of the Code.
3.4.2 In the case of masonry exposed frequently to rains of mortar shall preferably be M3 or more for high
and where there is further protection by way of plastering durability but in no case less than L1.
or rendering or other finishes, the grade of mortar shall 3.4.4 In the case of masonry in foundations laid below
not be less than M3 but shall preferably be of grade damp-proof course, the grades of mortar for use in
M2. Where no protection is provided, the grade of masonry shall be as specified below:
mortar for external walls shall not be less than M2.
a) Where soil has little moisture, masonry mortar
3.4.3 In the case of load bearing internal walls, the grade of grade not less M3 shall be used.
6.5.3.1 As far as possible, services should be planned 6.5.3.10 Chases, recesses or holes shall not be cut into
with the help of vertical chases and use of horizontal walls made of hollow or perforated units, after the units
chases should be avoided. have been incorporated in masonry.
6.5.3.2 For load bearing walls, depth of vertical and 6.6 Corbelling
horizontal chases shall not exceed one-third and one- 6.6.1 Where corbelling is required for the support of
sixth of the wall thickness, respectively. some structural element, maximum projection of
6.5.3.3 Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2 m in masonry unit should not exceed one-half of the height
any stretch of wall and shall not be located within of the unit or one-half of the built-in part of the unit
345 mm of an opening or within 230 mm of a cross and the maximum horizontal projection of the corbel
wall that serves as a stiffening wall for stability. Width should not exceed one-third of the wall thickness.
of a vertical chase shall not exceed thickness of wall in 6.6.2 The load per unit length on a corbel shall not be
which it occurs. greater than half of the load per unit length on the wall
6.5.3.4 When unavoidable horizontal chases of width above the corbel. The load on the wall above the corbel,
not exceeding 60 mm in a wall having slenderness ratio together with four times the load on the corbel, shall
not exceeding 15 may be provided. These shall be not cause the average stress in the supporting wall or
located in the upper or lower middle third height of leaf to exceed the permissible stresses given in 5.4.
wall at a distance not less than 600 mm from a lateral 6.6.3 It is preferable to adopt header courses in the
support. No horizontal chase shall exceed 1 m in length corbelled portion of masonry from considerations of
and there shall not be more than 2 chases in any one economy and stability.
wall. Horizontal chases shall have minimum mutual
separation distance of 500 mm. Sum of lengths of all 7 REINFORCED BRICK AND REINFORCED
chases and recesses in any horizontal plane shall not BRICK CONCRETE FLOORS AND ROOFS
exceed one-fourth the length of the wall.
The construction and design of reinforced brick and
6.5.3.5 Holes for supporting put-logs of scaffolding reinforced brick concrete floors and roof shall be in
shall be kept away from bearings of beams, lintels, and accordance with good practices [6-4(7)].
other concentrated loads. If unavoidable, stresses in
the affected area shall be checked to ensure that these 8 SPECIAL CONSIDERATION FROM
are within safe limits. EARTHQUAKE POINT OF VIEW
6.5.3.6 No chase, recess or hole shall be provided in 8.0 Special features of design and construction for
any stretch of a masonry wall, the length of which is earthquake resistant masonry buildings are given in 8.2
less than four times the thickness of wall, except when to 8.8.2. However, special features of design and
found safe by structural analysis. construction for improving earthquake resistance of low
strength masonry buildings is covered in 9.
6.5.3.7 Masonry directly above a recess or a hole, if
wider than 300 mm, shall be supported on a lintel. No 8.1 For the purpose of 8 and 9, the definitions given
lintel, however, is necessary in case of a circular recess below shall apply in addition to those given in 2.
or hole exceeding 300 mm in diameter provided upper 8.1.1 Separation Section A gap of specified width
8.1.6 Band A reinforced concrete or reinforced brick 8.2.2.4 Alteration to the building structure shall be done
runner provided in the walls to tie them together and to by maintaining its structural stability by ensuring proper
impart horizontal bending strength in them. load path.
NOTE For low strength masonry buildings, wooden runners 8.2.3 Projecting and Suspended Parts
may also be used as runner.
8.2.3.1 Projecting parts shall be avoided as far as
8.1.7 Seismic Zone and Seismic Coefficient The possible. If the projecting parts cannot be avoided, they
Seismic Zones II to IV as classified in 5 of Part 6 shall be properly reinforced and firmly tied to the main
Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects structure, and their design shall be in accordance with
of the Code and corresponding basic seismic coefficient good practice [6-4(8)].
αo as specified in 3.4 of good practice [6-4(8)].
8.2.3.2 Ceiling plaster shall preferably be avoided.
8.1.8 Design Horizontal Seismic Coefficient The When it is unavoidable, the plaster shall be as thin as
value of horizontal seismic coefficient Ah computed possible.
taking into account the soil-foundation system and the
importance factor as specified in 6.4 of good practice 8.2.3.3 Suspended ceiling shall be avoided as far as
[6-4(9)]. possible. Where provided they shall be light, adequately
framed and secured to which electrical fixtures shall
8.1.9 Concrete Grades 28 day compressive strength be fully secured.
Fire frequently follows an earthquake and therefore, i) Frames with shear walls 15
buildings shall be constructed to make them fire ii) Category B1) 10
iii) Category C1) 10
resistant in accordance with the provisions of Part 4 iv) Category D1) 15
Fire and Life Safety of the Code for fire safety. v) Category E1) 20
17C METAL SIDING INDUSTRIAL WORK 17D WOOD SHEATHING INDUSTRIAL WORK
NOTE Fragile cover may consist of asbestos cement sheet, particle board and like.
8.4.2 Framed Construction semi-rigid or rigid joints. The walls are rigid capable of
This type of construction is suitable for multi-storied acting as shear walls and may be of reinforced concrete
and industrial buildings as described in 8.4.2.1 or of brickwork reinforced or unreinforced bounded by
and 8.4.2.2. framing members through shear connectors.
8.4.2.1 Vertical load carrying frame construction 8.4.2.2.1 The frame and wall combinations shall be
This type of construction consists of frames with designed to carry the total lateral force due to
flexible (hinged) joints and bracing members. Steel earthquake acting on the building. The frame acting
multi-storied building or industrial frames and timber alone shall be designed to resist at least 25 percent of
construction usually are of this type. the total lateral force.
8.4.2.1.1 Such buildings shall be adequately 8.4.2.2.2 The shear walls shall preferably be distributed
strengthened against lateral forces by shear walls and/ evenly over the whole building. When concentrated at
or other bracing systems in plan, elevation and sections one location, forming what is called a rigid core in the
such that earthquake forces shall be resisted by them building, the design shall be checked for torsional
in any direction. effects and the shear connection between the core and
8.4.2.2 Moment resistant frames with shear walls the floors conservatively designed for the total shear
The frames may be of reinforced concrete or steel with transfer.
8.7 Floors/Roofs with Small Precast Components 8.7.1.3 Precast reinforced concrete plank and joist
8.7.1 Types of Precast Floors/Roofs scheme for roof/floor
Earthquake resistance measures for floors and roofs The scheme consists of precast reinforced concrete
with small precast components, as covered in this planks supported on partially precast reinforced concrete
Section, have been dealt with as typical examples. joists. The reinforced concrete planks are 300 mm wide
8.7.1.1 Precast reinforced concrete unit roof/floor and the length varies according to the spacing of the
joists, but it shall not exceed 1.5 m (see Fig. 34). To
The unit is a precast reinforced concrete component,
provide monolithic property to the roof/floor and to have
channel (inverted trough) shaped in section
T-beam effect with the joists, the planks shall be made
(see Fig. 30). The nominal width of the unit varies from
partially 30 mm thick and the partially 60 mm thick and
300 to 600 mm, its height from 150 to 200 mm and a
in-situ concrete shall be filled in the depressed portions
minimum flange thickness of 30 mm. Length of unit
to complete the roof/floor structurally (see Fig. 35).
shall vary according to room dimensions, but the
maximum length is restricted to 4.2 m from stiffness 8.7.1.4 Prefabricated brick panel system for roof/floor
considerations. Horizontal corrugations are provided
It consists of prefabricated reinforced brick panels (see
on the two longitudinal faces of the units so that the
Fig. 36) supported on Precast reinforced concrete joists
structural roof/floor acts monolithic after concrete
with nominal reinforced 35 mm thick structural deck
grouted in the joints between the units attains strength
concrete over the brick panels and joists (see Fig. 37).
(see Fig. 31).
The width of the brick panels shall be 530 mm for
8.7.1.2 Precast reinforced concrete cored unit roof/ panels made of bricks of conventional size and 450 mm
floor for panels made of bricks of modular size. The thickness
The unit is a reinforced concrete component having a of the panels shall be 75 mm or 90 mm, respectively
nominal width of 300 to 600 mm and thickness of 130 depending upon whether conventional or modular
to 150 mm having two circular hollows 90 mm bricks are used. The length of the panels shall vary
diameter, throughout the length of the unit (see Fig. 32). depending upon the spacing of the joists, but the
The minimum flange/web thickness of the unit shall be maximum length shall not exceed 1.2 m.
20 mm. Length of unit varies according to room 8.7.1.5 Precast reinforced concrete waffle unit roof/
dimensions, but the maximum length shall be restricted floor
to 4.2 m from stiffness considerations. Horizontal
corrugations are provided on the two longitudinal faces Waffle units are of the shape of inverted troughs, square
of the units so that the structural roof/floor acts or rectangular in plan, having lateral dimensions up to
monolithic after concrete grouted in the joints between 1.2 m and depth depending upon the span of the roof/
the units attains strength (see Fig. 33). floor to be covered (see Fig. 38 and Fig. 39). The
FIG . 41 CONNECTION OF CHANNEL/CORED UNIT FLOOR/ROOF (WITH DECK CONCRETE) WITH T IE BEAM
18
FIG . 42 CONNECTION OF PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE PLANK AND PRECAST BRICK PANEL
FLOOR/ROOF (WITH D ECK CONCRETE) WITH T IE BEAM
8.8.2 Timber (with masonry in-fill) construction shall so that the construction as a whole behaves as one unit
generally be restricted to two storeys with or without against earthquake forces.
the attic floor.
8.8.5 Foundations
8.8.3 In timber (with masonry in-fill) construction
8.8.5.1 Timber construction shall preferably start above
attention shall be paid to fire safety against electric short
the plinth level, the portion below shall be in masonry
circuiting, kitchen fire, etc.
or concrete.
8.8.4 The superstructure of timber buildings shall be
8.8.5.2 The superstructure may be connected with the
made rigid against deformations by adopting suitable
foundation in one of the two ways as given below:
construction details at the junctions of the framing
members and in wall panels as given in 8.8.6 to 8.8.10 a) The superstructure may simply rest on the
plinth masonry, or in the case of small the plinth masonry or concrete foundation as
buildings of one storey having plan area less given in Fig. 45 or in case of small building
than about 50 m2, it may rest on firm plane having plan area less than 50 m2, it may be
ground so that the building is free to slide fixed to vertical poles embedded into the
laterally during ground motion. ground. In each case the building is likely to
NOTES move along with its foundation. Therefore, the
1 Past experience has shown that superstructure of the superstructure shall be designed to carry the
buildings not fixed with the foundation escaped collapse resulting earthquake shears.
even in a severe earthquake although they were shifted
sideways. 8.8.6 Types of Framing
2 Where fittings for water supply or water borne The types of construction usually adopted in timber
sanitation from the house are to be installed, proper
attention should be given to permit movement so as to building are as follows:
avoid fracture of damage to pipes. a) Stud wall construction; and
b) The superstructure may be rigidly fixed into b) Brick nogged timber frame construction.
1)
Grade I timber as defined in Table 5 of good practice [6-4(17)].
possible. If the projecting parts cannot be avoided, they with respect to mass and rigidity so that the centre of
should be properly reinforced and firmly tied to the mass and rigidity of the building coincide with each
main structure, and their design should be in accordance other. It will be desirable to use separate blocks of
with good practice [6-4(7)]. rectangular shape particularly in Seismic Zone V and
NOTE In cases where stability of projecting parts against
Seismic Zone IV.
overturning is achieved by counterweight in the form of wall, NOTE For small buildings, minor asymmetry in plan and
slab, etc, the overturning should be checked by increasing the elevation may be ignored. Designing such buildings against
weight of projecting part and decreasing the weight of torsion may be difficult and uncertain.
stabilizing mass simultaneously in accordance with the vertical
seismic coefficient specified in 4.4.2 of good practice [6-4(7)]. 9.2.5 Fire Safety
9.2.3.2 Ceiling plaster shall preferably be avoided. Fire frequently follows an earthquake and therefore,
When it is unavoidable, the plaster shall be as thin as buildings shall be constructed to make them fire resistant
possible. in accordance with the provisions of Part 4 Fire and
Life Safety of the Code for fire safety, as relevant.
9.2.3.3 Suspended ceiling shall be avoided as far as
possible. Where provided they shall be light, adequately 9.3 Special Construction Features
framed and secured.
9.3.1 Foundations
9.2.4 Building Configuration
9.3.1.1 For the design of foundations, the provisions
9.2.4.1 In order to minimise torsion, the building should of Part 6 Structural Design, Section 2 Soils and
have a simple rectangular plan and be symmetrical both Foundation of the Code in conjunction with 5 of Part
10.2.12 Wall Tie A metal fastener which connects For clay and concrete masonry, the shear modulus is
wythes of masonry to each other or to other materials. 0.4 times the elastic modulus.
10.5.2.2 Compression
Compressive stress in reinforcement shall not exceed
the following:
a) MS bars confirming to : 130 MPa
confirming to accepted
standard [6-4(18)]
b) HYSD bars confirming to : 190 MPa
accepted standard [6-4(19)]
10.6.1.3 Permissible tensile stress 10.7.2 Different Performance Levels of Masonry Shear
Walls
Provisions of 5.4.2 shall apply.
Masonry buildings rely on masonry shear walls for the
10.6.1.4 Permissible shear stress
lateral load resistance and can be detailed for the
For reinforced masonry members: following three levels of seismic performance, which
can be appropriately chosen for a building considering
a) For flexural members
its importance, location and acceptable degree of
i) Without web reinforcement: damage, etc. Table 30 summarizes the requirement for
Fv = 0.083 fm but not greater than these shear walls and recommended R-values for use
0.25 MPa with good practice [6-4(9)].
ii) With web reinforcement:
Table 30 Reinforcement and R-Values for
Fv = 0.25 f m but not greater than Different Wall Types in Various Seismic Zones
0.75 MPa (Clause 10.7.2)
b) For walls The allowable shear stress for
Sl Type Description Reinforcement Seismic R-
reinforced masonry walls shall be according No. of Zone Value
to Table 29. Wall
1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Table 29 Allowable Shear Stress for Reinforced i) A URM with As per 10.7.2.1 II and 2.5
minimum (a) to (c) III
Masonry Shear Walls, Fv reinforcement
[Clause 10.6.1.4(b)] ii) B RM with As per 10.7.2.1 IV and 3.0
minimum (a) to (c) and V
reinforcement requirements of
Sl Type of Wall M Fv Maximum
Vd ordinary
No. MPa Allowable
reinforced
MPa
masonry
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
iii) C RM with As per 10.7.2.1 IV and 3.0
1 æ M ö minimum (a) to (c) and V
i) Without web a) <1 æ M ö
reinforcement ç4- ÷ fm ç 0.4 - 0.2 ÷ reinforcement requirements of
36 è Vd ø è Vd ø and special special
b) >1 0.083 f m 0.2 reinforcement reinforced
masonry
ii) With web 1 æ M ö æ M ö
reinforcement <1 ç4- ÷ fm ç 0.6 - 0.2 ÷ NOTE R-value is given as per provision of good practice
24 è Vd ø è Vd ø [6-4(9)].
sectional area shall be provided at a maximum spacing both horizontal and vertical direction such that
of 3 m on centre at critical sections namely, the sum of reinforcement area in both
directions shall be at least 0.2 percent of the
1) Corners,
gross cross-sectional area of the wall and
2) Within 400 mm of each side of openings, and minimum reinforcement area in each direction
3) Within 200 mm of the end of the walls. shall be not less than 0.07 percent of the gross
b) Reinforcement around openings need not be cross-sectional area of the wall.
provided for opening smaller than 400 mm in either b) Maximum spacing of horizontal and vertical
direction. reinforcement shall be lesser of,
c) Horizontal reinforcement shall consist of at least two 1) one-third length of shear wall,
bars of 6 mm spaced not more than 400 mm; or bond 2) one-third height of shear wall, and
beam reinforcement shall be provided of at least 3) 1.2 m.
100 mm2 in cross-sectional area spaced not more than c) Minimum cross-sectional area of
3 m. Horizontal reinforcement shall be provided at the reinforcement in vertical direction shall be
bottom and top of wall openings and shall extend at one-third of the required shear reinforcement.
least 500 mm or 40 bar diameters past the openings;
d) Shear reinforcement shall be anchored around
continuously at structurally connected roof and floor
vertical reinforcing bars with a 135° or 180°
levels and within 400 mm of the top of the walls.
standard hook.
10.7.2.2 Ordinary reinforced masonry shear wall
(Type B wall) 11 MASONRY WALLS USING RAT-TRAP BOND
TECHNOLOGY
Design of ordinary reinforced masonry shear walls shall
This type of masonry shall be applicable for masonry
comply with requirements of reinforced masonry wall
structures of not more than 2 storeys constructed in Seismic
as outlined in this document and shall comply with the
Zones II and III. For buildings in other Seismic Zones,
requirements of section 10.7.2.1 (a) to (c).
this type of masonry wall shall be used only in non-load
10.7.2.3 Special reinforced masonry shear wall bearing applications such as partition walls. The provisions
(Type C wall) for this type of masonry shall be as given in Annex H.
Design of special reinforced masonry shear wall shall 12 NOTATIONS AND SYMBOLS
comply with the requirement of reinforced masonry as
The various notations and letter symbols used in the
outlined in this Section and the following.
text of the Section shall have the meaning as given in
a) The masonry shall be uniformly reinforced in Annex J.
A-1 Where a reinforced concrete roof and floor slab spanning from both sides, provided the span of the floor
of normal span (not exceeding 30 times the thickness on one side does not exceed that on the other by more
of wall) bear on external masonry walls, the point of than 15 percent. Where the difference is greater, the
application of the vertical loading shall be taken to be displacement of the point of application of each floor
at the centre of the bearing on the wall. When the span load shall be taken as one-sixth of its bearing width on
is more than 30 times the thickness of wall, the point the wall and the resultant eccentricity calculated
of application of the load shall be considered to be therefrom.
displaced from the centre of bearing towards the span
A-5 For timber and other lightweight floors, even for
of the floor to an extent of one-sixth the bearing width.
full width bearing on wall, an eccentricity of about one-
A-2 In case of a reinforced concrete slab of normal sixth may be assumed due to deflection. For timber
span (that is, less than 30 times the thickness of the floors with larger spans, that is, more than 30 times the
wall), which does not bear on the full width of the wall thickness of the wall, eccentricity of one-third the
and cover tiles or bricks are provided on the external thickness of the wall may be assumed.
face, there is some eccentricity of load. The eccentricity
A-6 In multi-storeyed buildings, fixity and eccentricity
may be assumed to be one-twelfth of the thickness of
have normally purely local effect and are not
the wall.
cumulative. They just form a constant ripple on the
A-3 Eccentricity of load from the roof/floor increases downward increasing axial stress. If the ripple is large,
with the increase in flexibility and thus deflection of it is likely to be more serious at upper levels where it
the slabs. Also, eccentricity of loading increases with can cause cracking of walls than lower down where it
the increase in fixity of slabs/beams at supports. Precast may or may not cause local over-stressing.
RCC slabs are better than in-situ slabs in this regard NOTE The resultant eccentricity of the total loads on a wall
because of very little fixity. If supports are released at any level may be calculated on the assumption that
before further construction on top, fixity is reduced. immediately above a horizontal lateral support, the resultant
eccentricity of all the vertical loads above that level is zero.
A-4 Interior walls carrying continuous floors are
assumed to be axially loaded except when carrying very A-7 For a wall corbel to support some load, the point
flexible floor or roof systems. The assumption is valid of application of the load shall be assumed to be at the
also for interior walls carrying independent slabs centre of the bearing on the corbel.
ANNEX B
(Clause 5.4.1)
CALCULATION OF BASIC COMPRESSIVE STRESS OF MASONRY BY PRISM TEST
B-1 DETERMINATION OF COMPRESSIVE consistency of the mortar, the thickness of mortar joints
STRENGTH OF MASONRY BY PRISM TEST and workmanship shall be the same as will be used in
the structure. Assembled specimen shall be at least
When compressive strength of masonry (fm) is to be
400 mm high and shall have a height to thickness ratio
established by tests, it shall be done in advance of the
(h/t) of at least 2 but not more than 5. If the h/t ratio of
construction, using prisms built of similar materials
the prisms tested is less than 5 in case of brickwork
under the same conditions with the same bonding
and more than 2 in case of blockwork, compressive
arrangement as for the structure. In building the prisms,
strength values indicated by the tests shall be corrected
moisture content of the units at the time of laying, the
by multiplying with the factor indicated in Table 31.
ANNEX C
(Clauses 5.3.3 and 5.4.1.5)
GUIDELINES FOR DESIGN OF MASONRY SUBJECTED TO CONCENTRATED LOADS
ANNEX E
(Clause 8.9)
CONFINED MASONRY BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
E-1 UNDERSTANDING CONFINED MASONRY b) Confining elements, horizontal and vertical tie
CONSTRUCTION elements provide the necessary tensile strength
and ductility to the masonry wall panels and
E-1.1 Confined masonry construction is a building
protect them from disintegration in the
technology that offers an alternative to minimally
specified major earthquakes.
reinforced masonry with RC bands and vertical Bars
and the RC frame construction. It consists of masonry c) Floor and roof slabs, transmit both vertical
walls (made either of clay brick or concrete block units) gravity and lateral loads to the confined
and horizontal and vertical RC confining members masonry walls. In an earthquake the slabs
built on all four sides of the masonry wall panels. behave like rigid horizontal diaphragms.
Vertical members are called tie columns or practical
columns practical columns and though they resemble d) Plinth band or tie beam, shall transmit the
columns in RC frame construction but are of much vertical and horizontal loads from the walls down
smaller cross-section. Horizontal elements, called tie to the foundation. It also protects the ground floor
beams, resemble beams in RC frame construction, but walls from settlement in soft soil conditions.
of much smaller section. It shall be understood that the
e) Foundation, transmits the loads from the
confining elements are not beams and columns the way
these are used in RC frames but rather in the nature of structure to the ground.
horizontal and vertical ties or bands for resisting tensile The masonry wall construction shall follow all detailed
stresses and may better be termed as such. specifications given in this Section except those to be
The structural components of a building using confined modified as per this annex.
masonry walls are as follows (see Fig. 58):
Confined masonry walls can be constructed using
a) Masonry walls, are load bearing elements, and different types of masonry units, such as hollow clay
transmit the gravity loading from the slab(s)
tiles, burnt clay bricks, concrete blocks of hollow or
and walls above down to the foundation. The
solid types or dressed rectangularized stones. In
walls also work as bracing panels acting along
confined masonry, the reinforcement is concentrated
with the confining tie elements which resist
in vertical and horizontal confining elements whereas
the horizontal earthquake forces.
E-3.3 Tie-Beams
a) The minimum tie beam cross-sectional
dimensions are 100 mm × 100 mm in 100 mm
thick walls; 150 mm × 200 mm in 200 mm
thick walls and 150 mm × 230 mm in 230 mm
thick walls.
b) Tie beams are constructed on top of the walls
at each floor level.
c) The tie beam reinforcement should consist of
four high strength deformed bars (HSD/TOR)
for longitudinal reinforcement, and 6 mm
stirrups at 200 mm spacing. The tie beam
reinforcement needs to be continuous, with
58A TYPICAL CONFINED MASONRY BUILDING PLAN
longitudinal reinforcement bars lapped by at
least 50 times the bar diameter. The following FIG . 58 CONFINED MASONRY BUILDING (Continued)
bar diameter may be adopted:
F IG. 63 FLEXURE AND A XIAL WALL LOADING Following convergence, a check is made of the initial
assumption that tension in steel controls. If not valid,
Figure 63 shows the interaction between bending then the compression controls and a new set of
moment and axial load. Loading conditions beyond the equations that do not require iteration are used.
lw
3 P − d ′ + M
2 2
3d − (−3d ) − 4
1 Fm b
2
kd =
2
Inserting the values for P, M, lw, b, d and Fm yields kd.
Note that this method is iterative since a location of d′
shall be assumed.
Having solved for kd one can calculate C.
By ∑Fv = 0, T = C P
From strain compatibility,
1− k
fs = nFm , Thus fs can be calculated.
k
If fs < Fs, the masonry compressive stress controls and
the solution is finished by calculating As = T/fs. If
however, fs > Fs the assumption that masonry stresses
control is incorrect, and the neutral axis location is
wrong.
F IG. 65 FLEXURE BODY DIAGRAM OF A WALL A good starting assumption to calculate fm is to take T
assuming that masonry compressive stresses control,
The problem can be solved by taking moments about and to divide by Fs to get a trial As. This allows the
the centerline of the wall, the tensile reinforcement designer to choose a bar layout and verify the initial
(assuming that masonry compressive stresses control), assumption of d', the distance to the centroid of
or the compressive force (assuming that the stresses in reinforcement.
the reinforcement control). By inserting the allowable
value of stresses, which is assumed to control, a As = T/Fs
quadratic equation in terms of kd may be developed Since C = T + P the effects of the axial load can be
and solved. included by using an effective amount of reinforcement.
For example, if P is at the centerline of the wall, taking P T+P
moments about the centroid of the tensile reinforcement ( A )eff
s = As + (or )
Fs Fs
results in the equation:
ANNEX G
(Clause 10.7.1)
DISTRIBUTION OF LATERAL FORCES IN THE PIERS OF A MASONRY WALL
G-1 Masonry walls are often seen to be perforated to relative rigidity is dependent on the height by length
make arrangement for windows and doors. The ratio (h/L) of the piers and the end conditions of those
distribution of lateral force in a masonry wall is masonry piers as the deflection of the masonry piers
dependent on the position of the openings and the due to horizontal loading changes due to the end
relative rigidity of the masonry piers created due to condition of the piers (see Fig. 66). Here is a simple
the presence of the openings in the masonry wall. The process is described which can be used to distribute
1
1 1
= +
R3,4,5(f) R6(f )
(Vertical combination)
H-3 MATERIALS
H-3.1 Bricks
Burnt clay bricks, heavy duty bricks and bricks made out
of other suitable materials like fly ash, stabilized soil block,
etc, conforming to accepted standards [6-4(21)] with
compressive strength greater than 6.0 MPa shall be used. FIG. 70 A RRANGEMENT IN RAT -TRAP B OND
PLAN
FIG . 72 OPENING IN RAT -TRAP B OND M ASONRY
determines the speed of work and finally the H-4.7 Control of Shrinkage Cracking
cost of the Rat-trap bond wall.
H-4.7.1 To confine cracks to the joints and to dissipate
c) The face jolts of brickwork may be finished these into a large number of fine joints, it is desirable
by jointing or by pointing. In case where that the mortar used shall be weaker than the bricks.
brick size is less, the elevation of the header
bricks to be made even in line with the H-4.7.2 Cracking due to shrinkage normally will
stretcher brick by cement mortar same grade occur at openings or other points where the vertical
as bedding mortar. The main reasons for or horizontal section of a wall changes. A long wall
pointing the surface of block or brickwork with a few openings will tend to show wider cracks
joints are to increase its weather resistance and above and below the openings than a similar wall with
to give a neat finish to the work. Pointing can many openings. Metal reinforcement may be
be carried out as construction of the brickwork embedded in brickwork at points where cracking is
proceeds, using ordinary mortar in which the likely to occur.
bricks are bedded.
H-4.8 Thermal Insulation
H-4.6 Structural and Functional Characteristics of For requirements of thermal insulation in walls, the
Brickwork provisions of good practice [6-4(24)] shall apply.
H-4.6.1 Structural Stability and Strength
H-4.9 Fire Resistance
Reference may be made to Part 6 Structural Design,
For requirements regarding resistance to fire, the
Section 2 Soils and Foundation of the Code, and 4 of
provisions of good practice [6-4(25)] shall apply.
this Section.
H-4.6.2 Resistance to Moisture Penetration H-4.10 Sound Insulation
The suitability of various walls under different Requirements for insulation against airborne sound are
conditions of exposure is indicated in Table 3 of good laid down in good practice [6-4(26)] shall apply.
practice [6-4(4)].
H-5 LAYING OF BRICKWORK
H-4.6.3 Thermal Stresses
H-5.1 Brick shall be laid on a full bed of mortar. When
The coefficient linear expansions of brick vary from laying the bricks, it shall be slightly pressed so that the
5×106/°C to 11×106/°C. Variations of temperature mortar gets into all the pores of the brick surface to
tend to produce linear changes in walls which, when ensure proper adhesion. Cross joints and wall joints
restrained, may lead to internal stress resulting in cracks shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so
especially when the walls exceed 30 m. The effects of that no hollow spaces are left. Properly filled joints
these stresses shall be taken into consideration for a ensure maximum strength and resistance to penetration
proper design. of moisture which takes place mainly through joints.
80 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
H-5.2 The following specific guidelines shall be ensure its satisfactory performance and also to ascertain
followed: whether all the recommended practice of workmanship
is adopted at every stage. As the correct strength of
a) In areas with a very high ground water table,
masonry cannot be ascertained without destruction, a
it is advisable to build the first 4 to 5 courses
close supervision during the course of construction is
of the wall, with either English or a Flemish
necessary to ensure satisfactory performance. The
bond. This is to avoid ground and spill water
strength of brickwork depends on the strength of
related dampness problems.
individual brick, strength of mortar, bond and
b) Always clean the surface where the first layer workmanship.
of bricks is to be laid, which is usually above
the plinth level. H-6.2 Inspection of Materials
c) Arrange the joints between the bricks in such
In case of large works, samples of bricks, sands, Surkhi,
a way that only full bricks (shiners) fit. Ensure
lime, cement, etc, which goes to form the brickwork,
that the bonding is correct.
shall be periodically tested in a laboratory to make sure
d) To properly maintain the brick cross, lay the that they conform to the requirements stated in H-3.
first two masonry courses by marking mark Simple field tests may suffice in the case of small works.
each of the shiner and the header bricks at the
centre. H-6.3 Inspection of Workmanship
e) Place the shiner/stretcher and header brick A close supervision while the work is in progress will
now in such a way that the marks are exactly ensure a better quality work with the materials available
matching. The remaining courses may then be for use. The following shall be observed at the time of
laid to match with the first two courses. inspection:
f) Spread a full bed of mortar, and furrow it with
a trowel. This will ensure that plenty of mortar a) All loose materials, dirt and set lumps of
is on the bottom of the bricks for the first mortar which may be lying over the surface
course. over which brickwork is to be freshly started,
shall be removed with a wire brush.
g) Lay the corner bricks first. Carefully position
the corner bricks first. Be sure to lay all bricks b) All the bricks shall be thoroughly soaked in
with the frog inside the cavity of the wall in potable water before use.
order to create an aesthetically pleasing outer c) The surface over which the brickwork is to be
wall surface. started shall be made moist.
h) The vertical mortar joints shall be applied d) Plastic mortar results in thorough bedding of
directly to the brick before placing it. This the brick and more complete filling of the
requires some special skill, but defines the joints which ensure greater strength. Care shall
strength as well as the stability of the rat-trap be taken to see that the required quantity of
bond wall. water is added to the mortar at the mixing
j) The maximum rat-trap bond brick wall height platform itself and not over the courses.
per day should not exceed more than 9 layers. e) All the joints shall, as far as possible, be thin
k) Cavities of rat-trap bond shall be closed for and the specifications mentioned in H-4.5 in
the first course after damp proof course, below this regard shall be strictly adhered to.
sill level, below and above lintel and at the f) Care shall be taken to see that there is no
top most course; this can be made by a layer through joints and the lap is not less than half
of headers or headers. the width of the brick, and that all the vertical
joints are properly filled with mortar.
H-5.3 Protection Against Damage g) The verticality of the walls and horizontality
Care shall be taken during construction that edges of of the courses shall be checked very often with
jambs, sills, heads, etc are not damaged. In inclement plumb bob and spirit level respectively.
weather, newly built work shall be covered with gunny h) No portion of the work shall be left more than
bags or tarpaulin so as to prevent the mortar from being 1 m lower than the other. Where the masonry
washed away. of one part has to be delayed the work shall
be raked back suitably at an angle not
H-6 INSPECTION exceeding 45° according to bond and not
toothed.
H-6.1 General
j) Where plastering is required to be done all
The object of inspection of brick masonry work is to the vertical as well as horizontal joints shall
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 4 MASONRY 81
be raked to a depth of about 10 mm while the compression testing machine and failure load to be
mortar is wet, and this will ensure satisfactory observed. The height of the specimen should be four
adhesion between the plaster and brickwork, brick height. The header layer at top and bottom are
and intended to distribute the load. A similar test as above
k) Care shall be taken to ensure that the brick should be done in an English bond per coupon
work is kept wet for first seven days using (see Fig. 75).
appropriate curing methods.
J-1 The following notations, letter symbols and kp = Shape modification factor
abbreviations shall have the meaning indicated against ks = Stress reduction factor
each, unless otherwise specified in the text of this
L = Actual length of wall
Section of the Code:
L1, L2 = Lower strength mortars
A = Area of a section
M1, M2 = Medium strength mortars
b = Width of bearing
P = Total horizontal load
DPC = Damp proof course PL = Plinth level
e = Resultant eccentricity RCC = Reinforced cement concrete
fb = Basic compressive stress RS = Rolled steel
fc = Permissible compressive stress Sp = Spacing of piers/buttresses/cross walls
fd = Compressive stress due to dead loads SR = Slenderness ratio
fs = Permissible shear stress t = Actual thickness
fm = Compressive strength of masonry (in tp = Thickness of pier
prism test)
tw = Thickness of wall
GL = Ground level
W = Resultant load
H = Actual height between lateral supports
W1 = Axial load
H' = Height of opening W2 = Eccentric load
H1, H2 = High strength mortars wp = Width of piers/buttresses/cross walls
h = Effective height between lateral µ = Ratio of flexural strength of wall in the
supports vertical direction to that in the horizontal
ka = Area factor direction
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards 2185 Specification for concrete
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The masonry units
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time (Part 1) : 2005 Hollow and solid concrete blocks
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (third revision)
be used by the Authority for conformance with the (Part 2) : 1983 Hollow and solid light weight
requirements of the referred clauses in the Code. concrete blocks (first revision)
(Part 3) : 1984 Autoclaved cellular aerated
In the following list, the number appearing in the first
concrete blocks (first revision)
column within parentheses indicates the number of the
(Part 4) : 2008 Preformed foam cellular concrete
reference in this Part/Section.
blocks
IS No. Title 2222 : 1991 Specification for burnt clay
(1) 1077 : 1992 Specification for common burnt perforated building bricks
clay building bricks (fifth (third revision)
revision) 2849 : 1983 Specification for non-load
1725 : 2013 Stabilized soil blocks used in bearing gypsum partition blocks
general building construction (solid and hollow types)
Specification (second revision) (first revision)
2180 : 1988 Specification for heavy duty 3115 : 1992 Specification for lime based
burnt clay building bricks (third blocks (second revision)
revision) 3316 : 1974 Specification for structural
granite (first revision)
FOREWORD
5
SECTION 5A (A) GENERAL
1 SCOPE
7
2 TERMINOLOGY
7
3 SYMBOLS
7
SECTION 5A (B1) MATERIALS, WORKMANSHIP, INSPECTION
AND TESTING
4 MATERIALS
8
5 CONCRETE
11
6 WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE
12
7 DURABILITY OF CONCRETE
13
8 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
17
9 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
19
10 FORMWORK
21
11 ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT
22
12 TRANSPORTING, PLACING, COMPACTION AND CURING
22
13 CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS
24
14 SAMPLING AND STRENGTH OF DESIGNED CONCRETE MIX
25
15 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
26
16 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES
26
SECTION 5A (B2) SPECIAL CONCRETE
16A SELF COMPACTING CONCRETE
27
16B HIGH PERFORMANCE CONCRETE
30
SECTION 5A (C) GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATION
17 BASES FOR DESIGN
32
18 LOADS AND FORCES
32
19 STABILITY OF THE STRUCTURE
33
20 FIRE RESISTANCE
33
21 ANALYSIS
34
22 BEAMS
37
23 SOLID SLABS
39
24 COMPRESSION MEMBERS
41
25 REQUIREMENTS GOVERNING REINFORCEMENT AND DETAILING
41
26 EXPANSION JOINTS
49
SECTION 5A (D) SPECIAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FOR
STRUCTURAL MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS
27 CONCRETE CORBELS
49
28 DEEP BEAMS
50
29 RIBBED, HOLLOW BLOCK OR VOIDED SLAB
51
30 FLAT SLABS
52
31 WALLS
60
32 STAIRS
62
33 FOOTINGS
62
4.2.3.1 For concrete made with mineral admixtures, The nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate should
the setting time and rate of gain of strength may be be as large as possible within the limits specified but in
different from those of concrete made with ordinary no case greater than one-fourth of the minimum
Portland cement alone. Cognizance of such modified thickness of the member, provided that the concrete
properties shall be taken into account in deciding de- can be placed without difficulty so as to surround all
shuttering time, rate of movement of formwork in reinforcement thoroughly and fill the corners of the
slipform construction, initial time of prestressing, form. For most work, 20 mm aggregate is suitable.
longer curing period and for early age loading. The Where there is no restriction to the flow of concrete
compatibility of chemical admixtures and cementitious into sections, 40 mm or larger size may be permitted.
materials should be ensured by trials. In concrete elements with thin sections, closely spaced
reinforcement or small cover, consideration should be
Concrete containing mineral admixtures generally have given to the use of 10 mm nominal maximum size.
equal or improved finishability compared to similar
concrete mixes without them. Mixes that contain high Plums above 160 mm and up to any reasonable size
dosages of mineral admixtures, specially silica fume, may be used in plain concrete work up to a maximum
can be sticky and difficult to finish. limit of 20 percent by volume of concrete when
specifically permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge. The
Concrete containing mineral admixtures may exhibit plums shall be distributed evenly and shall be not closer
an increase in plastic shrinkage cracking because of its than 150 mm from the surface.
low bleeding characteristics. The problem may be
avoided by ensuring that such concrete is protected 4.3.3.1 For heavily reinforced concrete members as in
against drying, both during and after finishing. the case of ribs of main beams, the nominal maximum
4.5.6 If two or more admixtures are used The concrete shall be in grades designated as per
simultaneously in the same concrete mix, data should Table 2.
be obtained to assess their interaction and to ensure
their compatibility. Table 2 Grades of Concrete
(Clauses 5.1, 8.2.2, 14.1.1 and 35.1)
4.5.7 The amount of admixture added to a mix shall
be recorded in the production record. Redosing of Sl Group Grade Specified
admixtures is not normally permitted. In special No. Designation Characteristic
circumstances, if necessary, additional dose of Compressive Strength
of 150 mm Cube at 28
admixture may be added at project site and mixed
Days
adequately in mixer itself to regain the workability of
N/mm2
concrete with the mutual agreement between the
(1) (2) (3) (4)
producer/supplier and the purchaser/user of concrete.
However, the producer/supplier shall assure the i) Ordinary M 10 10
ultimate quality of concrete supplied by him and concrete M 15 15
maintain record of quantity and time of addition. M 20 20
ii) Standard M 25 25
4.6 Reinforcement concrete M 30 30
The reinforcement shall be any of the following M 35 35
conforming to the accepted standards [6-5A(16)]: M 40 40
M 45 45
a) Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars. M 50 50
b) High strength deformed steel bars. M 55 55
c) Hard-drawn steel wire fabric. M 60 60
iii) High M 65 65
d) Structural steel of Grade A. strength M 70 70
concrete
4.6.1 All reinforcement shall be free from loose mill M 75 75
scales, loose rust and coats of paints, oil, mud or any M 80 80
other substances which may destroy or reduce bond. M 90 90
Sand blasting or other treatment is recommended to M 95 95
clean reinforcement. M 100 100
NOTES
1 Cement content given in this table is irrespective of grades of cement.
2 Use of supersulphated cement is generally restricted where the prevailing temperature is above 40°C.
3 Supersulphated cement gives an acceptable life provided that the concrete is dense and prepared with a water-cement ratio of 0.4 or
less, in mineral acids, down to pH 3.5.
4 The cement contents given in col 7 of this table are the minimum recommended. For SO3 contents near the upper limit of any class,
cement contents above these minimum are advised. For the purpose of calculation of SO3 content (if the test results are in the form of
SO4), the following relation shall be used: SO3 = 0.833 SO4.
5 For severe conditions, such as thin sections under hydrostatic pressure on one side only and sections partly immersed, considerations
should be given to a further reduction of water-cement ratio.
6 Portland slag cement conforming to accepted standard [6-5A(21)] with slag content more than 50 percent exhibits better sulphate
resisting properties.
7 Where chloride is encountered along with sulphates in soil or ground water, ordinary Portland cement with C3A content from 5 to
8 percent shall be desirable to be used in concrete, instead of sulphate resisting cement. Alternatively, Portland slag cement conforming
to accepted standard [6-5A(21)] having more than 50 percent slag or a blend of ordinary Portland cement and slag may be used.
7.2.6 Concrete in Aggressive Soils and Water 7.2.8.2 As far as possible, preference shall be given to
precast members unreinforced, well-cured and
7.2.6.1 General hardened, without sharp corners, and having trowel-
The destructive action of aggressive waters on concrete smooth finished surfaces free from crazing, cracks or
is progressive. The rate of deterioration decreases as other defects; plastering should be avoided.
the concrete is made stronger and more impermeable, 7.2.8.3 No construction joints shall be allowed within
and increases as the salt content of the water increases. 600 mm below low water-level or within 600 mm of the
Where structures are only partially immersed or are in upper and lower planes of wave action. Where unusually
contact with aggressive soils or waters on one side only, severe conditions or abrasion are anticipated, such parts
evaporation may cause serious concentrations of salts of the work shall be protected by bituminous or silico-
with subsequent deterioration, even where the original fluoride coatings or stone facing bedded with bitumen.
salt content of the soil or water is not high.
7.2.8.4 In reinforced concrete structures, care shall be
NOTE Guidance regarding requirements for concrete taken to protect the reinforcement from exposure to
exposed to sulphate attack is given in 7.2.2.4. saline atmosphere during storage, fabrication and use.
7.2.6.2 Drainage It may be achieved by treating the surface of
reinforcement with cement wash or by suitable methods.
At sites where alkali concentrations are high or may
become very high, the ground water should be lowered 8 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
by drainage so that it will not come into direct contact
with the concrete. 8.1 Mix Proportion
The mix proportion shall be selected to ensure the
Additional protection may be obtained by the use of
workability of the fresh concrete and when concrete is
suitable impermeable barriers.
hardened, it shall have the required strength, durability
7.2.7 Compaction, Finishing and Curing and surface finish.
Adequate compaction without segregation should be 8.1.1 The determination of the proportions of cement,
ensured by providing suitable workability and by aggregates and water to attain the required strengths
employing appropriate placing and compacting shall be made as follows:
equipment and procedures. Full compaction is particularly
a) By designing the concrete mix; such concrete
important in the vicinity of construction and movement
shall be called Design mix concrete, or
joints and of embedded water bars and reinforcement.
b) By adopting nominal concrete mix; such
Good finishing practices are essential for durable concrete shall be called Nominal mix
concrete. concrete.
The formwork shall be designed and constructed so as Type of Formwork Minimum Period Before
to remain sufficiently rigid during placing and Striking Formwork
compaction of concrete and shall be such as to prevent
loss of slurry from the concrete. For further details For For Concrete Made
regarding design, detailing, etc, reference may be made Concrete Using Cement Other
to good practice [6-5A(28)]. The tolerances on the Made than OPC or Using
shapes, lines and dimensions shown in the drawing shall Using Cementitious
be within the limits given below: OPC Materials Like Fly
Ash and Slag
a) Deviation from : +10 (1) (2) (3)
-5 mm
specified dimensions a) Vertical 16-24 h 16-24 h
of cross-section of formwork to
columns and beams columns, walls,
b) Deviation from beams
dimensions of
b) Soffit formwork 3 days 7 days
footings:
to slabs (Props
1) Dimensions in plan : +50
-10 mm to be refixed
2) Eccentricity : 0.02 times the width of immediately
the footing in the after removal of
direction of deviation formwork)
but not more than c) Soffit formwork 7 days 10 days
50 mm to beams (Props
3) Thickness : +50 mm to be refixed
-10
or immediately
± 0.05 times the after removal of
specified thickness, formwork)
whichever is less d) Props to slabs:
1) Spanning 7 days 10 days
up to 4.5m
These tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, 2) Spanning 14 days 14 days
and not to positioning of vertical reinforcing steel or over 4.5 m
dowels. e) Props to beams
and arches:
10.2 Cleaning and Treatment of Formwork 1) Spanning up 14 days 14 days
All rubbish, particularly, chippings, shavings and to 6 m
sawdust shall be removed from the interior of the forms 2) Spanning 21 days 21 days
before the concrete is placed. The face of formwork in over 6 m
contact with the concrete shall be cleaned and treated NOTE Utmost care shall be taken to provide props. The
with form release agent. Release agents should be props shall be provided immediately after stripping each
shuttering panel and not after stripping all the panels of the
applied so as to provide a thin uniform coating to the entire slab.
forms without coating the reinforcement.
10.3.3 The number of props left under, their sizes and Spacers, chairs and other supports detailed on drawings,
disposition shall be such as to be able to safely carry together with such other supports as may be necessary,
the full dead load of the slab, beam or arch as the case should be used to maintain the specified nominal cover
may be together with any live load likely to occur during to the steel reinforcement. Spacers or chairs should be
placed at a maximum spacing of 1 m and closer spacing
curing or further construction.
may sometimes be necessary.
10.3.4 Where the shape of the element is such that the
Spacers, cover blocks should be of concrete of same
formwork has re-entrant angles, the formwork shall be
strength or PVC.
removed as soon as possible after the concrete has set,
to avoid shrinkage cracking occurring due to the 11.4 Welded Joints or Mechanical Connections
restraint imposed.
Welded joints or mechanical connections in
11 ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT reinforcement may be used but in all cases of important
connections, test shall be made to prove that the joints
11.1 Reinforcement shall be bent and fixed in are of the full strength of bars connected. Welding of
accordance with procedure specified in good practice reinforcements shall be done in accordance with good
[6-5A(29)]. The high strength deformed steel bars practices [6-5A(30)].
should not be re-bent or straightened without the
approval of Engineer-in-Charge. 11.5 Where reinforcement bars upto 12 mm for high
strength deformed steel bars and up to 16 mm for mild
Bar bending schedules shall be prepared for all steel bars are bent aside at construction joints and
reinforcement work. afterwards bent back into their original positions, care
11.2 All reinforcement shall be placed and maintained should be taken to ensure that at no time is the radius of
the bend less than 4 bar diameters for plain mild steel or
in the position shown in the drawings by providing
6 bar diameters for deformed bars. Care shall also be
proper cover blocks, spacers, supporting bars, etc.
taken when bending back bars, to ensure that the concrete
11.2.1 Crossing bars should not be tack-welded for around the bar is not damaged beyond the bend.
assembly of reinforcement unless permitted by
11.6 Reinforcement should be placed and tied in such
Engineer-in-Charge.
a way that concrete placement be possible without
11.3 Placing of Reinforcement segregation of the mix. Reinforcement placing should
allow compaction by immersion vibrator. Within the
Rough handling, shock loading (prior to embedment) concrete mass, different types of metal in contact should
and the dropping of reinforcement from a height should be avoided to ensure that bimetal corrosion does not
be avoided. Reinforcement should be secured against take place.
displacement outside the specified limits.
12 TRANSPORTING, PLACING, COMPACTION
11.3.1 Tolerances on Placing of Reinforcement AND CURING
Unless otherwise specified by Engineer-in-Charge, the
12.1 Transporting and Handling
reinforcement shall be placed within the following
tolerances: After mixing, concrete shall be transported to the
formwork as rapidly as possible by methods which will
a) For effective depth 200 mm : ± 10 mm prevent the segregation or loss of any of the ingredients
or less
22 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
or ingress of foreign matter or water and maintaining recommended method of obtaining a rough surface for
the required workability. the previously poured concrete is to expose the
aggregate with a high pressure water jet or any other
12.1.1 During hot or cold weather, concrete shall be
appropriate means.
transported in deep containers. Other suitable methods
to reduce the loss of water by evaporation in hot weather Fresh concrete should be thoroughly vibrated near
and heat loss in cold weather may also be adopted. construction joints so that mortar from the new concrete
flows between large aggregates and develop proper
12.2 Placing bond with old concrete.
The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable Where high shear resistance is required at the
in its final position to avoid rehandling. The concrete construction joints, shear keys may be provided.
shall be placed and compacted before initial setting of
concrete commences and should not be subsequently Sprayed curing membranes and release agents should
be thoroughly removed from joint surfaces.
disturbed. Methods of placing should be such as to
preclude segregation. Care should be taken to avoid 12.5 Curing
displacement of reinforcement or movement of
formwork. As a general guidance, the maximum Curing is the process of preventing the loss of moisture
permissible free fall of concrete may be taken as 1.5 m. from the concrete whilst maintaining a satisfactory
temperature regime. The prevention of moisture loss
12.3 Compaction from the concrete is particularly important if the water-
cement ratio is low, if the cement has a high rate of
Concrete should be thoroughly compacted and fully
strength development, if the concrete contains
worked around the reinforcement, around embedded
granulated blast furnace slag or pulverized fuel ash.
fixtures and into corners of the formwork.
The curing regime should also prevent the development
12.3.1 Concrete shall be compacted using mechanical of high temperature gradients within the concrete.
vibrators complying with accepted standard [6-5A(31)].
The rate of strength development at early ages of
Over vibration and under vibration of concrete are
concrete made with supersulphated cement is
harmful and should be avoided. Vibration of very wet significantly reduced at lower temperatures.
mixes should also be avoided. Supersulphated cement concrete is seriously affected
Whenever vibration has to be applied externally, the by inadequate curing and the surface has to be kept
design of formwork and the disposition of vibrators moist for at least seven days.
should receive special consideration to ensure efficient 12.5.1 Moist Curing
compaction and to avoid surface blemishes.
Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept continuously
12.4 Construction Joints and Cold Joints in a damp or wet condition by ponding or by covering
with a layer of sacking, canvas, hessian or similar
Joints are a common source of weakness and, therefore,
materials and kept constantly wet for at least seven days
it is desirable to avoid them. If this is not possible,
from the date of placing concrete in case of ordinary
their number shall be minimised. Concreting shall be
Portland Cement and at least 10 days where mineral
carried out continuously up to construction joints, the
admixtures or blended cements are used. The period
position and arrangement of which shall be indicated
of curing shall not be less than 10 days for concrete
by the designer.
exposed to dry and hot weather conditions. In the case
Construction joints shall be placed at accessible of concrete where mineral admixtures or blended
locations to permit cleaning out of laitance, cement cements are used, it is recommended that above
slurry and unsound concrete, in order to create rough/ minimum periods may be extended to 14 days.
uneven surface. It is recommended to clean out 12.5.2 Membrane Curing
laitance and cement slurry by using wire brush on the
surface of joint immediately after initial setting of Approved curing compounds may be used in-lieu of
concrete and to clean out the same immediately moist curing with the permission of the Engineer-
thereafter. The prepared surface should be in a clean in-Charge. Such compounds shall be applied to all
saturated surface dry condition when fresh concrete exposed surfaces of the concrete as soon as possible
is placed, against it. after the concrete has set. Impermeable membranes such
as polyethylene sheeting covering closely the concrete
In the case of construction joints at locations where surface may also be used to provide effective barrier
the previous pour has been cast against shuttering the against evaporation.
a) The mean strength determined from any group M 15 and ³ fck + 0.825 x established standard ³ fck 3
of four non-overlapping consecutive test above deviation (rounded off to nearest 0.5
N/mm2 )
results complies with the appropriate limits
or
in col 2 of Table 11.
fck + 3,
b) Any individual test result complies with the
whichever is greater
appropriate limits in col 3 of Table 11.
NOTES
15.2 Flexural Strength 1 In the absence of established value of standard deviation, the
When both the following conditions are met, the values given in Table 8 may be assumed, and attempt should
be made to obtain results of 30 samples as early as possible to
concrete complies with the specified flexural strength: establish the value of standard deviation.
a) The mean strength determined from any group 2 For concrete of quantity up to 30 m3 (where the number of
samples to be taken is less than four as per the frequency of
of four consecutive test results exceeds the sampling given in 14.2.2), the mean of test results of all such
specified characteristic strength by at least samples shall be fck + 4 N/mm2, minimum and the requirement
0.3 N/mm2. of minimum individual test results shall be fck 2 N/mm2 ,
minimum. However, when the number of sample is only one as
b) The strength determined from any test result per 14.2.2, the requirement shall be fck + 4 N/mm2, minimum.
is not less than the specified characteristic
strength less by 0.3 N/mm2.
15.3 Quantity of Concrete Represented by Strength the hardened concrete may be accepted after carrying
Test Results out suitable remedial measures to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
The quantity of concrete represented by a group of four
consecutive test results shall include the batches from 16 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF
which the first and last samples were taken together STRUCTURES
with all intervening batches.
16.1 Inspection
For the individual test result requirements given in col 3
of Table 11 or in 15.2(b), only the particular batch from To ensure that the construction complies with the design
which the sample was taken shall be at risk. an inspection procedure should be set up covering
materials, records, workmanship and construction.
Where the mean rate of sampling is not specified the
maximum quantity of concrete that four consecutive 16.1.1 Tests should be made on reinforcement and the
test results represent shall be limited to 60 m3. constituent materials of concrete in accordance with
the relevant standards. Where applicable, use should
15.4 If the concrete is deemed not to comply pursuant be made of suitable quality assurance schemes.
to 15.1 or 15.2 as the case may be, the structural
adequacy of the parts affected shall be investigated 16.1.2 Care should be taken to see that,
(see 16) and any consequential action as needed shall a) design and detail are capable of being
be taken. executed to a suitable standard, with due
15.5 Concrete of each grade shall be assessed allowance for dimensional tolerances;
separately. b) there are clear instructions on inspection
standards;
15.6 Concrete is liable to be rejected if it is porous or
c) there are clear instructions on permissible
honey-combed, its placing has been interrupted without
deviations;
providing a proper construction joint, the reinforcement
has been displaced beyond the tolerances specified, or d) elements critical to workmanship, structural
construction tolerances have not been met. However, performance, durability and appearance are
identified; and
a) SF1 (slump flow 550 mm - 650 mm) This SR1 is generally applicable for thin slabs and for vertical
class of SCC is appropriate for, applications with a flow distance of less than 5 m and a
confinement gap greater than 80 mm. SR2 is preferred
1) unreinforced or slightly reinforced
in vertical applications if the flow distance is more than
concrete structures that are cast from the
5 m with a confinement gap greater than 80 mm in order
top with free displacement from the
to take care of segregation during flow. Segregation
delivery point (such as slabs),
resistance becomes an important parameter with higher
2) casting by a pump injection system (such
slump-flow classes and/or the lower viscosity class, or
as tunnel linings), and
if placing conditions promote segregation. If none of
3) sections those are small enough to prevent these apply, it is usually not necessary to specify a
long horizontal flow (for example, piles segregation resistance class.
and some deep foundations).
16A.3.4 Viscosity
b) SF2 (slump flow 650 mm - 750 mm) is suitable
for many normal applications (for example, Viscosity can be assessed by the V-funnel flow time.
walls, columns) Concrete with a low viscosity will have a very quick
c) SF3 (slump flow 750 mm - 850 mm) is initial flow and then stop. Concrete with a high viscosity
typically produced with a small maximum size may continue to creep forward over an extended time.
of aggregates (less than 20 mm) and is used
16A.3.4.1 Procedure
for vertical applications in structures having
congested reinforcement, structures with Viscosity by V-funnel test is carried out in accordance
complex shapes, etc. SF3 will often give better with accepted standard [6-5A(20)]. A V-shaped funnel
surface finish than SF2 for normal vertical is filled with fresh concrete and the time taken for the
applications but segregation resistance is more concrete to flow out of the funnel is measured and
difficult to control. recorded as the V-funnel flow time.
16A.4 Mix Proportioning SCC shall be produced with efficient forced action
concrete mixers. The time necessary to achieve
16A.4.1 Mix Proportion Principles complete mixing of SCC may be longer than for
The principles listed below shall be followed: conventional concrete due to reduced frictional forces
and to fully activate the superplasticizer.
a) Lower coarse aggregate content;
16A.5.4 Formwork
b) Increased paste content;
c) Low water/powder ratio (see Note); Formwork should be watertight and grout tight when
d) High range superplasticizer; and placing SCC. The need to design the formwork for
water tightness is greater than conventional
e) Viscosity modifying admixture, if required.
formwork so as to avoid honeycombs and surface
NOTE Powder is the material of particle size smaller than defects. The high fluid nature of SCC may lead to
0.125 mm. It includes this size fraction in the cement, mineral
admixtures and aggregate.
higher formwork pressure than conventional
concrete, especially when the casting rate is high.
16A.4.2 Mix Design Procedure As a result of the highly fluid nature of SCC, a high
For mix design procedure, reference may be made to placement rate is likely and should be anticipated.
good practice [6-5A(35)]. Formwork designs, that accommodate the expected
liquid head formwork pressure, can allow
16A.5 Production of Self Compacting Concrete unrestricted placement rates and permit fast casting
rate of the SCC. It is recommended to design the
16A.5.1 General
formwork for full liquid head.
SCC is less tolerant to changes in constituent
16A.5.5 Curing
characteristics and batching variances as compared to
conventional concrete. Accordingly, it is important that Curing is essential for all concrete, and early protection
all aspects of the production and placing processes are of exposed surfaces is essential to preventing rapid
carefully supervised. moisture loss that could lead to plastic shrinkage
cracking. The top-surface of elements made with SCC
The production of SCC should be carried out in plants
can dry quickly because of the increased quantity of
where the equipment, operation and materials are
paste, the low water/fines ratio and the lack of bleed
suitably controlled under a Quality Assurance Scheme.
water at the surface. Initial curing should therefore
It is important that all personnel who will be involved
commence as soon as practicable after placing and
in the production and delivery of SCC are adequately
finishing in order to minimise the risk of surface
trained including practical demonstrations.
crusting and shrinkage cracks caused by early age
16A.5.2 Constituents moisture evaporation.
SCC is more sensitive than conventional concrete to 16A.6 Engineering Properties
variation in the physical properties of its constituents
and especially to changes in aggregate moisture content, 16A.6.1 General
grading and shape. So, more frequent production checks SCC and conventional concrete of similar compressive
are necessary. The moisture content of aggregates strength have comparable properties.
should be continuously monitored and the mix adjusted
Unless otherwise specified, the effective span of a The assumptions made shall be consistent for all the
member shall be as follows: members of the structure throughout any analysis.
a) Simply supported beam or slab The 21.3.2 For deflection calculations, appropriate values
effective span of a member that is not built of moment of inertia as specified in Annex C should be
integrally with its supports shall be taken as used.
clear span plus the effective depth of slab or
21.4 Structural Frames
beam or centre-to-centre of supports,
whichever is less. The simplifying assumptions as given in 21.4.1
b) Continuous beam or slab In the case of to 21.4.3 may be used in the analysis of frames.
continuous beam or slab, if the width of the 21.4.1 Arrangement of Imposed Load
support is less than 1/12 of the clear span, the
effective span shall be as given in 21.2 (a). If a) Consideration may be limited to combinations
the supports are wider than 1/12 of the clear of,
Fire Minimum Rib Minimum Minimum Column Dimension (b or D) Minimum Wall Thickness
Resis- Beam Width Thickness
tance Width of of Floors Fully 50% One Face p < 0.4% 0.4% £ p £ 1% p >1%
Slabs Exposed Exposed Exposed
b bw D
h mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
NOTES
1 These minimum dimensions relate specifically to the covers given in Table 16A.
2 p is the percentage of steel reinforcement.
22 BEAMS
MODIFICATION FACTOR
a) The final deflection due to all loads including
the effects of temperature, creep and shrinkage
and measured from the as-cast level of the
supports of floors, roofs and all other
horizontal members, should not normally
exceed span/250.
b) The deflection including the effects of PERCENTAGE COMPRESSION REINFORCEMENT
temperature, creep and shrinkage occurring F IG. 5 MODIFICATION FACTOR FOR COMPRESSION
after erection of partitions and the application REINFORCEMENT
of finishes should not normally exceed
span/350 or 20 mm, whichever is less. e) For flanged beams, the values of (a) or (b) be
22.2.1 The vertical deflection limits may generally be modified as per Fig. 6 and the reinforcement
assumed to be satisfied provided that the span to depth percentage for use in Fig. 4 and Fig. 5 should
ratios are not greater than the values obtained as below: be based on area of section equal to bfd.
NOTE When deflections are required to be calculated,
a) Basic values of span to effective depth ratios the method given in Annex C may be used.
for spans up to 10 m:
Cantilever : 7
Simply supported : 20
Continuous : 26
REDUCTION FACTOR
26 EXPANSION JOINTS
FIG. 11 26.1 Structures in which marked changes in plan
dimensions take place abruptly shall be provided with
c) Pitch and diameter of lateral ties
expansion joints at the section where such changes
1) Pitch The pitch of transverse occur. Expansion joints shall be so provided that the
reinforcement shall be not more than the necessary movement occurs with a minimum resistance
least of the following distances: at the joint. The structures adjacent to the joint should
i) The least lateral dimension of the preferably be supported on separate columns or walls
compression members; but not necessarily on separate foundations.
ii) Sixteen times the smallest diameter Reinforcement shall not extend across an expansion
of the longitudinal reinforcement bar joint and the break between the sections shall be
to be tied; and complete.
iii) 300 mm. 26.2 The details as to the length of a structure where
2) Diameter The diameter of the expansion joints have to be provided can be determined
polygonal links or lateral ties shall be not after taking into consideration various factors, such as
less than one-fourth of the diameter of the temperature, exposure to weather, the time and season
largest longitudinal bar, and in no case of the laying of the concrete, etc. Normally structures
less than 6 mm. exceeding 45 m in length are designed with one or more
d) Helical reinforcement expansion joints. However, in view of the large number
1) Pitch Helical reinforcement shall be of factors involved in deciding the location, spacing
of regular formation with the turns of the and nature of expansion joints, the provision of
helix spaced evenly and its ends shall be expansion joint in reinforced cement concrete structures
anchored properly by providing one and should be left to the discretion of the designer. Good
a half extra turns of the spiral bar. Where practice [6-5A(39)] gives the design considerations,
an increased load on the column on the which need to be examined and provided for.
strength of the helical reinforcement is
SECTION 5A (D) SPECIAL DESIGN
allowed for, the pitch of helical turns shall
REQUIREMENTS FOR STRUCTURAL
be not more than 75 mm, nor more than
MEMBERS AND SYSTEMS
one-sixth of the core diameter of the
column, nor less than 25 mm, nor less than 27 CONCRETE CORBELS
three times the diameter of the steel bar
forming the helix. In other cases, the 27.1 General
requirements of 25.5.3.2 shall be
A corbel is a short cantilever projection which supports
complied with.
a load bearing member and where,
2) The diameter of the helical reinforcement
shall be in accordance with 25.5.3.2 (c) a) the distance av between the line of the reaction
(2). to the supported load and the root of the corbel
30 FLAT SLABS
30.1 General
The term flat slab means a reinforced concrete slab
with or without drops, supported generally without
beams, by columns with or without flared column heads
(see Fig. 12). A flat slab may be solid slab or may have
recesses formed on the soffit so that the soffit comprises
a series of ribs in two directions. The recesses may be
formed by removable or permanent filler blocks.
30.1.1 For the purpose of this clause, the following
definitions shall apply:
a) Column strip — Column strip means a design
strip having a width of 0.25 l2, but not greater
than 0.25 l1 on each side of the column centre-
line, where l 1 is the span in the direction
moments are being determined, measured
centre-to-centre of supports and l2 is the span
transverse to l1, measured centre-to-centre of
supports. NOTE — D e is the diameter of column or column head to be considered for
design and d is effective depth of slab or drop as appropriate.
b) Middle strip — Middle strip means a design
FIG. 12 CRITICAL SECTIONS FOR SHEAR IN FLAT SLABS
αc =
∑K c
30.4.6 Effects of Pattern Loading
Ks
In the direct design method, when the ratio of live load
to dead load exceeds 0.5,
54 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
a) the sum of the flexural stiffness of the columns a) The structure shall be considered to be made
above and below the slab, ∑Kc, shall be such up of equivalent frames on column lines taken
that α c is not less than the appropriate longitudinally and transversely through the
minimum value αc min specified in Table 17; or building. Each frame consists of a row of
b) if the sum of the flexural stiffnesses of the equivalent columns or supports, bounded
columns, ∑Kc, does not satisfy (a), the positive laterally by the centre-line of the panel on each
design moments for the panel shall be side of the centre-line of the columns or
multiplied by the coefficient βs given by the supports. Frames adjacent and parallel to an
following equation : edge shall be bounded by the edge and the
centre-line of the adjacent panel.
wd b) Each such frame may be analysed in its
2− w
αc entirety, or, for vertical loading, each floor
βs = 1 + l 1 − thereof and the roof may be analysed
4 + wd
αc min
separately with its columns being assumed
wl
fixed at their remote ends. Where slabs are
αc is the ratio of flexural stiffness of the thus analysed separately, it may be assumed
columns above and below the slab to the in determining the bending moment at a given
flexural stiffness of the slabs at a joint taken support that the slab is fixed at any support
in the direction moments are being determined two panels distant therefrom provided the slab
and is given by: continuous beyond the point.
c) For the purpose of determining relative stiffness
∑K c of members, the moment of inertia of any slab
αc = or column may be assumed to be that of the
∑K s
gross cross-section of the concrete alone.
where Kc and Ks are flexural stiffnesses of d) Variations of moment of inertia along the axis
column and slab respectively. of the slab on account of provision of drops
shall be taken into account. In the case of
Table 17 Minimum Permissible Values of αc recessed or coffered slab which is made solid
(Clause 30.4.6) in the region of the columns, the stiffening
effect may be ignored provided the solid part
Sl Imposed Load/ Ratio
l1 Value of ac min of the slab does not extend more than 0.15 lef,
No. Dead Load
into the span measured from the centre-line
l2
(1) (2) (3) (4) of the columns. The stiffening effect of flared
i) 0.5 0.5 to 2.0 0 column heads may be ignored.
ii) 1.0 0.5 0.6 30.5.2 Loading Pattern
iii) 1.0 0.8 0.7
iv) 1.0 1.0 0.7 30.5.2.1 When the loading pattern is known, the
v) 1.0 1.25 0.8 structure shall be analysed for the load concerned.
vi) 1.0 2.0 1.2
vii) 2.0 0.5 1.3 30.5.2.2 When the live load is variable but does not
viii) 2.0 0.8 1.5 exceed three-quarters of the dead load, or the nature of
ix) 2.0 1.0 1.6 the live load is such that all panels will be loaded
x) 2.0 1.25 1.9
simultaneously, the maximum moments may be
xi) 2.0 2.0 4.9
assumed to occur at all sections when full design live
xii) 3.0 0.5 1.8
xiii) 3.0 0.8 2.0 load is on the entire slab system.
xiv) 3.0 1.0 2.3
30.5.2.3 For other conditions of live load/dead load
xv) 3.0 1.25 2.8
xvi) 3.0 2.0 13.0
ratio and when all panels are not loaded simultaneously,
a) maximum positive moment near midspan of
30.5 Equivalent Frame Method a panel may be assumed to occur when three-
quarters of the full design live load is on the
30.5.1 Assumptions panel and on alternate panels; and
The bending moments and shear forces may be b) maximum negative moment in the slab at a
determined by an analysis of the structure as a support may be assumed to occur when three-
continuous frame and the following assumptions may quarters of the full design live load is on the
be made: adjacent panels only.
15A
15B
15C 15D
FIG. 15 EFFECT OF OPENINGS ON CRITICAL SECTION FOR SHEAR
Mark a b c d e f g
Length 0.14 ln 0.20 ln 0.22 ln 0.30 ln 0.33 ln 0.20 ln 0.24 ln
FIG . 16 MINIMUM B END JOINT LOCATION AND EXTENSION FOR REINFORCEMENT IN FLAT SLABS
SPAN
(m)
NOTES xu äM
+ ≤ 0.6
1 While considering earthquake effects, substitute EL for WL. d 100
2 For the limit states of serviceability, the values of γf given in
this table are applicable for short term effects. While assessing
where
the long term effects due to creep the dead load and that part of xu = depth of neutral axis,
the imposed load likely to be permanent may only be considered. d = effective depth, and
1) This value is to be considered when stability against overturning
where
Pu = axial load on the member,
fck = characteristic compressive strength of the
concrete,
Ac = area of concrete
fy = characteristic strength of the compression
reinforcement, and
Asc = area of longitudinal reinforcement for
columns.
38.4 Compression Members with Helical
Reinforcement
The strength of compression members with helical
reinforcement satisfying the requirement of 38.4.1 shall
be taken as 1.05 times the strength of similar member
with lateral ties.
0.36 Ag Ac − 1 f ck f y
( )
where
Ag = gross area of the section,
Ac = area of the core of the helically reinforced
column measured to the outside diameter of
the helix,
fck = characteristic compressive strength of the
concrete, and
fy = characteristic strength of the helical
reinforcement but not exceeding 415 N/mm2.
23B STEEL BAR WITH DEFINITE YIELD POINT
38.5 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load
FIG. 23 REPRESENTATIVE STRESS-STRAIN CURVES FOR and Uniaxial Bending
R EINFORCEMENT
A member subjected to axial force and uniaxial bending
subjected to axial compression and bending shall be designed on the basis of 38.1 and 38.2.
and when there is no tension on the section
NOTE The design of member subjected to combined axial
shall be 0.003 5 minus 0.75 times the strain at load and uniaxial bending will involve lengthy calculation by
the least compressed extreme fibre. trial and error. In order to overcome these difficulties interaction
diagrams may be used.
38.2 Minimum Eccentricity
38.6 Members Subjected to Combined Axial Load
All members in compression shall be designed for the and Biaxial Bending
minimum eccentricity in accordance with 24.4. Where
The resistance of a member subjected to axial force
calculated eccentricity is larger, the minimum
and biaxial bending shall be obtained on the basis of
eccentricity should be ignored.
assumptions given in 38.1 and 38.2 with neutral axis
38.3 Short Axially Loaded Members in Compression so chosen as to satisfy the equilibrium of load and
moments about two axes. Alternatively, such members
The member shall be designed by considering the may be designed by the following equation:
assumptions given in 38.1 and the minimum
eccentricity. When the minimum eccentricity as per 24.4 M uy
M ux
αn αn
does not exceed 0.05 times the lateral dimension, the + ≤ 1.0
M ux1 M uy1
members may be designed by the following equation:
Mux1, Muy1 = maximum uniaxial moment capacity for 38.7.1.1 The values given by equation 38.7.1 may be
an axial load of Pu, bending about x and multiplied by the following factor:
y axes, respectively; and
Puz − Pu
αn is related to Pu/Puz k= ≤1
Puz − Pb
where where
Puz = 0.45 fck·Ac + 0.75fy·Asc
Pu = axial load on compression member,
For values of Pu/Puz = 0.2 to 0.8, the values of αn vary Puz = as defined in 38.6, and
linearly from 1.0 to 2.0. For values less than 0.2, αn is
Pb = axial load corresponding to the condition of
1.0; for values greater than 0.8, αn is 2.0.
maximum compressive strain of 0.003 5 in
38.7 Slender Compression Members concrete and tensile strain of 0.002 in outer
most layer of tension steel.
The design of slender compression members (see 24.1.1)
shall be based on the forces and the moments determined 39 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE: SHEAR
from an analysis of the structure, including the effect of
deflections on moments and forces. When the effect of 39.1 Nominal Shear Stress
deflections are not taken into account in the analysis, The nominal shear stress, tv, in beams of uniform depth
additional moment given in 38.7.1 shall be taken into shall be obtained by the following equation:
account in the appropriate direction.
Vu
38.7.1 The additional moments Max and May shall be τv =
calculated by the following formulae: bd
where
2
P D l Vu = shear force due to design loads;
M ax = u ex
2 000 D
b = breadth of the member, which for flanged
2 section shall be taken as the breadth of the
Pu b ley web, bw; and
M ay =
2 000 b
d = effective depth.
where 39.1.1 Beams of Varying Depth
Pu = axial load on the member, In the case of beams of varying depth the equation shall
lex = effective length in respect of the major axis, be modified as:
ley = effective length in respect of the minor axis, Mu
Vu ± tan β
D = depth of the cross-section at right angles to d
the major axis, and
τv =
bd
b = width of the member. where
For design of section, 38.5 or 38.6 as appropriate shall τv, Vu, b and d are the same as in 39.1,
apply. Mu = bending moment at the section, and
NOTES β = angle between the top and the bottom edges
1 A column may be considered braced in a given plane if lateral
of the beam.
stability to the structure as a whole is provided by walls or
bracing or buttressing designed to resist all lateral forces in The negative sign in the formula applies when the
that plane. It should otherwise be considered as unbraced. bending moment Mu increases numerically in the same
2 In the case of a braced column without any transverse loads direction as the effective depth d increases, and the
occurring in its height, the additional moment shall be added
to an initial moment equal to sum of 0.4 Mu1 and 0.6 Mu2 where positive sign when the moment decreases numerically
Mu2 is the larger end moment and Mu1 is the smaller end moment in this direction.
(assumed negative if the column is bent in double curvature).
In no case shall the initial moment be less than 0.4 Mu2 nor the 39.2 Design Shear Strength of Concrete
total moment including the initial moment be less than Mu2.
For unbraced columns, the additional moment shall be added 39.2.1 The design shear strength of concrete in beams
to the end moments. without shear reinforcement is given in Table 19.
Sl Concrete Grade tc max , N/mm2 2.5 2.8 3.1 3.5 3.7 4.0
Ag
No. 100
bd
M 15 M 20 M 25 M 30 M 35 M 40 and
Above 39.2.3 With Shear Reinforcement
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
Under no circumstances, even with shear reinforcement,
i) £ 0.15 0.28 0.28 0.29 0.29 0.29 0.30 shall be nominal shear stress in beams τv exceed τc max
ii) 0.25 0.35 0.36 0.36 0.37 0.37 0.38
given in Table 20.
iii) 0.50 0.46 0.48 0.49 0.50 0.50 0.51
iv) 0.75 0.54 0.56 0.57 0.59 0.59 0.60 39.2.3.1 For solid slabs, the nominal shear stress shall
v) 1.00 0.60 0.62 0.64 0.66 0.67 0.68
vi) 1.25 0.64 0.67 0.70 0.71 0.73 0.74 not exceed half the appropriate values given in Table 20.
vii) 1.50 0.68 0.72 0.74 0.76 0.78 0.79
viii) 1.75 0.71 0.75 0.78 0.80 0.82 0.84 Maximum shear stress, τcmax given in Table 20 is valid
ix) 2.00 0.71 0.79 0.82 0.84 0.86 0.88 for all load cases including earthquake except the
x) 2.25 0.71 0.81 0.85 0.88 0.90 0.92 following:
xi) 2.50 0.71 0.82 0.88 0.91 0.93 0.95
xii) 2.75 0.71 0.82 0.90 0.94 0.96 0.98 a) For coupled beams only, under earthquake
xiii) 3.00 and 0.71 0.82 0.92 0.96 0.99 1.01
above
forces, the limiting value of τcmax given in
NOTE The term Ag is the area of longitudinal tension
Table 20 shall be superseded by F-9.
reinforcement which continues at least one effective depth b) Coupled shear walls shall be connected by
beyond the section being considered except at support where ductile coupling beams. If the earthquake
the full area of tension reinforcement may be used provided
induced shear stress in the coupling beam
the detailing conforms to 25.2.2 and 25.2.3.
exceeds,
0.1 l2 fck
39.2.1.1 For solid slabs, the design shear strength for
concrete shall be τck, where k has the values given D
below: where ls is the clear span of the coupling beam
and D is its overall depth, the entire earthquake
Overall 300 275 250 225 200 175 150 induced shear and flexure shall, preferably,
Depth of or or be resisted by diagonal reinforcement.
Slab more less The area of reinforcement to be provided
mm along each diagonal in a diagonally reinforced
k 1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 coupling beam shall be,
Vu
NOTE This provision shall not apply to flat slabs for which Asd =
30.6 shall apply. 1.74 f y sin α
39.2.2 Shear Strength of Members Under Axial where Vu is the factored shear force and α is
Compression the angle made by the diagonal reinforcement
with the horizontal. At least 4 bars of 8 mm
For members subjected to axial compression Pu, the diameter shall be provided along each diagonal.
design shear strength of concrete, given in Table 19, The reinforcement along each diagonal shall
shall be multiplied by the following factor: be enclosed by special confining reinforcement,
as per F-7. The pitch of spiral or spacing of
3Pu ties shall not exceed 100 mm.
δ = 1+ but not exceeding 1.5
Ag f ck The diagonal or horizontal bars of a coupling
where beam shall be anchored in the adjacent walls
with an anchorage length of 1.5 times the
Pu = axial compressive force, in N; development length in tension.
Ag = gross area of the concrete section, in mm2;
and 39.3 Minimum Shear Reinforcement
fck = characteristic compressive strength of When τv is less than τc given in Table 19, minimum
concrete. shear reinforcement shall be provided in accordance
with 25.5.1.6.
39.5 Enhanced Shear Strength of Sections Close to The procedure given in 39.5.1 and 39.5.2 may be used
Supports for all beams. However, for beams carrying generally
uniform load or where the principal load is located
39.5.1 General farther than 2d from the face of support, the shear stress
In structures, where torsion is required to maintain 40.4.1 Reinforcement for torsion, when required, shall
equilibrium, members shall be designed for torsion in consist of longitudinal and transverse reinforcement.
accordance with 40.2 to 40.4. However, for such 40.4.2 Longitudinal Reinforcement
indeterminate structures where torsion can be
eliminated by releasing redundant restraints, no specific The longitudinal reinforcement shall be designed to
design for torsion is necessary, provided torsional resist an equivalent bending moment, Me1, given by:
stiffness is neglected in the calculation of internal Me1 = Mu + Mt
forces. Adequate control of any torsional cracking is
provided by the shear reinforcement as per 39. where
NOTE The approach to design in this clause is as follows: Mu = bending moment at the cross-section, and
Torsional reinforcement is not calculated separately from that
required for bending and shear. Instead the total longitudinal
(1 + D/ b)
Mt = Tu
reinforcement is determined for a fictitious bending moment 1.7
which is a function of actual bending moment and torsion;
similarly web reinforcement is determined for a fictitious shear
where
which is a function of actual shear and torsion. Tu is the torsional moment, D is the overall depth of
40.1.1 The design rules laid down in 40.3 and 40.4 the beam and b is the breadth of the beam.
shall apply to beams of solid rectangular cross-section. 40.4.2.1 If the numerical value of M t as defined
However, these clauses may also be applied to flanged in 40.4.2 exceeds the numerical value of the moment
beams, by substituting bw for b in which case they are Mu, longitudinal reinforcement shall be provided on
generally conservative; therefore specialist literature the flexural compression face, such that the beam can
may be referred to. also withstand an equivalent M e2 given by
40.2 Critical Section Me2 = Mt Mu, the moment Me2 being taken as acting in
the opposite sense to the moment Mu.
Sections located less than a distance d, from the face
of the support may be designed for the same torsion as 40.4.3 Transverse Reinforcement
computed at a distance d, where d is the effective depth. Two legged closed hoops enclosing the corner longitudinal
bars shall have an area of cross-section Asv, given by:
40.3 Shear and Torsion
40.3.1 Equivalent Shear Tu sv Vu sv
Asv = +
b1d1 0.87 f y 2.5d1 0.87 f y
( ) ( )
Equivalent shear V e, shall be calculated from the
formula: but the total transverse reinforcement shall not be less
than
Tu
Ve = Vu +1.6
b ( τve −τc )b.sv
where ( 0.87 f y )
Ve = equivalent shear, where
Vu = shear,
Tu = torsional moment,
Tu = torsional moment, and
Vu = shear force,
b = breadth of beam.
sv = spacing of the stirrup reinforcement,
The equivalent nominal shear stress τve in this case shall
b1 = centre-to-centre distance between corner
be calculated as given in 39.1, except for substituting
bars in the direction of the width,
Vu by Ve. The values of τve shall not exceed the values
of τc max given in Table 20. d1 = centre-to-centre distance between corner
bars,
ANNEX A
(Clause 16B.2.4.1)
DESIGN OF STEEL FIBRE REINFORCED CONCRETE
A-3.1 General
SFRC shall be classified in terms of both its
characteristic compressive (cylinder) strength ( f 'c)
(see A-3.2) and its characteristic residual tensile
strength ( f '1.5) (see A-3.3.3).
LEGEND
1 TRANSDUCER (CLIP GAUGE)
2 KNIFE EDGE
NOTES
Act
1 The satisfaction of limits on the concrete tensile stress at the Ast,min = k1kc k p f ct,ef − 1.1 f1.5
′
f s,max
≥ 0.0 (mm2 )
serviceability limit state is not necessary if the member
performance is satisfactory at the ultimate limit state.
2 Compressive stresses are limited to avoid large time-
where
dependent deformations and to ensure creep behaviour remains
As,min = minimum area of reinforcement required
linear with respect to stress. Restrictions on the tensile stress
in SFRC are not necessary provided the member satisfies all within the tensile zone (mm2). If Zst,min is
other requirements at the strength and serviceability limit states. zero only steel fibres are necessary to control
cracking.
A-4.5.2.2 Reinforcing steel
Act = area of concrete within the tensile zone
To avoid any inelastic deformation that could lead to (mm2). The tensile zone is that part of the
large, permanently open cracks, tensile stresses in the cross-section calculated to be in tension just
reinforcement at the serviceability limit states shall not before formation of the first crack.
exceed 0.8fsy.
fs,max = maximum stress permitted in the
A-4.5.3 Minimum Reinforcement for Crack Control reinforcement immediately after formation
of the crack.
The minimum amount of longitudinal reinforcement
required to obtain controlled crack formation shall be: fct,ef = tensile strength of the concrete effective at
the time when the cracks may first be
immediate deflection caused by the sustained load by the b) determined statistically from tests.
deflection multiplier kcs. The deflection multiplier depends on
the ratio A sc/A st, where A sc is the area of the longitudinal
reinforcement in the compressive zone of the cracked section Table 21 Elevated Temperature Coefficient for
(that is, between the neutral axis and the extreme compressive Residual Tensile Stress of SFRC
fibre of the cracked cross-section) and Ast is the area of the
(Clause A-6)
tensile reinforcement.
B-2.1 Permissible Stresses in Concrete Where stresses due to wind (or earthquake),
temperature and shrinkage effects are combined with
Permissible stresses for the various grades of concrete those due to dead and imposed load, the stresses
shall be taken as those given in Tables 25 and 27. specified in Tables 25, 26 and 27 may be exceeded
NOTE For increase in strength with age, 5.2.1 shall be 1
applicable. The values of permissible stress shall be obtained upto a limit of 33 percent. Wind and seismic forces
3
by interpolation between the grades of concrete. need not be considered as acting simultaneously.
B-2.1.1 Direct Tension
For members in direct tension, when full tension is taken
All values in N/mm2. B-3.1 Pedestals and Short Columns with Lateral
Ties
Sl Grade of Permissible Stress in Permissible Stress in
No. Concrete Compression Bond (Average) for The axial load P permissible on a pedestal or short
Plain Bars in column reinforced with longitudinal bars and lateral ties
Tension
Bending Direct tbd
shall not exceed that given by the following equation:
scbc scc
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) P = σcc Ac + σsc Asc
i) M 10 3.0 2.5 where
ii) M 15 5.0 4.0 0.6
iii) M 20 7.0 5.0 0.8 σcc = permissible stress in concrete in direct
iv) M 25 8.5 6.0 0.9 compression,
v) M 30 10.0 8.0 1.0
vi) M 35 11.5 9.0 1.1 Ac = cross-sectional area of concrete excluding
vii) M 40 13.0 10.0 1.2 any finishing material and reinforcing steel,
viii) M 45 14.5 11.0 1.3
ix) M 50 16.0 12.0 1.4 Asc = cross-sectional area of the longitudinal steel.
x) M 55 18.0 13.5 1.5 NOTE The minimum eccentricity mentioned in 24.4 may
xi) M 60 20.0 15.0 1.6
be deemed to be incorporated in the above equation.
NOTES
1 The values of permissible shear stress in concrete are given B-3.2 Short Columns with Helical Reinforcement
in Table 27.
2 The bond stress given in col 4 shall be increased by 25 percent The permissible load for columns with helical
for bars in compression. reinforcement satisfying the requirement of 38.4.1 shall
be 1.05 times the permissible load for similar member
with lateral ties or rings.
Table 26 Permissible Stresses in Steel Reinforcement
(Clauses B-2.2, B-2.2.1, B-2.3 and B-4.2)
ψ cs is shrinkage curvature = k4
εcs
where
D
Ir = moment of inertia of the cracked section,
where εcs is the ultimate shrinkage strain of concrete
f cr I gr (see 5.2.4),
Mr = cracking moment, equal to where
yt Pt − Pc
fcr = modulus of rupture of concrete, k4 = 0.72 × ≤ 1.0 for 0.25 ≤ Pt − Pc < 1.0
Pt
Igr = moment of inertia of the gross section about
the centroidal axis, neglecting the Pt − Pc
reinforcement, and yt is the distance from = 0.65 × ≤ 1.0 for Pt − Pc ≥ 1.0
Pt
centroidal axis of gross section, neglecting
the reinforcement, to extreme fibre in where
tension,
M = maximum moment under service loads, 100 Ast 100 Asc
Pt = and Pc =
z = lever arm, bd bd
x = depth of neutral axis, and D is the total depth of the section, and l
d = effective depth, is the length of span.
bw = breadth of web, and Table 29 Values of Coefficient, k1
b = breadth of compression face. (Clause C-2)
For continuous beams, deflection shall be calculated
k2 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4
using the values of I r, Igr and Mr modified by the or
following equation: less
k1 0 0.03 0.08 0.16 0.30 0.50 0.73 0.91 0.97 1.0
X + X2
X e = k1 1 + (1 − k1 ) X o
2 NOTE k2 is given by:
where M1 + M 2
k2 =
M F1 + M F2
Xe = modified value of X, where
X1, X2 = values of X at the supports, M1, M2 = support moments, and
MF1, MF2 = fixed end moments.
Xo = value of X at mid span,
ANNEX D
(Clauses 23.4 and 36.1.2)
SLABS SPANNING IN TWO DIRECTIONS
Sl Case Type of Panel and Short Span Coefficients ax (Values of ly/lx) Long Span
No. No. Moments Considered Coefficients
áy for All
Values of
1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0 ly/lx
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12)
i) 1 Interior panels:
Negative moment at 0.032 0.037 0.043 0.047 0.051 0.053 0.060 0.065 0.032
continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span 0.024 0.028 0.032 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.045 0.049 0.024
ii) 2 One short edge discontinuous:
Negative moment at 0.037 0.043 0.048 0.051 0.055 0.057 0.064 0.068 0.037
continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span 0.028 0.032 0.036 0.039 0.041 0.044 0.048 0.052 0.028
iii) 3 One long edge discontinuous:
Negative moment at 0.037 0.044 0.052 0.057 0.063 0.067 0.077 0.085 0.037
continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span 0.028 0.033 0.039 0.044 0.047 0.051 0.059 0.065 0.028
iv) 4 Two adjacent edges discontinuous:
Negative moment at 0.047 0.053 0.060 0.065 0.071 0.075 0.084 0.091 0.047
continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span 0.035 0.040 0.045 0.049 0.053 0.056 0.063 0.069 0.035
v) 5 Two short edges discontinuous:
Negative moment at 0.045 0.049 0.052 0.056 0.059 0.060 0.065 0.069 -
continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span 0.035 0.037 0.040 0.043 0.044 0.045 0.049 0.052 0.035
vi) 6 Two long edges discontinuous:
Negative moment at 0.045
continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span 0.035 0.043 0.051 0.057 0.063 0.068 0.080 0.088 0.035
vii) 7 Three edges discontinuous
(One long edge continuous):
Negative moment at 0.057 0.064 0.071 0.076 0.080 0.084 0.091 0.097
continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span 0.043 0.048 0.053 0.057 0.060 0.064 0.069 0.073 0.043
viii) 8 Three edges discontinuous
(One short edge continuous):
Negative moment at 0.057
continuous edge
Positive moment at mid-span 0.043 0.051 0.059 0.065 0.071 0.076 0.087 0.096 0.043
ix) 9 Four edges discontinuous:
Positive moment at mid-span 0.056 0.064 0.072 0.079 0.085 0.089 0.100 0.107 0.056
ly/ lx 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.75 2.0 2.5 3.0
áx 0.062 0.074 0.084 0.093 0.099 0.104 0.113 0.118 0.122 0.124
áy 0.062 0.061 0.059 0.055 0.051 0.046 0.037 0.029 0.020 0.014
ANNEX E
(Clause 24.2)
EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
E-1 In the absence of more exact analysis, the effective sway column, stability index Q may be computed as
length of columns in framed structures may be obtained given below:
from the ratio of effective length to unsupported length
lef/l given in Fig. 32 when relative displacement of the
Q=
∑P Ä u u
ends of the column is prevented and in Fig. 33 when H u hs
relative lateral displacement of the ends is not
prevented. In the latter case, it is recommended that where
the effective length ratio lef/l may not be taken to be ∑Pu = sum of axial loads on all column in the storey,
less than 1.2.
∆ u = elastically computed first order lateral
NOTES deflection,
1 Figures 31 and 32 are reproduced from The Structural
Engineer No. 7, Volume 52, July 1974 by the permission of Hu = total lateral force acting within the storey,
the Council of the Institution of Structural Engineers, U.K. and
2 In Figs. 31 and 32, β1 and β2 are equal to: hs = height of the storey.
∑ Kc If Q ≤ 0.04, then the column in the frame may be taken
∑K +∑K
c b as no sway column, otherwise the column will be
where the summation is to be done for the members framing considered as sway column.
into a joint at top and bottom respectively; and Kc and Kb being
the flexural stiffness for column and beam, respectively. E-3 For normal usage assuming idealized conditions,
the effective length lef of the compression member in a
E-2 T o determine whether a column is a no sway or a given plane may be assessed on the basis of Table 32.
FIG . 33 EFFECTIVE LENGTH RATIOS FOR A COLUMN IN A FRAME WITHOUT RESTRAINT AGAINST SWAY
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 101
bent bar. But, it may be made of two bars also,
namely a U-link with a 135° hook with an M uAh + M uBs
Vu,b = Vu,bD+L + 1.4
extension of 6 times diameter (but not less than LAB
65 mm) at each end, embedded in the core
concrete, and a cross-tie (see Fig. 37B). where M uAs , M uAh , M uBs and M uBh are
b) the hooks of the links and cross-ties shall sagging and hogging moments of resistance
engage around peripheral longitudinal bars. of the beam section at ends A and B,
Consecutive crossties engaging the same respectively. These shall be calculated as per
longitudinal bars shall have their 90° hooks at this Subsection 5A. LAB is clear span of the
opposite sides of the beam. When the beam. Vu,aD+L and Vu,bD+L are the factored shear
longitudinal reinforcement bars are secured forces at ends A and B, respectively, due to
by cross-ties in beams that have a slab on one vertical loads acting on the span; the partial
side, the 90° hooks of the cross-ties shall be safety factor for dead and live loads shall be
placed on that side. 1.2, and the beam shall be considered to be
simply supported for this estimation.
The design shear force demand at end A of the beam shall
be the larger of the two values of Vu,a computed above.
Similarly, the design shear force demand at end B shall be
the larger of the two values of Vu,b computed above.
20db 20db
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 103
least column nominal design strength) along each F-6.3.2.2 Mechanical couplers
principal plane shall be at least 1.4 times the sum of
nominal design strength of beams meeting at that joint Mechanical couplers {see accepted standard [6-5A(38)]}
in the same plane (see Fig. 41). shall be used. Further, only those mechanical splices
conforming to the above standard and capable of
In the event of a beam-column joint not conforming to developing the specified tensile strength of spliced bar
above, the columns at the joint shall be considered to shall be permitted within a distance equal to two times the
be gravity columns only and shall not be considered as depth of the member from the column face in any location
part of the lateral load resisting system. where yielding of reinforcement is likely to take place.
F-6.2.1.1 The design moments of resistance of a beam F-6.3.2.3 Welded splices
shall be estimated based on the principles of mechanics
and the limiting strain states of the limit state design Welded splices shall not be used in columns for a
method enunciated in this Subsection 5A. The design distance equal to two times the depth of the member
moment of resistance of a column shall be estimated from the member face or in any location where yielding
as in case of beams corresponding to zero axial force of reinforcement is likely to take place. At any location,
on the design P-M interaction diagram. not more than 50 percent of area of steel bars shall be
spliced at any one section. But, welding of links, ties,
F-6.2.1.2 This check shall be performed at each joint inserts or other similar elements to vertical
for both positive and negative directions of shaking in reinforcement bars required as per design is not
the plane under consideration. Further, in this check, permitted, in any seismic zone.
design moments of resistance in beam(s) meeting at a
joint shall be considered in the same direction, and
similarly the design moments of resistance of column(s)
at the same joint shall be considered to be in the
direction opposite to that of the moments in the beams.
F-6.2.1.3 This check shall be waived at all joints at
roof level only, in buildings more than 4 storeys tall.
The provisions of F-6.2 are not applicable for flat slab
structures.
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 105
hc>300m
FIG . 44 EQUILIBRIUM DESIGN SHEAR FORCE DEMAND ON COLUMN WHEN P LASTIC HINGES
ARE F ORMED AT B EAM E NDS
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 107
Where the column is supported on a wall, this The nominal shear strength τjc of concrete in a beam-
reinforcement shall be provided over the full height of column joint shall be taken as:
the column; it shall also be provided below the
discontinuity for the same development length. 1.5 A f for joints confined by beams
ej ck on all four faces
τ jc = 1.2 Aej f ck
for joints confined by beams
on three faces
1.0 Aej f ck for other joints
where Aej is effective shear area of joint given by bjwj,
in which bj is the effective breadth of joint perpendicular
to the direction of shear force and wj the effective width
of joint along the direction of shear force. The effective
width of joint bj (see Fig. 48) shall be obtained from
following:
min [bb; bc + 0.5hc] if bc < bb
where
bb = width of beam. bc = width of column.
hc = Depth of column in considered direction.
FIG. 47 C OLUMNS WITH VARIABLE STIFFNESS
F-8.1.2 Design Shear Stress Demand on a Joint
F-8 BEAM-COLUMN JOINTS OF MOMENT- a) Design shear stress demand acting
RESISTING FRAMES horizontally along each of the two principal
plan directions of the joint shall be estimated
F-8.1 Design of Beam-Column Joint for
from earthquake shaking considered along
Distortional Shear
each of these directions, using,
F-8.1.1 Shear Strength of Concrete in a Joint
FIG. 48 PLAN VIEW OF A BEAM C OLUMN JOINT SHOWING EFFECTIVE B READTH AND WIDTH OF JOINT
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 109
Table 33 Minimum Reinforcement in of horizontal steel as per F-9.1.5; and
RC Shear Walls c) less than design shear strength τc of concrete,
(Clause F-9.1.6 ) horizontal shear reinforcement shall be the
minimum area of horizontal steel as per
Sl Type of Reinforcement Details
No. Wall
F-9.1.5.
(1) (2) (3)
F-9.3 Design for Axial Force and Bending Moment
i) Squat walls ( r h ) min = 0.002 5
F-9.3.1 Design moment of resistance Mu of the wall
æ h ö section subjected to combined bending moment and
( r v ) min = 0.002 5 + 0.5 ç1 - w ÷ ( r h - 0.002 5
è Lw ø
compressive axial load shall be estimated in accordance
æ ö with requirements of limit state design method given
(r ) = (r ) + ç Ltw
÷ . éë0.02 - 2.5 ( rv,web )ùû
è ø in this Subsection 5A, using the principles of mechanics
v,net v,web
w
F-9.5.1 Coplanar special structural walls may be F-9.6.2 Additional steel reinforcement shall be
connected by means of coupling beams. provided along all four edges of openings in walls.
Further,
F-9.5.2 If earthquake induced shear stress τ ve in
coupling beam exceeds, a) the area of these vertical and horizontal steel
should be equal to that of the respective
L interrupted bars, provided half on either side
τve > 0.1 fck s , of the wall in each direction.
D
b) these vertical bars should extend for full height
where Ls is clear span of coupling beam and D overall of the storey in which this opening is present.
depth, the entire earthquake-induced shear, bending
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 111
c) the horizontal bars should be provided with distance equal to two times the depth of the member
development length in tension beyond the from the beam-column joint or in any location where
edge of the opening. yielding of reinforcement is likely to take place
Vertical reinforcement across a horizontal construction Welded splices shall be avoided as far as possible. In
joint shall have area, Ast is given by: no case shall they be used for a distance equal to two
times the depth of the member from the member face
Ast 0.92 P or in any location where yielding of reinforcement is
≥ τv − u likely to take place. At any location, not more than
Ag f y Ag
50 percent of area of steel bars shall be spliced at any
where τv is factored shear stress at the joint, Pu factored one section.
axial force (positive for compression), and Ag gross Welding of links, ties, inserts or other similar elements
cross-sectional area of joint. to vertical reinforcement bars required as per design is
not permitted, in any seismic zone.
F-9.8 Development, Splice and Anchorage
Requirement F-9.8.4 In buildings located in Seismic Zones II and
III, closed loop transverse links shall be provided
F-9.8.1 Horizontal reinforcement shall be anchored around lapped spliced bars larger than 16 mm in
near the edges of wall or in confined core of boundary diameter. The minimum diameter of such links shall
elements. be 1/4th of diameter of spliced bar but not less than
F-9.8.2 In slender walls (H/Lw > 2), splicing of vertical 8 mm at spacing not exceeding 150 mm centres.
flexural reinforcement should be avoided, as far as
F-9.9 Moment of Resistance of Rectangular Shear
possible, in regions where flexural yielding may take
Wall Section
place, which extends for a distance larger of,
The moment of resistance Mu of a slender rectangular
a) Lw above the base of the wall; and
structural wall section with uniformly distributed
b) 1/6th of the wall height; vertical reinforcement may be estimated as:
but not larger than 2Lw.
F-9.8.3 Splices a) For ( xu Lw ) < xu* Lw( )
F-9.8.3.1 Lap splices Mu λ 1 x
= ϕ 1 + − 0.416 u −
When adopted, closed links shall be provided over the fck tw L2w ϕ 2 Lw
entire length over which the longitudinal bars are
2
spliced. Further, xu β2
0.168 +
Lw 3
a) the spacing of these links shall not exceed
150 mm.
where
b) the lap length shall not be less than the
development length of the largest longitudinal xu
= ;
ϕ+λ
reinforcement bar in tension. Lw 2ϕ + 0.36
c) lap splices shall be provided only in the central
x*u 0.003 5
half of clear wall height, and not, =
Lw 0.003 5 + (0.002 + 0.87 f y /Es )
1) within a joint; or
2) within a distance of 2d from a location 0.87 f yρ
= ;
where yielding of reinforcement is likely
ϕ
fck
to take place.
Pu
d) not more than 50 percent of area of steel bars λ =
shall be spliced at any one section. fck tw Lw
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 113
ANNEX G
(Clauses 34.3.2 and 42.1)
CALCULATION OF CRACK WIDTH
Provided that the strain in the tension reinforcement is Alternatively, as an approximation, it will normally be
limited to 0.8 Fy/Es, the design surface crack width, satisfactory to calculate the steel stress on the basis of
which should not exceed the appropriate value given a cracked section and then reduce this by an amount
in 34.3.2 may be calculated from the following equal to the tensile force generated by the triangular
equation: distributions, having a value of zero at the neutral axis
and a value at the centroid of the tension steel of
Design surface crack width:
1 N/mm2 instantaneously, reducing to 0.55 N/mm2 in
3acr ε m the long-term, acting over the tension zone divided by
Wcr = the steel area.
2 ( 2acr − C min )
1+
h−x These assumptions are illustrated in Fig. 50,
where For a rectangular tension zone, this gives:
acr = distance from the point considered to the
b ( h − x ) (a − x )
surface of the nearest longitudinal bar. ε m = ε1 −
3Es As ( d − x )
Cmin = minimum cover to the longitudinal bar,
εm = average steel strain at the level considered, where
h = overall depth of the member, and As = area of tension reinforcement,
x = depth of the neutral axis. b = width of the section at the centroid of the
The average steel strain εm may be calculated on the tension steel,
basis of the following assumption: ε1 = strain at the level considered, calculated
ignoring the stiffening of the concrete in the
The concrete and the steel are both considered to be tension zone,
fully elastic in tension and in compression. The elastic a = distance from the compression face to the
modulus of the steel may be taken as 200 kN/mm2 and point at which the crack width is being
the elastic modulus of the concrete is as derived from calculated, and
the equation given in 5.2.3.1 both in compression and
d = effective depth.
in tension.
FIG . 50
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 115
xu,max xu,max where yf = (0.15 xu + 0.65 Df), but not greater than Df
M u = 0.36 1 − 0.42 fckbw d +
2
and the other symbols are same as in H-1.1 and H-2.2.
D D
H-2.3 For xu,max > xu > Df, the moment of resistance
y may be calculated by the equations given in H-2.2 when
0.45 f ck (bf − bw ) yf d − f
2 Df/xu does not exceed 0.43 and H-2.2.1 when Df/xu
exceeds 0.43; in both cases substituting xu,max by xu.
LIST OF STANDARDS
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (2) 4845 : 1968 Definitions and terminology
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The relating to hydraulic cement
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time 6461 Glossary of terms relating to
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may cement:
be used by the Authority for conformance with the (Part 1) : 1972 Concrete aggregates
requirements of the referred clauses in the Code. (Part 2) : 1972 Materials
In the following list, the number appearing in the first (Part 3) : 1972 Concrete reinforcement
column within parentheses indicates the number of the (Part 4) : 1972 Types of concrete
reference in this Subsection. (Part 5) : 1972 Formwork for concrete
IS No. Title (Part 6) : 1972 Equipment, tool and plant
(1) 3370 Concrete structures for the (Part 7) : 1973 Mixing, laying, compaction,
storage of liquids Code of curing and other construction
practice aspect
(Part 1) : 2009 General requirements (first (Part 8) : 1973 Properties of concrete
revision) (Part 9) : 1973 Structural aspects
(Part 2) : 2009 Reinforced concrete structures (Part 10) : 1973 Tests and testing apparatus
(first revision) (Part 11) : 1973 Prestressed concrete
2210 : 1988 Criteria for design of reinforced (Part 12) : 1973 Miscellaneous
concrete shell structures and (3) 269 : 2015 Ordinary Portland cement
folded plates (first revision) Specification (sixth revision)
3201 : 1988 Criteria for design and 8041 : 1990 Specification for rapid hardening
construction of precast-trusses Portland cement (second
and purlins (first revision) revision)
4090 : 1967 Criteria for design of reinforced 455 : 2015 Specification for Portland slag
concrete arches cement (fifth revision)
4991 : 1968 Criteria for blast resistant design
1489 Specification for Portland
of structures for explosions above
pozzolana cement:
ground
(Part 1) : 2015 Fly ash based (fourth revision)
4995 Criteria for design of reinforced
concrete bins for storage of (Part 2) : 2015 Calcined clay based (fourth
granular and powdery materials revision)
(Part 1) : 1974 General requirements and bin 8043 : 1991 Specification for hydrophobic
loads Portland cement (second
(Part 2) : 1974 Design criteria revision)
4998 : 2015 Criteria for design of reinforced 12600 : 1989 Specification for low heat
concrete chimneys (third Portland cement
revision) 12330 : 1988 Specification for sulphate
6922 : 1973 Criteria for safety and design of resisting Portland cement
structures subject to underground (4) 12600 : 1989 Specification for low heat
blasts Portland cement
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5A PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE 117
IS No. Title IS No. Title
(32) 7861 Code of practice for extreme concrete reinforcement
weather concreting Specification
(Part 1) : 1975 Recommended practice for hot (39) 3414 : 1968 Code of practice for design and
weather concreting installation of joints in buildings
(Part 2) : 1981 Recommended practice for cold (40) 3951 Hollow clay tiles for floors and
weather concreting (Part 1) : 2009 roofs Specification: Part 1
(33) 9013 : 1978 Method of making, curing and Filler type (second revision)
determining compressive (41) 6061 Code of practice for construction
strength of accelerated cured (Part 1) : 1971 of floor and roof with joists and
concrete test specimens filler blocks: Part 1 With hollow
(34) 13311 Methods of non-destructive concrete filler blocks
testing of concrete 6061 Code of practice for construction
(Part 1) : 1992 Ultrasonic pulse velocity (Part 2) : 1981 of floor and roof with joists and
(Part 2) : 1992 Rebound hammer filler blocks: Part 2 With hollow
(35) 10262 : 2009 Guidelines for concrete mix clay filler blocks (first revision)
design proportioning (42) 432 Specification for mild steel and
(36) 1786 : 2008 High strength deformed steel bars (Part 1) : 1982 medium tensile steel bars and
and wires for concrete hard-drawn steel wire for
reinforcement Specification concrete reinforcement: Part 1
(fourth revision) Mild steel and medium tensile
(37) 13620 : 1993 Fusion bonded epoxy coated steel bars (third revision)
reinforcing bars Specification (43) 1566 : 1982 Specification for hard-drawn
(38) 16172 : 2014 Reinforcement couplers for steel wire fabric for concrete
mechanical splices of bars for reinforcement (second revision)
FOREWORD 3
1 SCOPE
5
2 TERMINOLOGY
5
3 SYMBOLS
6
4 MATERIALS
6
5 CONCRETE
8
6 WORKABILITY OF CONCRETE
11
7 DURABILITY OF CONCRETE
11
8 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
15
9 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE
15
10 FORMWORK
17
11 ASSEMBLY OF PRESTRESSING AND REINFORCING STEEL
17
12 PRESTRESSING
19
13 TRANSPORTING, PLACING, COMPACTING AND CURING
25
14 CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITIONS
25
15 SAMPLING AND STRENGTH TEST OF DESIGN CONCRETE MIX
25
16 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
25
17 INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES
25
FOREWORD
This Code (Part 6/Subsection 5B) covers the structural design aspects of prestressed concrete.
The Section 5 of Part 6 of the Code covers plain and reinforced concrete and also the prestressed concrete. The
Section has been subdivided into the following subsections:
5A Plain and Reinforced Concrete
5B Prestressed Concrete
Provisions related to prestressed concrete are covered in the following format:
Section 5B (A) General
Section 5B (B) Materials, workmanship, inspection and testing
Section 5B (C) General design requirements
Section 5B (D) Structural design: Limit state method
In some clauses, the Code recommends reference to specialist literature, since the current knowledge on some
aspects of design had not yet crystallized. This had also been done in order to avoid burdening the Code with a lot
of details which may not be required for the design of great majority of structures.
While deciding on the symbols used in the Code, the recommendations on ISO 3898 : 2013 Bases for design of
structures Names and symbols of physical quantities and generic quantities had been taken into consideration.
However, considering the convenience of the users of the Code, the familiar symbols of the old version were
retained to the extent possible.
IS 456 was revised in the year 2000 as IS 456 : 2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (fourth
revision), to which 4 amendments were subsequently issued. In IS 456, major changes were incorporated in
provisions relating to materials, workmanship, inspection and testing, and general design requirements. In view of
the attempt at unification between provisions of reinforced concrete and prestressed concrete codes, these changes
are relevant to prestressed concrete code also. Considering this aspect as also the need for a complete review of
the provision of the Code in light of the latest international developments and the improved practices being
followed now, a full scale revision of IS 1343 was done, bringing out IS 1343 : 2012 Code of practice for
prestress concrete (second revision).
In this second revision of this Subsection, the provisions have been brought in line with IS 1343 : 2012, along with
the following further modifications incorporated with a view to keeping abreast with the rapid development in the
field of prestressed concrete technology and also to bring in further clarifications and modifications in the light of
experience gained, as follows:
a) It has been clarified that the Section/Code does not cover the specific requirements for bridges.
b) Clause on terminology has been reviewed and some new definitions such as anchorage device, cable,
relaxation and sheathing have been added apart from modifications in other definitions such as on tendon.
c) Section on materials, workmanship, inspection and testing has been completely modified in line with
IS 456 as applicable to prestressing and other changes have been incorporated as follows:
1) All the references to materials for making prestressed concrete have been updated.
2) Precautions to be made while using Portland slag cement and Portland pozzolana cement or mineral
admixture to account for modified de-shuttering time, curing period and the time of prestressing
have been included.
3) Provisions relating to maximum water cement ratio, minimum grade of concrete and minimum cement
concrete have been clarified vis-à-vis concrete exposed to sulphate attack.
4) Uncoated stress relieved low relaxation seven ply strand has also been converted as prestressing
steel.
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 5 CONCRETE: 5B PRESTRESSED CONCRETE 3
5) Provisions on modulus of elasticity have been modified.
6) Grades of concrete have been specified up to M 80 from the existing M 30 to M 60.
7) Provisions on creep and shrinkage of concrete have been revised.
8) Durability requirements have been covered exhaustively in line with IS 456 as applicable to prestressed
concrete; the maximum cement content has been specified as 450 kg/m3.
9) Assumed standard deviation has been specified as 5.0 N/mm2 for concrete mix proportioning.
10) Provisions on assembly of prestressing and reinforcing steel and on prestressing have been thoroughly
revised in line with the present improved practices, and details on protection of prestressing steel,
sheathing and anchorages have been incorporated.
11) Sampling and strength test of designed concrete mix has been modified in line with IS 456.
d) The Sections on General Design Requirement and Structural Design (Limit State) have been modified as
follows:
1) Provisions are in line with IS 456 as applicable.
2) Design provisions are updated in line with the latest practices.
e) Provisions related to bearing stress in the end zone in post-tensioned members have been updated.
f) Provisions related to ultimate shear resistance of a section uncracked in flexure have been updated.
g) Provisions related to ultimate shear resistance of a section cracked in flexure have been updated.
h) Test on wall thickness of the duct of corrugated HDPE sheathing duct has been updated.
In this Code, it has been assumed that the design of prestressed concrete structures is entrusted to a qualified
engineer, and that the execution of the work is carried out under the direction of an experienced supervisor.
All standards, whether given herein above or cross-referred to in the main text of this Subsection, are subject to
revision. The parties to agreement based on this Subsection are encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying
the most recent editions of the standards.
For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this Subsection is complied with, the final value,
observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this Subsection.
SECTION 5B (A) GENERAL 2.11 Final Tension The tension in the prestressing
tendon corresponding to the state of the final prestress.
1 SCOPE
2.12 Initial Prestress The prestressing force in the
1.1 This Code (Part 6/Subsection 5B) deals with the tendon at transfer.
general structural use of prestressed concrete. It covers
both work carried out on site and the manufacture of 2.13 Initial Tension The maximum stress induced
precast prestressed concrete units. in the prestressing tendon at the time of the stressing
operation.
1.2 Special requirements of structures such as pipes
and poles covered in respective standards have not been 2.14 Post-Tensioning A method of prestressing
covered in this Subsection; these standards shall be used concrete in which prestressing steel is tensioned against
in conjunction with this Subsection. This Subsection the hardened concrete.
does not cover specific provisions regarding bridges.
2.15 Prestressed Concrete Concrete in which
2 TERMINOLOGY permanent internal stresses are deliberately introduced,
usually by tensioned steel, to counteract to the desired
For the purpose of this Subsection, the following degree the stresses caused in the member during service.
definitions shall apply, and for other terms those given
in the accepted standard [6-5B(1)] shall apply. 2.16 Pre-Tensioning A method of prestressing
concrete in which the tendons are tensioned before
2.1 Anchorage Device In post-tensioning, the concreting.
hardware used for transferring the post-tensioning force
from the tendon to the concrete in anchorage zone. 2.17 Relaxation Time dependent decrease in steel
stress at constant strain.
2.2 Bonded Member A prestressed concrete
member in which tendons are bonded to the concrete 2.18 Sheathing A material encasing a prestressing
either directly or through grouting. tendon to prevent bonding the tendon with the
surrounding concrete during placement of concrete and
2.3 Bonded Post-Tensioning Post-tensioned to provide protection against corrosion.
construction in which the annular spaces around the
tendons are grouted after stressing, thereby bonding 2.19 Short Column A column, the effective length
the tendon to the concrete section. of which does not exceed 12 times the least lateral
dimension.
2.4 Cable A group of wires or bars or strands or
rods. 2.20 Slender Column A column, the effective
length of which exceeds 12 times the least lateral
2.5 Characteristic Load Load which has 95 dimension.
percent probability of not being exceeded during the
life of the structure (see 20.2). 2.21 Shrinkage Loss The loss of stress in the
prestressing steel resulting from the shrinkage of the
2.6 Characteristic Strength Strength of material
concrete.
below which not more than 5 percent of the test results
are expected to fall (see 20.1). 2.22 Stress at Transfer The stress in both the
prestressing tendon and the concrete when the
2.7 Column or Strut A compression member, the
prestressing tendon is released from the prestressing
effective length of which exceeds three times the least
mechanism.
lateral dimension.
2.23 Tendon A steel element, such as a wire, cable,
2.8 Creep Time dependent deformation due to
bar, rod or strand, or a bundle of such elements used to
sustained load.
impart prestress to concrete when the element is
2.9 Creep Coefficient The ratio of creep strain to tensioned.
elastic strain in concrete.
2.24 Transfer The act of transferring the stress in
2.10 Final Prestress The stress which exists after prestressing tendons from the jacks or pre-tensioning
substantially all losses have occurred. bed to the concrete member.
The factors influencing durability include, Abrasion resistant surfaces primarily involve
consideration of surface finishing technique curing
a) the environment; regime, aggregate characteristics and cement content.
b) the cover to embedded steel; Compressive strength of concrete may also provide a
c) the type and quality of constituent materials; relative indication of resistance.
i) 1 Traces Less than 1.0 Less than Ordinary Portland cement or Portland slag 280 0.55
(<0.2) 0.3 cement or Portland pozzolana cement
ii) 2 0.2 - 0.5 1.0 - 1.9 0.3 - 1.2 Ordinary Portland cement or Portland slag 330 0.50
cement or Portland pozzolana cement
Supersulphated cement or sulphate 310 0.50
resisting Portland cement
Supersulphated cement or sulphate 330 0.50
iii) 3 0.5 - 1.0 1.9 - 3.1 1.2 - 2.5
resisting Portland cement
Portland pozzolana cement or Portland 350 0.45
slag cement
iv) 4 1.0 - 2.0 3.1 - 5.0 2.5 - 5.0 Supersulphated or sulphate resisting 370 0.45
Portland cement
v) 5 More More than 5.0 More Sulphate resisting Portland cement or 400 0.40
than 2.0 than 5.0 supersulphated cement with protective
coatings
NOTES
1 Cement content given in this table is irrespective of grades of cement. Suitable adjustment may be made in the minimum cement
content specified in case of use of aggregate other than 20 mm nominal maximum size.
2 Use of supersulphated cement is generally restricted where the prevailing temperature is above 40 °C.
3 Supersulphated cement gives an acceptable life provided that the concrete is dense and prepared with a water-cement ratio of 0.4 or
less, in mineral acids, down to pH 3.5.
4 The cement contents given in col 7 of this table are the minimum recommended. For SO3 contents near the upper limit of any class,
cement contents above these minimum are advised.
5 For severe conditions, such as thin sections under hydrostatic pressure on one side only and sections partly immersed, considerations
should be given to a further reduction of water-cement ratio.
6 Portland slag cement with slag content more than 50 percent exhibits better sulphate resisting properties.
7 Where chloride is encountered along with sulphates in soil or ground water, ordinary Portland cement with C3A content from 5
to 8 percent shall be desirable to be used in concrete, instead of sulphate resisting cement.
acid soluble chloride content (as Cl) in the concrete at not exceed 4 percent by mass of the cement in the mix.
the time of placing shall be not more than 0.4 kg/m3 of The sulphate content should be calculated as the total
concrete. from the various constituents of the mix.
The total acid soluble chloride content should be 7.2.5.4 Alkali-aggregate reaction
calculated from the mix proportions and the measured Some aggregates containing particular varieties of silica
chloride contents of each of the constituents. Wherever may be susceptible to attack by alkalis (Na 2O and K2O)
possible, the total chloride content of the concrete originating from cement or other sources, producing
should be determined. an expansive reaction which can cause cracking and
7.2.5.3 Sulphates in concrete disruption of concrete. Damage to concrete from this
reaction will normally occur only when all the following
Sulphates are present in most cements and in some are present together:
aggregates; excessive amounts of water-soluble
a) A high moisture level, within the concrete;
sulphate from these or other mix constituents can cause
b) A cement with high alkali content, or another
expansion and disruption of concrete. To prevent this,
source of alkali; and
the total water-soluble sulphate content of the concrete
mix, expressed as SO3 (where SO3 = 0.833 SO4) should c) Aggregate containing an alkali reactive
constituent.
Ducts require very careful handling as, being of thin The grouting equipment should contain a screen having
metal, they are susceptible to leakage due to corrosion a mesh size of IS Sieve No. 106 (IS Sieve No. 150, if
in transit or storage, by tearing ripping in handling sand is used). Prior to introduction into the grout pump,
particularly when placed adjoining to reinforcing steel, the grout should be passed through such screen. This
by pulling apart of joints while inserting tendons prior screen should be easily accessible for inspection and
to concreting, or by accidental puncturing while drilling cleaning.
for form ties/inserts or by sparks from welding being 12.3.2.5 Connections and air vents
done close by. Care shall be taken to avoid any damage
Standard details of fixing inlets, outlets, and air vents
by rough use of internal vibrator. Such local damage
to the sheathing and/or anchorage should be followed
shall be repaired using tape to make it water tight to
as recommended by specialist supplier of the system
prevent ingress of slurry from the fresh concrete.
of prestressing. In general, all connections are to be of
12.3.2 Equipment the Quick couple type and at change of diameters
suitable reducers are to be provided.
12.3.2.1 Grout colloidal mixer
12.3.3 Properties of the Grout
It is essential that the grout is maintained in a
homogenous state and of uniform consistency by use Water-cement ratio should be as low as possible,
of suitable agitator so that there is no separation of consistent with workability. This ratio should not
cement during entire grouting process. It is, therefore normally exceed 0.45.
The general design requirements for design of 18.4 Instability During Erection
prestressed concrete structures shall be as per 17 to 23 In evaluating the slenderness effects during lifting of
of Subsection 5A(C) of Part 6 Structural Design, slender members following factors require consideration:
Section 5 Concrete, Subsection 5A Plain and
Reinforced Concrete of the Code except as modified a) Member geometry,
and supplemented in 18.2 to 18.6.5. b) Location of lifting points,
c) Method of lifting, and
18.2 Effects of Prestress
d) Tolerances in construction.
The effects of prestress shall also be taken into account
All beams, which are lifted on vertical or inclined slings,
in assessing loads and forces.
shall be checked for lateral stability and lateral moment
18.3 Deductions for Prestressing Tendons on account of tilting of beam due to inaccuracies in
location of lifting points, and due to the lateral bow.
The deductions for prestressing tendons as in 18.3.1
shall be considered for the determination of area, For calculating the factor of safety against lateral
centroid and moment of inertia of the cross-section. instability (γi) references may be made to specialist
literature; the factor shall not be less than two.
18.3.1 In calculating area, centroid and moment of
inertia of a cross-section, deduction (or addition in case For determining the lateral moment due to tilting,
of transformed area of tendons) for prestressing tendons realistic values which are not likely to be exceeded in
shall be made as follows: practice shall be assumed for the eccentricity of lifting
points and the lateral bow. The maximum tensile stress
a) In the case of pre-tensioned members, where for γ i ( γ i − 1) times the lateral moment due to tilting
the prestressing tendons are single wires
shall not exceed 1.5 N/mm2.
distributed on the cross-section or strands of
wires of relatively small cross-sectional area, 18.5 Prestressing Requirements
allowance for the prestressing tendons need
18.5.1 Maximum Initial Prestress
not be made. Where allowance is made, it shall
be on the basis of (m-1) times the area of the At the time of initial tensioning, the maximum tensile
P0 = prestressing force in the prestressed steel at 18.6.2 End Zone in Post-Tensioned Members
the tensioning end acting in the direction of 18.6.2.1 Bearing stress
the tangent to the force of the cable;
a) On the areas immediately behind external
= cumulative angle through which the tangent
anchorages, the permissible unit bearing stress
α
to the cable profile has turned between any
on the concrete, after accounting for losses
two points under consideration, in radians;
due to elastic shortening and seating of
µ = coefficient of friction in curve; and anchorages, shall not exceed,
k = coefficient for wobble effect.
Abr
The value of µ and k given below may be adopted for 0.48 f ci
Apun
calculating the friction losses:
or 0.8fck, whichever is smaller, where fci is the
Type of Type of Duct Values Recommended cube strength at transfer, Abr is the bearing area
High Tensile or Sheath to be Used in Design and Apun is the punching area.
Steel
k per metre ì b) During tensioning, the allowable bearing
(1) (2) (3) (4) stress specified in (a) may be increased
by 25 percent, provided that this temporary
Wire Bright metals 0.009 1 0.25
value does not exceed fci.
cables Galvanized 0.004 6 0.20
Lead coated 0.004 6 0.18 c) The effective punching area shall generally
Bright metals 0.004 6 0.25 be the contact area of the anchorage devices
Uncoated which, if circular in shape, shall be replaced
stress Galvanized 0.003 0 0.20
Lead coated 0.003 0 0.18 by a square of equivalent area. The bearing
relieved
Corrugated HDPE 0.002 0 0.17 area shall be the maximum area of that portion
strand
of the member which is geometrically similar
and concentric to the effective punching area.
18.6 Considerations Affecting Design Details
d) Where a number of anchorages are used, the
18.6.1 Transmission Zone in Pre-Tensioned Members bearing area Abr shall not overlap. Where there
is already a compressive stress prevailing over
18.6.1.1 Transmission length
the bearing area, as in the case of anchorage
The considerations affecting the transmission length placed in the body of a structure, the total stress
shall be as follows: shall not exceed the limiting values specified
in (a), (b) and (e). For stage stressing of cables,
a) The transmission length depends on a number
the adjacent unstressed anchorages shall be
of variables, the most important being the
neglected when determining the bearing area.
strength of concrete at transfer, the size and
21 ANALYSIS xu δ M
+ ≤ 0.6
d 100
21.1 Analysis of Structure where
Methods of analysis as in Part 6 Structural Design, xu = depth of neutral axis,
Section 5 Concrete, Subsection 5A Plain and d = effective depth, and
Reinforced Concrete of the Code shall be used. The δM = percentage reduction in moment.
material strength to be assumed shall be characteristic
values in the determination of elastic properties of e) In structures in which the structural frame
members, irrespective of the limit state being provides the lateral stability, the reduction in
considered. Redistribution of the calculated moments moment allowed by condition given
may be made as given in 21.1.1. in 21.1.1 (c) shall be restricted to 10 percent
for structures over 4 storeys in height.
21.1.1 Redistribution of Moments in Continuous
Beams and Frames 21.1.2 Analysis of Slabs Spanning in Two Directions
at Right Angles
The redistribution of moments may be carried out
satisfying the following conditions: In general, the provisions of Part 6 Structural Design,
Section 5 Concrete, Subsection 5A Plain and
a) Equilibrium between the internal forces and Reinforced Concrete of the Code shall apply.
the external loads is maintained.
b) The ultimate moment of resistance provided 22 LIMIT STATE OF COLLAPSE
at any section of a member is not less than 80
22.1 Limit State of Collapse: Flexure
percent of the moment at that section obtained
from an elastic maximum moment diagram 22.1.1 Assumptions
covering all appropriate combinations of
Design for the limit state of collapse in flexure shall be
loads.
Table 7 Values of Partial Safety Factor (γf) For Loads
(Clause 20.4.2)
NOTES
1 While considering earthquake effects, substitute EL for WL.
2 While assessing the long-term effects due to creep, the dead load and that part of the imposed load likely to be permanent may only
be considered.
3 While verifying the limit state for stability, with external prestress where an increase of the value of prestress can be unfavourable,
partial safety factor of 1.3 shall be used.
e) The tensile strength of the concrete is ignored. FIG. 4 S TRESS BLOCK PARAMETERS
f) The stresses in bonded prestressing tendons,
whether initially tensioned or untensioned, and
in additional reinforcement are derived from
the representative stress-strain curve for the
type of steel used given by the manufacturer
or typical curves given in Fig. 5 for
prestressing tendons and in Part 6 Structural
Design, Section 5 Concrete, Subsection 5A
Plain and Reinforced Concrete of the Code
for reinforcement. For design purposes, the
partial safety factor γm equal to 1.15 shall be
applied. In addition, the tendon will have an
initial prestrain due to prestress after all losses.
For members with permanently unbonded
internal or externally prestressed tendons, the
deformation of the whole member shall be
taken into account for calculating strain and
stress in the tendon at ultimate condition. In
the absence of rigorous analysis, the strain in
unbonded tendon shall be assumed not to
increase above the initial value due to prestress FIG . 5 REPRESENTATIVE STRESS STRAIN CURVES FOR
after all losses. PRESTRESSING STEEL
where
I
M 0 = 0.8 fpt
y
b = breadth of the member which for T, I and L
where fpt is the stress due to prestress only
beams should be replaced by breadth of the
at depth of d and distance y from the
rib bw,
centroid of the concrete section which has
D = overall depth of the member, second moment of area I, and
ft = maximum principal tensile given by V and M = shear force and bending moment
0.24 fck taken as positive where fck is the respectively, at the section considered due
to ultimate loads.
characteristic compressive strength of
concrete, and Vcr should be taken as not less than 0.1bd fck .
fcp = compressive stress at centroidal axis due to
The value of Vcr calculated at a particular section may
prestress taken as positive.
be assumed to be constant for a distance equal to d/2,
and acting about an axis at right angles to the axis of 22.5.4.3 Design of transverse reinforcement
M, where x1 is the smaller dimension of a closed hoop The area of cross-section, Asv of the closed stirrup
used as torsional shear reinforcement and e is as defined enclosing the corner longitudinal bars shall be taken as
in 22.5.4.1. the larger of the following two values:
22.5.4 Transverse Reinforcement M ts v
Asv = , and
22.5.4.1 Torsional moment and shear carried by 1.5b1d1 f y
concrete
Asv = Av + 2 At
The reduced torsional moment carried by the concrete
Tc1 is given by: where
e (V − Vc1 ) sv
Tc1 = Tc Av =
e + ec
0.87 f y d1
where
At =
(T − Tc1 ) sv
2 b 0.87b1d1 f y
Tc = ∑ 0.15b D 1 − 3D λ v f ck
23.3.2.2 Stress in direct compression the maximum stress in direct compression shall be
limited to 0.8 times the permissible stress obtained
Except in the parts immediately behind the anchorages,
from 23.3.2.1.
ANNEX A
(Clause 11.2)
SHEATHING DUCTS FOR PRESTRESSING
A-1 MILD STEEL SHEATHING DUCTS A-2 CORRUGATED HDPE SHEATHING DUCTS
Unless otherwise specified, the material shall be cold Unless otherwise specified, the material for the ducts
rolled cold annealed (CRCA) mild steel intended for shall be high-density polyethylene with more than
mechanical treatment and surface refining but not for 2 percent carbon black to provide resistance to
quench hardening or tempering. ultraviolet degradation and shall have the following
properties:
The material shall be clean and free from rust and
Specific density : 0.954 g/cm3 at 23 °C
normally of bright metal finish. However, in case of
use in aggressive environment galvanized or lead coated Yield stress : 18.0 N/mm2
mild steel strips shall be adopted. Tensile strength : 21.0 N/mm2
Shore hardness D:
The thickness of metal sheathing shall not be less than a) 3 s : 60
0.3 mm, 0.4 mm and 0.5 mm for sheathing ducts having
b) 15 s : 58
internal diameter up to 50 mm, 75 mm and 90 mm,
Notch impact strength at:
respectively. For bigger diameter of ducts, thickness
a) 23°C : 10 kJ/m2
of sheathing shall be based on recommendations of
prestressing system supplier. b) 40°C : 4 kJ/m2
Coefficient of thermal : 1.50 × 104 /°C
The sheathing shall conform to the requirements expansion for 20°C 80°C
specified in A-3 and a test certificate shall be furnished
The thickness of the wall shall be 2.3 ± 0.3 mm as
by the manufacturer.
manufactured and 1.5 mm after loss in the compression
The joints of all sheathing shall be water tight and test, for duct size up to 160 mm outer diameter.
conform to the provisions specified in A-5. The ducts shall be corrugated on both sides. The ducts
ELEVATION
PLAN
PLAN
VIEW A-A
All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG . 11 TENSION LOAD TEST concentrated line loading from the tendon constituents.
The test requires the following equipment:
and fill the duct with grout of strength not less than
a) Three concrete blocks,
27 N/mm2. When the grout has attained the necessary
b) One 1 000 mm long strand forming the tendon,
strength, stress the tendon slowly increasing the load to
the failure capacity. The failure capacity of the bond c) A 3 MN press,
shall be at least equal to the anchorage efficiency or d) A loading beam of 300 mm length to transmit
0.95 of failure capacity of the tendon. At least 3 tests 5 kN load,
shall be carried out to ascertain the adequacy of the duct. e) A rubber pad for placing between the press
and the beam for uniform and constant load
A-4.2 Compression Test for the Loss of Wall Thickness transfer,
A-4.2.1 The test is carried out to establish the wear f) A bearing plate with a mono strand jack to
and tear of the sheathing material and the rigidity of pull the strand under loaded condition, and
the duct surface against indentation and abrasion under g) A digital caliper.
ANNEX B
(Clause 12.1.4.4)
TESTING OF SYSTEMS WITH MECHANICAL ANCHORAGES
B-1 STATIC LOAD TEST WITH TENDON- should be performed using the grade with the highest
ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY characteristic tensile strength.
The aim of the test is to assess the performance of the B-1.2 Test Procedure
tendon-anchorage assembly and to determine any
decrease of the breaking load of the prestressing steel The tendon specimen is mounted in a calibrated test
due to the influence of the anchorage. The test is also rig or testing machine and should be stressed in
relevant for couplings. increments of force corresponding to 20 percent,
40 percent, 60 percent and 80 percent of the
B-1.1 Test Specimen characteristic tensile strength of the prestressing steel,
fp. In each increment the force is increased at a constant
The tendon and anchorage to be tested should be
force rate corresponding to about 100 MPa per min. At
assembled according to the envisaged application, using
the 80 percent level, the force is held constant for 1 h.
all the components necessary for anchoring the tendon.
Subsequently, the force is increased gradually to total
The geometrical configuration of the individual wires,
failure.
strands or bars in the specimen should be identical to
that of the actual tendon-anchorage assembly and so The described test procedure is normally applicable to
the following properties should be established: systems where the prestressing steel is connected to
the anchorage before applying the stressing force. In
a) Main geometrical and mechanical properties
systems where the prestressing level is locked in the
of the prestressing steel used in the test;
anchorage after the stressing force has been applied,
b) Actual mean breaking load; the above test procedure should be adapted as follows:
c) Mean total elongation at maximum load;
a) The tendon should be mounted in the test rig
d) Mean cross-section;
or testing machine, using an identical
e) Surface characteristics, etc; and geometrical configuration of the individual
f) Minimum of 3 single unit tensile tests. wires, strands or bars in the specimen to that
Relevant geometrical and mechanical properties of in the actual tendon-anchorage assembly.
anchorage components should also be determined. The b) The tendon should be stressed at one end with
free length of the individual wires, strands or bars in the equipment used on the construction site
the specimen to be tested should be not less than 3.0 m. in steps as described to 80 percent of the
characteristic tensile strength of prestressing
If one grade of prestressing steel of the same type is to steel, fp.
be used with the same type of anchorage, the tests
At the final test to failure the mean compressive strength B-3.4 Requirements
( fcm.e) of concrete of specimen should be:
Each specimen should meet the following requirements
f cm.e ≤ f ck.o and f cm.e ≤ 0.85 f ck (see Fig. 20):
ANNEX C
(Clauses 18.6.2.2 and 22.1.2)
MOMENTS OF RESISTANCE FOR RECTANGULAR AND T-SECTIONS
C-1 The moment of resistance of rectangular sections d = effective depth to the centroid of the steel
or T-sections in which neutral axis lies within the flange area, and
may be obtained as follows: xu = neutral axis depth.
M u = fpb Aps ( d − 0.42 xu ) For pre-tensioned members and for post-tensioned
members with effective bond between the concrete and
where
tendons, values of fpb and xu are given in Table 11. It
Mu = moment of resistance of the section, shall be ensured that the effective prestress after all
fpb = tensile stress in the tendon at failure, losses is not less than 0.45 f pu, where f pu is the
characteristic tensile strength of tendon. Prestressing
fpe = effective prestress in tendon,
tendons in the compression zone should be ignored in
Aps = area of pretensioning tendons in the tension the strength calculations when using this method.
zone,
Table 11 Conditions at the Ultimate Limit State for Rectangular Beams With Pre-Tensioned Tendons or
With Post-Tensioned Tendons Having Effective Bond
(Clause C-1)
Sl No. Aps× f pu Stress in Tendon as a Proportion of the Design Ratio of the Depth of Neutral Axis to that of the
bd × fck Strength Centroid of the Tendon in the
fpb Tension Zone
xu/d
0.87 × fpu
Pre-Tensioning Post-Tensioning with Pre-Tensioning Post-Tensioning with
Effective Bond Effective Bond
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
i) 0.025 1.0 1.0 0.054 0.054
ii) 0.05 1.0 1.0 0.109 0.109
iii) 0.10 1.0 1.0 0.217 0.217
iv) 0.15 1.0 1.0 0.326 0.316
v) 0.20 1.0 0.95 0.435 0.4141)
vi) 0.25 1.0 0.90 0.542 0.4881)
vii) 0.30 1.0 0.85 0.655 0.5581)
viii) 0.40 0.9 0.75 0.783 0.6531)
1) The neutral axis depth in these cases is too low to provide the necessary elongation for developing 0.87 f
pu stress level. Hence, it is
essential that the strength provided exceeds the required strength by 15 percent for these cases.
The following list records those standards which are IS No. Title
acceptable as good practice and accepted standards (4) 6452 : 1989 Specification for high alumina
in the fulfillment of the requirements of the Code. The cement for structural use (first
latest version of a standard shall be adopted at the time revision)
of enforcement of the Code. The standards listed may (5) 6909 : 1990 Specification for supersulphated
be used by the Authority for conformance with the cement (first revision)
requirements of the referred clauses in the Code. (6) 383 : 2016 Specification for coarse and fine
aggregates for concrete (third
In the following list, the number appearing in the first
revision)
column within parentheses indicates the number of the
(7) 1785(Part 1) : Specification for plain hard
reference in this Subsection.
1983 drawn steel wire for prestressed
IS No. Title concrete: Part 1 Cold drawn
(1) 4845 : 1968 Definitions and terminology stress relieved wire (second
relating to hydraulic cement revision)
6461 Glossary of terms relating to 6003 : 2010 Specification for indented wire
cement concrete: for prestressed concrete (second
(Part 1) : 1972 Concrete aggregates revision)
(Part 2) : 1972 Materials (other than cement and 2090 : 1983 Specification for high tensile steel
aggregate) bars used in prestressed concrete
(Part 3) : 1972 Concrete reinforcement (first revision)
(Part 4) : 1972 Types of concrete 6006 : 2014 Specification for uncoated stress
(Part 5) : 1972 Formwork for concrete relieved strand for prestressed
(Part 6) : 1972 Equipment, tools and plant concrete (second revision)
(Part 7) : 1973 Mixing, laying, compaction, 14268 : 1995 Specification for uncoated stress
curing and other construction relieved low relaxation seven ply
aspects strand for prestressed concrete
(Part 8) : 1973 Properties of concrete (8) 432 Specification for mild steel and
(Part 9) : 1972 Structural aspects (Part 1) : 1982 medium tensile steel bars and
(Part 10) : 1973Tests and testing apparatus hard-drawn steel wire for
(Part 11) : 1973 Prestressed concrete concrete reinforcement: Part 1
(Part 12) : 1973Miscellaneous Mild steel and medium tensile
(2) 269 : 2015 Specification for ordinary steel bars (third revision)
Portland cement (sixth revision) 1786 : 2008 Specification for high strength
8041 : 1990 Specification for rapid hardening deformed steel bars and wire for
Portland cement (second concrete reinforcement (fourth
revision) revision)
455 : 2015 Specification for Portland slag 1566 : 1982 Specification for hard-drawn
cement (fifth revision) steel wire fabric for concrete
1489 Specification for Portland reinforcement (second revision)
pozzolana cement: (9) 4082 : 1996 Recommendations on stacking
(Part 1) : 2015 Fly ash based (fourth revision) and storage of construction
(Part 2) : 2015 Calcined clay based (fourth materials and components at site
revision) (second revision)
8043 : 1991 Specification for hydrophobic (10) 516 : 1959 Method of test for strength of
Portland cement (second concrete
revision) 5816 : 1999 Method of test for splitting tensile
12600 : 1989 Specification for low heat strength of concrete (first revision)
Portland cement (11) 1489 Specification for Portland
12330 : 1988 Specification for sulphate (Part 1) : 2015 pozzolana cement: Part 1 Fly ash
resisting Portland cement based (fourth revision)
(3) 12600 : 1989 Specification for low heat (12) 455 : 2015 Specification for Portland slag
Portland cement cement (fifth revision)
FOREWORD 5
1 SCOPE
7
2 TERMINOLOGY
7
3 SYMBOLS
11
4 UNITS
17
5 STANDARD DIMENSIONS, FORM AND WEIGHT
17
6 PLANS AND DRAWINGS
17
7 CONVENTION FOR MEMBER AXES
18
8 GENERAL 18
16 CONNECTIONS 70
19 FATIGUE 89
21 DURABILITY
101
SECTION 6(s) FIRE RESISTANCE
22 FIRE RESISTANCE
102
SECTION 6(a) GENERAL 2.5 Actual Length The length between centre-to-
centre of intersection points, with supporting members
1 SCOPE or the cantilever length in the case of a free standing
1.1 This Code (Part 6/Section 6) covers the structural member.
design aspects of steel structures in buildings. This 2.6 Beam A member subjected predominantly to
Section applies to general construction using hot rolled bending.
steel sections and steel tubes joined using riveting, bolting
and welding. Cold formed light gauge steel sections, etc, 2.7 Bearing Type Connection A connection made
are covered in separate standards. This Section covers using bolts in snug-tight condition, or rivets where
the design by limit state method and plastic theory, and the load is transferred by bearing of bolts or rivets
also enables design by working stress method. against plate inside the bolt hole.
1.2 This Section gives only general guidance as regards 2.8 Braced Member A member in which the
to the various loads to be considered in design. For the relative transverse displacement is effectively prevented
actual loads, such as dead, live, snow, wind and by bracing.
earthquake loads and load combinations to be used, 2.9 Brittle Cladding Claddings, such as asbestos
reference may be made to Part 6 Structural Design, cement sheets which get damaged before undergoing
Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code. considerable deformation.
1.3 Fabrication and erection requirements covered in 2.10 Buckling Load The load at which an element,
this Section are general and the minimum necessary a member or a structure as a whole, either collapses
quality of material and workmanship consistent with in service or buckles in a load test and develops
assumptions in the design rules. The actual excessive lateral (out of plane) deformation or
requirements may be further developed as per other instability.
standards or the project specification, the type of
structure and the method of construction. 2.11 Buckling Strength or Resistance Force or
moment, which a member can withstand without
1.4 For seismic design, recommendations pertaining buckling.
to steel frames only are covered in this section. For
more detailed information on seismic design of other 2.12 Built-Up Section A member fabricated by
structural and non-structural components, reference interconnecting more than one element to form a
may be made to 5 of Part 6 Structural Design, Section 1 compound section acting as a single member.
Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code and other special 2.13 Camber Intentionally introduced pre-curving
publications on the subject. (usually upwards) in a system, member or any portion
of a member with respect to its chord. Frequently,
2 TERMINOLOGY
camber is introduced to compensate for deflections at
For the purpose of this Section, the definitions given a specific level of loads.
below shall apply.
2.14 Characteristic Load (Action) The value
2.1 Accidental Loads Loads due to explosion, of specified load (action), above which not more than
impact of vehicles, or other rare loads for which the a specified percentage (usually 5 percent) of samples
structure is considered to be vulnerable as per the user. of corresponding load are expected to be
encountered.
2.2 Accompanying Load Live (imposed) load
acting along with leading imposed load but causing 2.15 Characteristic Yield/Ultimate Stress The
lower actions and/or deflections. minimum value of stress, below which not more than a
specified percentage (usually 5 percent) of
2.3 Action Effect or Load Effect The internal
corresponding stresses of samples tested are expected
force, axial, shear, bending or twisting moment, due to
to occur.
external actions and temperature loads.
2.16 Column A member in upright (vertical)
2.4 Action The primary cause for stress or
position which supports a roof or floor system and
deformations in a structure such as dead, live, wind,
predominantly subjected to compression.
seismic or temperature loads.
2.30 Ductility It is the property of the material or a 2.44 Fabrication Tolerance Amount of deviation
structure indicating the extent to which it can deform allowed in the nominal dimensions and geometry in
beyond the limit of yield deformation before failure or fabrication activities, such as cutting to length, finishing
fracture. The ratio of ultimate to yield deformation is of ends, cutting of bevel angles, etc.
usually termed as ductility. 2.45 Factor of Safety The factor by which the yield
2.31 Durability It is the ability of a material to stress of the material of a member is divided to arrive
resist deterioration over long periods of time. at the permissible stress in the material.
2.32 Earthquake Loads The inertia forces 2.46 Fatigue Damage caused by repeated
produced in a structure due to the ground movement fluctuations of stress, leading to progressive cracking
during an earthquake. of a structural element.
8 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
2.47 Fatigue Loading Set of nominal loading 2.57 Gusset Plate The plate to which the members
events, cyclic in nature, described by the distribution intersecting at a joint are connected.
of the loads, their magnitudes and the numbers of
2.58 High Shear High shear condition is caused
applications in each nominal loading event.
when the actual shear due to factored load is greater
2.48 Fatigue Strength The stress range for a than a certain fraction of design shear resistance
category of detail, depending upon the number of cycles (see 15.2.2).
it is required to withstand during design life.
2.59 Imposed (Live) Load The load assumed to
2.49 Fire Exposure Condition be produced by the intended use or occupancy including
distributed, concentrated, impact, vibration and snow
a) Three-sided fire exposure condition Steel loads but excluding, wind, earthquake and temperature
member incorporated in or in contact with a loads.
concrete or masonry floor or wall (at least
against on surface). 2.60 Instability The phenomenon which disables
an element, member or a structure to carry further load
NOTES
due to excessive deflection lateral to the direction of
1 Three-sided fire exposure condition is to be considered
separately unless otherwise specified (see 22.10).
loading and vanishing stiffness.
2 Members with more than one face in contact with a 2.61 Lateral Restraint for a Beam See 2.34.
concrete or masonry floor or wall may be treated as three-
sided fire exposure. 2.62 Leading Imposed Load Imposed load causing
b) Four-sided fire exposure condition Steel higher action and/or deflection.
member, which may be exposed to fire on all
2.63 Limit State Any limiting condition beyond
sides.
which the structure ceases to fulfill its intended function
2.50 Fire Protection System The fire protection (see also 2.86).
material and its method of attachment to the steel
2.64 Live Load See 2.59.
member.
2.65 Load An externally applied force or action
2.51 Fire Resistance The ability of an element,
(see also 2.4).
component or structure, to fulfil for a stated period of
time, the required stability, integrity, thermal insulation 2.66 Main Member A structural member, which is
and/or other expected performance specified in a primarily responsible for carrying and distributing the
standard fire test. applied load or action.
2.52 Fire Resistance Level The fire resistance 2.67 Mill Tolerance Amount of variation allowed
grading period for a structural element or system, in from the nominal dimensions and geometry, with
minutes, which is required to be attained in the standard respect to cross-sectional area, non-parallelism of
fire test. flanges, and out of straightness such as sweep or
camber, in a product, as manufactured in a steel mill.
2.53 Flexural Stiffness Stiffness of a member
against rotation as evaluated by the value of bending 2.68 Normal Stress Stress component acting
deformation moment required to cause a unit rotation normal to the face, plane or section.
while all other degrees of freedom of the joints of the
2.69 Partial Safety Factor The factor normally
member except the rotated one are assumed to be
greater than unity by which either the loads (actions)
restrained.
are multiplied or the resistances are divided to obtain
2.54 Friction Type Connection Connection the design values.
effected by using pre-tensioned high strength bolts
2.70 Period of Structural Adequacy under Fire
where shear force transfer is due to mobilization of
The time (t), in minutes, for the member to reach the
friction between the connected plates due to clamping
limit state of structural inadequacy in a standard fire test.
force developed at the interface of connected plates by
the bolt pre-tension. 2.71 Permissible Stress When a structure is being
designed by the working stress method, the maximum
2.55 Gauge The spacing between adjacent parallel
stress that is permitted to be experienced in elements,
lines of fasteners, transverse to the direction of load/
members or structures under the nominal/service load
stress.
(action).
2.56 Gravity Load Loads arising due to
2.72 Pitch The centre-to-centre distance between
gravitational effects.
individual fasteners in a line, in the direction of load/stress.
£ 20 > 20
St 37 220 200 360-440 26
vi) [6-6(28)]
St 42 250 240 410-500 23
t t t
£16 >16 >40 >60 >100 £60 >60 and >100 £60 >60
and and and and £100 and and
£40 £60 £100 £350 £350 £350
1 235 225 215 200 185 360-480 360-480 350-480 24 23
vii) [6-6(29)] 2 265 255 245 215 200 410-530 410-530 400-530 22 21
3 290 285 280 255 230 460-580 450-570 440-570 21 20
d or t
£ 25 > 25 and £ 50
I 230 220 400-490 22
ix) [6-6(30)] II 235 235 400-490 22
III 235 235 400-490 22
Grade 1 240 350-450 25
x) [6-6(31)]
Grade 2 245 360-450 34
Annealed 160 330 - 410 30
Condition
xi) [6-6(10)]
As-Drawn 190 410 - 490 20
Condition
HFC 210/CDS 210 330 20
210/ERW210
1 Percentage of elongation shall be taken over the gauge length of 5.65 S 0 , where S0 = original cross-sectional area of the test
specimen.
2 Abbreviations: O = Ordinary, D = Drawing, DD = Deep Drawing, EDD = Extra Deep Drawing.
1) Stress at 0.2 percent non-proportional elongation, Min.
9.2.1.2 Imposed loads for different types of occupancy shall be taken as 0.6 times the projected area of the
and function of structures shall be taken as member (see 4 of Part 6 Structural Design, Section 1
recommended in 3 of Part 6 Structural Design, Loads, Forces and Effects).
Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code.
9.2.1.4 Earthquake loads shall be assumed as per the
Imposed loads arising from equipment, such as cranes
recommendations of 5 of Part 6 Structural Design,
and machines should be assumed in design as per
Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code.
manufacturers/suppliers data (see 9.5.4). Snow load
shall be taken as per in 6 of Part 6 Structural Design, 9.2.1.5 The erection loads and temperature effects shall
Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code. be considered as specified in 9.3 and 9.4, respectively.
9.2.1.3 Wind loads on structures shall be taken as per 9.3 Erection Loads
the provisions of 4 of Part 6 Structural Design, Section
All loads required to be carried by the structure or any
1 Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code.
part of it due to storage or positioning of construction
9.2.1.3.1 Wind pressure material and erection equipment, including all loads
due to operation of such equipment shall be considered
In calculating the effective wind pressure on exposed
as erection loads. Proper provision shall be made,
circular tube members of a structure, the effective area
NOTES
1 Elements which exceed semi-compact limits are to be taken as of slender Cross-section
2 ε = (250 / fy )1/2
3 Webs shall be checked for shear buckling in accordance with 14.4.2 when d/t > 67ε. Where, b is the width of the element may be
taken as clear distance between lateral supports or between lateral support and free edge, as appropriate, t is the thickness of element,
d is the depth of the web, D is the outer diameter of the element (see Fig 2, 9.7.3 and 9.7.4).
4 Different elements of a cross-section can be in different classes. In such cases the section is classified based on the least favourable
classification.
5 The stress ratio r1 and r2 are defined as:
Actual average axial stress (negative, if tensile)
r1 =
Design compressive stress of web alone
Actual average axial stress (negative, if tensile)
r2 =
Design compressive stress of overall section
gyration based on the effective section as defined To resist torsional effects of wind and earthquake
in 9.6.1. forces, bracings in plan should be provided and
integrally connected with the longitudinal and
9.9 Resistance to Horizontal Forces transverse bracings, to impart adequate torsional
9.9.1 In designing the steel frame work of a building, resistance to the structure.
provision shall be made (by adequate moment 9.9.3.1 In shed type steel mill buildings, adequate
connections or by a system of bracing) to effectively bracings shall be provided to transfer the wind or
transmit to the foundations all the horizontal forces, earthquake loads from their points of action to the
giving due allowance for the stiffening effect of the appropriate supporting members. Where the
walls and floors, where applicable. connections to the interior columns or frames are
9.9.2 When the walls, or walls and floors and/or roofs designed such that the wind or earthquake loads will
are capable of effectively transmitting all the horizontal not be transferred to the interior columns, the exterior
forces directly to the foundations, the structural steel columns or frames shall be designed to resist the total
framework may be designed without considering the wind or earthquake loads. Where the connections to
effect of wind or earthquake. the interior columns and frames are designed such that
the wind or earthquake effects are transferred to the
9.9.3 Wind and earthquake forces are reversible and interior columns also, and where adequate rigid
therefore call for rigidity and strength under force diaphragm action can be mobilized as in the case of
reversal in both longitudinal and transverse directions. the cast-in place RC slab, both exterior and interior
3) A frame, which when analysed to each other, except when there is significant
considering all the lateral supporting load redistribution between the sub-structures
system does not comply with the above (part of a structure). For earthquake loading
criteria, should be classified as a sway three dimensional analysis may be necessary
frame, even if it is braced or otherwise to account for effects of torsion and also for
laterally stiffened. multi-component earthquake forces (see 5 of
Part 6 Structural Design, Section 1 Loads,
10.2 Forms of Construction Assumed for Structural Forces and Effects of the Code).
Analysis
b) For vertical loading in a multi-storey building
10.2.1 The effects of design action in the members structure, provided with bracing or shear walls
and connections of a structure shall be determined by to resist all lateral forces, each level thereof,
assuming singly or in combination of the following together with the columns immediately above
forms of construction (see 16.6.1). and below, may be considered as a
substructure, the columns being assumed fixed
10.2.1.1 Rigid construction
at the ends remote from the level under
In rigid construction, the connections between members consideration.
(beam and column) at their junction shall be assumed c) Where beams at a floor level in a multi-bay
to have sufficient rigidity to hold the original angles building structure are considered as a
between the members connected at a joint unchanged substructure (part of a structure), the bending
under loading. moment at the support of the beam due to
10.2.1.2 Semi-rigid construction gravity loads may be determined based on the
assumption that the beam is fixed at the far
In semi-rigid construction, the connections between end support, one span away from the span
members (beam and column) at their junction may under consideration, provided that the floor
not have sufficient rigidity to hold the original angles beam is continuous beyond that support point.
between the members at a joint unchanged, but shall
be assumed to have the capacity to furnish a 10.3.2 Span Length
dependable and known degree of flexural restraint. The span length of a flexural member in a continuous
The relationship between the degree of flexural frame system shall be taken as the centre-to-centre
restraint and the level of the load effects shall be distance between the supports.
established by any rational method or based on test
results (see Annex E). 10.3.3 Arrangements of Imposed Loads in Buildings
For building structures, the various arrangements of
10.2.1.3 Simple construction
imposed loads considered for the analysis, shall include
In simple construction, the connections between at least the following:
Conservatively Lm (in mm) may be taken as: 10.5.2.3 The frame shall be adequately supported
against sway and out-of-plane buckling, by bracings,
Lm ≤
38 ry moment resisting frame or an independent system such
2
f x as shear wall.
1/2
2
f
c + y t
130 250 40 10.5.2.4 Fabrication restriction
where Within a length equal to the member depth, on either
fc = actual compressive stress on the cross- side of a plastic hinge location, the following
section due to axial load, in N/mm2, restrictions should be applied to the tension flange and
noted in the design drawings. Holes, if required, should
fy = yield stress, in N/mm2; be drilled or else punched 2 mm undersize and reamed.
ry = radius of gyration about the minor axis, in All sheared or hand flame cut edges should be finished
mm; smooth by grinding, chipping or planning.
xt = torsional index, xt = 1.132 (AIw/IyIt)0.5; 10.5.3 Assumptions in Analysis
A = area of cross-section; and
The design action effects shall be determined using a
Iw, Iy, = warping constant, second moment of the rigid-plastic analysis.
It cross-section about the minor axes and
St. Venants torsion constant, respectively. It shall be permissible to assume full strength or partial
strength connections, provided the capacities of these
Where the member has unequal flanges, ry should be are used in the analysis, and provided that,
taken as the lesser of the values of the compression
flange only or the whole section. a) In a full strength connection, the moment
capacity of the connection shall be not less
Where the cross-section of the member varies within than that of the member being connected;
the length Lm , the maximum value of r y and the
b) In a partial strength connection, the moment
minimum value of xt should be used.
capacity of the connection may be less than
The spacing of restraints to member lengths not that of the member being connected; and
containing a plastic hinge should satisfy the c) In both cases the behavior of the connection
recommendations of section on lateral buckling strength shall be such as to allow all plastic hinges
of beams (see 14.2.2). Where the restraints are placed necessary for the collapse mechanism to
at the limiting distance Lm , no further checks are develop, and shall be such that the required
required. plastic hinge rotation does not exceed the
10.5.2.2 Stiffeners at plastic hinge locations rotation capacity at any of the plastic hinges
in the collapse mechanism.
Web stiffeners should be provided where a concentrated
load, which exceeds 10 percent of the shear capacity In the case of building structures, it is not normally
of the member, is applied within D/2 of a plastic hinge necessary to consider the effect of alternating plasticity.
a) One of the approximate methods of 10.6.2.1 11.1.2 Steel structures are to be designed and
and 10.6.2.2, or constructed to satisfy the design requirements with
b) A rational elastic buckling analysis of the regard to stability, strength, serviceability, brittle
whole frame. fracture, fatigue, fire, and durability such that they meet
the following:
10.6.2.1 Regular non-sway frames (see 10.1.2)
a) Remain fit with adequate reliability and be
In a rectangular non-sway frame with regular loading able to sustain all actions (loads) and other
and negligible axial forces in the beams, the Euler influences experienced during construction
buckling stress fcc, for each column shall be determined and use;
in accordance with 13.1.2.1. The elastic buckling load b) Have adequate durability under normal
factor (λcr) for the whole frame shall be taken as the maintenance;
lowest of the ratio of (fcc/fcd) for all the columns, where
c) Do not suffer overall damage or collapse
fcd is the axial compressive stress in the column from
disproportionately under accidental events
the factored load analysis.
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 6 STEEL 33
like explosions, vehicle impact or due to throughout the building in nearly orthogonal
consequences of human error to an extent directions so that no substantial portions is
beyond local damage. The potential for connected at only one point to such a system.
catastrophic damage shall be limited or Precast concrete or other heavy floor or roof
avoided by appropriate choice of one or more units should be effectively anchored in the
of the following: direction of their span either to each other over
the support or directly to the support.
1) Avoiding, eliminating or reducing
exposure to hazards, which the structure b) Where the above conditions to tie the columns
is likely to sustain. to the floor adequately are not satisfied each
storey of the building should be checked to
2) Choosing structural forms, layouts and
ensure that disproportionate collapse would
details and designing such that,
not precipitate by the notional removal, one
i) the structure has low sensitivity to at a time, of each column.
hazardous conditions; and
c) Where each floor is not laterally supported
ii) the structure survives with only local by more than one system, check should be
damage even after serious damage to made at each storey by removing one such
any one individual element by the lateral support system at a time to ensure that
hazard; disproportionate collapse would not occur.
3) Choosing suitable material, design and The collapse is considered disproportionate,
detailing procedure, construction if more than 15 percent of the floor or roof
specifications, and control procedures for area of 70 m 2 collapse at that level and at one
shop fabrication and field construction as adjoining level either above or below it,
relevant to the particular structure. under a load equal to 1.05 or 0.9 times the
The following conditions may be satisfied to avoid a dead load, 0.33 times temporary or full
disproportionate collapse: imposed load of permanent nature (as in
storage buildings) and 0.33 times wind load
a) The building should be effectively tied
acting together.
together at each principal floor level and each
column should be effectively held in position 11.1.3 Structures designed for unusual or special
by means of continuous ties (beams) nearly functions shall comply with any other relevant
orthogonal, except where the steel work additional limit state considered appropriate to that
supports only cladding weighing not more than structure.
0.7 kN/m2 along with imposed and wind loads. 11.1.4 Generally structures and elements shall be
These ties shall be steel members such as designed by limit state method. Where limit state
beams, which may be designed for other method cannot be conveniently adopted, working stress
purposes, steel bar reinforcement anchoring design [see Section 6(m)] may be used.
the steel frame to concrete floor or steel mesh
reinforcement in composite slab with steel 11.2 Limit State Design
profiled sheeting directly connected to beam
11.2.1 For achieving the design objectives, the
with shear connectors. These steel ties and
design shall be based on characteristic values for
their end connections should be capable of
material strengths and applied loads (actions), which
resisting factored tensile force not less than
take into account the probability of variations in the
the factored dead and imposed loads acting
material strengths and in the loads to be supported.
on the floor area tributary to the tie nor less
The characteristic values shall be based on statistical
than 75 kN. Such connection of ties to edge
data, if available. Where such data is not available,
column should also be capable of resisting 1
these shall be based on experience. The design values
percent of the maximum axial compression in
are derived from the characteristic values through
the column at the level due to factored dead
the use of partial safety factors, both for material
and imposed loads. All column splices should
strengths and for loads. In the absence of special
be capable of resisting a tensile force equal to
considerations, these factors shall have the values
the largest of a factored dead and imposed load
given in this Section according to the material, the
reaction from a single floor level located
type of load and the limit state being considered.
between that column splice and the next
The reliability of design is ensured by satisfying the
column splice below that splice. Lateral load
requirement:
system to resist notional horizontal loads
prescribed in 10.3.6 should be distributed Design action ≤ Design strength
e) fire. where
11.3 Actions λfk = partial safety factor for different loads k,
The actions (loads) to be considered in design include direct given in Table 4 to account for,
actions (loads) experienced by the structure due to self a) possibility of unfavourable deviation of the
weight, external actions, etc, and imposed deformations load from the characteristic value,
such as that due to temperature and settlements. b) possibility of inaccurate assessment of the
11.3.1 Classification of Actions load,
Actions are classified by their variation with time as c) uncertainty in the assessment of effects of the
given below: load, and
d) uncertainty in the assessment of the limit states
a) Permanent actions (Qp) Actions due to self-
being considered.
weight of structural and non-structural
1) When action of different imposed loads is simultaneously considered, the leading imposed load shall be considered to be the one causing
the higher load effects in the member/section.
2) This value is to be considered when the dead load contributes to stability against overturning is critical or the dead load causes reduction
The loads or load effects shall be multiplied by the Table 5 Partial Safety Factor for Materials, γ m
relevant γf factors, given in Table 4, to get the design (Clause 11.4.1)
loads or design load effects.
Sl Definition Partial Safety Factor
11.4 Strength No.
(1) (2) (3)
The ultimate strength calculation may require i) Resistance, governed by 1.10
consideration of the following: yielding, gm0
ii) Resistance of member to 1.10
a) Loss of equilibrium of the structure or any part buckling, gm0
of it, considered as a rigid body, and iii) Resistance, governed by 1.25
ultimate stress, gm1
b) Failure by excessive deformation, rupture or
iv) Resistance of connection: Shop Field
loss of stability of the structure or any part of Fabrications Fabrications
it including support and foundation. a) Bolts-Friction Type, gmf 1.25 1.25
b) Bolts-Bearing Type, gmb 1.25 1.25
11.4.1 Design Strength c) Rivets, gmr 1.25 1.25
d) Welds, gmw 1.25 1.50
The design strength, Sd, is obtained as given below from
ultimate strength, Su and partial safety factors for
11.5 Factors Governing the Ultimate Strength
materials, γm given in Table 5.
11.5.1 Stability
Sd = Su / γ m
Stability shall be ensured for the structure as a whole
where partial safety factor for materials, γm account for, and for each of its elements. This should include, overall
a) possibility of unfavourable deviation of frame stability against overturning and sway, as given
material strength from the characteristic value; in 11.5.1.1 and 11.5.1.2.
b) possibility of unfavourable variation of 11.5.1.1 Stability against overturning
member sizes; The structure as a whole or any part of it shall be
c) possibility of unfavourable reduction in designed to prevent instability due to overturning, uplift
member strength due to fabrication and or sliding under factored load as given below:
tolerances; and a) The actions shall be divided into components
d) uncertainty in the calculation of strength of aiding instability and components resisting
the members. instability.
11.6.3.1 The durability of steel structures shall be excessive elongation. Plates and other rolled sections
ensured by following recommendations in Section 6(r). in tension may also fail by block shear of end bolted
Specialist literature may be referred to for more detailed regions (see 12.4.1).
and additional information in design for durability.
The factored design tension T, in the members shall
11.6.4 Fire Resistance satisfy the following requirement:
Fire resistance of a steel member is a function of its T < Td
mass, its geometry, and the actions to which it is
where
subjected, its structural support condition, fire
protection measures adopted and the fire to which it is Td = design strength of the member.
exposed. Design provisions to resist fire are briefly
discussed in Section 6(s). Specialist literature may be The design strength of a member under axial tension,
referred to for more detailed information in design of Td, is the lowest of the design strength due to yielding
fire resistance of steel structures. of gross section, Tdg; rupture strength of critical section,
Tdn; and block shear Tdb, given in 12.2, 12.3 and 12.4,
SECTION 6(f) DESIGN OF TENSION respectively.
MEMBERS
12.2 Design Strength Due to Yielding of Gross
12 DESIGN OF TENSION MEMBERS Section
12.1 Tension Members The design strength of members under axial tension, Tdg,
as governed by yielding of gross section, is given by:
Tension members are linear members in which axial
forces act to cause elongation (stretch). Such members Tdg = Ag fy /γm0
can sustain loads up to the ultimate load, at which stage where
they may fail by rupture at a critical section. However,
if the gross area of the member yields over a major fy = yield stress of the material,
portion of its length before the rupture load is reached, Ag = gross area of Cross-section, and
the member may become non-functional due to
ps = staggered pitch length between line of bolt An = net area of the total cross-section,
holes, as shown in Fig. 5, Anc = net area of the connected leg,
n = number of bolt holes in the critical section, Ago = gross area of the outstanding leg, and
and t = thickness of the leg.
i = subscript for summation of all the inclined
legs.
π2 E
fcc = Euler buckling stress =
( KL / r )2
where
FIG. 7 BLOCK SHEAR F AILURE KL/r = effective slenderness ratio or ratio of
effective length, KL to appropriate radius of
12.4.2 Welded Connection gyration, r;
The block shear strength, Tdb shall be checked for α = imperfection factor given in Table 7;
welded end connections by taking an appropriate χ = stress reduction factor (see Table 8) for
section in the member around the end weld, which can different buckling class, slenderness ratio
shear off as a block. and yield stress
( )
13 DESIGN OF COMPRESSION MEMBERS
γm0 = partial safety factor for material strength.
13.1 Design Strength NOTE Calculated values of design compressive stress, fcd
for different buckling classes are given in Table 9.
13.1.1 Common hot rolled and built-up steel members 13.1.2.2 The classification of different sections under
used for carrying axial compression, usually fail by different buckling class a, b, c or d, is given in Table 10.
Table 7 Imperfection Factor, α In cases where the beam connections are eccentric in
plan with respect to the axes of the column, the same
(Clauses 13.1.1 and 13.1.2.1)
conditions of restraint as in concentric connection shall
Buckling Class a b c d be deemed to apply, provided the connections are
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
carried across the flange or web of the columns as the
case may be, and the web of the beam lies within, or in
a 0.21 0.34 0.49 0.76 direct contact with the column section. Where practical
difficulties prevent this, the effective length shall be
taken as equal to the distance between points of
13.2 Effective Length of Compression Members restraint, in non-sway frames.
13.2.1 The effective length KL, is calculated from the 13.2.4 Compression Members in Trusses
actual length L, of the member, considering the rotational
and relative translational boundary conditions at the ends. In the case of bolted, riveted or welded trusses and
The actual length shall be taken as the length from centre- braced frames, the effective length, KL, of the
to-centre of its intersections with the supporting members compression members shall be taken as 0.7 to 1.0 times
in the plane of the buckling deformation. In the case of a the distance between centres of connections, depending
member with a free end, the free standing length from on the degree of end restraint provided. In the case of
members of trusses, buckling in the plane perpendicular
the centre of the intersecting member at the supported
to the plane of the truss, the effective length, KL shall
end, shall be taken as the actual length.
be taken as the distance between the centers of
13.2.2 Effective Length intersection. The design of angle struts shall be as
specified in 13.5.
Where the boundary conditions in the plane of buckling
can be assessed, the effective length, KL can be 13.3 Design Details
calculated on the basis of Table 11. Where frame
13.3.1 Thickness of Plate Elements
analysis does not consider the equilibrium of a framed
structure in the deformed shape (second-order analysis Classification of members on the basis of thickness of
↓ 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
20 1.000 0.999 0.998 0.997 0.995 0.994 0.993 0.993 0.990 0.988 0.986 0.984 0.983 0.981 0.979 0.977 0.975 0.972 0.970
30 0.977 0.975 0.974 0.972 0.970 0.969 0.967 0.965 0.961 0.957 0.954 0.951 0.948 0.946 0.943 0.938 0.934 0.930 0.925
40 0.952 0.949 0.947 0.944 0.942 0.939 0.937 0.934 0.926 0.921 0.916 0.911 0.906 0.901 0.896 0.888 0.881 0.873 0.865
50 0.923 0.919 0.915 0.911 0.908 0.904 0.900 0.896 0.884 0.876 0.867 0.859 0.851 0.842 0.834 0.820 0.807 0.794 0.780
60 0.888 0.883 0.877 0.871 0.865 0.859 0.853 0.847 0.828 0.816 0.803 0.790 0.777 0.763 0.750 0.730 0.710 0.690 0.671
70 0.846 0.837 0.829 0.820 0.811 0.803 0.794 0.785 0.758 0.740 0.722 0.703 0.686 0.668 0.651 0.626 0.602 0.579 0.557
80 0.793 0.781 0.769 0.757 0.746 0.734 0.722 0.710 0.675 0.653 0.631 0.610 0.589 0.570 0.551 0.525 0.501 0.478 0.458
90 0.730 0.715 0.700 0.685 0.671 0.657 0.643 0.628 0.590 0.565 0.542 0.520 0.500 0.481 0.463 0.439 0.416 0.396 0.377
100 0.661 0.644 0.627 0.610 0.594 0.579 0.564 0.549 0.510 0.486 0.463 0.443 0.424 0.407 0.390 0.368 0.348 0.331 0.314
110 0.591 0.573 0.555 0.538 0.522 0.507 0.492 0.478 0.440 0.418 0.397 0.379 0.362 0.346 0.332 0.312 0.295 0.279 0.265
120 0.525 0.507 0.489 0.473 0.458 0.443 0.429 0.416 0.381 0.361 0.343 0.326 0.311 0.297 0.284 0.267 0.252 0.238 0.226
130 0.466 0.448 0.432 0.416 0.402 0.388 0.376 0.364 0.332 0.314 0.298 0.283 0.269 0.257 0.246 0.231 0.217 0.206 0.195
140 0.413 0.397 0.382 0.368 0.355 0.342 0.331 0.320 0.291 0.275 0.260 0.247 0.235 0.224 0.214 0.201 0.189 0.179 0.170
150 0.368 0.353 0.339 0.326 0.314 0.303 0.293 0.283 0.257 0.243 0.229 0.218 0.207 0.197 0.189 0.177 0.166 0.157 0.149
160 0.329 0.316 0.303 0.291 0.280 0.270 0.261 0.252 0.229 0.215 0.204 0.193 0.184 0.175 0.167 0.157 0.147 0.139 0.132
170 0.296 0.283 0.272 0.261 0.251 0.242 0.233 0.225 0.204 0.192 0.182 0.172 0.164 0.156 0.149 0.140 0.131 0.124 0.117
180 0.267 0.255 0.245 0.235 0.226 0.218 0.210 0.203 0.184 0.173 0.163 0.155 0.147 0.140 0.134 0.125 0.118 0.111 0.105
190 0.242 0.231 0.222 0.213 0.205 0.197 0.190 0.183 0.166 0.156 0.147 0.140 0.133 0.126 0.121 0.113 0.106 0.100 0.095
200 0.220 0.210 0.202 0.193 0.186 0.179 0.172 0.166 0.151 0.142 0.134 0.127 0.120 0.115 0.109 0.102 0.096 0.091 0.086
210 0.201 0.192 0.184 0.177 0.170 0.163 0.157 0.152 0.137 0.129 0.122 0.115 0.110 0.104 0.099 0.093 0.087 0.083 0.078
220 0.184 0.176 0.169 0.162 0.155 0.149 0.144 0.139 0.126 0.118 0.111 0.106 0.100 0.095 0.091 0.085 0.080 0.075 0.071
230 0.170 0.162 0.155 0.149 0.143 0.137 0.132 0.128 0.115 0.108 0.102 0.097 0.092 0.088 0.083 0.078 0.073 0.069 0.065
240 0.157 0.149 0.143 0.137 0.132 0.127 0.122 0.118 0.106 0.100 0.094 0.089 0.085 0.081 0.077 0.072 0.068 0.064 0.060
250 0.145 0.138 0.132 0.127 0.122 0.117 0.113 0.109 0.098 0.092 0.087 0.082 0.078 0.074 0.071 0.066 0.062 0.059 0.056
↓ 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
20 1.000 0.998 0.996 0.994 0.993 0.991 0.990 0.986 0.983 0.981 0.978 0.975 0.972 0.970 0.967 0.963 0.960 0.956 0.953
30 0.963 0.961 0.958 0.955 0.953 0.950 0.948 0.943 0.938 0.933 0.929 0.924 0.920 0.915 0.911 0.904 0.898 0.892 0.886
40 0.925 0.921 0.917 0.913 0.909 0.906 0.902 0.895 0.887 0.880 0.873 0.866 0.859 0.852 0.845 0.835 0.825 0.815 0.805
50 0.883 0.877 0.872 0.866 0.861 0.855 0.850 0.839 0.829 0.818 0.808 0.798 0.787 0.777 0.767 0.752 0.737 0.722 0.708
60 0.835 0.827 0.820 0.812 0.805 0.798 0.790 0.775 0.761 0.746 0.732 0.718 0.704 0.691 0.677 0.657 0.638 0.620 0.602
70 0.781 0.771 0.761 0.751 0.742 0.732 0.722 0.703 0.685 0.667 0.649 0.632 0.615 0.599 0.584 0.561 0.540 0.520 0.502
80 0.721 0.709 0.697 0.685 0.673 0.661 0.650 0.627 0.606 0.585 0.566 0.547 0.529 0.512 0.496 0.474 0.453 0.434 0.416
90 0.657 0.643 0.629 0.615 0.602 0.589 0.576 0.552 0.530 0.508 0.488 0.470 0.452 0.436 0.421 0.400 0.380 0.363 0.346
100 0.593 0.577 0.562 0.548 0.534 0.520 0.507 0.483 0.461 0.440 0.421 0.403 0.387 0.372 0.358 0.339 0.321 0.306 0.291
110 0.531 0.515 0.500 0.485 0.471 0.458 0.445 0.422 0.401 0.381 0.364 0.348 0.333 0.319 0.306 0.289 0.274 0.260 0.247
120 0.474 0.458 0.443 0.429 0.416 0.403 0.391 0.370 0.350 0.332 0.316 0.301 0.288 0.276 0.265 0.249 0.236 0.223 0.212
130 0.423 0.408 0.394 0.380 0.368 0.356 0.345 0.325 0.307 0.291 0.276 0.263 0.251 0.240 0.230 0.217 0.204 0.194 0.184
140 0.378 0.364 0.350 0.338 0.327 0.316 0.306 0.287 0.271 0.256 0.243 0.231 0.221 0.211 0.202 0.190 0.179 0.169 0.161
150 0.339 0.325 0.313 0.302 0.291 0.281 0.272 0.255 0.241 0.227 0.215 0.205 0.195 0.186 0.178 0.167 0.158 0.149 0.142
160 0.305 0.292 0.281 0.271 0.261 0.252 0.243 0.228 0.215 0.203 0.192 0.182 0.174 0.166 0.158 0.149 0.140 0.133 0.126
170 0.275 0.264 0.253 0.244 0.235 0.227 0.219 0.205 0.193 0.182 0.172 0.163 0.155 0.148 0.142 0.133 0.125 0.118 0.112
180 0.249 0.239 0.229 0.220 0.212 0.205 0.198 0.185 0.174 0.164 0.155 0.147 0.140 0.133 0.128 0.120 0.113 0.106 0.101
190 0.227 0.217 0.208 0.200 0.193 0.186 0.179 0.168 0.157 0.148 0.140 0.133 0.127 0.121 0.115 0.108 0.102 0.096 0.091
200 0.207 0.198 0.190 0.183 0.176 0.169 0.163 0.153 0.143 0.135 0.128 0.121 0.115 0.110 0.105 0.098 0.092 0.087 0.083
210 0.190 0.182 0.174 0.167 0.161 0.155 0.149 0.140 0.131 0.123 0.117 0.110 0.105 0.100 0.096 0.090 0.084 0.080 0.075
220 0.174 0.167 0.160 0.154 0.148 0.142 0.137 0.128 0.120 0.113 0.107 0.101 0.096 0.092 0.088 0.082 0.077 0.073 0.069
230 0.161 0.154 0.147 0.141 0.136 0.131 0.126 0.118 0.111 0.104 0.098 0.093 0.088 0.084 0.080 0.075 0.071 0.067 0.063
240 0.149 0.142 0.136 0.131 0.126 0.121 0.117 0.109 0.102 0.096 0.091 0.086 0.082 0.078 0.074 0.070 0.065 0.062 0.058
250 0.138 0.132 0.126 0.121 0.117 0.112 0.108 0.101 0.095 0.089 0.084 0.080 0.076 0.072 0.069 0.064 0.060 0.057 0.054
↓ 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
20 0.999 0.997 0.994 0.992 0.990 0.987 0.985 0.981 0.976 0.972 0.968 0.964 0.961 0.957 0.953 0.948 0.943 0.938 0.933
30 0.948 0.944 0.941 0.937 0.933 0.930 0.926 0.920 0.913 0.907 0.901 0.895 0.889 0.883 0.877 0.869 0.861 0.853 0.845
40 0.896 0.891 0.885 0.880 0.875 0.870 0.866 0.856 0.847 0.838 0.829 0.820 0.812 0.803 0.795 0.783 0.771 0.760 0.748
50 0.841 0.834 0.827 0.821 0.814 0.807 0.801 0.788 0.776 0.763 0.752 0.740 0.729 0.717 0.706 0.690 0.675 0.660 0.645
60 0.783 0.774 0.765 0.757 0.748 0.740 0.732 0.716 0.700 0.685 0.670 0.656 0.642 0.628 0.615 0.596 0.578 0.561 0.544
70 0.722 0.711 0.700 0.690 0.680 0.670 0.660 0.641 0.623 0.605 0.588 0.572 0.557 0.542 0.528 0.508 0.489 0.471 0.454
80 0.659 0.646 0.634 0.622 0.611 0.600 0.589 0.568 0.548 0.529 0.512 0.495 0.479 0.464 0.450 0.430 0.412 0.395 0.379
90 0.596 0.583 0.569 0.557 0.544 0.533 0.521 0.499 0.479 0.460 0.443 0.426 0.411 0.397 0.383 0.365 0.348 0.332 0.318
100 0.536 0.522 0.508 0.495 0.483 0.471 0.459 0.438 0.418 0.400 0.384 0.368 0.354 0.341 0.328 0.311 0.296 0.282 0.269
110 0.480 0.466 0.453 0.440 0.428 0.416 0.405 0.385 0.366 0.349 0.333 0.319 0.306 0.294 0.283 0.268 0.254 0.242 0.230
120 0.430 0.416 0.403 0.391 0.379 0.368 0.358 0.339 0.321 0.306 0.291 0.278 0.267 0.256 0.246 0.232 0.220 0.209 0.199
130 0.385 0.372 0.360 0.348 0.337 0.327 0.317 0.299 0.283 0.269 0.256 0.244 0.234 0.224 0.215 0.203 0.192 0.182 0.173
140 0.346 0.333 0.322 0.311 0.301 0.291 0.282 0.266 0.251 0.238 0.227 0.216 0.206 0.197 0.189 0.178 0.168 0.160 0.152
150 0.311 0.300 0.289 0.279 0.269 0.261 0.252 0.237 0.224 0.212 0.202 0.192 0.183 0.175 0.168 0.158 0.149 0.141 0.134
160 0.281 0.270 0.260 0.251 0.242 0.234 0.227 0.213 0.201 0.190 0.180 0.172 0.164 0.156 0.150 0.141 0.133 0.126 0.120
170 0.255 0.245 0.236 0.227 0.219 0.212 0.205 0.192 0.181 0.171 0.162 0.154 0.147 0.140 0.134 0.126 0.119 0.113 0.107
180 0.232 0.223 0.214 0.206 0.199 0.192 0.186 0.174 0.164 0.155 0.147 0.139 0.133 0.127 0.121 0.114 0.107 0.102 0.096
190 0.212 0.203 0.195 0.188 0.181 0.175 0.169 0.158 0.149 0.140 0.133 0.126 0.120 0.115 0.110 0.103 0.097 0.092 0.087
200 0.194 0.186 0.179 0.172 0.166 0.160 0.154 0.144 0.136 0.128 0.121 0.115 0.110 0.105 0.100 0.094 0.089 0.084 0.079
210 0.178 0.171 0.164 0.158 0.152 0.146 0.141 0.132 0.124 0.117 0.111 0.105 0.100 0.096 0.092 0.086 0.081 0.076 0.072
220 0.164 0.157 0.151 0.145 0.140 0.135 0.130 0.122 0.114 0.108 0.102 0.097 0.092 0.088 0.084 0.079 0.074 0.070 0.066
230 0.152 0.145 0.140 0.134 0.129 0.124 0.120 0.112 0.105 0.099 0.094 0.089 0.085 0.081 0.077 0.073 0.068 0.065 0.061
240 0.141 0.135 0.129 0.124 0.120 0.115 0.111 0.104 0.098 0.092 0.087 0.082 0.078 0.075 0.071 0.067 0.063 0.060 0.056
250 0.131 0.125 0.120 0.115 0.111 0.107 0.103 0.096 0.090 0.085 0.081 0.076 0.073 0.069 0.066 0.062 0.058 0.055 0.052
↓ 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
20 0.999 0.995 0.991 0.988 0.984 0.980 0.977 0.970 0.964 0.958 0.952 0.946 0.940 0.935 0.930 0.922 0.915 0.908 0.901
30 0.922 0.916 0.911 0.906 0.901 0.896 0.891 0.881 0.872 0.863 0.855 0.847 0.839 0.831 0.823 0.813 0.802 0.792 0.782
40 0.848 0.841 0.834 0.828 0.821 0.815 0.808 0.796 0.784 0.773 0.762 0.751 0.741 0.731 0.721 0.707 0.694 0.681 0.668
50 0.777 0.768 0.760 0.752 0.744 0.736 0.728 0.713 0.699 0.685 0.672 0.659 0.647 0.635 0.624 0.608 0.592 0.577 0.563
60 0.707 0.697 0.687 0.678 0.668 0.659 0.651 0.634 0.617 0.602 0.587 0.573 0.560 0.547 0.535 0.517 0.501 0.486 0.471
70 0.640 0.629 0.618 0.607 0.597 0.587 0.578 0.559 0.542 0.526 0.510 0.496 0.482 0.469 0.456 0.439 0.423 0.408 0.394
80 0.576 0.564 0.553 0.542 0.531 0.521 0.511 0.492 0.474 0.458 0.442 0.428 0.414 0.402 0.390 0.373 0.358 0.344 0.330
90 0.517 0.505 0.493 0.482 0.471 0.461 0.451 0.432 0.415 0.399 0.384 0.370 0.357 0.345 0.334 0.319 0.304 0.292 0.280
100 0.464 0.451 0.440 0.428 0.418 0.408 0.398 0.380 0.363 0.348 0.334 0.321 0.309 0.298 0.288 0.274 0.261 0.249 0.239
110 0.416 0.404 0.392 0.381 0.371 0.361 0.352 0.335 0.319 0.305 0.292 0.281 0.270 0.259 0.250 0.237 0.226 0.215 0.206
120 0.373 0.361 0.350 0.340 0.330 0.321 0.313 0.297 0.282 0.269 0.257 0.246 0.236 0.227 0.219 0.207 0.197 0.187 0.179
130 0.336 0.325 0.314 0.305 0.295 0.287 0.279 0.264 0.251 0.239 0.228 0.218 0.209 0.200 0.193 0.182 0.173 0.164 0.157
140 0.303 0.292 0.283 0.274 0.265 0.257 0.250 0.236 0.224 0.213 0.203 0.194 0.185 0.178 0.171 0.161 0.153 0.145 0.138
150 0.274 0.264 0.255 0.247 0.239 0.231 0.224 0.212 0.201 0.190 0.181 0.173 0.165 0.159 0.152 0.144 0.136 0.129 0.123
160 0.249 0.240 0.231 0.223 0.216 0.209 0.203 0.191 0.181 0.171 0.163 0.155 0.149 0.142 0.137 0.129 0.122 0.116 0.110
170 0.227 0.218 0.210 0.203 0.196 0.190 0.184 0.173 0.164 0.155 0.147 0.140 0.134 0.128 0.123 0.116 0.110 0.104 0.099
180 0.207 0.199 0.192 0.185 0.179 0.173 0.167 0.157 0.149 0.141 0.134 0.127 0.122 0.116 0.111 0.105 0.099 0.094 0.089
190 0.190 0.183 0.176 0.169 0.164 0.158 0.153 0.144 0.136 0.128 0.122 0.116 0.111 0.106 0.101 0.095 0.090 0.085 0.081
200 0.175 0.168 0.162 0.156 0.150 0.145 0.140 0.132 0.124 0.118 0.112 0.106 0.101 0.097 0.093 0.087 0.082 0.078 0.074
210 0.161 0.155 0.149 0.143 0.138 0.134 0.129 0.121 0.114 0.108 0.102 0.097 0.093 0.089 0.085 0.080 0.075 0.071 0.068
220 0.149 0.143 0.138 0.133 0.128 0.123 0.119 0.112 0.105 0.100 0.094 0.090 0.086 0.082 0.078 0.074 0.069 0.066 0.062
230 0.138 0.133 0.128 0.123 0.118 0.114 0.110 0.104 0.097 0.092 0.087 0.083 0.079 0.075 0.072 0.068 0.064 0.061 0.058
240 0.129 0.123 0.119 0.114 0.110 0.106 0.103 0.096 0.090 0.085 0.081 0.077 0.073 0.070 0.067 0.063 0.059 0.056 0.053
250 0.120 0.115 0.110 0.106 0.102 0.099 0.095 0.089 0.084 0.079 0.075 0.071 0.068 0.065 0.062 0.058 0.055 0.052 0.049
↓ 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 182 191 200 213 218 227 236 255 273 291 309 327 345 364 382 409 436 464 491
20 182 191 200 208 217 226 235 252 270 287 305 322 339 357 374 400 425 451 476
30 178 186 195 203 212 220 229 245 262 279 295 311 328 344 360 384 408 431 454
40 173 181 189 197 205 213 221 237 253 268 283 298 313 328 342 363 384 405 425
50 168 176 183 191 198 205 213 227 241 255 268 281 294 306 318 336 352 368 383
60 162 169 175 182 189 195 202 214 226 237 248 258 268 278 286 299 310 320 329
70 154 160 166 171 177 182 188 197 207 215 223 230 237 243 249 256 263 268 274
80 144 149 154 158 163 167 171 178 184 190 195 199 204 207 210 215 219 222 225
90 133 137 140 143 146 149 152 157 161 164 168 170 173 175 177 179 182 184 185
100 120 123 125 128 130 132 133 136 139 141 143 145 146 148 149 151 152 153 154
110 107 109 111 112 114 115 116 118 120 121 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 129 130
120 95.5 96.7 97.9 98.9 100 101 101 103 104 105 106 107 107 108 109 109 110 110 111
130 84.6 85.5 86.3 87 87.7 88.3 88.8 89.8 90.6 91.3 92.0 92.5 93.0 93.5 93.9 94.4 94.9 95.3 95.7
140 75.2 75.8 76.4 76.9 77.4 77.8 78.2 78.9 79.5 80.0 80.5 80.9 81.3 81.6 81.9 82.3 82.6 83.0 83.2
150 67.0 67.4 67.9 68.2 68.6 68.9 69.2 69.7 70.2 70.6 70.9 71.2 71.5 71.8 72.0 72.3 72.6 72.9 73.1
160 59.9 60.3 60.6 60.9 61.1 61.4 61.6 62.0 62.4 62.7 62.9 63.2 63.4 63.6 63.8 64.0 64.3 64.5 64.6
170 53.8 54.1 54.3 54.6 54.8 55.0 55.1 55.5 55.7 56.0 56.2 56.4 56.6 56.7 56.9 57.1 57.3 57.4 57.6
180 48.6 48.8 49.0 49.2 49.3 49.5 49.6 49.9 50.1 50.3 50.5 50.6 50.8 50.9 51.0 51.2 51.3 51.5 51.6
190 44.0 44.2 44.3 44.5 44.6 44.7 44.9 45.1 45.3 45.4 45.6 45.7 45.8 45.9 46.0 46.2 46.3 46.4 46.5
200 40.0 40.2 40.3 40.4 40.5 40.7 40.7 40.9 41.1 41.2 41.3 41.4 41.5 41.6 41.7 41.8 41.9 42.0 42.1
210 36.6 36.7 36.8 36.9 37.0 37.1 37.2 37.3 37.4 37.6 37.7 37.8 37.8 37.9 38.0 38.1 38.2 38.3 38.3
220 33.5 33.6 33.7 33.8 33.9 34.0 34.0 34.2 34.3 34.4 34.5 34.5 34.6 34.7 34.7 34.8 34.9 35.0 35.0
230 30.8 30.9 31.0 31.1 31.2 31.2 31.3 31.4 31.5 31.6 31.6 31.7 31.8 31.8 31.9 31.9 32.0 32.1 32.1
240 28.5 28.5 28.6 28.7 28.7 28.8 28.8 28.9 29.0 29.1 29.1 29.2 29.3 29.3 29.4 29.4 29.5 29.5 29.6
250 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.5 26.6 26.6 26.7 26.7 26.8 26.9 26.9 27.0 27.0 27.1 27.1 27.2 27.2 27.3 27.3
Table 9 (b) Design Compressive Stress, fcd (MPa) for Column Buckling Class b
(Clause 13.1.2.1)
↓ 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 182 191 200 209 218 227 236 255 273 291 309 327 345 364 382 409 436 464 491
20 182 190 199 208 217 225 234 251 268 285 302 319 336 353 369 394 419 443 468
30 175 183 192 200 208 216 224 240 256 271 287 302 318 333 348 370 392 414 435
40 168 176 183 191 198 206 213 228 242 256 270 283 297 310 323 342 360 378 395
50 161 167 174 181 188 194 201 214 226 238 250 261 272 283 293 308 322 335 347
60 152 158 164 170 176 181 187 197 207 217 226 235 243 251 259 269 279 287 295
70 142 147 152 157 162 166 171 179 187 194 201 207 213 218 223 230 236 241 246
80 131 135 139 143 147 150 154 160 165 170 175 179 183 186 190 194 198 201 204
90 120 123 126 129 131 134 136 141 144 148 151 154 156 159 161 163 166 168 170
100 108 110 112 114 116 118 120 123 126 128 130 132 134 135 137 139 140 142 143
110 96.5 98.3 100 101 103 104 105 107 109 111 112 114 115 116 117 118 119 121 121
120 86.2 87.5 88.6 89.7 90.7 91.7 92.5 94.1 95.4 96.6 97.7 98.6 100 100 101 102 103 104 104
130 76.9 77.8 78.7 79.5 80.3 81.0 81.6 82.7 83.7 84.6 85.4 86.1 86.8 87.3 87.9 88.6 89.2 89.8 90.3
140 68.7 69.4 70.1 70.7 71.3 71.8 72.3 73.1 73.9 74.6 75.2 75.7 76.2 76.6 77.1 77.6 78.1 78.5 78.9
150 61.6 62.1 62.6 63.1 63.6 64.0 64.3 65.0 65.6 66.1 66.6 67.0 67.4 67.7 68.1 68.5 68.9 69.2 69.5
160 55.4 55.8 56.2 56.6 56.9 57.3 57.5 58.1 58.5 59.0 59.3 59.7 60.0 60.3 60.5 60.9 61.2 61.5 61.7
170 50.0 50.3 50.7 51.0 51.2 51.5 51.7 52.2 52.5 52.9 53.2 53.5 53.7 53.9 54.1 54.4 54.7 54.9 55.1
180 45.3 45.6 45.9 46.1 46.3 46.5 46.7 47.1 47.4 47.7 47.9 48.1 48.3 48.5 48.7 48.9 49.2 49.3 49.5
190 41.2 41.5 41.7 41.9 42.1 42.2 42.4 42.7 42.9 43.2 43.4 43.6 43.7 43.9 44.0 44.2 44.4 44.6 44.7
200 37.6 37.8 38.0 38.2 38.3 38.5 38.6 38.9 39.1 39.3 39.5 39.6 39.8 39.9 40.0 40.2 40.3 40.5 40.6
210 34.5 34.7 34.8 35.0 35.1 35.2 35.3 35.5 35.7 35.9 36.0 36.2 36.3 36.4 36.5 36.6 36.8 36.9 37.0
220 31.7 31.9 32.0 32.1 32.2 32.3 32.4 32.6 32.8 32.9 33.0 33.1 33.2 33.3 33.4 33.6 33.7 33.8 33.9
230 29.2 29.4 29.5 29.6 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0 30.1 30.3 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.7 30.7 30.8 30.9 31.0 31.1
240 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.3 27.4 27.5 27.6 27.7 27.8 27.9 28.0 28.1 28.2 28.3 28.3 28.4 28.5 28.6 28.7
250 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.7 25.8 25.9 26.0 26.0 26.1 26.2 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.5 26.5
↓ 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 182 191 200 209 218 227 236 255 273 291 309 327 345 364 382 409 436 464 491
20 182 190 199 207 216 224 233 250 266 283 299 316 332 348 364 388 412 435 458
30 172 180 188 196 204 211 219 234 249 264 278 293 307 321 335 355 376 395 415
40 163 170 177 184 191 198 205 218 231 244 256 268 280 292 304 320 337 352 367
50 153 159 165 172 178 183 189 201 212 222 232 242 252 261 270 282 295 306 317
60 142 148 153 158 163 168 173 182 191 199 207 215 222 228 235 244 252 260 267
70 131 136 140 144 148 152 156 163 170 176 182 187 192 197 202 208 213 218 223
80 120 123 127 130 133 136 139 145 149 154 158 162 165 169 172 176 180 183 186
90 108 111 114 116 119 121 123 127 131 134 137 140 142 144 146 149 152 154 156
100 97.5 100 102 104 105 107 109 112 114 116 119 120 122 124 125 127 129 131 132
110 87.3 89.0 90.5 92.0 93.3 94.6 95.7 97.9 100 102 103 104 106 107 108 110 111 112 113
120 78.2 79.4 80.6 81.7 82.7 83.7 84.6 86.2 87.6 88.9 90.1 91.1 92.1 93.0 93.8 94.9 95.9 96.8 97.6
130 70.0 71.0 71.9 72.8 73.5 74.3 75.0 76.2 77.3 78.3 79.2 80.0 80.7 81.4 82.0 82.9 83.6 84.3 84.9
140 62.9 63.6 64.4 65.0 65.6 66.2 66.7 67.7 68.6 69.3 70.0 70.7 71.2 71.8 72.3 72.9 73.5 74.1 74.6
150 56.6 57.2 57.8 58.3 58.8 59.2 59.7 60.4 61.1 61.7 62.3 62.8 63.3 63.7 64.1 64.6 65.1 65.5 65.9
160 51.1 51.6 52.1 52.5 52.9 53.3 53.6 54.2 54.8 55.3 55.7 56.1 56.5 56.9 57.2 57.6 58.0 58.4 58.7
170 46.4 46.8 47.1 47.5 47.8 48.1 48.4 48.9 49.3 49.8 50.1 50.5 50.8 51.1 51.3 51.7 52.0 52.3 52.6
180 42.2 42.5 42.8 43.1 43.4 43.6 43.9 44.3 44.7 45.0 45.3 45.6 45.8 46.1 46.3 46.6 46.9 47.1 47.3
190 38.5 38.8 39.0 39.3 39.5 39.7 39.9 40.3 40.6 40.9 41.1 41.4 41.6 41.8 42.0 42.2 42.5 42.7 42.9
200 35.3 35.5 35.7 35.9 36.1 36.3 36.5 36.8 37.0 37.3 37.5 37.7 37.9 38.1 38.2 38.4 38.6 38.8 39.0
210 32.4 32.6 32.8 33.0 33.1 33.3 33.4 33.7 33.9 34.1 34.3 34.5 34.7 34.8 34.9 35.1 35.3 35.4 35.6
220 29.9 30.1 30.2 30.4 30.5 30.6 30.8 31.0 31.2 31.4 31.5 31.7 31.8 31.9 32.1 32.2 32.4 32.5 32.6
230 27.6 27.8 27.9 28.0 28.2 28.3 28.4 28.6 28.8 28.9 29.1 29.2 29.3 29.4 29.5 29.7 29.8 29.9 30.0
240 25.6 25.7 25.9 26.0 26.1 26.2 26.3 26.4 26.6 26.7 26.9 27.0 27.1 27.2 27.3 27.4 27.5 27.6 27.7
250 23.8 23.9 24.0 24.1 24.2 24.3 24.4 24.5 24.7 24.8 24.9 25.0 25.1 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.6 25.7
Table 9 (d) Design Compressive Stress, fcd (MPa) for Column Buckling Class d
(Clause 13.1.2.1)
↓ 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 182 191 200 209 218 227 236 255 273 291 309 327 345 364 382 409 436 464 491
20 182 190 198 206 215 223 231 247 263 279 294 310 325 340 355 377 399 421 442
30 168 175 182 189 197 204 211 224 238 251 264 277 290 302 314 332 350 367 384
40 154 161 167 173 179 185 191 203 214 225 235 246 256 266 275 289 303 316 328
50 141 147 152 157 162 167 172 182 191 199 208 216 224 231 238 249 258 268 277
60 129 133 137 142 146 150 154 161 168 175 182 188 193 199 204 212 219 225 231
70 116 120 124 127 130 133 137 142 148 153 158 162 167 171 174 180 184 189 193
80 105 108 111 113 116 118 121 125 129 133 137 140 143 146 149 153 156 159 162
90 94.1 96.4 98.6 101 103 105 107 110 113 116 119 121 123 126 128 130 133 135 137
100 84.3 86.2 87.9 89.6 91.1 92.6 94.0 96.7 99.1 101 103 105 107 108 110 112 114 116 117
110 75.6 77.0 78.4 79.7 81.0 82.1 83.2 85.3 87.1 88.8 90.4 91.8 93.1 94.4 95.5 97.1 98.5 100 101
120 67.8 69.0 70.1 71.1 72.1 73.0 73.9 75.5 77.0 78.3 79.5 80.6 81.7 82.6 83.5 84.7 85.8 86.9 87.8
130 61.0 62.0 62.8 63.7 64.5 65.2 65.9 67.2 68.3 69.4 70.4 71.2 72.1 72.8 73.5 74.5 75.4 76.2 76.9
140 55.0 55.8 56.5 57.2 57.8 58.4 59.0 60.0 61.0 61.8 62.6 63.3 64.0 64.6 65.2 66.0 66.7 67.3 67.9
150 49.8 50.4 51.0 51.6 52.1 52.6 53.1 53.9 54.7 55.4 56.0 56.6 57.2 57.7 58.1 58.8 59.3 59.9 60.4
160 45.2 45.7 46.2 46.7 47.1 47.5 47.9 48.6 49.3 49.9 50.4 50.9 51.3 51.7 52.1 52.7 53.1 53.6 54.0
170 41.2 41.6 42.1 42.4 42.8 43.1 43.5 44.1 44.6 45.1 45.5 45.9 46.3 46.7 47.0 47.4 47.8 48.2 48.6
180 37.7 38.0 38.4 38.7 39.0 39.3 39.6 40.1 40.5 41.0 41.3 41.7 42.0 42.3 42.6 43.0 43.3 43.6 43.9
190 34.5 34.9 35.2 35.4 35.7 35.9 36.2 36.6 37.0 37.4 37.7 38.0 38.2 38.5 38.7 39.1 39.4 39.6 39.9
200 31.8 32.0 32.3 32.5 32.8 33.0 33.2 33.6 33.9 34.2 34.5 34.7 35.0 35.2 35.4 35.7 35.9 36.2 36.4
210 29.3 29.6 29.8 30.0 30.2 30.4 30.5 30.9 31.2 31.4 31.7 31.9 32.1 32.3 32.5 32.7 32.9 33.1 33.3
220 27.1 27.3 27.5 27.7 27.9 28.0 28.2 28.5 28.7 29.0 29.2 29.4 29.6 29.7 29.9 30.1 30.3 30.5 30.6
230 25.2 25.3 25.5 25.7 25.8 26.0 26.1 26.4 26.6 26.8 27.0 27.1 27.3 27.5 27.6 27.8 27.9 28.1 28.2
240 23.4 23.6 23.7 23.9 24.0 24.1 24.2 24.5 24.7 24.8 25.0 25.2 25.3 25.4 25.5 25.7 25.9 26.0 26.1
250 21.8 22.0 22.1 22.2 22.3 22.5 22.6 22.8 22.9 23.1 23.2 23.4 23.5 23.6 23.7 23.9 24.0 24.1 24.2
t f >100 mm z-z d
y-y d
Welded I-Section t f £40 mm z-z b
y-y c
t f >40 mm z-z c
y-y d
Any b
Built-up Member
Any c
2.0L
13.7.3 Spacing of Battens 13.8.4 The rivets, bolts or welds in these connections
shall be sufficient to carry the shear force and moments,
13.7.3.1 In battened compression members where the if any, specified for battened struts (see 13.7.3), and in
individual members are not specifically checked for no case shall the rivets or bolts be less than 16 mm
shear stress and bending moments, the spacing of diameter for members up to and including 10 mm thick;
battens, centre-to-centre of its end fastenings, shall be 20 mm diameter for members up to and including
such that the slenderness ratio (KL/r) of any component 16 mm thick; and 22 mm diameter for members over
over that distance shall be not greater than 50 nor greater 16 mm thick.
than 0.7 times the slenderness ratio of the member as a 13.8.4.1 Compression members connected by such
whole about its z-z axis (parallel to the battens). riveting, bolting or welding shall not be subjected to
13.7.4 Attachment to Main Members transverse loading in a plane perpendicular to the
riveted, bolted or welded surfaces.
13.7.4.1 Welded connections
13.8.5 Where the components are in contact back-to-
Where tie or batten plates overlap the main members, back, the spacing of the rivets, bolts or intermittent
the amount of lap shall be not less than four times the welds shall not exceed the maximum spacing for
thickness of the plate. The length of weld connecting compression members as given in Section 6(m).
each edge of the batten plate to the member shall, in
SECTION 6(h) DESIGN OF MEMBERS
aggregate, be not less than half the depth of the batten
SUBJECTED TO BENDING
plate. At least one-third of the weld shall be placed at
each end of this edge. The length of weld and depth of 14 DESIGN OF MEMBERS SUBJECTED TO
batten plate shall be measured along the longitudinal BENDING
axis of the main member.
14.1 General
In addition, the welding shall be returned along the Members subjected to predominant bending shall have
other two edges of the plates transversely to the axis of adequate design strength to resist bending moment,
the main member for a length not less than the minimum shear force, and concentrated forces imposed upon and
lap specified above. their combinations. Further, the members shall satisfy
PART 6 STRUCTURAL DESIGN SECTION 6 STEEL 53
the deflection limitation presented in Section 6(e), as yielding (see 14.4.2.1), the design bending strength
serviceability criteria. Member subjected to other forces shall be calculated using one of the following methods:
in addition to bending or biaxial bending shall be
a) The bending moment and axial force acting
designed in accordance with Section 6(j).
on the section may be assumed to be resisted
14.1.1 Effective Span of Beams by flanges only and the web is designed only
to resist shear (see 14.4).
The effective span of a beam shall be taken as the
distance between the centres of the supports, except b) The bending moment and axial force acting
where the point of application of the reaction is taken on the section may be assumed to be resisted
as eccentric at the support, when it shall be permissible by the whole section. In such a case, the web
to take the effective span as the length between the shall be designed for combined shear and
assumed lines of the reactions. normal stresses using simple elastic theory in
case of semi-compact webs and simple plastic
14.2 Design Strength in Bending (Flexure) theory in the case of compact and plastic webs.
The design bending strength of beam, adequately 14.2.1.2 When the factored design shear force does
supported against lateral torsional buckling (laterally not exceed 0.6 Vd, where Vd is the design shear strength
supported beam) is governed by the yield stress of the cross-section (see 14.4), the design bending
(see 14.2.1). When a beam is not adequately supported strength, Md shall be taken as:
against lateral buckling (laterally un-supported beams)
Md = βb Z p fy /γm0
the design bending strength may be governed by lateral
torsional buckling strength (see 14.2.2). To avoid irreversible deformation under serviceability
loads, Md shall be less than 1.2 Ze fy /γm0 in case of
The factored design moment, M at any section, in a
simply supported and 1.5 Ze fy /γm0 in case of cantilever
beam due to external actions, shall satisfy
beams;
M ≤ Md
where
where
βb = 1.0 for plastic and compact sections;
Md = design bending strength of the section, = Ze/ Zp for semi-compact sections;
calculated as given in 14.2.1.2.
Z p , Ze = plastic and elastic section moduli of the
14.2.1 Laterally Supported Beam cross-section, respectively;
A beam may be assumed to be adequately supported at fy = yield stress of the material; and
the supports, provided the compression flange has full γm0 = partial safety factor (see 11.4.1).
lateral restraint and nominal torsional restraint at
supports supplied by web cleats, partial depth end 14.2.1.3 When the design shear force (factored), V
plates, fin plates or continuity with the adjacent span. exceeds 0.6Vd, where Vd is the design shear strength of
Full lateral restraint to compression flange may be the cross-section (see 14.4) the design bending strength,
assumed to exist if the frictional or other positive Md shall be taken as:
restraint of a floor connection to the compression flange Md = Mdv
of the member is capable of resisting a lateral force not
less than 2.5 percent of the maximum force in the where
compression flange of the member. This may be Mdv = design bending strength under high shear as
considered to be uniformly distributed along the flange, defined in 15.2.
provided gravity loads constitute the dominant loading
14.2.1.4 Holes in the tension zone
on the member and the floor construction is capable of
resisting this lateral force. a) The effect of holes in the tension flange, on
the design bending strength need not be
The design bending strength of a section which are not
considered if
susceptible to web buckling under shear before yielding
(Anf / Agf) ≥ (fy/fu) (γm1 /γm0 )/0.9
(where d/tw ≤ 67e) shall be determined according
to 14.2.1.2. where
Anf /Agf = ratio of net to gross area of the
14.2.1.1 Section with webs susceptible to shear
flange in tension;
buckling before yielding
fy/fu = ratio of yield and ultimate stress
When the flanges are plastic, compact or semi-compact of the material; and
but the web is susceptible to shear buckling before γm1/γm0 = ratio of partial safety factors
fcr,b fy
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 000 181.8 190.9 200 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
8 000 181.8 190.9 200 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
6 000 181.8 190.9 200 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
4 000 181.8 190.9 200 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
2 000 181.8 190.9 200 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
1 000 169.1 179.5 186 196.5 202.9 209.1 219.8 229.1 245.5 261.8 275.1 291.3 300.5 323.6 332.2 355.9 370.9 384.8 412.4
900 169.1 179.5 186 194.5 200.7 204.5 215.1 231.6 242.7 258.9 272 291.3 300.5 316.4 328.4 339.5 366.5 380.2 392.7
800 167.3 177.5 184 190.3 196.4 206.8 212.7 224 240 258.9 268.9 284.7 293.6 301.8 324.5 335.5 349.1 370.9 387.8
700 163.6 171.8 182 188.2 192 202.3 208 226.5 237.3 250.2 259.6 278.2 286.7 294.5 305.5 327.3 340.4 352.4 363.3
600 161.8 168 176 181.9 194.2 197.7 203.3 218.9 226.4 244.4 253.5 261.8 276.4 287.3 294 306.8 322.9 333.8 343.6
500 161.8 166.1 172 179.8 185.5 188.6 200.9 208.7 218.2 232.7 244.2 248.7 259.1 269.1 274.9 286.4 296.7 301.4 314.2
450 158.2 164.2 168 173.5 183.3 186.4 191.5 206.2 215.5 224 231.8 242.2 248.7 258.2 263.5 274.1 279.3 292.1 294.5
400 150.9 162.3 166 169.4 174.5 184.1 186.7 196 204.5 215.3 222.5 229.1 238.4 243.6 248.2 257.7 261.8 264.3 274.9
350 147.3 152.7 162 165.2 170.2 172.7 179.6 188.4 193.6 200.7 210.2 212.7 221.1 225.5 229.1 233.2 240 241.1 245.5
300 143.6 147 152 154.7 161.5 163.6 167.8 175.6 182.7 186.2 194.7 196.4 196.9 203.6 206.2 212.7 213.8 217.9 220.9
250 134.5 137.5 142 144.3 148.4 152.3 153.6 160.4 163.6 165.8 170 173.5 179.6 178.2 179.5 184.1 183.3 185.5 191.5
200 121.8 124.1 126 129.6 130.9 134.1 134.7 137.5 141.8 142.5 145.3 147.3 148.5 149.1 152.7 151.4 152.7 153 157.1
150 101.8 103.1 104 104.5 106.9 106.8 108.7 109.5 111.8 113.5 114.4 114.5 117.5 116.4 118.4 118.6 117.8 120.5 122.7
100 74.5 76.4 76 77.4 76.4 77.3 78 78.9 79.1 78.5 80.4 81.8 79.5 80 80.2 81.8 82.9 83.5 83.5
90 67.3 68.7 70 69 69.8 70.5 70.9 71.3 70.9 72.7 74.2 72 72.5 72.7 72.5 73.6 74.2 74.2 73.6
80 61.8 63 62 62.7 63.3 63.6 63.8 63.6 65.5 64 64.9 65.5 65.6 65.5 64.9 65.5 65.5 64.9 68.7
70 54.5 55.4 56 56.5 56.7 56.8 56.7 56 57.3 58.2 58.7 58.9 58.7 58.2 57.3 57.3 56.7 60.3 58.9
60 47.3 47.7 48 48.1 48 50 49.6 48.4 49.1 49.5 49.5 49.1 48.4 50.9 49.6 49.1 52.4 51 49.1
50 40 40.1 40 41.8 41.5 40.9 40.2 40.7 40.9 40.7 43.3 42.5 41.5 43.6 42 40.9 43.6 41.7 44.2
40 32.7 32.5 32 33.5 32.7 34.1 33.1 33.1 32.7 34.9 34 32.7 34.5 32.7 34.4 32.7 34.9 32.5 34.4
30 25.5 24.8 26 25.1 26.2 25 26 25.5 24.5 26.2 24.7 26.2 24.2 25.5 26.7 24.5 26.2 27.8 24.5
20 16.4 17.2 18 16.7 17.5 18.2 16.5 17.8 16.4 17.5 18.5 16.4 17.3 18.2 19.1 16.4 17.5 18.5 19.6
10 9.1 9.5 8 8.4 8.7 9.1 9.5 7.6 8.2 8.7 9.3 9.8 10.4 7.3 7.6 8.2 8.7 9.3 9.8
Table 13(b) Design Bending Compressive Stress Corresponding to Lateral Buckling, fbd, α LT = 0.49)
(Clause 14.2.2)
fcr,b fy
200 210 220 230 240 250 260 280 300 320 340 360 380 400 420 450 480 510 540
10 000 181.8 190.9 200.0 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
8 000 181.8 190.9 200.0 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
6 000 181.8 190.9 200.0 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
4 000 181.8 190.9 200.0 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
2 000 181.8 190.9 200.0 209.1 218.2 227.3 236.4 254.5 272.7 290.9 309.1 327.3 345.5 363.6 381.8 409.1 436.4 463.6 490.9
1 000 160.0 164.2 170.0 179.8 185.5 190.9 196.2 211.3 220.9 235.6 247.3 255.3 266.0 280 290.2 302.7 318.5 329.2 343.6
900 154.5 164.2 170.0 173.5 183.3 188.6 193.8 203.6 218.2 226.9 238.0 252.0 262.5 269.1 282.5 290.5 305.5 319.9 333.8
800 152.7 158.5 168.0 171.5 176.7 181.8 191.5 201.1 210.0 224.0 234.9 242.2 252.2 258.2 271.1 282.3 296.7 306 319.1
700 150.9 154.6 160.0 169.4 172.4 177.3 182.0 196 207.3 215.3 222.5 232.4 238.4 247.3 259.6 270 279.3 292.1 304.4
600 145.5 150.8 154.0 161.0 168.0 172.7 177.3 188.4 193.6 203.6 213.3 222.5 228 236.4 244.4 253.6 261.8 273.5 274.9
500 140.0 145.1 150.0 154.7 159.3 161.4 167.8 175.6 185.5 192 200.9 206.2 214.2 218.2 225.3 229.1 240 245.7 250.4
450 134.5 141.3 144.0 148.5 152.7 156.8 160.7 168 177.3 186.2 191.6 196.4 203.8 210.9 213.8 220.9 231.3 236.5 235.6
400 129.1 135.5 138.0 142.2 148.4 150 153.6 162.9 169.1 174.5 182.4 183.3 193.5 196.4 202.4 208.6 209.5 217.9 220.9
350 123.6 129.8 132.0 135.9 139.6 143.2 148.9 152.7 158.2 162.9 170 173.5 176.2 181.8 183.3 192.3 196.4 199.4 206.2
300 118.2 122.2 126.0 129.6 130.9 134.1 137.1 142.5 147.3 154.2 157.6 157.1 162.4 167.3 168 175.9 178.9 180.8 181.6
250 109.1 112.6 116.0 117.1 120.0 122.7 125.3 129.8 130.9 136.7 139.1 140.7 145.1 149.1 148.9 151.4 152.7 157.6 157.1
200 98.2 101.2 102.0 104.5 104.7 109.1 108.7 112 117.3 119.3 120.5 121.1 124.4 127.3 126 130.9 130.9 129.8 132.5
150 83.6 84.0 86.0 87.8 89.5 88.6 89.8 91.6 95.5 96.0 95.8 98.2 100.2 101.8 103.1 102.3 104.7 106.6 103.1
100 63.6 63.0 64.0 64.8 65.5 65.9 66.2 68.7 68.2 69.8 71.1 68.7 69.1 72.7 72.5 73.6 74.2 74.2 73.6
90 58.2 57.3 60.0 58.5 61.1 61.4 61.5 61.1 62.7 64.0 64.9 65.5 65.6 65.5 64.9 65.5 65.5 64.9 68.7
80 52.7 53.5 54.0 54.4 54.5 54.5 54.4 56 57.3 58.2 58.7 58.9 58.7 58.2 61.1 61.4 61.1 60.3 58.9
70 47.3 47.7 48.0 48.1 48.0 50.0 49.6 50.9 49.1 49.5 52.5 52.4 51.8 50.9 53.5 53.2 52.4 55.6 54.0
60 41.8 42.0 42.0 41.8 43.6 43.2 42.5 43.3 43.6 43.6 43.3 45.8 44.9 47.3 45.8 45.0 48.0 46.4 49.1
50 36.4 36.3 36.0 35.5 37.1 36.4 37.8 38.2 38.2 37.8 37.1 39.3 38.0 40.0 38.2 40.9 39.3 37.1 39.3
40 29.1 30.5 30.0 29.3 30.5 29.5 30.7 30.5 30.0 32.0 30.9 32.7 31.1 32.7 30.5 32.7 30.5 32.5 34.4
30 23.6 22.9 22.0 23.0 24.0 22.7 23.6 22.9 24.5 23.3 24.7 22.9 24.2 25.5 22.9 24.5 26.2 23.2 24.5
20 16.4 15.3 16.0 16.7 15.3 15.9 16.5 15.3 16.4 17.5 15.5 16.4 17.3 18.2 15.3 16.4 17.5 18.5 14.7
10 9.1 7.6 8.0 8.4 8.7 9.1 9.5 7.6 8.2 8.7 9.3 9.8 6.9 7.3 7.6 8.2 8.7 9.3 9.8
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 80 100
10 22551.2 22255.1 22092.6 21994.1 21929.8 21885.7 21854.0 21805.4 21779.0 21763.1 21752.7 21740.5 21733.8 21727.2 21724.2
20 6220.5 5947.9 5794.5 5700.0 5637.8 5594.7 5563.8 5515.8 5489.7 5473.8 5463.5 5451.4 5444.8 5438.2 5435.1
30 3149.3 2905.9 2764.6 2676.0 2616.7 2575.3 2545.3 2498.5 2472.8 2457.1 2447.0 2434.9 2428.3 2421.7 2418.6
40 2036.1 1821.2 1693.0 1610.8 1555.1 1515.8 1487.0 1441.7 1416.5 1401.1 1391.0 1379.0 1372.5 1365.9 1362.8
50 1492.9 1303.2 1187.3 1111.8 1059.9 1022.7 995.3 951.7 927.1 912.0 902.0 890.2 883.7 877.1 874.2
60 1178.0 1009.5 905.0 835.6 787.4 752.4 726.4 684.6 660.9 646.1 636.4 624.7 618.2 611.7 608.7
70 973.9 823.2 728.5 664.8 620.1 587.4 562.9 522.9 500.0 485.5 476.0 464.4 458.0 451.7 448.7
80 831.3 695.4 609.2 550.7 509.1 478.4 455.3 417.2 395.1 381.2 371.8 360.5 354.1 347.7 344.7
90 725.9 602.6 523.6 469.5 430.9 402.2 380.4 344.2 322.9 309.3 300.2 289.1 282.8 276.5 273.5
100 644.7 532.0 459.3 409.3 373.2 346.4 325.8 291.4 270.9 257.7 248.8 237.9 231.8 225.5 222.5
110 580.4 476.6 409.3 362.9 329.2 303.9 284.5 251.8 232.1 219.3 210.8 200.1 194.0 187.8 184.8
120 527.9 431.9 369.5 326.0 294.5 270.7 252.3 221.2 202.4 190.1 181.6 171.2 165.2 159.1 156.2
130 484.3 395.0 336.8 296.1 266.5 244.1 226.7 197.1 179.0 167.1 158.8 148.6 142.8 136.7 133.9
140 447.6 364.2 309.5 271.5 243.4 222.3 205.8 177.5 160.2 148.7 140.7 130.8 125.0 119.0 116.2
150 416.0 337.8 286.6 250.6 224.2 204.2 188.4 161.5 144.8 133.7 126.0 116.3 110.6 104.7 101.9
160 388.7 315.2 266.8 232.8 207.8 188.8 173.9 148.2 132.0 121.3 113.9 104.3 98.8 93.0 90.1
170 364.9 295.4 249.6 217.5 193.7 175.6 161.4 136.7 121.3 111.0 103.6 94.4 89.0 83.2 80.4
180 343.9 278.0 234.6 204.1 181.5 164.2 150.6 127.1 112.2 102.2 95.2 86.0 80.7 75.0 72.3
190 325.2 262.6 221.3 192.3 170.7 154.2 141.2 118.6 104.3 94.6 87.8 79.0 73.7 68.1 65.3
200 308.3 248.8 209.6 181.7 161.2 145.4 133.0 111.3 97.5 88.1 81.4 72.8 67.8 62.2 59.5
210 293.3 236.5 198.9 172.4 152.7 137.6 125.7 104.8 91.5 82.4 75.9 67.5 62.6 57.1 54.5
220 279.5 225.3 189.3 163.9 145.1 130.6 119.1 99.0 86.2 77.4 71.2 62.9 58.1 52.7 50.1
230 267.1 215.2 180.7 156.3 138.2 124.3 113.3 93.9 81.5 72.9 66.9 58.9 54.1 48.8 46.2
240 255.8 205.8 172.8 149.4 132.0 118.6 108.0 89.3 77.2 69.0 63.1 55.3 50.6 45.4 42.8
250 245.3 197.3 165.6 143.0 126.3 113.4 103.2 85.1 73.5 65.5 59.7 52.1 47.5 42.4 39.8
260 235.7 189.5 159.0 137.3 121.1 108.7 98.8 81.3 70.1 62.3 56.7 49.3 44.8 39.7 37.2
270 226.8 182.3 152.8 131.9 116.3 104.3 94.7 77.9 67.0 59.4 53.9 46.8 42.2 37.3 34.8
280 218.6 175.7 147.2 126.9 111.9 100.2 91.1 74.7 64.1 56.8 51.5 44.4 40.0 35.2 32.7
290 210.9 169.4 141.9 122.3 107.8 96.6 87.7 71.8 61.5 54.3 49.2 42.2 38.1 33.2 30.8
300 203.8 163.7 137.1 118.1 104.1 93.2 84.5 69.1 59.1 52.1 47.1 40.4 36.2 31.5 29.0
The following simplified equation may be used in the 14.3 Effective Length for Lateral Torsional Buckling
case of prismatic members made of standard rolled
14.3.1 For simply supported beams and girders of span
I-sections and welded doubly symmetric I-sections, for
length, L, where no lateral restraint to the compression
calculating the elastic lateral buckling moment, Mcr
flanges is provided, but where each end of the beam is
(see Table 14).
restrained against torsion, the effective length LLT of
2 0.5 the lateral buckling to be used in 14.2.2.1 shall be taken
π2 EI y hf 1 L /r as in Table 15.
M cr = 1 + LT y
2L2LT 20 hf / tf In simply supported beams with intermediate lateral
restraints against lateral torsional buckling, the effective
where
length for lateral torsional buckling, LLT to be used in
It = torsional constant ∑ biti3/3 for open section; 14.2.2.1, shall be taken as the length of the relevant
Iw = warping constant; segment in between the lateral restraints. In the case of
intermediate partial lateral restraints, the effective length,
Iy,,ry = moment of inertia and radius of gyration,
LLT shall be taken as equal to 1.2 times the length of the
respectively about the weaker axis;
relevant segment in between the partial lateral restraints.
LLT = effective length for lateral torsional buckling
(see 14.3); Restraint against torsional rotation at supports in these
beams may be provided by,
hf = centre-to-centre distance between flanges;
and a) web or flange cleats, or
tf = thickness of the flange. b) bearing stiffeners acting in conjunction with
Mcr for different beam sections, considering loading, the bearing of the beam, or
support condition, and asymmetric section, shall be c) lateral end frames or external supports
more accurately calculated using the method given in providing lateral restraint to the compression
Annex D. The above equations for calculating Mcr may flanges at the ends, or
be conservatively used for channel sections. d) their being built into walls.
Vn = Vp εw = 250 / f yw
where 14.4.2.2 Shear buckling design methods
Av f yw The nominal shear strength, Vn, of webs with or without
Vp = intermediate stiffeners as governed by buckling may
3
be evaluated using one of the following methods:
Av = shear area; and
a) Simple post-critical method The simple
fyw = yield strength of the web. post critical method, based on the shear
14.4.1.1 The shear area may be calculated as given buckling strength can be used for webs of
below: I-section girders, with or without intermediate
transverse stiffener, provided that the web has
a)
I-and channel sections: transverse stiffeners at the supports. The
Major Axis Bending: nominal shear strength is given by:
Hot-rolled : h tw Vn = Vcr
Welded : d tw where
Minor Axis Bending: Vcr = shear force corresponding to web
Hot-rolled or welded : 2b tf buckling
b) Rectangular hollow sections of uniform = Avτb
thickness: where
Loaded parallel to depth (h) : A h/(b+h) τb = shear stress corresponding to web buckling,
Loaded parallel to width (b) : A b/(b+h) determined as follows:
c) Circular hollow tubes of uniform : 2A/π
thickness 1) when λw ≤ 0.8, τb = f yw / 3
d) Plates and solid bars : A 2) when 0.8 < λw < 1.2,
where τb = 1 − 0.8 ( λ w − 0.8) f yw / 3
( )
A = cross-section area, 2
3) when λw ≥ 1.2, τb = fyw/ ( 3 )
b = overall breadth of tubular section, breadth λw
of I-section flanges, where
d = clear depth of the web between flanges, λw = Non-dimensional web slenderness ratio for
h = overall depth of the section, shear buckling stress, given by:
tf = thickness of the flange, and
f yw ( 3 τcr,e )
tw = thickness of the web.
λw =
dtf y
Vp =
3
d = web depth,
If the actual factored shear force, V in the panel designed
NOTES
using tension field approach is less than the shear
1 Panel A is designed utilizing tension field action as given in
strength, Vtf as given in 14.4.2.2(b), then the values of 14.4.2.2(b).
V − Vcr 2 Bearing stiffener is designed for compressive force due to
Hq may be reduced by the ratio bearing as given in 14.4.2.2(a).
Vtf − Vcr
3 End post is designed for horizontal shear Rtf and moment Mtf
where as given in 14.5.3.
Vtf = basic shear strength for the panel utilizing FIG. 14 E ND PANEL DESIGNED USING TENSION FIELD
tension field action as given in 14.4.2.2(b), ACTION (DOUBLE STIFFENER )
and
Vcr = critical shear strength for the panel designed 14.5.4 Panels with Openings
utilizing tension field action as given in Panels with opening of dimension greater than 10 percent
14.4.2.2(a). of the minimum panel dimension should be designed
without using tension field action as given in 14.4.2.2(b).
The adjacent panels should be designed as an end panel
as given in 14.5.1 or 14.5.2, as appropriate.
14.6 Design of Beams and Plate Girders with Solid
Webs
14.6.1 Minimum Web Thickness
The thickness of the web in a section shall satisfy the
following requirements:
14.6.1.1 Serviceability requirement
NOTES
a) when transverse stiffeners are not provided,
1 Panel A is designed utilizing tension field action as given in
14.4.2.2(b).
d
2 Panel B is designed using simple post critical method as given 1) ≤ 200 ε w (web connected to flanges
in 14.4.2.2(a). tw
3 Bearing stiffener is designed for the compressive force due
along both longitudinal edges)
to bearing plus compressive force due to the moment Mtf as
given in 14.5.3.
FIG . 12 END PANEL DESIGNED NOT USING TENSION d
2) ≤ 90ε w (web connected to flanges
FIELD ACTION tw
along one longitudinal edge only),
62 NATIONAL BUILDING CODE OF INDIA 2016
b) when only transverse stiffeners are provided a) When transverse stiffeners are not provided,
(in webs connected to flanges along both d
longitudinal edges), ≤ 345 ε 2f
tw
1) when 3d ≥ c ≥ d
b) When transverse stiffeners are provided, and
d
≤ 200εw i) when c ≥1.5 d
tw
d
2) when 0.74 d ≥ c < d ≤ 345 ε 2f
tw
c ii) when c < 1.5d
≤ 200εw
tw
d
3) when c < 0.74d ≤ 345ε f
tw
d where
≤ 270εw
tw
d = depth of the web,
4) when c > 3d, the web shall be considered
tw = thickness of the web,
as unstiffened,
c = spacing of transverse stiffener (see Fig. 12
c) when transverse stiffeners and longitudinal
and Fig. 13),
stiffeners at one level only are provided (0.2 d
from compression flange) according to 250
= yield stress ratio of flange = , and
14.7.13(a), f yf
εf
1) when 2.4d ≥ c ≥ d
fyf = yield stress of compression flange.
d
≤ 250εw 14.6.2 Sectional Properties
tw
14.6.2.1 The effective sectional area of compression
2) when 0.74 d ≤ c ≤ d
flanges shall be the gross area with deductions for
c excessive width of plates as specified for compression
≤ 250εw members [see Section 6(g)] and for open holes
tw
occurring in a plane perpendicular to the direction of
3) when c < 0.74 d stress at the section being considered (see 14.2.1.4).
d
≤ 340ε w The effective sectional area of tension flanges shall be
tw the gross sectional area with deductions for holes as
d) when a second longitudinal stiffener (located specified in 14.2.1.4.
at neutral axis is provided) The effective sectional area for parts in shear shall be
d taken as specified in 14.4.1.1.
≤ 400εw
tw 14.6.3 Flanges
where
14.6.3.1 In riveted or bolted construction, flange angles
d = depth of the web, shall form as large a part of the area of the flange as
tw = thickness of the web, practicable (preferably not less than one-third) and the
c = spacing of transverse stiffener (see number of flange plates shall be kept to a minimum.
Fig. 12 and Fig. 13), In exposed situations, where flange angles are used, at
least one plate of the top flange shall extend over the
εw = yield stress ratio of web = 250 ,
f yw full length of the girder, unless the top edge of the web
is machined flush with the flange angles. Where two or
and more flange plates are used, tacking rivets shall be
fyw = yield stress of the web. provided, if necessary to comply with the requirements
of Section 6(k).
14.6.1.2 Compression flange buckling requirement
Each flange plate shall extend beyond its theoretical
In order to avoid buckling of the compression flange cut-off point, and the extension shall contain sufficient
into the web, the web thickness shall satisfy the rivets, bolts or welds to develop in the plate, the load
following: calculated for the bending moment on the girder section
Fqd = design resistance of the intermediate Load carrying web stiffeners should be provided where
stiffeners; compressive forces applied through a flange by loads
or reactions exceed the buckling strength, Fcdw, of the
V = factored shear force adjacent to the stiffener;
unstiffened web, calculated using the following:
and
Vcr = shear buckling resistance of the web panel The effective length of the web for evaluating the
designed without using tension field action slenderness ratio is calculated as in 14.7.1.5. The area
as given in 14.4.2.2 a). of cross-section is taken as (b1+n1) tw.
Stiffeners subject to external loads and moments should where
meet the conditions for load carrying web stiffeners
b1 = width of stiff bearing on the flange
in 14.7.3. In addition they should satisfy the following
(see 14.7.1.3), and
interaction expression:
n1 = dispersion of the load through the web at 45°,
Fq − Fx F Mq to the level of half the depth of the
+ x + ≤1
Fqd Fxd M yq cross-section.
The buckling strength of this web about axis parallel to
where the web is calculated as given in 13.1.2.1, using curve c.
Fq = stiffener force given above; 14.7.4 Bearing Stiffeners
Fqd = design resistance of an intermediate web
stiffener corresponding to buckling about an Bearing stiffeners should be provided for webs where
axis parallel to the web (see 14.7.1.5); forces applied through a flange by loads or reactions
exceeding the local capacity of the web at its connection
Fx = external load or reaction at the stiffener; to the flange, Fw, given by:
Fxd = design resistance of a load carrying stiffener
corresponding to buckling about axis parallel Fw = (b1 + n2 ) tw f yw / γ m0
to the web (see 14.7.1.5);
where
Mq = moment on the stiffener due to eccentrically
applied load and transverse load, if any; and b1 = stiff bearing length (see 14.7.1.3),
Sl Section P Cmy M y M
a1 a2 + Ky + KLT z ≤ 1.0
No. Pdy M dy M dz
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) I and channel 5n ³ 1 2 P Cmy M y C M
ii) Circular tubes 2 2 + 0.6 K y + K z mz z ≤ 1.0
iii) Rectangular tubes 1.66/(1 1.13n2) £ 6 1.66/(1 1.13n2) £ 6 Pdz M dy M dz
iv) Solid rectangles 1.73 + 1.8n 3
1.73+1.8 n3
where
NOTE n = N/Nd. Cmy, Cmz = equivalent uniform moment factor as per
Table 18;
15.3.1.3 Semi-compact section P = applied axial compression under factored
load;
In the absence of high shear force (see 15.2.1), semi-
My, Mz = maximum factored applied bending
compact section design is satisfactory under combined
moments about y and z-axis of the
axial force and bending, if the maximum longitudinal
member, respectively;
stress under combined axial force and bending, f x
satisfies the following criteria: Pdy, Pdz = design strength under axial compression
as governed by buckling about minor (y)
fx ≤ fy /γm0 and major (z) axis, respectively;
For cross-section without holes, the above criteria Mdy, Mdz = design bending strength about y (minor)
reduces to, or z (major) axis considering laterally
unsupported length of the cross-section
N My M [see Section 6(h)];
+ + z ≤ 1.0
Nd M dy M dz Ky = 1+ (λy 0.2)ny ≤ 1 + 0.8 ny;
where Kz = 1+ (λz 0.2)nz ≤ 1+ 0.8 nz, and
For members with sway buckling mode, the equivalent uniform moment factor Cmy = Cmz = 0.9.
Cmy, Cmz, CmMLT shall be obtained according to the bending moment diagram between the relevant braced points
section. Connections shall be capable of transmitting shear load or when welding and fasteners are combined,
the calculated design actions. then one form of fastener shall be normally designed
to carry the total load. Nevertheless, fully tensioned
16.1.2 Where members are connected to the surface
friction grip bolts may be designed to share the load
of a web or the flange of a section, the ability of the
with welding, provided the bolts are fully tightened to
web or the flange to transfer the applied forces locally
develop necessary pretension after welding.
should be checked and where necessary, local stiffening
provided. 16.1.6 The partial safety factor in the evaluation of
design strength of connections shall be taken as given
16.1.3 Ease of fabrication and erection should be
in Table 5.
considered in the design of connections. Attention
should be paid to clearances necessary for field 16.2 Location Details of Fasteners
erection, tolerances, tightening of fasteners, welding
procedures, subsequent inspection, surface treatment 16.2.1 Clearances for Holes for Fasteners
and maintenance. Bolts may be located in standard size, over size, short
16.1.4 The ductility of steel assists the distribution of slotted or long slotted hole, as follows.
forces generated within a joint. Effects of residual a) Standard clearance hole Except where
stresses and stresses due to tightening of fasteners and fitted bolts, bolts in low-clearance or oversize
normal tolerances of fit-up need not therefore be holes are specified, the diameter of standard
considered in connection design, provided ductile clearance holes for fasteners shall be as given
behaviour is ensured. in Table 19.
16.1.5 In general, use of different forms of fasteners b) Oversize hole Holes of size larger than the
to transfer the same force shall be avoided. However, standard clearance holes, as given in Table 19
when different forms of fasteners are used to carry a may be used in slip resistant connections and
16.3.1.2 Where it can be shown that the threads do 16.3.3.2 Large grip lengths
not occur in the shear plane, Ae may be taken as the When the grip length, lg (equal to the total thickness of
cross-section area, As at the shank. the connected plates) exceeds 5 times the diameter, d
16.3.1.3 In the calculation of thread length, allowance of the bolts, the design shear capacity shall be reduced
should be made for tolerance and thread run off. by a factor blg, given by:
16.3.2 A bolt subjected to a factored shear force (Vsb) βlg = 8d /(3d + lg) = 8/(3 + lg/d)
shall satisfy the condition βlg shall not be more than βlj given in 16.3.3.1. The
Vsb ≤ Vdb grip length, lg shall in no case be greater than 8d.
where Vdb is the design strength of the bolt, taken as 16.3.3.3 Packing plates
the smaller of the value as governed by shear, Vdsb The design shear capacity of bolts carrying shear
(see 16.3.3) and bearing, Vdpb (see 16.3.4). through a packing plate in excess of 6 mm shall be
16.3.3 Shear Capacity of Bolt decreased by a factor, βpk given by:
The design strength of the bolt, Vdsb as governed by βpk = (1 0.012 5tpk)
shear strength is given by: where
Vdsb = Vnsb / γmb tpk = thickness of the thicker packing, in mm.
e, p = end and pitch distances of the fastener along Vsb = factored shear force acting on the bolt,
bearing direction; Vdb = design shear capacity (see 16.3.2),
d0 = diameter of the hole; Tb = factored tensile force acting on the bolt, and
fub, fu = ultimate tensile stress of the bolt and the Tdb = design tension capacity (see 16.3.5).
ultimate tensile stress of the plate,
respectively; 16.4 Friction Grip Type Bolting
d = nominal diameter of the bolt; and 16.4.1 In friction grip type bolting, initial pretension
t = summation of the thicknesses of the in bolt (usually high strength) develops clamping force
connected plates experiencing bearing stress at the interfaces of elements being joined. The frictional
in the same direction, or if the bolts are resistance to slip between the plate surfaces subjected
countersunk, the thickness of the plate minus to clamping force opposes slip due to externally applied
one half of the depth of countersinking. shear. Friction grip type bolts and nuts shall conform
to the accepted standard [6-6(37)]. Their installation
The bearing resistance (in the direction normal to the procedures shall conform to good practice [6-6(15)].
slots in slotted holes) of bolts in holes other than
standard clearance holes may be reduced by multiplying 16.4.2 Where slip between bolted plates cannot be
the bearing resistance obtained as above, Vnpb, by the tolerated at working loads/strength limit states loads
factors given below: (slip critical connections), the requirements of 16.4.3
shall be satisfied at service and strength limit states
a) Over size and short slotted holes : 0.7, and loads, respectively. However, the requirements
b) Long slotted holes : 0.5. of 16.4.4 shall be satisfied by all connections at the
NOTE The block shear of the edge distance due to bearing strength limit states.
force may be checked as given in 12.4.
16.4.3 Slip Resistance
16.3.5 Tension Capacity
Design for friction type bolting, where slip resistance
A bolt subjected to a factored tensile force, Tb shall is required at factored design force Vsf, shall satisfy the
satisfy, following:
Tb ≤ Tdb Vsf ≤ Vdsf
where where
Tdb = Tnb / γmb Vdsf = Vnsf /γmf
Tnb = nominal tensile capacity of the bolt, Vnsf = nominal shear capacity of a bolt as governed
calculated as: by slip for friction type connection,
Tnb = 0.90 fub An < fyb Asb (γmb /γm0) calculated as follows:
where Vnsf = µf ne Kh Fo
fub = ultimate tensile stress of the bolt, where
fyb = yield stress of the bolt, µf = coefficient of friction (slip factor) as
An = net tensile stress area as specified in the specified in Table 20 (µf ≤ 0.55);
16.5.8.3 Where the size specified for a fillet weld is 16.5.10.1.1 When subjected to a combination of normal
such that the parent metal will not project beyond the and shear stress, the equivalent stress fe shall satisfy
weld, no melting of the outer cover or covers shall be the following:
allowed to occur to such an extent as to reduce the throat
fu
thickness (see Fig. 18) fe = f a 2 + 3q 2 ≤
3γ mw
16.5.8.4 When fillet welds are applied to the edges of
a plate or section in members subject to dynamic where
loading, the fillet weld shall be of full size with its leg fa = normal stresses, compression or tension, due
length equal to the thickness of the plate or section, to axial force or bending moment
with the limitations specified in 16.5.8.3. (see 16.5.9), and
16.5.8.5 End fillet weld, normal to the direction of q = shear stress due to shear force or tension
force shall be of unequal size with a throat thickness (see 16.5.9).
not less than 0.5t, where t is the thickness of the part,
16.5.10.1.2 Check for the combination of stresses need
as shown in Fig. 19. The difference in thickness of the
not be done for,
welds shall be negotiated at a uniform slope.
a) side fillet welds joining cover plates and flange
16.5.9 Stresses Due to Individual Forces
plates; and
When subjected to either compressive or tensile or b) fillet welds where sum of normal and shear
shear force alone, the stress in the weld is given by: stresses does not exceed fwd (see 16.5.7.1.1).
P 16.5.10.2 Butt welds
fa or q =
t t lw 16.5.10.2.1 Check for the combination of stresses in
where butt welds need not be carried out provided that,
fa = calculated normal stress due to axial force, a) butt welds are axially loaded, and
in N/mm2; b) in single and double bevel welds the sum of
q = shear stress, in N/mm2; normal and shear stresses does not exceed the
design normal stress, and the shear stress does
P = force transmitted (axial force N or the shear not exceed 50 percent of the design shear
force Q); stress.
FIG . 18 FULL SIZE FILLET WELD APPLIED TO THE EDGE OF A PLATE OR SECTION
fsb, ftb = actual shear and tensile stresses, 18.3 Response Reduction Factor
respectively; and
For structures designed and detailed as per the provision
f asb , fatb = permissible shear and tensile stresses of this section, the response reduction factors specified
respectively. in Table 23 may be used in conjunction with the
17.6.3 Stresses in Welds provision in 5 of Part 6 Structural Design, Section 1
Loads, Forces and Effects of the Code for calculating
17.6.3.1 Actual stresses in the throat area of fillet welds the design earthquake forces.
shall be less than or equal to permissible stresses, faw,
as given below: Table 23 Response Reduction Factor, R, for
faw = 0.4 fy Building System
(Clause 18.3)
17.6.3.2 Actual stresses in the butt welds shall be less
than the permissible stress as governed by the parent Sl No. Lateral Load Resisting System R
metal welded together. (1) (2) (3)
i) Braced frame systems:
SECTION 6(n) DESIGN AND DETAILING FOR a) Ordinary concentrically braced frame (OCBF) 4.0
EARTHQUAKE LOADS b) Special concentrically braced frame (SCBF) 4.5
c) Ordinary eccentrically braced frame (OEBF) 4.5
18 DESIGN AND DETAILING FOR d) Special eccentrically braced frame (SEBF) 5.0
EARTHQUAKE LOADS ii) Moment frame system:
a) Ordinary moment resisting frame (OMRF) 4.0
b) Special moment resisting frame (SMRF) 5.0
18.1 General iii) Non-ductile frames 1.5
Steel frames shall be so designed and detailed as to
give them adequate strength, stability and ductility to The braced and moment resisting frames can be
resist severe earthquakes in all zones classified in 5 of designed as non-ductile frames, if their overall height
Part 6 Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and to overall width ratio does not exceed 1.0, such as in
Effects of the Code without collapse. Ductility industrial buildings. Such frames need not meet the
requirements in 18.4 to 18.11 and 18.13 need not be ductility requirements of other types of frames as
satisfied in case of non-ductile frames as defined specified in 18.4 to 18.11 and 18.13.
in 18.12. Frames, which form a part of the gravity load
resisting system but are not intended to resist the lateral 18.4 Connections, Joints and Fasteners
earthquake loads, need not satisfy the requirements of
18.4.1 All bolts used in critical zones of frames
this section, provided they can accommodate the
designed to resist earthquake loads shall be fully
resulting deformation without premature failure.
tensioned High Strength Friction Grip (HSFG) bolts
18.2 Load and Load Combinations or turned and fitted bolts. Critical zones of frames are
zones of plastic hinges of moment resisting frames and
18.2.1 Earthquake loads shall be calculated as per 5 of beam to column as well as bracing end connections of
Part 6 Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and braced frames. The plastic hinge zones shall be taken
Effects of the Code, except that the reduction factors as a distance equal to 2 times the depth of the member
recommended in 18.3 may be used. from the section of maximum bending moment.
18.2.2 In the limit state design of frames resisting 18.4.2 All weld connections used in the critical zones
earthquake loads, the load combinations shall conform of frames designed to resist earthquake loads shall be
to Table 4. complete penetration butt welds, except in column
18.2.3 In addition the following load combination shall splices, which shall conform to 18.5.2.
be considered as required in 18.5.1.1, 18.7.3.1 18.4.3 Bolted joints shall be designed not to share load
and 18.11.2.2: in combination with welds on the same faying surface.
18.5.2.3 The bolted column splice shall meet the 18.7.2.4 Bracing cross-section can be plastic, compact
requirements of 18.4 and 18.5.1. or semi-compact, but not slender, as defined in 9.7.2.
18.7.2.5 For all built-up braces, the spacing of tack
18.6 Storey Drift
fasteners shall be such that the unfavourable slenderness
The storey drift limits shall conform to 5 of Part 6 ratio of individual element, between such fasteners,
Structural Design, Section 1 Loads, Forces and Effects shall not exceed 0.4 times the governing slenderness
of the Code. The deformation compatibility of members ratio of the brace itself. Bolted connections shall be
not designed to resist seismic lateral load shall also avoided within the middle one-fourth of the clear brace
length (0.25 times the length in the middle) in such
built-up braces.
18.7.2.6 The bracing members shall be designed so
that gross area yielding (see 12.2) and not the net area
rupture (see 12.3) would govern the design tensile
strength.
18.7.3 Bracing Connections
18.7.3.1 End connections in bracings shall be designed
to withstand the minimum of the following:
FIG. 20 PARTIAL PENETRATION GROOVE WELD IN a) A tensile force in the bracing equal to 1.2 fy Ag;
COLUMN SPLICE
18.10.2.4 The rigid and semi-rigid connections should t = thickness of column web or doubler plate,
be designed to withstand a shear resulting from the load dp = panel-zone depth between continuity plates
combination 1.2DL + 0.5IL plus the shear (see Fig. 21), and
corresponding to the design moment defined bp = panel-zone width between column flanges.
in 18.10.2.1 and 18.10.2.2, respectively.
18.10.2.5 In rigid fully welded connections, continuity
plates [for tension stiffeners, see 14.7.1.1(f)] of
thickness equal to or greater than the thickness of the
beam flange shall be provided and welded to the column
flanges and web.
NOTE — The arrow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress range is to be
calculated on a plane normal to the arrow.
27 (28)
30
(t < 8 mm)
27
(t < 8 mm)
NOTE ¯ The arrow indicates the location and direction of the stresses acting in the basic material for which the stress range is to be
calculated on a plane normal to the arrow.
The general environment, to which a steel structure is a) Controlling the electrode potential,
exposed during its working life is classified into five b) Inhibitors, and
levels of severity, as given in Table 28. c) Inorganic/metal coatings or organic/paint
systems.
21.2.2.2 Abrasion
21.2.4 Surface Protection
Specialist literature may be referred for durability of
surfaces exposed to abrasive action as in machinery, 21.2.4.1 In the case of mild exposure, a coat of primer
conveyor belt support system, storage bins for grains after removal of any loose mill scale may be adequate.
or aggregates. As the exposure condition becomes more critical, more
elaborate surface preparations and coatings become
21.2.2.3 Exposure to sulphate attack necessary. In case of extreme environmental
Appropriate coatings may be used when surfaces of classification, protection shall be as per specialist
structural steel are exposed to concentration of literature. Table 29 gives guidance to protection of
sulphates (SO3) in soil, ground water, etc. steelwork for different desired lives.
When exposed to very high sulphate concentrations of 21.2.4.2 Steel surfaces shall be provided with at least
more than 2 percent in soil and 5 percent in water, some one coat of primer immediately after its surface
form of lining such as polyethylene, polychloroprene preparation, such as by sand blasting to remove all mill
sheet or surface coating based on asphalt, chlorinated scale and rust and to expose the steel.
rubber, epoxy or polymethane material should be used 21.2.4.3 Steel without protective coating shall not be
to completely avoid access of the solution to the steel stored for long duration in outdoor environment.
surface.
Table 29(b) (i) Protection Guide for Steel Work Application Specification for Different Coating
System (Shop Applied Treatments)
(Clause 21.2.4.1)
ii) Pre-fabrication Zinc phosphate epoxy, 2 pack zinc- - 2 pack zinc-rich - Ethyl zinc
primer 20 mm rich epoxy, epoxy, silicate,
20 mm 20 mm 20 mm
iii) Post fabrication High-build zinc phosphate 2 pack zinc- Hot dip 2 pack zinc-rich Sprayed zinc or Ethyl zinc
primer modified alkyd, rich epoxy, galvanized, epoxy, sprayed silicate,
60 mm 20 mm 85 mm 25 mm aluminium 60 mm
iv) Intermediate - High-build 2 pack epoxy Sealer Chlorinated
coat zinc phosphate micaceous iron rubber alkyd,
25 mm oxide 35 mm
v) Top coat - - 2 pack epoxy Sealer -
micaceous iron
oxide, 85 mm
22.1.2 For unprotected steel members and connections, the steel (Tl) in accordance with 22.5; and
the exposed surface area to mass ratio (ksm) shall be 2) determining the PSA as the time (t) (in
less than or equal to that required to give a PSA equal min) from the start of the test to the time
to the required FRL. at which the limiting steel temperature is
attained, in accordance with 22.6 for
22.2 Fire Resistance Level
protected members and 22.7 for
The required FRL shall be as prescribed in Part 4 Fire unprotected members.
and Life Safety of the Code as appropriate or in b) By direct application of a single test in
building specifications or as required by the user or accordance with 22.8; or
the city ordinance. The FRL specified in terms of the
c) By calculation of the temperature of the steel
duration (in min) of standard fire load without collapse
member by using a rational method of analysis
depends upon;
confirmed by test data or by methods available
a) the purpose for which structure is used; and in specialist literature.
b) the time taken to evacuate in case of fire. 22.4 Variation of Mechanical Properties of Steel
with Temperature
22.3 Period of Structural Adequacy (PSA)
22.4.1 Variation of Yield Stress with Temperature
22.3.1 The calculation of PSA involves: The influence of temperature on the yield stress of steel
a) Calculation of the strength of the element as a shall be taken as follows for structures of mild steels
function of temperature of the element and the and high strength low alloy steels:
determination of limiting temperature; f y (T ) 905 − T
= ≤ 1.0
b) Calculation of the thermal response of the f y ( 20 ) 690
element, that is calculation of the variation of where,
the temperature of the element or the parts of
the element with time, when exposed to fire; fy(T) = yield stress of steel at T °C,
and fy(20) = yield stress of steel at 20°C (room
temperature), and
c) Determination of PSA at which the
temperature of the element or parts of the T = temperature of the steel, in °C.
element reaches the limiting temperature.
This relationship is shown by Curve 1 in Fig. 24.
22.3.2 Determination of Period of Structural Adequacy
For temperature less than 215°C no reduction in the
The period of structural adequacy (PSA) shall be yield stress need to be considered.
determined using one of the following methods:
22.4.2 Variation of Modulus of Elasticity with
a) By calculation: Temperature
Sl Nature of Construction and Materials Minimum Dimensions (in mm), Excluding Any Finish,
No. for a Fire Resistance of
1h 1 ½h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
i) Hollow protection (without an air cavity over the flanges):
a) Metal lathing with trowelled lightweight aggregate gypsum
plaster 1) 13 15 20 32
building and adequacy of the structural repairs can be properties of the material below the values used in
done by the fire resistance rating for encased steel design. Local application of pressure at room or at
column and beam (see Table 31 and Table 32). elevated temperature or other thermal means may be
used for straightening, provided the above is satisfied.
SECTION 6(t) FABRICATION AND ERECTION
23.2.2 Clearances
23 FABRICATION AND ERECTION The erection clearance for cleated ends of members,
connecting steel to steel should preferably be not greater
23.1 General
than 2.0 mm at each end. The erection clearance at ends
Tolerances for fabrication of steel structures shall of beams without web cleats should be not more than
conform to the accepted standard [6-6(41)]. Tolerances 3 mm at each end. Where for practical reasons, greater
for erection of steel structures shall conform to the clearance is necessary, suitably designed seating should
accepted standard [6-6(42)]. For general guidance on be provided.
fabrication by welding, reference may be made to good 23.2.2.1 The holes for bolts may be made as given in
practice [6-6(43)]. Table 19, unless otherwise specified by the engineer.
23.2 Fabrication Procedures The hole diameter in base plates shall not exceed the
anchor bolt diameter by more than 6 mm.
23.2.1 Straightening
23.2.2.2 In friction type of connection clearance may
Material shall be straightened or formed to the specified be maintained, unless specified otherwise in the design
configuration by methods that will not reduce the document.
Sl Nature of Construction and Materials Minimum Thickness (in mm) of Protection for
No. a Fire Resistance of
½h 1h 1½ h 2h 3h 4h
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
i) Hollow protection (without an air cavity beneath the lower flanges):
a) Metal lathing with trowelled lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster 1) 13 13 15 20 25
b) Plasterboard with 1.6 mm wire binding at 100 mm pitch, finished with
lightweight aggregate gypsum plaster less than the thickness specified 2):
1) 9.5 mm plaster board 10 10 15
2) 19 mm plaster board 10 10 13 20
c) Asbestos insulating boards, thickness of board:
1) Single thickness of board, with 6 mm cover fillets at transverse joints 19 25
2) Two layers, of total thickness 38 50
ii) Hollow protection (with an air cavity below the lower flange):
Asbestos insulating board screwed to 25 mm asbestos battens 9 12
iii) Solid protections:
a) Concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered):
1) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced 3) 25 25 25 25 50 75
2) Concrete assumed to be load bearing 50 50 50 50 75 75
b) Lightweight concrete, not leaner than 1:2:4 mix (unplastered) 4) 25 25 25 25 40 60
concrete protection, the spacing of that reinforcement shall not exceed 200 mm in any direction.
4) Concrete not assumed to be load bearing, reinforced.
Shearing of items over 16 mm thick to be galvanized 23.2.4.1 Holes through more than one thickness of
and subject to tensile force or bending moment shall material for members, such as compound stanchion and
not be carried out, unless the item is stress relieved girder flanges, shall be where possible, drilled after the
subsequently. members are assembled and tightly clamped or bolted
together. A round hole for a bolt shall either be machine
The use of sheared edges in the tension area shall be flame cut, or drilled full size, or sub-punched 3 mm
avoided in location subject to plastic hinge rotation at undersize and reamed to size or punched full size.
factored loading.
Hand flame cutting of a bolt hole shall not be permitted
23.2.3.2 Thermal cutting
except as a site rectification measure for holes in
Gas cutting of high tensile steel by mechanically column base plates.
23.4.3 Wherever practicable, machine riveting shall 23.7.2 Where sufficient gussets and rivets or welds are
be carried out by using machines of the steady pressure provided to transmit the entire loading [see Section
type. 6(d)], the column ends need not be machined.
23.4.4 All loose, burned or otherwise defective rivets 23.7.3 Slab Bases and Caps
shall be cut out and replaced before the structure is Slab bases and slab caps, except when cut from material
loaded, and special care shall be taken to inspect all with true surfaces, shall be accurately machined over
single riveted connections. the bearing surfaces and shall be in effective contact
23.4.5 Special care shall be taken in heating and driving with the end of the stanchion, the bearing face which is
long rivets. to be grouted to fit tightly at both top and bottom, unless
welds are provided to transmit the entire column face.
23.5 Bolting
23.7.4 To facilitate grouting, sufficient gap shall be left
23.5.1 In all cases where the full bearing area of the between the base plates and top of pedestal and holes
bolt is to be developed, the bolt shall be provided with shall be provided where necessary in stanchion bases
a washer of sufficient thickness under the nut to avoid for the escape of air.
any threaded portion of the bolt being within the
thickness or the parts bolted together, unless accounted 23.8 Painting
for in design. 23.8.1 Painting shall be done in accordance with the
23.5.2 Pre-tensioned bolts shall be subjected to initial good practices [6-6(47)].
tension (the proof stress) by an appropriate pre- 23.8.2 All surfaces, which are to be painted, oiled or
calibrated method. otherwise treated, shall be dry and thoroughly cleaned
to remove all loose scale and loose rust.
23.6 Welding
23.8.3 Shop contact surfaces need not be painted unless
23.6.1 Welding shall be in accordance with good
specified. If so specified, they shall be brought together
practices [6-6(45)], as appropriate.
while the paint is still wet.
23.6.2 For welding of any particular type of joint,
23.8.4 Surfaces not in contact, but inaccessible after
welders shall give evidence acceptable to the
shop assembly, shall receive the full specified protective
purchaser of having satisfactorily completed
treatment before assembly. This does not apply to the
appropriate tests as prescribed in good practices
interior of sealed hollow sections.
[6-6(46)], as relevant.
23.8.5 Chequered plates shall be painted but the details
23.6.3 Assembly and welding shall be carried out in
of painting shall be specified by the purchaser.
such a way to minimise distortion and residual stress
and that the final dimensions are within appropriate 23.8.6 In case of surfaces to be welded, the steel shall
tolerances. not be painted or metal coated within a suitable distance
Each piece of steel work shall be distinctly marked 23.12.5 Defects, which may appear during fabrication,
before dispatch, in accordance with a marking diagram shall be made good with the consent of and according
and shall bear such other marks as will facilitate to the procedure laid down by the inspecting authority.
erection. 23.12.6 All gauges and templates necessary to satisfy
the inspection authority shall be supplied by the
23.10 Shop Erection
manufacturer. The inspecting authority may, at his
23.10.1 The steel work shall be temporarily shop discretion, check the test results obtained at the
erected complete or as arranged with the inspection manufacturers works by independent testing at outside
agency so that accuracy of fit may be checked before laboratory, and should the material so tested be found
dispatch. The parts shall be shop assembled with to be unsatisfactory, the cost of such tests shall be borne
sufficient numbers of parallel drifts to bring and keep by the manufacturer, and if found satisfactory, the cost
the parts in place. shall be borne by the purchaser.
23.10.2 In the case of parts drilled or punched, through 23.13 Site Erection
steel jigs with bushes resulting in all similar parts being
interchangeable, the steelwork may be shop erected in 23.13.1 Plant and Equipment
such position as arranged with the inspection agency. The suitability and capacity of all plant and equipment
23.10.3 In case of shop fabrication using numerically used for erection shall be to the satisfaction of the
controlled machine data generated by computer engineer.
software (like CAD), the shop erection may be 23.13.2 Storing and Handling
dispensed with at the discretion of the inspector.
All structural steel should be so stored and handled at
23.11 Packing the site that the members are not subjected to excessive
stresses and damage by corrosion due to exposure to
All projecting plates or bars and all ends of members
environment.
at joints shall be stiffened, all straight bars and plates
shall be bundled, all screwed ends and machined 23.13.3 Setting Out
surfaces shall be suitably packed and all rivets, bolts,
The positioning and levelling of all steelwork, the
nuts, washers and small and loose parts shall be packed
plumbing of stanchions and the placing of every part
separately in cases, so as to prevent damage or
of the structure with accuracy shall be in accordance
distortion during transit.
with the approved drawings and to the satisfaction of
23.12 Inspection and Testing the engineer in accordance with the deviation permitted
below.
23.12.1 The inspecting authority shall have free access
at all reasonable times to those parts of the 23.13.3.1 Erection tolerances
manufacturers works which are concerned with the Unloaded steel structure, as erected, shall satisfy the
fabrication of the steelwork and shall be afforded all criteria specified in Table 33 within the specified
reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the tolerance limits.
fabrication is being undertaken in accordance with the
provisions of this section. Each criterion given in the table shall be considered as
a separate requirement, to be satisfied independent of
23.12.2 Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall any other tolerance criteria. The erection tolerances
be made at the place of manufacture prior to dispatch specified in Table 33 apply to the following reference
and shall be conducted so as not to interfere points:
ANNEX B
[Clauses 11.2.2.2 (b) and 11.6.2]
DESIGN AGAINST FLOOR VIBRATION
B-1 GENERAL less than 8 Hz in the case of floors supporting rhythmic
activity and 5 Hz in the case of floors supporting normal
Floor with longer spans of lighter construction and less
human activity should be avoided.
inherent damping are vulnerable to vibrations under
normal human activity. Natural frequency of the floor B-3 FLOOR FREQUENCY
system corresponding to the lowest mode of vibration,
damping characteristics, are important characteristics The fundamental natural frequency can be estimated
in floor vibration. Open web steel joists (trusses) or by assuming full composite action, even in non-
steel beams on the concrete deck may experience composite construction. This frequency, f1 for a simply
walking vibration problem. Fatigue, overloading of supported one way system is given by:
floor systems and vibrations due to rhythmic activities
such as aerobic or dance classes are not within the scope f1 = 156 EI T / WL4
of this annex.
where
B-2 ANNOYANCE CRITERIA E = modulus of elasticity of steel, in MPa;
In the frequency range of 2 to 8 Hz in which people are IT = transformed moment of inertia of the one
most sensitive to vibration, the threshold level way system (in terms of equivalent steel)
corresponds approximately to 0.5 percent g, where g assuming the concrete flange of width equal
is the acceleration due to gravity. Continuous vibration to the spacing of the beam to be effective, in
is generally more annoying than decaying vibration due mm4;
to damping. Floor systems with the natural frequency L = span length, in mm; and
1 1 1 ao/g = 600 fr /W
2
= +
fr f12 f2 2
where
ANNEX C
(Clause 13.2.2)
DETERMINATION OF EFFECTIVE LENGTH OF COLUMNS
where
Pe = elastic buckling load, and
P = applied load.
Sl No. Degree of End Restraint Sketch Effective Length Coefficients Column Parameters for
all Cases
(1) (2) (3) (4)
i) Effectively held in position and K12 + K11 ( a - 1)
2 2
restrained against rotation at K 1 =
both ends a
K1
K2 = £3
C1
where
K12 and K11 are to be taken as per
Table 37
iii) Effectively held in position and K1 to be taken as per Table 39 Effective length of bottom
restrained against rotation at K =
K
1 £3 part of column in plane of
bottom end, and top end held 2 C
1 stepping = K1L1
against rotation but not held in
position
iv) Effectively held in position and K1 to be taken as per Effective length of top part
restrained against rotation at Table 40 of column in plane of
bottom end, and top end neither K2 =
K1
£3
stepping = K2L2
held against rotation nor held C1
in position
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
Coefficient K12 (P1 = 0)
0.05 0.74 0.94 1.38 1.60 1.87 2.07 2.23 2.39 2.52 2.67 3.03 3.44 3.85 4.34 4.77
0.1 0.67 0.76 1.00 1.20 1.42 1.61 1.78 1.92 2.04 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.86 3.18 3.41
0.2 0.64 0.70 0.79 0.93 1.07 1.23 1.41 1.50 1.60 1.72 1.92 2.11 2.28 2.45 2.64
0.3 0.62 0.68 0.74 0.85 0.95 1.06 1.18 1.28 1.39 1.48 1.67 1.82 1.96 2.12 2.20
0.4 0.60 0.66 0.71 0.77 0.82 0.93 0.99 1.08 1.17 1.23 1.39 1.53 1.66 1.79 1.92
0.5 0.59 0.65 0.70 0.77 0.82 0.93 0.99 1.08 1.17 1.23 1.39 1.53 1.66 1.79 1.92
1.0 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.75 0.80 0.85 0.90 0.95 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50
Coefficient K11 (P2 = 0)
0.05 0.65 0.67 0.71 0.85 1.01 1.17 1.31 1.41 1.50 1.57 1.67 1.74 1.78 1.82 1.86
0.1 0.64 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.78 0.92 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.33 1.45 1.55 1.62 1.68 1.71
0.2 0.62 0.64 0.65 0.65 0.66 0.73 0.83 0.92 1.01 1.09 1.23 1.33 1.41 1.48 1.54
0.3 0.60 0.63 0.64 0.65 0.66 0.67 0.73 0.81 0.89 0.94 1.09 1.20 1.28 1.35 1.41
0.4 0.58 0.63 0.63 0.64 0.64 0.66 0.68 0.75 0.82 0.88 1.01 1.10 1.19 1.26 1.32
0.5 0.57 0.61 0.63 0.64 0.64 0.65 0.68 0.72 0.77 0.83 0.94 1.04 1.12 1.19 1.25
1.0 0.55 0.58 0.60 0.61 0.62 0.63 0.65 0.67 0.70 0.73 0.80 0.88 0.93 1.01 1.05
NOTE Intermediate value may be obtained by interpolation
Table 38 Coefficients of Effective Lengths K12 and K11 for Columns with Both Ends Effectively Held in
Position and Restrained Against Rotation at Bottom End Only
(Table 36)
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
Coefficient K12 (P1 = 0)
0.05 0.97 1.66 2.10 2.43 2.72 2.92 3.083.24 3.48 3.73 4.22 4.85 5.36 6.00 6.58
0.1 0.83 1.21 1.57 1.95 2.14 2.33 2.462.60 2.76 2.91 3.28 3.61 4.03 4.43 4.85
0.3 0.78 0.90 1.09 1.27 1.44 1.60 1.741.86 1.98 2.11 2.35 2.51 2.76 2.99 3.25
0.5 0.78 0.86 0.99 1.10 1.22 1.35 1.471.57 1.67 1.76 1.96 2.15 2.34 2.50 2.76
1.0 0.78 0.85 0.92 0.99 1.06 1.13 1.201.27 1.34 1.41 1.54 1.68 1.82 1.97 2.10
Coefficient K11 (P2 = 0)
0.05 0.67 0.67 0.82 1.16 1.35 1.48 1.58 1.65 1.69 1.74 1.81 1.84 1.86 1.88 1.90
0.1 0.67 0.67 0.73 0.93 1.11 1.25 1.36 1.45 1.52 1.57 1.66 1.72 1.77 1.80 1.82
0.3 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.71 0.80 0.90 0.99 1.08 1.15 1.22 1.33 1.41 1.48 1.54 1.59
0.5 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.69 0.73 0.81 0.87 0.94 1.01 1.07 1.17 1.26 1.33 1.39 1.44
1.0 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.68 0.71 0.74 0.78 0.82 0.87 0.91 0.99 1.07 1.13 1.19 1.24
Table 39 Coefficients of Effective Lengths K1 for Columns Effectively Held in Position and Restrained
Against Rotation at Bottom End and Top End Held Against Rotation but not Held in Position
(Table 36)
C1 Coefficients K1 for I2 / I1 Equal to
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
0 2.0 1.8 1.7 1.67 1.6 1.55 1.50 1.4 1.43 1.4 1.37 1.3 1.1 1.10 1.0
0.5 2.0 1.9 1.8 1.74 1.6 1.65 1.61 1.5 1.55 1.5
1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.00 2.0 2.00
1.5 2.0 2.2 2.3 2.48
2.0 2.0 2.6 2.9
2.5 2.5 3.1 3.5
3.0 3.0 3.7 4.1
NOTE Intermediate value may be obtained by interpolation
0.1 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.5 5.0 10 20
0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
0.5 2.0 2.14 2.24 2.36 2.47 2.57 2.67 2.76 2.85 2.94 3.02
1.0 2.0 2.73 3.13 3.44 3.74 4.00
1.5 3.0 3.77 4.35 4.86
2.0 4.0 4.90 5.67
2.5 5.0 6.08 7.00
3.0 6.0 7.25 -
ANNEX D
(Clause 14.2.2.1)
ELASTIC LATERAL TORSIONAL BUCKLING
D-1 ELASTIC CRITICAL MOMENT where
D-1.1 General Iy, Iw, It = moment of inertia about the minor axis,
warping constant and St.Venants
The elastic critical moment is affected by the following: torsion constant of the cross-section,
a) Moment gradient in the unsupported length, respectively (see Annex G for properties
b) Boundary conditions at the lateral support of sections);
points, G = modulus of rigidity; and
c) Non-symmetric and non-prismatic nature of LLT = effective length against lateral torsional
the member, and buckling (see 14.3).
d) Location of transverse load with respect to This equation in simplified form for I-section has been
shear centre. presented in 14.2.2.1.
The boundary conditions at the lateral supports have While the simplified equation is generally on the safe
two components: side, there are many situations where this may be very
1) Torsional restraint where the cross-section conservative. More accurate calculation of the elastic
is prevented from rotation about the shear critical moment for general case of unsymmetrical
centre, and sections, loading away from shear centre and beams
2) Warping restraint where the flanges are with moment gradient can be obtained from specialist
prevented from rotating in their own plane literature, by using an appropriate computer program
about an axis perpendicular to the flange. or equations given below.
The elastic critical moment corresponding to lateral D-1.2 Elastic Critical Moment of a Section
torsional buckling of a doubly symmetric prismatic beam Symmetrical About Minor Axis
subjected to uniform moment in the unsupported length In case of a beam which is symmetrical only about the
and torsionally restraining lateral supports is given by: minor axis, and bending about major axis, the elastic
0.5 critical moment for lateral torsional buckling is given
π 2 EI y Iw +
GI t ( L ) 2
M cr = LT by the general equation below,
( LLT ) 2 I
y π 2E I
y
c y − c y
yj = 0.8 ( 2βf 1) hy /2.0 (when βf > 0.5)
2 g 3 j
yj = 1.0 ( 2βf 1) hy /2.0 (when βf ≤ 0.5)
b) Lipped flanges:
where
c1, c2, c3 = factors depending upon the loading and end yj = 0.8 (2βf 1)(1+ hL/h)hy/2 (when βf > 0.5)
restraint conditions (see Table 42); yj = (2βf 1) (1+ hL/h) hy/2 (when βf ≤ 0.5)
K = effective length factors of the unsupported where
length accounting for boundary conditions
hL = height of the lip,
at the end lateral supports. The effective
length factor K varies from 0.5 for complete h = overall height of the section,
restraint against rotation about weak axis hy = distance between shear centre of the two
to 1.0 for free rotate about weak axis, with flanges of the cross-section, and
0.7 for the case of one end fixed and other βf = Ifc/(Ifc + Ift) where Ifc, Ift are the moment of
end free. It is analogous to the effective inertia of the compression and tension
length factors for compression members flanges, respectively, about the minor axis
with end rotational restraint; of the entire section.
Kw = warping restraint factor. Unless special It = St. Venants Torsion constant, given by:
provisions to restrain warping of the section
at the end lateral supports are made, Kw 3 (for open section)
I t = ∑ bi ti / 3
should be taken as 1.0;
yg = distance between the point of application 2
= 4 Ae / ∑ (b / t ) (for hollow section)
of the load and the shear centre of the cross-
section and is positive when the load is where
acting towards the shear centre from the Ae = area enclosed by the section, and
point of application; b, t = breadth and thickness of the elements of the
yj
2
= ys − 0.5 ∫ A ( z 2 + y 2 ) ydA I z section, respectively.
Iw = The warping constant, given by:
ys = coordinate of the shear centre with respect
(1β f ) β f I y h y 2 (for I-sections mono-
to centroid, positive when the shear centre
symmetric about weak
is on the compression side of the centroid;
axis)
and
y, z = coordinates of the elemental area with = 0 (for angle, Tee, narrow rectangle section
respect to centroid of the section. and approximately for hollow sections)